Page 12709
Page 824
Wiring Diagram
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 7053
9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically.
Page 380
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 11402
6. Touch "A60" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on
"VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See:
Application and ID
7. Touch "WRITE CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen.
8. Touch "YES".
For canceling, touch "NO".
9. Set by touching selection on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen based on the following ITEM
LIST.
Do not apply MODE3 or MODE4.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See:
Application and ID
10. Touch "CHNG SETTING" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
CAUTION: Make sure to touch "CHNG SETTING" even if the indicated configuration of new BCM
is same as the desirable configuration. If
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Power Distribution Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
CONSULT-II Basic Operation
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT- II CONVERTER to the data
link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
- If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed refer to "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit".
Page 4583
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 8689
31. Snap loose the armrest. Use a plastic trim tool.
32. Remove the 3 bolts shown in Figure C40.
33. Remove the rear door panel.
^ Use a plastic trim tool.
Page 2638
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install Filter Kit (2004-2006 Titan ONLY)
1. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Note position of yellow marks.
2. Position mounting bracket onto frame as shown, hooking bracket tab onto brake hose bracket.
Attach bracket to frame with the clamp supplied in the kit.
Page 13921
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 8956
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 14261
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic
Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Page 12405
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 9294
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Seat Belt: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Classification: RS01-001B
Reference: NTB01-005B
Date: November 12, 2009
"D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION
This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s).
ACTION
Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to:
^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings.
^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3687
WARNING:
Be careful of sharp edges after cutting off the excess band clamp.
7. After band clamp(s) installation, road test the vehicle to verify the repair.
Page 5509
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 682
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 5906
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Locations
SRS Components Parts Location
Page 2407
Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Steps
2 - 4)
Page 4733
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use
Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036.
1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM.
a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other
damage.
Page 13618
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 13695
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 8973
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 597
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Locations
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 5175
Case 11
Case 12
Page 13889
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8415
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 13411
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 1026
Page 9837
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 13665
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
ECM Circuit Inspection
Page 1937
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5769
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Description
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of exhaust valve cam sprocket to
identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder
identification signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to
change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 4495
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 12749
3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5):
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly.
a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap
in place.
^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down
(it should not move).
b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip.
^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib.
c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab.
d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6).
e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place.
Page 8148
Repair Flow Chart
Page 14303
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay
Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement
Reference: NTB10-137B
Date: December 22, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006
FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY
This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have
been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068
NHTSA#: 10V-517
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40)
2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM
relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles,
oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including
the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 10989
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 13221
Ambient Light Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Optical Sensor Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The optical sensor is located in the center of the defroster grille. It detects sunload entering through
windshield by means of a photo diode. The sensor converts the sunload into a current value which
is then input into the front air control.
OPTICAL INPUT PROCESS
The front air control includes a processing circuit which averages the variations in detected sunload
over a period of time. This prevents adjustments in the ATC system operation due to small or quick
variations in detected sunload.
For example, consider driving along a road bordered by an occasional group of large trees. The
sunload detected by the optical sensor will vary whenever the trees obstruct the sunlight. The
processing circuit averages the detected sunload over a period of time, so that the (insignificant)
effect of the trees momentarily obstructing the sunlight does not cause any change in the ATC
system operation. On the other hand, shortly after entering a long tunnel, the system will recognize
the change in sunload, and the system will react accordingly.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR OPTICAL SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure For Optical Sensor (Step 1)
Page 5925
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 3016
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE
1. Warm up the engine thoroughly. Then stop the engine. 2. Release the fuel pressure.
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is not used to release fuel pressure leave the fuel pump fuse
disconnected until step 7.
3. Remove the spark plug from each cylinder. 4. Connect the engine tachometer (not required in
use of CONSULT-II).
5. Install the compression tester with Tool into the spark plug hole.
Tool number: EG15050500 (J-45402)
6. With the accelerator pedal fully depressed, turn the ignition switch to "START" for cranking.
When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the
compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each cylinder.
CAUTION: Always use a fully charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. ^
If the engine speed is out of the specified range, check the battery liquid for proper gravity. Check
the engine speed again with normal battery gravity.
^ If the compression pressure is below the minimum value, check the valve clearances and parts
associated with the combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore,
cylinder head, cylinder head gasket). After checking, measure the compression pressure again.
^ If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour a small amount of engine oil into the
spark plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression. If the added engine oil improves the compression, the piston rings may be worn out or damaged.
Check the piston rings and replace if necessary.
- If the compression pressure remains at a low level despite the addition of engine oil, the valves
may be malfunctioning. Check the valves for damage. Replace the valve or valve seat accordingly.
^ If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression
remains low even after the addition of engine oil, the gaskets may be leaking, or a valve in adjacent
cylinders may be damaged. Inspect and repair as required.
7. Install the components in the reverse order of removal. 8. Start the engine and confirm that it
runs smoothly. 9. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it.
Page 12957
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 2392
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) (Steps 4 - 5)
Page 4266
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13097
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 1187
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Axle Nut
Torque .................................................................................................................................................
............................ 137 Nm (14 kg-cm, 101 ft. lbs.)
Page 9
Optional Splice
Page 443
Body Control Module: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2586
Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped)
1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side)
movement (see Example 1):
^ See above table for maximum movement specification.
^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended.
Page 7107
Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
Components
Components
REMOVAL
Differential Lock Position Switch
Page 1957
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 12388
Headlamp (For USA)
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4255
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 2907
Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light comes on for about 1 second and turns off.
This light warns of low tire pressure.
NISSAN's low tire pressure warning system is a tire pressure monitoring system. It monitors tire
pressure of all tires except the spare. When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light is lit,
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated, You should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's tire
information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire malfunction. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efticiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked
monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle
placard and Owner's Manual.
The recommended inflation pressure may also be found on the Tire and Loading Information label.
It the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the light will illuminate and the chime will sound
for about 10 seconds.
Page 14433
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 12543
Compass: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 13250
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 472
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 13982
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 5598
Page 11345
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 1038
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 12367
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 7944
3. Remove the upper and lower sliding pin bolts (see Figure 1).
4. Support / hang the caliper cylinder body with a wire or other suitable support (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure the brake hose is not stretched or stressed.
^ Make sure the sensor harness bracket will not be bent by weight of the caliper cylinder body.
5. Refer to the BR Section of the Service Manual as needed to complete the brake service.
Page 6432
Ignition Coil: Description and Operation
IGNITION SIGNAL
Component Description
IGNITION COIL & POWER TRANSISTOR
The ignition signal from the ECM is sent to and amplified by the power transistor. The power
transistor turns ON and OFF the ignition coil primary circuit. This ON/OFF operation induces the
proper high voltage in the coil secondary circuit.
Page 10471
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11817
Power Mirror Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 7042
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 1923
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 4055
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 4030
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11588
FITTING INSPECTION
- Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator bolt, guide rail bolts, and glass and carrier plate bolts to correct the glass position.
Rear Door Glass Regulator Assembly
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - CREW CAB".
2. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be
seen. 3. Remove the inside seal. 4. Remove the glass bolts, raise the glass and hold in place with
suitable tool.
5. Remove the bolts and the regulator and guide channel from the panel. 6. Disconnect the
connector for the regulator assembly.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or
grease it.
- Gear wear
- Regulator deformation
- Spring damage
- Grease condition for each sliding part
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1190
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 14439
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 52
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 6426
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 6919
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 2196
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
The occupant classification system control unit, occupant classification (pressure) sensor, and
bladder are an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly.
Refer to "Removal" to remove the seat, and "SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD" to replace the seat
cushion.
Page 137
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 2725
Differential (Without Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Refer to "Removal and
Installation" (RFD with ELD). See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and
Repair/Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation
FILLING
1. Remove the filler plug. Fill with new specified gear oil until the gear oil level reaches the
specified limit near the filler plug mounting hole as
shown. Oil grade and capacity: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". See:
2. After refilling the gear oil, check the gear oil level as shown. Apply sealant to the filler plug. Install
the filler plug on the final drive assembly and
tighten to specification. ^
Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS" (FFD). Refer to
"Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD). See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential
Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking)/Removal and
Installation Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD with ELD). See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Differential (With Electronic
Locking)/Removal and Installation
Interior - Noise From Drivers Power Seat Lifter
Seat Track: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Noise From Drivers Power Seat Lifter
Classification: BT05-003a
Reference: NTB05-010a
Date: February 7, 2008
NISSAN; NOISE FROM DRIVER'S POWER SEAT LIFTER
This bulletin supersedes NTB03-040 and amends NTB05-010. The Applied Vehicles / VINs / Dates
have been updated. No other changes have been made.
APPLIED VEHICLES
APPLIED VINs / DATES
IF YOU CONFIRM: The driver's power seat makes a popping or clicking noise when using the seat
lifter.
ACTIONS:
^ Remove the four drivers seat mounting bolts and tilt the seat to access the bottom.
^ Install the new Spacer Washer (see Parts Information).
NOTE:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You must closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting
Front Door Window Regulator: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit
Switch Resetting
EL08-031A
Reference: NTB09-027A
Date: July 15, 2010
FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET
This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other
changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If any of the following work has been done:
^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly
^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator
^ installation of a new glass window
^ installation of a new glass run
....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following:
^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B
NOTE:
The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror.
If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in
this bulletin.
NOTE:
Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will
not reset the Limit Switch.
SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH
1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in
the glass raising (up) direction.
Page 10480
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 2285
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 5121
Case 4
Page 11824
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 12896
Page 5656
Page 1842
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 346
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 6998
Shift Cable: Testing and Inspection
Checking of A/T Position
NOTE: Following procedure will cover both column and floor shift selector levers.
1. Place selector lever in "P" position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop). 2. Make sure
selector lever can be shifted to other than "P" position when brake pedal is depressed. Also make
sure selector lever can be shifted from
"P" position only when brake pedal is depressed.
3. Move the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle. 4. Confirm the
selector lever stops at each position with the feel of engagement when it is moved through all the
positions. Check whether or not the
actual position the selector lever is in matches the position shown by the shift position indicator and
the transmission body
5. The method of operating the lever to individual positions correctly should be as shown in the
figure. 6. Confirm the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever is placed in the "R" position.
Confirm the back-up lamps does not illuminate when selector
lever is pushed against "R" position in the "P" or "N" position.
7. Confirm the engine can only be started with the selector lever in the "P" and "N" positions. 8.
Make sure transmission is locked completely in "P" position.
Page 8442
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 10318
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 6328
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 3066
Main Bearing Oil Clearance
Main Bearing Clearance
Page 3366
Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
With GST
Check idle speed with GST.
Page 2815
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 3768
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
BCM
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference
when configuring new BCM after installation. Refer to "Configuration". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
1. Disconnect battery negative cable. 2. Remove lower knee bolster.
3. Remove screw and release BCM. 4. Disconnect connectors and then remove BCM.
Installation
Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
- When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to "Configuration". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
- When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition
key IDs. Refer to BL-139, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)". See: Accessories
and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems
- When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system.
Refer to WT-15, "ID Registration Procedure".
Page 12348
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 9608
Diagnostic Procedure For Mode Door Motor (Steps 23 - 25)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR MOTOR
Air Mix Door Motor Circuit
Air Mix Door Motor Circuit
SYMPTOM:
- Discharge air temperature does not change.
- Air mix door motor does not operate.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 10825
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 7220
Page 2530
the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that
downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK,
engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the
cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all
over again: Engine stalls.
- Erroneous idle.
Page 7854
Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair G Sensor
G SENSOR
Removal and Installation REMOVAL
1. Remove center console or center seat as required.
2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts as shown.
^ The location of the sensor is the same for all models.
CAUTION: ^
Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
^ Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: After installation, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
Page 1903
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Capacity Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Cooling System Capacity (Approximate)
With reservoir ......................................................................................................................................
.......................... 3 1/4 gal. (2 5/8 Imp gal, 12.2 L)
Page 826
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 8 - 11)
Page 5019
System Diagram
- Type 3
System Diagram
- Type 4
Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set
Evaporative Canister Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP
DTC's Set
Classification: EC06-009B
Reference: NTB06-095B
Date: September 2, 2008
2004 ARMADA / 2004-2006 TITAN; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446
APPLIED VEHICLES:2004-2006 Titan (A60)
2004 Armada (TA60)
This bulletin has been amended to add DTC P0448. No other changes have been made.
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(s) stored:
^ P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446
AND
^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed.
ACTIONS:
All applied vehicles:
Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V.
Clear any DTC(s) stored in the ECM.
AND IF the vehicle is a 2004-2006 Titan:
Refer to the Install Filter Kit Service Procedure of this bulletin.
AND IF the vehicle is a 2004 Armada:
Refer to the Install Protector Service Procedure of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 5585
12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install.
13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides.
14. Reinstall the IPDM cover.
15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first.
16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset
their ADP settings (ADP memory).
Page 4863
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 8579
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 5300
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
Page 13852
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 2181
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KS
Component Description
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric
element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This
pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
Washers/Wipers - Fluid Leak From Washer Reservoir
Windshield Washer Reservoir: All Technical Service Bulletins Washers/Wipers - Fluid Leak From
Washer Reservoir
Classification: EL06-009
Reference: NTB07-002
Date: January 9, 2007
2004-2007 TITAN/ARMADA; WASHER FLUID LEAKING FROM WASHER TANK PUMP SEAL
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
Washer fluid leaking at the washer pump seal on the washer tank.
ACTION
Replace washer pump seal with the new one listed in Parts Information.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line using the claims coding table.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 5622
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 7874
CAUTION: ^
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
^ Adjust the steering angle sensor.
^ Calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
Page 13703
LT-T/TOW-03
Page 8792
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Power Socket RH (For Cigarette Lighter), Front
Power Socket (Center Armrest), Console Power Socket
Front Power Socket RH (For Cigarette Lighter), Front Power Socket (Center Armrest), Console
Power Socket
REMOVAL
1. Remove inner socket from the ring, while pressing the hook on the ring out from square hole. 2.
Disconnect power socket connector. 3. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing
pawls.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 6465
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 4093
ECM Inspection Table Part 9
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 13731
Page 5693
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 7724
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 8911
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 12736
Fuel Gauge: Description and Operation
FUEL GAUGE
The fuel gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel gauge is regulated by
the unified meter control unit and a variable resistor signal supplied
- to combination meter terminal 15
- through fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 2
- through fuel level sensor unit and fuel pump terminal 5
- from combination meter terminal 16.
Page 13496
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 6890
A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate
Page 674
a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section
EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits).
NOTE:
This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different.
b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify
the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check.
C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the
terminal eyelet(s).
d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the
connections.
^ Both sides of the eyelet
^ Eyelet mounting surface
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Nut/bolt threads.
Page 10575
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 857
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 12887
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 3)
Page 8804
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 6664
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 9896
Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner
Removal and Installation for Condenser
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Remove the
radiator.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator.
3. Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe from the condenser.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
4. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector.
- Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser as necessary.
5. Lift the condenser out of the mounting grommets to remove the condenser.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure pipe, refrigerant pressure sensor, and high-pressure
flexible hose with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them.
- Replace the grommets as necessary.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 11759
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10537
SRS Inspection (For Side And Rollover Collision) Part 1
Page 13959
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 12150
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 2029
NOTES:
^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply.
^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product
Program, Website order via link on dealer portal.
^ WD-40 is available from various local sources.
Removal Tool
^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to
accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and
strip the sensor.
^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box
end wrench or 6-point deep well socket.
1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice.
2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the
threads.
Page 14072
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 6763
Page 14345
1. Remove Washer Tank Assembly.
^ Refer to "Removal and Installation of Washer Tank" in the "WW" chapter of the ESM.
2. Remove washer motor and washer pump seal.
^ Photo of washer motor and washer pump seal.
3. Replace washer pump seal.
NOTE:
Lubricate the pump seal with washer fluid to ease installation.
4. Install washer motor onto the washer tank.
5. Reinstall the washer tank in reverse order of removal.
Disclaimer
Page 9999
Figure E-3
3. Disconnect the white connector circled in Figure E-3.
- This is connector E120.
- This connector has 6 terminal slots with only 5 filled.
Figure E-4
4. Remove the green wire from connector E120.
- Use pin terminal tool J-38751-305 from Pin Tool Set J-38751-3, or equivalent.
Rear Sonar System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12418
Page 489
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Engine - Drive Belt Squeaking Noise
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-058 Date: 080606
Engine - Drive Belt Squeaking Noise
Classification: EM-08-002
Reference: NTB08-058
Date: June 6, 2008
TITAN / ARMADA; DRIVE BELT SQUEAK NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2008 Armada (TA60) 2006-2008 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is a squeak noise coming from the drive belt.
ACTION
A. Check to see if the drive belt auto tensioner is also noisy. If it is, you will replace it as part of this
Service Procedure.
B. Check the alignment of the power steering pump/pulley to the crankshaft pulley using a
straightedge. If it is mis-aligned, perform the steps in this Bulletin to align it.
C. Clean the crankshaft pulley belt ribs.
D. Replace the drive belt and, if necessary, replace the drive belt auto tensioner.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 10279
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 14070
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 2529
7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle
Air Volume Learning will not be carried out
successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
- It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
- It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch
ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the
MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the
MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air
Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find
Page 10049
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 685
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 5449
- When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state:
- Ignition switch
- Key switch (insert)
- Hazard switch
- Main door lock/unlock switch
- Front door switch (LH, RH)
- Rear door switch (LH, RH) (Crew Cab)
- Rear door switch upper (LH, RH) (King Cab)
- Rear door switch lower (LH, RH) (King Cab)
- Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp)
- Keyfob (lock/unlock signal)
- Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch)
- When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication
inactive mode.
- Status of combination switch reading function is changed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY
- Power door lock system.
- Remote keyless entry system.
- Power window system.
- Sunroof system.
- Room lamp timer.
- Warning chime system.
- Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system.
- Trailer turn signal and hazard warning lamps system (if equipped). Refer to "TRAILER TOW".
NOTE: Power supply only. No system control.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R
- Panic system.
- Vehicle security (theft warning) system.
- NVIS (NATS) system.
- Headlamp, tail lamp, front fog lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems.
- Front wiper and washer system.
Part 1
Page 5088
Case 2
Page 6210
c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip.
d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab.
e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump.
^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector.
f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing.
CAUTION:
DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap.
Page 4489
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 3887
b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a).
c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed.
^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer.
d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2.
2. Record the radio station presets:
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
NOTE:
Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding.
Page 10025
Page 5699
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 2020
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch)
Check (King Cab)
Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch)
Check (King Cab)
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 8552
Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Auto Active Test
Auto Active Test
DESCRIPTION
- In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive
signal to the following systems: Rear window defogger (crew cab only)
- Front wipers
- Tail, parking, and license lamps
- Front fog lamps
- Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
- A/C compressor (magnetic clutch)
- Cooling fan
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass
damage by wiper operation).
NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield
beforehand.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door
switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds
after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6. After a
series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF.
CAUTION: Be sure to perform BL-36, "Door Switch Check (King Cab)" when the auto active test
cannot be performed. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch Check (King Cab)
INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE
- When auto active test mode is actuated, the six steps are repeated three times.
Concept of Auto Active Test
- IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN
communication line. Therefore, when auto
Page 12776
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 13628
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 3151
Page 12556
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 13500
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 310
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 9823
Page 1547
Diagnostic Procedure For In-Vehicle Sensor (Steps 9 - 12)
Page 1925
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 9503
^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps.
5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure.
Generally this is 40psi.
If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure:
a. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
c. Remount the tire.
6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area.
^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel.
NOTE:
Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated.
If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform
1. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
3. Remount the tire.
Page 1168
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 2952
3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2.
^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process
Tire:
^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area)
NOTE:
Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may
become un-balanced.
Wheel:
^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area.
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area
4. Before inflating the tire:
^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks.
Page 5253
Case 6
Page 10857
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 19
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 2987
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Wheel Fastener
Rotate the tires on each side from front to back as shown. Do not include the spare tire when
rotating the tires. Wheel nut .................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 133 Nm (14 kg-m, 98 ft. lbs.)
Page 9044
13. First, tape the door grommet to the corrugated tube, then
14. Wrap the entire length of the corrugated tube with vinyl tape.
^ As you wrap, keep the tape tight and the tape roll close to the harness.
^ Over-lap the tape 50% as you wrap.
^ Make sure to wrap around the clips (diaper wrap) so they will not move-the clips must stay in
position.
^ Make sure to cover the area on the body side between the corrugated tube and the vinyl tube.
^ Double wrap the entire length; one layer left to right and another layer right to left.
15. Attach the new hinge rod clip below the bracket as shown in Figure B9.
Page 142
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 2355
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 3394
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE
1. Warm up the engine thoroughly. Then stop the engine. 2. Release the fuel pressure.
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is not used to release fuel pressure leave the fuel pump fuse
disconnected until step 7.
3. Remove the spark plug from each cylinder. 4. Connect the engine tachometer (not required in
use of CONSULT-II).
5. Install the compression tester with Tool into the spark plug hole.
Tool number: EG15050500 (J-45402)
6. With the accelerator pedal fully depressed, turn the ignition switch to "START" for cranking.
When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the
compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each cylinder.
CAUTION: Always use a fully charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. ^
If the engine speed is out of the specified range, check the battery liquid for proper gravity. Check
the engine speed again with normal battery gravity.
^ If the compression pressure is below the minimum value, check the valve clearances and parts
associated with the combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore,
cylinder head, cylinder head gasket). After checking, measure the compression pressure again.
^ If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour a small amount of engine oil into the
spark plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression. If the added engine oil improves the compression, the piston rings may be worn out or damaged.
Check the piston rings and replace if necessary.
- If the compression pressure remains at a low level despite the addition of engine oil, the valves
may be malfunctioning. Check the valves for damage. Replace the valve or valve seat accordingly.
^ If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression
remains low even after the addition of engine oil, the gaskets may be leaking, or a valve in adjacent
cylinders may be damaged. Inspect and repair as required.
7. Install the components in the reverse order of removal. 8. Start the engine and confirm that it
runs smoothly. 9. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it.
Page 12143
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 6131
Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent).
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for
connecting the fuel pressure gauge.
2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test".
^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure.
^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble
Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test.
^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test.
> If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and
repair information.
> If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3.
3. Replace the fuel pump.
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the
appropriate Service Manual.
^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information.
^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal.
4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed.
Page 10563
Air Bag Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 6000
3. Attach filter to bracket and filter hoses to fittings as shown.
Install Protector (2004 Armada ONLY)
1. Assemble the protector into the left rear wheelhouse as shown.
Page 7608
Service and Repair
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
Wiper and Washer Switch
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper washer switch connector. 3. Pinch tabs at
wiper and washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2333
9. Remove side bearing caps.
10. Loosen the side bearing adjusters using Tool.
Tool number: - (C-4164)
11. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side
bearing adjusters together with bearing.
12. Remove side bearing adjusters from axle housing. 13. Remove bracket for the differential lock
position switch connector and bolts. 14. Remove differential lock position switch.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent.
CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to axle housing and differential lock position switch. Also
remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and axle housing and
differential lock position switch.
Power Door Lock System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8211
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 13130
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 354
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5105
Case 4
Page 3933
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 4551
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Description
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the A/T assembly facing the gear teeth (cogs)
of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to
change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM
receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 14397
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 392
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 10475
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 13518
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12780
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 7056
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
NOTE: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "Components". See: Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component
Parts)/Components
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
Page 231
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 3034
^ Remove No. 1 camshaft bracket.
NOTE: The bottom and front surface of bracket will be stuck because of liquid gasket.
^ <-: Engine front
^ B: Exhaust
^ D: Intake
11. Remove the camshaft. 12. Remove the valve lifters if necessary.
^ Correctly identify location where each part is removed from. Keep parts organized to avoid mixing
them up.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the valve lifters if removed.
^ Install removed parts in their original locations.
2. Install the camshafts. Refer to the table for identification of the RH and LH, and intake and
exhaust.
^ Install so that the RH bank (B) dowel pins (A) and LH bank (C) dowel pins (A) at the front of the
camshaft face are in the direction shown.
Page 13839
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 936
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 12574
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 1101
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 6889
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 5841
Optional Splice
Page 12516
Audible Warning Device: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
Terminals And Reference Value For BCM Part 1
Page 13007
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Service and Repair
Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
Components
Page 5316
Case 17
Case 18
NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Page 3516
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 14213
Wiper Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 4885
Page 12681
c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip.
d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab.
e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump.
^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector.
f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing.
CAUTION:
DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap.
Service and Repair
Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: Service and Repair
WEATHERSTRIP
Visually check weatherstrip for any damage, deterioration, or flattening.
- In the case of leakage around glass lid, close glass lid and pour water around it to find the
damaged or gaped portion, remove glass lid assembly.
- If any damage is found, replace glass lid assembly.
CAUTION: Do not remove the weatherstrip.
Page 8693
^ Un-tape the connectors that are needed. Leave the connectors you don't need taped to the
harness.
46. Connect both battery cables-positive cable first.
47. Reset the radio station presets.
48. If Inspection Procedure 1 was NG, or Inspection Procedure 2 result was "light stays on or
blinks"; connect CONSULT-II and clear codes from the Air Bag Control Unit SELF-DIAG [PAST].
Final Quality Checks
49. Check the air bag light operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition OFF and then ON.
b. Observe the air bag warning light.
c. Make sure the air bag warning light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out.
50. Confirm that all systems related to the harness replacement are functioning correctly.
High Mount Stop Lamp Harness Branch (Passenger Side-Right Side-Only)
51. Remove the rear seat belt D-ring covers and bolts-left and right side.
Page 4938
ECM Inspection Table Part 7
Page 13840
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8654
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 9874
Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch (Steps 13 - 17)
Page 8840
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 12600
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Recall R0616 - Rear Door Wiring Harness
Technical Service Bulletin # 07-009 Date: 070216
Recall R0616 - Rear Door Wiring Harness
RECALL CAMPAIGN BULLETIN
Reference: NTBO7-009
Date: February 16, 2007
VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 TITAN REAR DOOR HARNESS
CAMPAIGN I.D. # R0616
NHTSA # : 06V-459
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) King Cab only
APPLIED VINs: 2004: 1N6*A06A*4N 500006 - 593463 1N6*A06B*4N 500000 - 593471
2005: 1N6*A06A*5N 500002 - 580219 1N6*A06B*5N 500007 - 580226
2006: 1N6*A06A*6N 500003 - 576810 1N6*A06B*6N 500000 - 576805
NOTE:
Use Service Comm to determine campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan has determined that on some 2004 - 2006 model year Titan King Cab vehicles, a defect
that relates to motor vehicle safety exists.
In some affected vehicles, there is the possibility that the wires in the harness routed through the
rear doors and into the body on each side of the vehicle may break due to over bending of the
harness as the doors are opened and closed. The wires in the harness control various systems
including the seat belt pretensioners, the passenger side seat belt tension sensor, and rear audio
speakers.
If the wire for the seat belt pretensioners breaks and makes contact with a wire for the speaker,
there is a possibility that the pretensioner may deploy and tighten the seat belt. If this happens
when the belt is retracted, it will not be possible to use the seat belt. If one of the wires for the seat
belt tension sensor breaks inside the passenger side harness, the passenger side front air bag will
not deploy as designed in a frontal crash. Nissan is conducting a Voluntary Recall Campaign to
inspect the wire harness cover for damage and, if necessary, a new wiring harness with a new type
cover will be installed and rerouted.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R0616 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED
The number of vehicles potentially affected is approximately 96,500
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealers responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and
Page 8841
Page 636
Page 10586
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 4270
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 14483
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Fuel Pressure: Customer Interest Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Classification: FE07-004
Reference: NTB07-040
Date: June 6, 2007
2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007
Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223
APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007
IF YOU CONFIRM
When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced,
ACTIONS
1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure).
2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump.
NOTE:
Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 6183
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 867
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 14221
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 12080
Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 5614
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 6187
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 6468
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 2439
^ Apply the brakes as shown.
^ Start the engine to allow brake boost.
^ Turn the engine OFF,
^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates".
^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate.
Put the bridge plate in the down position.
^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle.
Page 2807
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 7826
* Headlights, defroster, A/C, audio (radio), video, cellular telephone, etc.
4. Press [START (Nissan BASED VHCL)].
5. In "SELF-DIAG RESULTS", check and erase any DTC(s) in the below noted vehicle systems:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST press "ERASE" and "OK" in all systems (shown below) whether a DTC is displayed or
not. This is required to complete the VDC reprogramming procedure, and it will make sure that all
DTC(s) are erased.
^ ENGINE
^ A/T
^ ABS
^ AIR BAG
^ ALL MODE AWD/4WD (if applicable)
^ DIFF LOCK (if applicable; 4WD Titan)
^ AIR LEVELIZER (if applicable)
6. After all DTC(s) are erased:
^ Turn the ignition switch OFF.
^ Disconnect CONSULT-II and the CAN Cable from the vehicle connector.
^ Disconnect the battery charger from the vehicle.
^ Start the engine and make sure it runs properly and there are NO warning lights illuminated in the
instrument panel.
7. Continue with Part 4.
Part 4
Part 4: Re-program the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card back to its original format so it can be
used for standard ECU reprogramming.
1. Remove the red/white diagnostic card from CONSULT-II and insert the 8 MB orange
Reprogramming card.
2. Go to the ASIST terminal.
3. Follow steps in Part 1 of this bulletin to download (transfer) data from ASIST to CONSULT-II.
^ Use ID Code 050602.
^ This will re-program the 8 MB (orange) card to its original format so it can be used for standard
ECU reprogramming.
END
Page 1099
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 6099
Fuel: Service Precautions
Precautions for Fuel (Unleaded Regular Gasoline Recommended)
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number
(Research octane number 91). E-85 fuel (85% fuel ethanol, 15% unleaded gasoline) may only be
used in vehicles specifically designed for E-85 fuel (i.e. Flexible Fuel Vehicle - FFV models.)
CAUTION: Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded gasoline will damage the three way catalyst.
Do not use E-85 fuel (85% fuel ethanol, 15% unleaded gasoline) unless the vehicle is specifically
designed for E-85 fuel (i.e. Flexible Fuel Vehicle - FFV Models). Using a fuel other than that
specified could adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect
the warranty coverage validity.
Page 1868
Specifications
Camshaft: Specifications
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Camshaft Runout
1. Put V block on precise flat work bench, and support No. 1 and No. 5 journals of the camshaft. 2.
Set dial indicator vertically to No. 3 journal. 3. Turn the camshaft to one direction, and measure the
camshaft runout on dial indicator (total indicator reading).
Camshaft runout: Less than 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) ^
If measurement exceeds specification, replace the camshaft.
Camshaft Cam Height
^ Measure the camshaft cam height. Standard cam height (intake & exhaust): 44.465 - 44.655 mm
(1.7506 - 1.7581 inch) Cam wear limit (intake & exhaust): 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch)
^ If measurement is not within the specifications, replace the camshaft.
Camshaft Journal Clearance
Camshaft Journal Diameter
^ Measure the diameter of the camshaft journal. Standard diameter: 25.953 - 25.970 mm (1.0218 1.0224 inch)
Camshaft Bracket Inner Diameter
Page 9582
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 4579
Page 4243
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 8547
- When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status.
2. Sleep waiting status
- Process to stop CAN communication is activated.
- All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN
communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status.
3. Sleep status
- IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode.
- CAN communication is stopped.
- When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
- When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
CAN Communication System Description
Refer to LAN-25, Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus
Page 12494
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 1057
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 14034
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 14181
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 6950
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 11149
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 14174
Page 14322
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 14201
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 12218
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6955
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 10236
1. Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment
gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be
displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines.
2. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using
recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant
identifier. If NG, refer to "Contaminated Refrigerant".
3. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and
refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to "Contaminated
Refrigerant".
4. Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure oil discharged
into the recovery/recycling equipment. 5. Drain the oil from the "old" (removed) compressor into a
graduated container and recover the amount of oil drained. 6. Drain the oil from the "new"
compressor into a separate, clean container. 7. Measure an amount of new oil installed equal to
amount drained from "old" compressor. Add this oil to "new" compressor through the suction port
opening.
8. Measure an amount of new oil equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this oil to
"new" compressor through the suction port
opening.
9. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of
oil at this time.
CAUTION: Do not add this 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil if only replacing the compressor.
Page 2076
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 13664
Optional Splice
Page 8998
Inspection With CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)
With Generic Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Without Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Page 8910
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
Valve Clearance
Valve Lifter
Page 5037
Information Bus: Description and Operation CAN Communication Line
CAN COMMUNICATION LINE
Description
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an
on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error
detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit
shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN
communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line)
allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit
transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
TCS COMMUNICATION LINE
Description
This CAN communication line is used to control the smooth engine operation during the TCS
operation. Pulse signals are exchanged between ECM and "ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit)". Be sure to erase the malfunction information such as DTC not only for "ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit)" but also for ECM after TCS related repair.
Page 6511
^ Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Use standard type spark plug for normal condition.
^ The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under
conditions such as: Frequent engine starts
- Low ambient temperatures
^ The cold type spark plug is suitable when spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug
under conditions such as: Extended highway driving
- Frequent high engine revolution
CAUTION: Do not drop or shock spark plug.
Mirrors - Power/Manual Mirror Actuator Inoperative
Power Mirror Motor: Customer Interest Mirrors - Power/Manual Mirror Actuator Inoperative
Classification: BT06-005
Reference: NTB06-074
Date: October 30, 2006
2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; MANUAL OR POWER DOOR
MIRROR ACTUATOR INOPERABLE
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004-2006 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM The door mirror actuator needs to be replaced.
ACTION
^ Do not replace the complete door mirror assembly.
^ Replace only the door mirror actuator.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 11212
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 739
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 4724
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 6055
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure
Fuel pressure at idling..........................................................................................................................
..........Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi)
Page 11909
Optional Splice
Page 3080
service parts, no grades can be selected (only 0 grade is available).
^ Refer to EM-97, "Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance (Small End)" for the values for each
grade at the plant. See: Specifications/Service Limits & General Specifications
PISTON TO CYLINDER BORE CLEARANCE
Cylinder Bore Diameter
^ Measure the cylinder bore for wear, out-of-round and taper at six different points on each cylinder
("X" and "Y" directions at "A", "B" and "C").
NOTE: When determining cylinder bore grade, measure cylinder bore at "B" position.
Standard diameter: 98.000 - 98.030 mm (3.8583 - 3.8594 inch) Wear limit: 0.20 mm (0.0079 inch)
Out-of-round (Difference between "X" and "Y"): Limit: 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch) Taper limit
(Difference between "A" and "C"): Limit: 0.010 mm (0.0004 inch)
^ If measured value exceeds the repair limit, or if there are scratches and/or seizure on the cylinder
inner wall, hone or bore the inner wall.
^ An oversize piston is provided. When using an oversize piston, hone the cylinder so that the
clearance between the piston and cylinder satisfies the standard. Piston oversize Grade No. 0
(Service): 0.20 mm (0.0079 inch)
^ If oversize piston is used, use it for all cylinders with oversize piston rings.
Piston Skirt Diameter
^ Measure piston skirt diameter using suitable tool. Standard: 97.980 - 98.010 mm (3.8575 - 3.8587
inch)
Page 10219
Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection
Checking for Refrigerant Leaks
PRELIMINARY CHECK
Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings, hoses and components for signs of
A/C oil leakage, damage, and corrosion. Any A/C oil leakage may indicate an area of refrigerant
leakage. Allow extra inspection time in these areas when using either an electronic refrigerant leak
detector (J-41995) or fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220).
If any dye is observed using a fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220), confirm the leak using a
electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). It is possible that the dye is from a prior leak that was
repaired and not properly cleaned.
When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found but continue to check for additional
leaks at all system components and connections.
When searching for refrigerant leaks using an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995), move
the probe along the suspected leak area at 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in) per second and no further than 6
mm (1/4 in) from the component.
CAUTION: Moving the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe slower and closer to the suspected
leak area will improve the chances of finding a leak.
Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector
1. Check the A/C system for leaks using the fluorescent dye leak detector and safety goggles
(J-42220) in a low sunlight area (area without windows
preferable). Illuminate all components, fittings and lines. The dye will appear as a bright
green/yellow area at the point of leakage. Fluorescent dye observed at the evaporator drain
opening indicates an evaporator core assembly leak (tubes, core or expansion valve).
2. If the suspected area is difficult to see, use an adjustable mirror or wipe the area with a clean
shop rag or cloth, then inspect the shop rag or cloth
with the fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220) for dye residue.
3. After the leak is repaired, remove any residual dye using refrigerant dye cleaner (J-43872) to
prevent future misdiagnosis. 4. Perform a system performance check and then verify the leak
repair using a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995).
NOTE: Other gases in the work area or substances on the A/C components, for example, anti-freeze,
windshield washer fluid, solvents and oils, may falsely trigger the leak detector. Make sure the
surfaces to be checked are clean.
- Clean with a dry cloth or blow off with shop air.
- Do not allow the sensor tip of the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) to contact with any
substance. This can also cause false readings and may damage the detector.
Dye Injection
NOTE: This procedure is only necessary when recharging the system or when the compressor has
seized and must be replaced.
1. Check the A/C system static (at rest) pressure. Pressure must be at least 345 kPa (3.52
kg-sq.cm, 50 psi). 2. Pour one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak
detection dye (J-41447) into the HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector
(J-41459).
CAUTION: If repairing the A/C system or replacing a component, pour the HFC-134a (R-134a)
fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) directly into the open system connection and proceed with
the service procedures.
3. Connect the refrigerant dye injector (J-41459) to the low-pressure service valve. 4. Start the
engine and switch the A/C system ON. 5. When the A/C system is operating (compressor running),
inject one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye
(J-41447) through the low-pressure service valve using HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459).
Refer to the manufacturer's operating instructions.
6. With the engine still running, disconnect the HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459) from the
low-pressure service valve. 7. Operate the A/C system for a minimum of 20 minutes to mix the
HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) with the A/C
system oil. Depending on the leak size, operating conditions and location of the leak, it may take
from minutes to days for the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye to penetrate an
A/C system leak and become visible.
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector
PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTOR
NOTE: When performing a refrigerant leak check, use a electronic refrigerant leak detector
(J-41995) or equivalent. Ensure that the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is calibrated
and set properly according to the manufacturer's operating instructions.
Page 14247
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 8963
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 12915
c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip.
d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab.
e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump.
^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector.
f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing.
CAUTION:
DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap.
Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 8924
IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection
Page 2326
1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "Components". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
4. Securely fasten A/T temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clip. 5. Install oil pan to
transmission case. 6. Connect the negative battery terminal
CAUTION: After completing installation, check for A/T fluid leakage and fluid level.
Page 76
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 773
Optional Splice
Page 10208
8. Use 2 new harness clips to attach the harness as shown in Figure 6.
^ P/N for new harness clips: 24225-79900
Page 5197
Case 3
Page 1668
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 5999
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install Filter Kit (2004-2006 Titan ONLY)
1. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Note position of yellow marks.
2. Position mounting bracket onto frame as shown, hooking bracket tab onto brake hose bracket.
Attach bracket to frame with the clamp supplied in the kit.
Page 4386
NOTE:
^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB.
Disclaimer
Page 8941
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 759
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 12296
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
1. Make sure the collapsible storage organizer is in the "deployed" position and the lids are
snapped closed.
Deployed Position: Side supports and floor are snapped in place.
2. Position the organizer at the rear of the bed next to the tailgate.
^ If needed, loosen the knobs and slide the assembly rearward.
NOTE:
When sliding the organizer, apply light force to the center, or evenly to both sides.
CAUTION:
The organizer should only be moved in the bed of the truck when it is in the deployed position with
the lids snapped closed.
3. Lower the tailgate and remove both rail stops.
^ Use a 13/32" (10 mm) wrench.
Page 361
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 5390
Component Parts Location
Page 7999
IMPORTANT:
If you remove the brake pad retainers from the torque member, lift them in the direction indicated
by the arrow (see Figure 3) so retainers will not deform.
Page 11036
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 4010
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Locations
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 12542
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 10226
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner
Contaminated Refrigerant
Contaminated Refrigerant
If a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in a vehicle, your options are:
- Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated
refrigerant into the atmosphere.
- Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage your service equipment and
refrigerant supply.
- Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the
contamination may have occurred.
- If you choose to perform the repair, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and
containers. Do not recover contaminated refrigerant into your existing service equipment. If your
facility does not have dedicated recovery equipment, you may contact a local refrigerant product
retailer for available service. This refrigerant must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and
local regulations. In addition, replacement of all refrigerant system components on the vehicle is
recommended.
- If the vehicle is within the warranty period, the air conditioner warranty is void. Please contact
NISSAN Customer Affairs for further assistance.
HFC-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure
REFRIGERANT LINES
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure
SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Discharging Refrigerant
WARNING: Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose
and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified service
equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or SAE
J2201 HFC-134a (R-134a) recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate
the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained
from the refrigerant and oil manufacturers.
Page 3566
Page 2750
Engine Oil: Service and Repair
Changing Engine Oil
WARNING:
^ Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot.
^ Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct
skin contact with used engine oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand
cleaner as soon as possible.
1. Remove engine front undercover using power tool. 2. Warm up engine, and check for oil leakage
from engine components. 3. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Loosen oil filler cap, then
remove drain plug. 5. Drain engine oil. 6. Install drain plug with new washer.
CAUTION: ^
Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer.
Oil pan drain plug: 34.3 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft. lbs.)
7. Refill with new engine oil.
CAUTION: ^
The refill capacity depends on the engine oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications
for reference only.
^ Always use the oil level gauge to determine when the proper amount of engine oil is in the
engine.
8. Warm up engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage. 9. Stop engine
and wait for 10 minutes.
10. Check engine oil level.
Page 991
Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 5411
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 4454
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 12790
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8238
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 12652
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 8093
b. Keypad will appear (see Figure 6).
c. Using the digit keys on the keypad, enter ID Code 060402.
d. Then click the "Continue" button on the keypad.
^ After you click "Continue", the "CAUTION" screen will appear (see Figure 7).
Page 11453
9. While pulling the outside handle bracket, slide it toward the rear of vehicle to remove it and the
door lock assembly.
10. Disconnect the door lock actuator electrical connector.
11. Separate the outside handle cable connection from the outside handle bracket.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: To install each rod, be sure to rotate the rod holder until a click is felt.
Page 816
ECM Inspection Table Part 6
Page 10313
Blower Motor Relay: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 7832
Page 10978
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 11291
Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Service and Repair
Console Lamp: Service and Repair
CONSOLE ILLUMINATION LAMP (if equipped)
Removal
The console illumination lamp (1) is replaced as part of the map lamp assembly (2). Refer to
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Bulb Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove overhead console. Refer to INTERIOR HEADLINER.
3. Rotate console illumination lamp bulb (1) counterclockwise, then pull straight out away from map
lamp assembly (2) to remove.
Page 3842
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 10122
2. Take the tie-wrap mount loose (see Figure 3).
3. Measure 5 mm from the tie-wrap (see Figure 3).
4. Carefully cut the tape off of the harness as shown in Figure 3.
^ Use scissors with a blunt end. Don't damage the wires inside the harness.
Page 4556
Component Parts Location
Page 13432
Marker Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Side Marker Lamp (Rear)
Bulb Replacement
SIDE MARKER LAMP (REAR)
Removal
1. Remove rear combination lamp mounting bolts. 2. Pull rear combination lamp to remove from
the vehicle. 3. Turn side marker lamp (rear) bulb socket counterclockwise and remove bulb.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 13161
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5523
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 11816
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 12882
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Step 3)
Diagram Information and Instructions
Information Bus: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 5152
Case 5
Page 471
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 12499
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 11342
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6478
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Reference: NTB10-037A
Date: May 19, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE
INACCURACY
This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010
NHTSA #: 10V-074
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan
vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel
gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel
tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary
Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts
or labor.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 5239
Case 11
Page 6449
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 681
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 12986
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 5457
4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
6. Touch "A60" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on
"VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See:
Application and ID
7. Touch "READ CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen.
Page 2081
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 10465
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner
INTAKE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel.
2. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
NOTE: The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the
A/C evaporator cover.
3. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the heater and cooling unit assembly.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 13734
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 8884
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 9768
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 530
Page 13145
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Component Locations
Knock Sensor: Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Locations
Throttle Position Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1949
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 13729
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 3700
Component Parts Location
Page 5718
ECM Inspection Table Part 3
Page 2376
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 10070
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 676
7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs.
Disclaimer
Page 8773
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 9069
b. Remove the right side sun visor holder, twist 1/4 turn to remove.
c. Remove the right side dual sun visor assembly.
Use plastic trim tool as shown.
d. Remove front pillar assist grip; 2 bolts; under end covers.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5314
Case 14
Page 10864
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 4497
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 10509
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 12962
Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check
Page 7516
2. Check fluid level from the filler plug hole as shown.
CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking fluid level.
3. Install the filler plug with a new gasket to the transfer. Tighten to specification.
Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket.
Page 5502
Page 6341
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Service and Repair
Valve Cover: Service and Repair
ROCKER COVER
Image Symbols
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 2. Remove the air duct and resonator
assembly. 3. Move the harness on the upper rocker cover and its peripheral aside. 4. Remove the
electric throttle control actuator, loosening the bolts diagonally (for LH only). 5. Remove the ignition
coils.
Page 1473
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation ASCD Brake Switch
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Description
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is
turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Page 2283
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 12799
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 7986
wrench.
Brake Judder Repair
^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series
On-Car Brake Lathe.
^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe.
^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout
(see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin).
PEDAL FEEL
^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes.
^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer
comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car.
^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and
determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items:
a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely.
b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly
installed.
c. Bleed all air from the brake system.
d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of
the appropriate service manual.
NOTE:
Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and
adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE.
BRAKE SERVICE
To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to:
1. Finish rotors properly.
^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise.
^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for
rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information).
2. Correctly install pads and shims.
IMPORTANT:
Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for
proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations.
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
3. Perform the following post-installation checks.
^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary.
^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance,
including noise.
a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph).
b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph
(50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds.
c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without
stopping.
Warning Chime
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9010
Page 2332
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller
shaft.
^ Before removing final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness
connector from the assembly and move it away from final drive/rear axle assembly area. Failure to
do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative.
1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft.
^ Plug rear end of transfer.
3. Remove both RH and LH axle shafts. 4. Remove carrier cover bolts.
5. Remove carrier cover using Tool.
Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
^ Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the mating surface.
6. Remove differential lock solenoid connector (B) bolt and disconnect differential lock position
connector (A).
7. For installation, apply a paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap.
CAUTION: ^
Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to install them
in their original positions.
^ For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap.
8. Remove adjuster lock plates.
Page 10423
Diagnostic Procedure For Ambient Sensor (Steps 3 - 6)
Page 1817
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 8027
Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Rear
Removal and Installation of Rear Brake Piping and Brake Hose REMOVAL
1. Drain brake fluid. 2. Using a flare nut wrench, remove brake tube from brake hose. 3. Remove
lock plate and brake hose from bracket. 4. Remove brake hose from cylinder body.
INSTALLATION
1. Install brake hose (1) and new copper washer to cylinder body and tighten to specification.
^ (2): Bolt
^ (3): Rear cylinder body
NOTE: Do not reuse copper washer.
2. Insert brake hose end through bracket, then secure it to bracket with lock plate. 3. Install brake
tube to brake hose, then tighten the flare nut using a flare nut wrench. 4. Refill brake fluid and
bleed air.
Page 14371
Wiper Arm: Service and Repair
Front Wiper Arms
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
1. Remove wiper arm covers and wiper arm nuts. 2. Remove front RH wiper arm and front LH
wiper arm. 3. Remove front RH blade assembly and front LH blade assembly.
Installation
1. Operate wiper motor one full cycle, then turn "OFF" (Auto Stop).
2. Clean up the pivot area as shown. This will reduce possibility of wiper arm looseness. 3. Install
front RH blade assembly and front LH blade assembly. 4. Install front RH wiper arm and front LH
wiper arm. 5. Tighten wiper arm nuts to specified torque, and install wiper arm covers.
Front wiper arm nuts : 23.6 N.m (2.4 kg-m, 17 ft-lb)
6. Ensure that wiper blades stop within proper clearance. Refer "FRONT WIPER ARM
ADJUSTMENT".
Page 748
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 9766
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 12998
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 2005
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 11205
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 9935
Figure D-8A
- Make sure the harness is routed through the harness hole in Protector 3 (refer to Figure D-8A).
Figure D-9
7. Fold and stick protector 3 to the top of the fan motor as shown.
Fold and stick the flap shown in Figure D-9 to the side of the fan motor.
Figure D-10
8. Wrap the long strip of protector 3 completely around the motor.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Compass: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 1194
Wiper Relay: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 712
Page 13913
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 4034
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 12137
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 2737
3. Install the drain plug with a new gasket to the transfer. Tighten to specification.
Drain plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket.
FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug and gasket.
2. Fill the transfer with new fluid until the fluid level reaches the specified limit near the filler plug
hole.
Fluid grade and capacity.
CAUTION: Carefully fill fluid. (Fill up for approximately 3 minutes.)
3. Leave the vehicle for 3 minutes, and check fluid level again. 4. Install the filler plug with a new
gasket to the transfer. Tighten to specification.
Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket.
Page 11334
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 12711
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 7330
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 969
9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically.
Page 13140
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 3750
Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM and IPDM E/R
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R
- Panic system.
- Vehicle security (theft warning) system.
- NVIS (NATS) system.
- Headlamp, tail lamp, front fog lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems.
- Front wiper and washer system.
Page 2495
1. Measure camber and caster of both the right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge
and adjust as necessary to specification.
Camber and caster: Refer to "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*). See: Specifications/Front Suspension
NOTE: Some vehicles may be equipped with straight (non-adjustable) lower link bolts and
washers. In order to adjust camber and caster on these vehicles, first replace the lower link bolts
and washers with adjustable (cam) bolts and washers.
2. If outside of the specified value, adjust camber and caster using the cam bolts (1) in the front
lower link (2).
CAUTION: After adjusting the camber and caster check the toe-in.
NOTE: Camber changes about 3' (0.05°) with each graduation of one cam bolt. Refer to table for
examples of lower link cam bolt effect on camber and caster.
3. Tighten the adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to "Components".
Toe-In
TOE-IN
WARNING: Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface.
- Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it.
1. Bounce the front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture).
2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft.). 3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear
side) of both front tires at the same height as hub center as shown. These marks are measuring
points.
Page 1085
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 8691
38. Remove the upper door hinge finisher; 2 clips.
39. Take the harness loose from the hinge rod and the body.
40. Pull the harness through the body.
For passenger side (right side) harness. go to step 51
Rear Cabin Wall Harness Branch (driver side-left side-only; if equipped with rear sonar and/or
differential lock
41. Lift the carpet on the rear cabin wall.
42. Disconnect the control unit(s).
43. Take the harness loose from the rear cabin wall.
Page 1773
Diagnostic Procedure For Optical Sensor (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 2385
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 4393
NOTE:
^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB.
Disclaimer
Page 13626
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 7839
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Page 11923
Power Mirror Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 7887
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor.
2. Install axle shaft assembly.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Service and Repair
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
Changing Engine Air Cleaner Filter
NOTE: ^
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals.
^ Replace the air filter as necessary for required maintenance.
1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case (upper). 2. Remove air cleaner
filter from air cleaner case. 3. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5391
Body Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 10307
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 8440
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 13271
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Recall 06V459000: Seat Belt Wire Harness Modification
Air Bag Harness: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 06V459000: Seat Belt Wire Harness
Modification
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan
North America, Inc. NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 06V459000 MFG'S REPORT DATE:
November 22, 2006
COMPONENT: Electrical System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 96500
SUMMARY: On certain crew cab trucks, the wires in the harness were routed through the rear
doors and into the body. These wires may break due to over bending of the harness as the door is
opened and closed. The harness contains wires for the driver seat belt pretensioner and for the
front passenger seat belt which is part of the occupant classification system. Wires for the rear
audio speakers are also contained in the harness.
CONSEQUENCE: If the wires for the seat belts and speaker wires break and make contact, there
is a possibility that the pretensioner may deploy. If this happens when the seat belt is retracted, it
will not be possible to use the seat belt. If one of the wires on the right side harness for the seat
belt tension sensor breaks, the passenger side front air bag will not deploy as designed in a frontal
collision increasing the risk of a crash and personal injury.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the wire harness cover with a different type that prevents over
bending of the harness and the harness will be rerouted free of charge. The recall is expected to
begin on or about February 19, 2007. owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 13678
Trailer Lamps: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 5135
Case 4
Page 7699
Optional Splice
Page 5560
12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install.
13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides.
14. Reinstall the IPDM cover.
15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first.
16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset
their ADP settings (ADP memory).
Page 12251
Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 9066
57. Remove the 5 screws (shown in the figure) from the center roof console.
58. Pull the console loose at the rear and let it hang in place.
59. Pull the door welt loose from the top and rear of the door opening.
CAUTION:
Page 1897
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 4)
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Mirror Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 12956
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 10834
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 2277
Optional Splice
Page 8962
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 843
7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle
Air Volume Learning will not be carried out
successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
- It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
- It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch
ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the
MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the
MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Page 12511
Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 7059
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
Removal and Installation
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.
3. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
4. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness.
5. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
6. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Installation
Page 13091
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 14262
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 13619
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 5075
Case 2
Page 5258
Case 11
Page 2163
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 13554
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 8781
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 4887
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 10927
^ Refer to Table A shown above for Speaker Adaptation applicability.
b. Use Table A to determine the correct Speaker Adaptation instructions to be used.
c. Have the customer perform Speaker Adaptation.
NOTE:
This will enhance the recognition rate of commands spoken by the customer.
Phone "Re-Pairing"
1. An incident or incidents may occur after a phone has been updated, or settings have been
changed.
2. A given incident or incidents may be resolved by pairing a phone a second time.
3. For "re-pairing" procedure, the steps below can be followed:
a. Turn off the phone, and then remove its battery.
b. Delete the phone from the current paired phone list on the vehicle Bluetooth(R) phone system.
c. Reinstall the phone battery, and then turn on the phone.
d. Follow the phone pairing instructions found in the device page of the
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth webpage.
e. Test the phone.
f. If the incident(s) still occurs, refer to the appropriate section of the Electronic Service Manual
(ESM) for further diagnosis.
Customer Information
Inform the customer of the website www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/ for future reference.
Page 8783
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 13499
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 1976
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3.
Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower).
INSTALLATION
1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air cleaner case
(upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet).
Page 8537
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 9870
Low Temperature Protection Control
The front air control will turn the compressor ON or OFF as determined by a signal detected by the
intake sensor and the ambient sensor.
When intake air temperature is higher than the preset value, the compressor turns ON. The
compressor turns OFF when intake air temperature is lower than the preset value. That preset
value is dependent on the ambient temperature, refer to the table.
Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch (Steps 1 - 2)
Service and Repair
Power Steering Bleeding: Service and Repair
Air Bleeding Hydraulic System
Incomplete air bleeding causes the following. When this happens, bleed air again. ^
Air bubbles in reservoir tank.
^ Clicking noise in oil pump.
^ Excessive buzzing in oil pump.
NOTE: When vehicle is stationary or while steering wheel is being turned slowly, some noise may
be heard from oil pump or gear. This noise is normal and does not affect any system.
1. Stop engine, and then turn steering wheel fully to right and left several times.
CAUTION: Do not allow steering fluid reservoir tank to go below the MIN level line. Check tank
frequently and add fluid as needed.
2. Run engine at idle speed. Turn steering wheel fully right and then fully left, hold for about three
seconds. Then check for fluid leakage. 3. Repeat step 2 several times at about three second
intervals.
CAUTION: Do not hold steering wheel in the locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is
the possibility that oil pump may be damaged.)
4. Check for air bubbles or cloudy fluid. 5. If air bubbles or cloudiness still exists, stop engine,
perform steps 2 and 3 again until air bubbles or cloudiness does not exist. 6. Stop engine, check
fluid level.
Page 11060
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 4332
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 11338
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 12982
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 1279
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 616
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 7207
2. Inspect all six flange bolts (see Figures 1 and 2).
a. If all six bolts are OK, loosen the flange bolts approximately half-turn and re-torque the bolts to
73 Nm (7.5 kg-m, 54 ft-lb). Submit a claim for the repair and return the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE:
Do NOT use an air tool to loosen the flange bolts.
b. If one or more flange bolts,
^ are missing
^ can be turned using a hand tool using minimal force
^ has a visible gap between the bolt head and the flange (see Figure 3)
Continue with step 3.
3. Remove the flange bolts.
NOTE:
Make sure you mark the drive shaft (axle) and mating differential side flange for proper
re-assembly.
4. Inspect the following items for damage:
^ both drive shaft (axle) flange and differential side flange mating surfaces
^ bolt holes and bolt hole threads
See below examples of OK and NG conditions.
a. If no damage is found, replace all flange bolts and torque bolts to 73 Nm (7.5 kg-m, 54 ft-lb).
Submit a claim for the repair and return the
Page 8818
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 2319
9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically.
Page 11303
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 9858
After disconnecting in-vehicle sensor connector M32, measure resistance between terminals 1 and
4 at sensor component side, using the table. If NG, replace in-vehicle sensor.
Page 5150
Case 3
Page 9890
Pulley
Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If contact surface of pulley shows signs of excessive
grooving, replace clutch disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley assembly should be
cleaned with a suitable solvent before reinstallation.
Coil
Check magnet coil for loose connections or any cracked insulation.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the magnet coil.
CAUTION: Be sure to align the magnet coil pin with the hole in the compressor front head.
2. Install the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver.
3. Install the pulley assembly using Tool and a wrench, then install the snap ring using snap ring
pliers.
Tool number : - (J-38873-A)
4. Install the clutch disc on the compressor shaft, together with the original shim(s). Press the
clutch disc down by hand.
Navigation System
Component Parts Location
Page 6687
1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "Components". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
4. Securely fasten A/T temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clip. 5. Install oil pan to
transmission case. 6. Connect the negative battery terminal
CAUTION: After completing installation, check for A/T fluid leakage and fluid level.
Page 13543
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Combination Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
Fuel Gauge Sender: Recalls Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009
Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56
vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some
fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which
could cause a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender
card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or
before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 11731
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 3829
Page 6549
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 8137
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 7900
6. Tighten bleed valve to the specified torque. Refer to "Components" (front disc brake),
"Components" (rear disc brake). 7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 at each wheel, with master cylinder
reservoir tank filled at least half way, bleeding air in order from the front left, rear
left, and front right bleed valves.
Page 14266
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 9915
Figure B-7
- The beam should be aimed between / through the slots in the fan shroud.
9. Measure the fan motor speed (RPM) and the fan motor voltage as follows:
a. Turn the Fan Motor Tester ON.
NOTE:
In the ON position, the LED light on the switch will illuminate yellow.
b. Press and hold the TEST button on the Phototach Digital Tachometer.
WARNING:
Do not shine or point the red light beam from the Phototach Digital Tachometer into anyone's eyes
(including your own).
b. Hold the digital tachometer about 4 inches away from the condenser fan.
c. Aim the red beam at the painted area on the fan blade.
Figure B-8
Page 2507
NOTE:
^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB.
Disclaimer
Page 3931
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 83
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 9719
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 608
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II.
^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information.
2. Compare your printout to the chart.
a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3.
b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply.
^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information.
3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows:
Page 11030
Optional Splice
Page 4999
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 2830
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 12094
Lifting Switch (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 12226
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Changeover Switch) Circuit Check (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 5137
Case 6
Page 5323
Case 4
Page 12747
2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows:
a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit
b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots
^ For Type A see Figure 1
^ For Type B see Figure 2
Page 12374
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 6545
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 10022
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 3398
Available Valve Lifter
Page 13920
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 1622
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 13929
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH (Steps 2 - 5)
Page 9712
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 4753
Page 6685
13. Connect revolution sensor connector.
14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips.
15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal
CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level.
Page 10268
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Technician Safety Information
Information Bus: Technician Safety Information
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER",
used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage
front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag
deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and
whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system
safely is included in the Restraint Systems.
WARNING:
- To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
- Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to
personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and
Air Bag Module, see the Restraint Systems.
- Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS
wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Precautions When Using CONSULT-II
When connecting CONSULT-II to data link connector, connect them through CONSULT-II
CONVERTER.
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II
1. Has CONSULT-II been used without connecting CONSULT-II CONVERTER on this vehicle?
- If YES, GO TO 2.
- If NO, GO TO 5.
2. Is there any indication other than indications relating to CAN communication system in the
self-diagnosis results?
- If YES, GO TO 3.
- If NO, GO TO 4.
3. Based on self-diagnosis results unrelated to CAN communication, carry out the inspection. 4.
Malfunctions may be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control units carrying out CAN
communication. Therefore, erase the self-diagnosis
results.
5. Diagnose CAN communication system. Refer to LAN-5, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK
FLOW". See: Testing and Inspection/Symptom
Related Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnostic Strategies/Work Flow
Page 9342
Repair Overview
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Lower Link Inspection
1. Raise the vehicle.
2. Locate and write down the "Lot Number" stamped on the bottom side of the suspension lower
links.
^ Refer to the Lot Number Locations below.
^ Armada and Pathfinder: Inspect front and rear (all 4) lower links.
^ Frontier, Titan, and Xterra: Inspect both front lower links.
3. Compare the Lot Number of each lower link to the Lot Number examples below.
Locations
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 8486
Multiple Junction Connector: Description and Operation
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
Page 6637
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 2483
CLAIMS INFORMATION
NOTE:
This repair can only be used in conjunction with a claim for Front Wheel Alignment (Op-Code
WD44AA) and must be submitted on a separate work order line.
Page 9829
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Locations
Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Location of Electrical Parts
Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009
Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56
vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some
fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which
could cause a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender
card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or
before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 829
ECM Inspection Table Part 1
Page 214
Repair Flow Chart
Specifications
Page 13548
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 3207
Engine Oil: Service and Repair
Changing Engine Oil
WARNING:
^ Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil is hot.
^ Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct
skin contact with used engine oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand
cleaner as soon as possible.
1. Remove engine front undercover using power tool. 2. Warm up engine, and check for oil leakage
from engine components. 3. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Loosen oil filler cap, then
remove drain plug. 5. Drain engine oil. 6. Install drain plug with new washer.
CAUTION: ^
Be sure to clean drain plug and install with new washer.
Oil pan drain plug: 34.3 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft. lbs.)
7. Refill with new engine oil.
CAUTION: ^
The refill capacity depends on the engine oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications
for reference only.
^ Always use the oil level gauge to determine when the proper amount of engine oil is in the
engine.
8. Warm up engine and check area around drain plug and oil filter for oil leakage. 9. Stop engine
and wait for 10 minutes.
10. Check engine oil level.
Page 12420
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 13074
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 6327
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 2086
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 11040
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 12777
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 1503
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 6799
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13874
Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection Rear Power Drop Glass Up Relay Check
Rear Power Drop Glass Up Relay Check (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 11015
AV-DVD-02
Page 63
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 1499
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 6552
Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 10587
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 6253
Page 6236
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Diagram Information and Instructions
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 1075
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 9193
Alignment: Service and Repair Preliminary Inspection
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
WARNING: Always adjust the alignment with the vehicle on a flat surface.
NOTE: If alignment is out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn suspension
parts before making any adjustments.
1. Check and adjust the wheel alignment with the vehicle under unladen conditions. "Unladen
conditions" means that the fuel, coolant, and lubricant
are full; and that the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in their designated positions.
2. Check the tires for incorrect air pressure and excessive wear. 3. Check the wheels for run out
and damage. 4. Check the wheel bearing axial end play. 5. Check the shock absorbers for leaks or
damage. 6. Check each mounting point of the suspension components for any excessive
looseness or damage. 7. Check each link, arm, and the rear suspension member for any damage.
8. Check the vehicle height.
- Verify the level using Consult-II memory register 1103 and set to 0 ° 10 mm (0 ° 0.39 inch) as
necessary.
Page 12993
Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 9937
Figure D-12, Figure D-13
- Align the protector along the 5 o'clock rib as shown.
- Don't cover up the bolt hole.
- Fold and stick the protector under the shroud.
Page 1327
Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 5064
Case 4
Page 2473
^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates.
^ Chock the left rear wheel.
Preliminary Checks:
3. Perform pre-alignment checks.
^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.)
^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation)
^ Tire pressure
^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components
^ Wheel bearing axial play
^ Ball joints of suspension arms
^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage
^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack)
^ Vehicle weight
> Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers
> Fuel level is full
Page 7439
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 2096
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 769
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 11831
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 1892
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 6397
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 10002
Medium Strength Thread-lock is available from the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product
Program.
Claims Information
Submit a CM line claim using the following claims coding:
Page 13668
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Engine - Engine Cover Removal Procedure
Access Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Engine Cover Removal Procedure
Classification: EM09-004
Reference: NTB09-071
Date: August 4, 2009
TITAN, ARMADA, & PATHFINDER ENGINE COVER REMOVAL
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) 2008 - 2010 Pathfinder
(R51) with V8 engine.
IF YOU CONFIRM
The engine cover needs to be removed for any reason;
ACTION:
Make sure to follow the steps in the Service Procedure of this bulletin.
CAUTION
^ Do Not pull up on the front of the cover.
^ There are two locating studs underneath the rear of the cover.
^ If you pull up on the front of the cover, it will break/damage the cover near the locating studs.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Damage to the engine cover caused by incorrect removal or installation will not be considered a
manufacturer defect and will not be covered under warranty.
Page 1754
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 5004
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 7001
Column Shift Models
REMOVAL
Floor shift 1. Remove A/T finisher. 2. Disconnect A/T device harness connector. 3. Disconnect
selector control cable. 4. Remove control device assembly.
Column shift 1. Remove the column shift control.
2. Remove the A/T cable clip lock plate and remove the cable from column shifter pin.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in reverse order of removal. ^
After installation is completed, be sure to check A/T position.
Page 10988
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 4975
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 13491
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Classification: EM09-015
Reference: NTB10-009
Date: January 19, 2010
REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure
described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the
exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are
made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
NOTE:
The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads
may not be considered a warrantable expense.
This procedure can be performed by two methods:
Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed
^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle.
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed.
Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle.
^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice.
Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is
performed on the vehicle.
Service Procedure
Rust Penetrant
Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure:
Page 10421
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 3205
Engine Oil: Vehicle Damage Warnings
SAE Viscosity Number GASOLINE ENGINE OIL
^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all temperatures. SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40 viscosity oils
may be used if the ambient temperature is above -18°C (0°F).
^ Use of 5W-30 viscosity oil will increase fuel economy.
Page 2779
1. Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment
gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be
displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines.
2. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using
recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant
identifier. If NG, refer to "Contaminated Refrigerant".
3. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and
refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to "Contaminated
Refrigerant".
4. Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure oil discharged
into the recovery/recycling equipment. 5. Drain the oil from the "old" (removed) compressor into a
graduated container and recover the amount of oil drained. 6. Drain the oil from the "new"
compressor into a separate, clean container. 7. Measure an amount of new oil installed equal to
amount drained from "old" compressor. Add this oil to "new" compressor through the suction port
opening.
8. Measure an amount of new oil equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this oil to
"new" compressor through the suction port
opening.
9. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of
oil at this time.
CAUTION: Do not add this 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil if only replacing the compressor.
Page 7966
d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process.
4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance.
^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed.
ROTOR INDEXING
When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been
removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of
rotor run-out.
1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty.
NOTE:
For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the
Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE.
2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only).
3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub.
4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5.
For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM.
5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug
nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only).
^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout.
6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit,
you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using
the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations
performed.
Disclaimer
Page 11000
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 8034
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Page 3235
CAUTION: Do not damage mating surface.
5. Remove the O-rings from the oil pump and front cover.
NOTE: Do not reuse O-rings.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Clean the oil strainer.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the oil pan (upper) using the following steps.
a. Apply liquid gasket thoroughly as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
CAUTION: Apply liquid gasket to outside of bolt hole for the hole shown by (star).
b. Install new O-rings to the oil pump and front cover side.
c. Tighten the bolts in numerical order as shown.
M6 × 30 mm (1.18 inch): No. 15, 16
Page 10648
Page 4577
Data Link Connector: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 3460
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 12936
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 13997
Rear Door Window Motor: Testing and Inspection Rear Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check
(Crew Cab)
Rear Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 9922
Figure C-8
a. Remove 3 screws from the front of the fender protector.
- Driver side only.
Figure C-9
b. Remove 2 bumper to fender screws.
- Driver side only.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11217
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 6565
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 14396
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 4127
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 13853
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 4490
Page 16
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 2798
Page 1748
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 6613
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 9821
Blower Motor Relay: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 9347
Page 3697
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 8531
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 14293
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Specifications
Fuel: Specifications
Fuel Requirements
Use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number
(research octane number 91).
CAUTION: Do not use leaded gasoline. Using leaded gasoline will damage the three way catalyst.
Using a fuel other than that specified could
adversely affect the emission control devices and systems, and could also affect the warranty
coverage validity.
Perform If Throttle Actuator Is Disconnected
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair Perform If Throttle Actuator Is
Disconnected
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the
throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each
time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition
switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Page 8994
- When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status.
2. Sleep waiting status
- Process to stop CAN communication is activated.
- All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN
communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status.
3. Sleep status
- IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode.
- CAN communication is stopped.
- When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
- When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
CAN Communication System Description
Refer to LAN-25, Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus
Page 8759
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 9909
Figure A-1
1. Look in the lower bumper area and locate the condenser fan motor.
Figure A-2
Page 5242
Case 14
Page 13581
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2666
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Remove the
low-pressure pipe.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipes with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-ring of the high/low-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 4945
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Idle Air Volume Learning
Idle Air Volume Learning
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within
the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
- Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
- Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are
satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a
moment.
- Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
- Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 degrees C (158 - 212 degrees F)
- Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch: ON
- Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp) On vehicles equipped with daytime light
systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is start the headlamp will not be
illuminated.
- Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
- Vehicle speed: Stopped
- Transmission: Warmed-up With CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T"
system indicates less than 0.9 V.
- Without CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal
Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed
Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode.
6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds.
Page 8517
Page 3939
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 12058
Sliding Motor Circuit Inspection (Step 4)
Page 11108
Pedal Positioning Switch: Testing and Inspection
Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 11050
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 12678
Page 8395
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 14275
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 13090
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 2063
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 7915
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 13682
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 9497
3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate
relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel and tire assembly. 6. Install wheel and tire
assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle.
NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed.
7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor.
Page 14435
Wiper Motor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 8725
k. Remove 2 bolts from the sides of the console.
^ Left side is shown, right side not shown.
l. Remove the center console from the vehicle.
9. Disconnect the harness SRS connector from the SRS control unit.
10. Remove the rear seat from the vehicle:
a. Move the jack out of the way.
b. Remove the center seat belt retractor anchor bolt.
c. Remove the 8 seat mounting bolts.
Page 6505
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KS
Component Description
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric
element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This
pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
Page 1097
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Interior - No/Erratic Seat Forward/Backward Operation
Power Seat Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - No/Erratic Seat Forward/Backward
Operation
Classification: BT05-052a
Reference: NTB05-105a
Date: October 31, 2008
FRONT POWER SEAT NO OR IMPROPER FORWARD / BACKWARD MOVEMENT
This bulletin has been amended to expand Applied Vehicles and to incorporate NTB05-056 into
this bulletin. No other changes have been made. Please discard the previous version of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) 2004 - 2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Quest
(V42) 2005 - 2007 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2007 Frontier (D40) 2004 - 2006 Altima (L31) 2004 2007 Maxima (A34)*
^ *2004 Maxima (A34); Applies to left and right front seats, with or without ADP (memory seat).
^ *2005 - 2006 Maxima (A34); Applies only to the left front (driver s) seat with ADP (memory seat).
APPLIED VINS: TA60 Built before: 5N1AA08A (*) 7N718400 A60 Built before: 1N6BA07B (*)
7N231607 V42 Built before: 5N1BV28U (*) 7N134315 A34 Built before: 1N4BA41E (*) 7C853209
D40 2005 - 2007 All VINS R51 2005 - 2007 All VINS L31 2004 - 2006 All VINS
APPLIED DATES: TA60 Built before: 05-Feb-2007 A60 Built before: 05-Feb-2007 V42 Built before:
15-Feb-2007 R51 All Dates D40 All Dates A34 Built before: 28-Feb-2007 L31 All Dates
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The seat slide motor or gear assembly needs to be replaced for any reason.
NOTE:
Incidents that require slide motor and gear assembly replacement include:
- The power seat has voltage (power) to it, but it will not move forward or backward.
- While moving the seat forward or backward, the seat won't track straight; it becomes cocked
(crooked) on the seat tracks.
- Noise from the slide motor or gears.
ACTION:
Replace only the Seat Slide Motor Kit listed in the Parts Information. Do Not replace the entire seat
adjuster assembly.
IMPORTANT:
Locations
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Page 14312
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 11820
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 14160
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 10874
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 13692
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Seat Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Classification: RS01-001B
Reference: NTB01-005B
Date: November 12, 2009
"D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION
This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s).
ACTION
Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to:
^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings.
^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
Page 5108
Case 7
Page 1811
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 1397
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Mirrors - Power/Manual Mirror Actuator Inoperative
Mirror Adjustment Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins Mirrors - Power/Manual Mirror Actuator
Inoperative
Classification: BT06-005
Reference: NTB06-074
Date: October 30, 2006
2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; MANUAL OR POWER DOOR
MIRROR ACTUATOR INOPERABLE
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004-2006 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM The door mirror actuator needs to be replaced.
ACTION
^ Do not replace the complete door mirror assembly.
^ Replace only the door mirror actuator.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 7263
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Specifications Snap Ring
Snap Ring - Model 2F1310
Snap Ring - Model 2S1350/3S1350
Page 4911
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 4778
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 1055
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 3821
Page 4343
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 12596
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Testing and Inspection
Fuel Injector Resistor: Testing and Inspection
DROPPING RESISTOR
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect dropping resistor harness connector.
3. Check resistance between dropping resistor terminals as 1 and 2.
Page 4653
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use
Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036.
1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM.
a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other
damage.
Page 10809
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8932
Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation
Specifications
Crankshaft Main Bearing: Specifications
Main Bearing Cap
Page 440
Body Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 10599
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 12985
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-071A Date: 100825
Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm
Reference: NTB10-071A
Date: August 25, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN EQUIPMENT/SERVICE PARTS SUSPENSION
LOWER LINK
This bulletin has been amended. The lower link inspection has been clarified. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC049
NHTSA# 10E-019
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40)
2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign for suspension lower link service parts that
fit MY 2004 through 2010 Armada and Titan and MY 2005 through 2010 Xterra, Pathfinder, and
Frontier vehicles. A small number of suspension lower link service parts sold between November
25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 may have welds that are out of specification.
Applied vehicle owners will be asked to take their vehicle to the dealer if a lower link on their
vehicle was replaced between November 25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 or if they do not know
whether a lower link was replaced during that time.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
If a vehicle owner believes his or her vehicle may have received affected suspension lower link
service parts, it is the dealer's responsibility to inspect and, if necessary, replace the lower links
pursuant to the instructions on this bulletin.
Applied Vehicles with the original factory installed lower links are not subject to this service parts
recall campaign, however some 2010MY Applied Vehicles may be subject to the Suspension
Lower Link vehicles recall campaign (PC047). Please review Service Comm to confirm campaign
eligibility.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC049 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
Page 13648
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 13172
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 9711
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 2937
3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2.
^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process
Tire:
^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area)
NOTE:
Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may
become un-balanced.
Wheel:
^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area.
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area
4. Before inflating the tire:
^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks.
Page 10999
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 12184
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpeting, etc. when performing this Procedure.
Preliminary Steps
NOTE:
^ Steps 1, 2 and 3 below, only apply to vehicles equipped with Front Side (SRS) Air Bags.
^ These vehicles equipped with Front Side (SRS) Air Bags have a tag on the front seatback (see
Figure 1).
1. Write down all radio station presets.
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Wait at least 3 minutes after the negative battery cable is disconnected before proceeding with
step 4 below.
Tilt Seat and Add Spacer Washer
4. Remove the four bolts that secure the driver's seat to the floor.
^ Refer to section SE in the Service Manual (ESM) for seat removal information.
5. Carefully tilt the seat back to reach the bottom of the seat (see Figure 2).
^ If needed, disconnect electrical connectors so you can tilt the seat.
6. Install the new Spacer Washer as shown in Figure 2.
^ Make sure the new Spacer Washer is fully inserted and locked into position.
Page 8632
Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction
- When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned
OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction.
- When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch
signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay.
Page 12361
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 1536
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection
Ambient Sensor Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Ambient Sensor
The ambient sensor is attached on the radiator core support (left side). It detects ambient
temperature and converts it into a value which is then input into the front air control.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INPUT PROCESS
The front air control includes a processing circuit for the ambient sensor input. However, when the
temperature detected by the ambient sensor increases quickly, the processing circuit retards the
front air control function. It only allows the front air control to recognize an ambient temperature
increase of 0.33 degree C (0.6 degree F) per 100 seconds.
This prevents constant adjustments due to momentary conditions, such as stopping after high
speed driving. Although the actual ambient temperature has not changed, the temperature
detected by the ambient sensor will increase. This is because the heat from the engine
compartment can radiate to the front grille area, location of the ambient sensor.
Diagnostic Procedure For Ambient Sensor (Steps 1 - 2)
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab)
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab)
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 14032
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 4860
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 754
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 8550
4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Self-Diagnostic Results
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Self-diagnosis results are
displayed.
Display Item List - Self-Diagnostic Results
Display Item List
Page 12071
9. Detach 2 harness clips as shown from seat cushion pan.
WARNING:
Before removal, make careful note of the exact routing and clip placement of the harnesses for
reassembly.
Page 567
Page 11316
LT-T/TOW-03
Page 11317
LT-T/TOW-04
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 7987
d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process.
4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance.
^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed.
ROTOR INDEXING
When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been
removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of
rotor run-out.
1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty.
NOTE:
For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the
Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE.
2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only).
3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub.
4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5.
For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM.
5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug
nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only).
^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout.
6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit,
you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using
the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations
performed.
Disclaimer
Page 9697
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 36
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 8593
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 12154
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 3633
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 13269
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 12147
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 4674
Page 7556
3. Remove companion flange self-lock nut, using Tool.
Tool number: KV40104000 ( - )
4. Put a matching mark on top of the front drive shaft in line with the mark on the companion flange.
CAUTION: Use paint to make the matching mark on the front drive shaft. Do not damage the front
drive shaft.
5. Remove companion flange, using suitable tool.
6. Remove front oil seal from front case, using Tool.
Tool number: KV381054S0 (J-34286)
CAUTION: Do not damage the front case.
INSTALLATION
Locations
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Diagram Information and Instructions
Alarm Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 3025
1. Install the camshaft in the cylinder head. 2. Install the camshaft sprocket to the camshaft. 3.
Measure the camshaft sprocket runout.
Runout: Less than 0.15 mm (0.0059 inch) ^
If measurement exceeds the specification, replace the camshaft sprocket.
Valve Lifter
Check if the surface of the valve lifter has any wear or cracks. ^
If any damage is found, replace the valve lifter.
^ Select the thickness of the head so that the valve clearance is within the standard when
replacing.
Valve Lifter Clearance
Valve Lifter Diameter
^ Measure the diameter of the valve lifter. Standard: 33.977 - 33.987 mm (1.3377 - 1.3381 inch)
Valve Lifter Hole Diameter
^ Measure the diameter of the valve lifter hole of the cylinder head, using suitable tool. Standard:
34.000 - 34.016 mm (1.3386 - 1.3392 inch)
Calculation of Valve Lifter Clearance (Valve lifter clearance) = (valve lifter hole diameter) - (valve
lifter diameter)
Page 12548
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 7702
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 13348
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 1)
Page 859
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 11910
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 5042
Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Reproduced
1. Put a check mark to "No indication" if some of unit names listed on the column of diagnosis
system selection screen of a check sheet table are not
displayed on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen attached to the check sheet.
NOTE: Put a check mark to "No indication" of AUTO DRIVE POS. because AUTO DRIVE POS. is
not displayed on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
2. Confirm the unit name that "UNKWN" is displayed from the copy of "CAN DIAG SUPPORT
MNTR" screen of "ENGINE" attached to the check
sheet, and then put a check mark to the check sheet table.
NOTE: In "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" screen, "UNKWN" is displayed on "VDC/TCS/ABS",
"METER/M&A;", "BCM/SEC" and "IPDM E/R". Put a check mark to it.
3. Confirm the unit name that "UNKWN" is displayed on the copy of "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR"
screen of "A/T" as well as "ENGINE". And
then, put a check mark to the check sheet table.
Page 10638
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Diagram Information and Instructions
Headlamp Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 4218
9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads.
^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12.
Page 717
Page 7568
4. Remove bolts and detach control device.
INSTALLATION
1. Install new O-ring to transfer control device.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply petroleum jelly.
2. Install transfer control device.
a. Turn control shift rod fully counterclockwise using flat-bladed screwdriver, and then put mark on
control shift rod.
b. Align transfer control device shaft cutout with mark on control shift rod, and install.
NOTE: Turn transfer control device when transfer control device connection does not match.
Page 2769
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner
Contaminated Refrigerant
Contaminated Refrigerant
If a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in a vehicle, your options are:
- Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated
refrigerant into the atmosphere.
- Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage your service equipment and
refrigerant supply.
- Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the
contamination may have occurred.
- If you choose to perform the repair, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and
containers. Do not recover contaminated refrigerant into your existing service equipment. If your
facility does not have dedicated recovery equipment, you may contact a local refrigerant product
retailer for available service. This refrigerant must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and
local regulations. In addition, replacement of all refrigerant system components on the vehicle is
recommended.
- If the vehicle is within the warranty period, the air conditioner warranty is void. Please contact
NISSAN Customer Affairs for further assistance.
HFC-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure
REFRIGERANT LINES
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure
SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Discharging Refrigerant
WARNING: Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose
and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified service
equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or SAE
J2201 HFC-134a (R-134a) recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate
the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained
from the refrigerant and oil manufacturers.
Page 13621
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 13966
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 13317
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1199
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 913
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 12562
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 6947
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 11825
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 4481
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 1906
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 5097
Case 11
Page 14030
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 8163
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 784
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 657
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Recall 06V459000: Seat Belt Wire Harness Modification
Seat Belt Tensioner: Recalls Recall 06V459000: Seat Belt Wire Harness Modification
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan
North America, Inc. NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 06V459000 MFG'S REPORT DATE:
November 22, 2006
COMPONENT: Electrical System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 96500
SUMMARY: On certain crew cab trucks, the wires in the harness were routed through the rear
doors and into the body. These wires may break due to over bending of the harness as the door is
opened and closed. The harness contains wires for the driver seat belt pretensioner and for the
front passenger seat belt which is part of the occupant classification system. Wires for the rear
audio speakers are also contained in the harness.
CONSEQUENCE: If the wires for the seat belts and speaker wires break and make contact, there
is a possibility that the pretensioner may deploy. If this happens when the seat belt is retracted, it
will not be possible to use the seat belt. If one of the wires on the right side harness for the seat
belt tension sensor breaks, the passenger side front air bag will not deploy as designed in a frontal
collision increasing the risk of a crash and personal injury.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the wire harness cover with a different type that prevents over
bending of the harness and the harness will be rerouted free of charge. The recall is expected to
begin on or about February 19, 2007. owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3742
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 758
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 6717
Page 41
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 1771
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
ABS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 6454
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 10502
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 14313
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 7744
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
NOTE: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "Components". See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and
Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
Page 6781
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 10917
Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch)
Check (Crew Cab)
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 6876
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 11734
Power Door Lock Actuator: Testing and Inspection Door Lock Actuator Check (Front LH)
Door Lock Actuator Check (Front LH) (Step 1)
Door Lock Actuator Check (Front LH) (Step 2)
Page 5322
Case 3
Page 10227
Page 5559
^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay.
9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay.
^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without
causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals.
10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6).
11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs.
Page 11165
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 2668
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Remove the
low-pressure pipe.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipes with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-ring of the high/low-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 3621
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 3031
Camshaft: Service and Repair
CAMSHAFT
REMOVAL
1. Remove the RH bank and LH bank rocker covers. 2. Obtain compression TDC of No. 1 cylinder.
3. Remove the RH bank and LH bank timing chain case cover.
4. Paint alignment marks on the RH bank (A) timing chain links (C) LH (B) timing chain links (D)
and aligning with the camshaft sprocket alignment
marks (E) and (F).
5. Remove the LH bank timing chain tensioner using the following steps.
WARNING: Plunger, spring, and spring seat pop out when squeezing return-proof clip without
holding plunger head. It may cause serious injuries. Always hold plunger head when removing.
Page 8450
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 1566
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
^ For Titan and Armada: follow the procedure outlined in this bulletin for intake sensor replacement.
^ For Quest, Xterra, Frontier and Pathfinder: refer to the appropriate section in the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for intake sensor replacement.
1. Remove six bolts from the glove box.
2. Remove glove box. The intake sensor is located behind the glove box.
3. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
4. Remove the intake sensor by pulling it up and out from the front heater and cooling unit assy.
5. Install new intake sensor in reverse order of removal and connect the intake sensor electrical
connector.
6. Install glove box in reverse order of removal.
Page 10484
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 1032
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 9103
31. Snap loose the armrest. Use a plastic trim tool.
32. Remove the 3 bolts shown in Figure C40.
33. Remove the rear door panel.
^ Use a plastic trim tool.
Page 10352
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 9741
Optional Splice
Page 14475
Page 14378
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 1439
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 12479
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 8333
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 10418
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 321
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9988
Figure D-4
3. Install Protector 1 around the fan harness:
- Wrap / roll the protector tightly around the harness.
- While holding the protector rolled tightly, remove the adhesive backing and secure the protector.
NOTE:
The protector should slide on the harness.
Figure D-5
4. Remove the adhesive backing from Protector 2 and install it around protector 1:
- Fingers / slits on protector 2 must be facing the fan motor.
- Align the bottom of protector 2 fingers with the end of protector 1.
Page 3520
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 4813
Exploded View
Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Exploded View
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
Exploded View
Page 94
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 9055
d. Take the harness branch loose from the body.
17. Remove the lower anchor bolt for the rear seat belt.
18. Remove the lower side finisher.
^ Use a plastic trim tool.
19. Remove the seat belt retractor; 1 bolt.
20. Remove the harness ground bolt.
21. Remove the floor mat holder.
Page 12727
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 2347
Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Check (Step 3)
Page 12660
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 1)
Page 13077
Tachometer: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 9060
34. Disconnect the 5 connectors shown in the figure.
NOTE:
The passenger side will have a 6th connector (not shown).
35. If the result for Inspection Procedure 1 was NG (seat belt retractor will not extend or retract;
remove the 2 seat belt retractor bolts and remove the seat belt.
^ During reassembly, install a new seat belt.
NOTE:
Seat belt retractor with seat belt pretensioner should be disposed of in accordance with local and
state regulations.
36. Take the harness loose from the door mounting points.
37. Pull the harness out of the door.
Harness Replacement Part 2 (Includes Seat Belt Replacement, If Needed)
Locations
Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Engine - Drive Belt Squeaking Noise
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-058 Date: 080606
Engine - Drive Belt Squeaking Noise
Classification: EM-08-002
Reference: NTB08-058
Date: June 6, 2008
TITAN / ARMADA; DRIVE BELT SQUEAK NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2008 Armada (TA60) 2006-2008 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is a squeak noise coming from the drive belt.
ACTION
A. Check to see if the drive belt auto tensioner is also noisy. If it is, you will replace it as part of this
Service Procedure.
B. Check the alignment of the power steering pump/pulley to the crankshaft pulley using a
straightedge. If it is mis-aligned, perform the steps in this Bulletin to align it.
C. Clean the crankshaft pulley belt ribs.
D. Replace the drive belt and, if necessary, replace the drive belt auto tensioner.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 2456
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Page 4248
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 1447
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 4986
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 3070
^ Place a V-block on a precise flat table to support the journals on both ends of the crankshaft.
^ Measure at No. 3 journal using suitable tool.
^ While rotating crankshaft, read the movement of the pointer.
^ Half of the movement shows the runout. Limit: Less than 0.05 mm (0.002 inch)
^ If measurement exceeds the limit, replace crankshaft.
Page 5219
Case 8
Page 923
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 307
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 5279
Case 13
Page 479
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 6660
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 11198
Alarm Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 5629
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 7339
A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate
Page 2799
Page 13764
Combination Switch Inspection (Step 4)
Page 12434
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 9037
^ Each dealer was shipped one pair of Vinyl Tube Scissors.
^ Use these scissors when removing the wiring harness vinyl tubing during the installation of the
Update Kit.
CAUTION:
It is very important that you use the Vinyl Tube Scissors when removing the wiring harness vinyl
tubing. Failure to use the Vinyl Tube Scissors for this procedure could cause damage to the
electrical wiring and may affect vehicle electrical system functions.
^ Replacement or additional Vinyl Tube Scissors can be ordered by completing and faxing the
special tool order form which is available on NNAnet.com under My Documents in the
Parts/Campaign and Service/Campaign categories.
NOTE:
^ If replacement of a wiring harness is required, many trim and finisher parts will be removed.
^ Plastic "Trim Tool Set" J-46534 (an "essential tool") should be used when removing trim and
finisher parts. This tool is available from TECH-MATE.
Page 10212
Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system. 2. Drain the coolant from the engine cooling
system. 3. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 4. Disconnect the high/low pressure
pipes from the expansion valve. 5. Move the two front seats to the rearmost position on the seat
track. 6. Disconnect the battery negative terminal and battery positive terminal. 7. Remove the
instrument panel and console panel. See: Body and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard /
Instrument Panel/Service and Repair 8. Remove the steering column. 9. Disconnect the instrument
panel wire harness at the RH and LH in-line connector brackets, and the fuse block (J/B) electrical
connectors. Refer to
"Harness Layout".
10. Disconnect the steering member from each side of the vehicle body.
Page 1033
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 2977
8. Strike the bearing ring retainer using a suitable chisel and hammer, with the chisel positioned
across the drilled hole. Break the bearing ring
retainer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not heat or cut the axle shaft bearing or bearing ring retainer with a torch during
removal, doing so will damage the axle shaft.
9. Remove the axle shaft bearing cage studs using a suitable hammer or press.
10. Pull the axle shaft bearing off of the axle shaft using Tool and a suitable press.
Tool number: ST30031000
CAUTION: ^
Do not tighten the Tool against the axle shaft.
^ Do not heat or cut the axle shaft bearing or bearing ring retainer with a torch during removal,
doing so will damage the axle shaft.
11. Remove the axle oil seal and discard.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
12. Remove the wheel bearing cage.
NOTE: ^
If reinstalling the old axle shaft, it may not be necessary to remove the ABS sensor rotor. Inspect
the ABS sensor rotor and replace as necessary.
^ The ABS sensor rotor cannot be reused after it is removed. If replacing the axle shaft, install a
new ABS sensor rotor on the new axle shaft.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Axle Shaft ^
Clean and remove all nicks and burrs.
^ Check for straightness and distortion. Replace if necessary.
^ Inspect machined surfaces for evidence of overheating, damage and wear. Replace if necessary.
^ Measure the bearing ring retainer axle journal diameter. Replace if necessary Bearing ring
retainer axle journal diameter (minimum): 39.726 mm (1.5640 inch)
Axle Shaft Bearing and Cup ^
Check that the axle shaft bearing and cup roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting and
wear. Replace if necessary.
Axle Shaft Bearing Cage ^
Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary.
Axle Shaft Housing ^
Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary
INSTALLATION
1. If installing a new axle shaft, install a new ABS sensor rotor onto the new axle shaft.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old ABS sensor rotor.
2. Install the axle shaft bearing cage. 3. Install a new axle oil seal.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 9634
Diagnostic Procedure For Defroster Door Motor (Steps 5 - 8)
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Page 5061
Case 1
Page 8760
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5633
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 9623
Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Passenger) (Steps 16 - 18)
Page 14168
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 1183
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 3529
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 12423
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 14073
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 3602
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 6870
Page 9694
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Universal Joint: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Classification: PD10-001
Reference: NTB10-052
Date: April 8, 2010
NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL
BEARINGS)
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40)
2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an
Applied Vehicle.
Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex
effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is
exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced.
ACTION
Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings).
^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement
can resolve the incident, should it occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the
electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and
appropriate coding for repairs preformed.
Page 576
Page 6948
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 14147
condition.
A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify wiper scratches as a start point of
cracks in the glass.
^ Inspect the wiper paths (may be a single scratch of a group of scratches)
^ Small scratches can cause a small rupture in the outer glass surface, which can lead to a crack
from thermal conditions, vehicle vibration during
driving, or wind pressure.
A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify metal object scratches as a start
point of cracks in the glass.
^ Scratches can occur from metal objects such as keys and metal buttons.
^ These scratches are typically sharp and can be found anywhere on the glass surface.
^ Thoroughly examine the entire length of the crack to identify any scratch as a start point.
^ Small scratches can cause a small rupture in the outer glass surface, which can lead to a crack
from thermal conditions, vehicle vibration during
driving, or wind pressure.
A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify scratches caused by a
contaminated towel as a start point of cracks in the glass.
^ Scratches can occur from wiping the glass with a towel that has sand particles or dirt on it.
Page 3177
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine and confirm:
^ if a squeak noise is coming from the drive belt
and
^ using a stethoscope or similar tool, if the drive belt auto tensioner is making abnormal noise.
2. Turn the engine off.
3. Write down the radio presets for later reprogramming.
4. Remove intake duct and engine cover.
5. Disconnect battery, negative cable first, and wait at least 3 minutes before proceeding to step 6.
6. Remove drive belt and drive belt auto tensioner. Refer to section EM of the Electronic Service
Manual for removal procedure.
7. Lift up vehicle by placing it on a hoist.
8. Remove front right wheel.
9. Remove fender protector. Refer to section EXT of the ESM for removal procedure.
10. Remove engine under cover (6 bolts).
11. Check the pulley alignment as follows:
Brake Booster
Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Brake Booster
With ABS or ABLS
BRAKE BOOSTER
REMOVAL
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to deform or bend brake piping while removing and installing brake booster.
^ Replace clevis pin if it is damaged.
^ Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If brake booster is tilted or inclined
during installation, dash panel may damage the threads.
^ Attach the check valve in the correct direction.
1. Remove engine room cover with power tool. 2. Remove engine air duct assembly. 3. Remove
brake piping from brake master cylinder. 4. Remove brake master cylinder. 5. Remove vacuum
hose from brake booster. 6. Remove brake pedal attachment snap pin and clevis pin from inside
the vehicle. 7. Remove nuts on brake booster and brake pedal assembly. 8. Remove brake booster
assembly from dash panel.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Output Rod Length Inspection
1. Using a suitable vacuum pump, apply a vacuum of -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.69 inHg) to brake
booster. 2. Check output rod length.
Standard dimension when vacuum -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.69 inHg): 15.6 - 15.9 mm (0.614 0.626 inch)
Page 9129
Page 8922
Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Auto Active Test
Auto Active Test
DESCRIPTION
- In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive
signal to the following systems: Rear window defogger (crew cab only)
- Front wipers
- Tail, parking, and license lamps
- Front fog lamps
- Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
- A/C compressor (magnetic clutch)
- Cooling fan
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass
damage by wiper operation).
NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield
beforehand.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door
switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds
after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6. After a
series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF.
CAUTION: Be sure to perform BL-36, "Door Switch Check (King Cab)" when the auto active test
cannot be performed. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch Check (King Cab)
INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE
- When auto active test mode is actuated, the six steps are repeated three times.
Concept of Auto Active Test
- IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN
communication line. Therefore, when auto
Page 4515
Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM and IPDM E/R
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R
- Panic system.
- Vehicle security (theft warning) system.
- NVIS (NATS) system.
- Headlamp, tail lamp, front fog lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems.
- Front wiper and washer system.
Page 6765
Page 7317
Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 7589
Components
REMOVAL
1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Disconnect transfer
control device harness connector. 3. Remove breather hose from transfer control device.
Page 7167
4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers.
5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools.
CAUTION:
^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully
so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft
housing.
^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately using a Nissan approved brake
cleaner.
6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly.
7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and
cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary.
8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member.
9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft
housing.
Page 10190
2. Take the tie-wrap mount loose (see Figure 3).
3. Measure 5 mm from the tie-wrap (see Figure 3).
4. Carefully cut the tape off of the harness as shown in Figure 3.
^ Use scissors with a blunt end. Don't damage the wires inside the harness.
Page 10573
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 12429
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 5124
Case 7
Page 1301
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11305
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 5511
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Service and Repair
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
Changing Engine Air Cleaner Filter
NOTE: ^
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals.
^ Replace the air filter as necessary for required maintenance.
1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case (upper). 2. Remove air cleaner
filter from air cleaner case. 3. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5410
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 13249
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Service and Repair
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair
LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove steering column cover. 2. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch
toward driver door and disconnect from the base.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Engine - Engine Cover Removal Procedure
Access Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Engine Cover Removal Procedure
Classification: EM09-004
Reference: NTB09-071
Date: August 4, 2009
TITAN, ARMADA, & PATHFINDER ENGINE COVER REMOVAL
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) 2008 - 2010 Pathfinder
(R51) with V8 engine.
IF YOU CONFIRM
The engine cover needs to be removed for any reason;
ACTION:
Make sure to follow the steps in the Service Procedure of this bulletin.
CAUTION
^ Do Not pull up on the front of the cover.
^ There are two locating studs underneath the rear of the cover.
^ If you pull up on the front of the cover, it will break/damage the cover near the locating studs.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Damage to the engine cover caused by incorrect removal or installation will not be considered a
manufacturer defect and will not be covered under warranty.
Page 13866
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 13498
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 6402
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 13164
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Specifications
Lifter / Lash Adjuster: Specifications
Valve Lifter
Available Valve Lifter
Page 8021
Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Drain and Refill
Drain and Refill
CAUTION: ^
Refill with new brake fluid.
^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
^ Do not let brake fluid splash on the painted surfaces of the body. This might damage the paint, so
if splashing it, immediately wipe off the area and wash away with water.
^ Before servicing, disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or battery
negative cable.
1. Connect a vinyl tube to each bleed valve.
2. Depress brake pedal, loosen each bleed valve, and gradually remove brake fluid.
3. Make sure there is no foreign material in reservoir tank, and refill with new brake fluid. 4. Rest
foot on brake pedal. Loosen bleed valve. Slowly depress pedal until it stops. Tighten bleed valve.
Release brake pedal. Repeat this process a
few times, then pause to add new brake fluid to master cylinder. Continue until new brake fluid
flows out. Bleed air.
Page 13870
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 10827
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 6990
Shifter A/T: Adjustments
Adjustment of A/T Position
1. Loosen nut of control cable. 2. Place PNP switch and selector lever in "P" position. 3. After
pushing the control cable in the direction shown with a force of 9.8 Nm (1 kg-m, 2.2 ft. lbs.), release
it. This is in the natural state, tighten
control cable nut to specifications. Control cable nut: 14.5 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.)
Page 12377
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 9835
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 7963
^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior
to the introduction of the NAO compound.
^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level
of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads.
^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must
decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance.
^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake
pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service.
Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise:
^ Occurs with or without braking.
^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor.
^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using
the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service
Manual procedures.
Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop:
^ This is sometimes called "creep groan".
^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary.
Groan noise during stopping:
^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking.
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to
Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes:
^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes
are applied.
^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal.
^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur.
^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly.
^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information.
^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started:
^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary.
^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the
first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the
first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started.
Rear Brake Squeal:
^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or
drums.
^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components.
WARNING:
Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust
precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment.
Page 14486
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Automatic Air Conditioner
Air Duct: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Page 12051
19. Make sure the seat track mounting tab and the rear stopper are touching (see Figure 8).
20. Measure the distance between the gear box and the mounting tab (see left side of Figure 8).
21. Measure and adjust the other seat track mounting tab to the same distance (see right side of
Figure 8).
Figure 9
22. Replace all six rubber grommets with the new ones from the kit 3 on each side (see Figure 9).
23. Put the new worm gears, gear boxes, and drive cable assembly (all as one unit) back into the
seat frame and move both seat tracks back into
position on top of the seat track mounting tabs.
Figure 10
CAUTION:
Avoid bending the drive cable. Bending the drive cable will create a noise when the seat is
operated.
Figure 11
Page 1501
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 14158
Optional Splice
Page 5384
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation
PSP SENSOR
Component Description
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and
detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering
load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric
throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed
and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
Page 3995
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 1165
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 12934
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Locations
Seat Memory Switch: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14233
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 8058
Parking Brake Shoe: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: Clean the brakes with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the hazard of airborne
particles or other materials.
NOTE: Remove the disc rotor only with the parking brake pedal completely in the released position.
1. Remove the rear disc rotor. 2. Remove the return springs. 3. Remove the adjuster. 4. Disconnect
the rear cable from the toggle lever, if necessary.
^ Remove pin retainer and withdraw cable end from toggle lever.
5. Remove the retainers, anti-rattle pins and shoes.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Refer to PB-6, "COMPONENTS" and apply brake grease to the specified points during assembly.
Page 13577
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14339
1. Remove Washer Tank Assembly.
^ Refer to "Removal and Installation of Washer Tank" in the "WW" chapter of the ESM.
2. Remove washer motor and washer pump seal.
^ Photo of washer motor and washer pump seal.
3. Replace washer pump seal.
NOTE:
Lubricate the pump seal with washer fluid to ease installation.
4. Install washer motor onto the washer tank.
5. Reinstall the washer tank in reverse order of removal.
Disclaimer
Page 6607
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 3178
A. Set straight edge on front surface of crankshaft pulley to check the clearance at the top of the
pump pulley. See Figure 2.
B. Check clearance of lower part of the power steering pump pulley and crankshaft pulley. See
Figure 3.
NOTE:
The goal is to make sure the power steering pump pulley is aligned as true as possible with the
crankshaft pulley.
^ If the pulleys are aligned there is no need to adjust the bracket, skip ahead to step 17.
^ If the pulleys are not aligned, go on to step 12.
Page 13625
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 5573
^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap).
e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet.
4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under
the dash):
a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly
(cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3).
b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads.
C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners.
5. Clean the negative battery cable connections.
a. Write down all the radio presets.
b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection.
c. Clean the following items:
^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides)
^ Body connection bolt (head and threads)
^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap)
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Battery negative post
^ Negative cable battery terminal
d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery).
e. Reprogram the radio presets.
6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs.
Page 10251
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Capacity
..............................................................................................................................................................
0.70 ± 0.05 kg (1.54± 0.11 lb)
Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a
bulb check. If the MIL does not light up, refer to
"WARNING LAMPS", or see "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR".
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic
system has detected an engine system
malfunction.
Page 6320
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 574
Page 1534
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 6530
c. Tighten bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
3. Install breather hose to transfer control device. 4. Connect transfer control device harness
connector. 5. After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position
between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to
"Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement". See: Transmission
and Drivetrain/Transfer Case/Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Precautions For
Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement
Page 811
ECM Inspection Table Part 1
Page 6841
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Checking A/T Fluid
Checking A/T Fluid
1. Warm up the engine. 2. Check for any fluid leaks. 3. Remove the ATF level gauge bolt.
4. Before driving, the fluid level can be checked at fluid temperatures of 30° to 50°C (86° to 122°F)
using the "COLD" range on the ATF level
gauge as follows: a. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake. b. Start the
engine and move the selector lever through each gear position. Shift the selector lever into the "P"
position. c. Check the fluid level with the engine idling. d. Remove the ATF level gauge and wipe it
clean with a lint-free paper.
CAUTION: When wiping the fluid from the ATF level gauge, always use a lint-free paper, not a
cloth.
e. Re-insert the ATF level gauge into the charging pipe until the cap contacts the top of the
charging pipe as shown.
CAUTION: To check fluid level, insert the ATF level gauge until the cap contacts the top of the
charging pipe, with the gauge reversed from the normal inserted position.
f. Remove the ATF level gauge and note the fluid level. If the fluid level is at low side of range, add
fluid to the transmission through the charging pipe.
CAUTION: Do not overfill the transmission with fluid.
5. Drive the vehicle to increase the ATF temperature to 80°C (176°F).
Page 4559
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12472
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5153
Case 6
Page 7391
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9727
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair
AMBIENT SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the ambient sensor electrical connector.
NOTE: The ambient sensor is located behind the front bumper, in front of the condenser.
2. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 14354
1. Remove Washer Tank Assembly.
^ Refer to "Removal and Installation of Washer Tank" in the "WW" chapter of the ESM.
2. Remove washer motor and washer pump seal.
^ Photo of washer motor and washer pump seal.
3. Replace washer pump seal.
NOTE:
Lubricate the pump seal with washer fluid to ease installation.
4. Install washer motor onto the washer tank.
5. Reinstall the washer tank in reverse order of removal.
Disclaimer
Page 14163
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 7746
13. Connect revolution sensor connector.
14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips.
15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal
CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level.
Page 3901
Page 10972
8. Re-install (2) 10 mm screws. Torque to 3.6 Nm (0.37 Kg-m, 32 in-lb.)
9. Raise DVD screen.
Disclaimer
Page 11146
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 13739
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 14035
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 1195
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5481
Page 3571
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Description and Operation
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Component Description
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay.
The throttle control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is
turned ON, the ECM sends an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is
provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to
throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM.
Page 3735
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 8500
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Service and Repair
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair
Bleeding Brake System
Image Symbols
Page 1438
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 3136
2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and
forth) movement (see Example 2):
^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm.
^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended.
Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped)
No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible.
Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the rotor.
NOTE:
The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is
removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected.
1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel.
2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front.
^ Pulley should be locked.
^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator.
3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front.
Body - Water on Front Floor After Rain or Washing
Cowl: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Water on Front Floor After Rain or Washing
Classification: BT07-011
Reference: NTB07-034
Date: may 9, 2007
2004 - 2008 TITAN AND ARMADA; WATER ON FRONT FLOOR AFTER RAIN OR WASH
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2008 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2008 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The front floor is wet (left or right side) when it rains or when the vehicle is washed.
NOTE:
If the floor is wet on the passenger side only when using the A/C, this bulletin does not apply - see
NTB05-112.
ACTIONS
1. Apply water to the windshield/cowl area with a garden hose at medium flow and check for water
leaks.
2. If water is leaking (floor is wet), continue to apply the water until you find the source of the leak.
3. Use 3M(TM) Fast 'n Firm(TM) Seam Sealer-or equivalent-to seal the leak.
4. Allow the sealer to cure, and then recheck for leaks with the garden hose.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual - Section UY - and use the appropriate
warranty claims coding.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Apply water to the windshield/cowl area with a garden hose at medium flow and check for water
leaks.
^ Make sure to check underneath the carpet and underneath the rubber mat covering the engine
wall.
2. If water is leaking (floor is wet), continue to apply the water until you find the source of the leak.
^ Check body seam seal areas behind the dash and on the floor.
Page 1691
2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows:
a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit
b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots
^ For Type A see Figure 1
^ For Type B see Figure 2
Page 6724
Page 10000
Figure E-5
5. Take the wire you removed from connector E120 and put it into the Maxi Fuse connector. Make
sure to put it in the correct slot as shown in Figure
E-5.
6. Insert the wire from the Maxi Fuse into the slot of connector E120 (see Figure E-5).
NOTE: -
The terminals will not snap in upside down.
- If the terminal won't snap-in, you are trying to put it in upside down; turn it over.
7. Reconnect connector E120.
8. Connect the Maxi Fuse connector.
Page 9943
- Count the slots in the fan shroud to confirm locations as needed.
17. Return to Procedure C (step 10) for fan assembly installation.
Procedure E - Install Maxi Fuse
(Install the Maxi Fuse only when a new fan is installed)
Figure E-1
NOTE:
Maxi Fuse is installed only when replacing the fan motor assembly with a new one. The battery
should already be disconnected and the radio station presets should have been recorded before
removing the fan motor at the beginning of procedure C.
Figure E-2
1. Remove the IPDM E/R upper cover.
- IPDM E/R = Intelligent Power Distribution Module, Engine Room.
2. Remove the relay and fuse cover.
Page 10918
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 2052
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 5040
ACQUISITION OF DATA BY CONSULT-II
Attach the data acquired by CONSULT-II on the check sheet determined according to CAN system
type.(For display control unit, transfer the data from the display screen of the vehicle to the CAN
diagnosis support monitor check sheet "CAN Communication Line Check".)
Page 13065
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 6673
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9176
CLAIMS INFORMATION
NOTE:
This repair can only be used in conjunction with a claim for Front Wheel Alignment (Op-Code
WD44AA) and must be submitted on a separate work order line.
Page 9776
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 13988
^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise.
^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise.
2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator.
3. Install the regulator assembly into the door.
4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to
regulator.
5. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top.
Page 5695
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 128
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 7188
2. Install differential lock position switch on axle housing and tighten differential lock position switch
bolts with the specified torque. Refer to
"COMPONENTS".
3. Install side bearing adjusters into axle housing.
4. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races
into axle housing. 5. Apply multi-purpose grease to differential lock position connector.
CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor connector.
6. Connect differential lock solenoid harness (B) and differential lock position switch connector (A).
Then install it to axle housing, tighten to the
specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
Page 423
Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation
Page 1262
Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 4099
7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle
Air Volume Learning will not be carried out
successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
- It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
- It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch
ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the
MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the
MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Page 7334
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 12559
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 13895
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 13478
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8614
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 7168
10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal.
Page 8726
d. Remove the seat from the vehicle and place it in a clean area.
NOTE:
Use two people to lift the rear seat out of the vehicle.
11. Remove the front kick plate.
Use a plastic trim tool to snap it loose.
12. Remove the rear kick plate;
^ Use a plastic trim tool to snap it loose.
Page 89
Collision Avoidance Module: Service and Repair
SONAR CONTROL UNIT
Removal
1. Remove the rear panel. 2. For king cab models only, pull up the carpet to gain access to the
sonar control unit. 3. Disconnect the sonar control unit connector. 4. Remove the sonar control unit
bolts and remove sonar control unit.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 937
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 3299
Image Symbols
Page 9522
^ Any tools, equipment cones, or other wheel balancing equipment items should not touch the
outside surface of chrome type wheels.
Wheel Alignment:
^ Alignment sensors with metal mounting hooks should not be used on chrome type wheels.
^ Some alignment equipment manufacturers may have protective rubber pads available that can be
used to cover the metal mounting hooks.
Page 4335
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Service and Repair
Carpet: Service and Repair
FLOOR TRIM
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove front seats. 2. Remove rear seats. 3. Remove lower seat belt anchors. 4. Remove lower
body side trim. 5. Remove center console, if equipped. Refer to "INSTRUMENT PANEL
ASSEMBLY". 6. Remove floor mat hooks from front carpet.
Page 14254
Wiper Relay: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 4915
ECM Inspection Table Part 2
Page 6013
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 13135
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 5407
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Audible Warning Device: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 9239
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 3156
Drive Belt: Specifications
DRIVE BELTS
Page 9761
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 2803
Optional Splice
Page 973
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM.
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 ->
3), and then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with
terminal clips.
Page 6273
Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check
Page 4449
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from air
cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4.
Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower)
^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type)
NOTE: ^
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals.
^ Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance.
Page 12311
13. Turn the nut on each slider until it just touches the plastic insert.
^ Use a 3/4" (19 mm) wrench.
^ Be Careful - don't over tighten - turn each nut just enough to touch the plastic end piece.
CAUTION:
Make sure the organizer is all the way forward, in the deployed position and the lids snapped
closed before turning the nuts. Tightening the nuts with the organizer in any other position may
cause the sliders to jamb in the rails when moving / sliding the organizer.
14. Make sure the organizer sides freely.
^ Loosen the hand knobs and slide the organizer backward and forward.
NOTE:
When sliding the organizer, apply light force to the center, or evenly to both sides.
If the organizer does not slide freely when the hand knobs are loose:
a. Slide the organizer all the way forward until it stops against the front of the bed.
b. Turn each nut (loosen) until there are at least two (2) threads showing between the nut and the
end of the plastic insert.
Page 8451
Page 236
Traction Control Module: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. 3. Drain the brake
fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit).
CAUTION: ^
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts
and brake tubes from being damaged.
^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench. Tighten brake tubes to specification
when installing.
^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with
new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system.
Page 1109
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 6786
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 4908
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 858
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 4870
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Drive/Propeller Shaft: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Classification: PD10-001
Reference: NTB10-052
Date: April 8, 2010
NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL
BEARINGS)
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40)
2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an
Applied Vehicle.
Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex
effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is
exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced.
ACTION
Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings).
^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement
can resolve the incident, should it occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the
electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and
appropriate coding for repairs preformed.
Page 598
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 5691
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 3065
MAIN BEARING
MAIN BEARING
Undersize
Undersize
Page 10633
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5157
Case 10
Page 2119
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 596
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 5603
Page 8833
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 6931
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 6300
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 8855
Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) - Terminal Arrangement
Page 1955
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 5243
Case 15
Case 16
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 193
5. From the ASIST PC main menu screen, select CONSULT UTILITIES (see Figure 3).
Page 9663
Removal and Installation
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER)
Removal
1. Remove the center console lower cover LH. 2. Disconnect the air mix door motor electrical
connector. 3. Remove the three screws and remove the air mix door motor.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER)
Removal
1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. 2. Remove the steering member from the heater
and cooling unit assembly. 3. Disconnect the air mix door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove
the three screws and remove the air mix door motor.
Installation
Page 8775
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 1041
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Navigation Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 11356
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 4400
Idle Speed: Adjustments
Idle Air Volume Learning
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within
the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
- Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
- Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are
satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a
moment.
- Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
- Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 degrees C (158 - 212 degrees F)
- Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch: ON
- Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp) On vehicles equipped with daytime light
systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is start the headlamp will not be
illuminated.
- Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
- Vehicle speed: Stopped
- Transmission: Warmed-up With CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T"
system indicates less than 0.9 V.
- Without CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode.
6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds.
Page 8882
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 6991
Shifter A/T: Service and Repair
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM Control Device Removal and Installation
Floor Shift Models
Page 13004
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 2195
Seat Occupant Sensor: Description and Operation
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
The occupant classification system (OCS) identifies different size occupants, out of position
occupants, and detects if child seat is present in the front passenger seat. The OCS receives
inputs from the occupant classification sensor (located inside the passenger seat cushion
assembly) and belt tension sensor (part of the passenger front seat belt assembly and located at
the belt anchor location). Depending on classification of the passenger, the OCS sends a signal to
the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. The air bag diagnosis sensor unit uses this signal and the seat
belt buckle switch RH signal to determine deployment or non deployment of the passenger front air
bag in the event of a collision. Depending on the signals received, the air bag diagnosis sensor unit
can disable the passenger front air bag completely.
NOTE: In case of customer concern, CONSULT-II can be used to confirm the passenger air bag
status (readiness).
Passenger Air Bag Status Conditions
Page 2978
4. Install the axle shaft bearing and cup on the axle shaft.
^ Prepare an installer tool from a steel tube measuring 762 mm (30 inch) long with an outside
diameter of 53.98 mm (2.125 inch) and an inside diameter of 41.28 mm (1.625 inch).
^ Press the axle shaft bearing and cup onto the axle shaft using a suitable press and the installer
tool, until a 0.038 mm (0.0015 inch) feeler gauge does not fit in between the axle shaft bearing cup
and seat.
CAUTION: Make sure the axle shaft bearing and cup, axle oil seal, and axle shaft bearing cage are
installed facing in the correct direction.
5. Install the bearing ring retainer onto the axle shaft.
^ Press the bearing ring retainer onto the axle shaft with a minimum force of 31,100 N (3172 kg,
6992 lbs.) until a 0.038 mm (0.0015 inch) feeler gauge does not fit between the bearing inner race
and the bearing ring retainer in at least one point.
6. Install the snap ring so it is fully seated into the groove on the axle shaft, using suitable snap ring
pliers. 7. Install the axle shaft assembly into the axle shaft housing. 8. Install the axle shaft bearing
cage lock washers and nuts. Tighten the axle shaft bearing cage nuts to specification. 9. Install the
parking brake assembly onto the back plate.
10. Install the rear brake rotor. 11. Install the rear ABS sensor.
Axle Bearing
Removal and Installation
The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 13265
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 11287
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises
Shackle: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises
Classification: RA09-006
Reference: NTB10-011
Date: January 20, 2010
TITAN; LEAF SPRING NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLE: 2004-2009 Titan (A60)
APPLIED VINS: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before 1N6(*)A0(***)9N 319522
APPLIED DATES: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before August 26, 2009
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A clicking noise is coming from one or both leaf springs.
ACTION: Inspect the anti-windup clip bolts and bushings.
^ If replacement is determined as necessary, use the parts listed in PARTS INFORMATION in this
bulletin.
^ For repair procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE in this bulletin.
^ Do not replace the leaf spring assembly when anti-windup bolt and bushing replacement will
resolve the incident, if it should occur.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown.
PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 1516
Page 5043
NOTE: For "A/T", "UNKWN" is displayed on "VDC/TCS/ABS", "METER/M&A;", "ICC/e4WD" and
"AWD/4WD". But put a check mark to "VDC/TCS/ABS" and "METER/M&A;" because "UNKWN" is
listed on the column of reception diagnosis of the check sheet table.
4. Display control unit reads the CAN diagnosis support monitor check sheet (B) "CAN
Communication Line Check" transferred from the display
screen (A). The transferred CAN diagnosis support monitor check sheet is copied to the Check
sheet, and conversed according to the Display control unit Translation Sheet (C). And then put a
check mark to the check sheet table.
Page 2578
17. Clean the crankshaft pulley belt ribs/grooves.
^ Remove the debris by hand with a wire brush.
^ Do not use a power tool.
18. Install belt tensioner. Replace if it was found to be noisy.
19. Install new drive belt. Refer to section EM of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for
installation procedure.
20. Connect harness clips.
21. Install fender protector. Refer to section EXT of the ESM for installation procedure.
22. Install front right wheel.
23. Lower the vehicle.
24. Re-connect battery cable, positive side first.
25. Start engine.
26. Confirm the issue is resolved.
27. Reprogram the radio presets.
28. Reinitialize the power sunroof.
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Locations
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5896
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 10258
Page 511
14. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION is completed.
Locations
A/T Electrical Parts Location
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Relay Box: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Service and Repair
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
Changing Engine Air Cleaner Filter
NOTE: ^
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals.
^ Replace the air filter as necessary for required maintenance.
1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case (upper). 2. Remove air cleaner
filter from air cleaner case. 3. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 873
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 6503
Knock Sensor: Connector Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 8352
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 5408
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 1016
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 58
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 1789
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8402
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 774
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Headlamp Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Classification: EL10-021A
Reference: NTB10-061A
Date: June 29, 2010
XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE
This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous
versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps
IF YOU CONFIRM
A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an
internal issue),
ACTION
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon
headlamps.
NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident.
^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available
to solve the incident, if one should occur.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the
repair performed.
^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 9779
Blower speed control system components are:
- Front air control
- Variable blower control
- Front blower motor relay
- Front blower motor
- In-vehicle sensor
- Ambient sensor
- Optical sensor
- Intake sensor
System Operation
Automatic Mode
In the automatic mode, the blower motor speed is calculated by the front air control and variable
blower control based on input from the in-vehicle sensor, optical sensor, intake sensor and ambient
sensor, and potentio temperature control (PTC).
When the air flow is increased, the blower motor speed is adjusted gradually to prevent a sudden
increase in air flow.
In addition to manual air flow control and the usual automatic air flow control, starting air flow
control, low water temperature starting control and high passenger compartment temperature
starting control are available.
Starting Blower Speed Control
Start up from cold soak condition (Automatic mode).
In a cold start up condition where the engine coolant temperature is below 50 degrees C (122
degrees F), the blower will not operate at blower speed 1 for a short period of time (up to 210
seconds). The exact start delay time varies depending on the ambient and engine coolant
temperatures.
In the most extreme case (very low ambient temperature) the blower starting delay will be 210
seconds as described above. After the coolant temperature reaches 50 degrees C (122 degrees
F), or the 210 seconds has elapsed, the blower speed will increase to the objective blower speed.
Start up from usual operating or hot soak condition (Automatic mode).
The blower will begin operation momentarily after the AUTO switch is pushed. The blower speed
will gradually rise to the objective speed over a time period of 3 seconds or less (actual time
depends on the objective blower speed).
Blower Speed Compensation - Sunload
When the in-vehicle temperature and the set temperature are very close, the blower will be
operating at low speed. The speed will vary depending on the sunload. During conditions of low or
no sunload, the blower operates at low speed. During high sunload conditions, the front air control
causes the blower speed to increase.
Page 5631
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 10032
Page 8082
Repair Flow Chart
Page 7704
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 4394
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure
Fuel pressure at idling..........................................................................................................................
..........Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi)
Page 14018
Power Window Relay: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 13828
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 13152
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 10302
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 2954
7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem
(see Figure 6).
^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7).
Tire to Rim Slippage:
^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire
may become un-balanced.
^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage.
^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry.
^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced.
WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION
Service and Repair
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair
Bleeding Brake System
Image Symbols
Page 818
ECM Inspection Table Part 8
Page 4283
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 204
4. The "REPROGRAM START" window should appear (see Figure 18).
NOTE:
If you get an error message, refer to the ECU Reprogramming Software Operations Manual *.
* This is found in ASIST under:
CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-II info.
CAUTION DURING REPROGRAMMING:
^ Do not unplug CONSULT-II from the vehicle during reprogramming. Permanent ABS/VDC
damage can occur.
^ Do not open any door or the trunk during reprogramming.
^ On some vehicles, the cooling fans may come on during reprogramming. This is a normal
condition. Do not disconnect the cooling fans. Forgetting to reconnect them may cause severe
engine damage. A vehicle battery charger is needed* to maintain the battery voltage level during
reprogramming.
* You should have hooked up a battery charger in Section 1.
5. Press [START]. See Figure 18.
^ After a few seconds, the window shown in Figure 19 will appear.
^ The screen backlight in CONSULT-II will now turn OFF.
^ When the screen backlight goes OFF, ABS/VDC reprogramming has started.
Page 12409
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 14422
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 6817
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3808
5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box.
6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3.
NOTE:
There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is
easily accessible.
7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3).
8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4).
Campaign - Front Axle Flange Bolt Torque
Technical Service Bulletin # 06-012 Date: 060214
Campaign - Front Axle Flange Bolt Torque
Reference: NTB06-012
Date: February 14, 2006
VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN FRONT AXLE FLANGE BOLTS (4WD)
CAMPAIGN I.D. # : PB014
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006 Titan (A60) - 4WD ONLY 2006 Armada (TA60) - 4WD ONLY
APPLIED VINS: Titan: 1N6*A0*B*6N500000 - 541440 Armada: 5N1AA08B*6N700001 - 721614
NOTE:
Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
On some 2006 model year Nissan Titan and Armada four-wheel drive equipped vehicles, there is
the possibility that the bolts attaching the front drive shafts to the front final drive assembly may not
have been tightened properly. This may result in the front drive shafts coming loose and cause a
vibration or noise in the vehicle front end. If the front drive shaft becomes disconnected, it may be
damaged or cause damage to other vehicle components. However, the ability to control the vehicle
will not be affected. Nissan is conducting a Service Campaign to retighten the front drive shaft bolts
to the proper specification.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PBO14 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED
The number of vehicles potentially affected is 22,100.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the retailer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (PBO14) which for any reason enters
the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by
transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory.
Page 374
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 9815
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 8817
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 5848
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 10501
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B)
Page 12006
19. Make sure the seat track mounting tab and the rear stopper are touching (see Figure 8).
20. Measure the distance between the gear box and the mounting tab (see left side of Figure 8).
21. Measure and adjust the other seat track mounting tab to the same distance (see right side of
Figure 8).
Figure 9
22. Replace all six rubber grommets with the new ones from the kit 3 on each side (see Figure 9).
23. Put the new worm gears, gear boxes, and drive cable assembly (all as one unit) back into the
seat frame and move both seat tracks back into
position on top of the seat track mounting tabs.
Figure 10
CAUTION:
Avoid bending the drive cable. Bending the drive cable will create a noise when the seat is
operated.
Figure 11
Diagram Information and Instructions
Control Module HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 1860
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 3732
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000
Stored
Classification: EC06-001A
Reference: NTB06-009A
Date: March 31, 2006
MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information
sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of
this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
The MIL is "ON" with
^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR
^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit,
and
There are no drivability incidents.
DETERMINE IF
This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure.
ACTIONS
If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections:
^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections.
^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection.
^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left
side instrument stay assembly.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 4569
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Systems Controlled By BCM Directly
Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM Directly
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY
- Power door lock system.
- Remote keyless entry system.
- Power window system.
- Sunroof system.
- Room lamp timer.
- Warning chime system.
- Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system.
- Trailer turn signal and hazard warning lamps system (if equipped). Refer to "TRAILER TOW".
NOTE: Power supply only. No system control.
Page 8906
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 13804
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 7208
vehicle to the customer.
b. If damage is found, go to step 5.
5. Replace damaged parts as needed.
^ Refer to the applicable service manual for replacement procedures.
^ Make sure all mating surfaces and parts are clean before re-assembly.
^ Submit a claim for the repair and return the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE:
Do NOT use an air tool to install the bolts.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 2688
2. Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition
ON with the engine OFF as necessary to activate
the heater mode.
3. Remove the vented reservoir cap and replace it with a non-vented reservoir cap before filling the
cooling system.
4. Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the radiator neck opening. Then attach
the gauge body assembly with the refill tube and
the venturi assembly to the radiator cap adapter.
5. Insert the refill hose into the coolant mixture container that is placed at floor level. Make sure the
ball valve is in the closed position.
^ Use Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent, mixed 50/50 with distilled
water or demineralized water.
6. Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must be within specification.
Compressed air supply pressure: 5.7 - 8.5 kPa (5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm2, 80 - 120 psi)
CAUTION: The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air dryer.
7. The vacuum gauge will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this
process open the ball valve on the refill hose slightly.
Coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill hose is full of coolant, close the ball
valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose.
8. Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches of vacuum. The gauge may not
reach 28 inches in high altitude locations, refer to
the vacuum specifications based on the altitude above sea level. Altitude above sea level Vacuum
gauge reading 0 - 100 m (328 ft.): 28 inches of vacuum 300 m (984 ft.): 27 inches of vacuum 500 m
(1,641 ft.): 26 inches of vacuum 1,000 m (3,281 ft.): 24 - 25 inches of vacuum
9. When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20
seconds to see if the system loses any vacuum. If
the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the system and repeat steps 6 - 8 to
bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks.
10. Place the coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the
radiator. Then open the ball valve on the refill hose so
the coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling system is full when the vacuum
gauge reads zero.
CAUTION: Do not allow the coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being
drawn into the cooling system.
Page 931
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 5853
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 4291
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
APP SENSOR
Component Description
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal
assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers
which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to
the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal
and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the
accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the
accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel
cut.
Page 8627
4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Self-Diagnostic Results
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Self-diagnosis results are
displayed.
Display Item List - Self-Diagnostic Results
Display Item List
Page 812
ECM Inspection Table Part 2
Page 1888
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7217
Repair Flow Chart
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Inspect the six flange bolts that hold the front drive shaft (axle) to the front differential side flange as
follows.
NOTE:
Perform this procedure on both the LH and RH front drive shafts (axles).
1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
Page 1572
Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 3 - 6)
Page 13950
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 2371
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 633
Page 1720
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 804
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 1883
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1896
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Sunroof
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Page 1445
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 408
- When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status.
2. Sleep waiting status
- Process to stop CAN communication is activated.
- All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN
communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status.
3. Sleep status
- IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode.
- CAN communication is stopped.
- When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
- When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
CAN Communication System Description
Refer to LAN-25, Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus
Specifications
Page 10486
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 5499
Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 1082
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 11926
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 14268
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 11153
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 1314
Reclining Switch Inspection (Step 3)
Power Seat Switch Ground Inspection
Page 11009
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 13964
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Service and Repair
Tailgate Shock / Support: Service and Repair
GAS STAY
Removal
WARNING: The gas stay is under high pressure. Remove the gas stay only with the tailgate fully
closed. Injury may result if the gas stay is removed when the tailgate is open.
1. Remove the RH rear combination lamp assembly.
2. Remove the gas stay.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 10643
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 2462
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 4571
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 1786
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 9036
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Required Special Tools
Page 1508
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 3879
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 1759
- To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign
materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown.
8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool.
9. Remove the fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack.
10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly.
11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown.
Tool number : -- (J-46536)
12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly
O-ring.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
- Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring.
- Connect the quick connector as follows: Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials.
- Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is
heard.
Page 1268
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2072
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 13875
Rear Power Drop Glass Up Relay Check (Steps 3 - 4)
Automatic Air Conditioner
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Testing and Inspection Automatic Air Conditioner
Mode Door Motor Circuit
Mode Door Motor Circuit
SYMPTOM:
- Air outlet does not change.
- Mode door motor does not operate normally.
Inspection Flow
INSPECTION FLOW
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Page 9249
Components
REMOVAL
Page 3221
EM-3
Page 198
CAUTION:
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE ETHERNET CABLE UNTIL THE DATA TRANSFER IS COMPLETE
(SEE FIGURE 10).
^ If the cable is disconnected before the data transfer is complete, you MUST restart the transfer
(download) procedure; otherwise ABSNDC damage can occur.
^ If this happens accidentally; wait for ASIST to display an "error" message, then click on "OK".
Reconnect the cable, select "Backup", then return to step 6.
9. Transfer (download) data from ASIST into CONSULT-II.
a. On the ASIST screen, click on "OKAY" (see Figure 8).
b. Verify CONSULT-II IP Address (see Figure 9). Then click on "OK".
^ Your IP address may differ based on the network configuration.
Page 2166
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 5309
Case 9
Page 6679
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
harness.
Page 12941
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 10001
Figure E-6
9. Position the Maxi Fuse, wires, and connector into the IPDM E/R box as shown in Figure E-6.
10. Reinstall the IPDM E/R cover and the relay / fuse cover.
11. Connect the negative battery cable.
12. Reprogram the radio presets and set the clock.
13. Go to Procedure F.
Procedure F - Confirm Fan Operation
1. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition ON.
3. Select START (NISSAN BASED VHCL) > ENGINE > ACTIVE TEST > COOLING FAN
4. Use CONSULT-II to turn the condenser fan ON and then make sure the condenser fan is
running.
5. Turn CONSULT-II OFF, turn the ignition OFF, and disconnect CONSULT-II from the vehicle.
Parts Information
Page 1675
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Step 3)
Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check
Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check
Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check (Step 1)
Page 13381
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 3263
Intake Manifold: Service and Repair
INTAKE MANIFOLD
REMOVAL
1. Partially drain the engine coolant.
WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the engine coolant when the engine
is hot.
2. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 3. Release the fuel pressure. 4. Remove the
air duct and resonator assembly.
5. Disconnect the fuel tube quick connector on the engine side.
Page 373
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 6155
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 14127
FITTING INSPECTION
- Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator bolt, guide rail bolts, and glass and carrier plate bolts to correct the glass position.
Rear Door Glass Regulator Assembly
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - CREW CAB".
2. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be
seen. 3. Remove the inside seal. 4. Remove the glass bolts, raise the glass and hold in place with
suitable tool.
5. Remove the bolts and the regulator and guide channel from the panel. 6. Disconnect the
connector for the regulator assembly.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or
grease it.
- Gear wear
- Regulator deformation
- Spring damage
- Grease condition for each sliding part
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 10653
Air Bag Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 180
2. Press [INITIATE ECU REPROGRAM] (see Figure 16), then
a. Press [VDC]
b. Review all precautions
C. Press [NEXT]
3. Select the program data (see Figure 17).
Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
Engine Control Module: Recalls Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006
Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra
2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and
model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution
Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for
electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time,
the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM
relay contact due to arcing.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be
performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners
may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 5337
Case 19
Case 20
NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Page 5373
3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees.
4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees.
^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily.
6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the
sensor will not unscrew any further.
7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed.
A/C - Heater/Cooler Unit Assembly Replacement
Heater Core Case: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater/Cooler Unit Assembly Replacement
Classification: HA07-002
Reference: NTB07-017
Date: March 8, 2007
2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; HEATER AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is a need to replace the front heater and cooling unit assembly for any reason,
ACTION
Modify and re-route the blower motor harness branch so it will reach the new connection point.
NOTE:
In the new assembly, the blower motor position is rotated 120°.
PARTS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 6721
Page 8261
^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap).
e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet.
4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under
the dash):
a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly
(cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3).
b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads.
C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners.
5. Clean the negative battery cable connections.
a. Write down all the radio presets.
b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection.
c. Clean the following items:
^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides)
^ Body connection bolt (head and threads)
^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap)
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Battery negative post
^ Negative cable battery terminal
d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery).
e. Reprogram the radio presets.
6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs.
Page 4227
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 8434
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 1156
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 9867
Compressor Clutch: Specifications Manual Air Conditioner
Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance
.............................................................................................................................................. 0.3 - 0.6
mm (0.012 - 0.024 in)
Page 8139
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9889
4. Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers or suitable tool.
5. Remove the pulley using Tool with a small adapter. Position the small adapter on the end of the
drive shaft and the center of the puller on the small
adapter.
Tool number : KV99233130 (J-29884)
CAUTION: To prevent deformation of the pulley groove, the puller claws should be hooked under
the pulley groove and not into the pulley groove.
6. Remove the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver, remove the three magnet coil fixing
screws and remove the magnet coil.
INSPECTION
Clutch Disc
If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat, replace clutch disc and pulley.
Warning Chime
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10725
Seat Belt Buckle: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT BUCKLE
Removal - Bucket Seat
1. Remove the front seat.
2. Remove screw and seat cushion inner finisher. 3. Remove the anchor bolt and buckle. 4.
Disconnect the buckle switch connector from the seat connector.
Installation - Bucket Seat
CAUTION:
- Passenger seat is equipped with Occupant Classification System sensor and control module. Do
not disassemble front passenger seat cushion assembly or remove trim as this will affect the
Occupant Classification System calibration.
- On passenger seat during installation, the wire harness clips must be installed in the holes they
were originally in.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1435
Optional Splice
Page 5748
7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle
Air Volume Learning will not be carried out
successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
- It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
- It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal
Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed
Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch
ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the
MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the
MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Page 11204
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 8711
^ Each dealer was shipped one pair of Vinyl Tube Scissors.
^ Use these scissors when removing the wiring harness vinyl tubing during the installation of the
Update Kit.
CAUTION:
It is very important that you use the Vinyl Tube Scissors when removing the wiring harness vinyl
tubing. Failure to use the Vinyl Tube Scissors for this procedure could cause damage to the
electrical wiring and may affect vehicle electrical system functions.
^ Replacement or additional Vinyl Tube Scissors can be ordered by completing and faxing the
special tool order form which is available on NNAnet.com under My Documents in the
Parts/Campaign and Service/Campaign categories.
NOTE:
^ If replacement of a wiring harness is required, many trim and finisher parts will be removed.
^ Plastic "Trim Tool Set" J-46534 (an "essential tool") should be used when removing trim and
finisher parts. This tool is available from TECH-MATE.
Page 9806
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 454
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 8982
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb
Page 10504
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 12990
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 12883
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (Step 3)
Page 2834
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 3608
Page 7303
Optional Splice
Service and Repair
Shift Interlock Cable: Service and Repair
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
Components
CAUTION: ^
Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or
interference with adjacent parts.
^ After installing key interlock cable to control device, make sure that casing cap and bracket are
firmly secured in their positions. If casing cap can be removed with an external load of less than
39.2 N (4.0 kg, 8.8 lbs.), replace key interlock cable with new one.
Removal
1. Unlock slider from adjuster holder and remove rod from cable.
2. Remove casing cap from bracket.
Page 8692
44. Harness should now be completely loose-remove it from the vehicle.
NOTE:
The vehicle you are working on may have a differential lock control unit (not shown) mounted near
the sonar control unit.
45. Install the new harness in reverse order. Make sure of the following:
^ All harness mounting clips are installed in the correct locations.
^ Seat, seat belt, and parking brake pedal bolts are tightened to correct torque:
IMPORTANT:
^ During installation of the new harness you will find some connectors taped to the harness as
shown in the figure below.
^ Some of the connectors will be for options that the vehicle you are working on does not have.
Page 10207
5. Pull the blower motor branch from the harness until you see the splice.
6. Attach the blower motor connector to the blower motor; make sure it will reach.
7. Re-wrap the harness with vinyl tape.
Page 10769
Seat Belt Tensioner: Description and Operation
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Front Seat Belt Pre-tensioner with Load Limiter
The seat belt pre-tensioner system with load limiter is installed for both the driver's seat and the
front passenger's seat. It operates simultaneously with the SRS air bag system in the event of a
frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified level.
When the frontal collision with an impact exceeding a specified level occurs, seat belt slack
resulting from clothing or other factors is immediately taken up by the pre-tensioner. Vehicle
passengers are securely restrained.
When passengers in a vehicle are thrown forward in a collision and the restraining force of the seat
belt exceeds a specified level, the load limiter permits the specified extension of the seat belt by the
twisting of the ELR shaft, and a relaxation of the chest-area seat belt web tension while maintaining
force.
Page 10603
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System
- TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Page 7089
2. Remove carrier cover.
^ Disconnect parking brake cable from carrier cover.
^ Disconnect brake tube from carrier cover.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent.
CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or
foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces.
2. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts to the specified torque. Refer
to "COMPONENTS". 3. Connect parking brake cable and brake tube to carrier cover. 4. Fill with
new gear oil until oil level reaches the specified limit near filler plug mounting hole.
Page 3145
17. Clean the crankshaft pulley belt ribs/grooves.
^ Remove the debris by hand with a wire brush.
^ Do not use a power tool.
18. Install belt tensioner. Replace if it was found to be noisy.
19. Install new drive belt. Refer to section EM of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for
installation procedure.
20. Connect harness clips.
21. Install fender protector. Refer to section EXT of the ESM for installation procedure.
22. Install front right wheel.
23. Lower the vehicle.
24. Re-connect battery cable, positive side first.
25. Start engine.
26. Confirm the issue is resolved.
27. Reprogram the radio presets.
28. Reinitialize the power sunroof.
Page 4737
12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install.
13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides.
14. Reinstall the IPDM cover.
15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first.
16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset
their ADP settings (ADP memory).
Page 14175
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 1694
f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6).
^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit.
^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires).
^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing.
^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm.
4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
CAUTION:
DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump.
5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Page 265
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 789
Page 14193
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 5794
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the
fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel
level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor
output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
Page 68
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 13464
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5179
Case 1
Page 14496
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 10413
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 287
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 13403
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 6295
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Description and Operation
FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM)
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system controls the fuel pump operation. The amount of fuel flow delivered from the fuel pump
is altered between two flow rates by the FPCM operation. The FPCM determines the voltage
supplied to the fuel pump (and therefore fuel flow) according to the given conditions.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The FPCM adjusts the voltage supplied to the fuel pump to control the amount of fuel flow. When
the FPCM increases the voltage supplied to the fuel pump, the fuel flow is increased. When the
FPCM decreases the voltage, the fuel flow is decreased.
Page 6771
Page 5416
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 9979
Figure C-12
7. Remove 2 nuts from the air bag sensor.
- Position the sensor out of the way.
WARNING:
Do not drop or otherwise impact the air bag sensor.
8. Remove the condenser fan mounting bolt.
Figure C-13
9. Pull the bumper forward and remove the fan.
If your fan motor tested OK in Procedure B:
a. Go to Procedure D to install the Fan Motor Protective covers.
- Protective Covering Kit is listed in the Parts Information.
b. Return here for installation of the fan assembly.
If your fan motor tested NG in Procedure B:
Page 11550
7. Remove three 10 mm door panel bolts, behind arm rest (see Figure 3).
NOTE:
Bolts thread into plastic. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove.
8. Remove seatbelt retractor cover (see Figure 4)
9. Remove door panel.
a. Start at the lower left corner, where the seatbelt retractor cover was.
b. From there, "pop" the clips off working around the panel in a counter-clockwise direction.
Locations
Neutral Safety Switch: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12049
- Use a fender cover or large floor-mat. Place it with the seat back lying flat so you can reach the
underside of the seat.
Figure 3
10. Remove the four seat bottom cushion bolts-M8, 12 mm head (see Figure 3).
- Removing these bolts will release the cushion from the frame.
11. Remove the two seat track mounting tab bolts (M6, 10 mm head), one on each side. They re
near the cushion bolts you just removed (see Figure
3).
- Removing these bolts will release the seat slide rails from the "worm gears".
Figure 4
12. Remove the top screw only from the RH & LH side finishers (see Figure 4).
13. Remove both screws and finisher from the front edge of the seat (see Figure 4).
Figure 5
14. Disconnect the seat sub-harness connector from the slide motor (see Figure 5).
15. Remove two bolts, one from each side of the seat frame-M8, 12 mm head (see "Remove this
bolt first" in Figure 5).
Page 12075
Power Seat Switch: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1238
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 10308
Page 5295
Case 12
Page 13933
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) (Steps 4 - 5)
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 4267
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 9240
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire
changing machine and break both tire beads.
Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead.
3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
1. Place first side of tire onto rim.
2. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten transmitter nut to specification.
Transmitter nut 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.)
Page 8513
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 2012
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
IAT SENSOR
Component Description
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air
temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature.
Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
A/C - Heater/Cooler Unit Assembly Replacement
Housing Assembly HVAC: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater/Cooler Unit Assembly
Replacement
Classification: HA07-002
Reference: NTB07-017
Date: March 8, 2007
2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; HEATER AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is a need to replace the front heater and cooling unit assembly for any reason,
ACTION
Modify and re-route the blower motor harness branch so it will reach the new connection point.
NOTE:
In the new assembly, the blower motor position is rotated 120°.
PARTS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 1573
Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 7 - 9)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR
SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B2581 or B2582
is displayed. Without a CONSULT-II code 56 or 57 is indicated on front air control as a result of
conducting self-diagnosis.
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Service and Repair
Front Fender Liner: Service and Repair
FENDER PROTECTOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove front mudguard. 2. Remove screws. 3. Remove plastic clips. 4. Remove pushpins. 5.
Remove front fender protector.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 6789
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 11228
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 11142
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 13502
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 803
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 9637
Diagnostic Procedure For Defroster Door Motor (Steps 16 - 19)
Page 14133
^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise.
^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise.
2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator.
3. Install the regulator assembly into the door.
4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to
regulator.
5. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top.
Page 11796
Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent).
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for
connecting the fuel pressure gauge.
2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test".
^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure.
^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble
Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test.
^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test.
> If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and
repair information.
> If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3.
3. Replace the fuel pump.
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the
appropriate Service Manual.
^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information.
^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal.
4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed.
Page 245
Optional Splice
Page 6642
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 1640
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH
Removal
1. Remove cluster lid A.
2. Carefully pry tabs and remove illumination control switch from cluster lid A.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 13513
Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given
conditions.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again.
Page 4111
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 9885
5. Remove the pulley using Tool with a small adapter. Position the small adapter on the end of the
drive shaft and the center of the puller on the small
adapter. Tool number : KV99233130 (J-29884)
CAUTION: To prevent deformation of the pulley groove, the puller claws should be hooked under
the pulley groove and not into the pulley groove.
6. Remove the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver, remove the three magnet coil fixing
screws and remove the magnet coil.
INSPECTION
Clutch Disc
If the contact surface shows signs of damage due to excessive heat, replace clutch disc and pulley.
Pulley
Check the appearance of the pulley assembly. If contact surface of pulley shows signs of excessive
grooving, replace clutch disc and pulley. The contact surfaces of the pulley assembly should be
cleaned with a suitable solvent before reinstallation.
Coil
Check magnet coil for loose connections or any cracked insulation.
INSTALLATION
Page 8394
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 6197
8110 - 10-Pc. Line Disconnect Set
Page 12794
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 9651
Intake Doors Control Specification
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake door motor
The intake door motor is attached to the intake unit. It rotates so that air is drawn from inlets set by
the front air control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a lever which activates the intake door.
Page 4493
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 10024
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 5654
On-Board Inspection
Brake Fluid: Service and Repair On-Board Inspection
On-board Inspection LEVEL CHECK
^ Make sure the fluid level in reservoir tank is within the standard (between MAX and MIN lines).
^ Visually check around reservoir tank for fluid leaks.
^ If fluid level is excessively low, check brake system for leaks.
^ If brake warning lamp remains illuminated after parking brake pedal is released, check brake
system for fluid leakage.
Page 8439
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 7859
Steering Angle Sensor: Adjustments
Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle
sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel
alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle.
NOTE: Adjustment of steering angle sensor neutral position requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and
CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not
start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on
CONSULT-II screen in this order.
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels
in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU",
and "STR ANGLE SIG" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "STR ANGLE
SIG" is within 0 ± 3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 1 to 5.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
Page 13324
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1738
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 5740
ECM Inspection Table Part 7
Locations
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 7022
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 14410
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 1805
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 8679
d. At the front of the console; remove side covers and screws.
^ Left side cover shown; remove right side cover also.
1 screw on each side.
e. Remove the shift knob; unscrew it counterclockwise.
f. Lift and remove the shift finisher.
^ Disconnect electrical connectors.
g. Disconnect the shift cable.
^ Push the shift lever release to move shift lever to Park.
Page 406
Power Distribution Module: Electrical Diagrams
Additional/Related Diagrams
For information regarding additional/related diagrams for this component, please refer to Power
and Ground Distribution Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Power and Ground
Distribution/System Diagram/Power Distribution/Wiring Diagram Index
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) Schematic
Page 10886
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 9496
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire
changing machine and break both tire beads.
Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead.
3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
1. Place first side of tire onto rim.
2. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten transmitter nut to specification.
Transmitter nut 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.)
Diagram Information and Instructions
Blower Motor Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 2561
^ D: Intake
NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
^ No. 1 cylinder compression TDC
^ Measure valve clearance using suitable tool.
CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully
warmed up engine are still within specifications.
9. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 270° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC
to obtain No. 3 cylinder compression TDC.
10. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table (locations
indicated with white arrow).
^ <- : Engine front
^ <- (black): Measurable at No.1 cylinder compression top dead center
^ <- (white): Measurable at No. 3 cylinder compression top dead center
^ A: RH
^ B: LH
^ C: Exhaust
^ D: Intake
NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-2-3-6-5-4-2
^ No. 3 cylinder compression TDC
Page 8418
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 14400
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 10071
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 3848
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 4051
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 5080
Case 7
Page 10487
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 5331
Case 12
Page 4584
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 12632
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14399
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 6333
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 12963
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to "General
Precautions".
1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank.
Page 7793
e. Read the "CAUTION" screen carefully (see Figure 7). Then click "Okay".
8. Prepare CONSULT-II as follows (see Figure 8):
a. Make sure:
^ CONSULT-II is OFF.
^ The 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card is inserted into CONSULT-II.
^ The A/C Power Adapter is securely connected to CONSULT-II.
^ The Ethernet Cable is securely connected to CONSULT-II and the PC port.
b. Turn CONSULT-II ON.
c. Select "Transfer Files via LAN".
NOTE:
If you accidentally choose a menu option other than "Transfer Files via LAN" turn CONSULT-II
OFF, and then back ON as shown in Figure 8.
d. Set the CONSULT-II unit down for now and go to your ASIST PC.
Page 6546
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 13949
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 14059
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 264
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 7162
CAUTION:
^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully
so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft
housing.
^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately using a Nissan approved brake
cleaner.
6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly.
7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and
cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary.
8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member.
9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft
housing.
10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1623
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 3754
- When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state:
- Ignition switch
- Key switch (insert)
- Hazard switch
- Main door lock/unlock switch
- Front door switch (LH, RH)
- Rear door switch (LH, RH) (Crew Cab)
- Rear door switch upper (LH, RH) (King Cab)
- Rear door switch lower (LH, RH) (King Cab)
- Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp)
- Keyfob (lock/unlock signal)
- Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch)
- When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication
inactive mode.
- Status of combination switch reading function is changed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY
- Power door lock system.
- Remote keyless entry system.
- Power window system.
- Sunroof system.
- Room lamp timer.
- Warning chime system.
- Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system.
- Trailer turn signal and hazard warning lamps system (if equipped). Refer to "TRAILER TOW".
NOTE: Power supply only. No system control.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R
- Panic system.
- Vehicle security (theft warning) system.
- NVIS (NATS) system.
- Headlamp, tail lamp, front fog lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems.
- Front wiper and washer system.
Part 1
Page 9518
^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps.
5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure.
Generally this is 40psi.
If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure:
a. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
c. Remount the tire.
6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area.
^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel.
NOTE:
Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated.
If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform
1. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
3. Remount the tire.
Page 13067
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 2178
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 11826
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 11041
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 12830
Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light comes on for about 1 second and turns off.
This light warns of low tire pressure.
NISSAN's low tire pressure warning system is a tire pressure monitoring system. It monitors tire
pressure of all tires except the spare. When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light is lit,
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated, You should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's tire
information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire malfunction. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efticiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked
monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle
placard and Owner's Manual.
The recommended inflation pressure may also be found on the Tire and Loading Information label.
It the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the light will illuminate and the chime will sound
for about 10 seconds.
Page 14123
immediately move to an area with fresh air.
- Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the
performance of the glass in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
- Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date
printed on the box.
- Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
- Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
- The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will
increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities.
Repairing Water Leaks for Side Window Glass
Leaks can be repaired without removing or reinstalling glass.
If water is leaking between urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of
leakage.
This can be done by applying water to the side window area while pushing glass outward.
To stop leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point.
Page 3663
10. Remove the exhaust manifold (RH) (B) following the steps below.
- Arrow indicates Front
- A: Exhaust manifold (LH) a. Remove the engine mounting insulator. . b. Remove the exhaust
manifold cover. c. Remove the engine mounting bracket. . d. Remove the oil level gauge guide. . e.
Loosen the nuts in reverse order as shown using power tool. f.
Remove the exhaust manifold (RH) (B).
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Surface Distortion
- Check the flatness of each exhaust manifold flange surface using suitable tools.
Flatness limit : 0.3 mm (0.012 in)
- If measurement exceeds the limit, replace the exhaust manifold.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Install new exhaust manifold gasket with the top of the triangular up mark on it facing up and its
coated face (gray side) toward the exhaust manifold side.
Page 3853
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Drivetrain - Rear Axle Oil Seals Leaking
Seals and Gaskets: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Rear Axle Oil Seals Leaking
Classification: RA09-005
Reference: NTB10-032
Date: February 26, 2010
2004-2008 TITAN; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal,
AND
No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings.
ACTION
Install the new axle shaft assembly - which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing
cage, and ABS rotor - listed in the Parts Information table.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Navigation Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 6406
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 6158
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 4837
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 3257
Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection
OIL PRESSURE CHECK
WARNING: ^
Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.
^ Put the selector lever in the Park "P" position.
1. Check the engine oil level. 2. Remove engine front undercover using power tool. 3. Disconnect
the oil pressure sensor harness connector.
4. Remove the oil pressure sensor.
5. Install Tools.
Tool number : ST25051001 (J-25695-1) : ST25052000 (J-25695-2)
6. Start the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 7. Check the engine oil
pressure with engine running under no-load.
CAUTION: If the difference is extreme, check the oil passages and oil pump for leaks and
blockages.
8. After the inspections, install oil pressure sensor as follows:
a. Remove old liquid gasket adhering to oil pressure sensor and engine. b. Apply liquid gasket and
tighten oil pressure sensor to the specification.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Oil pressure sensor torque: 14.7 Nm (1.5 kg-m,
11 ft. lbs.)
c. After warming up engine, make sure there is no leakage of engine oil with engine running.
Page 3632
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Firing Order
1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
#1 cylinder
Testing and Inspection
Heated Glass Element Switch: Testing and Inspection
Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Check (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 12706
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8306
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 10838
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 11934
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 11989
Seat Memory Switch: Testing and Inspection Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection
Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 3468
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 5092
Case 6
Page 9617
Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Driver) (Steps 19 - 22)
Page 12206
Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Power Window System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4697
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 10816
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 9977
Figure C-8
a. Remove 3 screws from the front of the fender protector.
- Driver side only.
Figure C-9
b. Remove 2 bumper to fender screws.
- Driver side only.
Page 6880
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 6883
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Testing and Inspection
Fusible Link: Testing and Inspection
Fusible Link
A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its
condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp.
CAUTION:
- If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying
circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of incident.
- Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape.
- Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts.
Page 2304
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 7705
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 50
Optional Splice
Page 2083
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 4758
Page 10191
5. Pull the blower motor branch from the harness until you see the splice.
6. Attach the blower motor connector to the blower motor; make sure it will reach.
7. Re-wrap the harness with vinyl tape.
Page 4274
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 7838
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5125
Case 8
Page 5145
Case 15
Case 16
NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Page 14146
^ A magnifying glass (10X magnification) must be used to identify impact marks that may be less
than 1 mm in diameter.
NOTE:
A lead, or crack from an impact point can run to the edge of the glass and appear to be a low
stress crack starting from the glass outside edge.
Compound crack beginning or ending at the edge of the glass
This type of crack is always caused by impact to the glass. The point of impact is located where the
crack "branches out".
Cracks that are only in the middle of the glass
This type of crack does not begin or end at the edge of the glass.
^ These cracks are always caused by an impact to the glass and are not covered under warranty.
2) How to determine if glass damage is due to a scratch in the glass surface.
Cracks from a scratch in the glass surface
Glass is produced by fusing together various raw materials such as silica, soda ash, and limestone,
and has a hardness of 5 to 6 on the Mohs scale (for reference, a diamond has a hardness of 10 on
the same scale).
Since earth and sand can contain substances harder than that of glass, glass can be easily
scratched by:
^ Fine sand particles
^ Hard metal
^ Rubbing action of contaminated wiper rubbers, or sand partials caught between the wiper and the
glass, especially when operating the wipers in a dry
Page 6392
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 8927
All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu
Page 6256
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 6412
Page 12981
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Locations
Memory Positioning Module: Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 6419
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 5639
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 756
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 12468
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 2667
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner
Low-Pressure Flexible Hose
Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible Hose
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 2. Remove the engine air cleaner and air
ducts. 3. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
4. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to
it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
High-Pressure Flexible Hose
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine under cover using power tool. 2. Remove the engine air cleaner and air
ducts. 3. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 4. Remove
the high-pressure flexible hose.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil
to it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
High-Pressure Pipe
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal and battery positive terminal. 2. Reposition the IPDM
E/R aside. 3. Remove the front right wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Rotation". 4. Position aside
the front floor insulator. 5. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service
Procedure". 6. Remove the low pressure pipe. 7. Remove the high-pressure pipe.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when
installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Low-Pressure Pipe
Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Pipe
Page 13690
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 2435
^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates.
^ Chock the left rear wheel.
Preliminary Checks:
3. Perform pre-alignment checks.
^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.)
^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation)
^ Tire pressure
^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components
^ Wheel bearing axial play
^ Ball joints of suspension arms
^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage
^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack)
^ Vehicle weight
> Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers
> Fuel level is full
Page 7557
1. Install new front oil seal until it is flush with end face of front case, using Tool.
Tool number: KV38100500
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse oil seal.
^ Apply petroleum jelly to oil seal.
2. Align the matching mark of the front drive shaft with the matching mark of the companion flange,
then install the companion flange.
3. Tighten new self-lock nut to the specified torque, using Tool. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
Tool number: KV40104000
CAUTION: Do not reuse self-lock nut.
4. Install front propeller shaft. 5. Refill the transfer fluid and check fluid level and for fluid leakage.
Page 2365
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 11364
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 4163
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3.
Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower).
INSTALLATION
1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air cleaner case
(upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet).
Page 14092
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH (Step 1)
Page 7906
Brake Pedal Assy: Adjustments
BRAKE PEDAL
Inspection and Adjustment INSPECTION
1. Inspect the brake pedal free height "H" from the dash lower panel using Tool.
Tool number: - (J-46532)
2. Adjust the height referring to the following specifications.
CAUTION: When equipped with adjustable pedal, the pedal must be in the forwardmost (closest to
the floor) position for pedal height measurement.
Brake Pedal Specifications
ADJUSTMENT
1. Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch by turning 45° counterclockwise.
Page 1205
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 11002
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 5858
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5417
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 5089
Case 3
VDC/TCS/ABS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 13711
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 10658
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Center Speaker
Speaker: Service and Repair Center Speaker
CENTER SPEAKER
Removal
1. Remove center console. 2. Remove cluster lid D.
3. Remove the center speaker screws and remove the center speaker.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3904
Page 2761
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
Refrigerant
Type......................................................................................................................................................
....................................................HFC-134a (R-134a)
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS
Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Page 6733
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 11168
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 13798
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 1076
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 3512
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8668
Inspection Procedure 1 (Front Seatbelt Retractors)
1. Extend (pull out) the front seat belt, and then let it retract (pull back).
2. Confirm the seat belt extends and retracts.
NG: Replace the seat belt and wire harness for that side.
OK: Go to Inspection Procedure 2.
Inspection Procedure 2 ( Air Bag Warning Light / Codes Stored)
Automatic Air Conditioner
Expansion Valve: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner
Removal and Installation for Expansion Valve
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Remove the
evaporator.
3. Remove the cooler grommet. 4. Remove the expansion valve.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Expansion valve bolts : 4 N.m (0.41 kg-m, 35 in-lb)
A/C refrigerant pipe to expansion valve bolt : Refer to "Components"
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-rings on the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to
them when installing them.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 13914
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 13088
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 5168
Case 4
Page 831
ECM Inspection Table Part 3
Page 10980
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Garage Jack and Safety Stand
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
CAUTION: Place a wooden or rubber block between safety stand and vehicle body when the
supporting body is flat.
Page 4047
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
Valve Clearance
Valve Lifter
Rear Sonar System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11388
Body Control Module: Description and Operation
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
System Description
- BCM (Body Control Module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the
vehicle.
BCM FUNCTION
BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches
(light, wiper washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various
electrical components. Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the front air
control, and sends signals to ECM using CAN communication.
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
1. Description
- BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components
according to the results.
- BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals
(OUTPUT 1-5) and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5).
2. Operation description
- BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to
flow in turn.
- If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and
input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active.
- At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow.
When voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in
BCM detects voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON.
Page 10811
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Locations
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 11365
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 1418
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 2494
Components
Description and Operation
Vehicle Speed Sensor/Transducer - Cruise Control: Description and Operation
ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Component Description
The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from
combination meter and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these
signals for ASCD control. Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD
functions.
Page 9489
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Page 7998
3. Remove the upper and lower sliding pin bolts (see Figure 1).
4. Support / hang the caliper cylinder body with a wire or other suitable support (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure the brake hose is not stretched or stressed.
^ Make sure the sensor harness bracket will not be bent by weight of the caliper cylinder body.
5. Refer to the BR Section of the Service Manual as needed to complete the brake service.
Page 6766
Page 12573
Optional Splice
Page 8283
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 8492
Component Parts Location
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay
Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement
Reference: NTB10-137B
Date: December 22, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006
FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY
This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have
been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068
NHTSA#: 10V-517
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40)
2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM
relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles,
oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including
the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 13259
Brake Light Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 14200
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 6695
2. Install differential lock position switch on axle housing and tighten differential lock position switch
bolts with the specified torque. Refer to
"COMPONENTS".
3. Install side bearing adjusters into axle housing.
4. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races
into axle housing. 5. Apply multi-purpose grease to differential lock position connector.
CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor connector.
6. Connect differential lock solenoid harness (B) and differential lock position switch connector (A).
Then install it to axle housing, tighten to the
specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
Page 11353
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 5352
DESCRIPTION OF CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR SCREEN FOR DISPLAY CONTROL UNIT
Page 8291
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 9584
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 4220
Oxygen Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 3701
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 11886
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Changeover Switch) Circuit Check (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 6239
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 10657
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 7621
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 13333
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Window System
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Page 5342
IPDM E/R Circuit Inspection
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
IPDM E/R Ignition Relay Circuit Inspection
Check the following. If no malfunction is found, replace the IPDM E/R.
- IPDM E/R power supply circuit. Refer to "IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection".
- Ignition power supply circuit. Refer to "IGNITION POWER SUPPLY - IGNITION SW. IN ON
AND/OR START".
Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Page 7622
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 6475
Ignition Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 5260
Case 13
Page 1607
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 14295
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 6469
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 4686
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 13743
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Window Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 13811
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 6641
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 12053
Figure 15
28. Check the gear box to mounting tab distance again (as you did in steps 20 and 21). Make sure
the distance has not changed (see Figure 15).
- If N/G, adjust.
Figure 16
29. Tighten/torque the Seat Track Mounting Tab Bolts that you installed in step 25 (see Figure 16).
- Bolt torque: 65-84 in-lb (7.3-9.4 Nm)
Figure 17
30. Reinstall screws to attach the side finishers and the front finisher (see Figure 17).
Page 11583
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Service and Repair
Oil Filter: Service and Repair
OIL FILTER
Removal and Installation REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool. 2. Remove the oil filter using Tool.
Tool number: KV10115801 (J-38956)
CAUTION: ^
The oil filter is provided with a relief valve. Use Genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent.
^ Be careful not to get burned when the engine and engine oil are hot.
^ When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any engine oil leakage or spillage.
^ Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts.
^ Completely wipe off any engine oil that adheres to the engine and the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Remove foreign materials adhering to the oil filter installation surface.
2. Apply engine oil to the oil seal circumference of the new oil filter.
3. Screw the oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by 2/3 turn. Or
tighten to specification.
Oil filter: 17.7 Nm (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft. lbs.)
4. Inspect the engine for oil leakage. 5. Install the engine front undercover using power tool.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1. Check the engine oil level. 2. Start the engine and check for engine oil leakage. 3. Stop the
engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Check the engine oil level and add engine oil as required.
Page 6988
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Warning Chime
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12966
- To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign
materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown.
8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool.
9. Remove the fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack.
10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly.
11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown.
Tool number : -- (J-46536)
12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly
O-ring.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
- Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring.
- Connect the quick connector as follows: Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials.
- Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is
heard.
Page 9987
Figure D-2A
NOTE:
You may see clips (fan balance weights) on the fan blades. DO NOT move or remove the fan
balance weights.
Figure D-3
In the next few steps you will be installing these four self adhesive protectors.
NOTE:
Make sure your hands are completely clean. Dirt and oil on your hands can contaminate adhesive
material and reduce its adhesion.
Page 8269
a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section
EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits).
NOTE:
This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different.
b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify
the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check.
C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the
terminal eyelet(s).
d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the
connections.
^ Both sides of the eyelet
^ Eyelet mounting surface
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Nut/bolt threads.
Page 13386
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 7791
^ After you select "ECU Reprog. Data", the "ECU Reprogramming Data" screen will be displayed
(see Figure 5).
NOTE
^ This is a special ABS/VDC reprogram that uses an ID Code FOR THIS INCIDENT ONLY!
^ Step 7 (below) is different from the typical ECU Reprogramming procedure.
7. Select the new ABS/VDC Control Unit data as follows:
a. Click on the Keypad button (see Figure 5).
Page 14067
Page 13085
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 370
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Diagram Information and Instructions
Air Bag Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 6543
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 4680
Attachment General Procedure
Page 13633
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 13127
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 5601
Page 1061
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 4568
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 14161
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 7427
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 3211
^ Confirm that no foreign objects are adhering to the sealing surfaces of the oil cooler or oil pan.
^ Tighten the connecting bolt after aligning the stopper on the oil pan side with protrusion of the oil
cooler.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1. Check levels and add engine oil and engine coolant. 2. Start the engine, and check for leaks of
engine oil and engine coolant. 3. Stop the engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Check engine oil level
and engine coolant level again.
Page 5851
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 8699
b. Remove the right side sun visor holder, twist 1/4 turn to remove.
c. Remove the right side dual sun visor assembly.
Use plastic trim tool as shown.
d. Remove front pillar assist grip; 2 bolts; under end covers.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Temperature Gauge: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 1513
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 7099
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 4752
Page 13331
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 12297
4. Slide the organizer out of the tracks and place the assembly on the tailgate.
5. Remove all four slider assemblies from the organizer as follows:
CAUTION:
Be careful when removing the insert / slider assemblies to avoid damaging the metal tube or the
plastic panel.
a. Carefully use a medium flat blade screwdriver between the end of the metal tube and the plastic
insert.
b. Use the screwdriver to very carefully begin moving the plastic insert out of the metal tube as
shown in Figure 4.
c. When the insert begins to move, hold the assembly as shown in Figure 5 and pull it out of the
tube.
NOTE:
If the insert is difficult to remove:
Page 13948
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 9770
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 8717
^ Slide the corrugated tube inside the door grommet about 10 mm. The second paint mark should
just be visible (see Figure B6). You may need to roll the grommet back and then forward over the
tube.
^ At the body end, the corrugated tube should meet the vinyl tube with no gap. The paint marks
must be facing away from the door/body as shown in Figure B6.
10. Install the new body clip over the paint mark on the body-side (see Figure B7).
^ Feed the strap through the buckle so the strap is UP as shown in Figure B7.
11. Install the new hinge rod clip over the center paint mark (see Figure B7). Feed the strap
through the buckle so the strap is UP as shown in Figure B7.
12. Cut off the excess strap. Leave only 3 to 6 mm (1/8 to 1/4 inch).
Page 13847
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 8819
Fuse: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Locations
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 1143
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 4106
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Description and Operation
FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM)
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system controls the fuel pump operation. The amount of fuel flow delivered from the fuel pump
is altered between two flow rates by the FPCM operation. The FPCM determines the voltage
supplied to the fuel pump (and therefore fuel flow) according to the given conditions.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The FPCM adjusts the voltage supplied to the fuel pump to control the amount of fuel flow. When
the FPCM increases the voltage supplied to the fuel pump, the fuel flow is increased. When the
FPCM decreases the voltage, the fuel flow is decreased.
Page 5155
Case 8
Page 6568
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 11183
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 12870
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 782
Page 8119
^ After you click on "OK" an ASIST screen will appear that shows the data transfer progress (see
Figure 10).
c. Wait until the data transfer is complete (see the CAUTION at the end of step 8).
^ When the data transfer is complete, CONSULT-II will shut off automatically.
d. Disconnect the A/C power cord and the Ethernet cable from CONSULT-II.
Procedure
Part 3: Reprogram ABS/VDC Control Unit with 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card
CAUTION:
^ Perform this operation in five (5) sections. DO NOT SKIP any of these sections.
^ The sections must be performed in order, 1 through 5.
Section 1: Connect a battery charger and CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
Section 2: Check all systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTC(s).
Section 3: Confirm the vehicle battery voltage and CONSULT-II "Charger Input".
Section 4: Perform ABS/VDC Control Unit Reprogramming.
Section 5: Again, perform a check of all systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any newly
stored DTCs.
Section 1
Section 1: Connect a battery charger and CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
1. Confirm the ignition switch is OFF.
2. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. Set the charger at a low charge rate (2-amp
"trickle charge").
IMPORTANT
You must connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery when performing ABS/VDC
reprogramming. Permanent ABS/VDC damage can occur if you don't.
Connecting a vehicle battery charger will maintain:
^ Proper CONSULT-II power supply during reprogramming-very important if the CONSULT-II
battery is low.
^ Vehicle battery voltage level-especially on late model vehicles where the cooling fans come on
during reprogramming.
3. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle using the DLC-II cable with black Converter Box (see Figure
11).
Page 11942
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 12638
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8990
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 174
e. Read the "CAUTION" screen carefully (see Figure 7). Then click "Okay".
8. Prepare CONSULT-II as follows (see Figure 8):
a. Make sure:
^ CONSULT-II is OFF.
^ The 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card is inserted into CONSULT-II.
^ The A/C Power Adapter is securely connected to CONSULT-II.
^ The Ethernet Cable is securely connected to CONSULT-II and the PC port.
b. Turn CONSULT-II ON.
c. Select "Transfer Files via LAN".
NOTE:
If you accidentally choose a menu option other than "Transfer Files via LAN" turn CONSULT-II
OFF, and then back ON as shown in Figure 8.
d. Set the CONSULT-II unit down for now and go to your ASIST PC.
Locations
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Page 13560
4. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Display Item List - Data Monitor
With Generic Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Without Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Page 194
6. From the "CONSULT UTILITIES" screen, select "ECU Reprog. Data" (see Figure 4).
Page 6425
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 465
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 13280
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
CAUTION:
- Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures
Page 9632
System Operation
The front air control determines defroster door position based on the position of the defroster
switch. When the defroster switch is depressed, the defroster door motor rotates directing air to the
defroster ducts. When any mode other than defroster is selected, the defroster motor rotates in the
opposite direction closing off air flow to the defroster ducts.
In the AUTO mode, the front air control determines defroster door position based on the ambient
temperature, the intake air temperature and the in-vehicle temperature.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Defroster door motor
The defroster door motor is attached to the front heater & cooling unit assembly. The front air
control sends a voltage to rotate to the defroster door directing the air flow either to the defroster
ducts, or to the floor ducts, depending on which way the voltage and ground are applied to the
motor leads. Motor rotation is conveyed to a lever which activates the defroster door.
Page 13534
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 1608
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 5632
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 11806
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 4434
^ Measure valve clearance using suitable tool.
CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully
warmed up engine are still within specifications.
11. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 90° from the position of No. 3 cylinder compression TDC
(clockwise by 360° from the position of No. 1
cylinder compression TDC) to measure the intake and exhaust valve clearances of No. 6 cylinder
and the exhaust valve clearance of No. 2 cylinder.
12. If out of specifications, adjust as necessary.
Page 9165
2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows:
^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates.
^ Center the turn plates to the tires.
^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel.
DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body.
Page 8293
Alternator: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check
Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check
Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check (Step 1)
Page 9465
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 12485
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 5274
Case 8
Page 7219
vehicle to the customer.
b. If damage is found, go to step 5.
5. Replace damaged parts as needed.
^ Refer to the applicable service manual for replacement procedures.
^ Make sure all mating surfaces and parts are clean before re-assembly.
^ Submit a claim for the repair and return the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE:
Do NOT use an air tool to install the bolts.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 8609
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 7787
3. Make sure the transmission is in Park and the brake pedal is released.
IMPORTANT:
Do not push the brake pedal until step 6.
4. Start the engine and let it idle.
^ Keep the transmission in Park.
5. On CONSULT-II, select ABS Data Monitor.
6. Slowly push the brake pedal approximately 2 inches, then release.
NOTE:
2 inches is approximately half-way between the pedal "see height" and "depressed height".
7. Repeat step 6 ten times.
^ If DTC C1179 is detected (comes up on CONSULT-II), this bulletin applies; go to Part 2.
^ If DTC C1179 is not detected, go to the next step.
8. Repeat steps 2 though 7.
^ If you have done steps 2 through 7 twice, and DIG C1179 is not detected, this bulletin does not
apply. Go to ASIST for further diagnostic information.
Part 2
Part 2: Download special ABS/VDC Reprogramming Data from ASIST onto your standard 8 MB
(orange) Reprogramming Card.
This part of the procedure involves two general steps:
^ Setting up
^ Download (transfer) data from ASIST into CONSULT-II (8 MB orange Reprogramming card).
SETTING UP:
1. Install the standard 8 MB (orange)
Reprogramming Card into CONSULT-II.
Use slot A-top slot (see Figure 1).
CAUTION:
Do NOT use the 16 MB (orange) "QR25 Campaign ECM Software" Card (# J-44200-ECMR-16). If
you use this card, it will be reformatted to an 8 MB card.
Service and Repair
Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR GLASS
Removal
1. Remove the front door speaker. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the
power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4.
Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts.
6. While holding the front door glass, raise it at the rear end and pull the glass out of the sash
toward the outside of the door.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
Fitting Inspection
Page 10976
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 2268
3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate
relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel and tire assembly. 6. Install wheel and tire
assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle.
NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed.
7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor.
Page 8278
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 3673
The exhaust system may be hot. Allow to cool down before inspection/repairs.
NOTE: Exhaust system parts do not need to be removed for this inspection/repair.
1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
2. Inspect the heat shields on the front exhaust tube for the following:
^ Heat shield contact with the exhaust tube.
^ Separated/missing band clamp(s).
^ Missing "stand-off" (see Figure 4).
3. If a heat shield is found contacting the exhaust tube, pry it away to allow a minimum 1 mm (.040
inch) space.
^ Road test the vehicle to verify the repair.
4. If a band clamp is separated or missing, install new band clamps as needed.
Page 8586
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 1054
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 11699
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 12248
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection
Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 5745
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of
the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is
disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2
seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and
wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 10721
FRONT RH BUCKLE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Remove RH front seat and place on a clean surface. Refer to the appropriate section in the ESM
for removal procedure.
2. Remove screw and seat cushion outer finisher.
3. Remove bolt and seat belt buckle.
Page 13561
Page 4629
^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap).
e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet.
4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under
the dash):
a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly
(cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3).
b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads.
C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners.
5. Clean the negative battery cable connections.
a. Write down all the radio presets.
b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection.
c. Clean the following items:
^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides)
^ Body connection bolt (head and threads)
^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap)
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Battery negative post
^ Negative cable battery terminal
d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery).
e. Reprogram the radio presets.
6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs.
Body - Soft Tonneau Cover Retrofit Kit
Truck Bed Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Soft Tonneau Cover Retrofit Kit
Classification: BT05-055
Reference: NTB06-002
Date: January 11, 2006
TITAN; SOFT TONNEAU COVER RETROFIT KIT
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): Titan (A60), Crew Cab, King Cab
IF YOU CONFIRM
Any part of the soft tonneau cover (minus frame) needs to be replaced.
ACTION
Install the complete retrofit kit listed below.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE INFORMATION
Remove the original soft tonneau cover and install the complete soft tonneau cover retrofit kit as
per the instructions included with the kit.
Note:
The soft tonneau cover retrofit kit is intended to fit slightly looser (not as taut) than the original.
Disclaimer
Page 3824
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Valve Body: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Page 11147
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 5912
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 1186
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 13279
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 7179
1. Remove rear propeller shaft. 2. Remove wheel and tire assemblies. 3. Remove brake calipers
and rotors. 4. Using an inch-pound, torque wrench, rotate the pinion three or four times. 5. Record
the rotating torque.
6. Loosen drive pinion nut while holding companion flange using Tool.
Tool number: KV40104000
7. Put matching mark on the thread edge of drive pinion. The mark should be in line with the mark
on companion flange.
CAUTION: For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage drive pinion.
8. Remove companion flange using a suitable tool.
9. Remove front oil seal using Tool.
Tool number: ST33290001 (J-34286)
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage axle housing.
INSTALLATION
Page 13086
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 9192
Alignment: Service and Repair The Alignment Process
THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS
IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed.
1. When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use "indicators": (Green/red,
plus or minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use these
indicators. The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these
indicators may not be correct.
- This may result in an ERROR.
2. Some newer alignment machines are equipped with an optional "Rolling Compensation" method
to "compensate" the sensors (alignment targets or
head units). Do NOT use this "Rolling Compensation" method. Use the "Jacking Compensation" method. After installing the alignment targets or head units, raise
the vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways.
- See Instructions in the alignment machine you are using for more information.
Page 2646
6. Repeat the cleaning procedure as needed.
^ After treating, the trim panel should be clean as shown in Figure 4 above.
7. Reinstall the trim panel parts removed in step 1.
Page 12081
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection
Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Locations
Memory Positioning Module: Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 1405
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 2520
Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent).
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for
connecting the fuel pressure gauge.
2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test".
^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure.
^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble
Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test.
^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test.
> If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and
repair information.
> If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3.
3. Replace the fuel pump.
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the
appropriate Service Manual.
^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information.
^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal.
4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed.
Page 8553
active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is
normal.
Part 1
Part 2
- If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily
diagnosed using auto active test.
Page 9784
Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Steps 15 - 18)
Service and Repair
Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
Components
Page 10003
"CM" I.D.: PB081 - 2004 and 2005 vehicles built before March 17, 2005. Refer to Service COMM to
confirm the correct campaign ID #.
Page 2152
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 4474
Optional Splice
Page 13991
Front Door Window Motor: Testing and Inspection Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check
Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check (Step 1)
Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check (Step 2)
Page 10252
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Service and Repair
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
Wiper and Washer Switch
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper washer switch connector. 3. Pinch tabs at
wiper and washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3428
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 7308
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 3830
Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection
Seat Memory Switch: Testing and Inspection Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection
Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Page 3932
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 13757
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 970
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
Page 7232
Wheel Bearing: Fluid Type Specifications
NLGI No. 2 Multi Purpose Grease (Lithium Soap Base)
Page 1604
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 2720
COMPONENTS
NOTE: Rear final drive shown, front final drive similar.
DRAINING 1. Stop the engine. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain the gear oil. 3. Apply sealant to
the drain plug. Install the drain plug on the final drive assembly and tighten to specification.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS", (FFD). Refer to
"Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD). See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential
Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear
Page 162
Repair Flow Chart
Page 13063
Optional Splice
Page 1459
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Testing and Inspection
Vacuum Brake Booster Check Valve: Testing and Inspection
CHECK VALVE INSPECTION
Airtightness Inspection
Use a suitable vacuum pump to check. Connect to brake booster side of check valve. Check valve
specification: Vacuum decrease should be within 1.3 kPa (10 mmHg, 0.39 inHg) for 15 seconds
under a vacuum of -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.69 inHg)
Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 13050
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13814
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 1116
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 300
Control Module HVAC: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 10365
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 4850
^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap).
e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet.
4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under
the dash):
a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly
(cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3).
b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads.
C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners.
5. Clean the negative battery cable connections.
a. Write down all the radio presets.
b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection.
c. Clean the following items:
^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides)
^ Body connection bolt (head and threads)
^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap)
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Battery negative post
^ Negative cable battery terminal
d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery).
e. Reprogram the radio presets.
6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs.
Page 9080
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Required Special Tools
Page 12991
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 10083
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 5058
Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART
Depending on the control unit which performs CAN communication, "U1010" may be indicated as
the result of self-diagnosis. Replace the control unit if "U1010" is indicated.
Page 82
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Page 12091
Lifting Sensor (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Lifting Sensor (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 8828
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 7068
9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically.
Page 12010
- Rear View Monitor Predicted Course Line Center Position Adjustment
NOTE:
You may need to inform the customer that their Automatic Drive Position will need to be reset.
Disclaimer
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Reference: NTB10-037A
Date: May 19, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE
INACCURACY
This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010
NHTSA #: 10V-074
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan
vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel
gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel
tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary
Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts
or labor.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 4783
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection
(Column Shift)
Neutral Safety Switch: Testing and Inspection A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection
(Column Shift)
A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Column Shift) (Steps 1 - 2)
A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Column Shift) (Step 3)
Page 9614
Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Driver) (Steps 9 - 12)
Page 7872
CAUTION: Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Page 7794
CAUTION:
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE ETHERNET CABLE UNTIL THE DATA TRANSFER IS COMPLETE
(SEE FIGURE 10).
^ If the cable is disconnected before the data transfer is complete, you MUST restart the transfer
(download) procedure; otherwise ABSNDC damage can occur.
^ If this happens accidentally; wait for ASIST to display an "error" message, then click on "OK".
Reconnect the cable, select "Backup", then return to step 6.
9. Transfer (download) data from ASIST into CONSULT-II.
a. On the ASIST screen, click on "OKAY" (see Figure 8).
b. Verify CONSULT-II IP Address (see Figure 9). Then click on "OK".
^ Your IP address may differ based on the network configuration.
Page 8245
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 141
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 8675
16. Attach the new body clip to the body.
Final Quality Check
17. Check the air bag light operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition ON.
b. Look at the air bag light.
c. Make sure the air bag warning light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out.
Harness Replacement Part 1 (Includes Seat Belt Replacement, If Needed)
NOTE:
^ There are several model variations (power seats, audio, side air bag, navigation, etc). Due to
these variations the harness removal photos in this procedure may not have the exact interior trim,
connectors, and harness mounting locations as the vehicle you are working on.
^ It is recommended that you mark the harness mounting location during disassembly.
Floor and Rear Door (Left and/or Right Side)
^ This portion of the procedure is for the sections of the harness that are on the floor of the vehicle
(under the carpet) and inside the rear door.
^ The photos in this portion of the procedure are of the left side (driver side). If you are working on
the right side (passenger side) the photos are a mirror image.
1. Write down the radio station presets.
2. If equipped with power seats; move the seats to the "mid-point" position (half-way between full
forward and full rearward).
3. Put the gear selector in the Neutral position.
4. Disconnect both battery cables-negative cable first.
5. Remove the front seat.
a. Remove the 4 seat mounting bolts.
b. Disconnect all of the seat electrical connectors.
Page 9357
5. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then separate lower link ball joint
from steering knuckle.
6. Remove lower link cam bolts (1) and nuts, then the lower link (2).
NOTE: Some vehicles may be equipped with straight (non-adjustable) lower link bolts and
washers. In order to adjust camber and caster on these vehicles, first replace the lower link bolts
and washers with adjustable (cam) bolts and washers.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Lower Link Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary.
Lower Link Bushing Check for distortion and damage. Replace if necessary
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to "Components".
^ When installing wheel and tire, refer to "Rotation". See: Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and
Repair/Tire Rotation
^ After installation, check that the front wheel alignment is within specification.
Page 8502
Engine Control Component Parts Location
A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Customer Interest A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air
Vents
Classification: HA09-001A
Reference: NTB09-028A
Date: November 17, 2010
LOW AIRFLOW FROM HVAC FRONT AIR VENTS
The Applied Vehicles have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Quest (V42) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Pathfinder
(R51) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) 2004-2008 Titan (A60) 2004-2008 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
An Applied Vehicle has low airflow coming from the HVAC front air vents due to evaporator
freeze-up.
AND
The HVAC unit surface temperature around the evaporator is about 32°F (0°C) causing ice to form
on the evaporator.
NOTE:
The incident may be described as:
^ Only occurring after a long drive with the HVAC on continuously and the blower set on low.
AND
^ Under conditions such as high ambient temperature and high humidity.
ACTION
^ Replace the intake sensor with the part listed in Parts Information.
^ Refer to the Service Procedure below.
Page 4442
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
APP SENSOR
Component Description
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal
assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers
which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to
the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal
and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the
accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the
accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel
cut.
Page 1710
f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6).
^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit.
^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires).
^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing.
^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm.
4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
CAUTION:
DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump.
5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch)
Check (Crew Cab)
Power Door Lock Actuator: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder
Switch) Check (Crew Cab)
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 12017
NOTE:
- Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpeting, etc. when performing this Procedure.
- The illustrations in this bulletin are for the left side (driver side) seat. The right side (passenger
side) seat is a "mirror image" of these illustrations.
If needed; use steps 1 and 2 to confirm you have voltage (power) to the seat slide motor.
1. Using the power seat switch, tilt the front edge of the seat bottom all the way UP.
2. Check/measure voltage to the seat slide motor. Use a voltmeter and "Back-probe" into the
connector, harness side, between the following color
wires:
NOTES:
For wire color codes and connector layouts for the vehicle you are working on refer to the Wiring
Diagram in chapter SE, section POWER SEAT or AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER as
applicable in the appropriate Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
If needed, refer to "How to Back Probe Connectors" is the Nissan and Infiniti Connector and
Terminal Service Manual. This manual is in ASIST under Tools & Equipment.
Figure 2
Figure 2 shows an example of the driver s side seat slide motor connector location. The vehicle
you are working on may be different.
- This voltage check can be done with the seat slide motor connected.
- If the voltage is about 12 V when the seat slide switch is pressed to the "forward" and "backward"
positions, voltage (power) is getting to the seat slide motor.
- If voltage is 0 V, this bulletin doesn't apply. Check your power and ground circuits to the seat slide
motor.
Remove Old Seat Slide Parts
3. Record the radio station pre-sets for later reprogramming after the procedure.
4. If the power seat won't move, lightly tap the seat slide motor (see Figure 2).
- Sometimes this will get the motor working again temporarily so the seat can be moved to access
the seat mounting bolts.
- Don't remove the seat yet.
5. Follow steps 6 through 9 to remove the seat from the vehicle.
- If needed, refer to section SE in the Service Manual (ESM) for seat removal information.
6. Turn the ignition key "OFF".
7. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first, and wait three (3) minutes.
- This will allow the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) to deactivate. This includes the front
seat side air bags.
8. Tilt the entire seat assembly back and disconnect the harness-to-seat connectors.
9. Remove the seat assembly from vehicle and place it on a clean dry surface.
Page 7030
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 11332
Component Parts Location
Diagram Information and Instructions
Brake Light Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether For Children) System
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether For
Children) System
LATCH (LOWER ANCHORS AND TETHER FOR CHILDREN) SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
NOTE: The LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tether for Children) system is not serviceable.
Page 801
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Automatic Air Conditioner
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner
INTAKE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel.
2. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
NOTE: The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the
A/C evaporator cover.
3. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the heater and cooling unit assembly.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 7109
9. Remove side bearing caps.
10. Loosen the side bearing adjusters using Tool.
Tool number: - (C-4164)
11. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side
bearing adjusters together with bearing.
12. Remove side bearing adjusters from axle housing. 13. Remove bracket for the differential lock
position switch connector and bolts. 14. Remove differential lock position switch.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent.
CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to axle housing and differential lock position switch. Also
remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and axle housing and
differential lock position switch.
Page 6483
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 3988
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 4630
7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs.
Disclaimer
Page 5697
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 12914
2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows:
a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit
b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots
^ For Type A see Figure 1
^ For Type B see Figure 2
Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start
engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition
switch OFF.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two
or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse
after servicing fuel system.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 12424
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 12473
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 13083
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Front Suspension
Page 14292
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 13642
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 4347
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 631
Page 8281
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 4349
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 5846
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 2213
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 7165
CAUTION:
^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully
so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft
housing.
^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately using a Nissan approved brake
cleaner.
6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly.
7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and
cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary.
8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member.
9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft
housing.
10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal.
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-032 Date: 100226
Drivetrain - Rear Axle Oil Seals Leaking
Classification: RA09-005
Reference: NTB10-032
Date: February 26, 2010
2004-2008 TITAN; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal,
AND
No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings.
ACTION
Install the new axle shaft assembly - which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing
cage, and ABS rotor - listed in the Parts Information table.
Page 7371
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
NOTE: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "Components". See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and
Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
Page 7278
2. Install the center support bearing on the propeller shaft tube using a suitable pipe pressing on
the inner race.
3. Install the dust shield. 4. Install a new clamp over the boot on the slip yoke. 5. Align the matching
marks and install the slip yoke on the propeller shaft tube. 6. Clean the surfaces and position the
boot over the propeller shaft tube and tighten the clamp.
7. Install the center support bearing bracket, then install the rear propeller shaft assembly in the
vehicle.
Page 1328
Seat Memory Switch: Testing and Inspection Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection
Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 912
Page 6930
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 7027
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 11062
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 7436
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Automatic Air Conditioner
Housing Assembly HVAC: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner
HEATER & COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Move the two front seats to the rearmost position on the seat track. 2. Disconnect the battery
negative terminal and battery positive terminal. 3. Discharge the refrigerant from the A/C system.
Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 4. Drain the coolant from the engine cooling
system. 5. Disconnect the heater hoses from the heater core. 6. Disconnect the high/low pressure
pipes from the expansion valve. 7. Remove the instrument panel and console panel. See: Body
and Frame/Interior Moulding / Trim/Dashboard / Instrument Panel/Service and Repair 8. Remove
the steering column. 9. Disconnect the instrument panel wire harness at the RH and LH in-line
connector brackets, and the fuse block (J/B) electrical connectors. Refer to
"POWER SUPPLY ROUTING CIRCUIT".
10. Disconnect the steering member from each side of the vehicle body.
Page 5159
Case 12
Page 5220
Case 9
Page 1850
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Description and Operation
Positive Crankcase Ventilation: Description and Operation
POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system returns blow-by gas to the intake manifold. The positive crankcase ventilation (PCV)
valve is provided to conduct crankcase blow-by gas to the intake manifold. During partial throttle
operation of the engine, the intake manifold sucks the blow-by gas through the PCV valve.
Normally, the capacity of the valve is sufficient to handle any blow-by and a small amount of
ventilating air. The ventilating air is then drawn from the air inlet tubes into the crankcase. In this
process the air passes through the hose connecting air inlet tubes to rocker cover. Under
full-throttle condition, the manifold vacuum is insufficient to draw the blow-by flow through the
valve. The flow goes through the hose connection in the reverse direction.
On vehicles with an excessively high blow-by, the valve does not meet the requirement. This is
because some of the flow will go through the hose connection to the air inlet tubes under all
conditions.
Page 5413
Page 13383
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Classification: WT04-004C
Reference: NTB04-054C
Date: April 6, 2011
WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION
This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION.
No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the
following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
General Information and Recommendations
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions
supplied with your alignment equipment.
^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions.
^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment.
General Information and Recommendations
1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed.
^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles.
^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure
proper "centering" of the steering wheel.
2. Use the right alignment machine.
^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing
alignment checks.
^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment
equipment.
^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be
checked to ensure that it is level.
3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated.
^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings.
^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should
be checked immediately.
^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended
service/calibration schedule.
NOTE:
In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached
to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
Page 5425
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 2831
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 10233
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Refrigerant Oil
Name:................................................................................................................................................
Nissan A/C System Oil Type S (DH-PS) or equivalent
Page 7546
2. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 3. Start engine. 4. Erase self-diagnosis. 5. Check 4WD shift indicator
lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again.
If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new
transfer control unit and retry the above check.
METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT "4H" OR "4LO" 1. Start engine.
Run the engine for at least 10 seconds. 2. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position
with brake pedal depressed. Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn 4WD shift switch to "2WD"
position. Stay in "2WD" for at least 2 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 5. Start engine. 6.
Erase self-diagnosis. 7. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again.
If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new
transfer control unit and retry the above check.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 510
not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model cannot be memorized.
11. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
If "CANCEL" is touched, it will return to previous screen.
12. Wait until the next screen during setting.
13. WRITE CONFIGURATION results are printed out automatically. Confirm "WRITE
CONFIGURATION" is correctly executed by comparing
sheet automatically printed out with applicable configuration list shown in step 9.
Page 8002
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
BRAKE JUDDER
^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out.
Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not
parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see
Figure 1).
Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on
each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this
point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation
(see Figure 2).
^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake
pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering
wheel.
Vehicle Storage:
^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the
brake pads will rust.
^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface
will be different.
^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off.
Lug Nut Overtorque:
^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over
tightened, especially with an air impact
Page 6835
Disclaimer
Page 4704
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 787
Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 4922
ECM Inspection Table Part 9
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 4719
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Locations
SRS Components Parts Location
Page 13408
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 5490
Page 7745
8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM.
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 ->
3), and then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See:
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and
Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with
terminal clips.
A/C - Heater/Cooler Unit Assembly Replacement
Blower Motor: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater/Cooler Unit Assembly Replacement
Classification: HA07-002
Reference: NTB07-017
Date: March 8, 2007
2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; HEATER AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is a need to replace the front heater and cooling unit assembly for any reason,
ACTION
Modify and re-route the blower motor harness branch so it will reach the new connection point.
NOTE:
In the new assembly, the blower motor position is rotated 120°.
PARTS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 3266
NOTE: Recommended pulling force is 50 N (5.1 kg, 11.2 lbs.).
5. Install the quick connector cap on the quick connector joint (on engine side only). 6. Install the
fuel hose and tube to hose clamps. 7. Refill the engine coolant.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
^ After installing fuel tubes, make sure there is no fuel leakage at connections in the following
steps.
^ Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then check
for fuel leaks at connections.
^ Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at the connections.
^ Perform procedures for "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning" after finishing repairs. Refer to
EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and
Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed
Position Learning
^ If electric throttle control actuator is replaced, perform procedures for "Idle Air Volume Learning"
after finishing repairs. Refer to EC-85, "Idle Air Volume Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Idle Air Volume Learning
Page 13497
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 10079
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 3623
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 9364
Components
REMOVAL
Page 9343
Lot Number Locations.
Service and Repair
Solar Sensor: Service and Repair
OPTICAL SENSOR
Removal and Installation
The optical sensor is located in the top center of the instrument panel.
Page 2836
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 11827
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 1172
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 8441
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab)
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Crew Cab)
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 12732
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 1910
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 13940
Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Steps
2 - 4)
Label Description
Page 9630
Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Door Motor (Steps 8 - 11)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
Defroster Door Motor Circuit
Defroster Door Motor Circuit
SYMPTOM:
- Defroster door does not change.
Page 5689
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 4757
Page 602
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 13274
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 10720
7. Install seat belt buckle and bolt.
8. Attach harness attachment clips to new hole locations on the seat pan.
9. Install seat cushion outer fininsher.
10. Install seat in reverse order of removal.
Page 1646
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8235
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 744
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 12605
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 6311
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 1802
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 5807
Knock Sensor: Connector Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2562
^ Measure valve clearance using suitable tool.
CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully
warmed up engine are still within specifications.
11. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 90° from the position of No. 3 cylinder compression TDC
(clockwise by 360° from the position of No. 1
cylinder compression TDC) to measure the intake and exhaust valve clearances of No. 6 cylinder
and the exhaust valve clearance of No. 2 cylinder.
12. If out of specifications, adjust as necessary.
Page 3934
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 80
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 486
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 13736
Combination Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Service and Repair
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
Changing Engine Air Cleaner Filter
NOTE: ^
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals.
^ Replace the air filter as necessary for required maintenance.
1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case (upper). 2. Remove air cleaner
filter from air cleaner case. 3. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 6925
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 10270
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 8322
Optional Splice
Page 7269
1. Put matching marks on the front propeller shaft tube and flange yoke as shown.
CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the front propeller shaft or flange yoke.
2. Remove the snap ring.
3. Push out and remove the journal bearing by lightly tapping the yoke with a hammer, taking care
not to damage the journal or yoke hole.
4. Remove the bearing at the opposite side in above operation.
NOTE: Put marks on the disassembled parts so that they can be reinstalled in their original
positions from which they were removed.
ASSEMBLY
Journal
Page 8240
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 8397
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 390
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Testing and Inspection
Pedal Positioning Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 6029
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output
voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases.
Page 12825
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5204
Case 10
Page 11937
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 6417
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 932
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 12092
Lifting Switch (Front) Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Page 14398
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 6304
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 6472
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 3180
17. Clean the crankshaft pulley belt ribs/grooves.
^ Remove the debris by hand with a wire brush.
^ Do not use a power tool.
18. Install belt tensioner. Replace if it was found to be noisy.
19. Install new drive belt. Refer to section EM of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for
installation procedure.
20. Connect harness clips.
21. Install fender protector. Refer to section EXT of the ESM for installation procedure.
22. Install front right wheel.
23. Lower the vehicle.
24. Re-connect battery cable, positive side first.
25. Start engine.
26. Confirm the issue is resolved.
27. Reprogram the radio presets.
28. Reinitialize the power sunroof.
Page 8367
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7429
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 9145
^ Make sure the rear slide plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place.
NOTE:
Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep.
The Alignment Process
The Alignment Process
IMPORTANT:
Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the
alignment.
1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack.
^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in
Figure 4.
^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5).
^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then
re-enter the rack.
^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front
wheels straight.
Page 10649
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 12826
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4455
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
IAT SENSOR
Component Description
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air
temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature.
Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 1912
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 3)
Page 1828
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 12778
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 4015
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 5163
Check Sheet Part 1
Page 9523
Disclaimer
Page 249
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 10182
3. Remove the four screws and remove the heater core cover. 4. Remove the heater core pipe
bracket.
5. Remove the heater core.
NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core,
replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new heater core.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 11697
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 4)
Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Fuel Pressure: By Symptom Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Classification: FE07-004
Reference: NTB07-040
Date: June 6, 2007
2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007
Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223
APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007
IF YOU CONFIRM
When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced,
ACTIONS
1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure).
2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump.
NOTE:
Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 13047
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 849
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 14381
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 4587
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Automatic Air Conditioner
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
Removal and Installation
FUNCTION
The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin microfilters when the heater or
A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin microfilters are
located in the heater and cooling unit assembly.
REPLACEMENT TIMING
Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a regular interval depending on
the driving conditions. Refer to "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE". It may also be necessary to replace
the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are
damaged.
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
1. Remove the two lower glove box hinge pins to remove the glove box from the instrument panel
and let it hang from the cord.
2. Remove the screw and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. 3. Remove the in-cabin microfilters
from the heater and cooling unit assembly housing.
Page 13893
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8188
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor.
2. Install axle shaft assembly.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 10269
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 8227
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 10508
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 13222
Diagnostic Procedure For Optical Sensor (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 6809
4. Remove bolts and detach control device.
INSTALLATION
1. Install new O-ring to transfer control device.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply petroleum jelly.
2. Install transfer control device.
a. Turn control shift rod fully counterclockwise using flat-bladed screwdriver, and then put mark on
control shift rod.
b. Align transfer control device shaft cutout with mark on control shift rod, and install.
NOTE: Turn transfer control device when transfer control device connection does not match.
Page 12728
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 10206
2. Take the tie-wrap mount loose (see Figure 3).
3. Measure 5 mm from the tie-wrap (see Figure 3).
4. Carefully cut the tape off of the harness as shown in Figure 3.
^ Use scissors with a blunt end. Don't damage the wires inside the harness.
Page 506
4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
6. Touch "A60" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on
"VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See:
Application and ID
7. Touch "READ CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen.
Page 6249
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 10981
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 10349
Page 7035
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 5191
Case 13
Case 14
Page 6846
Fluid Pan: Service and Repair
Oil Pan
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Drain A/T fluid.
2. Remove oil pan and gasket. 3. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine cause of
malfunction. If the A/T fluid is very dark, has some burned smell, or contains foreign
particles, friction material (clutches, band) may need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe
clean indicates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and clutches to stick and can
inhibit pump pressure.
CAUTION: If friction material is detected, flush the transmission cooler after repair.
4. Remove magnets from oil pan.
Installation
1. Install the oil pan magnets as shown.
2. Install the oil pan and new oil pan gasket.
CAUTION:
Page 8580
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10366
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 8755
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 883
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 3605
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8512
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 1196
Page 3362
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION:
- Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
- Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the
quick connector O-ring maintains sealability.
- Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel
pressure.
- Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C,
etc.). Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in
manifold vacuum.
NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out.
The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because A60 models do not have fuel return
system.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove engine
cover. 3. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488.
- Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
- Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
- Keep fuel hose connections clean.
4. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown
in figure.
- Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter.
- When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality.
5. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 6. Start engine and
check for fuel leakage. 7. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
- During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi)
8. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 9. Check the following.
- Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
- Fuel filter for clogging
- Fuel pump
- Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or
replace.
10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel
pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE
RELEASE".
Page 2620
4. Insert the first new in-cabin microfilter into the heater and cooling unit assembly housing and
slide it over to the right. Insert the second new
in-cabin microfilter into the heater and cooling unit assembly housing.
NOTE: The in-cabin microfilters are marked with air flow arrows. The end of the microfilter with the
arrow should face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows should point downward.
5. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover.
6. Install the lower glove box in the instrument panel and secure it with the two hinge pins.
Page 13480
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 11990
Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection (Step 4)
Page 9813
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 10228
Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant
Page 14409
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 12339
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 315
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 6764
Page 2276
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 14298
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 1111
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 7674
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 5347
DESCRIPTION OF CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR SCREEN FOR DRIVER SEAT CONTROL UNIT
DESCRIPTION OF CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR SCREEN FOR BCM
Page 10177
Diagnostic Procedure For Water Valve (Steps 3 - 4)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR WATER VALVE
Page 6277
- To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign
materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown.
8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool.
9. Remove the fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack.
10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly.
11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown.
Tool number : -- (J-46536)
12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly
O-ring.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
- Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring.
- Connect the quick connector as follows: Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials.
- Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is
heard.
Page 4502
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 11006
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 7618
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 2066
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Locations
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Page 10973
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control
Unit Replacement
Control Module: Service and Repair Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit
Replacement
Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement
When replacing transfer assembly or transfer control unit, check the 4WD shift indicator pattern
and adjustment of the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit if necessary.
CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR PATTERN 1. Set 4WD shift switch to "2WD", "4H", "4LO", "4H"
and "2WD" in order. Stay at each switch position for at least 2 seconds.
2. Confirm 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp are changed properly as follows.
^ If OK, the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit is correct.
^ If NG, the position is different between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Adjust the
position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to pattern table.
Transfer Position Adjustment Pattern
METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT "2WD" Select Adjustment Pattern
1. Start engine. Run engine for at least 10 seconds.
2. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp.
Pattern A 1. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed.
Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. 2. Turn 4WD shift switch to "4LO" position. Stay in "4LO" for at
least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 4. Start engine. 5. Erase self-diagnosis. 6. Check
4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again.
If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new
transfer control unit and retry the above check.
Pattern B 1. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed.
Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds.
Page 2228
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 6482
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 11164
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Locations
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Rear Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check (Crew Cab)
Rear Door Window Motor: Testing and Inspection Rear Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check
(Crew Cab)
Rear Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 3)
Automatic Air Conditioner
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2074
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 4147
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9646
air mix door positions by measuring the voltage signal on the PBR circuits of each door.
Air Mix Door Control Specification
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Air Mix Door Motor (Front)
The front air mix door motor is attached to the front heater & cooling unit. This motor rotates so that
the air mix door is opened or closed to a position set by the front air control. Motor rotation is then
conveyed through a shaft and the air mix door position is then fed back to the front air control by the
PBR built into the air mix door motor (front).
Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Front) (Step 1)
Page 12465
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Service and Repair
Fog/Driving Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
Bulb Replacement
1. Disconnect electrical connector. 2. Turn the bulb counterclockwise to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily substances away from
it. Do not touch bulb by hand while it is lit or right after being turned off. Burning may result.
- Do not leave bulb out of fog lamp reflector for a long time because dust, moisture smoke, etc.
may affect the performance of fog lamp. When replacing bulb, be sure to replace it with new one.
Page 8685
d. Take the harness branch loose from the body.
17. Remove the lower anchor bolt for the rear seat belt.
18. Remove the lower side finisher.
^ Use a plastic trim tool.
19. Remove the seat belt retractor; 1 bolt.
20. Remove the harness ground bolt.
21. Remove the floor mat holder.
Page 9151
^ Apply the brakes as shown.
^ Start the engine to allow brake boost.
^ Turn the engine OFF,
^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates".
^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate.
Put the bridge plate in the down position.
^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle.
Page 8825
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 4351
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 5690
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Locations
Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 372
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 10356
Page 8879
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 6461
Optional Splice
Page 13615
Optional Splice
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System
- TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Page 11580
6. Repeat the cleaning procedure as needed.
^ After treating, the trim panel should be clean as shown in Figure 4 above.
7. Reinstall the trim panel parts removed in step 1.
Page 6302
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 12601
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 12309
A. Position the organizer assembly on end as shown.
B. Spray lubricant (WD-40(R) or equivalent) between the inset and the tube.
C. Spray lubricant all the way around the insert.
D. Wait about 30 seconds for the lubricant to penetrate down the inside of the tube and around the
rubber o-ring.
E. Pull / remove the insert as shown in Figure 5.
F. Wipe off any residual or over spray lubricant.
6. Insert the new slider assemblies into the organizer.
^ Push the slider in until the plastic insert stops against the end of the metal tube.
7. Completely loosen the hand knob on all 4 slider assemblies.
^ This will allow maximum gap between the washer and slider base.
8. Slide the organizer back into the tracks.
Page 5393
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9350
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 5334
Case 15
Page 12362
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 5048
Information Bus: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Inspection Between TCM And Differential Lock Control Unit (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 488
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 7122
OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL 1. Check that gear oil is not leaking from the final drive assembly
or around it.
2. Check the gear oil level from filler plug mounting hole as shown.
CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking oil level.
3. Apply sealant to the filler plug. Install the filler plug on the final drive assembly and tighten to
specification.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Oil grade and viscosity. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and
Lubricants". See: Maintenance/Fluids Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS" (FFD). Refer to
"Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD). See: Service and Repair/Rear Differential (Without
Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD with ELD).
See: Service and Repair/Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation
Changing Final Drive Oil
Changing Final Drive Oil
Page 2809
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 1485
Cruise Control Switch: Description and Operation
ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Component Description
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads
voltage variation of switch, and determines which button is operated. Refer to "AUTOMATIC
SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
Page 736
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 7312
Interior - Noise From Drivers Power Seat Lifter
Seat Track: Customer Interest Interior - Noise From Drivers Power Seat Lifter
Classification: BT05-003a
Reference: NTB05-010a
Date: February 7, 2008
NISSAN; NOISE FROM DRIVER'S POWER SEAT LIFTER
This bulletin supersedes NTB03-040 and amends NTB05-010. The Applied Vehicles / VINs / Dates
have been updated. No other changes have been made.
APPLIED VEHICLES
APPLIED VINs / DATES
IF YOU CONFIRM: The driver's power seat makes a popping or clicking noise when using the seat
lifter.
ACTIONS:
^ Remove the four drivers seat mounting bolts and tilt the seat to access the bottom.
^ Install the new Spacer Washer (see Parts Information).
NOTE:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You must closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 275
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 7886
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
Wheel Sensors
WHEEL SENSORS
REMOVAL
1. Remove wheel sensor bolt.
^ When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front
wheel sensor bolt.
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
^ Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten wheel sensor bolt to specification.
CAUTION: Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following: ^
Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged.
^ Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
Sensor Rotor
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation FRONT
The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace
wheel hub and bearing assembly.
REAR Removal
1. Remove axle shaft assembly.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor.
2. Pull the sensor rotor off the axle shaft using Tool and a press.
Tool number: ST30031000 ( - )
Installation
1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure
sensor rotor is fully seated.
Page 13972
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 1062
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
SRS Components Parts Location
Page 5602
Page 13891
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 13003
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Classification: AT07-006B
Reference: NTB08-049B
Date: March 13, 2009
NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT
This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard
all earlier versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information,
the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to
the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used
as specified by the part number in this bulletin.
If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in
the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan
ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 10714
8. Remove center seat belt retractor. 9. Remove center anchor bracket cover.
10. Remove push pins from center seat belt webbing sleeve. 11. Remove bolts from anchor
bracket and remove center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. 12. Remove center belt bracket
from floor. 13. Remove seat belt buckles.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Attach rear center seat belt retractor anchor bracket bolts before seat installation.
- Attach rear center seat belt retractor anchor bolt after seat installation with the seat cushion
raised.
Page 6882
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 10982
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 5572
a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section
EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits).
NOTE:
This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different.
b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify
the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check.
C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the
terminal eyelet(s).
d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the
connections.
^ Both sides of the eyelet
^ Eyelet mounting surface
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Nut/bolt threads.
Page 3032
a. Squeeze return-proof clip ends using suitable tool and push the plunger into the tensioner body.
b. Secure plunger using stopper pin. Stopper pin is made from hard wire approximately 1 mm (0.04
inch) in diameter. c. Remove the bolts and the timing chain tensioner.
NOTE: ^
Stop plunger in the fully extended position using return-proof clip 1 if stopper pin is removed.
^ Push the plunger 2 into the tensioner body while squeezing the return-proof clip 1. Secure it using
stopper pin 3.
6. Remove the RH bank timing chain tensioner cover from the front cover using Tool.
Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces.
7. Remove the RH bank timing chain tensioner using the following steps.
WARNING: Plunger, spring, and spring seat pop out when squeezing return-proof clip without
holding plunger head. It may cause serious injuries. Always hold plunger head when removing.
a. Squeeze return-proof clip ends using suitable tool and push the plunger into the tensioner body.
b. Secure plunger using stopper pin.
^ Stopper pin is made from hard wire approximately 1 mm (0.04 inch) in diameter.
Component Locations
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 928
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 11315
LT-T/TOW-02
Page 3417
11. Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening and install the radiator cap. 12. Remove the
non-vented reservoir cap. 13. Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to the specified level. Run the
engine to warm up the cooling system and top up the system as necessary
before installing the vented reservoir cap.
FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM
1. Drain the water from the engine cooling system. 2. Fill the radiator and the reservoir tank (to the
"MAX" line), with water. Reinstall the radiator cap and leave the vented reservoir cap off. 3. Run the
engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. 4. Press the engine accelerator two or three
times under no-load. 5. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down. 6. Drain the water from the
engine cooling system. 7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 until clear water begins to drain from the
radiator.
Page 525
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use
Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036.
1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM.
a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other
damage.
Page 8904
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 12192
Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder
Switch) Check (Crew Cab)
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 7813
6. From the "CONSULT UTILITIES" screen, select "ECU Reprog. Data" (see Figure 4).
Page 1831
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 4135
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 8004
d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process.
4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance.
^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed.
ROTOR INDEXING
When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been
removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of
rotor run-out.
1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty.
NOTE:
For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the
Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE.
2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only).
3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub.
4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5.
For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM.
5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug
nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only).
^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout.
6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit,
you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using
the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations
performed.
Disclaimer
Page 10092
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 3604
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1287
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Changeover Switch) Circuit Check (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 5025
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2
Page 3921
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 3152
DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART
Page 6715
Page 1444
Page 13555
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 14394
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 6066
the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that
downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK,
engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the
cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive
Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all
over again: Engine stalls.
- Erroneous idle.
Page 5494
Locations
Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 5522
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 3722
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Oil Capacity Drain and refill (Approximate) With oil filter change
.......................................................................................................................................................... 6
1/2 qt. (5 1/2 Imp qts., 6.2 L) Without oil filter change
...................................................................................................................................................... 6
1/4 qt. (5 1/4 Imp qts., 5.9 L)
Page 12546
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 4336
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 14226
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 6093
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MAF SENSOR
Component Description
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by
measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows
around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to the hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of
the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
Page 5000
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 12629
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13575
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3654
^ Tighten the exhaust manifold nuts in the numerical order shown. Then recheck the torque of the
nuts both (A) and (B).
^ Before installing new air fuel ration A/F sensors, clean the exhaust system threads using Tool
and apply anti-seize lubricant. Tool number : J-43879-12 : J-43897-18
CAUTION: ^
Do not over tighten the air fuel ratio A/F sensors. Doing so may cause damage to the sensor,
resulting in the MIL coming on.
Page 11488
Front Door Window Motor: Testing and Inspection Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check
Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check (Step 1)
Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check (Step 2)
Page 1440
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
CAUTION:
- Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics
Page 8779
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Locations
Number One Cylinder: Locations
Firing Order
1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
#1 cylinder
Page 6335
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 14182
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 5283
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
Page 13784
Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Check (Step 3)
Page 6537
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 12330
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 14471
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 11396
Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Page 915
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 13667
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 12725
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 12551
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 12547
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 11462
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the following parts from the trim panel:
^ pull handle cover
^ power window switch assembly (if equipped)
Refer to the INT section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal
instructions.
2. Following the instructions on the label, apply Nissan Vinyl and Leather Cleaner to the trim panel
surface.
3. Use a soft bristle brush to gently clean the surface.
4. Mist the area lightly with water to rinse.
5. Use a clean cloth to wipe the area clean.
Page 13930
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check (Crew Cab)
Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Crew
Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 2061
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 9907
Phototach (OTC 3660) Digital Tachometer: Part of test kit J-49489
- Part number for Phototach - 3660
WARNING:
Do not shine or point the red light beam from this tool into anyone's eyes (including your own).
Reflective Paint: Part of test kit J-49489
- Part number for reflective paint - 550197
Applicator: Part of test kit J-49489
- Part number for Applicators (100 pack) - 550223
Page 10298
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Drivetrain - Oil Leaks From The Transfer Case
Case: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Oil Leaks From The Transfer Case
Classification: TF10-003
Reference: NTB10-047
Date: March 19, 2010
TITAN, FRONTIER, XTERRA, AND PATHFINDER; OIL LEAKING FROM TRANSFER CASE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2007 Titan (A60) 2005 - 2007 Frontier (D40) 2005 - 2007 Xterra
(N50) 2005 - 2007 Pathfinder (R51)
APPLIED TRANSFER CASES: TX15A and TX15B assemblies
IF YOU CONFIRM:
Oil is leaking from one or a combination of three bolts at rear of the transfer case (See Figure 1).
^ Figure 1 shows the transfer case viewed from the rear.
ACTION:
Refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE on Page 3 of this bulletin.
^ If the bolts are not missing, do NOT replace the transfer case, transfer control device, or transfer
control unit for this incident, if it should occur.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 12878
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Page 13089
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 8975
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 8811
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 1548
Diagnostic Procedure For In-Vehicle Sensor (Step 13)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
SYMPTOM: In-vehicle sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B2578 or
B2579 is displayed. Without a CONSULT-II code 30, 31 is indicated on front air control as a result
of conducting self-diagnosis.
COMPONENT INSPECTION
In-vehicle Sensor
Page 8951
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3050
^ If measured value exceeds the standard, replace the connecting rod assembly and/or piston and
piston pin assembly.
^ If replacing the piston and piston pin assembly, refer to the Table for Selective Fitting for Piston to
select the piston corresponding to the applicable bore grade of the cylinder block to be used.
Factory installed parts grading: ^
Only grade 0 is available.
CONNECTING ROD BEARING OIL CLEARANCE
Method of Measurement ^
Install connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod and cap. Tighten connecting rod bolts to the
specified torque.
Measure inside diameter of connecting rod bearing. (Oil clearance) = (Inside diameter of
connecting rod bearing) - (Crankshaft pin diameter) Standard: 0.020 - 0.039 mm (0.0008 - 0.0015
inch) Limit: 0.055 mm (0.0022 inch)
^ If clearance cannot be adjusted within the standard, grind crankshaft pin and use undersized
bearing.
Method of Using Plastigage
^ Remove oil and dust on the crankshaft pin and surfaces of each bearing completely.
^ Cut a plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and place it in the crankshaft axial
direction, avoiding oil holes.
^ Install the connecting rod bearings to the connecting rod and connecting rod bearing cap, and
tighten the connecting rod bolts to the specified torque.
Page 6716
Page 12272
Sunroof Switch System Check
Page 12407
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 14186
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Fuel Pressure: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open
Acceleration
Classification: FE07-004
Reference: NTB07-040
Date: June 6, 2007
2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007
Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223
APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007
IF YOU CONFIRM
When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced,
ACTIONS
1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure).
2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump.
NOTE:
Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 1476
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 2)
Page 6444
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KS
Component Description
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric
element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This
pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
Page 12373
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 9563
Optional Splice
Page 6267
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Service and Repair
Global Positioning System Antenna: Service and Repair
GPS ANTENNA
Removal
1. Remove center console. 2. Remove cluster lid D. 3. Remove defroster grille.
4. Disconnect GPS antenna connector.
5. Remove GPS antenna.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1832
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 3236
M8 × 25 mm (0.98 inch): No. 1, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13 M8 × 45 mm (1.77 inch): No. 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 14 M8 ×
123 mm (4.84 inch): No. 9, 12
2. Install the oil strainer to the oil pan (upper).
3. Install the oil pan (lower).
a. Apply liquid gasket thoroughly as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
b. Tighten the oil pan (lower) bolts in numerical order as shown.
4. Install the oil pan drain plug. 5. Install engine assembly.
^ Do not fill the engine oil for at least 30 minutes after oil pan is installed.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1. Check engine oil level and add engine oil if necessary. 2. Start the engine, and check for leaks of
engine oil. 3. Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Check engine oil level again.
Page 916
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Locations
Component Parts Location
Page 5728
Engine Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
EC-MAIN-01
Description and Operation
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation
ISC SYSTEM
Description
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air,
which is let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating
of the throttle valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft
position sensor (POS) detects the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the
target value memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the
engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into
consideration various engine conditions, such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load
(air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan operation, etc.).
ABS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Diagram Information and Instructions
Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 11405
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
BCM
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference
when configuring new BCM after installation. Refer to "Configuration". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
1. Disconnect battery negative cable. 2. Remove lower knee bolster.
3. Remove screw and release BCM. 4. Disconnect connectors and then remove BCM.
Installation
Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
- When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to "Configuration". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
- When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition
key IDs. Refer to BL-139, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)". See: Accessories
and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems
- When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system.
Refer to WT-15, "ID Registration Procedure".
Page 7817
CAUTION:
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE ETHERNET CABLE UNTIL THE DATA TRANSFER IS COMPLETE
(SEE FIGURE 10).
^ If the cable is disconnected before the data transfer is complete, you MUST restart the transfer
(download) procedure; otherwise ABSNDC damage can occur.
^ If this happens accidentally; wait for ASIST to display an "error" message, then click on "OK".
Reconnect the cable, select "Backup", then return to step 6.
9. Transfer (download) data from ASIST into CONSULT-II.
a. On the ASIST screen, click on "OKAY" (see Figure 8).
b. Verify CONSULT-II IP Address (see Figure 9). Then click on "OK".
^ Your IP address may differ based on the network configuration.
Page 10436
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the cluster lid D.
2. Remove the two screws and remove the in-vehicle sensor from cluster lid D.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 13071
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 6769
Page 4781
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 13054
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Automatic Air Conditioner
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Automatic Air Conditioner
Intake Sensor Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on the heater & cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air
after it passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air
control.
Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 11288
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 12964
2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full
or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank
until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less. If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified
level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through
the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from
fuel filler pipe.
b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire.
c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield.
d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and disconnect the vent hose quick
connector. e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel
from the fuel tank.
3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 4.
Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump
protector.
6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister.
Page 3567
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 2719
OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL 1. Check that gear oil is not leaking from the final drive assembly
or around it.
2. Check the gear oil level from filler plug mounting hole as shown.
CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking oil level.
3. Apply sealant to the filler plug. Install the filler plug on the final drive assembly and tighten to
specification.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Oil grade and viscosity. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and
Lubricants". See: Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS" (FFD). Refer to "Removal and Installation"
(RFD without ELD). See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and
Repair/Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Refer to "Removal
and Installation" (RFD with ELD). See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service
and Repair/Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation
Changing Final Drive Oil
Changing Final Drive Oil
Page 12645
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Window System
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Page 1852
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Service and Repair
Steering Wheel: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Remove the driver air bag
module. 3. Disconnect steering wheel switches. 4. Remove the steering wheel center nut.
5. Remove the steering wheel using Tools.
Tool number: A: J-1859-A B: J-42578
CAUTION: Place a piece of tape across the spiral cable so it will not be rotated out of position.
6. Inspect the steering wheel near the puller holes for damage. If damaged, replace the steering
wheel.
^ Remove steering wheel rear cover and steering wheel switches, if required.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Align spiral cable correctly when installing steering wheel. Make sure that the spiral cable is in the
neutral position. The neutral position is detected by turning left 2.6 revolutions from the right end
position and ending with the knob at the top.
^ If equipped with VDC, refer to BRC-146, "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position"
for steering angle sensor adjustment. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction
Control Systems/Steering Angle Sensor/Adjustments
^ After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to make sure no malfunction is detected. See:
Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic
Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic
Test Procedures
^ Tighten steering wheel center nut to specification.
CAUTION: ^
The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the cable is not installed in the correct
position.
^ With the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond
the limited number of turns. The spiral cable
Page 3767
14. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION is completed.
Page 5749
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not
be carried out successfully. In this case, find
the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that
downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK,
engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the
cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE". See: Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness
Codes/Specification (SP) Value
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all
over again: Engine stalls.
- Erroneous idle.
Page 5556
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use
Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036.
1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM.
a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other
damage.
Page 5139
Case 8
Page 5171
Case 7
Page 11310
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 3970
Attachment General Procedure
Page 2958
Disclaimer
Page 6741
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 6321
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 8557
All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu
Page 13542
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 6714
Page 4672
Page 3627
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 13211
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire
changing machine and break both tire beads.
Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead.
3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
1. Place first side of tire onto rim.
2. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten transmitter nut to specification.
Transmitter nut 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.)
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 2736
Components
Replacement
DRAINING 1. Stop engine. 2. Remove the drain plug and gasket. Drain the fluid.
Page 11496
After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch.
1. Raise the glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the
glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the
original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position.
Page 5392
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 3317
EM-12
Page 5871
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 8646
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 11363
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 11617
Removal
1. Open window fully. 2. Remove door mirror. 3. Remove molding.
- Remove hole cover and screw.
- Lift molding from rear side.
- Disconnect clips from flange.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
REAR DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING
Removal
1. Open window fully. 2. Remove molding.
- Remove hole cover and screw.
- Lift molding from rear side.
- Disconnect clips from flange.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2067
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 11340
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3858
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 4131
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 5156
Case 9
Page 6927
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 9877
Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch (Steps 24 - 25)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET CLUTCH
SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage when A/C switch is ON.
Page 6330
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 5428
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 11398
Body Control Module: Programming and Relearning
Configuration
DESCRIPTION
CONFIGURATION has two functions as follows:
- READ CONFIGURATION is the function to confirm vehicle configuration of current BCM.
- WRITE CONFIGURATION is the function to write vehicle configuration on BCM.
CAUTION: When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-II.
- Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order.
- If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur.
- Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Data Link
Connector/Schematic
Page 7100
Control Unit: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove jack and tools. 3.
Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. 4. Remove the necessary
push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way.
5. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to disconnect connector. 6. Remove
the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit.
INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque. Differential lock
control unit nuts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.)
Page 13928
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH (Step 1)
Page 6680
9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically.
Page 13504
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 1129
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 12087
Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 4928
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 4 - 7)
Page 13912
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 6399
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Mechanical Specifications
Wheel Bearing
Page 13132
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 14013
Page 5876
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9147
^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates.
^ Chock the left rear wheel.
Preliminary Checks:
3. Perform pre-alignment checks.
^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.)
^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation)
^ Tire pressure
^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components
^ Wheel bearing axial play
^ Ball joints of suspension arms
^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage
^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack)
^ Vehicle weight
> Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers
> Fuel level is full
Page 1655
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8776
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 11391
- When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state:
- Ignition switch
- Key switch (insert)
- Hazard switch
- Main door lock/unlock switch
- Front door switch (LH, RH)
- Rear door switch (LH, RH) (Crew Cab)
- Rear door switch upper (LH, RH) (King Cab)
- Rear door switch lower (LH, RH) (King Cab)
- Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp)
- Keyfob (lock/unlock signal)
- Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch)
- When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication
inactive mode.
- Status of combination switch reading function is changed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY
- Power door lock system.
- Remote keyless entry system.
- Power window system.
- Sunroof system.
- Room lamp timer.
- Warning chime system.
- Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system.
- Trailer turn signal and hazard warning lamps system (if equipped). Refer to "TRAILER TOW".
NOTE: Power supply only. No system control.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R
- Panic system.
- Vehicle security (theft warning) system.
- NVIS (NATS) system.
- Headlamp, tail lamp, front fog lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems.
- Front wiper and washer system.
Part 1
Page 269
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 9759
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 5640
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 9598
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 5844
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 12885
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 1799
Page 12386
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 10)
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 11)
Page 5645
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 13673
Page 8584
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 583
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
CAN Communication
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3877
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 971
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
Page 8229
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 14077
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 5378
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine
operating condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range.
HO2S2 HEATER
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the
engine speed, amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the
A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst
Page 14165
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 11359
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 11549
4. Remove upper and lower seatbelt anchor trim (see Figure 1).
5. Remove upper seatbelt anchor bolt (see Figure 2).
6. Remove arm rest.
Locations
Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Location of Electrical Parts
Service and Repair
Hood Latch Release Cable: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of Hood Lock Control
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front grill. 2. Remove the front fender protector (LH). 3. Disconnect the hood lock
cable from the hood lock, and unclip it from the radiator core support upper and hoodledge. 4.
Remove the bolt and the hood opener. 5. Remove the grommet from the dash lower, and pull the
hood lock cable toward the passenger room.
CAUTION: While pulling, be careful not to damage the outside of the hood lock cable.
INSTALLATION
1. Pull the hood lock cable through the hole in dash lower panel into the engine room.
Be careful not to bend the cable too much, keeping the radius 100 mm (3.94 in) or more.
2. Make sure the cable is not offset from the positioning grommet, and from inside the vehicle, push
the grommet into the dash lower hole securely. 3. Apply the sealant around the grommet at (*)
mark.
Page 14076
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 12648
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 12634
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Mirrors - Power/Manual Mirror Actuator Inoperative
Mirror Adjustment Cable: Customer Interest Mirrors - Power/Manual Mirror Actuator Inoperative
Classification: BT06-005
Reference: NTB06-074
Date: October 30, 2006
2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; MANUAL OR POWER DOOR
MIRROR ACTUATOR INOPERABLE
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004-2006 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM The door mirror actuator needs to be replaced.
ACTION
^ Do not replace the complete door mirror assembly.
^ Replace only the door mirror actuator.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 13737
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 1059
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 13397
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 4875
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B)
Page 3918
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 1015
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8487
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 14028
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 1184
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 1522
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Systems Controlled By BCM Directly
Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM Directly
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY
- Power door lock system.
- Remote keyless entry system.
- Power window system.
- Sunroof system.
- Room lamp timer.
- Warning chime system.
- Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system.
- Trailer turn signal and hazard warning lamps system (if equipped). Refer to "TRAILER TOW".
NOTE: Power supply only. No system control.
Page 5977
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install Filter Kit (2004-2006 Titan ONLY)
1. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Note position of yellow marks.
2. Position mounting bracket onto frame as shown, hooking bracket tab onto brake hose bracket.
Attach bracket to frame with the clamp supplied in the kit.
Page 3584
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 4563
Optional Splice
Page 5922
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts
Classification: FA05-002D
Reference: NTB05-097D
Date: January 19, 2011
2005-2011 TITAN AND ARMADA; CAM BOLTS FOR FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT
The Applied Vehicles have been updated/amended. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2011 Titan (A60) 2005 - 2011 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINS 2005 Titan built after 1N6AA0(***)5N 566358 2005 Armada built after
5N1AA08(**)5N 733885 2006 - 2011 vehicles: All VINS
APPLIED DATE Vehicles built after June 2, 2005
IF YOU CONFIRM
An Applied Vehicle needs to have the front wheel alignment adjusted,
NOTE:
Applied Vehicles listed above come from the factory with non-adjustable bolts (Not Cam Bolts) for
the lower link (lower control arm) mounting.
ACTIONS
1. Remove the original lower link mounting bolts, washers, and nuts - 2 per side.
^ Refer to section FSU in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for lower link mounting bolt
locations.
2. Install new bolts (cam bolts), cam washers and new nuts.
^ New parts are listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
NOTE:
Cam bolts are used to adjust caster and camber.
3. Perform front wheel alignment per the ESM.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 4329
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 12019
16. Remove the six nuts (3 on each side) and two base plates shown in Figure 5.
- Removing these nuts will release the gear boxes.
Figure 6
17. Slide both sides of the seat rail back to the rear position (towards the seat back) and remove
the worm gears, drive cable, motor, and gear boxes,
all as one unit, from the seat adjuster assembly (see Figure 6).
CAUTION:
Avoid bending the drive cable. Bending the cable will result in noise during seat operation.
18. Remove the drive cable from the Motor.
Figure 7
- To release the drive cable from the motor end, pull up on the tab using a small flat blade
screwdriver or equivalent (see Figure 7).
Install new Seat Slide Motor Kit
Figure 8
Page 5729
Wiring Diagram
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 13858
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 11280
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 6557
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Classification: EL09-042
Reference: NTB09-118
Date: October 28, 2009
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR
RESET
APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below.
IF YOU CONFIRM
^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side.
And
^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery.
2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display.
NOTES:
^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage
the printed circuit board (PCB).
^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver.
Page 4872
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1029
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 11925
Page 10221
specification, recover/evacuate and recharge the system with the specified amount of refrigerant.
Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
NOTE: At temperatures below 16 degrees C (61 degrees F), leaks may not be detected since the
system may not reach 345 kPa (3.52 kg/sq.cm, 50 psi) pressure.
4. Perform the leak test from the high-pressure side (A/C compressor discharge "a"to evaporator
inlet "f") to the low-pressure side (evaporator drain
hose "g" to compressor shaft seal "k"). Refer to "Components". Clean the component to be
checked and carefully move the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe completely around the
following connections and components. Check the compressor shaft seal
- Check the high and low-pressure pipe and hose fittings, and relief valve
- Check the liquid tank
- Check the refrigerant pressure sensor
- Check all around the service valves. Ensure service valve caps are secured on the service valves
(to prevent leaks).
NOTE: After removing manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) from the service valves, wipe any residue
from the service valves to prevent any false readings by the electronic refrigerant leak detector
(J-41995).
- Evaporator With engine OFF, turn blower fan on "High" for at least 15 seconds to dissipate any
refrigerant trace in the heater and cooling unit assembly. Wait a minimum of 10 minutes
accumulation time (refer to the manufacturer's recommended procedure for actual wait time) before
inserting the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe into the heater and cooling unit assembly
drain hose.
NOTE: Keep the probe inserted for at least 10 seconds. Use caution not to contaminate the probe
tip with water or dirt that may be in the drain hose.
5. If a leak is detected, verify at least once by blowing compressed air into the area of the
suspected leak, then repeat the leak check. 6. Do not stop when one leak is found. Continue to
check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. 7. If no leaks are found,
perform steps 8 - 11. 8. Start the engine. 9. Set the heater A/C controls as follows:
a. A/C switch to ON b. Air flow to VENT mode c. Intake position to RECIRCULATION mode d.
Temperature to MAX cold e. Blower fan speed to HIGH
10. Run the engine at 1,500 rpm for at least 2 minutes.
11. Turn the engine OFF and perform the leak check again following steps 4 through 6.
Refrigerant leaks should be checked immediately after turning the engine OFF. Begin with the leak
detector at the compressor. The pressure on the high pressure side will gradually drop after the
refrigerant circulation stops and pressure on the low pressure side will gradually rise, as shown in
the graph. Some leaks are more easily detected when the pressure is high.
12. Before connecting the recovery/recycling equipment to the vehicle, check the
recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should
be displayed. If pressure is displayed, recover the refrigerant from the equipment lines and then
check the refrigerant purity.
13. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant
identifier equipment. 14. Confirm the refrigerant purity in the vehicle's A/C system using
recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier equipment. 15. Discharge the A/C system
using recovery/recycling equipment. Repair the leaking fitting or component as necessary. 16.
Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and perform the leak test to confirm that there are no
refrigerant leaks. 17. Conduct the Operational Check to ensure system works properly. Refer to
"Operational Check".
Page 3247
c. Check again that the timing alignment marks on the timing chain and on each sprocket are
aligned. Then install the front cover.
d. Install the bolts in the numerical order as shown.
M6 x 50 mm (1.97 in): No.1,20,25,26,27 M6 x 80 mm (3.15 in): No.4, 5, 7 M6 x 20 mm (0.79 in): All
except the above
e. After tightening re-tighten to the specified torque.
CAUTION: Be sure to wipe off any excessive liquid gasket leaking onto surface mating with oil pan.
4. Install the intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (A) and intake valve timing
control solenoid valve cover (LH) (B) as follows:
- Cross mark (C) that cannot be seen after assembly
a. Apply liquid gasket (D) as shown.
D: 2.6 - 3.6 mm (0.102 - 0.142 in) dia.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
CAUTION: The start and end of the liquid gasket application should be crossed at a position (C)
that cannot be seen after attaching the cover.
b. Install the bolts in the numerical order as shown.
- A: Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH)
Page 5003
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 3984
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 1869
Combination Switch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Combination Switch Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 6261
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 6554
Page 11818
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5291
Case 8
Page 11229
Component Parts Location
Page 8808
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 5671
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6712
Page 1927
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 1667
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 2158
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 5662
Page 13904
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 7625
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 4024
Engine Control Module: Connector Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 8190
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor.
2. Install axle shaft assembly.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 8455
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 8133
Page 11883
Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Check (Step 4)
Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Check (Step 1)
Page 4232
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3718
Page 312
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 11741
Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Power Window System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 760
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 3615
Page 6178
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 7701
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009
Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56
vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some
fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which
could cause a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender
card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or
before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 11163
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 445
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 11935
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 191
3. Make sure the transmission is in Park and the brake pedal is released.
IMPORTANT:
Do not push the brake pedal until step 6.
4. Start the engine and let it idle.
^ Keep the transmission in Park.
5. On CONSULT-II, select ABS Data Monitor.
6. Slowly push the brake pedal approximately 2 inches, then release.
NOTE:
2 inches is approximately half-way between the pedal "see height" and "depressed height".
7. Repeat step 6 ten times.
^ If DTC C1179 is detected (comes up on CONSULT-II), this bulletin applies; go to Part 2.
^ If DTC C1179 is not detected, go to the next step.
8. Repeat steps 2 though 7.
^ If you have done steps 2 through 7 twice, and DIG C1179 is not detected, this bulletin does not
apply. Go to ASIST for further diagnostic information.
Part 2
Part 2: Download special ABS/VDC Reprogramming Data from ASIST onto your standard 8 MB
(orange) Reprogramming Card.
This part of the procedure involves two general steps:
^ Setting up
^ Download (transfer) data from ASIST into CONSULT-II (8 MB orange Reprogramming card).
SETTING UP:
1. Install the standard 8 MB (orange)
Reprogramming Card into CONSULT-II.
Use slot A-top slot (see Figure 1).
CAUTION:
Do NOT use the 16 MB (orange) "QR25 Campaign ECM Software" Card (# J-44200-ECMR-16). If
you use this card, it will be reformatted to an 8 MB card.
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch)
Check (King Cab)
Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder
Switch) Check (King Cab)
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Step 1)
Page 5007
LAN-CAN-02
Page 3878
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications
Lubricant Capacity Total in System
............................................................................................................................................................
200 ml (6.8 US fl oz, 7.0 Imp fl oz)
Page 8762
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 1861
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 478
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 4249
Page 398
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 359
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 11939
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 9950
Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 8653
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 10877
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 2522
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure
Fuel pressure at idling..........................................................................................................................
..........Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi)
Page 6470
Page 2105
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of
the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is
disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2
seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and
wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 9575
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 1103
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 9615
Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Driver) (Steps 13 - 15)
Page 2455
Alignment: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
Page 11522
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
1. Record all radio presets.
2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF.
3. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first) and wait for at least 3 minutes.
Page 9832
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 4566
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 6932
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 1138
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 6175
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 12239
Power Seat Switch: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7604
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Locations
Fuel Level Sensor: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4071
ECM Inspection Table Part 5
Page 4985
Page 10878
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 9932
Figure D-2A
NOTE:
You may see clips (fan balance weights) on the fan blades. DO NOT move or remove the fan
balance weights.
Figure D-3
In the next few steps you will be installing these four self adhesive protectors.
NOTE:
Make sure your hands are completely clean. Dirt and oil on your hands can contaminate adhesive
material and reduce its adhesion.
Page 10911
Page 8113
5. From the ASIST PC main menu screen, select CONSULT UTILITIES (see Figure 3).
Description and Operation
Air Register: Description and Operation
Page 5679
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 10990
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 452
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 722
Attachment General Procedure
Page 9966
Figure A-4
2. Use the photos to identify the fan type.
Procedure B - Cooling Fan Motor Inspection/Comparison Chart: RPM to Fan Motor Volt.
RECOMMENDATION: If this is your first time performing this Service Procedure, it is
recommended that you view the video clip on ASIST before starting. To view the video clip, open
the bulletin on ASIST and select "Video" at the bottom of the screen. To view the video full screen,
right click the center of the video screen and select "Full Screen".
1. Inspect the wires near the condenser fan motor:
- Make sure there is no damage to the wire insulation and the wires are in good condition.
Checking Fluid Level
Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection Checking Fluid Level
Checking Fluid Level
Check fluid level, referring to the scale on reservoir tank. Use HOT range for fluid temperatures of
50° - 80°C (122° - 176°F). Use COLD range for fluid temperatures of 0° - 30°C (32° - 86°F).
CAUTION: ^
Do not overfill.
^ Do not reuse any used power steering fluid.
^ Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.
Page 6665
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 12210
Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Steps
2 - 4)
Page 8311
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Specifications
Page 13153
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Diagram Information and Instructions
Windshield Washer Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 6859
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 11360
Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 4271
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 5154
Case 7
Page 8623
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
System Description
- IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse
block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM
E/R control circuits.
- IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication
control, etc.
- It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines.
CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R
1. Lamp control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following
lamps: Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
- Parking lamps
- Tail and license lamps
- Front fog lamps
2. Wiper control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers.
3. Heated mirror relay control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the heated mirror
relay.
4. A/C compressor control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C
compressor (magnetic clutch).
5. Starter control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the starter relay.
6. Cooling fan control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan
relays.
7. Horn control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay.
CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL
With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN
L-line, CAN H-line), it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum
wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only.
1. Fail-safe control
- When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe
control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control.
- Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as shown in the table.
IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL
In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition.
1. CAN communication status
- CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.
- Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.
Page 4044
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8761
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Diagram Information and Instructions
Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 13503
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 1079
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 13873
Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 2475
5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly.
^ Mount the top claws first.
^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13.
^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14.
^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level.
IMPORTANT:
Body - Truck Bed Storage Organizer Rusting
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-074 Date: 090807
Body - Truck Bed Storage Organizer Rusting
Classification: BT09-004
Reference: NTB09-074
Date: August 7, 2009
2004 - 2009 TITAN; RUST ON SLIDERS FOR COLLAPSIBLE STORAGE ORGANIZER
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is rust on the threads of the sliders for the truck bed collapsible storage organizer.
ACTION
Replace the sliders with the new ones listed in the parts information.
NOTE
Do Not replace the entire storage organizer for this incident, if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 9944
Figure E-3
3. Disconnect the white connector circled in Figure E-3.
- This is connector E120.
- This connector has 6 terminal slots with only 5 filled.
Figure E-4
4. Remove the green wire from connector E120.
- Use pin terminal tool J-38751-305 from Pin Tool Set J-38751-3, or equivalent.
Page 10652
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 3828
Page 11162
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 1864
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 12148
Page 10175
Diagnostic Procedure For Water Valve (Steps 8 - 9)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR WATER VALVE
Page 10069
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 4431
Available Valve Lifter
Page 4268
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 1043
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 1656
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9307
can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from the neutral position.
Page 11210
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 5262
Case 15
Page 5101
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
Page 6696
7. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on axle housing and install side bearing
caps on axle housing without tightening to
specification.
CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters.
8. Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool.
Tool number: - (C-4164)
9. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion.
10. Check total preload. 11. Check tooth contact.
12. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent.
CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or
foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces.
13. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts with the specified torque.
Refer to "COMPONENTS". 14. Install both RH and LH axle shafts. 15. Install propeller shaft. 16.
Refill rear final drive oil.
Page 10339
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 3607
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Locations
Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 11124
Remote Control: Service and Repair
REAR AUDIO REMOTE CONTROL UNIT
Removal
1. Carefully remove the rear audio remote control unit from the rear roof console assembly.
CAUTION: Wrap removal tool with clean shop cloth to prevent damage to the headliner.
2. Disconnect connector and remove the rear audio remote control unit.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM
Programming Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 2781
1. Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment
gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be
displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines.
2. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using
recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant
identifier. If NG, refer to "Contaminated Refrigerant".
3. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and
refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to "Contaminated
Refrigerant".
4. Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure oil discharged
into the recovery/recycling equipment. 5. Drain the oil from the "old" (removed) compressor into a
graduated container and recover the amount of oil drained. 6. Drain the oil from the "new"
compressor into a separate, clean container. 7. Measure an amount of new oil installed equal to
amount drained from "old" compressor. Add this oil to "new" compressor through the suction port
opening.
8. Measure an amount of new oil equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this oil to
"new" compressor through the suction port
opening.
9. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of
oil at this time.
CAUTION: Do not add this 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil if only replacing the compressor.
Recall - Right Rear Door Upper Latch Defect
Technical Service Bulletin # 06-032A Date: 060425
Recall - Right Rear Door Upper Latch Defect
Reference: NTB06-032A
Date: April 25, 2006
VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN PASSENGER SIDE DOOR UPPER LATCH
This bulletin amends NTB06-032 and includes revised Claims Information. Please discard all
previous copies of NTB06-032.
CAMPAIGN I.D. # /NHTSA #: PB017/06V-064
APPLIED VEHICLE: 2006 Titan (A60) - King Cab Models only
APPLIED VINS: 1N6*A06**6N543640-546599
INTRODUCTION
Nissan has determined that some 2006 model year Nissan Titan King Cab vehicles fail to conform
to the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 206 - Door Locks And Door Retention
Components. FMVSS 206 specifies strength requirements for door locks, hinges and latches in
vehicles. The upper latch assembly of the right side rear door in some Titan King Cab vehicles
does not meet one of the requirements in this standard. This may result in the right side doors
coming partially open in the case of certain crashes and increasing the risk of injury to occupants.
To prevent this condition from occurring, Nissan will replace the upper latch assemblies with ones
that meet the standard. All other requirements under FMVSS 206 and other standards are met.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PB017 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED
The number of vehicles potentially affected is approximately 480.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the retailer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to delivery under a
sale or lease. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers
to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 11528
14. Remove latch switch connector from door (see Figure 9).
15. Remove three bolts from upper door latch.
Page 8225
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 10420
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Automatic Air Conditioner
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner
INTAKE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel.
2. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
NOTE: The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the
A/C evaporator cover.
3. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the heater and cooling unit assembly.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Sunroof
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 292
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 4962
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not
be carried out successfully. In this case, find
the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that
downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK,
engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the
cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE". See: Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness
Codes/Specification (SP) Value
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all
over again: Engine stalls.
- Erroneous idle.
Page 30
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 2218
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5584
^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay.
9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay.
^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without
causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals.
10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6).
11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs.
Page 12897
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
Page 5861
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Testing and Inspection
Brake Hose/Line: Testing and Inspection
Inspection After Installation
CAUTION: If a leak is detected at the connections, retighten it or, if necessary, replace the
damaged part.
1. Check brake lines (tubes and hoses), and connections for fluid leaks, damage, twist,
deformation, contact with other parts, and loose connections.
Replace any damage parts.
2. While depressing brake pedal under a force of 785 N (80 kg, 177 lbs.) with engine running for
approximately 5 seconds, check for fluid leakage
from each part.
Page 13676
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT
DTC's Set
Classification: EM06-005a
Reference: NTB06-079a
Date: January 24, 2008
DTC FOR VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL FUNCTION
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been expanded. No other
changes have been made. Please discard any other copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1996 - 2009 with Variable Valve Timing
APPLIED ENGINES: VQ35; QR25; QG1B; GA16; VQ40; VK56; MR18; MR20
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The MIL is on with any of the following DTCs stored:
^ P0011, P0014, P0021, P0024, P1110, P1135,
NOTE:
The engine may also have Camshaft Sprocket rattle noise and/or other engine noise.
ACTION
Do Not replace the variable valve timing Solenoid Valve or the Sprocket(s) without performing the
complete diagnostics indicated in the EC section of the Service Manual.
The first steps in the complete diagnostic are to make sure the:
^ Engine oil is at the operating level; add oil if needed. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil level
diagnoses if needed.
^ Oil pressure is normal when measured with a gauge at the pressure switch port. Refer to the
Service Manual for low oil pressure diagnoses if needed.
Disclaimer
Page 3444
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 5940
^ Check to ensure that mounting brackets and mounting rubbers are installed properly and free
from undue stress. Improper installation could result in excessive noise and vibration.
Page 1845
Page 9886
1. Install the magnet coil.
CAUTION: Be sure to align the magnet coil pin with the hole in the compressor front head.
2. Install the magnet coil harness clip using a screwdriver.
3. Install the pulley assembly using Tool and a wrench, then install the snap ring using snap ring
pliers.
Tool number : (J-38873-A)
4. Install the clutch disc on the compressor shaft, together with the original shim(s). Press the
clutch disc down by hand.
5. Install the clutch pulley bolt using Tool, to prevent the clutch disc from turning and tighten the
bolt to specification.
Tool number : J-44614
CAUTION: After tightening the clutch pulley bolt, check that the clutch pulley rotates smoothly.
Page 8234
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 1818
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 1406
Page 1529
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 2146
Page 8417
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 4330
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 7686
2. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 3. Start engine. 4. Erase self-diagnosis. 5. Check 4WD shift indicator
lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again.
If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new
transfer control unit and retry the above check.
METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT "4H" OR "4LO" 1. Start engine.
Run the engine for at least 10 seconds. 2. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position
with brake pedal depressed. Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn 4WD shift switch to "2WD"
position. Stay in "2WD" for at least 2 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 5. Start engine. 6.
Erase self-diagnosis. 7. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again.
If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new
transfer control unit and retry the above check.
Page 10498
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 1756
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to "General
Precautions".
1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank.
Page 3461
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 14170
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 10832
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 8604
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 11279
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 4652
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389)
Repair Overview
PARTS INFORMATION
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 13586
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 7144
Location of Electrical Parts
Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Classification: WT11-003
Reference: NTB11-029
Date: March 21, 2011
TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration.
^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care
to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin.
Tire Mounting Tips:
NOTE:
These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to
read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment
1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid.
^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process.
2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and
corrosion.
Page 4640
^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay.
9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay.
^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without
causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals.
10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6).
11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs.
Page 4627
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II.
^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information.
2. Compare your printout to the chart.
a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3.
b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply.
^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information.
3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows:
Page 11526
10. Remove handle release cable from upper door latch white cable clip on door (see Figure 5).
11. Remove upper door latch gray cable clip from door (see Figure 6).
Page 4537
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 14015
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 8094
e. Read the "CAUTION" screen carefully (see Figure 7). Then click "Okay".
8. Prepare CONSULT-II as follows (see Figure 8):
a. Make sure:
^ CONSULT-II is OFF.
^ The 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card is inserted into CONSULT-II.
^ The A/C Power Adapter is securely connected to CONSULT-II.
^ The Ethernet Cable is securely connected to CONSULT-II and the PC port.
b. Turn CONSULT-II ON.
c. Select "Transfer Files via LAN".
NOTE:
If you accidentally choose a menu option other than "Transfer Files via LAN" turn CONSULT-II
OFF, and then back ON as shown in Figure 8.
d. Set the CONSULT-II unit down for now and go to your ASIST PC.
Page 318
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 4035
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 11848
4. Pry off the bottom side actuator hook(s) to separate the actuator from the housing (if necessary).
NOTE:
Some actuators will not require prying. They will separate after removing the screw(s) in step 3.
5. Disconnect the motor electrical connector(s).
6. Remove the old actuator motor.
7. Install the new actuator motor in the reverse order of removal.
Page 13722
Optional Splice
Page 12392
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 9794
Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Steps 11 - 14)
Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Step 15)
Page 2069
Page 4947
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not
be carried out successfully. In this case, find
the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that
downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK,
engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the
cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE". See: Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness
Codes/Specification (SP) Value
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all
over again: Engine stalls.
- Erroneous idle.
Page 14425
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 1766
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10256
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 11075
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 10539
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Seat Belt Inspection After A
Collision
Seat Belt Inspection
AFTER A COLLISION
WARNING: Inspect all seat belt assemblies including retractors and attaching hardware after any
collision. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced
unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly.
Failure to do so could result in serious personal injury in an accident. Seat belt assemblies not in
use during a collision should also be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted. Seat
belt pre-tensioners should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during a frontal collision
in which the air bags are deployed.
Replace any seat belt assembly (including anchor bolts) if:
- The seat belt was in use at the time of a collision (except for minor collisions and the belts,
retractors and buckles show no damage and continue to operate properly).
- The seat belt was damaged in an accident. (i.e. torn webbing, bent retractor or guide).
- The seat belt attaching point was damaged in an accident. Inspect the seat belt attaching area for
damage or distortion and repair as necessary before installing a new seat belt assembly.
- Anchor bolts are deformed or worn out.
- The seat belt pre-tensioner should be replaced even if the seat belts are not in use during the
collision in which the air bags are deployed.
PRELIMINARY CHECKS
1. Check the seat belt warning lamp/chime for proper operation as follows:
a. Switch ignition ON. The seat belt warning lamp should illuminate. Also, the seat belt warning
chime should sound for about seven seconds. b. Fasten drivers seat belt. The seat belt warning
lamp should go out and the chime (if sounding) should stop.
2. If the air bag warning lamp is blinking, conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II, and air bag
warning lamp. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation
Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics
3. Check that the seat belt retractor, seat belt anchor and buckle bolts are securely attached. 4.
Check the shoulder seat belt guide and shoulder belt height adjuster for front seats. Ensure guide
swivels freely and that belt lays flat and does not
bind in guide. Ensure height adjuster operates properly and holds securely.
5. Check retractor operation:
a. Fully extend the seat belt webbing and check for twists, tears or other damage. b. Allow the seat
belt to retract. Ensure that belt returns smoothly and completely into the retractor. If the seat belt
does not return smoothly, wipe
the inside of the loops with a clean paper cloth, because dirt built up in the loops of the upper
anchors can cause the seat belts to retract slowly.
c. Fasten the seat belt. Check the seat belt returns smoothly and completely to the retractor. If the
belt does not return smoothly, the cause may be
an accumulation of dust or dirt. Use the "SEAT BELT TAPE SET" and perform the following steps.
Inspect the front seat belt through-anchor: 1. Pull the seat belt out to a length of 500 mm (19.69 in)
or more. 2. Use a clip or other device to hold the seat belt at the center pillar belt opening. 3. Pass
a thin wire through the through-anchor belt opening. Hold both ends of the wire and pull taut while
moving it up and down several
times along the belt opening surface to remove dirt.
4. Any dirt that cannot be removed with the wire can be removed by cleaning the opening with a
clean cloth. 5. Apply tape at the point where the belt contacts the through-anchor belt opening.
NOTE: Apply the tape so that there is no looseness or wrinkling.
6. Remove the clip holding the seat belt and check that the belt returns smoothly. 7. Repeat steps
above as necessary to check the other seat belts.
Page 3415
Coolant: Service and Repair
Changing Engine Coolant
WARNING: ^
To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
^ Wrap a thick cloth around the cap to carefully remove the cap. First, turn the cap a quarter of a
turn to release any built-up pressure, then push down and turn the cap all the way to remove it.
DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT
1. Turn ignition switch ON and set temperature control lever all the way to HOT position or the
highest temperature position. Wait 10 seconds and
turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool.
3. Open the radiator drain plug at the bottom of the radiator, and remove the radiator filler cap. This
is the only step required when partially draining
the cooling system (radiator only).
CAUTION: Do not to allow the coolant to contact the drive belts.
4. When draining all of the coolant in the system for engine removal or repair, it is necessary to
drain the cylinder block. Remove the RH cylinder
block drain plug to drain the right bank and the oil cooler hose to drain the left bank as shown.
5. Remove the reservoir tank to drain the engine coolant, then clean the reservoir tank before
installing it. 6. Check the drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration.
If the coolant is contaminated, flush the engine cooling system.
REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT
1. Close the radiator drain plug. Install the reservoir tank, cylinder block drain plug, and the oil
cooler hose, if removed for a total system drain or for
engine removal or repair. ^
The radiator must be completely empty of coolant and water.
^ Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plug. Use Genuine High Performance
Thread Sealant or equivalent. Radiator drain plug: Refer to CO-14, "RADIATOR". See:
Radiator/Service and Repair RH cylinder block drain plug: Refer to EM-78, "CYLINDER BLOCK".
See: Engine/Cylinder Block Assembly/Service and Repair/Disassembly and Assembly
Page 8926
Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Active Test
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG-MODE" screen. 2. Touch item to be tested, and
check operation. 3. Touch "START".
Part 1
Part 2
4. Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation.
Data Monitor
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
2. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "DATA
MONITOR" screen. 3. Touch "START". 4. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch
items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be
monitored. When "MAIN SIGNALS" is selected, predetermined items are monitored.
5. Touch RECORD while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop
recording, touch STOP.
Page 8903
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 51
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 14100
Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Crew
Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 2457
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
Page 1521
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 13816
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 12054
Figure 18
31. Re-install the four Seat Bottom Cushion Bolts M8, 12 mm head (see Figure 18). Bolt torque:
13-17 ft-lb (17.5-23.7 Nm).
32. Re-connect the slide motor electrical connector, making sure it snaps in securely.
33. Place the seat assembly back into the vehicle and re-connect all electrical connectors. Make
sure they all snap together securely.
34. Re-connect the battery cables, positive cable first.
35. Finish reinstalling the seat. Torque mounting bolts to 45 N.m (4.6 Kg.m, 35 ft-lbs.).
- If needed, refer to section SE in the Service Manual (ESM) for seat installation information.
36. Operate all seat switches to make sure everything works as it should.
37. If the vehicle is equipped with "ADP", for the ADP entry/exit feature to return to normal
operation, procedure A or B must be performed.
Procedure A:
1. Insert key into the ignition key cylinder. (Ignition switch is "OFF".)
2. Open - close - open the driver side door (dome lamp; "ON" - "OFF" - "ON" ).
3. End
Procedure B:
1. Drive the vehicle at more than 25 km/h (16 MPH).
2. End
38. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
39. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual and perform the following as needed:
- Power Window Initialization
- Power Sunroof Initialization
- Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
- Throttle Valve closed Position Learning
- Idle Air Volume Learning
- Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position
- Rear View Monitor Guiding Line Adjustment
Page 7335
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 4206
Knock Sensor: Connector Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 10610
CAUTION:
- The spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if the cable is not installed in the correct
position.
- With the steering linkage disconnected, the cable may snap by turning the steering wheel beyond
the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from
the neutral position.
Page 5138
Case 7
Page 3124
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine and confirm:
^ if a squeak noise is coming from the drive belt
and
^ using a stethoscope or similar tool, if the drive belt auto tensioner is making abnormal noise.
2. Turn the engine off.
3. Write down the radio presets for later reprogramming.
4. Remove intake duct and engine cover.
5. Disconnect battery, negative cable first, and wait at least 3 minutes before proceeding to step 6.
6. Remove drive belt and drive belt auto tensioner. Refer to section EM of the Electronic Service
Manual for removal procedure.
7. Lift up vehicle by placing it on a hoist.
8. Remove front right wheel.
9. Remove fender protector. Refer to section EXT of the ESM for removal procedure.
10. Remove engine under cover (6 bolts).
11. Check the pulley alignment as follows:
Page 11185
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 8601
Page 2302
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 5674
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 9110
57. Remove the 5 screws (shown in the figure) from the center roof console.
58. Pull the console loose at the rear and let it hang in place.
59. Pull the door welt loose from the top and rear of the door opening.
CAUTION:
Page 1559
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
^ For Titan and Armada: follow the procedure outlined in this bulletin for intake sensor replacement.
^ For Quest, Xterra, Frontier and Pathfinder: refer to the appropriate section in the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for intake sensor replacement.
1. Remove six bolts from the glove box.
2. Remove glove box. The intake sensor is located behind the glove box.
3. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
Page 12793
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
A/C - TXV (Thermal Expansion Valve) Replacement
Expansion Valve: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - TXV (Thermal Expansion Valve) Replacement
Classification: HA10-004
Reference: NTB10-044
Date: March 17, 2010
A/C TXV (THERMAL EXPANSION VALVE) REPLACEMENT
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002-2010 Altima (L31, L32) 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier
(D40) 2004-2010 Maxima (A34, A35) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2009 Quest (V42)
2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
SERVICE INFORMATION
The A/C TXV (thermal expansion valve) is available separately as a service part for the Applied
Vehicles.
If the A/C TXV needs to be replaced for any reason AND the evaporator is operating normally:
^ Replace the TXV only. Do not replace the heater and cooling unit assembly or the evaporator
assembly.
^ Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual for TXV removal and installation instructions.
Page 7732
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 7799
2. Press [INITIATE ECU REPROGRAM] (see Figure 16), then
a. Press [VDC]
b. Review all precautions
C. Press [NEXT]
3. Select the program data (see Figure 17).
Page 6823
Control Module: Service and Repair
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
COMPONENTS
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect
A/T assembly harness connector.
Specifications
Shift Cable: Specifications
Floor Shift Models
Page 585
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 9250
1. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly.
^ Disconnect wheel sensor harness connector. Do not remove wheel sensor from wheel hub and
bearing assembly for this procedure.
2. Remove steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage ball joint boot.
^ Temporarily tighten nut to prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off.
Tool number: HT72520000 (J-25730-A)
3. Remove the coil spring and shock absorber assembly using power tool. 4. Support lower link
using a suitable jack. 5. Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint and discard the cotter
pin.
6. Separate upper link ball joint from steering knuckle using Tool.
Tool number: ST29020001 (J-24319-01)
7. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then separate lower link ball joint
from steering knuckle. 8. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary. ^
Perform ball joint inspection.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Refer to "Components" for tightening torques.
CAUTION: Use a new cotter pin for installation of lock nut.
Page 13596
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Page 12425
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 12498
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 57
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 5233
Case 5
Page 13524
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 7801
NOTE:
This process will take from 4 to 5 minutes.
CAUTION:
You must leave the vehicle and the CONSULT-II unit "undisturbed" (don't touch) until
reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If the CONSULT-II screen gives you an error message "Unmatch of Vehicle Data":
^ You tried to reprogram with incorrect reprogramming data, or
^ You are trying to reprogram with the same file that is already in the ABS/VDC control unit.
For your reference, the old and new ABS/VDC Control Unit part numbers for vehicles equipped
with VDC are listed below.
ABS/VDC CONTROL UNIT PART NUMBERS
6. When VDC Reprogramming is complete:
Page 11371
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Seat Belt Retractor: All Technical Service Bulletins Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Classification: RS01-001B
Reference: NTB01-005B
Date: November 12, 2009
"D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION
This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s).
ACTION
Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to:
^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings.
^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
Page 1987
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Connector Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Power Window System
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Window System
Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Step
1)
Page 251
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Locations
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 12785
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 14218
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 797
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 12582
Page 8081
Page 5461
not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model cannot be memorized.
11. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
If "CANCEL" is touched, it will return to previous screen.
12. Wait until the next screen during setting.
13. WRITE CONFIGURATION results are printed out automatically. Confirm "WRITE
CONFIGURATION" is correctly executed by comparing
sheet automatically printed out with applicable configuration list shown in step 9.
Page 13020
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 1453
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 10511
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 7730
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 9219
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Page 6343
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
APP SENSOR
Component Description
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal
assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers
which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to
the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal
and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the
accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the
accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel
cut.
Page 13574
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4014
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 1509
Page 8740
57. Remove the 5 screws (shown in the figure) from the center roof console.
58. Pull the console loose at the rear and let it hang in place.
59. Pull the door welt loose from the top and rear of the door opening.
CAUTION:
Page 9001
IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection
Page 13048
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 4063
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 3961
Page 9704
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 10740
ERROR: stackunderflow
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Page 2221
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 4098
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Idle Air Volume Learning
Idle Air Volume Learning
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within
the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
- Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
- Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are
satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a
moment.
- Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
- Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 degrees C (158 - 212 degrees F)
- Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch: ON
- Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp) On vehicles equipped with daytime light
systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is start the headlamp will not be
illuminated.
- Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
- Vehicle speed: Stopped
- Transmission: Warmed-up With CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T"
system indicates less than 0.9 V.
- Without CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode.
6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds.
Page 554
12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install.
13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides.
14. Reinstall the IPDM cover.
15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first.
16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset
their ADP settings (ADP memory).
Page 7905
2. Loosen lock nut (A) on the input rod, then turn input rod to adjust the pedal to specified height.
When finished adjusting, tighten lock nut (A).
CAUTION: Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is located inside the clevis.
Lock nut (A): 18.6 Nm (1.9 kg-m, 14 ft. lbs.)
3. With the pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp switch and the ASCD switch in
until threaded ends contact pedal bracket. 4. With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and
ASCD switch contacting the pedal bracket, turn the switches 45° clockwise to lock in place.
CAUTION: Make sure that the gap (C) between the bracket and switch ends are within
specification.
5. Check the pedal play.
CAUTION: Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the pedal is released.
6. Start the engine and check the height of the brake pedal when depressing it.
Page 9701
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 13377
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 6621
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 9566
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 11248
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 3248
- B: Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH)
5. Install the crankshaft pulley.
- Install the key of the crankshaft.
- Insert the pulley by lightly tapping it.
CAUTION: Do not tap pulley on the side surface where the belt is installed (outer circumference).
6. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt.
- Lock the crankshaft using suitable tool then tighten the bolt.
- Perform the following steps for angular tightening:
a. Apply engine oil onto the threaded parts of the bolt and seating area.
b. Select the one most visible notch of the four on the bolt flange. Corresponding to the selected
notch put a alignment mark (such as paint) on the
crankshaft pulley.
Crankshaft pulley bolt torque
Step 1: 93.1 N-m (9.5 kg-m, 69 ft-lb)
Step 2: additional 90° (angle tightening)
7. Rotate the crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to
check for parts interference.
8. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse of order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
- Before starting the engine check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If the
levels are lower than required quantity fill to the specified level.
- Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
- Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of any oils/fluids including engine oil
and engine coolant.
Page 8976
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 6192
Reference value: 130 N (13.3 kg, 29.2 lbs.)
d. Install cap, and then tighten bolts evenly by turns.
^ After tightening bolts, make sure that there is no gap between cap and fuel tube.
2. Install O-rings to fuel injector paying attention to the items below.
CAUTION: ^
Upper and lower O-ring are different.
Standard model Fuel tube side: Blue Nozzle side: Brown
FFV model Fuel tube side: Black Nozzle side: Green
^ Handle O-ring with bare hands. Never wear gloves.
^ Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil.
^ Do not clean O-ring with solvent.
^ Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material.
^ When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to
twist or stretch O-ring. If O-ring was stretched while it was being attached, do not insert it quickly
into fuel tube.
^ Insert O-ring straight into fuel tube. Do not angle or twist it.
3. Install fuel injector to fuel tube.
a. Insert clip into clip mounting groove on fuel injector.
^ Insert clip so that lug "A" of fuel injector matches notch "A" of the clip.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse clip. Replace it with a new one.
^ Be careful to keep clip from interfering with O-ring. If interference occurs, replace O-ring.
b. Insert fuel injector into fuel tube with clip attached.
^ Insert it while matching it to the axial center.
^ Insert fuel injector so that lug "B" of fuel tube matches notch "B" of the clip.
^ Make sure that fuel tube flange is securely fixed in flange fixing groove on clip.
c. Make sure that installation is complete by checking that fuel injector does not rotate or come off.
^ Make sure that protrusions of fuel injectors are aligned with cutouts of clips after installation.
4. Install fuel tube and fuel injector assembly to intake manifold.
Page 7420
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 8496
Component Parts Location
Page 13257
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 10078
Control Module HVAC: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 10372
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Fuel Pressure: Customer Interest Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Classification: FE07-004
Reference: NTB07-040
Date: June 6, 2007
2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007
Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223
APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007
IF YOU CONFIRM
When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced,
ACTIONS
1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure).
2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump.
NOTE:
Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 1722
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 5782
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Description
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the A/T assembly facing the gear teeth (cogs)
of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to
change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM
receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 11894
Page 14039
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 7154
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way.
^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
2. Remove the rear brake rotor.
^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly.
^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions.
4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers.
5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools.
Page 4084
Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
PREPARATION
1. ECM is located in the engine room passenger side behind battery. 2. Remove ECM harness
connector.
3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with levers as far as they will go as
shown in the figure. 4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between the
ECM and ECM harness connector.
- Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
- Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
Page 6125
NOTE:
^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB.
Disclaimer
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 836
ECM Inspection Table Part 8
Service and Repair
Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair
Control Panel Buttons (if so equipped)
1. Press the "TRIP" button and the following modes will display:
Warning Messages (if any) Trip 1 Trip 2 Fuel Economy Maintenance OFF
2. Choose Maintenance on the display by using the joystick and push "ENTER"
Reset Procedure
Use the reset procedure in the above image.
Page 1036
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 23
Alarm Horn Relay: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 12967
- After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as
follows:
- Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipes and hose
connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the
system.
2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the
fuel pipe and hose connections.
Page 12560
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 651
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 5288
Case 5
Page 8895
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 3562
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 6094
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from air
cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4.
Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower)
^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type)
NOTE: ^
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals.
^ Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance.
Page 8520
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 6262
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 5424
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 1935
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 4588
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 2367
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 9792
Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Steps 3 - 6)
Page 13898
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 5304
Case 4
Page 11136
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Subwoofer (Premium System)
SUBWOOFER (PREMIUM SYSTEM)
Removal
1. Remove front driver seat.
2. Remove the subwoofer bolts. 3. Disconnect subwoofer connector and remove the subwoofer.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Traction Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Page 10285
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the air conditioner system. The
sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage.
The voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
Page 12813
2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full
or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank
until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less. If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified
level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through
the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from
fuel filler pipe.
b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire.
c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield.
d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and disconnect the vent hose quick
connector. e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel
from the fuel tank.
3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 4.
Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump
protector.
6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister.
Page 11584
Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair King Cab
REAR DOOR - KING CAB
Removal
1. Remove upper and lower seat belt anchor bolts. Refer to "Removal and Installation of Rear Seat
Belt". 2. Release clips and remove seat belt retractor cover. 3. Remove armrest. 4. Remove screws
behind armrest. 5. Release clips and remove rear door finisher.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 12931
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 12545
Page 6810
c. Tighten bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
3. Install breather hose to transfer control device. 4. Connect transfer control device harness
connector. 5. After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position
between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to
"Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement". See: Transfer
Case/Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Precautions For Transfer Assembly and
Transfer Control Unit Replacement
Page 9635
Diagnostic Procedure For Defroster Door Motor (Steps 9 - 12)
Page 5543
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Classification: WT04-004C
Reference: NTB04-054C
Date: April 6, 2011
WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION
This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION.
No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the
following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
General Information and Recommendations
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions
supplied with your alignment equipment.
^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions.
^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment.
General Information and Recommendations
1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed.
^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles.
^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure
proper "centering" of the steering wheel.
2. Use the right alignment machine.
^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing
alignment checks.
^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment
equipment.
^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be
checked to ensure that it is level.
3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated.
^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings.
^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should
be checked immediately.
^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended
service/calibration schedule.
NOTE:
In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached
to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
Page 201
5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then turn CONSULT-II OFF.
6. Remove the red/white Diagnostic Card and insert the 8 MB orange Reprogramming Card into
CONSULT-II.
The 8 MB reprogramming card should already have special ABS/VDC reprogramming data loaded
into it (see Part 1).
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine).
^ CONSULT-II will turn ON automatically (see Figure 13).
^ Confirm that all electrical loads* (except for the ignition) are "OFF".
* Headlights, defroster, A/C, audio (radio), video, cellular telephone, etc.
8. Roll down the driver's window part way, exit the vehicle, close the door, and hang the CONSULT
II unit on the outside of the window (see Figure 14).
This step is necessary to make sure the CONSULT-II and DLC-II cable will not be disturbed during
reprogramming.
CAUTION:
DO NOT connect the CONSULT-II AC power supply for Steps 1, 2, and 3 in Section 3 below.
9. Continue with Section 3.
Section 3
Section 3: Confirm the vehicle's battery voltage and CONSULT-II "Charger Input"
1. Press [SUB MODE], then select [BATTERY CHARGE]
Page 11311
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 4896
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 1909
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 1)
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 13919
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 7069
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
Electrical Units
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay
Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement
Reference: NTB10-137B
Date: December 22, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006
FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY
This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have
been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068
NHTSA#: 10V-517
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40)
2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM
relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles,
oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including
the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 3450
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 14111
Back Window Glass: Service and Repair Rear Window Glass and Regulator
REAR WINDOW GLASS AND REGULATOR
Removal
1. Remove the headliner. 2. Remove the sealing screen.
3. Lower the window and remove the rear window glass bolts. 4. Raise the window and hold it in
place with tape. 5. Disconnect the rear window defogger harness connector.
6. Remove the rear window glass assembly. 7. Disconnect the rear window motor wiring harness
connector.
Page 12146
Seat Heater: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 13260
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5232
Case 4
Page 5165
Case 1
Page 664
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 4207
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 8916
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
System Description
- IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse
block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM
E/R control circuits.
- IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication
control, etc.
- It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines.
CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R
1. Lamp control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following
lamps: Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
- Parking lamps
- Tail and license lamps
- Front fog lamps
2. Wiper control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers.
3. Heated mirror relay control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the heated mirror
relay.
4. A/C compressor control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C
compressor (magnetic clutch).
5. Starter control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the starter relay.
6. Cooling fan control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan
relays.
7. Horn control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay.
CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL
With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN
L-line, CAN H-line), it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum
wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only.
1. Fail-safe control
- When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe
control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control.
- Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as shown in the table.
IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL
In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition.
1. CAN communication status
- CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.
- Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.
Page 4180
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1308
Reclining Switch Inspection (Step 3)
Page 5643
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 7719
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 13158
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 12310
9. Reinstall both rail stops.
^ Use a 13/32" (10 mm) wrench.
10. Make sure the organizer is in the "deployed" position and the lids are snapped closed.
11. Slide the organizer all the way forward until it stops against the front of the bed.
12. Turn all of the hand knobs until each slider is tight.
Page 7703
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Washers/Wipers - Fluid Leak From Washer Reservoir
Windshield Washer Pump: Customer Interest Washers/Wipers - Fluid Leak From Washer
Reservoir
Classification: EL06-009
Reference: NTB07-002
Date: January 9, 2007
2004-2007 TITAN/ARMADA; WASHER FLUID LEAKING FROM WASHER TANK PUMP SEAL
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
Washer fluid leaking at the washer pump seal on the washer tank.
ACTION
Replace washer pump seal with the new one listed in Parts Information.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line using the claims coding table.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 12803
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 14038
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 11206
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 5599
Page 11347
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 4655
5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box.
6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3.
NOTE:
There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is
easily accessible.
7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3).
8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4).
Page 2379
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 1294
1. Write down the radio station presets.
2. Move / adjust the passenger seat bottom and seatback to the middle and upright positions.
3. Turn the ignition OFF. Disconnect both 12V battery cables, negative cable first, and wait at least
3 minutes before proceeding to step 4.
CAUTION:
Do not drop, tilt, or bump the side air bag module while removing/installing the seat. Always handle
it with care.
4. Remove the four bolts holding the seat to the body.
5. Place the seat, back side down, on a clean covered workbench.
6. Remove the lower flap cover.
Page 8526
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Navigation System
Component Parts Location
Page 14432
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting
Front Door Window Motor: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit
Switch Resetting
EL08-031A
Reference: NTB09-027A
Date: July 15, 2010
FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET
This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other
changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If any of the following work has been done:
^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly
^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator
^ installation of a new glass window
^ installation of a new glass run
....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following:
^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B
NOTE:
The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror.
If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in
this bulletin.
NOTE:
Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will
not reset the Limit Switch.
SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH
1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in
the glass raising (up) direction.
Page 12437
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 8784
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 2358
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 14421
Optional Splice
Locations
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 8101
4. The "REPROGRAM START" window should appear (see Figure 18).
NOTE:
If you get an error message, refer to the ECU Reprogramming Software Operations Manual *.
* This is found in ASIST under:
CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-II info.
CAUTION DURING REPROGRAMMING:
^ Do not unplug CONSULT-II from the vehicle during reprogramming. Permanent ABS/VDC
damage can occur.
^ Do not open any door or the trunk during reprogramming.
^ On some vehicles, the cooling fans may come on during reprogramming. This is a normal
condition. Do not disconnect the cooling fans. Forgetting to reconnect them may cause severe
engine damage. A vehicle battery charger is needed* to maintain the battery voltage level during
reprogramming.
* You should have hooked up a battery charger in Section 1.
5. Press [START]. See Figure 18.
^ After a few seconds, the window shown in Figure 19 will appear.
^ The screen backlight in CONSULT-II will now turn OFF.
^ When the screen backlight goes OFF, ABS/VDC reprogramming has started.
Page 3985
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 10183
Heater Core: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner
HEATER CORE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and
Repair/Manual Air Conditioner 2. Remove the four screws and remove the upper bracket.
Page 10431
Diagnostic Procedure For In-Vehicle Sensor (Steps 1 - 4)
Page 8596
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 3154
2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and
forth) movement (see Example 2):
^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm.
^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended.
Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped)
No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible.
Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the rotor.
NOTE:
The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is
removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected.
1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel.
2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front.
^ Pulley should be locked.
^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator.
3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front.
Page 11134
Speaker: Service and Repair
Center Speaker
CENTER SPEAKER
Removal
1. Remove center console. 2. Remove cluster lid D.
3. Remove the center speaker screws and remove the center speaker.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Front Door Speaker
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Removal
1. Remove front door finisher.
2. Remove the four front door speaker screws. 3. Disconnect connector and remove front door
speaker.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Rear Door Speaker
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Removal
1. Remove rear door finisher.
Page 11471
Front Door Panel: Service and Repair
DOOR FINISHER
Removal and Installation
Removal
1. Remove power window switch assembly (if equipped).
- Disconnect harness connectors.
2. Remove pull handle cover.
- Remove screws behind pull handle cover.
3. Remove cap from pull handle escutcheon and remove screw. 4. Remove pull handle
escutcheon.
- Remove screws behind pull handle escutcheon.
5. Remove armrest.
- Remove screw behind armrest.
6. Remove memory seat switch (if equipped).
- Disconnect harness connector.
7. Remove step lamp.
- Disconnect harness connector.
8. Remove door finisher and disconnect lock cable and handle cable from door handle assembly.
Refer to "FRONT DOOR LOCK". 9. Remove door lock knob.
Page 85
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 3938
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 9618
Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Driver) (Steps 23 - 25)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (DRIVER)
Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B)
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10830
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Electrical Units
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Page 14492
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 1844
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 10189
1. Use a 3/64 drill bit to slightly enlarge the holes shown in Figure 2.
^ These holes will be used to mount new harness clips for the new harness routing.
Page 4350
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 8310
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 5066
Case 6
Page 378
Page 738
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 2723
OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL 1. Check that gear oil is not leaking from the final drive assembly
or around it.
2. Check the gear oil level from filler plug mounting hole as shown.
CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking oil level.
3. Apply sealant to the filler plug. Install the filler plug on the final drive assembly and tighten to
specification.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Oil grade and viscosity. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and
Lubricants". See: Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS" (FFD). Refer to "Removal and Installation"
(RFD without ELD). See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and
Repair/Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Refer to "Removal
and Installation" (RFD with ELD). See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service
and Repair/Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation
Changing Final Drive Oil
Changing Final Drive Oil
Page 7957
Image Symbols
WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the
hazard of airborne particles or other materials.
CAUTION: While removing cylinder body never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
- It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or
replacement of cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake
hose.
- Do not damage piston boot.
- Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft
pedal occurs at very low mileage.
REMOVAL
1. Remove tires from vehicle using power tool. 2. Remove lower sliding pin bolt. 3. Suspend
cylinder body using suitable wire and remove pads, shims, and pad retainers from torque member.
INSTALLATION
1. Push pistons in so that pad is firmly installed and mount cylinder body to torque member.
CAUTION: By pushing in piston, brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank. Watch the
level of the surface of reservoir tank.
NOTE: Using a commercially available disc brake piston tool, makes it easier to push in piston.
2. Attach pad retainers, pads and shims to torque member.
- Apply Molykote M-77 grease to pad retainer where brake pad contacts and between pad and
shim.
CAUTION: -
When attaching pad retainer, attach it firmly so that it is seated fully in the torque member as
shown.
- Do not get grease on the brake rotor friction surface.
3. Install lower sliding pin bolt and tighten it to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". 4.
Check brake for drag. 5. Install tires to the vehicle.
Page 4447
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 4020
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 3674
Locations
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Reference: NTB10-037A
Date: May 19, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE
INACCURACY
This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010
NHTSA #: 10V-074
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan
vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel
gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel
tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary
Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts
or labor.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 10005
Page 1671
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Page 11507
7. Remove the TORX bolts (T30), remove the door lock assembly.
Door lock assembly bolts 6.0 N.m (0.61 kg-m, 53 in-lb)
8. While pulling outside handle bracket, slide toward rear of vehicle to remove outside handle
bracket and door lock assembly.
9. Disconnect the outside handle cable.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
1. Adjust the striker so that it becomes parallel with the lock insertion direction.
Striker Bolts: 16.6 N.m (1.7 kg-m, 12 ft-lb)
Page 7465
2. Install differential lock position switch on axle housing and tighten differential lock position switch
bolts with the specified torque. Refer to
"COMPONENTS".
3. Install side bearing adjusters into axle housing.
4. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races
into axle housing. 5. Apply multi-purpose grease to differential lock position connector.
CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor connector.
6. Connect differential lock solenoid harness (B) and differential lock position switch connector (A).
Then install it to axle housing, tighten to the
specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
Page 8921
Inspection With CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)
With Generic Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Without Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch Ground Circuit Inspection
Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set
Evaporative Canister Filter: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP
DTC's Set
Classification: EC06-009B
Reference: NTB06-095B
Date: September 2, 2008
2004 ARMADA / 2004-2006 TITAN; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446
APPLIED VEHICLES:2004-2006 Titan (A60)
2004 Armada (TA60)
This bulletin has been amended to add DTC P0448. No other changes have been made.
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(s) stored:
^ P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446
AND
^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed.
ACTIONS:
All applied vehicles:
Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V.
Clear any DTC(s) stored in the ECM.
AND IF the vehicle is a 2004-2006 Titan:
Refer to the Install Filter Kit Service Procedure of this bulletin.
AND IF the vehicle is a 2004 Armada:
Refer to the Install Protector Service Procedure of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 12646
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3)
Diagram Information and Instructions
Temperature Gauge: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 6784
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 2609
Drive Belt: Adjustments
DRIVE BELT TENSION
There is no manual drive belt tension adjustment. The drive belt tension is automatically adjusted
by the auto tensioner.
Page 4520
Part 2
MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM
CAN Communication System Description
Refer to LAN-25, "Information Bus". See: Information Bus/Description and Operation/CAN
Communication
Page 8865
Power Distribution Module: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7271
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Rear Propeller Shaft
Propeller Shaft Vibration
PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION
NOTE: If vibration is present at high speed, check propeller shaft runout first, then check mounting
between propeller shaft and companion flange.
1. Measure the runout of the propeller shaft tube at several points by rotating the final drive
companion flange with your hands.
Propeller shaft runout limit: 1.02 mm (0.0402 inch) or less
2. If the runout still exceeds specifications, disconnect the propeller shaft at the final drive
companion flange; then rotate the companion flange 90°,
180°, 270° and reconnect propeller shaft.
3. Check the runout again. If the runout still exceeds specification, replace the propeller shaft
assembly 4. After installation, check for vibration by driving vehicle.
Inspection
INSPECTION
Inspect the propeller shaft tube for dents or cracks. If damaged, replace the propeller shaft
assembly
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
Page 13111
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 12329
Cowl: Service and Repair
COWL TOP
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove right and left wiper arms. 2. Remove cowl top seal.
- Release plastics clips on cowl top seal which go through cowl tops LH and RH and cowl top
extension.
3. Remove cowl top covers LH and RH.
- Release plastic clips under cowl top covers attaching to grommets on hoodledge.
- Disconnect washer tubes from washer nozzles.
4. Remove cowl top extension brackets LH and RH. Disconnect wiper motor harness from cowl top extension bracket LH.
- Cowl top extension bracket LH must be removed prior to removal of wiper motor and connecting
rod assembly.
5. Remove wiper motor and connecting rod linkage. 6. Disconnect windshield washer tube. 7.
Remove A/C low-pressure pipe bracket from cowl top extension. Refer to "REFRIGERANT LINES".
8. Remove drain tube from each side of cowl top extension. 9. Remove cowl top extension.
Page 10004
"CM" I.D.: PB077-2005 and 2006 vehicles built on or after March 17, 2005. Refer to Service COMM
to confirm the correct campaign ID #.
Page 7026
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 564
Page 9942
Figure D-22
Figure D-23
Figure D-24
- Refer to Figures D-22 through D-24 for tie-wrap locations.
- Use the large 11 o'clock rib for reference.
Page 5868
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 9149
5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly.
^ Mount the top claws first.
^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13.
^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14.
^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level.
IMPORTANT:
Page 3102
2nd step: 8.3 Nm (0.85 kg-m, 73 inch lbs.)
CAUTION: Do not hold the rocker cover (RH) (B) by the oil filler neck.
3. Install the PCV hoses.
NOTE: ^
Remove foreign materials from inside the hose using compressed air.
^ The inserted length is within 25 - 30 mm (0.98 - 1.18 inch) [Target: 25 mm (0.98 inch)].
4. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 512
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
BCM
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference
when configuring new BCM after installation. Refer to "Configuration". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
1. Disconnect battery negative cable. 2. Remove lower knee bolster.
3. Remove screw and release BCM. 4. Disconnect connectors and then remove BCM.
Installation
Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
- When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to "Configuration". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
- When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition
key IDs. Refer to BL-139, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)". See: Accessories
and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems
- When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system.
Refer to WT-15, "ID Registration Procedure".
Page 772
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 9696
Page 8504
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8241
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Checking Fluid Level
Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection Checking Fluid Level
Checking Fluid Level
Check fluid level, referring to the scale on reservoir tank. Use HOT range for fluid temperatures of
50° - 80°C (122° - 176°F). Use COLD range for fluid temperatures of 0° - 30°C (32° - 86°F).
CAUTION: ^
Do not overfill.
^ Do not reuse any used power steering fluid.
^ Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.
Page 7519
3. Install the drain plug with a new gasket to the transfer. Tighten to specification.
Drain plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket.
FILLING 1. Remove the filler plug and gasket.
2. Fill the transfer with new fluid until the fluid level reaches the specified limit near the filler plug
hole.
Fluid grade and capacity.
CAUTION: Carefully fill fluid. (Fill up for approximately 3 minutes.)
3. Leave the vehicle for 3 minutes, and check fluid level again. 4. Install the filler plug with a new
gasket to the transfer. Tighten to specification.
Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket.
Page 1329
Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection (Step 4)
Page 1887
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6184
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 14481
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 2971
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Rear Axle
WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION
Check the axial end play, replace as necessary. ^
Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly. Replace as necessary.
Page 1606
Page 9086
8. Once the vinyl tube is cut off, put vinyl tape on the harness in two spots as shown in Figure B4.
9. Install the corrugated tube over the harness.
^ The corrugated tube will replace the vinyl tube that you cut off. Install the corrugated tube in the
direction shown in Figure B5.
Page 2802
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 338
NOTE:
^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not
replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control
unit using the old starter.
^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is:
^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb)
Page 14474
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 1313
Reclining Switch Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 13205
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Page 3686
^ If it applies: Position the band clamp(s) between the "dimples or on top where the "stand-offs" are
located (see Figure 1 and 2 above).
> The "stand-offs" cannot be seen: They are welded on the underside of the heat shield.
> If the "stand-off" is missing, this bulletin does not apply.
5. Secure the band clamp with the hex bolt located on the side (or on top, if needed). See Figure 1
above for example.
WARNING:
Do Not install the hex bolt on the bottom of the exhaust tube.
^ Band clamp hex bolt torque: 4.0 - 5.5 Nm (0.4 - 0.56 Kg-m, 2.9 - 4.0 ft-lb)
6. After securing the band clamp, cut off the clamp's excess at the end.
^ Wrap the end of the band clamp over the hex bolt, and then cut off the excess band clamp within
5 mm (0.2 inches) past the hex bolt (see Figure 2 for
example).
Page 13752
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 11351
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 3581
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 293
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 1836
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Calibration of Decel G Sensor
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Calibration of Decel G Sensor
Calibration of Decel G Sensor
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw
rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or
after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the decel G sensor before running vehicle.
NOTE: Calibration of decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position.
CAUTION: ^
The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle.
^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified
pressure value.
2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and
turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine).
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen
in this order.
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR",
"SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that
"DECEL G SEN" is
within ± 0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
Page 5724
ECM Inspection Table Part 9
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 13527
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 6871
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 2835
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 5535
a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section
EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits).
NOTE:
This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different.
b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify
the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check.
C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the
terminal eyelet(s).
d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the
connections.
^ Both sides of the eyelet
^ Eyelet mounting surface
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Nut/bolt threads.
Page 9962
Phototach (OTC 3660) Digital Tachometer: Part of test kit J-49489
- Part number for Phototach - 3660
WARNING:
Do not shine or point the red light beam from this tool into anyone's eyes (including your own).
Reflective Paint: Part of test kit J-49489
- Part number for reflective paint - 550197
Applicator: Part of test kit J-49489
- Part number for Applicators (100 pack) - 550223
Page 11838
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 2297
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 10030
Control Assembly: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 147
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 4379
NOTE:
^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB.
Disclaimer
Page 404
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 5128
Case 11
Case 12
Page 4988
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Locations
Fuel Level Sensor: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13012
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 12447
Page 5077
Case 4
Page 9520
Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment
Page 13688
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 14004
Optional Splice
Page 11346
Optional Splice
Page 1145
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 7931
Image Symbols
Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor
WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the
hazard of airborne particles or other materials.
CAUTION: While removing cylinder body never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
- It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or
replacement of cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake
hose.
- Do not damage piston boot.
- Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft
pedal occurs at very low mileage.
REMOVAL
1. Remove tires from vehicle using power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid as necessary.
NOTE: Do not remove union bolt unless removing cylinder body from vehicle.
3. Remove union bolt as necessary and torque member bolts, then remove cylinder body.
NOTE: Position cylinder body aside using suitable wire, as necessary.
NOTE: When servicing cylinder body, remove sliding pin bolts and caliper from torque member.
4. Remove disc rotor.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid.
- Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Install disc rotor. 2. Install sliding pin bolts if removed and tighten to specified torque. Refer to
BR-24, "Components".
Page 10932
Collision Avoidance Module: Service and Repair
SONAR CONTROL UNIT
Removal
1. Remove the rear panel. 2. For king cab models only, pull up the carpet to gain access to the
sonar control unit. 3. Disconnect the sonar control unit connector. 4. Remove the sonar control unit
bolts and remove sonar control unit.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 7635
A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Navigation Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 2829
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 490
Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic (Part 1)
Page 3714
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8315
Alternator: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove the fan shroud. 3. Remove the drive belt.
4. Remove lower bracket, using power tools. 5. Remove the generator upper bolt, using power
tools. 6. Remove/disconnect the generator harness connectors. 7. Remove the generator.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Install the generator and check the tension of the drive belt.
CAUTION: Tighten terminal nut carefully.
Terminal nut : 10.8 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft-lb)
A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection
(Column Shift)
Neutral Safety Switch: Testing and Inspection A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection
(Column Shift)
A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Column Shift) (Steps 1 - 2)
A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Column Shift) (Step 3)
Page 4058
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 5983
Canister Purge Volume Control Valve: Description and Operation
EVAP CANISTER PURGE VOLUME CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system controls flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The opening of the vapor
by-pass passage in the EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve changes to control the
flow rate. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve repeats ON/OFF operation
according to the signal sent from the ECM. The opening of the valve varies for optimum engine
control. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by considering various engine
conditions. When the engine is operating, the flow rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister is
regulated as the air flow changes.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve uses a ON/ OFF duty to control the flow
rate of fuel vapor from the EVAP canister. The EVAP canister purge volume control solenoid valve
is moved by ON/OFF pulses from the ECM. The longer the ON pulse, the greater the amount of
fuel vapor that will flow through the valve.
Page 5275
Case 9
Diagram Information and Instructions
Alarm Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 5924
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Headlamp (For USA)
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 485
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 11253
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check ((King Cab) (Steps 3 - 4)
Engine - Revised Upper Oil Pan/Timing Cover Service
Oil Pan: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Revised Upper Oil Pan/Timing Cover Service
Classification: EM10-011
Reference: NTB10-099
Date: August 19, 2010
ARMADA AND TITAN; REVISED UPPER OIL PAN AND TIMING CHAIN CASE PROCEDURES
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA6O) 2004-2010Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Removal and installation procedures for the upper oil pan and timing chain case have been
updated to no longer require engine removal and installation.
Nissan Service Manuals for 2004-2010 Armada and Titan vehicles will be updated with these new
procedures. Updated Service Manuals will be distributed to the field as quickly as possible.
The standard Flat Rate Times will be adjusted to reflect the new procedures.
Until the updated Service Manuals are made available, please use the procedures shown below for
any upper oil pan and timing chain case-related repairs on an Applied Vehicle.
Page 12612
Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Fuel Pressure: Customer Interest Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Classification: FE07-004
Reference: NTB07-040
Date: June 6, 2007
2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007
Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223
APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007
IF YOU CONFIRM
When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced,
ACTIONS
1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure).
2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump.
NOTE:
Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 10146
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
^ For Titan and Armada: follow the procedure outlined in this bulletin for intake sensor replacement.
^ For Quest, Xterra, Frontier and Pathfinder: refer to the appropriate section in the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for intake sensor replacement.
1. Remove six bolts from the glove box.
2. Remove glove box. The intake sensor is located behind the glove box.
3. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
Page 8940
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12523
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 2631
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install Filter Kit (2004-2006 Titan ONLY)
1. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Note position of yellow marks.
2. Position mounting bracket onto frame as shown, hooking bracket tab onto brake hose bracket.
Attach bracket to frame with the clamp supplied in the kit.
Page 8399
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 10704
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor
mechanism (see Figure 2).
2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor
mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip.
Page 8820
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 2110
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MAF SENSOR
Component Description
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by
measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows
around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to the hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of
the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
Page 8000
Brake Caliper: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair
Classification: BR00-004d
Reference: NTB00-033d
Date: August 8, 2007
ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all
previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and
provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur.
^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories:
a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or
released.
b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the
brakes are applied.
c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer.
2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above.
3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident.
BRAKE NOISE
^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no
repair action should be taken.
^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate
repair:
Squeak noise when the brakes are cold:
^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning.
^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary.
Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures:
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information
listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures.
Notes about brake pads and brake noise:
Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory.
^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of
the art resistance to squeal noise.
^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the
terms of the Nissan new car warranty.
Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very
attractive price.
Page 4756
Page 2233
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Classification: EL09-042
Reference: NTB09-118
Date: October 28, 2009
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR
RESET
APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below.
IF YOU CONFIRM
^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side.
And
^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery.
2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display.
NOTES:
^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage
the printed circuit board (PCB).
^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver.
Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Headlamp Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Classification: EL10-021A
Reference: NTB10-061A
Date: June 29, 2010
XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE
This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous
versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps
IF YOU CONFIRM
A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an
internal issue),
ACTION
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon
headlamps.
NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident.
^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available
to solve the incident, if one should occur.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the
repair performed.
^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 9591
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 2426
Diagram Information and Instructions
Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Component Locations
Engine Control Module: Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3753
Normal status When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms.
Sleep status
- When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters
low-current-consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 60 ms intervals, and
receives lighting switch input only.
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L,
CAN-H) connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives
data, but selectively reads required data only.
BCM STATUS CONTROL
BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to reduce power consumption.
1. CAN communication status
- With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally.
- Control by BCM is being operated properly.
- When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible.
- Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter
is active, CAN communication status is active.
2. Sleep transient status
- This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF.
- It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter.
- Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to
inactive status.
3. CAN communication inactive status
- With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active.
- With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active.
- Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches
to inactive status.
4. Sleep status
- BCM is activated with low current consumption mode.
- CAN communication is not active.
- When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status.
Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips
Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips
Classification: PI95-005A
Reference: NTB95-120A
Date: January 10, 2003
COLD WEATHER STARTING TIPS
This bulletin supersedes PI95-005. The Service Information has been amended. Please discard all
paper copies of PI95-005
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All models
SERVICE INFORMATION
In case a vehicle is hard to start during cold weather, we suggest the following procedure.
^ These steps are a review of the procedure outlined in the Owner's Manual.
^ Use these steps when the weather is cold and the engine is hard to start.
1. Press the accelerator pedal down approximately 1/3 of the way to the floor.
2. Hold the accelerator pedal in this position while cranking the engine.
3. Once the engine has started release the accelerator pedal.
NOTE:
Do not race the engine while warming it up.
4. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking, wait at least 10 seconds. Then
repeat steps 1 through 3.
Once an engine is started in cold weather condition:
^ You should keep the engine running for a minimum of 2-3 minutes before shutting it off.
^ Starting and stopping of the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more
difficult to restart.
^ It may also adversely affect a vehicle's fuel economy.
Another factor which may affect a vehicles "startability" is the viscosity or thickness of the oil that is
used.
^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity engine oil is preferred for all temperatures, all year-round for most models.
^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil makes it easier to start the engine and maintain a stable idle during
warm-up.
Please communicate these cold weather starting tips to your customers.
Disclaimer
Page 1967
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Diagram Information and Instructions
Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 13841
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 14393
Page 8039
Page 9578
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 11552
10. Remove handle release cable from upper door latch white cable clip on door (see Figure 5).
11. Remove upper door latch gray cable clip from door (see Figure 6).
Page 8558
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect negative battery cable.
2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover.
3. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and
remove the IPDM E/R.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Brakes - Brake/ABS Lamp ON/Pedal Vibration/DTC C1179
Technical Service Bulletin # 06-040 Date: 060512
Brakes - Brake/ABS Lamp ON/Pedal Vibration/DTC C1179
Classification: BR06-007
Reference: NTB06-040
Date: May 12, 2006
2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; ABS AND/OR BRAKE
WARNING LIGHT ON WITH DTC C1179
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) equipped with VDC 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60)
equipped with VDC
IF YOU CONFIRM
A customer reports:
^ The brake warning light is or was ON, and/or
^ The ABS warning light is or was ON, and/or
^ There is or was vibration* in the brake pedal while braking.
* This vibration is the rapid consistent-speed pedal pulsation that is felt when the ABS is activated.
ACTIONS
^ Make sure this bulletin applies (see Part 1 of the Service Procedure). If this bulletin does not
apply, refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding shown.
Page 5255
Case 8
Page 10028
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 11811
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 13134
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 890
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 13836
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Locations
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1401
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 2030
3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees.
4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees.
^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily.
6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the
sensor will not unscrew any further.
7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed.
Page 6736
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 8057
Parking Brake Shoe: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Lining Thickness Inspection
^ Check thickness of lining. Standard thickness "A": 3.79 ± 0.21 mm (0.149 ± 0.008 inch) Wear limit
thickness "A": 0.5 mm (0.020 inch)
Disc Rotor Inner Diameter Inspection
^ Check inner diameter inside drum area of disc rotor. Standard inner diameter: 205 ± 0.13 mm
(8.07 ± 0.01 inch) Wear limit of inner diameter: 205.7 mm (8.10 inch)
Other Inspections ^
Check shoe sliding surface on back plate for excessive wear and damage.
^ Check anti-rattle pins for excessive wear and corrosion.
^ Check return springs for sagging.
^ Check adjuster for rough operation.
^ When disassembling adjuster, apply PBC (Poly Butyl Cuprysil) grease or equivalent to the
threads.
^ Check either visually or with a vernier caliper to see if there is any excessive wear, cracks, or
damage inside drum area of disc rotor.
Automatic Air Conditioner
Heater Control Valve: Testing and Inspection Automatic Air Conditioner
Water Valve Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Water Valve
The water valve (1) cuts the flow of engine coolant to the front and rear heater cores to allow for
maximum cooling during A/C operation. It is controlled by the front air control.
Page 11981
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 3513
Page 5001
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 2144
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 1124
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 1411
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 3454
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 2165
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 1500
Optional Splice
Page 5558
5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box.
6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3.
NOTE:
There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is
easily accessible.
7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3).
8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4).
Page 7057
8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM.
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 ->
3), and then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component
Parts)/Components
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with
terminal clips.
Page 3727
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking)
Differential Cover: Service and Repair Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking)
CARRIER COVER
COMPONENTS
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Drain gear oil.
Page 6176
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 8630
active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is
normal.
Part 1
Part 2
- If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily
diagnosed using auto active test.
Page 2607
Drive Belt: Specifications
DRIVE BELTS
Page 5336
Case 17
Case 18
Page 5012
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER",
used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage
front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag
deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and
whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Information necessary to service the system
safely is included in the Restraint Systems.
WARNING:
- To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
- Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to
personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and
Air Bag Module, see the Restraint Systems.
- Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS
wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Page 10621
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
The occupant classification system control unit, occupant classification (pressure) sensor, and
bladder are an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly.
Refer to "Removal" to remove the seat, and "SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD" to replace the seat
cushion.
Page 6138
Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent).
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for
connecting the fuel pressure gauge.
2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test".
^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure.
^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble
Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test.
^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test.
> If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and
repair information.
> If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3.
3. Replace the fuel pump.
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the
appropriate Service Manual.
^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information.
^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal.
4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed.
Page 1415
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 571
Page 13106
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 656
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 9675
Air Duct: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner
DUCTS AND GRILLES
Page 13037
Page 727
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 12145
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 13838
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 13702
LT-T/TOW-02
Page 3763
8. Configuration of current BCM is printed out automatically. A listing of manual setting items and
auto setting items will be displayed. Auto setting
items are preset and cannot be changed. Manual setting items can be set by using WRITE
CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE".
9. Touch "BACK" on "READ CONFIGURATION" screen.
WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
Page 4920
ECM Inspection Table Part 7
Page 5142
Case 11
Page 967
Control Module: Service and Repair
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
COMPONENTS
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect
A/T assembly harness connector.
Page 3327
12. Remove chain tensioner cover using Tool (if necessary).
Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228)
INSTALLATION
1. Install the front oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Do not scratch or make burrs on the circumference of the oil seal.
2. Install the chain tensioner cover (if removed).
- Apply liquid gasket as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
3. Install the front cover as follows:
a. Install a new O-ring on the cylinder block.
b. Apply liquid gasket as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
Page 6466
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Service and Repair
Sunroof / Moonroof Windguard: Service and Repair
WIND DEFLECTOR
Removal
1. Open the sunroof.
2. Remove screws from the left, center, and right side wind deflector holders. 3. Remove the wind
deflector from the sunroof frame assembly.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5036
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 3
Input/output signal chart
Page 12721
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 3052
Page 5084
Case 12
Case 13
NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Page 8965
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 12365
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 4977
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 14211
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 8115
^ After you select "ECU Reprog. Data", the "ECU Reprogramming Data" screen will be displayed
(see Figure 5).
NOTE
^ This is a special ABS/VDC reprogram that uses an ID Code FOR THIS INCIDENT ONLY!
^ Step 7 (below) is different from the typical ECU Reprogramming procedure.
7. Select the new ABS/VDC Control Unit data as follows:
a. Click on the Keypad button (see Figure 5).
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS
Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Page 11192
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 2432
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order:
^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface.
If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the front turn plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
Page 12713
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 3840
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections
A/C Coupler O-ring: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections
Classification: HA09-003
Reference: NTB09-099
Date: September 25, 2009
A/C SYSTEM O-RING SEAL LEAKS
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with A/C system
IF YOU CONFIRM
A refrigerant leak at a refrigerant pipe/hose joint location,
NOTE:
Follow the leak detection information in the Service Manual to determine the source of refrigerant
leaks.
ACTIONS
NOTE:
The O-ring seal is the most common cause of a refrigerant leak at an A/C joint.
1. Inspect the metal surfaces of the pipe/hose joint for damage or contamination.
NOTE:
Do not replace a refrigerant pipe, hose, or other A/C component if an o-ring seal will solve the leak
incident, if it should occur.
2. If no damage is found to the joint metal surfaces, replace the O-ring seal.
CAUTION:
^ When replacing O-ring seals, use lint-free gloves,
^ Make sure no foreign material is introduced into the system when the joint is open.
^ Apply A/C oil to the O-ring before installation.
^ After recharging the system, recheck for leaks.
PARTS INFORMATION
Reference an electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) for any needed parts.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the correct coding for repairs
performed.
Page 5015
- Models with VDC
- Models with electronic locking rear differential
- Models with automatic drive positioner
- Models with navigation system
TYPE 1
System diagram
Page 13740
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Fuse and Relay Box
Page 6487
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 9101
25. Snap the plastic harness protector loose from the floor.
26. Take the harness loose from along the floor.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain air bags, disconnect the air bag satellite sensor that's
located on the rocker panel (see figure above).
27. On the rear door, remove the lower seat belt anchor bolt.
NOTE:
For the passenger side, this bolt does not need to be removed unless you are going to replace the
seat belt.
Page 3944
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 5843
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 7634
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Electrical Specifications
Page 2290
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Recall R0616 - Rear Door Wiring Harness
Technical Service Bulletin # 07-009 Date: 070216
Recall R0616 - Rear Door Wiring Harness
RECALL CAMPAIGN BULLETIN
Reference: NTBO7-009
Date: February 16, 2007
VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 TITAN REAR DOOR HARNESS
CAMPAIGN I.D. # R0616
NHTSA # : 06V-459
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) King Cab only
APPLIED VINs: 2004: 1N6*A06A*4N 500006 - 593463 1N6*A06B*4N 500000 - 593471
2005: 1N6*A06A*5N 500002 - 580219 1N6*A06B*5N 500007 - 580226
2006: 1N6*A06A*6N 500003 - 576810 1N6*A06B*6N 500000 - 576805
NOTE:
Use Service Comm to determine campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan has determined that on some 2004 - 2006 model year Titan King Cab vehicles, a defect
that relates to motor vehicle safety exists.
In some affected vehicles, there is the possibility that the wires in the harness routed through the
rear doors and into the body on each side of the vehicle may break due to over bending of the
harness as the doors are opened and closed. The wires in the harness control various systems
including the seat belt pretensioners, the passenger side seat belt tension sensor, and rear audio
speakers.
If the wire for the seat belt pretensioners breaks and makes contact with a wire for the speaker,
there is a possibility that the pretensioner may deploy and tighten the seat belt. If this happens
when the belt is retracted, it will not be possible to use the seat belt. If one of the wires for the seat
belt tension sensor breaks inside the passenger side harness, the passenger side front air bag will
not deploy as designed in a frontal crash. Nissan is conducting a Voluntary Recall Campaign to
inspect the wire harness cover for damage and, if necessary, a new wiring harness with a new type
cover will be installed and rerouted.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R0616 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED
The number of vehicles potentially affected is approximately 96,500
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealers responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and
Page 12798
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 6551
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 11933
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 8012
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear
Removal and Installation
Image Symbols
Page 207
* Headlights, defroster, A/C, audio (radio), video, cellular telephone, etc.
4. Press [START (Nissan BASED VHCL)].
5. In "SELF-DIAG RESULTS", check and erase any DTC(s) in the below noted vehicle systems:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST press "ERASE" and "OK" in all systems (shown below) whether a DTC is displayed or
not. This is required to complete the VDC reprogramming procedure, and it will make sure that all
DTC(s) are erased.
^ ENGINE
^ A/T
^ ABS
^ AIR BAG
^ ALL MODE AWD/4WD (if applicable)
^ DIFF LOCK (if applicable; 4WD Titan)
^ AIR LEVELIZER (if applicable)
6. After all DTC(s) are erased:
^ Turn the ignition switch OFF.
^ Disconnect CONSULT-II and the CAN Cable from the vehicle connector.
^ Disconnect the battery charger from the vehicle.
^ Start the engine and make sure it runs properly and there are NO warning lights illuminated in the
instrument panel.
7. Continue with Part 4.
Part 4
Part 4: Re-program the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card back to its original format so it can be
used for standard ECU reprogramming.
1. Remove the red/white diagnostic card from CONSULT-II and insert the 8 MB orange
Reprogramming card.
2. Go to the ASIST terminal.
3. Follow steps in Part 1 of this bulletin to download (transfer) data from ASIST to CONSULT-II.
^ Use ID Code 050602.
^ This will re-program the 8 MB (orange) card to its original format so it can be used for standard
ECU reprogramming.
END
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab)
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Crew Cab)
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 9573
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 4392
Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent).
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for
connecting the fuel pressure gauge.
2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test".
^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure.
^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble
Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test.
^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test.
> If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and
repair information.
> If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3.
3. Replace the fuel pump.
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the
appropriate Service Manual.
^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information.
^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal.
4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed.
Page 13738
Page 757
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Combination Switch: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
CONSULT-II Operation
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT- II CONVERTER to the data
link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Data Link
Connector/Schematic
Page 14477
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13817
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 11059
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Locations
Evaporative System Service Port: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 7108
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller
shaft.
^ Before removing final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness
connector from the assembly and move it away from final drive/rear axle assembly area. Failure to
do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative.
1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft.
^ Plug rear end of transfer.
3. Remove both RH and LH axle shafts. 4. Remove carrier cover bolts.
5. Remove carrier cover using Tool.
Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
^ Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the mating surface.
6. Remove differential lock solenoid connector (B) bolt and disconnect differential lock position
connector (A).
7. For installation, apply a paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap.
CAUTION: ^
Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to install them
in their original positions.
^ For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap.
8. Remove adjuster lock plates.
Page 7938
3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove piston
and piston boot.
CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston.
4. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove piston seal from cylinder body.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall.
CALIPER INSPECTION
Cylinder Body
CAUTION: Use new brake fluid to clean. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene.
- Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust wear, damage or foreign materials. If any of the
above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body.
- Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine
emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary.
Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace
the affected part.
Piston
CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust or foreign materials are
stuck to sliding surface.
- Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any of the
above conditions are observed.
Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots Make sure there is no wear, damage, or cracks in sliding
sleeve and sliding sleeve boots, and if there are, replace them.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, KRE00 00010 01) when
assembling.
Page 4678
Page 3624
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 9346
Diagram Information and Instructions
Temperature Gauge: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 14318
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 8323
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 3313
EM-7
Page 11361
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 14297
Page 1072
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 7895
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair G Sensor
G SENSOR
Removal and Installation REMOVAL
1. Remove center console or center seat as required.
2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts as shown.
^ The location of the sensor is the same for all models.
CAUTION: ^
Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
^ Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: After installation, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
Page 10317
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 13029
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 5184
Case 6
Page 5652
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 4358
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 1466
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 8729
d. Take the harness branch loose from the body.
17. Remove the lower anchor bolt for the rear seat belt.
18. Remove the lower side finisher.
^ Use a plastic trim tool.
19. Remove the seat belt retractor; 1 bolt.
20. Remove the harness ground bolt.
21. Remove the floor mat holder.
Page 3710
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 13864
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 2057
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 12443
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 2)
Page 13867
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Component Locations
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 7241
8. Strike the bearing ring retainer using a suitable chisel and hammer, with the chisel positioned
across the drilled hole. Break the bearing ring
retainer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not heat or cut the axle shaft bearing or bearing ring retainer with a torch during
removal, doing so will damage the axle shaft.
9. Remove the axle shaft bearing cage studs using a suitable hammer or press.
10. Pull the axle shaft bearing off of the axle shaft using Tool and a suitable press.
Tool number: ST30031000
CAUTION: ^
Do not tighten the Tool against the axle shaft.
^ Do not heat or cut the axle shaft bearing or bearing ring retainer with a torch during removal,
doing so will damage the axle shaft.
11. Remove the axle oil seal and discard.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
12. Remove the wheel bearing cage.
NOTE: ^
If reinstalling the old axle shaft, it may not be necessary to remove the ABS sensor rotor. Inspect
the ABS sensor rotor and replace as necessary.
^ The ABS sensor rotor cannot be reused after it is removed. If replacing the axle shaft, install a
new ABS sensor rotor on the new axle shaft.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Axle Shaft ^
Clean and remove all nicks and burrs.
^ Check for straightness and distortion. Replace if necessary.
^ Inspect machined surfaces for evidence of overheating, damage and wear. Replace if necessary.
^ Measure the bearing ring retainer axle journal diameter. Replace if necessary Bearing ring
retainer axle journal diameter (minimum): 39.726 mm (1.5640 inch)
Axle Shaft Bearing and Cup ^
Check that the axle shaft bearing and cup roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting and
wear. Replace if necessary.
Axle Shaft Bearing Cage ^
Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary.
Axle Shaft Housing ^
Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary
INSTALLATION
1. If installing a new axle shaft, install a new ABS sensor rotor onto the new axle shaft.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old ABS sensor rotor.
2. Install the axle shaft bearing cage. 3. Install a new axle oil seal.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 13906
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 11803
Optional Splice
Page 11166
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 12712
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 9251
^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks.
NOTE: When not using the alignment mark, refer to BR-35, "Front Disc Brake". See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Specifications
^ When installing wheel and tire, refer to "Rotation". See: Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and
Repair/Tire Rotation
Page 9226
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation
PSP SENSOR
Component Description
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and
detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering
load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric
throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed
and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
Page 8404
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 8469
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 9112
64. Take the harness loose from the side of the cabin.
65. If equipped with side curtain air bags; disconnect the side curtain air bag module as follows:
a. Remove the right side sun visor, 2 screws under the trim cover.
^ Use a plastic trim tool to remove the trim cover.
^ Disconnect the electrical connector.
King Cab
Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Service and Repair King Cab
CAB AND REAR BODY
Body Mounting, King Cab
When removing, be sure to replace bolts and nuts (sealant applied bolts or self-lock nuts are used
for all mounting).
Testing and Inspection
Hood Latch: Testing and Inspection
Hood Lock Control Inspection
CAUTION: If the hood lock cable is bent or deformed, replace it.
1. Make sure the secondary latch is properly engaged with the secondary striker with hood's own
weight by dropping it from approx. 200 mm (7.87
in) height.
2. While operating the hood opener, carefully make sure the front end of the hood is raised by
approx. 20 mm (0.79 in). Also make sure the hood
opener returns to the original position.
3. Check the hood lock lubrication condition. If necessary, apply "body grease" to the points shown
in the figure.
Page 11049
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 5866
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 1283
Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 14494
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 6259
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 9048
c. Remove 2 cup holder mounting bolts.
^ Left side is shown, right side not shown
b. Remove the cup holder from the vehicle.
8. If equipped with front bucket seats (shifter is in the center console); remove the center console:
a. Remove 2 screws from the bottom of the glove box assembly.
b. Remove 4 screws at the top of the glove box assembly, then
c. Remove the glove box assembly.
Page 9070
e. Remove the front pillar finisher.
^ Use a plastic trim tool.
NOTE:
With the sun visor and front pillar finisher removed the headlining will be loose all along the
passenger side. This will allow access to the side curtain air bag mounting bolts.
f. Take the side curtain air bag branch of the harness loose from the body.
Page 66
Page 1468
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 10200
O-Ring Part Number And Specifications
Page 7431
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 10248
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 9836
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 17
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 14304
Page 4527
4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
6. Touch "A60" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on
"VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See:
Application and ID
7. Touch "READ CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen.
Page 419
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect negative battery cable.
2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover.
3. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and
remove the IPDM E/R.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5713
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 5206
Case 12
Page 1455
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Component Locations
Knock Sensor: Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2961
c. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 grams (1.76 ounces), install two balance weight
sheets in line with each other as shown.
CAUTION: Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another.
3. Start wheel balancer again. 4. Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the
wheel balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION: Do not install more than two balance weights.
5. Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual imbalance values are 5 grams
(0.18 ounces) each or below.
^ If either residual imbalance value exceeds 5 grams (0.18 ounces), repeat installation procedures.
Wheel Balance (Maximum Allowable Imbalance)
Page 13529
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 12089
Reclining Switch Inspection (Step 3)
Power Seat Switch Ground Inspection
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 12916
3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5):
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly.
a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap
in place.
^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down
(it should not move).
b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip.
^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib.
c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab.
d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6).
e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place.
Page 7507
Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Remove the
glove box assembly.
3. Disconnect transfer control unit connectors. 4. Remove the transfer control unit.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Transfer control unit
bolts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.)
^ After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer
assembly and transfer control unit. See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage
Warnings/Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement
Page 10435
After disconnecting in-vehicle sensor connector M32, measure resistance between terminals 1 and
4 at sensor component side, using the table. If NG, replace in-vehicle sensor.
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Removal and Installation
Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Drain power steering fluid from reservoir tank. 2. Remove air duct assembly. 3.
Remove power steering reservoir tank. 4. Remove serpentine drive belt from auto tensioner and
power steering pump. 5. Disconnect pressure sensor electrical connector. 6. Remove high
pressure and low pressure piping from power steering oil pump. 7. Remove bolts, then remove
power steering pump.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
After installation, bleed air.
NOTE: Belt tension is automatic and requires no adjustment.
Page 8913
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 13761
Page 13535
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 9088
13. First, tape the door grommet to the corrugated tube, then
14. Wrap the entire length of the corrugated tube with vinyl tape.
^ As you wrap, keep the tape tight and the tape roll close to the harness.
^ Over-lap the tape 50% as you wrap.
^ Make sure to wrap around the clips (diaper wrap) so they will not move-the clips must stay in
position.
^ Make sure to cover the area on the body side between the corrugated tube and the vinyl tube.
^ Double wrap the entire length; one layer left to right and another layer right to left.
15. Attach the new hinge rod clip below the bracket as shown in Figure B9.
Upper Link
Control Arm: Service and Repair Upper Link
Removal and Installation
Components
REMOVAL
1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball
joint.
Fuse and Relay Box
Page 10564
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 14025
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 4115
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 1760
- After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as
follows:
- Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipes and hose
connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the
system.
2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the
fuel pipe and hose connections.
Page 13404
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Specifications
Parking Brake
Page 2389
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9620
Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Passenger) (Steps 5 - 8)
Page 10131
4. Remove the evaporator.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the low-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe with
new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them.
Page 2296
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 7683
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12003
NOTE:
- Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpeting, etc. when performing this Procedure.
- The illustrations in this bulletin are for the left side (driver side) seat. The right side (passenger
side) seat is a "mirror image" of these illustrations.
If needed; use steps 1 and 2 to confirm you have voltage (power) to the seat slide motor.
1. Using the power seat switch, tilt the front edge of the seat bottom all the way UP.
2. Check/measure voltage to the seat slide motor. Use a voltmeter and "Back-probe" into the
connector, harness side, between the following color
wires:
NOTES:
For wire color codes and connector layouts for the vehicle you are working on refer to the Wiring
Diagram in chapter SE, section POWER SEAT or AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER as
applicable in the appropriate Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
If needed, refer to "How to Back Probe Connectors" is the Nissan and Infiniti Connector and
Terminal Service Manual. This manual is in ASIST under Tools & Equipment.
Figure 2
Figure 2 shows an example of the driver s side seat slide motor connector location. The vehicle
you are working on may be different.
- This voltage check can be done with the seat slide motor connected.
- If the voltage is about 12 V when the seat slide switch is pressed to the "forward" and "backward"
positions, voltage (power) is getting to the seat slide motor.
- If voltage is 0 V, this bulletin doesn't apply. Check your power and ground circuits to the seat slide
motor.
Remove Old Seat Slide Parts
3. Record the radio station pre-sets for later reprogramming after the procedure.
4. If the power seat won't move, lightly tap the seat slide motor (see Figure 2).
- Sometimes this will get the motor working again temporarily so the seat can be moved to access
the seat mounting bolts.
- Don't remove the seat yet.
5. Follow steps 6 through 9 to remove the seat from the vehicle.
- If needed, refer to section SE in the Service Manual (ESM) for seat removal information.
6. Turn the ignition key "OFF".
7. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first, and wait three (3) minutes.
- This will allow the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) to deactivate. This includes the front
seat side air bags.
8. Tilt the entire seat assembly back and disconnect the harness-to-seat connectors.
9. Remove the seat assembly from vehicle and place it on a clean dry surface.
Page 5625
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 4262
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 2957
^ Any tools, equipment cones, or other wheel balancing equipment items should not touch the
outside surface of chrome type wheels.
Wheel Alignment:
^ Alignment sensors with metal mounting hooks should not be used on chrome type wheels.
^ Some alignment equipment manufacturers may have protective rubber pads available that can be
used to cover the metal mounting hooks.
Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 9652
Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Door Motor (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 5615
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 3414
Coolant: Service Precautions
SAE Viscosity Number ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, long life, year-round,
anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors.
Therefore, additional cooling system additives are not necessary.
CAUTION: ^
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze
coolant or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized water
or distilled water.
^ Other types of coolant solutions may damage your cooling system.
Page 922
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 12633
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1926
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 446
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS
Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Warning Chime
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12804
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 3826
Page 3440
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 10043
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 11985
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4187
Page 7277
1. Assemble the journal bearings. Apply multipurpose grease on the bearing inner surface.
NOTE: During assembly, use caution so that the needle bearings do not fall down.
2. Select snap rings that will provide the specified play in an axial direction of the journal, and install
them.
NOTE: Select snap rings with a difference in thickness at both sides within 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch).
3. Adjust the thrust clearance between the bearing and snap ring to zero by tapping the yoke.
4. Make sure that the journal moves smoothly and is below the joint flex effort specification.
Propeller shaft joint flex effort: 2.26 Nm (0.23 kg-m, 20 inch lbs.) or less
Center Support Bearing 1. Apply a thin coat of multi-purpose grease to both the propeller shaft tube
and the inside surface of the center support bearing.
Page 14495
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 10276
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 13072
Page 11277
Optional Splice
Page 7422
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Window Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10783
Seat Occupant Sensor: Description and Operation
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
The occupant classification system (OCS) identifies different size occupants, out of position
occupants, and detects if child seat is present in the front passenger seat. The OCS receives
inputs from the occupant classification sensor (located inside the passenger seat cushion
assembly) and belt tension sensor (part of the passenger front seat belt assembly and located at
the belt anchor location). Depending on classification of the passenger, the OCS sends a signal to
the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. The air bag diagnosis sensor unit uses this signal and the seat
belt buckle switch RH signal to determine deployment or non deployment of the passenger front air
bag in the event of a collision. Depending on the signals received, the air bag diagnosis sensor unit
can disable the passenger front air bag completely.
NOTE: In case of customer concern, CONSULT-II can be used to confirm the passenger air bag
status (readiness).
Passenger Air Bag Status Conditions
Page 9809
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9740
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 1210
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 2079
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 8731
25. Snap the plastic harness protector loose from the floor.
26. Take the harness loose from along the floor.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain air bags, disconnect the air bag satellite sensor that's
located on the rocker panel (see figure above).
27. On the rear door, remove the lower seat belt anchor bolt.
NOTE:
For the passenger side, this bolt does not need to be removed unless you are going to replace the
seat belt.
Page 6209
2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows:
a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit
b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots
^ For Type A see Figure 1
^ For Type B see Figure 2
Page 14301
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 6272
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 6208
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
Page 7657
Control Module: Service and Repair
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
COMPONENTS
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect
A/T assembly harness connector.
Page 12592
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 2170
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 3330
- Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses such as in cooling system.
- After cooling down the engine again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant.
Refill to specified level if necessary.
Page 5971
3. Attach filter to bracket and filter hoses to fittings as shown.
Install Protector (2004 Armada ONLY)
1. Assemble the protector into the left rear wheelhouse as shown.
Page 14135
- Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position.
FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR ASSEMBLY
Removal
1. Remove the front door speaker. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the
power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4.
Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts. 6. Raise the front door glass and hold it in
place with suitable tool. 7. Disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly. 8.
Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly.
Disassembly And Assembly
Remove the regulator motor from the regulator assembly.
Inspection After Removal
Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or
grease it.
- Wire wear
- Regulator deformation
- Grease condition for each sliding part
The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease.
Installation
1. Install the regulator assembly.
Front door glass regulator assembly nuts and bolt : 7.5 N.m (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb)
2. Connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly. 3. Align the glass and install the glass
bolts.
Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
4. Reset the limit switch. Refer to "Setting of Limit Switch". 5. Install front door speaker.
SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION
Setting of Limit Switch
If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor).
- Removal and installation of the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the glass.
- Removal and installation of the glass run.
Resetting
Recall 06V459000: Seat Belt Wire Harness Modification
Seat Belt Tensioner: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 06V459000: Seat Belt Wire Harness
Modification
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan
North America, Inc. NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 06V459000 MFG'S REPORT DATE:
November 22, 2006
COMPONENT: Electrical System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 96500
SUMMARY: On certain crew cab trucks, the wires in the harness were routed through the rear
doors and into the body. These wires may break due to over bending of the harness as the door is
opened and closed. The harness contains wires for the driver seat belt pretensioner and for the
front passenger seat belt which is part of the occupant classification system. Wires for the rear
audio speakers are also contained in the harness.
CONSEQUENCE: If the wires for the seat belts and speaker wires break and make contact, there
is a possibility that the pretensioner may deploy. If this happens when the seat belt is retracted, it
will not be possible to use the seat belt. If one of the wires on the right side harness for the seat
belt tension sensor breaks, the passenger side front air bag will not deploy as designed in a frontal
collision increasing the risk of a crash and personal injury.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the wire harness cover with a different type that prevents over
bending of the harness and the harness will be rerouted free of charge. The recall is expected to
begin on or about February 19, 2007. owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 10237
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner
OIL
Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor
The oil in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add oil to compressor
when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to
maintain the specified amount.
If oil quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result:
- Lack of oil: May lead to a seized compressor
- Excessive oil: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference)
OIL
Name: NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S (DH-PS) or equivalent Part number: KLH00-PAGS0
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING
CAUTION: If excessive oil leakage is noted, do not perform the oil return operation. Start the
engine and set the following conditions:
Test Condition
- Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm
- A/C switch: On
- Blower fan speed: MAX position
- Temp. control: Optional [Set so that intake air temperature is 25 degrees to 30 degrees C (77
degrees to 86 degrees F)]
- Intake position: Recirculation
- Perform oil return operation for about ten minutes
Adjust the oil quantity according to the table.
Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor
After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of oil to the system.
Oil Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement
Page 5045
NOTE: For "BCM", "UNKWN" is displayed on "ECM". Put a check mark to it.
- For "HVAC", "UNKWN" is displayed on "ECM". Put a check mark to it.
- For "ABS", "UNKWN" is displayed on "ECM", "TCM", "METER/M&A;", "ICC" and "AWD/4WD". But
put a check mark to "ECM" and "TCM" because "UNKWN" is listed on the column of reception
diagnosis of the check sheet table.
- For "IPDM E/R", "UNKWN" is displayed on "ECM". Put a check mark to it.
6. Perform system diagnosis for possible causes identified. 7. Perform diagnosis again after
inspection and repair. Make sure that repair is completely performed, and then end the procedure.
Start CAN system trouble diagnosis if this procedure can be confirmed.
Page 9495
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 8237
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 357
Component Parts Location
Page 491
BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic (Part 2)
Page 10123
5. Pull the blower motor branch from the harness until you see the splice.
6. Attach the blower motor connector to the blower motor; make sure it will reach.
7. Re-wrap the harness with vinyl tape.
Page 3090
Available Valve Lifter
Page 1617
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 7416
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 14241
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 6732
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Page 26
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 473
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 4794
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 9769
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 6595
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Page 7958
Brake Pad: Service and Repair Rear
Removal and Installation of Brake Pad REMOVAL
1. Remove tires from vehicle with power tool. 2. Remove mounting bolt from the top mount. 3.
Swing cylinder body open, and remove pads.
INSTALLATION
1. Push piston in so that pad is firmly attached and mount cylinder body to torque member.
NOTE: Using a commercially available disc brake piston tool, makes it easier to push in the piston.
CAUTION: By pushing in piston, brake fluid returns to master cylinder reservoir tank. Watch the
level of the surface of reservoir tank.
2. Apply Molykote M-77 grease to knuckle slide where brake pad contacts.
CAUTION: Do not get grease on the brake rotor friction surface.
3. Install pads to cylinder body. 4. Install top mounting bolt and tighten to specification. 5. Check
brake for drag. 6. Install tires to the vehicle.
Page 2528
Idle Speed: Adjustments
Idle Air Volume Learning
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within
the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
- Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
- Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are
satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a
moment.
- Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
- Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 degrees C (158 - 212 degrees F)
- Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch: ON
- Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp) On vehicles equipped with daytime light
systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is start the headlamp will not be
illuminated.
- Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
- Vehicle speed: Stopped
- Transmission: Warmed-up With CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T"
system indicates less than 0.9 V.
- Without CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode.
6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds.
Page 13727
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 12178
^ If you find the old Spacer Washer on the floor of the car, discard it.
Reinstall the Seat and Check its Operation
7. Reinstall the seat, making sure:
^ All wire harnesses are connected and correctly routed to prevent pinching and chaffing.
^ The four seat mounting bolts are tightened to: 45 Nm (4.6 Kg.m, 35 ft-lbs.)
8. Re-connect the battery cables, positive cable first (if you disconnected them in step 2).
9. Check the power seat controls, making sure:
^ They operate correctly.
^ The incident noise is fixed.
10. Re-program the radio station presets and re-set the clock (if you disconnected the battery in
step 2).
11. Initialize the power windows and sunroof as applicable. For Frontier and Pathfinder vehicles
with Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) reset the Steering Angle Sensor as applicable. Reference the
Electronic Service Manual as needed.
Disclaimer
Page 3406
Water Pump: Service and Repair
WATER PUMP
CAUTION: ^
When removing water pump, be careful not to get engine coolant on drive belt.
^ Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit.
REMOVAL
1. Drain engine coolant so that no engine coolant comes out from water pump fitting hole.
CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold.
2. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool. 3. Remove the air duct and resonator
assembly. 4. Remove the drive belt. 5. Remove the water pump pulley. 6. Remove the water pump.
^ Engine coolant will leak from the cylinder block, so have a receptacle ready below.
CAUTION: Handle water pump vane so that it does not contact any other parts.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
^ Visually check that there is no significant dirt or rust on the water pump body and vane.
^ Make sure there is no looseness in the vane shaft, and that it turns smoothly when rotated by
hand.
^ Replace the water pump assembly, if necessary.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
After installation bleed the air from the cooling system.
Page 44
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Locations
Seat Memory Switch: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 494
Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM and IPDM E/R
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R
- Panic system.
- Vehicle security (theft warning) system.
- NVIS (NATS) system.
- Headlamp, tail lamp, front fog lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems.
- Front wiper and washer system.
Page 4264
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 13267
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 4174
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Connector Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 13465
Ambient Light Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Optical Sensor Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The optical sensor is located in the center of the defroster grille. It detects sunload entering through
windshield by means of a photo diode. The sensor converts the sunload into a current value which
is then input into the front air control.
OPTICAL INPUT PROCESS
The front air control includes a processing circuit which averages the variations in detected sunload
over a period of time. This prevents adjustments in the ATC system operation due to small or quick
variations in detected sunload.
For example, consider driving along a road bordered by an occasional group of large trees. The
sunload detected by the optical sensor will vary whenever the trees obstruct the sunlight. The
processing circuit averages the detected sunload over a period of time, so that the (insignificant)
effect of the trees momentarily obstructing the sunlight does not cause any change in the ATC
system operation. On the other hand, shortly after entering a long tunnel, the system will recognize
the change in sunload, and the system will react accordingly.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR OPTICAL SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure For Optical Sensor (Step 1)
Page 902
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 1104
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 11191
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 3580
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 3126
12. Disconnect harness clips (2 clips).
13. Unbolt alternator and set aside.
14. Loosen, but do not remove, the bolts that hold the alternator and power steering pump
mounting bracket to the engine block (5 bolts).
NOTE:
^ When the power steering pump bracket bolts are loose, the pump/bracket assembly can be
rotated or shifted slightly clockwise and counterclockwise.
^ The best position for the bracket is when the clearance measured at the top and the bottom of the
pulleys are equal.
15. When the bracket is set to the best position, tighten the bolts (5 bolts).
^ Torque 60 Nm (6.11 kg-m, 44.25 ft-lb)
16. Install alternator in reverse order of removal.
Interior - Noise From Drivers Power Seat Lifter
Seat Bottom Frame: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Noise From Drivers Power Seat Lifter
Classification: BT05-003a
Reference: NTB05-010a
Date: February 7, 2008
NISSAN; NOISE FROM DRIVER'S POWER SEAT LIFTER
This bulletin supersedes NTB03-040 and amends NTB05-010. The Applied Vehicles / VINs / Dates
have been updated. No other changes have been made.
APPLIED VEHICLES
APPLIED VINs / DATES
IF YOU CONFIRM: The driver's power seat makes a popping or clicking noise when using the seat
lifter.
ACTIONS:
^ Remove the four drivers seat mounting bolts and tilt the seat to access the bottom.
^ Install the new Spacer Washer (see Parts Information).
NOTE:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You must closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 13481
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 7329
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 11276
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 13812
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 8396
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 1574
Intake Sensor
After disconnecting intake sensor connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at
sensor harness side, using the table. If NG, replace intake sensor.
Page 12902
Rear Sonar System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12576
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 889
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 8723
d. At the front of the console; remove side covers and screws.
^ Left side cover shown; remove right side cover also.
1 screw on each side.
e. Remove the shift knob; unscrew it counterclockwise.
f. Lift and remove the shift finisher.
^ Disconnect electrical connectors.
g. Disconnect the shift cable.
^ Push the shift lever release to move shift lever to Park.
Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection
Seat Memory Switch: Testing and Inspection Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection
Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Page 14361
Windshield Washer Reservoir: Service and Repair
Washer Fluid Reservoir
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
1. Remove side washer fluid reservoir screw. 2. Remove front and rear washer motor connector.
3. Remove washer fluid level sensor connector. 4. Disconnect front and rear washer hoses.
5. Remove front washer fluid reservoir screw (2). 6. Remove washer fluid reservoir from the vehicle
(1).
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: After installation, add water up to the upper level of the washer fluid reservoir inlet and
check for water leaks.
Page 14469
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 13511
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 3766
not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model cannot be memorized.
11. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
If "CANCEL" is touched, it will return to previous screen.
12. Wait until the next screen during setting.
13. WRITE CONFIGURATION results are printed out automatically. Confirm "WRITE
CONFIGURATION" is correctly executed by comparing
sheet automatically printed out with applicable configuration list shown in step 9.
Page 5241
Case 13
Page 7441
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 14392
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8285
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8837
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 8577
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Sliding Motor Circuit Inspection
Power Seat Motor: Testing and Inspection Sliding Motor Circuit Inspection
Sliding Motor Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3)
Specifications
Spark Plug: Specifications
SPARK PLUG
Standard type ......................................................................................................................................
............................................................... PLFR5A-11 Hot type ...........................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
PLFR4A-11 Cold type ..........................................................................................................................
................................................................................. PLFR6A-11
Gap ......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................1.1 mm (0.043 in.)
Torque .................................................................................................................................................
.............................. 24.5 Nm (2.5 kgf-cm, 18 ft. lbs.)
Page 5151
Case 4
Page 9655
Defroster door motor
The defroster door motor is attached to the front heater & cooling unit. The front air control sends a
voltage to rotate the defroster door directing the air flow either to the defroster ducts, or to the floor
ducts, depending on which way the voltage and ground are applied to the motor leads. Motor
rotation is conveyed to a lever which activates the defroster door.
Diagnostic Procedure For Defroster Door Motor (Step 1)
Page 3467
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 3570
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 12598
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 7276
4. Push out and remove the journal bearing by lightly tapping the yoke with a hammer, taking care
not to damage the journal or yoke hole.
5. Remove the bearing at the opposite side of above operation.
NOTE: Put marks on the disassembled parts so that they can be reinstalled in their original
positions from which they were removed.
Center Support Bearing 1. Remove the propeller shaft assembly from the vehicle.
2. Put matching marks on the propeller shaft tube and the slip yoke as shown.
CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the propeller shaft tube or slip yoke.
3. Remove and discard the clamp near the center support bearing, then slide the slip yoke off of
propeller shaft tube.
4. Lift the dust shield off of the center support bearing. 5. Press the center support bearing off the
propeller shaft tube using Tool and suitable hydraulic press.
Tool number: 205-D002
ASSEMBLY
Journal
Page 3027
Camshaft: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Camshaft Runout
1. Put V block on precise flat work bench, and support No. 1 and No. 5 journals of the camshaft. 2.
Set dial indicator vertically to No. 3 journal. 3. Turn the camshaft to one direction, and measure the
camshaft runout on dial indicator (total indicator reading).
Camshaft runout: Less than 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) ^
If measurement exceeds specification, replace the camshaft.
Camshaft Cam Height
^ Measure the camshaft cam height. Standard cam height (intake & exhaust): 44.465 - 44.655 mm
(1.7506 - 1.7581 inch) Cam wear limit (intake & exhaust): 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch)
^ If measurement is not within the specifications, replace the camshaft.
Camshaft Journal Clearance
Camshaft Journal Diameter
^ Measure the diameter of the camshaft journal. Standard diameter: 25.953 - 25.970 mm (1.0218 1.0224 inch)
Camshaft Bracket Inner Diameter
Description and Operation
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Description and Operation
ISC SYSTEM
Description
The ECM controls the engine idle speed to a specified level through the fine adjustment of the air,
which is let into the intake manifold, by operating the electric throttle control actuator. The operating
of the throttle valve is varied to allow for optimum control of the engine idling speed. The crankshaft
position sensor (POS) detects the actual engine speed and sends a signal to the ECM.
The ECM controls the electric throttle control actuator so that the engine speed coincides with the
target value memorized in the ECM. The target engine speed is the lowest speed at which the
engine can operate steadily. The optimum value stored in the ECM is determined by taking into
consideration various engine conditions, such as during warming up, deceleration, and engine load
(air conditioner, power steering and cooling fan operation, etc.).
Page 8286
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 4836
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 8713
1. Turn the ignition ON and observe the air bag warning light:
^ Light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out: OK, go to Inspection Procedure 3.
^ Light stays ON or blinks: NG, go to next step (step 2).
^ Light does not come on at all: The warning light is not working correctly. This condition is not
covered by this campaign. Use the Service Manual and standard warranty procedures to repair the
warning light before proceeding.
2. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle and retrieve DTCs
Inspection Procedure 3 (Inspect Wire Harness at Rear Door Hinge)
1. Open the rear door and locate the harness in the door hinge area.
2. Inspect the wire harness vinyl tube:
^ Inspect the entire visible area. Look for worn areas, tears, and/or slits.
Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control
Unit Replacement
Control Module: Service and Repair Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit
Replacement
Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement
When replacing transfer assembly or transfer control unit, check the 4WD shift indicator pattern
and adjustment of the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit if necessary.
CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR PATTERN 1. Set 4WD shift switch to "2WD", "4H", "4LO", "4H"
and "2WD" in order. Stay at each switch position for at least 2 seconds.
2. Confirm 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp are changed properly as follows.
^ If OK, the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit is correct.
^ If NG, the position is different between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Adjust the
position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to pattern table.
Transfer Position Adjustment Pattern
METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT "2WD" Select Adjustment Pattern
1. Start engine. Run engine for at least 10 seconds.
2. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp.
Pattern A 1. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed.
Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. 2. Turn 4WD shift switch to "4LO" position. Stay in "4LO" for at
least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 4. Start engine. 5. Erase self-diagnosis. 6. Check
4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again.
If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new
transfer control unit and retry the above check.
Pattern B 1. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed.
Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds.
Page 13552
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 13907
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 10641
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 11318
Trailer Lamps: Description and Operation
TRAILER TOW
System Description
Power is supplied at all times
- to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room), and
- through 50 A fusible link (letter f, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
- to BCM (body control module) terminal 70, and
- to 15 A fuse (No. 60, located in the fuse and relay box)
- through 15 A fuse (No. 60, located in the fuse and relay box)
- to trailer turn relay LH and RH terminal 5, and
- through 10 A fuse (No. 32, located in the IPDM E/R)
- through IPDM E/R terminal 61
- to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 3, and
- through 20 A fuse (No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R)
- to CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R, and
- to tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
- through 30 A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
- to trailer tow relay 2 terminals 3 and 6, and
- through 40 A fusible link (letter k, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
- to electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 5.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
- to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
- through 10 A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box)
- to BCM terminal 38, and
- through 10 A fuse (No. 51, located in the IPDM E/R)
- to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
- to BCM terminal 67
- to electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 1 and
- to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 2
- through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and
- to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59
- to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 2
- to trailer connector terminal 2
- to trailer turn relay LH and RH terminal 2
- through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
TRAILER TAIL LAMP OPERATION
The trailer tail lamps are controlled by the trailer tow relay 1.
With the lighting switch in the parking and tail lamp ON (1ST) position, AUTO position (and the auto
light system is activated) or headlamp ON (2ND) position, power is supplied
- through the tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R
- through 10 A fuse (No. 36, located in the IPDM E/R)
- to IPDM E/R terminal 49
- to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 1.
When energized, trailer tow relay 1 supplies tail lamp power to trailer connector terminal 6.
TRAILER TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD LAMP OPERATION
The trailer turn signal and hazard lamps are controlled by the BCM through trailer turn relays (LH
and RH). If either turn signal or the hazard lamps are turned on, the BCM supplies voltage to the
trailer turn relays (LH and RH) to make them cycle on and off.
Trailer turn relay LH output is supplied
- through BCM terminal 52
- to trailer turn relay LH terminal 1.
Trailer turn relay RH output is supplied
Page 56
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 1674
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 12039
Figure 15
28. Check the gear box to mounting tab distance again (as you did in steps 20 and 21). Make sure
the distance has not changed (see Figure 15).
- If N/G, adjust.
Figure 16
29. Tighten/torque the Seat Track Mounting Tab Bolts that you installed in step 25 (see Figure 16).
- Bolt torque: 65-84 in-lb (7.3-9.4 Nm)
Figure 17
30. Reinstall screws to attach the side finishers and the front finisher (see Figure 17).
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Classification: EM09-015
Reference: NTB10-009
Date: January 19, 2010
REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure
described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the
exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are
made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
NOTE:
The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads
may not be considered a warrantable expense.
This procedure can be performed by two methods:
Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed
^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle.
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed.
Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle.
^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice.
Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is
performed on the vehicle.
Service Procedure
Rust Penetrant
Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure:
Page 13886
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 5329
Case 10
Page 5345
Information Bus: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
CAN Diagnostic Support Monitor
Page 10844
Optional Splice
Page 4168
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Description
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of exhaust valve cam sprocket to
identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder
identification signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to
change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 3752
3. BCM - Operation table of combination switch
- BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the table.
NOTE: Headlamp has a dual system switch.
4. Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON)
- When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this
time if OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5.
- When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges
lighting switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN
communication.
- When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and
recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON.
NOTE: Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10 ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch
is turned ON, electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it
cannot be noticed.
5. Operation mode
- Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows:
Page 7590
4. Remove bolts and detach control device.
INSTALLATION
1. Install new O-ring to transfer control device.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply petroleum jelly.
2. Install transfer control device.
a. Turn control shift rod fully counterclockwise using flat-bladed screwdriver, and then put mark on
control shift rod.
b. Align transfer control device shaft cutout with mark on control shift rod, and install.
NOTE: Turn transfer control device when transfer control device connection does not match.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Air Bag Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Front Axle
Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Front Axle
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove engine undercover if equipped, using
power tool. 3. Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove the torque member bolts using
power tool. Then reposition brake caliper aside with wire.
NOTE: Do not press brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
4. Put alignment mark on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor.
5. For 4WD model, perform the following:
^ Remove cotter pin, then lock nut from drive shaft using power tool.
^ Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly.
6. Remove wheel sensor.
^ Inspect the wheel sensor O-ring, replace the wheel sensor assembly if damaged.
^ Clean the wheel sensor hole and mating surface with a suitable brake cleaner and clean lint-free
shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle bearing area.
^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
CAUTION: Do not pull on the wheel sensor harness.
7. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool. 8. Remove splash guard and
wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 6648
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 8334
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 9786
Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Steps 23 - 26)
ABS
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABS
Wheel Sensors
WHEEL SENSORS
REMOVAL
1. Remove wheel sensor bolt.
^ When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front
wheel sensor bolt.
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
^ Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten wheel sensor bolt to specification.
CAUTION: Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following: ^
Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged.
^ Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
Sensor Rotor
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation FRONT
The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace
wheel hub and bearing assembly.
REAR Removal
1. Remove axle shaft assembly.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor.
2. Pull the sensor rotor off the axle shaft using Tool and a press.
Tool number: ST30031000 ( - )
Installation
1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure
sensor rotor is fully seated.
Page 7024
Page 2827
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 6376
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 13010
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 1154
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 14020
Page 8694
52. Remove the rear upper finishers-left and right side.
^ Remove the clip.
^ Use a plastic trim tool.
53. Remove the upper door latch striker covers - left and right side.
^ 1 screw on each side.
54. Remove the coat hangers; left and right side.
^ 1 screw for each coat hanger.
Locations
SRS Components Parts Location
Page 5721
ECM Inspection Table Part 6
Page 6902
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
NOTE: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "Components". See: Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component
Parts)/Components
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
Page 6838
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
A/T Fluid: .............................................................................................................................................
................................................. Nissan Matic Fluid J
NOTE:Using Automatic Transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan ATF Matic Fluid J will cause
deterioration in driveability and automatic
transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the
NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
Page 2368
Power Window Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 2833
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 5297
Case 14
Case 15
Page 3446
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Page 8521
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 6867
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 10262
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 3229
EM-12
Page 14499
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 11828
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 865
Page 13937
Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Crew
Cab) (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 2956
Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Handling When Mounting Tires
Classification: WT06-002
Reference: NTB06-076
Date: November 7, 2006
PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING CHROME TYPE WHEELS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan vehicles with chrome type wheels
SERVICE INFORMATION
The appearance of chrome type wheels can be damaged if they are not handled correctly during
wheel and tire service.
Tire Changing:
^ Make sure to use tire changing equipment that clamps (secures) the wheel from the inside
(internal jaws).
^ Do not use any metal tools that may touch the outside of the wheel.
^ Tools and machine equipment that touch the outside of the rim should be made of plastic, or
have rubber/plastic protective covers.
Wheel Balancing:
Page 11300
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 714
Page 6384
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 8639
Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation
Page 95
Component Parts Location
Page 4670
Page 3839
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 13677
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 10898
Remote Keyless Entry Receiver System Check (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 4074
ECM Inspection Table Part 8
Page 11495
- Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position.
FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR ASSEMBLY
Removal
1. Remove the front door speaker. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the
power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4.
Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts. 6. Raise the front door glass and hold it in
place with suitable tool. 7. Disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly. 8.
Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly.
Disassembly And Assembly
Remove the regulator motor from the regulator assembly.
Inspection After Removal
Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or
grease it.
- Wire wear
- Regulator deformation
- Grease condition for each sliding part
The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease.
Installation
1. Install the regulator assembly.
Front door glass regulator assembly nuts and bolt : 7.5 N.m (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb)
2. Connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly. 3. Align the glass and install the glass
bolts.
Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
4. Reset the limit switch. Refer to "Setting of Limit Switch". 5. Install front door speaker.
SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION
Setting of Limit Switch
If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor).
- Removal and installation of the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the glass.
- Removal and installation of the glass run.
Resetting
Page 12404
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Automatic Air Conditioner
Control Assembly: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner
CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the five control knobs from the front air control unit. 2. Remove the cluster lid C.
3. Remove the four screws securing the front air control unit to cluster lid C. 4. Remove the front air
control unit.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Specifications
Page 2073
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 3506
Page 11763
Seat Memory Switch: Testing and Inspection Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection
Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 397
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 783
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 9335
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 5055
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Step 3)
Page 7733
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 6885
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 1253
Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder
Switch) Check (Crew Cab)
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 7907
2. Loosen lock nut (A) on the input rod, then turn input rod to adjust the pedal to specified height.
When finished adjusting, tighten lock nut (A).
CAUTION: Make sure that the screw portion of the end of input rod is located inside the clevis.
Lock nut (A): 18.6 Nm (1.9 kg-m, 14 ft. lbs.)
3. With the pedal pulled up and held by hand, press the stop lamp switch and the ASCD switch in
until threaded ends contact pedal bracket. 4. With the threaded ends of the stop lamp switch and
ASCD switch contacting the pedal bracket, turn the switches 45° clockwise to lock in place.
CAUTION: Make sure that the gap (C) between the bracket and switch ends are within
specification.
5. Check the pedal play.
CAUTION: Make sure that the stop lamp goes off when the pedal is released.
6. Start the engine and check the height of the brake pedal when depressing it.
Page 14187
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Service and Repair
Global Positioning System Antenna: Service and Repair
GPS ANTENNA
Removal
1. Remove center console. 2. Remove cluster lid D. 3. Remove defroster grille.
4. Disconnect GPS antenna connector.
5. Remove GPS antenna.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 746
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 796
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 1853
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Interior - Passenger Power Seat Switch Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-039B Date: 100119
Interior - Passenger Power Seat Switch Replacement
Classification: EL07-038B
Reference: NTB08-039B
Date: January 19, 2010
2004-2010 TITAN AND ARMADA; PASSENGER SEAT SWITCH SERVICEABILITY
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been
revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Titan (A60) - Bucket Seats Only 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) Bucket Seats Only
IF YOU CONFIRM
The passenger side power seat switch needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
Refer to the Service Procedure to replace the switch.
WARNING:
^ This vehicle seat is equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) part of the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
^ In this Service Procedure you will be removing and re-installing the outboard (switch side) J-clip
of the seat bottom cover.
^ Only the outboard J-clip should be removed. Removal of any other J-Clips may affect OCS
performance.
^ When re-installing the outboard J-Clip, make sure the J-Clip is securely attached. A loose J-Clip
may affect OCS performance.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
Page 3463
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 5090
Case 4
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Axle Nut
Torque .................................................................................................................................................
............................ 137 Nm (14 kg-cm, 101 ft. lbs.)
Locations
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Locations
Page 12555
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Seatback Trim and Pad
Seat Back: Service and Repair Seatback Trim and Pad
Disassembly and Assembly
SEATBACK TRIM AND PAD
NOTE: Only complete outboard seatback assemblies can be replaced on vehicles equipped with
side air bags.
NOTE: Be sure to set the front/rear cushion lifter to the top position.
1. Remove the seatback board from the back of the seatback.
2. Remove the retainer. 3. Remove the headrest.
4. From inside of the seatback, squeeze the headrest holder tabs at the base of the stay pipe and
pull the up to remove.
NOTE: Before installing the headrest holder, check its orientation (front/rear and right/left).
Page 4881
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 11837
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 2307
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 7173
REMOVAL
1. Remove front final drive. 2. Drain gear oil. 3. Remove rear cover.
INSTALLATION
Page 1601
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Specifications
Page 13339
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 809
Engine Control Module: Connector Views
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
Testing and Inspection
Pedal Positioning Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 2111
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from air
cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4.
Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower)
^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type)
NOTE: ^
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals.
^ Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance.
Page 5953
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install Filter Kit (2004-2006 Titan ONLY)
1. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Note position of yellow marks.
2. Position mounting bracket onto frame as shown, hooking bracket tab onto brake hose bracket.
Attach bracket to frame with the clamp supplied in the kit.
Page 6476
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 1436
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 5686
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 3225
EM-7
Page 12398
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 10977
Optional Splice
Page 8460
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 3726
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 6671
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Automatic Air Conditioner
Control Module HVAC: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Front Air Control
The front air control has a built-in microcomputer which processes information sent from various
sensors needed for air conditioner operation. The air mix door motors, mode door motor, intake
door motor, defroster door motor, blower motor and compressor are then controlled.
The front air control is unitized with control mechanisms. When the various switches and
temperature dials are operated, data is input to the front air control.
Self-diagnostic functions are also built into the front air control to provide quick check of
malfunctions in the auto air conditioner system.
Page 13150
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 1078
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 7337
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 8574
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3957
Page 10650
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 3576
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 12159
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 12918
Page 6072
Accelerator Pedal: Vehicle Damage Warnings
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER",
used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage
front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag
deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and
whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the Restraint Systems.
WARNING:
- To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
- Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to
personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and
Air Bag Module, see the Restraint Systems.
- Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS
wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Front Power Socket LH, Rear Cargo Power Socket
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Power Socket LH, Rear Cargo Power Socket
Front Power Socket LH, Rear Cargo Power Socket
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
1. Disconnect battery negative terminal.
2. Remove inner socket from the ring, while pressing the hook on the ring out from square hole. 3.
Disconnect power socket connector. 4. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing
pawls.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 8478
Technician Safety Information
Accelerator Pedal: Technician Safety Information
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT
PRE-TENSIONER"
The Supplemental Restraint System such as "AIR BAG" and "SEAT BELT PRE-TENSIONER",
used along with a front seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity of injury to the driver and front
passenger for certain types of collision. This system includes seat belt switch inputs and dual stage
front air bag modules. The SRS system uses the seat belt switches to determine the front air bag
deployment, and may only deploy one front air bag, depending on the severity of a collision and
whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the Restraint Systems.
WARNING:
- To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance must be performed
by an authorized NISSAN/INFINITI dealer.
- Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to
personal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system. For removal of Spiral Cable and
Air Bag Module, see the Restraint Systems.
- Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed. SRS
wiring harnesses can be identified by yellow and/or orange harnesses or harness connectors.
Page 405
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 1171
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 6427
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 8324
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3291
NOTE: ^
The above figure shows the relationship between the mating mark on each timing chain and that of
the corresponding sprocket, with the components installed.
^ To install the timing chain and associated parts, start with those on the RH bank. The procedure
for installing parts on the LH bank is omitted because it is the same as that for installation on the
RH bank.
1. Make sure the crankshaft key and RH bank camshaft dowel pin and LH bank camshaft dowel pin
are facing in the direction shown.
Page 9709
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 13046
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 14027
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 7606
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD)
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD)
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Description
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is
turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Page 13741
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 2939
7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem
(see Figure 6).
^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7).
Tire to Rim Slippage:
^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire
may become un-balanced.
^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage.
^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry.
^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced.
WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION
Page 12533
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 11380
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 6316
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 13855
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 3991
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 6620
Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 13367
Headlamp Bulb: Service and Repair
Bulb Replacement
CAUTION:
- Turn headlamp switch OFF before disconnecting headlamp harness connector.
- Do not touch bulb by hand right after being turned off. Burning may result.
- Do not touch the glass of bulb directly by hand. Keep grease and other oily substances away from
it.
- Do not leave bulb out of front combination lamp assembly for a long time because dust, moisture,
smoke, etc. may affect the performance of the lamp. When replacing headlamp bulb, be sure to
replace it with a new one.
HEADLAMP (OUTER SIDE), FOR LOW BEAM
Removal
1. Position fender protector aside. 2. Turn headlamp switch OFF. 3. Disconnect headlamp electrical
connector. 4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and remove bulb.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
HEADLAMP (INNER SIDE), FOR HIGH BEAM
Removal
1. Turn headlamp switch OFF. 2. Disconnect headlamp electrical connector. 3. Turn the bulb
socket counterclockwise and remove bulb.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 11641
2. Remove plastic bolt cover located on the side of the armrest.
3. Remove bolt and armrest assembly.
4. a. Push the insert out of the armrest as shown in Figure 3 using a suitable tool.
b. Remove the insert as shown in Figure 4.
Page 5213
Case 2
Page 2380
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 11203
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 8863
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11421
7. Remove front bumper brackets LH and RH. 8. Remove front bumper stays LH and RH.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5222
Case 11
Page 6502
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1785
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8226
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 5828
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 228
Repair Flow Chart
Page 2058
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 195
^ After you select "ECU Reprog. Data", the "ECU Reprogramming Data" screen will be displayed
(see Figure 5).
NOTE
^ This is a special ABS/VDC reprogram that uses an ID Code FOR THIS INCIDENT ONLY!
^ Step 7 (below) is different from the typical ECU Reprogramming procedure.
7. Select the new ABS/VDC Control Unit data as follows:
a. Click on the Keypad button (see Figure 5).
Page 904
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 11930
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 8810
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set
Canister Purge Control Valve: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP
DTC's Set
Classification: EC06-009B
Reference: NTB06-095B
Date: September 2, 2008
2004 ARMADA / 2004-2006 TITAN; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446
APPLIED VEHICLES:2004-2006 Titan (A60)
2004 Armada (TA60)
This bulletin has been amended to add DTC P0448. No other changes have been made.
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(s) stored:
^ P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446
AND
^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed.
ACTIONS:
All applied vehicles:
Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V.
Clear any DTC(s) stored in the ECM.
AND IF the vehicle is a 2004-2006 Titan:
Refer to the Install Filter Kit Service Procedure of this bulletin.
AND IF the vehicle is a 2004 Armada:
Refer to the Install Protector Service Procedure of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 10263
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 3717
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 11064
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 13245
Optional Splice
Diagram Information and Instructions
Control Module HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 3483
Diagnostic Procedure For Water Valve (Steps 3 - 4)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR WATER VALVE
Page 24
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 13591
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab)
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Step 3)
Page 9186
SPECIAL TOOLS
Page 7306
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 3561
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 3352
Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent).
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for
connecting the fuel pressure gauge.
2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test".
^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure.
^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble
Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test.
^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test.
> If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and
repair information.
> If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3.
3. Replace the fuel pump.
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the
appropriate Service Manual.
^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information.
^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal.
4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed.
Page 6081
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 14054
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 12167
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 11403
not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model cannot be memorized.
11. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
If "CANCEL" is touched, it will return to previous screen.
12. Wait until the next screen during setting.
13. WRITE CONFIGURATION results are printed out automatically. Confirm "WRITE
CONFIGURATION" is correctly executed by comparing
sheet automatically printed out with applicable configuration list shown in step 9.
Page 383
Power Distribution Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 5148
Case 1
Page 12491
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 3523
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 12038
Figure 12
24. Make sure the "dimples" on the seat track mounting tabs are aligned with the holes in the seat
track (see Figures 11 and 12).
Figure 13
25. Install and hand tighten both seat track mounting tab bolts (M6, 10 mm head, see Figure 13).
Figure 14
26. Next, install and tighten the six nuts (three on each side) with the base plates. This will secure
the gear boxes (see Figure 14). Nut torque: 64-85
in-lb (7.17-9.69 Nm).
27. Re-install and tighten the two Seat Frame Side Bolts M8, 12 mm head (see Figure 14). Bolt
torque: 13-17 ft-lb (17.5-23.7 Nm).
Page 12496
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 5341
Combination Meter Circuit Inspection
ABS Actuator Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit Inspection
Page 8465
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 3503
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 6245
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 6433
Ignition Coil: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
IGNITION COIL WITH POWER TRANSISTOR
CAUTION: Do the following procedure in the place where ventilation is good without the
combustible.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ignition coil harness connector.
3. Check resistance between ignition coil terminals as follows. 4. If NG, replace ignition coil with
power transistor.
If OK, go to next step.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF. 6. Reconnect all harness connectors disconnected.
7. Remove fuel pump fuse in fuse block No. 1 to release fuel pressure.
NOTE: Do not use CONSULT-II to release fuel pressure, or fuel pressure applies again during the
following procedure.
8. Start engine. 9. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure.
10. Turn ignition switch OFF. 11. Remove all ignition coil harness connectors to avoid the electrical
discharge from the ignition coils. 12. Remove ignition coil and spark plug of the cylinder to be
checked. 13. Crank engine for 5 seconds or more to remove combustion gas in the cylinder. 14.
Connect spark plug and harness connector to ignition coil.
15. Fix ignition coil using a rope etc. with gap of 13 - 17 mm between the edge of the spark plug
and grounded metal portion as shown in the figure. 16. Crank engine for about 3 seconds, and
check whether spark is generated between the spark plug and the grounded metal portion.
Page 3795
Page 2207
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
CAN Communication
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7409
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 8301
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 7623
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 5225
Case 15
Case 16
NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Page 4675
Page 10266
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 1734
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 768
Engine Control Module: Connector Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3142
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine and confirm:
^ if a squeak noise is coming from the drive belt
and
^ using a stethoscope or similar tool, if the drive belt auto tensioner is making abnormal noise.
2. Turn the engine off.
3. Write down the radio presets for later reprogramming.
4. Remove intake duct and engine cover.
5. Disconnect battery, negative cable first, and wait at least 3 minutes before proceeding to step 6.
6. Remove drive belt and drive belt auto tensioner. Refer to section EM of the Electronic Service
Manual for removal procedure.
7. Lift up vehicle by placing it on a hoist.
8. Remove front right wheel.
9. Remove fender protector. Refer to section EXT of the ESM for removal procedure.
10. Remove engine under cover (6 bolts).
11. Check the pulley alignment as follows:
Page 6853
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 10813
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 3498
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 2763
The electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is a delicate device. To use the electronic
refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) properly, read the manufacturer's operating instructions and
perform any specified maintenance.
1. Position the probe approximately 5 mm (3/16 in) away from the point to be checked as shown.
2. When checking for leaks, circle each fitting completely with the probe as shown.
3. Move the probe along each component at a speed of approximately 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in)/second
as shown.
CHECKING PROCEDURE
NOTE: To prevent inaccurate or false readings, make sure there is no refrigerant vapor, shop
chemicals, or cigarette smoke in the vicinity of the vehicle. Perform the leak test in a calm area (low
air/wind movement) so that the leaking refrigerant is not dispersed.
1. Turn the engine OFF. 2. Connect the manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) to the A/C service ports.
Refer to "SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT". 3. Check if the A/C refrigerant
pressure is at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/sq.cm, 50 psi) above a temperature of 16 degrees C (61
degrees F). If less than
Page 9822
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 13900
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 2476
Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process.
6. Begin the alignment procedure.
^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment.
^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications.
If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips:
^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body.
IMPORTANT:
After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position.
When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips:
Page 9914
Testing Condenser Fan Motor
CAUTION:
Make sure there are no objects in the way of the fan blades. Keep all objects away from directly
contacting the fan blades when the fan motor is running.
7. Switch the Fan Motor Tester to ON, observe the fan operation for 3 to 4 seconds and then turn
the Fan Motor Tester OFF:
- If the fan turned and operated freely; go to step 8.
- If the fan did not operate freely; this indicates the fan motor is NG and must be replaced. No
further testing is needed; go to Procedure C
8. Prepare the Fluke 73 and the Phototach Digital Tachometer for the next test as follows.
a. Switch the Fluke 73 to read DC Volts.
b. Remove the Phototach Digital Tachometer from its case and have it ready to check the fan
RPM.
Figure B-5, Figure B-6
NOTE:
It is important that readings from these two meters be read and recorded at the same time in the
next test.
c. Practice using the Phototach Digital Tachometer as follows:
1. Do not turn the fan motor tester ON at this time.
2. Press and hold the TEST button on the Phototach Digital Tachometer.
WARNING:
Do not shine or point the red light beam from the Phototach Digital Tachometer into anyone's eyes
(including your own).
3. Hold the digital tachometer about 4 inches away from the condenser fan.
4. Aim the red beam at the painted area on the fan blade.
Page 12585
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 1934
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 1517
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 4121
Page 3958
Page 10129
4. Remove the evaporator.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Replace the O-rings on the low-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe with
new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them.
Page 695
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use
Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036.
1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM.
a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other
damage.
Description and Operation
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
FTT SENSOR
Component Description
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The
sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature.
The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 9888
Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner
Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch
Magnet Clutch Assembly
REMOVAL
1. Remove the compressor.
2. Remove the center bolt while holding the clutch disc stationary using Tool as shown.
Tool number : J-44614
3. Remove the clutch disc.
Page 906
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 4440
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2496
4. Measure the distance "A" on the rear side of the front tires as shown. 5. Push the vehicle slowly
ahead to rotate the wheels 180° degrees (1/2 a turn).
CAUTION: If the wheels have rotated more than 180° (1/2 turn), start this procedure again from the
beginning. Never push the vehicle backward.
6. Measure the distance "B" on the front side of the front tires at the same marks as shown. Total
toe-in is calculated as "A" - "B".
Total toe-in: Refer to "Wheel Alignment, (Unladen*1)". See: Specifications/Front Suspension
7. Adjust the toe-in by varying the length of the steering outer socket.
a. Loosen the outer tie-rod lock nuts. b. Adjust the toe-in by screwing the outer tie-rods in or out.
Standard length "L": Refer to "Steering Outer Socket and Inner Socket". See:
Specifications/Mechanical Specifications/Steering/Steering Outer Socket and Inner Socket
c. Tighten the outer tie-rod lock nuts to specification.
Lock nut: Refer to "Disassembly and Assembly". See: Steering and Suspension/Steering/Steering
Gear/Service and Repair/Disassembly and Assembly
Front Wheel Turning Angle
FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE
NOTE: Check front wheel turning angle after the toe-in inspection.
1. Place front wheels on turning radius gauges in straight ahead position and rear wheels on
stands so that vehicle can be level.. Check the maximum
inner and outer wheel turning angles for LH and RH road wheels.
2. Start engine and run at idle, turn steering wheel all the way right and left, measure the turning
angle.
Wheel turning angle (full turn): Refer to "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)". See: Specifications/Front
Suspension Any turning angles are not adjustable. If any of steering angles are out of the specification, check if
the following parts are worn or damaged. Steering gear
- Steering column
- Front suspension components If found that they are worn or damaged, replace them with new
ones.
Page 2838
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 3127
17. Clean the crankshaft pulley belt ribs/grooves.
^ Remove the debris by hand with a wire brush.
^ Do not use a power tool.
18. Install belt tensioner. Replace if it was found to be noisy.
19. Install new drive belt. Refer to section EM of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for
installation procedure.
20. Connect harness clips.
21. Install fender protector. Refer to section EXT of the ESM for installation procedure.
22. Install front right wheel.
23. Lower the vehicle.
24. Re-connect battery cable, positive side first.
25. Start engine.
26. Confirm the issue is resolved.
27. Reprogram the radio presets.
28. Reinitialize the power sunroof.
Page 11613
1. Heat molding to between 30 degrees and 40 degrees C (86 degrees to 104 degrees F) with a
heat gun. 2. Raise end of molding and cut away tape to remove molding. Remove all traces of
tape.
INSTALLATION
- On vehicles coated with Hard Clear Coat, use double-faced 3M adhesive tape Product No. 4210
or equivalent, after priming with 3M primer Product No. N200, C-100 or equivalent.
- The repair parts are also affixed with double-faced adhesive tape.
- To re-use existing molding, clean all traces of double sided tape from the molding and apply new
double-faced tape to the molding.
1. Clean the panel surface with isopropyl alcohol or equivalent to degrease the surface. 2. Heat the
panel and molding tape surface to 30 degrees to 40 degrees C (86 degrees to 104 degree F). 3.
Remove the backing sheet from the tape surface.
- Align the locating pin into the hole in the outer door.
- Continue aligning the pins into their corresponding holes in the outer door during installation.
4. Press ends by hand and use a roller to apply 5 kg-f (11 lbs-f) to press molding to door surface.
- Apply even pressure along molding to insure proper wet out.
CAUTION: To secure contact, do not wash vehicle for 24 hours after installation.
Page 14467
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 6538
Optional Splice
Page 8539
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 12879
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 5435
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 14209
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 407
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
System Description
- IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse
block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM
E/R control circuits.
- IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication
control, etc.
- It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines.
CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R
1. Lamp control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following
lamps: Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
- Parking lamps
- Tail and license lamps
- Front fog lamps
2. Wiper control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers.
3. Heated mirror relay control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the heated mirror
relay.
4. A/C compressor control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C
compressor (magnetic clutch).
5. Starter control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the starter relay.
6. Cooling fan control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan
relays.
7. Horn control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay.
CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL
With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN
L-line, CAN H-line), it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum
wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only.
1. Fail-safe control
- When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe
control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control.
- Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as shown in the table.
IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL
In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition.
1. CAN communication status
- CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.
- Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.
Page 4931
Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
PREPARATION
1. ECM is located in the engine room passenger side behind battery. 2. Remove ECM harness
connector.
3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with levers as far as they will go as
shown in the figure. 4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between the
ECM and ECM harness connector.
- Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
- Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
Page 12090
Lifting Sensor (Front) Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Lifting Sensor (Front) Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 8814
Page 11156
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 4884
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 13303
Page 1618
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 7950
d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process.
4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance.
^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed.
ROTOR INDEXING
When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been
removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of
rotor run-out.
1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty.
NOTE:
For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the
Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE.
2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only).
3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub.
4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5.
For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM.
5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug
nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only).
^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout.
6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit,
you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using
the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations
performed.
Disclaimer
Page 416
Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction
- When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned
OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction.
- When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch
signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay.
VDC/TCS/ABS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 4913
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
Page 7512
Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications
Transfer Fluid Type Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF (Continental US and Alaska) or Canada
NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid Dexron III, Mercon or equivalent.
Page 298
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 11170
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 13553
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 14037
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 1727
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 11916
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 199
^ After you click on "OK" an ASIST screen will appear that shows the data transfer progress (see
Figure 10).
c. Wait until the data transfer is complete (see the CAUTION at the end of step 8).
^ When the data transfer is complete, CONSULT-II will shut off automatically.
d. Disconnect the A/C power cord and the Ethernet cable from CONSULT-II.
Procedure
Part 3: Reprogram ABS/VDC Control Unit with 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card
CAUTION:
^ Perform this operation in five (5) sections. DO NOT SKIP any of these sections.
^ The sections must be performed in order, 1 through 5.
Section 1: Connect a battery charger and CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
Section 2: Check all systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTC(s).
Section 3: Confirm the vehicle battery voltage and CONSULT-II "Charger Input".
Section 4: Perform ABS/VDC Control Unit Reprogramming.
Section 5: Again, perform a check of all systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any newly
stored DTCs.
Section 1
Section 1: Connect a battery charger and CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
1. Confirm the ignition switch is OFF.
2. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. Set the charger at a low charge rate (2-amp
"trickle charge").
IMPORTANT
You must connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery when performing ABS/VDC
reprogramming. Permanent ABS/VDC damage can occur if you don't.
Connecting a vehicle battery charger will maintain:
^ Proper CONSULT-II power supply during reprogramming-very important if the CONSULT-II
battery is low.
^ Vehicle battery voltage level-especially on late model vehicles where the cooling fans come on
during reprogramming.
3. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle using the DLC-II cable with black Converter Box (see Figure
11).
On-Vehicle Check
Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection On-Vehicle Check
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR ON-VEHICLE CHECK
Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) and Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
NOTE: All seat belt retractors are of the Emergency Locking Retractors (ELR) type. In an
emergency (sudden stop) the retractor will lock and prevent the belt from extending any further. All
3-point type seat belt retractors except the driver's seat belt also have an Automatic Locking
Retractors (ALR) mode. The ALR mode (also called child restraint mode) is used when installing
child seats. The ALR mode is activated when the seat belt is fully extended. When the belt is then
retracted partially, the ALR mode automatically locks the seat belt in a specific position so the belt
cannot be extended any further. To cancel the ALR mode, allow the seat belt to fully wind back into
the retractor.
Check the seat belt retractors using the following test(s) to determine if a retractor assembly is
operating properly.
ELR Function Stationary Check
Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and prevent the belt
from extending further.
ALR Function Stationary Check
1. Pull out entire length of seat belt from retractor until a click is heard. 2. Retract the belt partially.
A clicking noise should be heard as the belt retracts indicating that the retractor is in the Automatic
Locking Retractor
(ALR) mode.
3. Grasp the seat belt and try to pull out the retractor. The belt must lock and not extend any
further. If necessary replace the retractor assembly. 4. Allow the entire length of the belt to retract
to cancel the automatic locking mode.
ELR Function Moving Check
WARNING: Perform the following test in a safe, open area clear of other vehicles and obstructions
(for example, a large, empty parking lot). Road surface must be paved and dry. DO NOT perform
the following test on wet or gravel roads or on public streets and highways. This could result in an
accident and serious personal injury. The driver and passenger must be prepared to brace
themselves in the event the retractor does not lock.
1. Fasten drivers seat belt. Buckle a passenger into the seat for the belt that is to be tested. 2.
Proceed to the designated safe area. 3. Drive the vehicle at approximately 16 km/h (10 MPH).
Notify any passengers of a pending sudden stop. The driver and passenger must be
prepared to brace themselves in the event the retractor does not lock. Apply brakes firmly and
make a very hard stop.
During stop, seat belts should lock and not be extended. If the seat belt retractor assembly does
not lock, perform the retractor off-vehicle check.
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
CAUTION:
- Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics
Page 8674
13. First, tape the door grommet to the corrugated tube, then
14. Wrap the entire length of the corrugated tube with vinyl tape.
^ As you wrap, keep the tape tight and the tape roll close to the harness.
^ Over-lap the tape 50% as you wrap.
^ Make sure to wrap around the clips (diaper wrap) so they will not move-the clips must stay in
position.
^ Make sure to cover the area on the body side between the corrugated tube and the vinyl tube.
^ Double wrap the entire length; one layer left to right and another layer right to left.
15. Attach the new hinge rod clip below the bracket as shown in Figure B9.
Page 3612
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 12590
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5890
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 4192
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Locations
Neutral Safety Switch: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13395
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 710
Page 2931
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire
changing machine and break both tire beads.
Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead.
3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
1. Place first side of tire onto rim.
2. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten transmitter nut to specification.
Transmitter nut 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.)
Page 13109
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 9847
4. Insert the first new in-cabin microfilter into the heater and cooling unit assembly housing and
slide it over to the right. Insert the second new
in-cabin microfilter into the heater and cooling unit assembly housing.
NOTE: The in-cabin microfilters are marked with air flow arrows. The end of the microfilter with the
arrow should face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows should point downward.
5. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover.
6. Install the lower glove box in the instrument panel and secure it with the two hinge pins.
Page 7928
d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process.
4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance.
^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed.
ROTOR INDEXING
When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been
removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of
rotor run-out.
1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty.
NOTE:
For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the
Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE.
2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only).
3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub.
4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5.
For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM.
5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug
nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only).
^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout.
6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit,
you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using
the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations
performed.
Disclaimer
Page 2673
^ Confirm mating marks are aligned with hose and clamp, then correct if needed.
^ To install eye joint, align projection of eye joint with notch of power steering pump, and attach eye
joint to power steering pump properly. Tighten eye bolt by hand fully, then torque to specification.
Page 12144
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 3987
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 2062
Testing and Inspection
Power Steering Pump: Testing and Inspection
CHECKING RELIEF OIL PRESSURE
CAUTION: Before starting work, confirm belt tension is proper.
1. Connect Tool between oil pump discharge connector and high pressure hose and then bleed air
from the hydraulic circuit. 2. Start engine. Allow engine to run until tank temperature reaches 50 80°C (122 - 176°F).
CAUTION: ^
Warm up engine with shut-off valve fully opened. If engine is started with shut-off valve closed, fluid
pressure in power steering pump increases to maximum. This will raise fluid temperature
excessively.
^ Be careful not to contact hose with belt when engine is started.
3. With engine at idle, close shut-off valve and read the relief oil pressure.
Relief oil pressure: 9.0 - 9.8 mPa (91.77 - 99.93 kg/cm2, 1305.34 - 1421.37 psi)
CAUTION: Do not close shut-off valve of pressure gauge for more than 10 seconds.
4. After measurement, open shut-off valve slowly.
^ If relief oil pressure is outside the specification, disassemble and repair oil pump.
5. After inspection, disconnect oil pressure gauge and oil pressure gauge adapter from hydraulic
circuit, Connect oil pump discharge connector and
high pressure hose. Add fluid and bleed air from hydraulic circuit thoroughly.
Service and Repair
Seat Cushion: Service and Repair
SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD
CAUTION:
- Front passenger seat is equipped with Occupant Classification System sensor and control
module. Do not disassemble front passenger seat cushion assembly or remove trim as this will
affect the Occupant Classification System calibration.
- Always replace passenger seat cushion as an assembly.
- When removed, the passenger seat cushion must always be placed pan side UP to prevent
damage.
- During installation, the wire harness clips must be installed in the holes they were originally in. Do
not add additional clips.
- The Occupant Classification System control module can only be replaced as part of the seat
cushion assembly.
NOTE: If the vehicle has been involved in a collision the seat must be inspected for damage. Refer
to "COLLISION DIAGNOSIS".
1. Remove the power seat switch knobs and power seat switch escutcheon (or recline knobs on
manual seat).
2. Remove the front seat cushion finisher (inner). 3. Remove the power seat switch screws (or lift
knobs on manual seats).
4. Remove four bolts and the seat cushion assembly. 5. Remove the retainer on the seat cushion
frame, then remove the harness connector for the seat heater. 6. On the drivers seat only, after
removing the seat cushion trim and pad, remove the hog rings to separate the trim cover from the
pad and seat
cushion heater unit.
Page 6946
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 870
Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Locations
Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 1461
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 6566
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 11043
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 3761
Body Control Module: Programming and Relearning
Configuration
DESCRIPTION
CONFIGURATION has two functions as follows:
- READ CONFIGURATION is the function to confirm vehicle configuration of current BCM.
- WRITE CONFIGURATION is the function to write vehicle configuration on BCM.
CAUTION: When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-II.
- Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order.
- If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur.
- Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See:
Computers and Control Systems/Data Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Schematic
Page 5340
Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Data Link Connector Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
BCM Circuit Inspection
Page 9606
Diagnostic Procedure For Mode Door Motor (Steps 15 - 18)
Page 10397
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 10626
Side Air Bag: Service and Repair
SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
- Do not attempt to repair or replace damaged direct-connect SRS component connectors. If a
direct-connect harness connector is damaged, the harness must be replaced.
- Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
- When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
1. Remove headlining. 2. Disconnect side curtain air bag module connector.
- For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to "Direct-connect SRS
Component Connectors".
3. Remove the bolts in order starting at the front or rear, and remove the side curtain air bag
module.
CAUTION: When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
- Do not insert any foreign objects (screwdriver, etc.) into air bag module or harness connectors.
- Do not disassemble air bag module.
- Do not expose the air bag module to temperatures exceeding 90 degree C (194 degree F).
- Replace side curtain air bag module if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
- Do not allow oil, grease or water to come in contact with the air bag module.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
1. Side curtain airbag module connector
- For removal/installation of the direct-connect SRS connectors, refer to "Direct-connect SRS
Component Connectors".
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Oil: Capacity Specifications
Lubricant Capacity Total in System
............................................................................................................................................................
200 ml (6.8 US fl oz, 7.0 Imp fl oz)
Page 6165
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 9352
Page 3715
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 10835
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 3794
12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install.
13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides.
14. Reinstall the IPDM cover.
15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first.
16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset
their ADP settings (ADP memory).
Page 1173
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 7502
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 1878
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12384
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 2)
Service and Repair
Vanity Lamp: Service and Repair
VANITY MIRROR LAMP
Removal
The vanity mirror lamp is replaced as part of the sunvisor assembly.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Bulb Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Using a suitable tool (A), release the tabs and remove the vanity mirror lamp lens (1). 3. Release
one side of the bulb (2) from the tab, then pull straight out to remove.
Vanity mirror lamp bulb: 12 V - 1.8 W
CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around tool to protect the housing and lens.
Page 8400
Page 8576
Page 14290
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8344
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 3353
NOTE:
^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB.
Disclaimer
Page 13953
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 133
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 3521
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 775
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 6903
8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM.
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 ->
3), and then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component
Parts)/Components
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with
terminal clips.
Page 2405
Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (King
Cab) (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 1815
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 9062
44. Harness should now be completely loose-remove it from the vehicle.
NOTE:
The vehicle you are working on may have a differential lock control unit (not shown) mounted near
the sonar control unit.
45. Install the new harness in reverse order. Make sure of the following:
^ All harness mounting clips are installed in the correct locations.
^ Seat, seat belt, and parking brake pedal bolts are tightened to correct torque:
IMPORTANT:
^ During installation of the new harness you will find some connectors taped to the harness as
shown in the figure below.
^ Some of the connectors will be for options that the vehicle you are working on does not have.
Page 14395
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage
Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision
Damage
Classification: FA10-006
Reference: NTB10-126
Date: October 21, 2010
WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight
indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise.
NOTE:
Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a
warrantable repair
If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension
damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows:
1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle.
2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands.
3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise).
4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one.
Page 4973
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 1745
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 3747
BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic (Part 2)
Page 6163
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 14248
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 6718
Page 11917
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 569
Page 11368
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 2278
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 9533
Wheel Bearing: Fluid Type Specifications
NLGI No. 2 Multi Purpose Grease (Lithium Soap Base)
Page 5343
Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Steering Angle Sensor Circuit Inspection
Front Aie Control Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Page 8102
NOTE:
This process will take from 4 to 5 minutes.
CAUTION:
You must leave the vehicle and the CONSULT-II unit "undisturbed" (don't touch) until
reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If the CONSULT-II screen gives you an error message "Unmatch of Vehicle Data":
^ You tried to reprogram with incorrect reprogramming data, or
^ You are trying to reprogram with the same file that is already in the ABS/VDC control unit.
For your reference, the old and new ABS/VDC Control Unit part numbers for vehicles equipped
with VDC are listed below.
ABS/VDC CONTROL UNIT PART NUMBERS
6. When VDC Reprogramming is complete:
Page 4545
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 13002
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 131
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch)
Check (King Cab)
Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch)
Check (King Cab)
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 9753
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 4138
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 1651
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4013
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 1808
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 11058
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 13483
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 2454
SPECIAL TOOLS
Page 13521
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT
DTC's Set
Classification: EM06-005a
Reference: NTB06-079a
Date: January 24, 2008
DTC FOR VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL FUNCTION
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been expanded. No other
changes have been made. Please discard any other copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1996 - 2009 with Variable Valve Timing
APPLIED ENGINES: VQ35; QR25; QG1B; GA16; VQ40; VK56; MR18; MR20
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The MIL is on with any of the following DTCs stored:
^ P0011, P0014, P0021, P0024, P1110, P1135,
NOTE:
The engine may also have Camshaft Sprocket rattle noise and/or other engine noise.
ACTION
Do Not replace the variable valve timing Solenoid Valve or the Sprocket(s) without performing the
complete diagnostics indicated in the EC section of the Service Manual.
The first steps in the complete diagnostic are to make sure the:
^ Engine oil is at the operating level; add oil if needed. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil level
diagnoses if needed.
^ Oil pressure is normal when measured with a gauge at the pressure switch port. Refer to the
Service Manual for low oil pressure diagnoses if needed.
Disclaimer
Page 10488
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 4658
Page 8466
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 8562
Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation
Page 4338
Ignition Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 6177
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 8354
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 8355
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 14068
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Capacity Specifications
Engine Oil: Capacity Specifications
Oil Capacity Drain and refill (Approximate) With oil filter change
.......................................................................................................................................................... 6
1/2 qt. (5 1/2 Imp qts., 6.2 L) Without oil filter change
...................................................................................................................................................... 6
1/4 qt. (5 1/4 Imp qts., 5.9 L)
Page 743
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 4811
Page 6423
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 10831
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 14227
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 6952
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 6684
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM.
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 ->
3), and then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with
terminal clips.
Page 7798
2. Check the CONSULT-II's "Charger Input" reading (see Figure 15).
NOTE:
^ "Battery Voltage" is the voltage level of CONSULT-II's battery.
^ "Charger Input" is the voltage level of the vehicle's battery. (It MUST be above 12 volts.)
3. As mentioned, the "Charger Input" reading MUST be above 12 volts (see Figure 15).
^ A reading above 12 volts confirms;
a. The DLC-II is properly connected to the vehicle,
b. The vehicle battery voltage is sufficient for ABS/VDC reprogramming, and
c. CONSULT-II has a sufficient power supply to perform ABS/VDC reprogramming.
^ If the vehicle's battery voltage ("Charger Input") is below 12 volts, one or more of the following
may be the cause:
a. The battery charger you hooked up in section 1 is not charging the battery (poor connection or it
is not working).
b. The DLC-II does not have a good connection to the vehicle (not straight).
c. The DLC-II cable may have a malfunction (damaged wire or pins).
d. The CONSULT-II Converter (J44200-50 / black box) is not working correctly (see Figure 11).
CAUTION:
^ Do not attempt ABS/VDC reprogramming if the vehicle's battery voltage is below 12 volts.
^ Permanent ABSNDC damage can occur if the vehicle battery does not maintain the minimum
voltage during ABS/VDC reprogramming.
^ If "Charger Input" is above 12 volts, power from the vehicle battery will keep CONSULT-II's power
supply at the correct level during reprogramming (see Figure 15).
4. Continue with Section 4.
Section 4
Section 4: Perform ABSNDC Control Unit Reprogramming
1. Press [BACK] two times.
Service and Repair
Maintenance Required Lamp/Indicator: Service and Repair
Control Panel Buttons (if so equipped)
1. Press the "TRIP" button and the following modes will display:
Warning Messages (if any) Trip 1 Trip 2 Fuel Economy Maintenance OFF
2. Choose Maintenance on the display by using the joystick and push "ENTER"
Reset Procedure
Use the reset procedure in the above image.
Page 3631
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 5024
System Diagram
- Type 7
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1
Page 2153
Page 9934
Figure D-6
- Wrap protector 2 around protector 1 and fold the fingers back as shown.
Figure D-7
5. Slide protector 2 against the fan motor and press / stick the fingers to the fan motor as shown.
- Make sure to press and smooth the fingers so they are completely stuck to the fan motor.
Figure D-8
6. Remove the adhesive backing from Protector 3 and stick it to the fan motor as shown.
Page 13413
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9718
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 14171
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 11912
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 3920
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 5215
Case 4
Page 8309
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 12158
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 12588
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 9742
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 5335
Case 16
Page 317
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 1084
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 5292
Case 9
Page 8823
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 10
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 9795
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR
SYMPTOM: Blower motor operation is malfunctioning.
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Front Blower Motor Relay
Check continuity between terminals 3 and 5 by supplying 12 volts and ground to coil side terminals
of relay.
Front Blower Motor
Confirm smooth rotation of the blower motor.
- Ensure that there are no foreign particles inside the blower unit.
- Apply 12 volts to terminal 2 and ground to terminal 1 and verify that the motor operates freely and
quietly.
Page 9702
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 7814
^ After you select "ECU Reprog. Data", the "ECU Reprogramming Data" screen will be displayed
(see Figure 5).
NOTE
^ This is a special ABS/VDC reprogram that uses an ID Code FOR THIS INCIDENT ONLY!
^ Step 7 (below) is different from the typical ECU Reprogramming procedure.
7. Select the new ABS/VDC Control Unit data as follows:
a. Click on the Keypad button (see Figure 5).
Page 3622
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System
- TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Page 3504
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 1416
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 4593
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 12550
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 10321
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 1086
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 5673
Engine Control Module: Connector Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 172
^ After you select "ECU Reprog. Data", the "ECU Reprogramming Data" screen will be displayed
(see Figure 5).
NOTE
^ This is a special ABS/VDC reprogram that uses an ID Code FOR THIS INCIDENT ONLY!
^ Step 7 (below) is different from the typical ECU Reprogramming procedure.
7. Select the new ABS/VDC Control Unit data as follows:
a. Click on the Keypad button (see Figure 5).
Page 12514
Key Warning Chime And Light Warning Chime Do Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does
Operate) (Step 3)
All Warning Chimes Do Not Operate
Page 5875
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb
Page 13346
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Step 3)
Page 745
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 3875
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 362
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 12477
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 5120
Case 3
Page 9169
Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process.
6. Begin the alignment procedure.
^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment.
^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications.
If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips:
^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body.
IMPORTANT:
After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position.
When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips:
Page 12731
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Sunroof
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12149
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 6978
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 9771
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 12965
7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the
fuel feed hose.
Disconnect the quick connector as follows: Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube.
- If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to
move. Then disconnect them by pulling.
CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist
the quick connector more than necessary.
- Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector.
- Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube.
- Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube.
- Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection.
- Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin
tube or the retainer is replaced.
- When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a
new one (white colored retainer).
Page 10588
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 7714
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 12412
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 6152
Optional Splice
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Reference: NTB10-037A
Date: May 19, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE
INACCURACY
This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010
NHTSA #: 10V-074
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan
vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel
gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel
tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary
Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts
or labor.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 13967
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 13175
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 1169
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 764
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 3028
^ Tighten the camshaft bracket bolt to the specified torque.
^ Measure the inner diameter of the camshaft bracket. Standard: 26.000 - 26.021 mm (1.0236 1.0244 inch) Calculation of Camshaft Journal Clearance (Journal clearance) = (camshaft bracket
inner diameter) - (camshaft journal diameter) Standard: 0.030 - 0.068 mm (0.0012 - 0.0027 inch)
^ If measurement is not within specification, replace either or both camshaft and cylinder head.
NOTE: The inner diameter of the camshaft bracket is manufactured together with the cylinder
head. Replace the whole cylinder head as an assembly.
Camshaft End Play
^ Install dial gauge in the thrust direction on the front end of the camshaft. Measure the end play
when the camshaft is moved forward/backward (in direction to axis). Standard: 0.115 - 0.188 mm
(0.0045 - 0.0074 inch)
^ If measurement is out of the specified range, replace the camshaft and measure again.
^ If measurement is still out of the specified range, replace the cylinder head.
^ Measure the following parts if end play is outside the specified value. Dimension "A" for camshaft No. 1 journal Standard: 30.500 - 30.548 mm (1.2008 - 1.2027 inch)
- Dimension "B" for cylinder head No. 1 journal Standard: 30.360 - 30.385 mm (1.1953 - 1.1963
inch)
^ If measurements are not within specification, replace the camshaft and/or cylinder head.
Camshaft Sprocket Runout
Page 8330
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 9572
Page 13327
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 129
Page 5582
b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a).
c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed.
^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer.
d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2.
2. Record the radio station presets:
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
NOTE:
Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding.
Locations
Memory Positioning Module: Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 8449
Fuse: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 14081
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Service and Repair
Oil Cooler: Service and Repair
OIL COOLER
WARNING: Be careful not to burn yourself, as the engine oil and engine coolant are hot.
REMOVAL
1. Remove engine front undercover using power tool. 2. Disconnect water hoses, pinching hoses
near oil cooler to prevent engine coolant from spilling.
CAUTION: Do not spill engine coolant on the drive belt.
3. Remove oil filter.
CAUTION: Do not spill engine oil on the drive belts.
4. Remove connector bolt, and remove oil cooler.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Oil Cooler Check oil cooler for cracks. Check oil cooler for clogging by blowing compressed air
through engine coolant inlet. If necessary, replace oil cooler assembly.
Relief Valve Inspect relief valve for movement, cracks and breaks by pushing the ball. If
replacement is necessary, remove the valve by prying it out using a suitable tool. Install a new
valve in place by tapping it.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal, paying attention to the following:
Page 5926
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9402
WARNING:
This repair MUST be done with the vehicle's full weight on the suspension.
EITHER:
Place the vehicle on a drive-on hoist or alignment rack to lift the vehicle.
OR
Leave all of the vehicle's weight on all four (4) tires, while parked (do not lift the vehicle).
DO NOT lift the vehicle in any amount. The suspension must support all of the vehicle's weight
during the whole repair procedure or the bushing will be under load and difficult to remove.
1. With the vehicle positioned as stated above, put the shift selector in "P" (PARK) position.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Remove the bolt and bushing from the windup clip (clip).
4. Check the condition of the bolt's and clip's threads, and the bushing.
^ If both the bushing and bolt's threads are okay, reuse them.
^ If the bushing and / or bolt's threads are damaged, replace with all parts in the "Spring Assembly
Kit".
^ If the clip's threads are damaged, replace the leaf spring assembly.
5. Install the bolt (and bushing) with Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE or
equivalent thread locking material applied to the threads.
Torque bolt to 32 N.m (3.2 kg-m, 23 ft-lb).
Page 14119
After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch.
1. Raise the glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the
glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the
original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position.
Page 13156
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 3582
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Power Distribution Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
CONSULT-II Basic Operation
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT- II CONVERTER to the data
link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
- If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed refer to "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit".
Recall R0616 - Rear Door Wiring Harness
Technical Service Bulletin # 07-009 Date: 070216
Recall R0616 - Rear Door Wiring Harness
RECALL CAMPAIGN BULLETIN
Reference: NTBO7-009
Date: February 16, 2007
VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 TITAN REAR DOOR HARNESS
CAMPAIGN I.D. # R0616
NHTSA # : 06V-459
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) King Cab only
APPLIED VINs: 2004: 1N6*A06A*4N 500006 - 593463 1N6*A06B*4N 500000 - 593471
2005: 1N6*A06A*5N 500002 - 580219 1N6*A06B*5N 500007 - 580226
2006: 1N6*A06A*6N 500003 - 576810 1N6*A06B*6N 500000 - 576805
NOTE:
Use Service Comm to determine campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan has determined that on some 2004 - 2006 model year Titan King Cab vehicles, a defect
that relates to motor vehicle safety exists.
In some affected vehicles, there is the possibility that the wires in the harness routed through the
rear doors and into the body on each side of the vehicle may break due to over bending of the
harness as the doors are opened and closed. The wires in the harness control various systems
including the seat belt pretensioners, the passenger side seat belt tension sensor, and rear audio
speakers.
If the wire for the seat belt pretensioners breaks and makes contact with a wire for the speaker,
there is a possibility that the pretensioner may deploy and tighten the seat belt. If this happens
when the belt is retracted, it will not be possible to use the seat belt. If one of the wires for the seat
belt tension sensor breaks inside the passenger side harness, the passenger side front air bag will
not deploy as designed in a frontal crash. Nissan is conducting a Voluntary Recall Campaign to
inspect the wire harness cover for damage and, if necessary, a new wiring harness with a new type
cover will be installed and rerouted.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R0616 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED
The number of vehicles potentially affected is approximately 96,500
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealers responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and
Automatic Air Conditioner
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner
Contaminated Refrigerant
Contaminated Refrigerant
If a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in a vehicle, your options are:
- Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated
refrigerant into the atmosphere.
- Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage your service equipment and
refrigerant supply.
- Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the
contamination may have occurred.
- If you choose to perform the repair, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and
containers. Do not recover contaminated refrigerant into your existing service equipment. If your
facility does not have dedicated recovery equipment, you may contact a local refrigerant product
retailer for available service. This refrigerant must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and
local regulations. In addition, replacement of all refrigerant system components on the vehicle is
recommended.
- If the vehicle is within the warranty period, the air conditioner warranty is void. Please contact
NISSAN Customer Affairs for further assistance.
HFC-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure
REFRIGERANT LINES
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure
SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Discharging Refrigerant
WARNING: Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose
and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified service
equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or SAE
J2201 HFC-134a (R-134a) recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate
the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained
from the refrigerant and oil manufacturers.
Page 5189
Case 11
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay
Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement
Reference: NTB10-137B
Date: December 22, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006
FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY
This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have
been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068
NHTSA#: 10V-517
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40)
2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM
relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles,
oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including
the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 8665
vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which
are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil
penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to
new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory
before they are retailed.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS
REPAIR OVERVIEW
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Inspection Procedure 1: Seat Belt Retractors
Inspection Procedure 2: Air Bag Light / Codes
Inspection Procedure 3: Harness Damage
Install Update Kit: Replace Vinyl Tube with Corrugated Tube
Harness Replacement: Includes seat belt replacement, if needed.
Floor and Rear Door: Left and/or right side
Rear Cabin Wall Harness Branch: Left side only
High Mount Stop Lamp Harness Branch: Right side only
Side Curtain Air Bag Harness Branch: Right side only
PARTS INFORMATION
NOTE:
Order the body harness indicated in the electronic parts catalog. Your order will be automatically
superseded to the appropriate campaign service harness part number. As noted in steps 45 and 67
campaign service harnesses have some connectors taped to the harness. Those connectors may
or may not be utilized in the repair depending upon the optional equipment on the vehicle being
serviced.
Page 4081
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 4 - 7)
Page 823
Engine Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
EC-MAIN-01
Diagram Information and Instructions
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 10706
5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5).
^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit.
6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure
6A.
NOTE:
^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle.
^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle.
Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8:
^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned.
^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring.
^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no
wrinkles or ridges are present.
^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D"
ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece.
7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B).
Page 13078
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 1938
Page 1750
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 7450
9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11054
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 6808
Components
REMOVAL
1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Disconnect transfer
control device harness connector. 3. Remove breather hose from transfer control device.
Page 6313
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 13466
Diagnostic Procedure For Optical Sensor (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 6145
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 5054
Inspection Between Driver Seat Control Unit And Data Link Connector Circuit (Step 3)
Inspection Between Data Link Connector And ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control Unit) Circuit
(Steps 1 - 2)
Page 879
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 10994
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 7781
Repair Flow Chart
Page 12376
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 699
12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install.
13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides.
14. Reinstall the IPDM cover.
15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first.
16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset
their ADP settings (ADP memory).
Page 10306
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 235
CAUTION: Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Page 10823
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 5908
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
ABLS/ABS
Traction Control Module: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. 3. Drain the brake
fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit).
CAUTION: ^
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts
and brake tubes from being damaged.
^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench. Tighten brake tubes to specification
when installing.
^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with
new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system.
Page 12639
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3723
Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 5757
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of
the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is
disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2
seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and
wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 4504
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 11017
DVD Player: Description and Operation
DVD ENTERTAINMENT SYSTEM
System Description
Refer to Owner's Manual for DVD entertainment system operating instructions.
Power is supplied at all times
- through 20 A fuse (No. 31, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
- to DVD player terminal 16.
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON position, power is supplied
- through 10 A fuse [No. 4, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
- to DVD player terminal 15.
Power is also supplied
- from DVD player terminals 31 and 32
- to video monitor terminals 11 and 12.
Ground is supplied
- to DVD player terminal 22
- through body grounds M57, M61 and M79.
Audio signals are supplied
- through DVD player terminals 1, 2, 3 and 4
- to audio unit terminals 34, 35, 36 and 37.
Video signals are supplied
- through DVD player terminals 23, 24, 28 and 29
- to video monitor terminals 5, 6, 7 and 8.
Page 3071
CYLINDER BLOCK
CYLINDER BLOCK
Page 12495
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Service and Repair
Antenna, Radio: Service and Repair
SATELLITE RADIO ANTENNA
Removal
1. Lower headliner.
2. Disconnect satellite radio antenna connector.
3. Remove satellite radio antenna nut.
4. Remove satellite radio antenna.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 11219
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 13125
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 6920
Optional Splice
Page 11746
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Door Lock System
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 10849
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1721
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 1518
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 53
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 135
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 938
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 4987
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 3626
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 5561
Page 4578
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 12609
Cruise Control Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
ASCD INDICATOR
Component Description
ASCD indicator lamp illuminates to indicate ASCD operation status. Lamp has two indicators,
CRUISE and SET, and is integrated in combination meter.
CRUISE indicator illuminates when MAIN switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON to indicate
that ASCD system is ready for operation.
SET indicator illuminates when following conditions are met.
- CRUISE indicator is illuminated.
- SET/COAST switch on ASCD steering switch is turned ON while vehicle speed is within the range
of ASCD setting.
SET indicator remains lit during ASCD control. Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
(ASCD)" for the ASCD function. See: Cruise Control/Description and Operation
Page 13382
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Service and Repair
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair
LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove steering column cover. 2. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch
toward driver door and disconnect from the base.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1275
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 3)
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 4)
Page 14225
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 12201
Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 5287
Case 4
Page 1625
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 7066
Valve Body: Service and Repair
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
COMPONENTS
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect
A/T assembly harness connector.
Page 5234
Case 6
Page 4838
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 3479
Diagnostic Procedure For Water Valve (Steps 1 - 4)
Page 13641
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 13671
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 10996
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 7626
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 13968
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 7052
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
harness.
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Reference: NTB10-037A
Date: May 19, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE
INACCURACY
This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010
NHTSA #: 10V-074
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan
vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel
gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel
tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary
Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts
or labor.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Brakes - Brake/ABS Lamp ON/Pedal Vibration/DTC C1179
Technical Service Bulletin # 06-040 Date: 060512
Brakes - Brake/ABS Lamp ON/Pedal Vibration/DTC C1179
Classification: BR06-007
Reference: NTB06-040
Date: May 12, 2006
2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; ABS AND/OR BRAKE
WARNING LIGHT ON WITH DTC C1179
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) equipped with VDC 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60)
equipped with VDC
IF YOU CONFIRM
A customer reports:
^ The brake warning light is or was ON, and/or
^ The ABS warning light is or was ON, and/or
^ There is or was vibration* in the brake pedal while braking.
* This vibration is the rapid consistent-speed pedal pulsation that is felt when the ABS is activated.
ACTIONS
^ Make sure this bulletin applies (see Part 1 of the Service Procedure). If this bulletin does not
apply, refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding shown.
Page 1315
Lifting Sensor (Front) Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Lifting Sensor (Front) Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000
Stored
Classification: EC06-001A
Reference: NTB06-009A
Date: March 31, 2006
MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information
sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of
this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
The MIL is "ON" with
^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR
^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit,
and
There are no drivability incidents.
DETERMINE IF
This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure.
ACTIONS
If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections:
^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections.
^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection.
^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left
side instrument stay assembly.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 8782
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 13095
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 9629
Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Door Motor (Steps 4 - 7)
Page 12552
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 8239
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 13643
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 1872
Combination Switch: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Combination Switch Reading Function
Combination Switch Reading Function
For details, refer to BCS-3, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION. See: Body and
Frame/Body Control Systems/Body Control Module/Description and Operation
Data Monitor
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT
DIAG MODE" screen.
3. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM"
screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be
monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the signals will be
monitored.
6. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To
stop recording, touch "STOP".
Display Item List - Data Monitor
Display Item List
Page 12238
19. Install the seat into the body. Torque the bolts to 45 Nm (4.6 Kg-m, 33 ft-lb).
20. Re-connect the battery cables.
21. Confirm OCS operation. See the applicable Electronic Service Manual for details.
22. Re-program the radio presets.
23. Re-initialize the Automatic Sunroof as applicable. See the applicable Owner's Manual for
details.
Page 6662
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 2361
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 13263
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 10048
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 415
IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection
Page 4849
a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section
EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits).
NOTE:
This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different.
b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify
the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check.
C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the
terminal eyelet(s).
d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the
connections.
^ Both sides of the eyelet
^ Eyelet mounting surface
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Nut/bolt threads.
Page 1598
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 3234
WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the engine oil when the engine is
hot.
1. Remove the engine. 2. Remove the oil pan (lower) using the following steps.
a. Remove the oil pan (lower) bolts using power tool.
b. Insert Tool between the lower oil pan and the upper oil pan.
Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
^ Do not insert a screwdriver, this will damage the mating surfaces.
c. Slide (1) the Tool by tapping (2) its side with a hammer to remove the lower oil pan from the
upper oil pan.
3. Remove the oil strainer from the oil pan (upper). 4. Remove the oil pan (upper) using the
following steps.
a. Remove the oil pan (upper) bolts a shown.
b. Remove the oil pan (upper) from the cylinder block by prying it at the points shown, using
suitable tool.
Page 13351
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 3)
Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 6359
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
TP SENSOR
Component Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The
throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which
transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In
addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the
voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from
these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
Page 14406
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 13564
Combination Switch Inspection (Step 4)
Page 4782
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 12328
NOTE:
The above illustration is only an example of a body seam seal leak. Your vehicle may have a leak
in a different location, and it may have more than one leak.
3. Seal water leak (body seam) with seam sealer:
^ Use 3M(TM) Fast n Firm(TM) Seam Sealer-part number 08505-or equivalent.
^ Follow product application instructions.
4. Allow sealer to cure and then recheck for leaks.
^ Make sure the leak you fixed is sealed (not leaking).
^ Make sure there are no other leaks; it's possible to have more than one leak.
Disclaimer
Page 6153
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 637
Page 8993
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
System Description
- IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse
block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM
E/R control circuits.
- IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication
control, etc.
- It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines.
CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R
1. Lamp control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following
lamps: Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
- Parking lamps
- Tail and license lamps
- Front fog lamps
2. Wiper control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers.
3. Heated mirror relay control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the heated mirror
relay.
4. A/C compressor control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C
compressor (magnetic clutch).
5. Starter control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the starter relay.
6. Cooling fan control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan
relays.
7. Horn control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay.
CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL
With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN
L-line, CAN H-line), it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum
wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only.
1. Fail-safe control
- When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe
control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control.
- Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as shown in the table.
IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL
In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition.
1. CAN communication status
- CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.
- Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.
Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 12064
Lifting Motor (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Step 4)
Page 696
b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a).
c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed.
^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer.
d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2.
2. Record the radio station presets:
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
NOTE:
Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding.
Page 10400
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 11863
WARNING:
This repair MUST be done with the vehicle's full weight on the suspension.
EITHER:
Place the vehicle on a drive-on hoist or alignment rack to lift the vehicle.
OR
Leave all of the vehicle's weight on all four (4) tires, while parked (do not lift the vehicle).
DO NOT lift the vehicle in any amount. The suspension must support all of the vehicle's weight
during the whole repair procedure or the bushing will be under load and difficult to remove.
1. With the vehicle positioned as stated above, put the shift selector in "P" (PARK) position.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Remove the bolt and bushing from the windup clip (clip).
4. Check the condition of the bolt's and clip's threads, and the bushing.
^ If both the bushing and bolt's threads are okay, reuse them.
^ If the bushing and / or bolt's threads are damaged, replace with all parts in the "Spring Assembly
Kit".
^ If the clip's threads are damaged, replace the leaf spring assembly.
5. Install the bolt (and bushing) with Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE or
equivalent thread locking material applied to the threads.
Torque bolt to 32 N.m (3.2 kg-m, 23 ft-lb).
Page 7848
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Page 13322
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13319
Door Switch: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10601
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 4791
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 9945
Figure E-5
5. Take the wire you removed from connector E120 and put it into the Maxi Fuse connector. Make
sure to put it in the correct slot as shown in Figure
E-5.
6. Insert the wire from the Maxi Fuse into the slot of connector E120 (see Figure E-5).
NOTE: -
The terminals will not snap in upside down.
- If the terminal won't snap-in, you are trying to put it in upside down; turn it over.
7. Reconnect connector E120.
8. Connect the Maxi Fuse connector.
Page 5762
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MAF SENSOR
Component Description
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by
measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows
around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to the hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of
the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
Page 5855
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 12994
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature
Sensor 2
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T
Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
COMPONENTS
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect
A/T assembly harness connector.
Page 3249
- Bleed air from passages in lines and hoses such as in cooling system.
- After cooling down the engine again check oil/fluid levels including engine oil and engine coolant.
Refill to specified level if necessary.
Page 8971
Mechanical Specifications
Wheel Bearing
Page 907
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
ABS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 10826
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 4085
ECM Inspection Table Part 1
Page 4160
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2930
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 1362
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor.
2. Install axle shaft assembly.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 10645
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5372
NOTES:
^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply.
^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product
Program, Website order via link on dealer portal.
^ WD-40 is available from various local sources.
Removal Tool
^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to
accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and
strip the sensor.
^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box
end wrench or 6-point deep well socket.
1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice.
2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the
threads.
Perform If Throttle Actuator Is Disconnected
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair Perform If Throttle Actuator Is
Disconnected
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the
throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each
time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition
switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Page 7413
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8757
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 12356
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 1381
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 7880
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 4871
Engine Control Module: Connector Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2237
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 2823
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 5725
Engine Control Module: Description and Operation
ECM POWER SUPPLY
Component Description
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is turned OFF for the ECM
memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the
idle air volume learning value memory, etc.
ECM
Component Description
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power
supply. The ECM controls the engine.
Page 4867
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 8519
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 7707
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 8907
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 2308
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000
Stored
Classification: EC06-001A
Reference: NTB06-009A
Date: March 31, 2006
MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information
sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of
this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
The MIL is "ON" with
^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR
^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit,
and
There are no drivability incidents.
DETERMINE IF
This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure.
ACTIONS
If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections:
^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections.
^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection.
^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left
side instrument stay assembly.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 12723
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 5005
Information Bus: Electrical Diagrams
CAN Communication Schematic
LAN-CAN
Page 10571
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 7124
and Installation Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD with ELD). See: Service and Repair/Rear
Differential (With Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation
FILLING
1. Remove the filler plug. Fill with new specified gear oil until the gear oil level reaches the
specified limit near the filler plug mounting hole as
shown. Oil grade and capacity: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". See: Maintenance/Fluids
2. After refilling the gear oil, check the gear oil level as shown. Apply sealant to the filler plug. Install
the filler plug on the final drive assembly and
tighten to specification. ^
Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS" (FFD). Refer to
"Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD). See: Service and Repair/Rear Differential (Without
Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD with ELD).
See: Service and Repair/Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation
Page 9734
5. Pull the blower motor branch from the harness until you see the splice.
6. Attach the blower motor connector to the blower motor; make sure it will reach.
7. Re-wrap the harness with vinyl tape.
Page 6858
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 13340
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 12635
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1056
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 11376
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 10506
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 10593
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 4054
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 10856
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Locations
Cruise Control Switch: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 5711
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Adjustments
Windshield Washer Spray Nozzle: Adjustments
Washer Nozzle Adjustment
- This vehicle is equipped with non-adjustable washer nozzles.
- If not satisfied with washer fluid spray coverage, confirm that the washer nozzle is installed
correctly.
- If the washer nozzle is installed correctly, and the washer fluid spray coverage is not satisfactory,
replace washer nozzle.
Page 4162
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from air
cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4.
Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower)
^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type)
NOTE: ^
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals.
^ Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance.
Page 7189
7. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on axle housing and install side bearing
caps on axle housing without tightening to
specification.
CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters.
8. Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool.
Tool number: - (C-4164)
9. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion.
10. Check total preload. 11. Check tooth contact.
12. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent.
CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or
foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces.
13. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts with the specified torque.
Refer to "COMPONENTS". 14. Install both RH and LH axle shafts. 15. Install propeller shaft. 16.
Refill rear final drive oil.
Page 638
Page 12997
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 2225
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 13149
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 12655
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 11649
5. Inspect nylon insert for wear or damage.
^ Replace the insert if any wear or damage is found.
6. Apply Permatex(R) Threadlocker Blue or equivalent to the threads on the bolt.
7. Reinstall insert, bolt and armrest assembly in reverse order of removal.
^ Bolt torque: 20 Nm (2 kg-m, 15 lb-ft)
Page 11915
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 9042
8. Once the vinyl tube is cut off, put vinyl tape on the harness in two spots as shown in Figure B4.
9. Install the corrugated tube over the harness.
^ The corrugated tube will replace the vinyl tube that you cut off. Install the corrugated tube in the
direction shown in Figure B5.
Page 12259
Lifting Switch (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Step 3)
Specifications
Spark Plug: Specifications
SPARK PLUG
Standard type ......................................................................................................................................
............................................................... PLFR5A-11 Hot type ...........................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
PLFR4A-11 Cold type ..........................................................................................................................
................................................................................. PLFR6A-11
Gap ......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................1.1 mm (0.043 in.)
Torque .................................................................................................................................................
.............................. 24.5 Nm (2.5 kgf-cm, 18 ft. lbs.)
Page 3295
b. Select the one most visible notch of the four on the bolt flange. Corresponding to the selected
notch, put a alignment mark (such as paint) on
the crankshaft pulley. Crankshaft pulley bolt torque Step 1: 93.1 Nm (9.5 kg-m, 69 ft. lbs.) Step 2:
additional 90° (angle tightening)
14. Rotate the crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to
check for parts interference. 15. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse of order
of removal.
Page 11354
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 4342
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 4565
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 2846
Page 1605
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 6318
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 7748
1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "Components". See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and
Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
4. Securely fasten A/T temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clip. 5. Install oil pan to
transmission case. 6. Connect the negative battery terminal
CAUTION: After completing installation, check for A/T fluid leakage and fluid level.
Page 1966
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 9658
Diagnostic Procedure For Defroster Door Motor (Steps 10 - 12)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR
Page 12643
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 5549
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 10415
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 1628
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 6)
Page 5678
Optional Splice
Page 8457
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 9973
If the fan motor is No Good:
a. Replace the Condenser Fan Motor Assembly - Procedure C.
b. Install the Max Fuse - Procedure E.
c. Confirm Condenser Fan Motor operation - Procedure F.
Procedure C - Remove and Install or Replace the Condenser Fan Assembly
1. Write down the radio station presets.
2. Turn the ignition OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable.
- Wait at least 3 minutes before working with any airbag components.
3. Remove the front grill.
Figure C-1
a. Use a long screwdriver to twist and release 7 clips shown in Figure C-1.
Page 11943
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 8787
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 11189
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 4901
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 5065
Case 5
Page 4124
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 12252
Reclining Switch Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 4735
5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box.
6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3.
NOTE:
There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is
easily accessible.
7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3).
8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4).
Page 6243
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5307
Case 7
Page 4137
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 7948
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
BRAKE JUDDER
^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out.
Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not
parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see
Figure 1).
Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on
each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this
point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation
(see Figure 2).
^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake
pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering
wheel.
Vehicle Storage:
^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the
brake pads will rust.
^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface
will be different.
^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off.
Lug Nut Overtorque:
^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over
tightened, especially with an air impact
Page 10102
Control Module HVAC: Description and Operation Manual Air Conditioner
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Front Air Control
The front air control has a built-in microcomputer which processes information sent from various
sensors needed for air conditioner operation. The air mix door motor (front), mode door motor,
intake door motor, defroster door motor, blower motor and compressor are then controlled.
The front air control is unitized with control mechanisms. When the various switches and
temperature control dial are operated, data is input to the front air control.
Self-diagnostic functions are also built into the front air control to provide quick check of
malfunctions in the air conditioner system.
Page 4883
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 3558
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 414
active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is
normal.
Part 1
Part 2
- If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily
diagnosed using auto active test.
Page 3430
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 12366
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 14314
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 14217
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 2324
13. Connect revolution sensor connector.
14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips.
15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal
CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level.
Page 2320
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
Page 3832
Automatic Air Conditioner
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner
Low-Pressure Flexible Hose
Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible Hose
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine room cover using power tools. 2. Remove the engine air cleaner and air
ducts. 3. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
4. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to
it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
High-Pressure Flexible Hose
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine under cover. 2. Remove the engine air cleaner and air ducts. 3. Discharge
the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 4. Remove the high-pressure
flexible hose.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil
to it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
High-Pressure Pipe
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal and battery positive terminal. 2. Reposition the IPDM
E/R aside. 3. Remove the front right wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Rotation". 4. Position aside
the front floor insulator. 5. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service
Procedure". 6. Remove the low pressure pipe. 7. Remove the high-pressure pipe.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when
installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Low-Pressure Pipe
Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Pipe
Page 126
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 455
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9947
Medium Strength Thread-lock is available from the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product
Program.
Claims Information
Submit a CM line claim using the following claims coding:
Page 12139
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 4079
Engine Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
EC-MAIN-01
Page 184
* Headlights, defroster, A/C, audio (radio), video, cellular telephone, etc.
4. Press [START (Nissan BASED VHCL)].
5. In "SELF-DIAG RESULTS", check and erase any DTC(s) in the below noted vehicle systems:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST press "ERASE" and "OK" in all systems (shown below) whether a DTC is displayed or
not. This is required to complete the VDC reprogramming procedure, and it will make sure that all
DTC(s) are erased.
^ ENGINE
^ A/T
^ ABS
^ AIR BAG
^ ALL MODE AWD/4WD (if applicable)
^ DIFF LOCK (if applicable; 4WD Titan)
^ AIR LEVELIZER (if applicable)
6. After all DTC(s) are erased:
^ Turn the ignition switch OFF.
^ Disconnect CONSULT-II and the CAN Cable from the vehicle connector.
^ Disconnect the battery charger from the vehicle.
^ Start the engine and make sure it runs properly and there are NO warning lights illuminated in the
instrument panel.
7. Continue with Part 4.
Part 4
Part 4: Re-program the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card back to its original format so it can be
used for standard ECU reprogramming.
1. Remove the red/white diagnostic card from CONSULT-II and insert the 8 MB orange
Reprogramming card.
2. Go to the ASIST terminal.
3. Follow steps in Part 1 of this bulletin to download (transfer) data from ASIST to CONSULT-II.
^ Use ID Code 050602.
^ This will re-program the 8 MB (orange) card to its original format so it can be used for standard
ECU reprogramming.
END
Page 8067
^ Be careful not to damage brake booster stud bolt threads. If brake booster is tilted or inclined
during installation, dash panel may damage the threads.
^ Attach the check valve in the correct direction.
1. Remove engine room cover with power tool. 2. Remove engine air duct assembly. 3. Remove
brake piping from brake master cylinder. 4. Remove brake master cylinder. 5. Remove vacuum
hose from brake booster. 6. Disconnect active boost and delta stroke sensor harness connectors
from brake booster assembly. 7. Remove brake pedal attachment snap pin and clevis pin from
inside the vehicle. 8. Remove nuts on brake booster and brake pedal assembly. 9. Remove brake
booster assembly from dash panel.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL Output Rod Length Inspection
1. Using a handy vacuum pump, apply a vacuum of -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.69 inHg) to brake
booster. 2. Check output rod length.
Standard dimension when vacuum -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.69 inHg): 15.6 - 15.9 mm (0.614 0.626 inch)
INSTALLATION
1. Loosen lock nut to adjust input rod length so that the length "B" (in the figure) satisfies the
specified value.
Length "B": 151 mm (5.94 inch)
2. After adjusting "B", temporarily tighten lock nut and install booster assembly to the vehicle.
^ Install a gaskets and spacer block between booster assembly and the dash panel.
3. Connect brake pedal with clevis of input rod. 4. Install pedal bracket mounting nuts and tighten
them to the specified torque. 5. Install brake piping from brake master cylinder to ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit). 6. Connect active boost and delta stroke sensor harness connectors to
brake booster assembly. 7. Connect vacuum hose to brake booster. 8. Install master cylinder to
booster assembly. 9. Adjust the height and play of brake pedal.
10. Tighten lock nut of input rod to the specified torque. 11. Install engine air duct assembly. 12.
Install engine room cover. 13. Refill brake fluid and bleed air.
CAUTION: ^
Refill with new brake fluid.
^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
Page 6598
9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically.
Page 11503
2. Remove the door side grommet and the bolt (TORX T30) from the grommet hole.
Torx bolt 5.3 N.m (0.54 kg-m, 47 in-lb)
3. While pulling the outside handle, remove the door handle escutcheon.
4. While pulling the outside handle, slide it toward the rear of vehicle to remove.
5. Remove the front and rear gaskets. 6. Remove the inside handle screws.
Page 662
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 6713
Page 1185
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 2478
^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep.
7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and
adjustments.
NOTE:
If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not
necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster
and easier.
^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system.
If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a
centered steering wheel.
^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right.
This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall
mounted rack and pinion units.
IMPORTANT:
If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to
jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct.
After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment
8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order.
9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight
flat road.
Page 5495
Page 9708
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 1505
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 11132
Speaker: Service and Repair Rear Door Speaker
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
Removal
1. Remove rear door finisher.
2. Remove the three rear door speaker screws and remove rear door speaker.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 7021
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Interior - Passenger Power Seat Switch Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-039B Date: 100119
Interior - Passenger Power Seat Switch Replacement
Classification: EL07-038B
Reference: NTB08-039B
Date: January 19, 2010
2004-2010 TITAN AND ARMADA; PASSENGER SEAT SWITCH SERVICEABILITY
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been
revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Titan (A60) - Bucket Seats Only 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) Bucket Seats Only
IF YOU CONFIRM
The passenger side power seat switch needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
Refer to the Service Procedure to replace the switch.
WARNING:
^ This vehicle seat is equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) part of the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
^ In this Service Procedure you will be removing and re-installing the outboard (switch side) J-clip
of the seat bottom cover.
^ Only the outboard J-clip should be removed. Removal of any other J-Clips may affect OCS
performance.
^ When re-installing the outboard J-Clip, make sure the J-Clip is securely attached. A loose J-Clip
may affect OCS performance.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12691
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
Page 7410
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 14320
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 5884
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
TP SENSOR
Component Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The
throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which
transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In
addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the
voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from
these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 2811
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 9912
Figure B-1
- If the wires are damaged (cracked or missing insulation), STOP; no more testing is needed. Go to
Procedure C and replace the condenser fan assembly.
2. Disconnect the condenser fan electrical connector.
IMPORTANT:
Do not lose the rubber seal from inside the connector.
3. Shake the bottle of reflective paint and open an applicator.
- Reflective paint and applicator are included with special tool kit J-49489.
- Additional reflective paint and applicators can be ordered from TECH-MATE.
Figure B-2
4. Paint a "dime sized" area on the outer portion of one fan blade.
- Make sure the painted area is completely filled in (no unpainted spots or thin paint in the dime
sized area).
- Allow the paint to dry-about 5 minutes
Page 14309
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Service and Repair
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
Wiper and Washer Switch
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper washer switch connector. 3. Pinch tabs at
wiper and washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 9597
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 2555
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE
1. Warm up the engine thoroughly. Then stop the engine. 2. Release the fuel pressure.
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is not used to release fuel pressure leave the fuel pump fuse
disconnected until step 7.
3. Remove the spark plug from each cylinder. 4. Connect the engine tachometer (not required in
use of CONSULT-II).
5. Install the compression tester with Tool into the spark plug hole.
Tool number: EG15050500 (J-45402)
6. With the accelerator pedal fully depressed, turn the ignition switch to "START" for cranking.
When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the
compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each cylinder.
CAUTION: Always use a fully charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. ^
If the engine speed is out of the specified range, check the battery liquid for proper gravity. Check
the engine speed again with normal battery gravity.
^ If the compression pressure is below the minimum value, check the valve clearances and parts
associated with the combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore,
cylinder head, cylinder head gasket). After checking, measure the compression pressure again.
^ If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour a small amount of engine oil into the
spark plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression. If the added engine oil improves the compression, the piston rings may be worn out or damaged.
Check the piston rings and replace if necessary.
- If the compression pressure remains at a low level despite the addition of engine oil, the valves
may be malfunctioning. Check the valves for damage. Replace the valve or valve seat accordingly.
^ If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression
remains low even after the addition of engine oil, the gaskets may be leaking, or a valve in adjacent
cylinders may be damaged. Inspect and repair as required.
7. Install the components in the reverse order of removal. 8. Start the engine and confirm that it
runs smoothly. 9. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it.
Page 9315
NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10
revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in.
Turning torque "B"
................................................................................................................................ 0.5 - 6.4 Nm (0.05
- 0.65 kg-m, 4 - 57 inch lbs.)
VERTICAL END PLAY
Check dust cover for damage. Replace it and the cover clamp if necessary.
NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10
revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in.
Vertical end play "C" ............................................................................................................................
...................................................... 0 mm (0 inch)
Non-Trouble Code Procedures
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Non-Trouble Code Procedures
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 1)
Page 7007
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 10283
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 4960
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair Perform If Throttle Actuator Is
Replaced
Idle Air Volume Learning
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within
the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
- Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
- Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are
satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a
moment.
- Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
- Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 degrees C (158 - 212 degrees F)
- Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch: ON
- Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp) On vehicles equipped with daytime light
systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is start the headlamp will not be
illuminated.
- Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
- Vehicle speed: Stopped
- Transmission: Warmed-up With CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T"
system indicates less than 0.9 V.
- Without CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal
Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed
Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode.
6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds.
Page 10481
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8249
Neutral Safety Switch: Testing and Inspection A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection
(Floor Shift)
A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Floor Shift) (Steps 1 - 2)
A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Floor Shift) (Step 3)
Page 12482
Page 12538
Page 12021
Figure 12
24. Make sure the "dimples" on the seat track mounting tabs are aligned with the holes in the seat
track (see Figures 11 and 12).
Figure 13
25. Install and hand tighten both seat track mounting tab bolts (M6, 10 mm head, see Figure 13).
Figure 14
26. Next, install and tighten the six nuts (three on each side) with the base plates. This will secure
the gear boxes (see Figure 14). Nut torque: 64-85
in-lb (7.17-9.69 Nm).
27. Re-install and tighten the two Seat Frame Side Bolts M8, 12 mm head (see Figure 14). Bolt
torque: 13-17 ft-lb (17.5-23.7 Nm).
Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 9429
4. Install the axle shaft bearing and cup on the axle shaft.
^ Prepare an installer tool from a steel tube measuring 762 mm (30 inch) long with an outside
diameter of 53.98 mm (2.125 inch) and an inside diameter of 41.28 mm (1.625 inch).
^ Press the axle shaft bearing and cup onto the axle shaft using a suitable press and the installer
tool, until a 0.038 mm (0.0015 inch) feeler gauge does not fit in between the axle shaft bearing cup
and seat.
CAUTION: Make sure the axle shaft bearing and cup, axle oil seal, and axle shaft bearing cage are
installed facing in the correct direction.
5. Install the bearing ring retainer onto the axle shaft.
^ Press the bearing ring retainer onto the axle shaft with a minimum force of 31,100 N (3172 kg,
6992 lbs.) until a 0.038 mm (0.0015 inch) feeler gauge does not fit between the bearing inner race
and the bearing ring retainer in at least one point.
6. Install the snap ring so it is fully seated into the groove on the axle shaft, using suitable snap ring
pliers. 7. Install the axle shaft assembly into the axle shaft housing. 8. Install the axle shaft bearing
cage lock washers and nuts. Tighten the axle shaft bearing cage nuts to specification. 9. Install the
parking brake assembly onto the back plate.
10. Install the rear brake rotor. 11. Install the rear ABS sensor.
Axle Bearing
Removal and Installation
The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 1798
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 457
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 7119
Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications
Final Drive Fluid 2WD & 4WD
Front final Drive Use ............................................................................................................................
...................................................................... API GL-5 SAE 80W-90 For hot climates, viscosity SAE
90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0°C (32°F)
Rear final Drive Use ............................................................................................................................
............................................... API GL-5 Synthetic 75W-140 gear oil
Page 7661
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
Page 3318
Timing Cover: Service and Repair
Service Data Update
Date: August 19, 2010
ARMADA AND TITAN; REVISED UPPER OIL PAN AND TIMING CHAIN CASE PROCEDURES
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA6O) 2004-2010 Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Removal and installation procedures for the upper oil pan and timing chain case have been
updated to no longer require engine removal and installation.
Nissan Service Data for 2004-2010 Armada and Titan vehicles will be updated with these new
procedures. Updated Service Data will be distributed to the field as quickly as possible.
The standard Flat Rate Times will be adjusted to reflect the new procedures.
Until the updated Service Data is made available, please use the procedures shown below for any
upper oil pan and timing chain case-related repairs on an Applied Vehicle.
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
Exploded View
Removal and Installation
Page 14167
Page 11056
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 7038
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Tachometer: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Locations
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 9049
d. At the front of the console; remove side covers and screws.
^ Left side cover shown; remove right side cover also.
1 screw on each side.
e. Remove the shift knob; unscrew it counterclockwise.
f. Lift and remove the shift finisher.
^ Disconnect electrical connectors.
g. Disconnect the shift cable.
^ Push the shift lever release to move shift lever to Park.
Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking)
Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking)
Checking Final Drive Oil
Checking Final Drive Oil
COMPONENTS
NOTE: Rear final drive shown, front final drive similar.
Page 9967
Figure B-1
- If the wires are damaged (cracked or missing insulation), STOP; no more testing is needed. Go to
Procedure C and replace the condenser fan assembly.
2. Disconnect the condenser fan electrical connector.
IMPORTANT:
Do not lose the rubber seal from inside the connector.
3. Shake the bottle of reflective paint and open an applicator.
- Reflective paint and applicator are included with special tool kit J-49489.
- Additional reflective paint and applicators can be ordered from TECH-MATE.
Figure B-2
4. Paint a "dime sized" area on the outer portion of one fan blade.
- Make sure the painted area is completely filled in (no unpainted spots or thin paint in the dime
sized area).
- Allow the paint to dry-about 5 minutes
Page 4122
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 5072
Check Sheet Part 1
Page 1166
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic
Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Page 5548
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 11037
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 13181
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Crash Zone Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor
CRASH ZONE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
- Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
1. Remove front grille. 2. Disconnect the crash zone sensor harness connector. 3. Remove crash
zone sensor nuts.
CAUTION:
- Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
- Do not disassemble crash zone sensor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS- 20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics
Page 4491
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 4344
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 10595
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 2312
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9068
64. Take the harness loose from the side of the cabin.
65. If equipped with side curtain air bags; disconnect the side curtain air bag module as follows:
a. Remove the right side sun visor, 2 screws under the trim cover.
^ Use a plastic trim tool to remove the trim cover.
^ Disconnect the electrical connector.
Page 12564
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 14050
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 1751
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 1312
Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 5478
5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box.
6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3.
NOTE:
There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is
easily accessible.
7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3).
8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4).
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 7797
5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then turn CONSULT-II OFF.
6. Remove the red/white Diagnostic Card and insert the 8 MB orange Reprogramming Card into
CONSULT-II.
The 8 MB reprogramming card should already have special ABS/VDC reprogramming data loaded
into it (see Part 1).
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine).
^ CONSULT-II will turn ON automatically (see Figure 13).
^ Confirm that all electrical loads* (except for the ignition) are "OFF".
* Headlights, defroster, A/C, audio (radio), video, cellular telephone, etc.
8. Roll down the driver's window part way, exit the vehicle, close the door, and hang the CONSULT
II unit on the outside of the window (see Figure 14).
This step is necessary to make sure the CONSULT-II and DLC-II cable will not be disturbed during
reprogramming.
CAUTION:
DO NOT connect the CONSULT-II AC power supply for Steps 1, 2, and 3 in Section 3 below.
9. Continue with Section 3.
Section 3
Section 3: Confirm the vehicle's battery voltage and CONSULT-II "Charger Input"
1. Press [SUB MODE], then select [BATTERY CHARGE]
Page 11436
NOTE:
The above illustration is only an example of a body seam seal leak. Your vehicle may have a leak
in a different location, and it may have more than one leak.
3. Seal water leak (body seam) with seam sealer:
^ Use 3M(TM) Fast n Firm(TM) Seam Sealer-part number 08505-or equivalent.
^ Follow product application instructions.
4. Allow sealer to cure and then recheck for leaks.
^ Make sure the leak you fixed is sealed (not leaking).
^ Make sure there are no other leaks; it's possible to have more than one leak.
Disclaimer
Page 9648
Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Front) (Steps 6 - 9)
Page 2622
4. Insert the first new in-cabin microfilter into the front heater and cooling unit assembly housing
and slide it over to the right. Insert the second new
in-cabin microfilter into the front heater and cooling unit assembly housing.
NOTE: The in-cabin microfilters are marked with air flow arrows. The end of the microfilter with the
arrow should face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows should point downward.
5. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover.
6. Install the lower glove box in the instrument panel and secure it with the two hinge pins.
Page 11382
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Page 3764
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See:
Computers and Control Systems/Data Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Schematic
4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Page 11167
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 5455
Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Work Support
WORK SUPPORT
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT
DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch "RESET SETTING VALUE" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. 4.
Touch "START". 5. "RESET SETTING VALUE OK?" is displayed, and touch "YES". 6. The setting
will be changed and "COMPLETED" will be displayed. 7. Touch "END".
Display Item List - Work Support
Display Item List
CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)
Page 13572
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4834
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 9505
Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment
Page 12299
9. Reinstall both rail stops.
^ Use a 13/32" (10 mm) wrench.
10. Make sure the organizer is in the "deployed" position and the lids are snapped closed.
11. Slide the organizer all the way forward until it stops against the front of the bed.
12. Turn all of the hand knobs until each slider is tight.
Page 4083
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 12 - 16)
Diagnostic Procedure
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay
Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement
Reference: NTB10-137B
Date: December 22, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006
FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY
This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have
been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068
NHTSA#: 10V-517
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40)
2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM
relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles,
oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including
the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 2812
Page 6467
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 1122
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Description and Operation
Electric Load Sensor: Description and Operation
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Description
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN
communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R.
Page 12654
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Page 1064
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 13632
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 1884
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9107
^ Un-tape the connectors that are needed. Leave the connectors you don't need taped to the
harness.
46. Connect both battery cables-positive cable first.
47. Reset the radio station presets.
48. If Inspection Procedure 1 was NG, or Inspection Procedure 2 result was "light stays on or
blinks"; connect CONSULT-II and clear codes from the Air Bag Control Unit SELF-DIAG [PAST].
Final Quality Checks
49. Check the air bag light operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition OFF and then ON.
b. Observe the air bag warning light.
c. Make sure the air bag warning light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out.
50. Confirm that all systems related to the harness replacement are functioning correctly.
High Mount Stop Lamp Harness Branch (Passenger Side-Right Side-Only)
51. Remove the rear seat belt D-ring covers and bolts-left and right side.
Page 6768
Page 12509
Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Steps 1 - 4)
Page 6193
CAUTION: Be careful not to let tip of injector nozzle come in contact with other parts.
^ Tighten fuel tube assembly bolts "a" to "b" in illustration and in two steps. 1st step: 12.8 Nm (1.3
kg-m, 9 ft. lbs.) 2nd step: 24.5 Nm (2.5 kg-m, 18 ft. lbs.)
5. Install fuel hose assembly.
^ Refer to precautions for fuel injector when handling O-ring.
^ Insert connectors straight, making sure that the axis is lined up with fuel tube side to prevent
O-ring from being damaged.
^ Tighten bolts evenly in several steps.
^ Make sure that there is no gap between flange and fuel tube after tightening bolts.
6. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
After installing fuel tubes, make sure there are no fuel leaks at connections using the following
steps. 1. Apply fuel pressure to fuel lines by turning ignition switch ON (with engine stopped). Then
check for fuel leaks at connections. 2. Start the engine and rev it up and check for fuel leaks at
connections.
NOTE: Use mirrors for checking on hidden points.
CAUTION: Do not touch the engine immediately after stopping, as engine becomes extremely hot.
Page 11190
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 4025
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 11294
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5742
ECM Inspection Table Part 9
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Page 4067
ECM Inspection Table Part 1
Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 3293
^ Insert the oil pump drive spacer according to the directions of the crankshaft key and the two flat
surfaces of the oil pump inner rotor.
^ If the positional relationship does not allow the insertion, rotate the oil pump inner rotor to allow
the oil pump drive spacer to be inserted.
8. Install the front oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Do not scratch or make burrs on the circumference of the oil seal.
9. Install the chain tensioner cover.
^ Apply liquid gasket as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
10. Install the front cover as follows:
a. Install a new O-ring on the cylinder block.
b. Apply liquid gasket as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
c. Check again that the timing alignment marks on the timing chain and on each sprocket are
aligned. Then install the front cover. d. Install the bolts in the numerical order shown.
Page 13806
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 788
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 14385
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 11551
NOTE:
Clip locations are shown as dots in the picture.
Page 14407
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Testing and Inspection
Keyless Entry Receiver: Testing and Inspection
Remote Keyless Entry Receiver System Check (Step 1)
Page 6167
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 14438
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 6265
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 1285
Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 6602
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM.
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 ->
3), and then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with
terminal clips.
Page 12036
16. Remove the six nuts (3 on each side) and two base plates shown in Figure 5.
- Removing these nuts will release the gear boxes.
Figure 6
17. Slide both sides of the seat rail back to the rear position (towards the seat back) and remove
the worm gears, drive cable, motor, and gear boxes,
all as one unit, from the seat adjuster assembly (see Figure 6).
CAUTION:
Avoid bending the drive cable. Bending the cable will result in noise during seat operation.
18. Remove the drive cable from the Motor.
Figure 7
- To release the drive cable from the motor end, pull up on the tab using a small flat blade
screwdriver or equivalent (see Figure 7).
Install new Seat Slide Motor Kit
Figure 8
Page 11781
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Pull UP on the bottom side of the mirror to separate the glass from the actuator.
2. Separate the electrical connectors from the mirror.
NOTE:
^ Some mirrors have heater and turn signal connectors.
^ There are three different mirrors. The other two can be seen in Figures 6 and 7.
3. Remove the actuator base mounting screw(s).
Page 8983
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 8279
Optional Splice
Page 9808
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 14411
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay
Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006
Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra
2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and
model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution
Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for
electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time,
the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM
relay contact due to arcing.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be
performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners
may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 713
Page 11686
Headliner: Service and Repair King Cab
Removal and Installation
Page 6023
Positive Crankcase Ventilation: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
PCV (POSITIVE CRANKCASE VENTILATION) VALVE
With engine running at idle, remove PCV valve from rocker cover. A properly working valve makes
a hissing noise as air passes through it. A strong vacuum should be felt immediately when a finger
is placed over valve inlet.
PCV VALVE VENTILATION HOSE
1. Check hoses and hose connections for leaks. 2. Disconnect all hoses and clean with
compressed air. If any hose cannot be freed of obstructions, replace.
Page 10470
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 618
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 430
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 1150
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 8040
Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
With ABS
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal
1. Drain brake fluid. 2. Disconnect harness connector for fluid level sensor. 3. Using a flare nut
wrench, disconnect brake tube from master cylinder assembly. 4. Remove master cylinder
assembly nuts and master cylinder assembly.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Refill brake fluid and bleed air.
CAUTION: ^
Refill with new brake fluid.
^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
^ Adjust brake pedal.
With ABLS or VDC
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION Removal
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it way cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
^ Before removing brake brake master cylinder, depress the brake pedal 5-6 times with the key
OFF to deplete vacuum in the booster.
1. Drain brake fluid. 2. Disconnect harness connectors for fluid level sensor and pressure sensors.
3. Using a flare nut wrench, disconnect brake tube from master cylinder assembly. 4. Remove
master cylinder assembly nuts and master cylinder assembly.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Refill brake fluid and bleed air.
CAUTION: ^
Refill with new brake fluid.
^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
^ Adjust brake pedal.
Page 10634
Air Bag Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 11710
3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1.
4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2).
5. Replace the battery.
^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece.
6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together.
7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated
in the dot matrix display.
8. If the indicator is still illuminated:
a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door.
b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off.
Page 5717
ECM Inspection Table Part 2
Page 13021
Optional Splice
Page 5702
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 4754
Page 5746
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the
throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each
time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition
switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Page 813
ECM Inspection Table Part 3
Page 7792
b. Keypad will appear (see Figure 6).
c. Using the digit keys on the keypad, enter ID Code 060402.
d. Then click the "Continue" button on the keypad.
^ After you click "Continue", the "CAUTION" screen will appear (see Figure 7).
Page 10253
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13687
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Engine - Drive Belt Squeaking Noise
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-058 Date: 080606
Engine - Drive Belt Squeaking Noise
Classification: EM-08-002
Reference: NTB08-058
Date: June 6, 2008
TITAN / ARMADA; DRIVE BELT SQUEAK NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2008 Armada (TA60) 2006-2008 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is a squeak noise coming from the drive belt.
ACTION
A. Check to see if the drive belt auto tensioner is also noisy. If it is, you will replace it as part of this
Service Procedure.
B. Check the alignment of the power steering pump/pulley to the crankshaft pulley using a
straightedge. If it is mis-aligned, perform the steps in this Bulletin to align it.
C. Clean the crankshaft pulley belt ribs.
D. Replace the drive belt and, if necessary, replace the drive belt auto tensioner.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 1945
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 12930
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 11773
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Pull UP on the bottom side of the mirror to separate the glass from the actuator.
2. Separate the electrical connectors from the mirror.
NOTE:
^ Some mirrors have heater and turn signal connectors.
^ There are three different mirrors. The other two can be seen in Figures 6 and 7.
3. Remove the actuator base mounting screw(s).
Page 173
b. Keypad will appear (see Figure 6).
c. Using the digit keys on the keypad, enter ID Code 060402.
d. Then click the "Continue" button on the keypad.
^ After you click "Continue", the "CAUTION" screen will appear (see Figure 7).
Page 13380
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 584
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 5177
Check Sheet Part 1
Page 8270
^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap).
e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet.
4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under
the dash):
a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly
(cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3).
b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads.
C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners.
5. Clean the negative battery cable connections.
a. Write down all the radio presets.
b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection.
c. Clean the following items:
^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides)
^ Body connection bolt (head and threads)
^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap)
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Battery negative post
^ Negative cable battery terminal
d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery).
e. Reprogram the radio presets.
6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs.
Page 5006
LAN-CAN-01
Page 1857
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 6754
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install Filter Kit (2004-2006 Titan ONLY)
1. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Note position of yellow marks.
2. Position mounting bracket onto frame as shown, hooking bracket tab onto brake hose bracket.
Attach bracket to frame with the clamp supplied in the kit.
Page 13345
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 13952
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 5865
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Locations
Memory Positioning Module: Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 4198
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3733
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 5519
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 2231
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 6661
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 9906
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Required Special Tools........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................3 Repair Overview (flow chart)..........................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..........3 Service Procedure (Armada / Titan)........................................................................................
................................................................................................5
Procedure A: Identify Fan Type............................................................................................................
..............................................................................5 Procedure B: Cooling Fan Motor Inspection........
..............................................................................................................................................................
9
Comparison Chart: RPM to Fan Motor Voltage....................................................................................
.....................................................................15
Procedure C: Remove and Install or Replace the Condenser Fan Assembly
................................................................................................................... 17 Procedure D: Install
Protective Covering to Fan Motor and Harness
..............................................................................................................................30 Procedure E:
Install Maxi Fuse...................................................................................................................................
......................................................41 Procedure F: Confirm Fan Operation........................................
........................................................................................................................................45
Parts Information..................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................46 Claims Information..........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.......48 Owner's Letter..........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................49
Required Special Tools:
- Any of these special tools can be ordered from TECH-MATE.
Fluke 73 Digital Multimeter and Test Leads (Fluke 73 Digital Multimeter is part of the J-48602
QR25 Engine Kit).
Fan Motor Tester: Part of test kit J-49489
- Part number for Fan Motor Tester - J-49489-1
Page 14016
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 3169
A. Set straight edge on front surface of crankshaft pulley to check the clearance at the top of the
pump pulley. See Figure 2.
B. Check clearance of lower part of the power steering pump pulley and crankshaft pulley. See
Figure 3.
NOTE:
The goal is to make sure the power steering pump pulley is aligned as true as possible with the
crankshaft pulley.
^ If the pulleys are aligned there is no need to adjust the bracket, skip ahead to step 17.
^ If the pulleys are not aligned, go on to step 12.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8737
^ Un-tape the connectors that are needed. Leave the connectors you don't need taped to the
harness.
46. Connect both battery cables-positive cable first.
47. Reset the radio station presets.
48. If Inspection Procedure 1 was NG, or Inspection Procedure 2 result was "light stays on or
blinks"; connect CONSULT-II and clear codes from the Air Bag Control Unit SELF-DIAG [PAST].
Final Quality Checks
49. Check the air bag light operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition OFF and then ON.
b. Observe the air bag warning light.
c. Make sure the air bag warning light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out.
50. Confirm that all systems related to the harness replacement are functioning correctly.
High Mount Stop Lamp Harness Branch (Passenger Side-Right Side-Only)
51. Remove the rear seat belt D-ring covers and bolts-left and right side.
Page 8140
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Page 10330
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 5053
Inspection Between Differential Lock Control Unit And Data Link Connector Circuit (Steps 2 - 3)
Inspection Between Driver Seat Control Unit And Data Link Connector Circuit (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 20
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 12406
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 7366
Control Module: Service and Repair
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
COMPONENTS
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect
A/T assembly harness connector.
Page 4251
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 8885
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 13246
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 5448
Normal status When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms.
Sleep status
- When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters
low-current-consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 60 ms intervals, and
receives lighting switch input only.
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L,
CAN-H) connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives
data, but selectively reads required data only.
BCM STATUS CONTROL
BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to reduce power consumption.
1. CAN communication status
- With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally.
- Control by BCM is being operated properly.
- When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible.
- Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter
is active, CAN communication status is active.
2. Sleep transient status
- This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF.
- It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter.
- Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to
inactive status.
3. CAN communication inactive status
- With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active.
- With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active.
- Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches
to inactive status.
4. Sleep status
- BCM is activated with low current consumption mode.
- CAN communication is not active.
- When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status.
Page 4598
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9995
- Pay close attention to the tie wrap locations. Count the slots in the fan shroud to confirm correct
tie-wrap locations.
15. Install the fan motor cover:
- Make sure the 4 clips are installed in the correct locations.
Figure D-18
Figure D-19
Page 7916
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
ECM Circuit Inspection
Page 11123
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8518
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 11931
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 12072
10. Remove the outboard J-Clip.
WARNING:
Only the outboard J-Clip can be removed. Removal of any other J-Clips may affect OCS
performance.
11. Remove the two clips securing the switch harness to the seat pan. See Figure 7.
WARNING:
Before removal, make careful note of the exact routing and clip placement for reassembly.
Page 10824
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 10325
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 1741
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 13724
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 1576
Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 3 - 4)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR
SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B2581 or B2582
is displayed.
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Intake Sensor
After disconnecting intake sensor connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at
sensor harness side, using the table.
Page 1672
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 5730
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 4 - 7)
Page 1609
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 12866
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 14273
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 1539
After disconnecting ambient sensor connector E1, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2
at sensor component side, using the table. If NG, replace ambient sensor.
Page 4696
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 8569
Component Parts Location
Page 709
Page 11013
DVD Player: Electrical Diagrams
DVD Entertainment System Schematic
AV-DVD
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Classification: EM09-015
Reference: NTB10-009
Date: January 19, 2010
REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure
described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the
exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are
made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
NOTE:
The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads
may not be considered a warrantable expense.
This procedure can be performed by two methods:
Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed
^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle.
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed.
Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle.
^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice.
Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is
performed on the vehicle.
Service Procedure
Rust Penetrant
Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure:
Page 688
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 8304
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 3610
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 1765
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13166
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set
Canister Purge Solenoid: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's
Set
Classification: EC06-009B
Reference: NTB06-095B
Date: September 2, 2008
2004 ARMADA / 2004-2006 TITAN; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446
APPLIED VEHICLES:2004-2006 Titan (A60)
2004 Armada (TA60)
This bulletin has been amended to add DTC P0448. No other changes have been made.
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(s) stored:
^ P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446
AND
^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed.
ACTIONS:
All applied vehicles:
Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V.
Clear any DTC(s) stored in the ECM.
AND IF the vehicle is a 2004-2006 Titan:
Refer to the Install Filter Kit Service Procedure of this bulletin.
AND IF the vehicle is a 2004 Armada:
Refer to the Install Protector Service Procedure of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 5446
Body Control Module: Description and Operation
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
System Description
- BCM (Body Control Module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the
vehicle.
BCM FUNCTION
BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches
(light, wiper washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various
electrical components. Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the front air
control, and sends signals to ECM using CAN communication.
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
1. Description
- BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components
according to the results.
- BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals
(OUTPUT 1-5) and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5).
2. Operation description
- BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to
flow in turn.
- If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and
input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active.
- At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow.
When voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in
BCM detects voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON.
Locations
Page 8010
materials.
CAUTION: While removing cylinder body never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
- It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or
replacement of cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake
hose.
- Do not damage piston boot.
- Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft
pedal occurs at very low mileage.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove sliding pin bolt, and then remove the pad, shim, shim cover, and pad retainer from the
torque member. 2. Remove sliding pins and sliding pin boots from torque member.
3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons
and piston boots.
CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston.
4. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove piston seal from cylinder body.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall.
CALIPER INSPECTION Cylinder Body
CAUTION: Use new brake fluid for cleaning. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene.
- Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust, wear, damage or foreign materials. If any of the
above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body.
- Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine
emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary.
Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace
the affected part.
Piston Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any
of the above conditions are observed.
CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust of foreign
materials are stuck to sliding surface.
Sliding Pins, and Sliding Pin Boots Check sliding pin and sliding pin boot for wear, damage, and
cracks. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part.
CAUTION: Trailing/upper sliding pin must be replaced at each service.
ASSEMBLY
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
SRS Components Parts Location
Page 14447
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 10698
^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times.
14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Wiper Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 14239
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 3856
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13320
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Washers/Wipers - Fluid Leak From Washer Reservoir
Windshield Washer Pump: All Technical Service Bulletins Washers/Wipers - Fluid Leak From
Washer Reservoir
Classification: EL06-009
Reference: NTB07-002
Date: January 9, 2007
2004-2007 TITAN/ARMADA; WASHER FLUID LEAKING FROM WASHER TANK PUMP SEAL
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
Washer fluid leaking at the washer pump seal on the washer tank.
ACTION
Replace washer pump seal with the new one listed in Parts Information.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line using the claims coding table.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 6391
Ignition Coil: Connector Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 10713
Seat Belt: Service and Repair Rear
Removal and Installation of Rear Seat Belt
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear kicking plates. 2. Remove rear seat assembly. 3. Remove seat belt D-ring anchor
bolt cover and bolt. 4. Remove seat belt lower anchor cover and bolt. 5. Remove lower side
finisher. Refer to "BODY SIDE TRIM". 6. Remove seat belt retractor anchor bolt and the seat belt
assembly. 7. Remove center seat belt lower anchor bolt.
Automatic Air Conditioner
Condenser HVAC: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner
Removal and Installation for Condenser
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Remove the
radiator.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the core surface of the condenser and the radiator.
3. Disconnect the high-pressure flexible hose and the high-pressure pipe from the condenser.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
4. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor connector.
- Remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the condenser as necessary.
5. Lift the condenser out of the mounting grommets to remove the condenser.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-rings of the high-pressure pipe, refrigerant pressure sensor, and high-pressure
flexible hose with new ones, then apply compressor oil to them when installing them.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
- Replace the grommets as necessary.
Page 4353
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 14470
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 11033
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 7222
Page 5596
Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 10250
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 12256
Lifting Switch (Front) Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Page 1158
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-071A Date: 100825
Recall PC049 - Inspect/Replace Front Lower Control Arm
Reference: NTB10-071A
Date: August 25, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN EQUIPMENT/SERVICE PARTS SUSPENSION
LOWER LINK
This bulletin has been amended. The lower link inspection has been clarified. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC049
NHTSA# 10E-019
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40)
2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign for suspension lower link service parts that
fit MY 2004 through 2010 Armada and Titan and MY 2005 through 2010 Xterra, Pathfinder, and
Frontier vehicles. A small number of suspension lower link service parts sold between November
25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 may have welds that are out of specification.
Applied vehicle owners will be asked to take their vehicle to the dealer if a lower link on their
vehicle was replaced between November 25, 2009 and May 14, 2010 or if they do not know
whether a lower link was replaced during that time.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
If a vehicle owner believes his or her vehicle may have received affected suspension lower link
service parts, it is the dealer's responsibility to inspect and, if necessary, replace the lower links
pursuant to the instructions on this bulletin.
Applied Vehicles with the original factory installed lower links are not subject to this service parts
recall campaign, however some 2010MY Applied Vehicles may be subject to the Suspension
Lower Link vehicles recall campaign (PC047). Please review Service Comm to confirm campaign
eligibility.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC049 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
Page 3471
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 13834
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 9689
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 11090
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 5493
Page 3606
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Mirror Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 5029
System Diagram
- Type 13
Page 9841
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 5616
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 54
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 11936
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Locations
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 6563
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 10319
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 9128
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 2356
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 7426
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 12421
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 8303
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 8999
Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Auto Active Test
Auto Active Test
DESCRIPTION
- In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive
signal to the following systems: Rear window defogger (crew cab only)
- Front wipers
- Tail, parking, and license lamps
- Front fog lamps
- Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
- A/C compressor (magnetic clutch)
- Cooling fan
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass
damage by wiper operation).
NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield
beforehand.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door
switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds
after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6. After a
series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF.
CAUTION: Be sure to perform BL-36, "Door Switch Check (King Cab)" when the auto active test
cannot be performed. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch Check (King Cab)
INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE
- When auto active test mode is actuated, the six steps are repeated three times.
Concept of Auto Active Test
- IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN
communication line. Therefore, when auto
Page 10512
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the air conditioner system. The
sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage.
The voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS
Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Page 874
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 418
All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu
Page 9194
Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster
CAMBER AND CASTER
Components
Page 14169
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 13341
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 7609
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 8991
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 5397
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 2702
(Component Parts)/Components
Transfer Fluid Inspection
Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Transfer Fluid Inspection
TRANSFER FLUID
Components
Page 8541
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 7090
Differential Cover: Service and Repair Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking)
CARRIER COVER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove drain plug and drain gear oil.
2. Remove carrier cover.
^ Disconnect parking brake cable from carrier cover.
^ Disconnect brake tube from carrier cover.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent.
CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or
foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces.
2. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts to the specified torque. 3.
Connect parking brake cable and brake tube to carrier cover. 4. Fill with new gear oil until oil level
reaches the specified limit near filler plug mounting hole.
Page 1201
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 5306
Case 6
Page 3224
EM-6
Page 9411
1. Set the shock absorber in a vise, then loosen (without removing) the piston rod lock nut as
shown.
CAUTION: Do not remove piston rod lock nut at this time.
2. Compress the spring using tool until the shock absorber mounting insulator can be turned by
hand.
WARNING: Make sure that the pawls of the two tools are firmly hooked on the spring. The spring
compressors must be tightened alternately and evenly so as not to tilt the spring.
3. Remove the piston rod lock nut.
^ Discard the piston rod lock nut, use a new nut for assembly.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Shock Absorber Assembly ^
Check for smooth operation through a full stroke, both compression and extension.
^ Check for oil leakage on welded or gland packing portions.
^ Check piston rod for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary.
Mounting Insulator and Rubber Parts Check cemented rubber-to-metal portion for separation or
cracks. Check rubber parts for deterioration and replace if necessary
Coil Spring ^
Check for cracks, deformation or other damage and replace if necessary.
^ Check the free spring height. Front spring free height 2WD: 325.5 ± 3 mm (12.8 ± 0.1 inch) 4WD:
335.0 ± 3 mm (13.2 ±0.1 inch)
ASSEMBLY
1. When installing coil spring on shock absorber, the lower end (2) and upper end (3) must be
positioned as shown.
^ Shock absorber mounting insulator (1)
^ <-: Flat tail
Page 10828
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 9562
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 2147
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 14302
Windshield Washer Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 9300
Tool number: HT72520000 (J-25730-A)
8. On 2WD model, remove stabilizer bar bolts and reposition stabilizer bar.
9. Remove oil piping (high pressure side and low pressure side) from steering gear assembly, then
drain fluid from piping.
10. Remove lower joint bolt on lower shaft.
11. Remove bolts and nuts of steering gear assembly using power tool, and then remove steering
gear assembly from vehicle.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
After removing/installing or replacing steering components, check wheel alignment.
^ After adjusting wheel alignment, adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor.
^ With steering wheel in straight ahead position, make sure slit of lower joint fits with the projection
on rear cover cap, while checking that mark on steering gear assembly aligns with mark on rear
cover cap
^ After installation, bleed the air from the steering hydraulic system.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
Check if steering wheel turns smoothly when it is turned several times fully to the left and right lock
positions.
Page 9602
The mode door motor is attached to the heater & cooling unit assembly. It rotates so that air is
discharged from the outlet as indicated by the front air control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a link
which activates the mode door.
Diagnostic Procedure For Mode Door Motor (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 12168
Seat Heater: Description and Operation
HEATED SEAT
Description
- When handling seat, be extremely careful not to scratch heating unit.
- Front passenger seat cushion and seatbacks equipped with air bags cannot be disassembled.
They are replaced as assemblies only.
- Do not use any organic solvent, such as thinner, benzene, alcohol, etc. to clean trim.
Page 4219
13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part.
16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
Diagram Information and Instructions
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements
Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements
Classification: MT02-001B
Reference: NTB03-015B
Date: December 21, 21009
2001-2010 NISSAN; MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL REQUIRED FOR WARRANTY REPAIRS
This bulletin has been amended. Please discard all copies of the earlier version.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan Manual Transmission-Equipped Vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
If an Applied Vehicle equipped with Manual Transmission (MT) needs servicing for warranty
repairs, Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80,
or Nissan GTR R35 Special is required. See the chart above.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or
Nissan GTR R35 Special oil must be used when performing manual transmission repairs paid by
Nissan. These include warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs.
Nissan will not reimburse dealers for manual transmission repairs when Nissan Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35
Special oil is not used.
Nissan recommends use of the above listed manual transmission fluids, which optimize shift
quality, for customer pay use as well.
Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid and all Nissan chemicals are ordered through the Direct Ship
Chemical Care Product Program.
Disclaimer
Page 8292
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 3244
Exploded View
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the upper oil pan. Refer to the updated Oil Pan and Oil Strainer procedure above.
2. Remove variable timing control solenoids.
3. Remove intake valve timing control sensors.
4. Remove the crankshaft driven fan pulley and pulley bracket.
5. Remove the drive belt auto tensioner and idler pulley.
6. Remove the intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (A) and intake valve timing
control solenoid valve cover (LH) (B) as follows:
a. Loosen and remove the bolts in the reverse of order as shown.
b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using Tool.
Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228)
CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces.
7. Obtain compression TDC of No.1 cylinder as follows:
a. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise to align the TDC identification notch (without paint mark)
with the timing indicator on the front cover.
Page 3780
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II.
^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information.
2. Compare your printout to the chart.
a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3.
b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply.
^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information.
3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows:
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Service and Repair
Crankshaft Main Bearing Seal: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of Rear Oil Seal REMOVAL
1. Remove the transmission assembly.
2. Lock the drive plate using Tool A.
Tool number: - (J-47245)
CAUTION: Do not damage the drive plate. Especially, avoid deforming and damaging the signal
plate teeth (circumference position). Keep magnetic materials away from signal plate.
NOTE: Remove the bolts diagonally.
3. Remove the drive plate.
CAUTION: Place the drive plate with the signal plate surface facing upward.
4. Remove the engine rear plate.
5. Remove the rear oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Do not damage crankshaft or oil seal retainer surface.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply new engine oil to both the oil seal lip and dust seal lip of the new rear oil seal. 2. Install the
rear oil seal.
^ Install the rear oil seal so that each seal lip is oriented as shown.
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications
Transfer Case Fluid Capacity
................................................................................................................................................. 2.0 L
(2 1/8 qt., 1 3/4 Imp qt.)
Page 1151
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 13536
Combination Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 12751
Page 1595
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8213
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 10747
3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see
Figure 3).
^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information.
4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring.
^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt
NOTE:
^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring.
^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly.
Page 10360
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Locations
Radiator Cooling Fan Motor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 9073
Page 4070
ECM Inspection Table Part 4
Page 14430
Page 10284
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 6941
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 8377
Starter Motor: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the intake manifold.
2. Remove/disconnect the starter harness connectors. 3. Remove the two starter bolts, using
power tools. 4. Remove the starter.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
Tighten terminal nut carefully.
Terminal nut : 10.8 N.m (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft-lb)
Page 12236
10. Remove the outboard J-Clip.
WARNING:
Only the outboard J-Clip can be removed. Removal of any other J-Clips may affect OCS
performance.
11. Remove the two clips securing the switch harness to the seat pan. See Figure 7.
WARNING:
Before removal, make careful note of the exact routing and clip placement for reassembly.
Page 7333
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 12246
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Reclining Switch Inspection
Reclining Switch Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 11680
7. Remove outer seal and key cylinder lid assembly from door. 8. Remove bulb seal and door seal
from storage box. 9. Remove storage box from surround assembly.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 781
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 10373
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 3389
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)
REMOVAL
1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. 2. Remove ignition coil.
3. Remove spark plug using suitable tool.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
^ Do not use a wire brush for cleaning.
^ If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure: Less
than 588 kPa (5.9 bar, 6 kg/cm2, 85 psi) Cleaning time: Less than 20 seconds
Page 866
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 8120
VERY IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure the DLC-II is pushed in straight and fully plugged in to the vehicle connector.
^ Make sure all other DLC-II cable connections (as shown in Figure 11) are connected properly.
CAUTION
^ Nissan requires the use of essential tools shown in Figure 11 when performing ABS/VDC
reprogramming.
^ J44200-1O "Pigtail" should not be removed from the CONSULT-II DDL Port. This "Pigtail" allows
use of the stronger "quick disconnect" cable set.
^ If cables are very often changed at the DDL Port (base) of the CONSULT-II unit, cable connector
pin damage may result.
^ If there is connector pin damage, ABS/VDC reprogramming may fail. Permanent damage to the
ABS/VDC system can occur.
4. Continue with Section 2
Section 2
Section 2: Check all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTCs.
CAUTION:
It is essential that you check all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTCs before
performing the remaining sections of this procedure.
1. Remove the 8 MB orange card from CONSULT-II.
2. Install the 16 MB (red/white) Diagnostic Card into Slot A (top slot) of CONSULT-II (see Figure
12).
3. Press [START (Nissan BASED VHCL)]
4. In "SELF-DIAG RESULTS", check and erase any DTCs that are stored in the following vehicle
systems:
^ ENGINE
^ A/T
^ ABS
^ AIRBAG
^ ALL MODE AWD/4WD (if applicable)
^ DIFF LOCK (if applicable; 4WD Titan)
^ AIR LEVELIZER (if applicable)
Page 4503
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 9137
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 2459
SPECIAL TOOLS
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
Page 5546
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 4061
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 10019
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 6855
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 1053
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 6822
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Page 117
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 13693
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 11255
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 1549
After disconnecting in-vehicle sensor connector M32, measure resistance between terminals 1 and
4 at sensor component side, using the table. If NG, replace in-vehicle sensor.
Page 9052
d. Remove the seat from the vehicle and place it in a clean area.
NOTE:
Use two people to lift the rear seat out of the vehicle.
11. Remove the front kick plate.
Use a plastic trim tool to snap it loose.
12. Remove the rear kick plate;
^ Use a plastic trim tool to snap it loose.
Page 7682
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 7675
Control Unit: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove jack and tools. 3.
Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. 4. Remove the necessary
push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way.
5. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to disconnect connector. 6. Remove
the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit.
INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque. Differential lock
control unit nuts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.)
Page 7019
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 8681
k. Remove 2 bolts from the sides of the console.
^ Left side is shown, right side not shown.
l. Remove the center console from the vehicle.
9. Disconnect the harness SRS connector from the SRS control unit.
10. Remove the rear seat from the vehicle:
a. Move the jack out of the way.
b. Remove the center seat belt retractor anchor bolt.
c. Remove the 8 seat mounting bolts.
Page 14172
Windshield Washer Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 8722
c. Remove 2 cup holder mounting bolts.
^ Left side is shown, right side not shown
b. Remove the cup holder from the vehicle.
8. If equipped with front bucket seats (shifter is in the center console); remove the center console:
a. Remove 2 screws from the bottom of the glove box assembly.
b. Remove 4 screws at the top of the glove box assembly, then
c. Remove the glove box assembly.
Page 2210
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 5087
Case 1
Page 467
Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 12191
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 4)
Front Axle
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Axle
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove engine undercover if equipped, using
power tool. 3. Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove the torque member bolts using
power tool. Then reposition brake caliper aside with wire.
NOTE: Do not press brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
4. Put alignment mark on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor.
5. For 4WD model, perform the following:
^ Remove cotter pin, then lock nut from drive shaft using power tool.
^ Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly.
6. Remove wheel sensor.
^ Inspect the wheel sensor O-ring, replace the wheel sensor assembly if damaged.
^ Clean the wheel sensor hole and mating surface with a suitable brake cleaner and clean lint-free
shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle bearing area.
^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
CAUTION: Do not pull on the wheel sensor harness.
7. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool. 8. Remove splash guard and
wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 8522
Power Distribution Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start
engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition
switch OFF.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two
or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse
after servicing fuel system.
Page 11084
Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection (Step 4)
Page 8155
CAUTION: Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Page 10472
Page 449
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 371
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis
Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis
Classification: EM09-013
Reference: NTB10-002
Date: January 12, 2010
DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS
APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s),
ACTION
Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any
repairs performed.
Page 9616
Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Driver) (Steps 16 - 18)
Page 13960
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 12122
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpeting, etc. when performing this Procedure.
Preliminary Steps
NOTE:
^ Steps 1, 2 and 3 below, only apply to vehicles equipped with Front Side (SRS) Air Bags.
^ These vehicles equipped with Front Side (SRS) Air Bags have a tag on the front seatback (see
Figure 1).
1. Write down all radio station presets.
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Wait at least 3 minutes after the negative battery cable is disconnected before proceeding with
step 4 below.
Tilt Seat and Add Spacer Washer
4. Remove the four bolts that secure the driver's seat to the floor.
^ Refer to section SE in the Service Manual (ESM) for seat removal information.
5. Carefully tilt the seat back to reach the bottom of the seat (see Figure 2).
^ If needed, disconnect electrical connectors so you can tilt the seat.
6. Install the new Spacer Washer as shown in Figure 2.
^ Make sure the new Spacer Washer is fully inserted and locked into position.
Changing A/T Fluid
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Changing A/T Fluid
Changing A/T Fluid
1. Drive the vehicle to warm up the ATF to 80°C (176°F). 2. Stop the engine. 3. Remove the ATF
level gauge bolt.
4. Drain the ATF from the drain plug hole and refill the transmission with new ATF. Always refill
with the same volume as the drained fluid and use
the dipstick to check the fluid level as shown. Add fluid as necessary. ^
To flush out the old fluid from the coolers, pour new fluid into the charging pipe with the engine
idling and at the same time drain the old fluid from the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return
line.
^ When the color of the fluid coming out of the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return line is
about the same as the color of the new fluid, flushing out the old fluid is complete. The amount of
new transmission fluid used for flushing should be 30% to 50% of the specified capacity For
Transmission fluid type and capacity, See: Specifications CAUTION: ^
Use only Genuine NISSAN ATF Matic Fluid J. Do not mix with other fluid.
^ Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN ATF Matic Fluid J will cause
deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic
transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
^ When filling the transmission with fluid, do not spill the ATF on any heat generating parts such as
the exhaust manifold.
^ Do not reuse the drain plug gasket. Drain plug: Refer to "Components". See: Service and
Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components
5. Drive the vehicle to warm up the ATF to 80°C (176°F). 6. Check the fluid level and condition. If
the fluid is still dirty, repeat steps 2 through 5. 7. Install the ATF level gauge in the fluid charging
pipe and install the level gauge bolt. 8. Tighten the level gauge bolt to specification.
Level gauge bolt: Refer to "Components". See: Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component
Parts)/Components
Page 1747
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 10584
Page 978
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Classification: WT11-003
Reference: NTB11-029
Date: March 21, 2011
TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration.
^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care
to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin.
Tire Mounting Tips:
NOTE:
These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to
read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment
1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid.
^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process.
2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and
corrosion.
Page 12704
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 5822
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch)
Check (King Cab)
Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch)
Check (King Cab)
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 8746
^ During installation of the new harness you will find some connectors taped to the harness as
shown.
^ Some of the connectors will be for options that the vehicle you are working on does not have.
^ Un-tape the connectors that are needed. Leave the connectors that are not needed taped to the
harness.
68. Connect both battery cables-positive cable first.
69. Reset the radio station presets.
70. If Inspection Procedure 1 was NG, or Inspection Procedure 2 result was "light stays on or
blinks"; connect CONSULT-II and clear codes from the Air Bag Control Unit SELF-DIAG [PAST].
Final Quality Checks
71. Check the air bag light operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition OFF and then ON.
b. Observe the air bag warning light.
c. Make sure the air bag warning light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out.
72. Confirm that all systems related to the harness replacement are functioning correctly.
Page 1319
Lifting Switch (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 9636
Diagnostic Procedure For Defroster Door Motor (Steps 13 - 15)
Page 4485
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 10259
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 10416
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 12796
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 3806
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use
Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036.
1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM.
a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other
damage.
Page 12378
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 4228
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation
PSP SENSOR
Component Description
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and
detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering
load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric
throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed
and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
Page 74
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 8813
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 3489
Heater Core: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner
HEATER CORE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing
Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair/Manual Air
Conditioner
Page 8977
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 5207
Case 13
Page 8898
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 11159
Page 3455
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 12480
Audible Warning Device: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 4478
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 5657
Page 6874
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 5278
Case 12
Page 5011
Information Bus: Vehicle Damage Warnings
Precautions For Harness Repair
Precautions For Harness Repair
CAN SYSTEM
- Solder the repaired parts, and wrap with tape. [Frays of twisted line must be within 110 mm (4.33
in).
- Do not perform bypass wire connections for the repair parts. (The spliced wire will become
separated and the characteristics of twisted line will be lost.)
Precautions For Trouble Diagnosis
Precautions For Trouble Diagnosis
CAN SYSTEM
- Do not apply voltage of 7.0 V or higher to the measurement terminals.
- Use the tester with its open terminal voltage being 7.0 V or less.
- Be sure to turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal
before checking the circuit.
Precautions When Using CONSULT-II
Precautions When Using CONSULT-II
When connecting CONSULT-II to data link connector, connect them through CONSULT-II
CONVERTER.
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carry out CAN communication.
CHECK POINTS FOR USING CONSULT-II
1. Has CONSULT-II been used without connecting CONSULT-II CONVERTER on this vehicle?
- If YES, GO TO 2.
- If NO, GO TO 5.
2. Is there any indication other than indications relating to CAN communication system in the
self-diagnosis results?
- If YES, GO TO 3.
- If NO, GO TO 4.
3. Based on self-diagnosis results unrelated to CAN communication, carry out the inspection. 4.
Malfunctions may be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control units carrying out CAN
communication. Therefore, erase the self-diagnosis
results.
5. Diagnose CAN communication system. Refer to "TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW". See:
Testing and Inspection/Symptom Related
Diagnostic Procedures/Diagnostic Strategies/Work Flow
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
Page 6767
Page 4898
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Locations
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Non-Trouble Code Procedures
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Non-Trouble Code Procedures
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 1)
Page 827
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 12 - 16)
Diagnostic Procedure
Page 2386
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 10851
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 13273
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 9050
h. Take the shift finisher harness loose from the console.
i. At the front of the console, release harness mounting clips, disconnect harness connector, and
remove 2 screws.
j. Remove 4 screws from the bottom of the console compartments.
Page 13286
Cargo Lamp: Service and Repair
CARGO LAMP (if equipped)
Removal
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Using a suitable tool (A), release the pawls and
remove the cargo lamp lens (1). 3. Remove cargo lamp screws (2). 4. Disconnect the connector,
then remove cargo lamp.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Bulb Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
2. Using a suitable tool, release the pawls and remove the cargo lamp lens. 3. Release the cargo
lamp bulb retainers (1), then pull bulb (2) straight out to remove.
Cargo lamp bulb: 12 V - 8 W
Page 2363
Page 3675
^ For band clamp(s) locations on your vehicle, refer to the pictures shown above.
Page 10538
SRS Inspection (For Side And Rollover Collision) Part 2
SRS INSPECTION (FOR SIDE AND ROLLOVER COLLISION)
Page 5268
Case 2
Page 8894
A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Low Airflow From
Front Air Vents
Classification: HA09-001A
Reference: NTB09-028A
Date: November 17, 2010
LOW AIRFLOW FROM HVAC FRONT AIR VENTS
The Applied Vehicles have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Quest (V42) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Pathfinder
(R51) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) 2004-2008 Titan (A60) 2004-2008 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
An Applied Vehicle has low airflow coming from the HVAC front air vents due to evaporator
freeze-up.
AND
The HVAC unit surface temperature around the evaporator is about 32°F (0°C) causing ice to form
on the evaporator.
NOTE:
The incident may be described as:
^ Only occurring after a long drive with the HVAC on continuously and the blower set on low.
AND
^ Under conditions such as high ambient temperature and high humidity.
ACTION
^ Replace the intake sensor with the part listed in Parts Information.
^ Refer to the Service Procedure below.
Campaign - Front Axle Flange Bolt Torque
Technical Service Bulletin # 06-012 Date: 060214
Campaign - Front Axle Flange Bolt Torque
Reference: NTB06-012
Date: February 14, 2006
VOLUNTARY SERVICE CAMPAIGN FRONT AXLE FLANGE BOLTS (4WD)
CAMPAIGN I.D. # : PB014
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006 Titan (A60) - 4WD ONLY 2006 Armada (TA60) - 4WD ONLY
APPLIED VINS: Titan: 1N6*A0*B*6N500000 - 541440 Armada: 5N1AA08B*6N700001 - 721614
NOTE:
Use Service Comm to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
On some 2006 model year Nissan Titan and Armada four-wheel drive equipped vehicles, there is
the possibility that the bolts attaching the front drive shafts to the front final drive assembly may not
have been tightened properly. This may result in the front drive shafts coming loose and cause a
vibration or noise in the vehicle front end. If the front drive shaft becomes disconnected, it may be
damaged or cause damage to other vehicle components. However, the ability to control the vehicle
will not be affected. Nissan is conducting a Service Campaign to retighten the front drive shaft bolts
to the proper specification.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PBO14 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED
The number of vehicles potentially affected is 22,100.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the retailer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this Voluntary Service Campaign (PBO14) which for any reason enters
the service department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by
transient (tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory.
Page 5854
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 4700
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 7899
WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the
hazard of airborne particles or other materials.
CAUTION: ^
While removing cylinder body never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
^ It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or
replacement of cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake
hose.
^ Do not damage piston boot.
^ Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft
pedal occurs at very low mileage.
WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the
hazard of airborne particles or other materials.
CAUTION: ^
While removing cylinder body, never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
^ It is not necessary to remove the torque member and disconnect the brake hose except for
disassembly or replacement of cylinder body. When replacing brake pads, hang cylinder body with
a wire so as not to stretch brake hose.
^ Do not damage piston boot.
^ Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or it a soft
pedal occurs at very low mileage.
CAUTION: While bleeding, pay attention to master cylinder fluid level.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector
or battery negative cable. 2. Connect a vinyl tube to the rear right bleed valve. 3. Fully depress
brake pedal 4 to 5 times. 4. With brake pedal depressed, loosen bleed valve to let the air out, and
then tighten it immediately. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until no more air comes out.
Page 14017
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 5536
^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap).
e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet.
4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under
the dash):
a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly
(cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3).
b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads.
C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners.
5. Clean the negative battery cable connections.
a. Write down all the radio presets.
b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection.
c. Clean the following items:
^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides)
^ Body connection bolt (head and threads)
^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap)
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Battery negative post
^ Negative cable battery terminal
d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery).
e. Reprogram the radio presets.
6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs.
Page 4328
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 13495
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 11797
NOTE:
^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB.
Disclaimer
Page 11169
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Locations
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 600
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 1157
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 10434
Diagnostic Procedure For In-Vehicle Sensor (Step 13)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
SYMPTOM: In-vehicle sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B2578 or
B2579 is displayed. Without a CONSULT-II code 30, 31 is indicated on front air control as a result
of conducting self-diagnosis.
COMPONENT INSPECTION
In-vehicle Sensor
Page 715
Testing and Inspection
Refueling Vapor Cut Valve: Testing and Inspection
Component Inspection
REFUELING EVAP VAPOR CUT VALVE
With CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel tank. 2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel feed hose located on the fuel gauge retainer. b. Connect a spare fuel hose, one
side to fuel gauge retainer where the hose was removed and the other side to a fuel container. c.
Drain fuel using "FUEL PUMP RELAY" in "ACTIVE TEST" mode with CONSULT-II.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the
refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of
EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that the air flows freely into the tank.
4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. Always
replace O-ring with new one. c. Put fuel tank upside down. d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end
[-13.3 kPa (-100 mmHg, -3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the
pressure is applicable.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel tank. 2. Drain fuel from the tank as follows:
a. Remove fuel gauge retainer. b. Drain fuel from the tank using a handy pump into a fuel
container.
3. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to close as follows. Blow air into the
refueling EVAP vapor cut valve (from the end of
EVAP/ORVR line hose), and check that the air flows freely into the tank.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2603
DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART
Page 3711
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 7031
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 3739
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 1790
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 248
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 5271
Case 5
Page 13116
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Locations
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 6237
Optional Splice
Page 6900
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Page 9699
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 6154
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Diagram Information and Instructions
Speedometer Head: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 12684
Page 10970
1. Lower DVD screen as shown in Figure 1.
2. Remove (2) 10 mm screws from the console.
3. Use hooked trim tool (essential tool J-46534 Plastic Trim Tool Set or equivalent) to pull down
console at 2 locations (both sides).
Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection
Seat Memory Switch: Testing and Inspection Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection
Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Page 9939
- Use new bolts from the Fan Protector Kit. Bolt torque: 4.5 N.m (0.45, kg-m, 40 in-lb)
Figure D-16
- Mount the harness connector and clip the harness in place.
14. Attach 3 tie-wraps as shown in Figure D-17.
- Use 7 1/2 inch (19.5 cm) tie-wraps from the protector kit.
- Use the large 1 o'clock and 5 o'clock ribs for reference.
Figure D-17
Page 7717
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 830
ECM Inspection Table Part 2
Page 8104
* Headlights, defroster, A/C, audio (radio), video, cellular telephone, etc.
4. Press [START (Nissan BASED VHCL)].
5. In "SELF-DIAG RESULTS", check and erase any DTC(s) in the below noted vehicle systems:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST press "ERASE" and "OK" in all systems (shown below) whether a DTC is displayed or
not. This is required to complete the VDC reprogramming procedure, and it will make sure that all
DTC(s) are erased.
^ ENGINE
^ A/T
^ ABS
^ AIR BAG
^ ALL MODE AWD/4WD (if applicable)
^ DIFF LOCK (if applicable; 4WD Titan)
^ AIR LEVELIZER (if applicable)
6. After all DTC(s) are erased:
^ Turn the ignition switch OFF.
^ Disconnect CONSULT-II and the CAN Cable from the vehicle connector.
^ Disconnect the battery charger from the vehicle.
^ Start the engine and make sure it runs properly and there are NO warning lights illuminated in the
instrument panel.
7. Continue with Part 4.
Part 4
Part 4: Re-program the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card back to its original format so it can be
used for standard ECU reprogramming.
1. Remove the red/white diagnostic card from CONSULT-II and insert the 8 MB orange
Reprogramming card.
2. Go to the ASIST terminal.
3. Follow steps in Part 1 of this bulletin to download (transfer) data from ASIST to CONSULT-II.
^ Use ID Code 050602.
^ This will re-program the 8 MB (orange) card to its original format so it can be used for standard
ECU reprogramming.
END
Page 13951
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 11281
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 13675
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 3793
^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay.
9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay.
^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without
causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals.
10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6).
11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs.
Recall 06V459000: Seat Belt Wire Harness Modification
Air Bag Harness: Recalls Recall 06V459000: Seat Belt Wire Harness Modification
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan
North America, Inc. NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 06V459000 MFG'S REPORT DATE:
November 22, 2006
COMPONENT: Electrical System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 96500
SUMMARY: On certain crew cab trucks, the wires in the harness were routed through the rear
doors and into the body. These wires may break due to over bending of the harness as the door is
opened and closed. The harness contains wires for the driver seat belt pretensioner and for the
front passenger seat belt which is part of the occupant classification system. Wires for the rear
audio speakers are also contained in the harness.
CONSEQUENCE: If the wires for the seat belts and speaker wires break and make contact, there
is a possibility that the pretensioner may deploy. If this happens when the seat belt is retracted, it
will not be possible to use the seat belt. If one of the wires on the right side harness for the seat
belt tension sensor breaks, the passenger side front air bag will not deploy as designed in a frontal
collision increasing the risk of a crash and personal injury.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the wire harness cover with a different type that prevents over
bending of the harness and the harness will be rerouted free of charge. The recall is expected to
begin on or about February 19, 2007. owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Locations
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 10959
8. Re-install (2) 10 mm screws. Torque to 3.6 Nm (0.37 Kg-m, 32 in-lb.)
9. Raise DVD screen.
Disclaimer
Service Data and Specifications
General Specifications
Page 7935
CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, KRE00 00010 01) when
assembling.
1. Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal and insert seal in to groove on cylinder body.
CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seal.
2. Apply clean brake fluid to piston and piston boot, then install piston boot in to piston groove.
CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boot.
3. Insert into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove.
CAUTION: Press piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from
being rubbed.
4. Install sliding pins and sliding pin boots to torque member.
CAUTION: Trailing/upper sliding pin must be replaced at each service.
5. Install cylinder body. Tighten sliding pin bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components".
Page 294
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 9356
Control Arm: Service and Repair Lower Link
Removal and Installation
Components
REMOVAL
1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove lower shock absorber bolt. 3. Remove
stabilizer bar connecting rod lower nut using power tool, then separate connecting rod from lower
link. 4. Remove drive shaft, if equipped.
Page 9706
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 2489
Alignment: Service and Repair The Alignment Process
THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS
IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed.
1. When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use "indicators": (Green/red,
plus or minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use these
indicators. The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these
indicators may not be correct.
- This may result in an ERROR.
2. Some newer alignment machines are equipped with an optional "Rolling Compensation" method
to "compensate" the sensors (alignment targets or
head units). Do NOT use this "Rolling Compensation" method. Use the "Jacking Compensation" method. After installing the alignment targets or head units, raise
the vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways.
- See Instructions in the alignment machine you are using for more information.
Page 11628
Body / Frame Mount Bushing: Service and Repair Crew Cab
Body Mounting, Crew Cab
When removing, be sure to replace bolts and nuts (sealant applied bolts or self-lock nuts are used
for all mounting).
Page 12973
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7218
2. Inspect all six flange bolts (see Figures 1 and 2).
a. If all six bolts are OK, loosen the flange bolts approximately half-turn and re-torque the bolts to
73 Nm (7.5 kg-m, 54 ft-lb). Submit a claim for the repair and return the vehicle to the customer.
NOTE:
Do NOT use an air tool to loosen the flange bolts.
b. If one or more flange bolts,
^ are missing
^ can be turned using a hand tool using minimal force
^ has a visible gap between the bolt head and the flange (see Figure 3)
Continue with step 3.
3. Remove the flange bolts.
NOTE:
Make sure you mark the drive shaft (axle) and mating differential side flange for proper
re-assembly.
4. Inspect the following items for damage:
^ both drive shaft (axle) flange and differential side flange mating surfaces
^ bolt holes and bolt hole threads
See below examples of OK and NG conditions.
a. If no damage is found, replace all flange bolts and torque bolts to 73 Nm (7.5 kg-m, 54 ft-lb).
Submit a claim for the repair and return the
Page 2492
1. Measure camber and caster of both the right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge
and adjust as necessary to specification.
Camber and caster: Refer to "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*). See: Specifications/Front Suspension
NOTE: Some vehicles may be equipped with straight (non-adjustable) lower link bolts and
washers. In order to adjust camber and caster on these vehicles, first replace the lower link bolts
and washers with adjustable (cam) bolts and washers.
2. If outside of the specified value, adjust camber and caster using the cam bolts (1) in the front
lower link (2).
CAUTION: After adjusting the camber and caster check the toe-in.
NOTE: Camber changes about 3' (0.05°) with each graduation of one cam bolt. Refer to table for
examples of lower link cam bolt effect on camber and caster.
3. Tighten the adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to "Components".
Page 4132
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 10282
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 9355
3. Separate upper link ball joint stud from steering knuckle using Tool.
^ Support lower link with jack. Tool number: ST29020001 (J-24319-01)
4. Remove fender protector.
5. Remove upper link bolts and nuts.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Upper Link Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary.
Upper Link Ball Joint Check for distortion and damage. Replace if necessary.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to "Components".
^ When installing wheel and tire, refer to "Rotation". See: Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and
Repair/Tire Rotation
^ After installation, check that the front wheel alignment is within specification.
Warning Chime
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3325
Exploded View
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the upper oil pan. Refer to the updated Oil Pan and Oil Strainer procedure above.
2. Remove variable timing control solenoids.
3. Remove intake valve timing control sensors.
4. Remove the crankshaft driven fan pulley and pulley bracket.
5. Remove the drive belt auto tensioner and idler pulley.
6. Remove the intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (A) and intake valve timing
control solenoid valve cover (LH) (B) as follows:
a. Loosen and remove the bolts in the reverse of order as shown.
b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using Tool.
Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228)
CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces.
7. Obtain compression TDC of No.1 cylinder as follows:
a. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise to align the TDC identification notch (without paint mark)
with the timing indicator on the front cover.
Page 13975
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 8538
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Entertainment System - DVD Screen Rattles
DVD Player: All Technical Service Bulletins Entertainment System - DVD Screen Rattles
Classification: BT07-016
Reference: NTB07-O49
Date: June 28, 2007
TITAN AND ARMADA; DVD SCREEN RATTLE NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006 - 2007 Titan (A60) 2006 - 2007 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINS: Vehicles built before: 5N1AA08(**)8N600030 Vehicles built before:
1N6(*)AO(*)D88N300038
APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before: April 10, 2007
IF YOU CONFIRM
Rattle noise is coming from the DVD screen:
When driving at speeds of 10 mph or more.
And
While driving on rough roads.
ACTIONS
^ Wrap adhesive foam around the DVD harness wire.
^ Do not remove the DVD monitor from the console for this service procedure.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the overhead console and place it on a clean surface. Refer to section AV of the
Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal procedure.
Page 13379
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 8684
c. Remove the 2 connector support bolts.
d. Slide the connector support UP to remove it.
16. If equipped with side curtain air bags:
^ If you are replacing the passenger side harness; steps for disconnecting the side curtain air bag
will be covered later in this procedure.
^ If you are replacing the driver side harness, disconnect the side curtain air bag as follows.
a. Remove the 3 mounting nuts for the parking brake pedal assembly and move the assembly out
of the way.
b. From the floor, look up towards the front pillar and locate the side curtain air bag connector.
c. Disconnect the side curtain air bag.
Page 10958
4. Push the console rearward while pulling down to remove console from hanger.
5. Apply felt tape to hinge and foam pad to wire as shown in Figure 5.
NOTE:
Apply foam pad with adhesive backing to wire.
6. Re-install console to hanger by pushing console rearward and up so that hanger goes through
slot located in console.
^ Align pins with holes in bracket as shown in Figure 6.
7. Re-install console by pushing in fastener areas.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13335
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Sunroof
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Page 11873
Power Mirror Motor: Testing and Inspection Mirror Motor RH Circuit Check
Mirror Motor RH Circuit Check (Steps 1 - 3)
Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 5254
Case 7
Page 4065
Engine Control Module: Connector Views
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
Page 14243
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 3469
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 9793
Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Steps 7 - 10)
Page 12901
f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6).
^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit.
^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires).
^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing.
^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm.
4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
CAUTION:
DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump.
5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Page 10452
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
^ For Titan and Armada: follow the procedure outlined in this bulletin for intake sensor replacement.
^ For Quest, Xterra, Frontier and Pathfinder: refer to the appropriate section in the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for intake sensor replacement.
1. Remove six bolts from the glove box.
2. Remove glove box. The intake sensor is located behind the glove box.
3. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
4. Remove the intake sensor by pulling it up and out from the front heater and cooling unit assy.
5. Install new intake sensor in reverse order of removal and connect the intake sensor electrical
connector.
6. Install glove box in reverse order of removal.
Page 1400
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 14192
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 12153
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 4544
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Connector Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 13393
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8864
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 12628
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 73
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 4334
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 8671
5. Mark the harness vinyl tube 10 mm above the spot where the body harness clip was located
(see Figure B2).
6. Mark the harness vinyl tube 15 mm from the door grommet (see Figure B2).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure you have marked the vinyl tube correctly.
^ You will be removing the vinyl tube between the marks that you just made.
^ It is very important that you remove only the amount of vinyl tube between the marks.
7. Using the Vinyl Tube Scissors carefully cut off the vinyl tube between the marks you made in
steps 5 and 6.
IMPORTANT:
^ DO NOT use a razorblade.
^ Keep the lower (protected-blunt end) shear of the scissors towards the wires inside the vinyl tube.
^ Don't damage the wires inside the vinyl tube.
CAUTION:
It is very important that you use the Vinyl Tube Scissors when removing the wiring harness vinyl
tubing. Failure to use the Vinyl Tube Scissors for this procedure could cause damage to the
electrical wiring and may affect vehicle electrical system functions.
Page 1063
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 5214
Case 3
Page 1870
Combination Switch Inspection (Step 3)
Page 11884
Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 3)
Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Rear Door Glass
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - CREW CAB".
2. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be
seen. 3. Remove the inside seal. 4. Remove the glass run from the partition glass. 5. Remove the
partition sash bolt (lower) and screw (upper) to remove the sash. 6. Remove the glass bolts and
the glass. 7. Remove the partition glass from the panel.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the partition glass in the panel. 2. Install the partition sash. 3. Install the glass from outside
to ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass the bolts to the specified
torque.
Glass bolts : 6.1 N-m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
4. Install the inside seal. 5. Install the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - CREW CAB".
Page 2560
Valve Clearance: Testing and Inspection
Valve Clearance INSPECTION
NOTE: Perform the following inspection after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or
valve-related parts, or if there are unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve clearance
over time (starting, idling, and/or noise).
1. Warm up the engine. Then stop the engine. 2. Remove the engine cover. 3. Remove the battery
cover. 4. Remove the air cleaner and air duct assembly. 5. Remove the RH bank and LH bank
rocker covers using power tool.
6. Turn the crankshaft pulley in the normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to
align TDC identification notch (without paint
mark) with timing indicator.
7. At this time, make sure both the intake and exhaust cam noses of No. 1 cylinder (top front on LH
bank) face outside.
^ If they do not face outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more.
8. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table (locations indicated
with black arrow).
^ <- : Engine front
^ <- (black): Measurable at No.1 cylinder compression top dead center
^ <- (white): Measurable at No. 3 cylinder compression top dead center
^ A: RH
^ B: LH
^ C: Exhaust
Page 13842
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 12133
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 12630
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 442
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13023
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Fuel Pressure: Customer Interest Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Classification: FE07-004
Reference: NTB07-040
Date: June 6, 2007
2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007
Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223
APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007
IF YOU CONFIRM
When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced,
ACTIONS
1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure).
2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump.
NOTE:
Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 6942
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 4807
Service and Repair
Rear Bumper: Service and Repair
REAR BUMPER
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the tow hitch to service the rear bumper.
1. Disconnect harness from tow hitch, if equipped. 2. Remove bolts on each side of tow hitch and
remove tow hitch, if equipped. 3. Disconnect sonar sensor harness connector, if equipped.
- Disconnect sonar sensors from retainers.
4. Disconnect license lamp harness.
Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored
Classification: EC06-001A
Reference: NTB06-009A
Date: March 31, 2006
MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information
sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of
this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
The MIL is "ON" with
^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR
^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit,
and
There are no drivability incidents.
DETERMINE IF
This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure.
ACTIONS
If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections:
^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections.
^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection.
^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left
side instrument stay assembly.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 11299
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 5199
Case 5
Page 7865
Repair Flow Chart
Page 6332
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 3586
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 3431
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ECT SENSOR
Component Description
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The
sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in
temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 3135
Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped)
1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side)
movement (see Example 1):
^ See above table for maximum movement specification.
^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended.
Systems Controlled By BCM Directly
Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM Directly
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY
- Power door lock system.
- Remote keyless entry system.
- Power window system.
- Sunroof system.
- Room lamp timer.
- Warning chime system.
- Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system.
- Trailer turn signal and hazard warning lamps system (if equipped). Refer to "TRAILER TOW".
NOTE: Power supply only. No system control.
Page 3919
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Rear Door Glass
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - CREW CAB".
2. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be
seen. 3. Remove the inside seal. 4. Remove the glass run from the partition glass. 5. Remove the
partition sash bolt (lower) and screw (upper) to remove the sash. 6. Remove the glass bolts and
the glass. 7. Remove the partition glass from the panel.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the partition glass in the panel. 2. Install the partition sash. 3. Install the glass from outside
to ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass the bolts to the specified
torque.
Glass bolts : 6.1 N-m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
4. Install the inside seal. 5. Install the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - CREW CAB".
Page 5070
Case 10
Case 11
Page 4806
Page 5249
Case 2
Page 11215
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 8347
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 5734
ECM Inspection Table Part 1
Page 1899
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 14007
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 665
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 2993
Towing Information: Service and Repair
TOW TRUCK TOWING
WARNING:
- Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to
support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle.
- Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.
CAUTION:
- All applicable State or Provincial (in Canada) laws and local laws regarding the towing operation
must be obeyed.
- It is necessary to use proper towing equipment to avoid possible damage during towing operation.
Towing is in accordance with Towing Procedure Manual at dealer.
- Always attach safety chains before towing.
- When towing, make sure that the transmission, steering system and power train are in good
order. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used.
- Never tow an automatic transmission model from the rear (i.e., backward) with four wheels on the
ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission.
4WD MODEL
NISSAN does not recommend towing automatic transmission equipped vehicles with the drive
wheels on the ground.
CAUTION:
- Never tow 4WD models with any of the tires on the ground as this may cause serious and
expensive damage to the transfer case and transmission.
Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle)
- Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle.
- Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake
or cooling systems
- Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull the vehicle at a
sideways angle.
- Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use for vehicle towing
or recovery.
Testing and Inspection
Pedal Positioning Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 2438
Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process.
6. Begin the alignment procedure.
^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment.
^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications.
If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips:
^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body.
IMPORTANT:
After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position.
When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips:
Locations
Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 1647
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 4570
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 566
Page 1107
Page 11201
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 7457
1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "Components". See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and
Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
4. Securely fasten A/T temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clip. 5. Install oil pan to
transmission case. 6. Connect the negative battery terminal
CAUTION: After completing installation, check for A/T fluid leakage and fluid level.
Page 3867
7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs.
Disclaimer
Page 9621
Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Passenger) (Steps 9 - 12)
Page 8753
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Sunroof
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4899
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 1426
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation
WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE
The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. ECM provides an engine
coolant temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines.
Page 14205
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 1711
Page 10971
4. Push the console rearward while pulling down to remove console from hanger.
5. Apply felt tape to hinge and foam pad to wire as shown in Figure 5.
NOTE:
Apply foam pad with adhesive backing to wire.
6. Re-install console to hanger by pushing console rearward and up so that hanger goes through
slot located in console.
^ Align pins with holes in bracket as shown in Figure 6.
7. Re-install console by pushing in fastener areas.
Page 10073
Page 9891
5. Install the clutch pulley bolt using Tool, to prevent the clutch disc from turning and tighten the
bolt to specification.
Tool number : J-44614
CAUTION: After tightening the clutch pulley bolt, check that the clutch pulley rotates smoothly.
6. Check the pulley clearance all the way around the clutch disc as shown.
Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance : 0.3 - 0.6 mm (0.012 - 0.024 in)
7. If the specified clearance is not obtained, replace the adjusting spacer to readjust. 8. Connect
the compressor electrical connector. 9. Install the drive belt.
10. Install the engine under cover and the splash shield.
BREAK-IN OPERATION
When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always conduct the break-in operation. This is done
by engaging and disengaging the clutch about 30 times. Break-in operation raises the level of
transmitted torque.
Page 641
Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP
DTC's Set
Classification: EC06-009B
Reference: NTB06-095B
Date: September 2, 2008
2004 ARMADA / 2004-2006 TITAN; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446
APPLIED VEHICLES:2004-2006 Titan (A60)
2004 Armada (TA60)
This bulletin has been amended to add DTC P0448. No other changes have been made.
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(s) stored:
^ P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446
AND
^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed.
ACTIONS:
All applied vehicles:
Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V.
Clear any DTC(s) stored in the ECM.
AND IF the vehicle is a 2004-2006 Titan:
Refer to the Install Filter Kit Service Procedure of this bulletin.
AND IF the vehicle is a 2004 Armada:
Refer to the Install Protector Service Procedure of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 3511
Temperature Gauge: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 3514
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5873
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 6181
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 4245
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8901
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Service and Repair
Turn Signal Switch: Service and Repair
LIGHTING AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove steering column cover. 2. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch
toward driver door and disconnect from the base.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 8091
6. From the "CONSULT UTILITIES" screen, select "ECU Reprog. Data" (see Figure 4).
Page 127
Power Mirror Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 4525
Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Work Support
WORK SUPPORT
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT
DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch "RESET SETTING VALUE" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. 4.
Touch "START". 5. "RESET SETTING VALUE OK?" is displayed, and touch "YES". 6. The setting
will be changed and "COMPLETED" will be displayed. 7. Touch "END".
Display Item List - Work Support
Display Item List
CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)
Page 4423
^ Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Use standard type spark plug for normal condition.
^ The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under
conditions such as: Frequent engine starts
- Low ambient temperatures
^ The cold type spark plug is suitable when spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug
under conditions such as: Extended highway driving
- Frequent high engine revolution
CAUTION: Do not drop or shock spark plug.
Page 10670
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 8458
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 3600
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 12946
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 790
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 10514
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 6)
Page 4258
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Service and Repair
Glove Compartment: Service and Repair
STORAGE BOX
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear mudguard (if equipped) 2. Remove bolts, release clips and remove storage box
assembly. 3. Remove shelf bin and mat from storage box. 4. Remove storage box door from hinge.
- Remove door stay assembly.
5. Remove inner door cover. 6. Remove nuts and remove latch assembly from door.
- Remove key cylinder.
Locations
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 4352
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 11378
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Reference: NTB10-037A
Date: May 19, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE
INACCURACY
This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010
NHTSA #: 10V-074
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan
vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel
gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel
tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary
Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts
or labor.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 12595
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 2819
Page 4998
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 13892
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1352
Steering Angle Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle
sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel
alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle.
NOTE: Adjustment of steering angle sensor neutral position requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and
CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not
start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on
CONSULT-II screen in this order.
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels
in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU",
and "STR ANGLE SIG" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "STR ANGLE
SIG" is within 0 ± 3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 1 to 5.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
Locations
Throttle Position Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 6742
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 1620
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 5870
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 11031
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 6415
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 11443
Cowl: Service and Repair
COWL TOP
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove right and left wiper arms. 2. Remove cowl top seal.
- Release plastics clips on cowl top seal which go through cowl tops LH and RH and cowl top
extension.
3. Remove cowl top covers LH and RH.
- Release plastic clips under cowl top covers attaching to grommets on hoodledge.
- Disconnect washer tubes from washer nozzles.
4. Remove cowl top extension brackets LH and RH. Disconnect wiper motor harness from cowl top extension bracket LH.
- Cowl top extension bracket LH must be removed prior to removal of wiper motor and connecting
rod assembly.
5. Remove wiper motor and connecting rod linkage. 6. Disconnect windshield washer tube. 7.
Remove A/C low-pressure pipe bracket from cowl top extension. Refer to "REFRIGERANT LINES".
8. Remove drain tube from each side of cowl top extension. 9. Remove cowl top extension.
Page 1091
Rear Power Drop Glass Up Relay Check (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 9767
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 8300
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 6161
Page 10489
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 6935
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5840
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 431
Locations
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 6322
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 3237
Oil Pan: Removal and Replacement
Service Data Update
Date: August 19, 2010
ARMADA AND TITAN; REVISED UPPER OIL PAN AND TIMING CHAIN CASE PROCEDURES
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA6O) 2004-2010 Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Removal and installation procedures for the upper oil pan and timing chain case have been
updated to no longer require engine removal and installation.
Nissan Service Data for 2004-2010 Armada and Titan vehicles will be updated with these new
procedures. Updated Service Data will be distributed to the field as quickly as possible.
The standard Flat Rate Times will be adjusted to reflect the new procedures.
Until the updated Service Data is made available, please use the procedures shown below for any
upper oil pan and timing chain case-related repairs on an Applied Vehicle.
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
Exploded View
Removal and Installation
Page 1206
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 7611
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 3437
Optional Splice
Page 13795
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 8606
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 7936
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Rear
Removal and Installation
Image Symbols
Page 8341
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 6053
Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent).
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for
connecting the fuel pressure gauge.
2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test".
^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure.
^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble
Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test.
^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test.
> If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and
repair information.
> If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3.
3. Replace the fuel pump.
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the
appropriate Service Manual.
^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information.
^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal.
4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed.
Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 9427
REMOVAL
1. Remove the ABS sensor. 2. Remove the rear brake rotor. 3. Remove the parking brake
assembly from the back plate.
4. Remove the four axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers.
5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using Tools as shown.
CAUTION: ^
The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully
so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing.
^ Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft
assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Tool number: A: KV40101000 (J-25604-01) B:
ST36230000 (J-25840-A)
6. Remove the snap ring from the axle shaft using suitable snap ring pliers. 7. Secure the axle shaft
in a suitable vise, then use a 1/4 in size drill bit to drill a hole approximately 3/4 into the thickness of
the bearing ring retainer
[3/4 thickness is approximately 6.3 mm (0.25 inch) deep].
CAUTION: ^
Mount the axle shaft using a soft jaw vise to avoid damaging the axle shaft.
^ Do not drill all the way through the bearing ring retainer, the drill may damage the axle shaft
surface.
Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay
Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006
Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra
2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and
model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution
Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for
electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time,
the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM
relay contact due to arcing.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be
performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners
may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 3441
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 12267
Seat Memory Switch: Testing and Inspection Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection
Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3)
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature
Sensor 2
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T
Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
COMPONENTS
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect
A/T assembly harness connector.
Page 11061
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 14317
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 1353
Steering Angle Sensor: Adjustments
Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle
sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel
alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle.
NOTE: Adjustment of steering angle sensor neutral position requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and
CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not
start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on
CONSULT-II screen in this order.
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels
in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU",
and "STR ANGLE SIG" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "STR ANGLE
SIG" is within 0 ± 3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 1 to 5.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
Page 8462
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 2854
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Non-Trouble Code Procedures
Diagnostic Procedure
Page 3527
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 6646
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 10357
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 12800
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 11143
Optional Splice
Page 9647
Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Front) (Steps 2 - 5)
Specifications
Ball Joint: Specifications
Ball Joint
Wear Limit
Inspection
^ Check the ball joint for excessive play. Replace the upper or lower link assembly if any of the
following exists: Ball joint stud is worn.
- Ball joint is hard to swing.
- Ball joint play in axial directions or end play is excessive.
SWINGING FORCE
NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10
revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in.
1. Measure the ball joint swinging force using a suitable tool.
^ Measure at the cotter pin hole for upper ball joint as shown.
^ Measure at the groove for lower ball joint as shown.
2. Verify the ball joint swinging force is within specification.
Swinging force "A" Upper ball join
.................................................................................................................................. 8.1 - 103.2 N
(0.8 - 10.5 kgf, 1.8 - 23.2 ft. lbs.) Lower ball joint
.............................................................................................................................. 11.4 - 145.5 N (1.1
- 14.8 kgf, 2.5 - 32.7 ft. lbs.)
TURNING FORCE
Page 6553
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 3519
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 3262
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
Page 12807
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 10176
Heater Control Valve: Testing and Inspection Manual Air Conditioner
Water Valve Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Water Valve
The water valve (1) cuts the flow of engine coolant to the front heater cores to allow for maximum
cooling during A/C operation. It is controlled by the front air control.
Diagnostic Procedure For Water Valve (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 5143
Case 12
Page 6075
4. Disconnect the adjustable pedal electric motor electrical connector. 5. Disconnect the adjustable
pedal electric motor memory electrical connector, if equipped. 6. Disconnect the accelerator
position sensor electrical connector. 7. Remove the two upper and one lower accelerator pedal
nuts. 8. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Installation
- Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified ranges. Adjustable
accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke : 48.3 mm (1.90 in) Adjustable accelerator pedal total pedal adjustment travel : 73.2 mm (2.88 in)
- Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original
released position.
- Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to EC-562, "DTC
P2138 APP SENSOR". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic
Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P2138
CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected,
perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal
Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
Page 14012
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 5921
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 3619
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 2932
3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate
relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel and tire assembly. 6. Install wheel and tire
assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle.
NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed.
7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor.
Page 273
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 3029
1. Install the camshaft in the cylinder head. 2. Install the camshaft sprocket to the camshaft. 3.
Measure the camshaft sprocket runout.
Runout: Less than 0.15 mm (0.0059 inch) ^
If measurement exceeds the specification, replace the camshaft sprocket.
Valve Lifter
Check if the surface of the valve lifter has any wear or cracks. ^
If any damage is found, replace the valve lifter.
^ Select the thickness of the head so that the valve clearance is within the standard when
replacing.
Valve Lifter Clearance
Valve Lifter Diameter
^ Measure the diameter of the valve lifter. Standard: 33.977 - 33.987 mm (1.3377 - 1.3381 inch)
Valve Lifter Hole Diameter
^ Measure the diameter of the valve lifter hole of the cylinder head, using suitable tool. Standard:
34.000 - 34.016 mm (1.3386 - 1.3392 inch)
Calculation of Valve Lifter Clearance (Valve lifter clearance) = (valve lifter hole diameter) - (valve
lifter diameter)
Page 619
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 9409
2. Remove the shock absorber upper and lower nuts and bolts using power tool. 3. Remove the
shock absorber.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Inspect the shock absorber for any oil leaks, cracks, or deformations. Replace the shock absorber
as necessary.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Shock absorber upper and lower nuts. Refer to
"Components".
Page 9788
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR BLOWER MOTOR
SYMPTOM: Blower motor operation is malfunctioning under starting blower speed control.
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Front Blower Motor Relay
Check continuity between terminals by supplying 12 volts and ground to coil side terminals of relay.
Front Blower Motor
Confirm smooth rotation of the blower motor.
- Ensure that there are no foreign particles inside the blower unit.
- Apply 12 volts to terminal 2 and ground to terminal 1 and verify that the motor operates freely and
quietly.
Page 11057
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 13765
Combination Switch: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Combination Switch Reading Function
Combination Switch Reading Function
For details, refer to BCS-3, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION. See: Body and
Frame/Body Control Systems/Body Control Module/Description and Operation
Data Monitor
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT
DIAG MODE" screen.
3. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM"
screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be
monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the signals will be
monitored.
6. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To
stop recording, touch "STOP".
Display Item List - Data Monitor
Display Item List
Page 13801
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 3677
WARNING:
Be careful of sharp edges after cutting off the excess band clamp.
7. After band clamp(s) installation, road test the vehicle to verify the repair.
Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Page 12762
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
Page 12530
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 12510
Seat Belt Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Steps 5 - 6)
Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 9542
8. Strike the bearing ring retainer using a suitable chisel and hammer, with the chisel positioned
across the drilled hole. Break the bearing ring
retainer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not heat or cut the axle shaft bearing or bearing ring retainer with a torch during
removal, doing so will damage the axle shaft.
9. Remove the axle shaft bearing cage studs using a suitable hammer or press.
10. Pull the axle shaft bearing off of the axle shaft using Tool and a suitable press.
Tool number: ST30031000
CAUTION: ^
Do not tighten the Tool against the axle shaft.
^ Do not heat or cut the axle shaft bearing or bearing ring retainer with a torch during removal,
doing so will damage the axle shaft.
11. Remove the axle oil seal and discard.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
12. Remove the wheel bearing cage.
NOTE: ^
If reinstalling the old axle shaft, it may not be necessary to remove the ABS sensor rotor. Inspect
the ABS sensor rotor and replace as necessary.
^ The ABS sensor rotor cannot be reused after it is removed. If replacing the axle shaft, install a
new ABS sensor rotor on the new axle shaft.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Axle Shaft ^
Clean and remove all nicks and burrs.
^ Check for straightness and distortion. Replace if necessary.
^ Inspect machined surfaces for evidence of overheating, damage and wear. Replace if necessary.
^ Measure the bearing ring retainer axle journal diameter. Replace if necessary Bearing ring
retainer axle journal diameter (minimum): 39.726 mm (1.5640 inch)
Axle Shaft Bearing and Cup ^
Check that the axle shaft bearing and cup roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting and
wear. Replace if necessary.
Axle Shaft Bearing Cage ^
Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary.
Axle Shaft Housing ^
Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary
INSTALLATION
1. If installing a new axle shaft, install a new ABS sensor rotor onto the new axle shaft.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old ABS sensor rotor.
2. Install the axle shaft bearing cage. 3. Install a new axle oil seal.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 257
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 261
Page 12084
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection
Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 400
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 10526
Service Port HVAC: Locations Manual Air Conditioner
Page 12659
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (Step 3)
Description and Operation
Electric Load Sensor: Description and Operation
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Description
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN
communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R.
Page 8331
Page 1132
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Interior - Cup Holder Lid Won't Open/Close Properly
Drink Holders: Customer Interest Interior - Cup Holder Lid Won't Open/Close Properly
Classification: BT06-030
Reference: NTB07~O36
Date: May 21, 2007
2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; CUP HOLDER LID WILL NOT OPEN/CLOSE PROPERLY
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2007 Titan (A60) 2004-2007 Armada (TA6O)
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The front center console cup holder lid will not open or close properly.
ACTIONS:
1. Reposition the lid spring.
2. Install spring retention nylon washer and spring retention screw.
NOTE:
Do not replace the Console Finisher.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Use appropriate covers to protect upholstery, carpet, etc. during this procedure.
1. Remove cup holder/console finisher.
^ Refer to section IP in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for Console Finisher removal.
2. Place the cup holder/finisher upside down on a clean surface.
Page 9218
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Page 10848
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 14215
Page 14228
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 13809
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 10096
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 10585
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 14453
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 10072
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 12789
Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 10198
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner
Low-Pressure Flexible Hose
Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible Hose
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 2. Remove the engine air cleaner and air
ducts. 3. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
4. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to
it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
High-Pressure Flexible Hose
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine under cover using power tool. 2. Remove the engine air cleaner and air
ducts. 3. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 4. Remove
the high-pressure flexible hose.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil
to it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
High-Pressure Pipe
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal and battery positive terminal. 2. Reposition the IPDM
E/R aside. 3. Remove the front right wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Rotation". 4. Position aside
the front floor insulator. 5. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service
Procedure". 6. Remove the low pressure pipe. 7. Remove the high-pressure pipe.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when
installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Low-Pressure Pipe
Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Pipe
Page 4016
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 7079
Disclaimer
Locations
Component Parts Location
Page 12223
Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Check (Step 4)
Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Check (Step 1)
Front Axle
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Front Axle
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service
Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component
status (wear, damage) are normal.
WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION
^ Move wheel hub in the axial direction by hand. Make sure there is no looseness of wheel bearing.
Axial end play limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) or less
^ Rotate wheel hub and make sure there is no unusual noise or other irregular conditions. If there
are any irregular conditions, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly
Page 1404
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 2513
Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent).
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for
connecting the fuel pressure gauge.
2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test".
^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure.
^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble
Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test.
^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test.
> If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and
repair information.
> If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3.
3. Replace the fuel pump.
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the
appropriate Service Manual.
^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information.
^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal.
4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed.
Page 2521
NOTE:
^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB.
Disclaimer
Page 8391
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 4033
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Locations
Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 13556
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 496
3. BCM - Operation table of combination switch
- BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the table.
NOTE: Headlamp has a dual system switch.
4. Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON)
- When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this
time if OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5.
- When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges
lighting switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN
communication.
- When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and
recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON.
NOTE: Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10 ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch
is turned ON, electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it
cannot be noticed.
5. Operation mode
- Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows:
Page 11814
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 12481
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 14321
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 14306
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 3720
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 6555
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 8414
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 12401
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 7163
Seals and Gaskets: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-032 Date: 100226
Drivetrain - Rear Axle Oil Seals Leaking
Classification: RA09-005
Reference: NTB10-032
Date: February 26, 2010
2004-2008 TITAN; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal,
AND
No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings.
ACTION
Install the new axle shaft assembly - which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing
cage, and ABS rotor - listed in the Parts Information table.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 9948
"CM" I.D.: PB081 - 2004 and 2005 vehicles built before March 17, 2005. Refer to Service COMM to
confirm the correct campaign ID #.
Page 1021
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 1523
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 9567
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 3170
12. Disconnect harness clips (2 clips).
13. Unbolt alternator and set aside.
14. Loosen, but do not remove, the bolts that hold the alternator and power steering pump
mounting bracket to the engine block (5 bolts).
NOTE:
^ When the power steering pump bracket bolts are loose, the pump/bracket assembly can be
rotated or shifted slightly clockwise and counterclockwise.
^ The best position for the bracket is when the clearance measured at the top and the bottom of the
pulleys are equal.
15. When the bracket is set to the best position, tighten the bolts (5 bolts).
^ Torque 60 Nm (6.11 kg-m, 44.25 ft-lb)
16. Install alternator in reverse order of removal.
Page 9666
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. 2. Remove the steering member from the heater
and cooling unit assembly. 3. Disconnect the intake door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the
three screws and remove the intake door motor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Mode Door Motor
MODE DOOR MOTOR
Page 12720
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 1020
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 13056
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 14114
To stop leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then butyl adhesive to the leak point.
Page 6663
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 13629
Headlamp Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 10274
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 6396
Optional Splice
Component Locations
Ignition Coil: Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2112
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3.
Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower).
INSTALLATION
1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air cleaner case
(upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet).
Page 9180
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 1908
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (Step 3)
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Body Control Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See:
Computers and Control Systems/Data Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Schematic
4. Select item to be diagnosed on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Page 4253
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 6737
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 2686
Coolant: Service Precautions
SAE Viscosity Number ANTI-FREEZE COOLANT MIXTURE RATIO
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory with a high-quality, long life, year-round,
anti-freeze coolant solution. The anti-freeze solution contains rust and corrosion inhibitors.
Therefore, additional cooling system additives are not necessary.
CAUTION: ^
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze
coolant or equivalent with the proper mixture ratio of 50% anti-freeze and 50% demineralized water
or distilled water.
^ Other types of coolant solutions may damage your cooling system.
Page 8628
Inspection With CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)
With Generic Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Without Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Page 9064
52. Remove the rear upper finishers-left and right side.
^ Remove the clip.
^ Use a plastic trim tool.
53. Remove the upper door latch striker covers - left and right side.
^ 1 screw on each side.
54. Remove the coat hangers; left and right side.
^ 1 screw for each coat hanger.
Page 5942
^ Do not damage the air fuel ratio A/F sensors
^ Discard any air fuel ratio A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 inch) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor. Replace it with a new one.
7. Remove the front cross bar. 8. Remove the exhaust manifold (LH) following the steps below.
a. Remove the exhaust front tube. b. Remove the exhaust manifold cover. c. Loosen the nuts in
reverse order of illustration (A) using power tool. d. Remove the exhaust studs from positions 2, 4,
6, 8 and remove left exhaust manifold
9. Remove the exhaust manifold (RH) following the steps below.
a. Remove the exhaust front tube. b. Remove the oil level gauge guide. Refer to AT-271,
"Components". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components
c. Remove the exhaust manifold cover. d. Loosen the nuts in reverse order of illustration (B) using
power tool A/F. e. Remove the exhaust studs from positions 2, 4, 6, 8 and remove right exhaust
manifold.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Surface Distortion
^ Check the flatness of each exhaust manifold flange surface using suitable tools. Flatness limit:
0.3 mm (0.012 inch)
^ If measurement exceeds the limit, replace the exhaust manifold.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
^ Install new exhaust manifold gasket with the top of the triangular up mark on it facing up and its
coated face (gray side) toward the exhaust manifold side.
Page 2551
^ Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Use standard type spark plug for normal condition.
^ The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under
conditions such as: Frequent engine starts
- Low ambient temperatures
^ The cold type spark plug is suitable when spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug
under conditions such as: Extended highway driving
- Frequent high engine revolution
CAUTION: Do not drop or shock spark plug.
Page 3322
d. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown.
M6 x 30 mm (1.18 in): No.15,16 M8 x 25 mm (0.98in): No.1,3,5,7, 11,13 M8 x 45 mm (1.77 in):
No.2,4,6,8, 10, 14 M8 x 123 mm (4.84in): No.9, 12
2. Install the oil strainer to the oil pan (upper).
3. Install the oil pan (lower).
a. Using a scraper to remove old liquid gasket from mating surfaces.
- Also remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of oil pan (upper).
- Remove old liquid gasket from bolt holes and thread.
CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off old liquid gasket.
b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool as shown.
Tool number: WS39930000 ( - )
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to Service Manual GI Section.
CAUTION: Installation should be done within 5 minutes after applying liquid gasket.
c. Tighten the oil pan (lower) bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown.
Page 347
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11193
Page 12563
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 12871
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Sunroof
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Page 12881
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 13609
Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair
HAZARD SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid C.
2. While pressing the tab, push out the hazard switch.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4156
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of
the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is
disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2
seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and
wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 11082
Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 4)
Environmental Impact Information
Engine Oil: Environmental Impact Information
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS
Dispose of used oil and used oil filters through authorized waste disposal contractors to licensed
waste disposal sites, or to the waste oil reclamation trade. If in doubt, contact the local authority for
advice on disposal facilities.
It is illegal to pour used oil on to the ground, down sewers or drains, or into water sources. The
regulations concerning pollution vary between regions.
Page 3945
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Interior - Driver's Seat Arm Rest Loose
Arm Rest: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Driver's Seat Arm Rest Loose
Classification: BT08-037
Reference: NTB09-005
Date: January 15, 2009
FRONT DRIVER SEAT ARMREST LOOSE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2009 Armada (TA60) 2004-2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The front driver seat armrest is loose.
ACTION
Remove bolt and apply Permatex(R) Threadlocker Blue or equivalent to bolt threads.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. a. Move the driver seat to the full rearward position.
b. Fully recline the driver seatback.
Page 2762
Refrigerant: Testing and Inspection
Checking for Refrigerant Leaks
PRELIMINARY CHECK
Perform a visual inspection of all refrigeration parts, fittings, hoses and components for signs of
A/C oil leakage, damage, and corrosion. Any A/C oil leakage may indicate an area of refrigerant
leakage. Allow extra inspection time in these areas when using either an electronic refrigerant leak
detector (J-41995) or fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220).
If any dye is observed using a fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220), confirm the leak using a
electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995). It is possible that the dye is from a prior leak that was
repaired and not properly cleaned.
When searching for leaks, do not stop when one leak is found but continue to check for additional
leaks at all system components and connections.
When searching for refrigerant leaks using an electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995), move
the probe along the suspected leak area at 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in) per second and no further than 6
mm (1/4 in) from the component.
CAUTION: Moving the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe slower and closer to the suspected
leak area will improve the chances of finding a leak.
Checking System for Leaks Using the Fluorescent Dye Leak Detector
1. Check the A/C system for leaks using the fluorescent dye leak detector and safety goggles
(J-42220) in a low sunlight area (area without windows
preferable). Illuminate all components, fittings and lines. The dye will appear as a bright
green/yellow area at the point of leakage. Fluorescent dye observed at the evaporator drain
opening indicates an evaporator core assembly leak (tubes, core or expansion valve).
2. If the suspected area is difficult to see, use an adjustable mirror or wipe the area with a clean
shop rag or cloth, then inspect the shop rag or cloth
with the fluorescent dye leak detector (J-42220) for dye residue.
3. After the leak is repaired, remove any residual dye using refrigerant dye cleaner (J-43872) to
prevent future misdiagnosis. 4. Perform a system performance check and then verify the leak
repair using a electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995).
NOTE: Other gases in the work area or substances on the A/C components, for example, anti-freeze,
windshield washer fluid, solvents and oils, may falsely trigger the leak detector. Make sure the
surfaces to be checked are clean.
- Clean with a dry cloth or blow off with shop air.
- Do not allow the sensor tip of the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) to contact with any
substance. This can also cause false readings and may damage the detector.
Dye Injection
NOTE: This procedure is only necessary when recharging the system or when the compressor has
seized and must be replaced.
1. Check the A/C system static (at rest) pressure. Pressure must be at least 345 kPa (3.52
kg-sq.cm, 50 psi). 2. Pour one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak
detection dye (J-41447) into the HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector
(J-41459).
CAUTION: If repairing the A/C system or replacing a component, pour the HFC-134a (R-134a)
fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) directly into the open system connection and proceed with
the service procedures.
3. Connect the refrigerant dye injector (J-41459) to the low-pressure service valve. 4. Start the
engine and switch the A/C system ON. 5. When the A/C system is operating (compressor running),
inject one bottle 7.4 cc (1/4 ounce) of HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye
(J-41447) through the low-pressure service valve using HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459).
Refer to the manufacturer's operating instructions.
6. With the engine still running, disconnect the HFC-134a (R-134a) dye injector (J-41459) from the
low-pressure service valve. 7. Operate the A/C system for a minimum of 20 minutes to mix the
HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye (J-41447) with the A/C
system oil. Depending on the leak size, operating conditions and location of the leak, it may take
from minutes to days for the HFC-134a (R-134a) fluorescent leak detection dye to penetrate an
A/C system leak and become visible.
Electronic Refrigerant Leak Detector
PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING LEAK DETECTOR
NOTE: When performing a refrigerant leak check, use a electronic refrigerant leak detector
(J-41995) or equivalent. Ensure that the electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is calibrated
and set properly according to the manufacturer's operating instructions.
Page 5303
Case 3
Page 10987
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 115
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 6953
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 7221
Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using ONLY ONE of the operations shown.
Disclaimer
Page 11004
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 10936
Collision Avoidance Sensor: Service and Repair
REAR SONAR SENSORS Refer to "Bumper; Service and Repair" for rear sonar sensor removal
and installation procedures.
Page 7700
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Diagram Information and Instructions
Wiper Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 8493
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3820
Page 461
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 14136
After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch.
1. Raise the glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the
glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the
original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position.
Page 2403
Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Crew
Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 5915
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Automatic Air Conditioner
Compressor Clutch: Specifications Automatic Air Conditioner
Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance
.............................................................................................................................................. 0.3 - 0.6
mm (0.012 - 0.024 in)
Page 12650
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 10577
Page 9677
CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT
Removal
1. Remove the instrument panel trim. 2. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. 3. Remove
the defroster nozzle. 4. Remove the RH and LH side demister ducts. 5. Remove the RH and LH
ventilator ducts. 6. Remove the center ventilator duct.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FLOOR DUCT
Removal
1. Remove the floor carpet. Refer to "FLOOR TRIM". 2. Remove the two clips and remove the floor
duct.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
GRILLES
Removal
1. Remove the interior trim panel as necessary. Refer to "BODY SIDE TRIM" or "HEADLINING". 2.
Remove the ventilator grille from the interior trim panel.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 14272
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 5311
Case 11
Page 8297
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 448
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9303
2. Install the large-diameter side of the boots to the gear housing assembly. 3. Install the
small-diameter side of the boots to the groove of the inner sockets.
4. Install the boot clamps to the boots, as shown.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the large-diameter boot clamps.
5. Crimp the large-diameter boot clamps, using Tool.
Tool number: KV40107300 ( - )
6. Install the cylinder tubes to the gear housing assembly 7. Install the lock nuts and outer sockets
to the inner sockets.
8. Thread the outer sockets onto the inner sockets to the specified length "U", then tighten the lock
nuts to the specification. Reconfirm that the
tie-rod length "L" is within specification. Maximum inner socket: 115.2 mm (4.54 inch) length "L"
Page 6908
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 5203
Case 9
Locations
SRS Components Parts Location
Page 2440
^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep.
7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and
adjustments.
NOTE:
If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not
necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster
and easier.
^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system.
If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a
centered steering wheel.
^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right.
This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall
mounted rack and pinion units.
IMPORTANT:
If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to
jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct.
After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment
8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order.
9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight
flat road.
Page 7614
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 3220
EM-2
Front Power Socket LH, Rear Cargo Power Socket
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Power Socket LH, Rear Cargo Power Socket
Front Power Socket LH, Rear Cargo Power Socket
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
1. Disconnect battery negative terminal.
2. Remove inner socket from the ring, while pressing the hook on the ring out from square hole. 3.
Disconnect power socket connector. 4. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing
pawls.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5715
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
Page 3563
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 861
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8111
3. Make sure the transmission is in Park and the brake pedal is released.
IMPORTANT:
Do not push the brake pedal until step 6.
4. Start the engine and let it idle.
^ Keep the transmission in Park.
5. On CONSULT-II, select ABS Data Monitor.
6. Slowly push the brake pedal approximately 2 inches, then release.
NOTE:
2 inches is approximately half-way between the pedal "see height" and "depressed height".
7. Repeat step 6 ten times.
^ If DTC C1179 is detected (comes up on CONSULT-II), this bulletin applies; go to Part 2.
^ If DTC C1179 is not detected, go to the next step.
8. Repeat steps 2 though 7.
^ If you have done steps 2 through 7 twice, and DIG C1179 is not detected, this bulletin does not
apply. Go to ASIST for further diagnostic information.
Part 2
Part 2: Download special ABS/VDC Reprogramming Data from ASIST onto your standard 8 MB
(orange) Reprogramming Card.
This part of the procedure involves two general steps:
^ Setting up
^ Download (transfer) data from ASIST into CONSULT-II (8 MB orange Reprogramming card).
SETTING UP:
1. Install the standard 8 MB (orange)
Reprogramming Card into CONSULT-II.
Use slot A-top slot (see Figure 1).
CAUTION:
Do NOT use the 16 MB (orange) "QR25 Campaign ECM Software" Card (# J-44200-ECMR-16). If
you use this card, it will be reformatted to an 8 MB card.
Page 134
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 7407
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 11869
WARNING:
This repair MUST be done with the vehicle's full weight on the suspension.
EITHER:
Place the vehicle on a drive-on hoist or alignment rack to lift the vehicle.
OR
Leave all of the vehicle's weight on all four (4) tires, while parked (do not lift the vehicle).
DO NOT lift the vehicle in any amount. The suspension must support all of the vehicle's weight
during the whole repair procedure or the bushing will be under load and difficult to remove.
1. With the vehicle positioned as stated above, put the shift selector in "P" (PARK) position.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Remove the bolt and bushing from the windup clip (clip).
4. Check the condition of the bolt's and clip's threads, and the bushing.
^ If both the bushing and bolt's threads are okay, reuse them.
^ If the bushing and / or bolt's threads are damaged, replace with all parts in the "Spring Assembly
Kit".
^ If the clip's threads are damaged, replace the leaf spring assembly.
5. Install the bolt (and bushing) with Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE or
equivalent thread locking material applied to the threads.
Torque bolt to 32 N.m (3.2 kg-m, 23 ft-lb).
Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant: Capacity Specifications
Refrigerant Capacity
..............................................................................................................................................................
0.70 ± 0.05 kg (1.54± 0.11 lb)
Page 3271
^ Press-fit the rear oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION: ^
Do not damage the crankshaft or cylinder block.
^ Press-fit the oil seal straight to avoid causing burrs or tilting.
^ Do not touch grease applied onto the oil seal lip.
^ Do not damage or scratch the outer circumference of the rear oil seal.
^ Tap until flattened with the front edge of the oil seal retainer.
3. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 6658
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 10320
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 2286
Page 4557
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12955
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 8177
Steering Angle Sensor: Adjustments
Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle
sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel
alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle.
NOTE: Adjustment of steering angle sensor neutral position requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and
CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not
start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on
CONSULT-II screen in this order.
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels
in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU",
and "STR ANGLE SIG" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "STR ANGLE
SIG" is within 0 ± 3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 1 to 5.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
Page 7613
Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 13627
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 13976
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 1795
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 12488
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 5240
Case 12
Page 3179
12. Disconnect harness clips (2 clips).
13. Unbolt alternator and set aside.
14. Loosen, but do not remove, the bolts that hold the alternator and power steering pump
mounting bracket to the engine block (5 bolts).
NOTE:
^ When the power steering pump bracket bolts are loose, the pump/bracket assembly can be
rotated or shifted slightly clockwise and counterclockwise.
^ The best position for the bracket is when the clearance measured at the top and the bottom of the
pulleys are equal.
15. When the bracket is set to the best position, tighten the bolts (5 bolts).
^ Torque 60 Nm (6.11 kg-m, 44.25 ft-lb)
16. Install alternator in reverse order of removal.
Page 11298
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 8530
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 5508
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 13815
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 11282
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 5732
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 12 - 16)
Diagnostic Procedure
Page 5544
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 8326
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 9362
^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, position the disc rotor according
to alignment mark.
^ When installing wheel and tire. Refer to "Rotation". See: Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and
Repair/Tire Rotation
Page 11063
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 7723
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 13580
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13645
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2149
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 1027
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 12952
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 10837
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 8392
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 5900
Page 10808
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 6983
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5893
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 1478
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 10)
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 11)
Page 12123
^ If you find the old Spacer Washer on the floor of the car, discard it.
Reinstall the Seat and Check its Operation
7. Reinstall the seat, making sure:
^ All wire harnesses are connected and correctly routed to prevent pinching and chaffing.
^ The four seat mounting bolts are tightened to: 45 Nm (4.6 Kg.m, 35 ft-lbs.)
8. Re-connect the battery cables, positive cable first (if you disconnected them in step 2).
9. Check the power seat controls, making sure:
^ They operate correctly.
^ The incident noise is fixed.
10. Re-program the radio station presets and re-set the clock (if you disconnected the battery in
step 2).
11. Initialize the power windows and sunroof as applicable. For Frontier and Pathfinder vehicles
with Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) reset the Steering Angle Sensor as applicable. Reference the
Electronic Service Manual as needed.
Disclaimer
Page 10324
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 4669
Page 3936
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 3960
Page 5141
Case 10
Page 8112
2. Connect the AC power supply to CONSULT-II.
3. Connect CONSULT-II to the ASIST PC with the special Ethernet cable (P/N 02002554 is printed
on the cable).
a. Connect one end to CONSULT-II at the "PC port".
b. Connect the other end to the ASIST PC at the "Ethernet card" connection port.
4. Confirm the CONSULT-II date and time are correctly set as follows:
(This is necessary to provide a valid print-out for warranty claims.)
a. With the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming card in slot A, turn ON CONSULT-II.
b. Touch [SUB MODE]
c. Touch [SET DATE] (see Figure 2).
1) If the date is not correct, touch the [MONTH], [DAY] or [YEAR] as needed. Then adjust it by
using arrow keys. Once done, press [SAVE], press [BACK], and go to step d.
2) If the date is OK, press [BACK] and go to step d.
d. Touch [SET TIME] (see Figure 2).
1) If time is not correct, touch the [HOUR], [MINUTE] or [AM/PM] as needed. Then adjust it by
using arrow keys. After you are done, press [SAVE], press [BACK] and go to step 5.
2) If time is OK, press [BACK] and go to step 5.
IMPORTANT NOTE
^ If your ASIST PC has already been set up to perform ECU reprogramming, proceed to step 5.
^ If you are unsure whether your ASIST PC has already been set up for ECU reprogramming, look
in ASIST, under "CONSULT Utilities" - "CONSULT-II Info" - "NISSAN" - "ECU Reprogramming".
This will give you instructions for setting the Ethernet (IP) Address of the ASIST PC and
CONSULT-II. You will need to do this before performing ECU reprogramming.
DOWNLOAD (TRANSFER) DATA FROM ASIST INTO CONSULT-II (8 MB Orange Card)
Page 13494
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 12008
Figure 15
28. Check the gear box to mounting tab distance again (as you did in steps 20 and 21). Make sure
the distance has not changed (see Figure 15).
- If N/G, adjust.
Figure 16
29. Tighten/torque the Seat Track Mounting Tab Bolts that you installed in step 25 (see Figure 16).
- Bolt torque: 65-84 in-lb (7.3-9.4 Nm)
Figure 17
30. Reinstall screws to attach the side finishers and the front finisher (see Figure 17).
Recall - Right Rear Door Upper Latch Defect
Technical Service Bulletin # 06-032A Date: 060425
Recall - Right Rear Door Upper Latch Defect
Reference: NTB06-032A
Date: April 25, 2006
VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN PASSENGER SIDE DOOR UPPER LATCH
This bulletin amends NTB06-032 and includes revised Claims Information. Please discard all
previous copies of NTB06-032.
CAMPAIGN I.D. # /NHTSA #: PB017/06V-064
APPLIED VEHICLE: 2006 Titan (A60) - King Cab Models only
APPLIED VINS: 1N6*A06**6N543640-546599
INTRODUCTION
Nissan has determined that some 2006 model year Nissan Titan King Cab vehicles fail to conform
to the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (FMVSS) 206 - Door Locks And Door Retention
Components. FMVSS 206 specifies strength requirements for door locks, hinges and latches in
vehicles. The upper latch assembly of the right side rear door in some Titan King Cab vehicles
does not meet one of the requirements in this standard. This may result in the right side doors
coming partially open in the case of certain crashes and increasing the risk of injury to occupants.
To prevent this condition from occurring, Nissan will replace the upper latch assemblies with ones
that meet the standard. All other requirements under FMVSS 206 and other standards are met.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PB017 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED
The number of vehicles potentially affected is approximately 480.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the retailer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to delivery under a
sale or lease. Failure to do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration. While federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers
to correct any used vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 1575
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Manual Air Conditioner
Intake Sensor Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the A/C
evaporator cover. It converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a
resistance value which is then input to the front air control.
Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 9504
7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem
(see Figure 6).
^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7).
Tire to Rim Slippage:
^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire
may become un-balanced.
^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage.
^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry.
^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced.
WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION
Transfer Fluid Inspection
Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Transfer Fluid Inspection
TRANSFER FLUID
Components
Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Headlamp Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Classification: EL10-021A
Reference: NTB10-061A
Date: June 29, 2010
XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE
This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous
versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps
IF YOU CONFIRM
A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an
internal issue),
ACTION
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon
headlamps.
NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident.
^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available
to solve the incident, if one should occur.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the
repair performed.
^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 116
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13726
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Specifications
Engine Oil Drain Plug: Specifications
Oil pan drain plug ................................................................................................................................
................................. 34.3 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft. lbs.)
Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start
engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition
switch OFF.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two
or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse
after servicing fuel system.
Page 7837
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 104
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 3744
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 6901
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
Page 2075
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 13685
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 8768
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Front Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check
Front Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check
Page 10348
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Engine - Drive Belt Squeaking Noise
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-058 Date: 080606
Engine - Drive Belt Squeaking Noise
Classification: EM-08-002
Reference: NTB08-058
Date: June 6, 2008
TITAN / ARMADA; DRIVE BELT SQUEAK NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2008 Armada (TA60) 2006-2008 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is a squeak noise coming from the drive belt.
ACTION
A. Check to see if the drive belt auto tensioner is also noisy. If it is, you will replace it as part of this
Service Procedure.
B. Check the alignment of the power steering pump/pulley to the crankshaft pulley using a
straightedge. If it is mis-aligned, perform the steps in this Bulletin to align it.
C. Clean the crankshaft pulley belt ribs.
D. Replace the drive belt and, if necessary, replace the drive belt auto tensioner.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 213
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Window Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 3696
Body Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Specifications
Page 256
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 10860
Page 14091
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) (Steps 3 - 5)
Page 5714
Engine Control Module: Connector Views
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
Page 778
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 6248
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 13965
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Component Locations
Knock Sensor: Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 9965
Figure A-3
Page 13160
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 3993
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 2768
Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant
Page 1009
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 12623
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH
Removal
1. Remove cluster lid A.
2. Carefully pry tabs and remove illumination control switch from cluster lid A.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 10518
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor electrical connector. 2. Disconnect the refrigerant
pressure sensor electrical connector and remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the
condenser.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
- Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil
to it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 5687
Page 10810
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Classification: WT11-003
Reference: NTB11-029
Date: March 21, 2011
TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration.
^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care
to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin.
Tire Mounting Tips:
NOTE:
These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to
read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment
1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid.
^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process.
2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and
corrosion.
Page 12644
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 11052
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 6084
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of
the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is
disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2
seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and
wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 2104
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
APP SENSOR
Component Description
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal
assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers
which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to
the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal
and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the
accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the
accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel
cut.
Page 13507
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 4734
b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a).
c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed.
^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer.
d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2.
2. Record the radio station presets:
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
NOTE:
Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding.
Page 12085
Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Page 385
Page 3569
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 14010
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 2000
Page 10046
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 8870
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2514
NOTE:
^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB.
Disclaimer
Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 3073
CRANKSHAFT
Page 7178
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking)
Removal and Installation
Components
Components
REMOVAL
Page 3979
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 1300
Power Seat Switch: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 382
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 6342
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 13896
Page 9265
^ Confirm mating marks are aligned with hose and clamp, then correct if needed.
^ To install eye joint, align projection of eye joint with notch of power steering pump, and attach eye
joint to power steering pump properly. Tighten eye bolt by hand fully, then torque to specification.
Page 793
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 6730
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Entertainment Systems - Ticking From DVD Monitor
DVD Player: Customer Interest Entertainment Systems - Ticking From DVD Monitor
Classification: BT07-001
Reference: NTB07-015
Date: February 23, 2007
2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN; TICKING NOISE FROM DVD MONITOR WHILE OPENED
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60) 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60)
APPLIED VINS: Vehicles built before: 5N1(******)7N701300 Vehicles built before:
1N6(******)7N202494
APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before: August 31, 2006
IF YOU CONFIRM
Ticking noise coming from DVD Monitor while opened.
ACTIONS
^ Remove part of the roof console to access DVD wire.
^ Apply foam pad to wire and felt tape to hinge.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding table.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 4199
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
IAT SENSOR
Component Description
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air
temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature.
Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Service and Repair
Sunroof / Moonroof Drain: Service and Repair
DRAIN HOSES
Removal
1. Remove the headlining. 2. Visually check the drain hoses for proper connections, damage or
deterioration. 3. Remove each drain hose and check visually for damage, cracks or deterioration.
- Pour water through the drain hose to check for damage. If any damage is found, replace the drain
hose.
Installation
Page 2584
Page 14491
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
Valve Clearance
Valve Lifter
Page 2357
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 4144
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 13742
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 7020
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS
Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Diagram Information and Instructions
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 4216
NOTES:
^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply.
^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product
Program, Website order via link on dealer portal.
^ WD-40 is available from various local sources.
Removal Tool
^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to
accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and
strip the sensor.
^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box
end wrench or 6-point deep well socket.
1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice.
2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the
threads.
Page 5941
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exhaust Manifold and Three Way Catalyst
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
REMOVAL
WARNING: Perform the work when the exhaust and cooling system have cooled sufficiently.
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Drain the engine coolant from the radiator. 3.
Remove the engine undercover using power tool. 4. Remove the radiator and radiator hoses. 5.
Remove the drive belts. 6. Remove the air fuel ratio A/F sensors (bank 1, bank 2).
^ Follow steps below to remove each air fuel ratio A/F sensor.
a. Remove the harness connector of each air fuel ratio A/F sensor, and harness from bracket and
middle clamp.
b. Remove the air fuel ratio A/F sensors from both left and right exhaust manifolds using Tool.
Tool number: - (J-44626)
CAUTION:
Page 13754
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 11055
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 8966
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Engine Control Component Parts Locations
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3964
Page 8954
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 13493
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5018
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 3
Input/output signal chart
TYPE 2/TYPE 3/TYPE 4
System diagram
System Diagram
- Type 2
Page 1125
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Locations
SRS Components Parts Location
Locations
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection
Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 1707
2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows:
a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit
b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots
^ For Type A see Figure 1
^ For Type B see Figure 2
Page 4031
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8597
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 5501
Diagram Information and Instructions
Windshield Washer Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 1894
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Window System
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Page 10362
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 4473
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 1480
Page 6056
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION:
- Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
- Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the
quick connector O-ring maintains sealability.
- Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel
pressure.
- Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C,
etc.). Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in
manifold vacuum.
NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out.
The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because A60 models do not have fuel return
system.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove engine
cover. 3. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488.
- Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
- Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
- Keep fuel hose connections clean.
4. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown
in figure.
- Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter.
- When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality.
5. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 6. Start engine and
check for fuel leakage. 7. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
- During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi)
8. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 9. Check the following.
- Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
- Fuel filter for clogging
- Fuel pump
- Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or
replace.
10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel
pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE
RELEASE".
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM
Programming Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 5169
Case 5
Page 12243
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection
Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Fuel Pressure: By Symptom Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Classification: FE07-004
Reference: NTB07-040
Date: June 6, 2007
2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007
Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223
APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007
IF YOU CONFIRM
When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced,
ACTIONS
1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure).
2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump.
NOTE:
Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 9130
SPECIAL TOOLS
Page 9674
6. Remove the center ventilator duct.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
FLOOR DUCT
Removal
1. Remove the floor carpet. Refer to "FLOOR TRIM". 2. Remove the two clips and remove the floor
duct.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
GRILLES
Removal
1. Remove the interior trim panels as necessary. Refer to "INSTRUMENT PANEL" or
"HEADLINING". 2. Remove the ventilator grille from the interior trim panel.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 10672
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 891
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 8786
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 4866
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 4699
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 10037
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 13098
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 5188
Case 10
Page 9921
Figure C-6, Figure C-7
b. Remove the 4 bumper bolts shown.
c. Lift the bumper OFF of the locating tabs; both sides.
For Titan with plastic bumper (body color bumper), do the following:
Page 5252
Case 5
Page 9459
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Page 9589
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 5903
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 7624
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 14231
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 14202
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 6966
8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM.
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 ->
3), and then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component
Parts)/Components
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with
terminal clips.
Page 570
Page 3724
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 6869
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 3728
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 11929
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 13821
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 12422
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 4601
Page 10513
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 2)
Diagram Information and Instructions
Wiper Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 4876
Optional Splice
Automatic Air Conditioner
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Automatic Air Conditioner
Intake Sensor Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on the heater & cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air
after it passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air
control.
Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 10707
8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D"
ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7).
9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A).
10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make
sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B).
11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is
firmly applied (see Figure 9).
12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt.
13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring.
Page 8758
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 1305
Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 11115
Amplifier: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
AUDIO AMP.
Removal
1. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly. 2. Remove BCM. 3. Disconnect audio amp. and
satellite radio tuner (if equipped) connectors.
4. Remove audio amp./satellite radio tuner bracket screws and slide audio amp./satellite radio
tuner bracket down.
5. Remove audio amp. screws (A) and remove audio amp. from audio amp./satellite radio tuner
bracket.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 12899
c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip.
d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab.
e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump.
^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector.
f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing.
CAUTION:
DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap.
Page 12160
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 12357
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 8868
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 6573
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 14259
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 1462
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 14005
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 13104
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 7454
8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM.
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 ->
3), and then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See:
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and
Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with
terminal clips.
Page 12234
7. Using a plastic pry tool, remove the switch knobs and switch plate.
8. Remove the four bolts securing the seat pan to the frame. See Figure 3.
Page 6547
Page 12544
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 7822
2. Press [INITIATE ECU REPROGRAM] (see Figure 16), then
a. Press [VDC]
b. Review all precautions
C. Press [NEXT]
3. Select the program data (see Figure 17).
Page 3451
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 3947
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 1531
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 13683
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 1424
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 4564
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 11
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 4257
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 12877
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 4687
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 11755
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 527
5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box.
6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3.
NOTE:
There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is
easily accessible.
7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3).
8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4).
Page 3852
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 4859
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 10635
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 8683
13. Remove the lower dash side finisher.
^ There is a plastic clip behind the parking brake lever.
14. Disconnect each of the connectors on the connector support.
15. Remove connectors from support. For each connecter that is not part of the body harness:
a. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to unlock the connector mounts,
b. Then slide the connectors forward to remove them from the connector support.
Page 3729
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 7709
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 1128
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8463
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 5400
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3286
Timing Chain: Service and Repair
TIMING CHAIN
Page 7383
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 5415
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 1933
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 5517
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 1653
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1535
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 5033
System Diagram
- Type 15
System Diagram
- Type 16
Page 13105
Optional Splice
Page 6421
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 5630
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Universal Joint: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Classification: PD10-001
Reference: NTB10-052
Date: April 8, 2010
NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL
BEARINGS)
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40)
2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an
Applied Vehicle.
Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex
effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is
exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced.
ACTION
Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings).
^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement
can resolve the incident, should it occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the
electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and
appropriate coding for repairs preformed.
Page 4599
Data Link Connector: Electrical Diagrams
EC-MIL/DL
EC-MIL/DL-01
Page 8214
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 11724
Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder
Switch) Check (Crew Cab)
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 10569
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 3522
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 8501
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 12912
Page 5793
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Combination Switch: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
CONSULT-II Operation
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT- II CONVERTER to the data
link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Data Link
Connector/Schematic
Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
Engine Control Module: Recalls Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006
Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra
2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and
model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution
Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for
electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time,
the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM
relay contact due to arcing.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be
performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners
may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 9136
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Page 4498
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 5642
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 3092
^ D: Intake
NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
^ No. 1 cylinder compression TDC
^ Measure valve clearance using suitable tool.
CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully
warmed up engine are still within specifications.
9. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 270° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC
to obtain No. 3 cylinder compression TDC.
10. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table (locations
indicated with white arrow).
^ <- : Engine front
^ <- (black): Measurable at No.1 cylinder compression top dead center
^ <- (white): Measurable at No. 3 cylinder compression top dead center
^ A: RH
^ B: LH
^ C: Exhaust
^ D: Intake
NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-2-3-6-5-4-2
^ No. 3 cylinder compression TDC
Page 13800
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 14157
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 5319
Check Sheet Part 3
Check Sheet Results (Example)
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
Page 12073
12. Remove and replace the switch.
13. Secure the switch harness with the 2 clips to the seat pan.
14. Roll the side facing trim down over the new seat switch. Re-attach the loose J-Clip back onto
the seat frame.
^ Make sure the upholstered edge is flat and smooth with no bumps. See Figure 9.
^ Make sure the upholstered edge is flat and level with the side of the switch. See Figure 9.
WARNING:
Make sure the J-Clip is securely attached. A loose J-Clip may affect OCS performance.
15. Install the switch plate and switch knobs.
16. Set the seat pan back onto the seat frame and secure with the 4 bolts. Torque 27.5 Nm (2.8
Kg-m, 20 ft-lb).
17. Re-attach the seat harnesses to the seat pan.
18. Re-attach the lower flap cover.
Specifications
Page 12972
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1791
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 5027
System Diagram
- Type 8
System Diagram
- Type 9
System Diagram
Page 7318
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 10590
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 5133
Case 2
VDC/TCS/ABS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 2975
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Axle
Axle Shaft
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Before removing the axle shaft, remove the ABS sensor to reposition the ABS sensor
out of the way. Failure to do so may result in damage to the ABS sensor and cause the ABS
sensor to become inoperative.
Page 505
Body Control Module: Programming and Relearning
Configuration
DESCRIPTION
CONFIGURATION has two functions as follows:
- READ CONFIGURATION is the function to confirm vehicle configuration of current BCM.
- WRITE CONFIGURATION is the function to write vehicle configuration on BCM.
CAUTION: When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-II.
- Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order.
- If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur.
- Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Data Link
Connector/Schematic
Page 7480
4. Remove bolts and detach control device.
INSTALLATION
1. Install new O-ring to transfer control device.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply petroleum jelly.
2. Install transfer control device.
a. Turn control shift rod fully counterclockwise using flat-bladed screwdriver, and then put mark on
control shift rod.
b. Align transfer control device shaft cutout with mark on control shift rod, and install.
NOTE: Turn transfer control device when transfer control device connection does not match.
Page 4642
Page 4532
14. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION is completed.
Service and Repair
Front Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR LOCK
Component Structure
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the front door window and front door regulator assembly. Refer to "FRONT DOOR
GLASS REGULATOR ASSEMBLY". 2. Remove the front door window rear glass run.
3. Remove the door side grommet, and the bolt (TORX T30) from the grommet hole.
Torx bolt 5.3 N.m (0.54 kg-m, 47 in-lb)
Page 13932
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 3)
Brakes - Front Brake Pad Service Supplement
Brake Caliper: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front Brake Pad Service Supplement
Classification: BR10-005
Reference: NTB10-081
Date: June 25, 2010
2004 - 2010 TITAN AND ARMADA; FRONT BRAKE PAD SERVICE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
Front brake service is needed that will require the removal of the front brake caliper cylinder body
or brake pads,
ACTION:
Follow the Service Procedure in this bulletin as a supplement to the brake service.
NOTE:
The supplemental items in the Service Procedure of this bulletin supersede any previous detailed
brake pad removal procedures.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Partially drain the brake fluid.
^ Refer to section BR (DRAIN and REFILL) in the Service Manual.
2. Remove the front wheels.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed for front wheel removal.
Page 13969
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 9225
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Front
Seat Belt: Service and Repair Front
King Cab
SEAT BELTS
Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt
Removal - King Cab
1. Remove D-ring anchor bolt cover and bolt. 2. Remove anchor cover and bolt. 3. Remove lower
finisher. 4. Disconnect seat belt pre-tensioner connector. 5. Remove seat belt retractor and belt
assembly.
Calibration of Decel G Sensor
Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair Calibration of Decel G Sensor
Calibration of Decel G Sensor
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw
rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or
after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the decel G sensor before running vehicle.
NOTE: Calibration of decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position.
CAUTION: ^
The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle.
^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified
pressure value.
2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and
turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine).
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen
in this order.
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR",
"SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that
"DECEL G SEN" is
within ± 0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
Page 13073
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 6504
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay
Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement
Reference: NTB10-137B
Date: December 22, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006
FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY
This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have
been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068
NHTSA#: 10V-517
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40)
2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM
relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles,
oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including
the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 1384
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ECT SENSOR
Component Description
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The
sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in
temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 2645
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the following parts from the trim panel:
^ pull handle cover
^ power window switch assembly (if equipped)
Refer to the INT section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal
instructions.
2. Following the instructions on the label, apply Nissan Vinyl and Leather Cleaner to the trim panel
surface.
3. Use a soft bristle brush to gently clean the surface.
4. Mist the area lightly with water to rinse.
5. Use a clean cloth to wipe the area clean.
Page 1737
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 12224
Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 3243
Page 276
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 552
5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box.
6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3.
NOTE:
There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is
easily accessible.
7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3).
8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4).
Page 13487
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Locations
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 3292
2. Install the camshaft sprockets.
^ Install the intake camshaft sprocket and exhaust camshaft sprockets by selectively using the
groove of the dowel pin according to the bank. (Common part used for both banks.)
^ Lock the hexagonal part of the camshaft in the same way as for removal, and tighten the bolts.
^ A = I: Intake
^ B = E: Exhaust
3. Install the crankshaft sprockets for both banks.
^ Install LH bank crankshaft sprocket (B) and RH bank crankshaft sprocket (C) so that their flange
side (A) (the larger diameter side without teeth) faces in the direction shown.
NOTE: The same parts are used but facing directions are different.
4. Install the timing chains and associated parts.
^ Align the alignment mark on each sprocket and the timing chain for installation.
CAUTION: ^
Before installing timing chain tensioner, it is possible to change the position of alignment mark on
timing chain and each sprocket. After the alignment marks are aligned, keep them aligned by
holding them by hand.
^ Install the slack guides and tension guides onto the correct side by checking the identification
mark on the surface.
^ Install the timing chain tensioner with the plunger locked in with the stopper pin.
CAUTION: ^
Before and after the installation of the timing chain tensioner, make sure that the alignment mark
on the timing chain is not out of alignment.
^ After installing the timing chain tensioner, remove the stopper pin to release the tensioner. Make
sure the tensioner is released.
^ To avoid chain-link skipping of the timing chain, do not move crankshaft or camshafts until the
front cover is installed.
5. In the same way as for the RH bank, install the timing chain and associated parts on the LH
bank. 6. Install the oil pump.
7. Install the oil pump drive spacer as follows:
^ Install so that the front mark on the front edge of the oil pump drive spacer faces the front of the
engine.
Page 4688
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 9627
The intake door control determines the intake door position based on the position of the
recirculation switch. When the recirculation switch is depressed the intake door motor rotates
closing off the fresh air inlet and recirculating the cabin air. If the recirculation switch is depressed
again, the intake door motor rotates in the opposite direction, again allowing fresh air into the cabin.
In the AUTO mode, the front air control determines the intake door position based on the ambient
temperature, the intake air temperature and the in-vehicle temperature. When the DEFROST, or
OFF switches are pushed, the front air control sets the intake door at the fresh position.
Intake Door Control Specification
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake door motor
The intake door motor is attached to the intake unit. It rotates so that air is drawn from inlets set by
the front air control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a lever which activates the intake door.
Page 5161
Case 14
Case 15
Page 10952
2. Wrap adhesive foam around the DVD harness wire as shown in Figure 1.
3. Reinstall the console in reverse order of removal.
4. With the DVD in the open position, check for rattle noise by tapping around the console to make
sure the incident has been resolved.
Disclaimer
Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control
Unit Replacement
Control Module: Service and Repair Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit
Replacement
Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement
When replacing transfer assembly or transfer control unit, check the 4WD shift indicator pattern
and adjustment of the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit if necessary.
CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR PATTERN 1. Set 4WD shift switch to "2WD", "4H", "4LO", "4H"
and "2WD" in order. Stay at each switch position for at least 2 seconds.
2. Confirm 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp are changed properly as follows.
^ If OK, the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit is correct.
^ If NG, the position is different between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Adjust the
position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to pattern table.
Transfer Position Adjustment Pattern
METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT "2WD" Select Adjustment Pattern
1. Start engine. Run engine for at least 10 seconds.
2. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp.
Pattern A 1. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed.
Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. 2. Turn 4WD shift switch to "4LO" position. Stay in "4LO" for at
least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 4. Start engine. 5. Erase self-diagnosis. 6. Check
4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again.
If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new
transfer control unit and retry the above check.
Pattern B 1. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed.
Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds.
Page 8464
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 13055
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 1106
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 14219
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 802
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 13888
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 6358
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2460
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
Page 8647
Page 1611
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 6363
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1454
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 2697
Fluid - A/T: Fluid Type Specifications
A/T Fluid: .............................................................................................................................................
................................................. Nissan Matic Fluid J
NOTE:Using Automatic Transmission fluid other than Genuine Nissan ATF Matic Fluid J will cause
deterioration in driveability and automatic
transmission durability, and may damage the automatic transmission, which is not covered by the
NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
Page 9570
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Service Precautions
Catalytic Converter: Service Precautions
Precautions for Three Way Catalyst
If a large amount of unburned fuel flows into the catalyst, the catalyst temperature will be
excessively high. To prevent this, follow the instructions.
- Use unleaded gasoline only. Leaded gasoline will seriously damage the three way catalyst.
- When checking for ignition spark or measuring engine compression, make tests quickly and only
when necessary.
- Do not run engine when the fuel tank level is low, otherwise the engine may misfire, causing
damage to the catalyst. Do not place the vehicle on flammable material. Keep flammable material
off the exhaust pipe and the three way catalyst.
Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattling Noises
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-094 Date: 100812
Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattling Noises
Classification: EM-10-009
Reference: NTB10-094
Date: August 12, 2010
EXHAUST HEAT SHIELD NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder
(R51) 2005- 2010 Xterra (N 50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A noise is coming from the front exhaust tube heat shield(s) due to rattle.
ACTION: Secure the heat shield(s) with new band clamps (see PARTS INFORMATION).
^ Refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE.
NOTE:
Do not replace the front exhaust tube for this incident, if it should occur.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
WARNING:
Page 1725
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 6791
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Automatic Air Conditioner
Hose/Line HVAC: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner
Low-Pressure Flexible Hose
Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Flexible Hose
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine room cover using power tools. 2. Remove the engine air cleaner and air
ducts. 3. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
4. Remove the low-pressure flexible hose.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-ring of the low-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil to
it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
High-Pressure Flexible Hose
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Flexible Hose
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine under cover. 2. Remove the engine air cleaner and air ducts. 3. Discharge
the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 4. Remove the high-pressure
flexible hose.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure flexible hose with a new one, then apply compressor oil
to it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
High-Pressure Pipe
Removal and Installation for High-pressure Pipe
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal and battery positive terminal. 2. Reposition the IPDM
E/R aside. 3. Remove the front right wheel and tire assembly. Refer to "Rotation". 4. Position aside
the front floor insulator. 5. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service
Procedure". 6. Remove the low pressure pipe. 7. Remove the high-pressure pipe.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipe with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-ring of the high-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it when
installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Low-Pressure Pipe
Removal and Installation for Low-pressure Pipe
Page 4868
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Automatic Air Conditioner
Blower Motor: Testing and Inspection Automatic Air Conditioner
Front Blower Motor Circuit
SYMPTOM:
- Blower motor operation is malfunctioning.
Inspection Flow
INSPECTION FLOW
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Page 7741
9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically.
Page 10455
Page 4926
Engine Control Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND CIRCUIT
EC-MAIN-01
Diagram Information and Instructions
Alarm Horn Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 12369
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 305
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 11642
5. Inspect nylon insert for wear or damage.
^ Replace the insert if any wear or damage is found.
6. Apply Permatex(R) Threadlocker Blue or equivalent to the threads on the bolt.
7. Reinstall insert, bolt and armrest assembly in reverse order of removal.
^ Bolt torque: 20 Nm (2 kg-m, 15 lb-ft)
Page 13169
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 5360
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 9248
Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Front Suspension
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service
KNUCKLE
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of
each component and component status (wear, damage) are within specifications.
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
Page 13637
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Page 10871
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 2359
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 6047
NOTE:
^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB.
Disclaimer
Page 795
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 14212
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 271
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 12444
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 6)
Page 9111
Don't get butyl sealer from the welt on any of the interior trim surfaces.
60. Carefully pull down the side of the headlining at the rear just enough to get your arm above it.
61. Reach above the headlining and pop loose the rear clips (left and right side).
^ 2 clips on each side.
62. Look above the headlining, locate and disconnect the high mount brake light connector.
63. Take the harness loose from the body roof.
Page 8217
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 3625
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 4930
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 12 - 16)
Diagnostic Procedure
Page 4732
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389)
Repair Overview
PARTS INFORMATION
PARTS INFORMATION
Diagram Information and Instructions
Blower Motor Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 1862
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 11812
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Alignment: Customer Interest Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Diagram Information and Instructions
Control Module HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 12349
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 1848
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 8546
Power Distribution Module: Description and Operation
IPDM E/R (INTELLIGENT POWER DISTRIBUTION MODULE ENGINE ROOM)
System Description
- IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) integrates the relay box and fuse
block which were originally placed in engine compartment. It controls integrated relays via IPDM
E/R control circuits.
- IPDM E/R-integrated control circuits perform ON-OFF operation of relays, CAN communication
control, etc.
- It controls operation of each electrical component via ECM, BCM and CAN communication lines.
CAUTION: None of the IPDM E/R integrated relays can be removed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY IPDM E/R
1. Lamp control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the following
lamps: Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
- Parking lamps
- Tail and license lamps
- Front fog lamps
2. Wiper control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the front wipers.
3. Heated mirror relay control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the heated mirror
relay.
4. A/C compressor control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the A/C
compressor (magnetic clutch).
5. Starter control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the starter relay.
6. Cooling fan control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the ECM and controls the cooling fan
relays.
7. Horn control
Using CAN communication lines, it receives signals from the BCM and controls the horn relay.
CAN COMMUNICATION LINE CONTROL
With CAN communication, by connecting each control unit using two communication lines (CAN
L-line, CAN H-line), it is possible to transmit a maximum amount of information with minimum
wiring. Each control unit can transmit and receive data, and reads necessary information only.
1. Fail-safe control
- When CAN communication with other control units is impossible, IPDM E/R performs fail-safe
control. After CAN communication returns to normal operation, it also returns to normal control.
- Operation of control parts by IPDM E/R during fail-safe mode is as shown in the table.
IPDM E/R STATUS CONTROL
In order to save power, IPDM E/R switches status by itself based on each operating condition.
1. CAN communication status
- CAN communication is normally performed with other control units.
- Individual unit control by IPDM E/R is normally performed.
Page 3966
Page 841
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the
throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each
time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition
switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Page 11152
Page 1705
Page 10076
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 5909
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 6288
7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle
Air Volume Learning will not be carried out
successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
- It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
- It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch
ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the
MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the
MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Page 12435
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 13126
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 9763
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 2370
Page 14465
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 8329
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 2215
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 5426
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 1690
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
Page 9000
active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is
normal.
Part 1
Part 2
- If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily
diagnosed using auto active test.
Page 206
a. CONSULT-II will display the screen shown in Figure 20.
You will need to turn the ignition OFF for at least one full second and then turn the ignition back
ON.
Then press "OK" on the CONSULT-II screen.
b. CONSULT-II will automatically print out a report (see Figure 21).
^ Attach the print-out report to the Repair Order for future reference.
7. Press [BACK] two times to return to the main menu.
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF and CONSULT-II OFF.
9. Continue with Section 5.
Section 5
Section 5: Again, perform a check of all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any newly
stored DTC(s).
1. Remove the 8 MB orange Reprogramming Card from CONSULT-II.
2. Install the red/white Diagnostic Card into Slot A (top slot) of CONSULT-II.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine).
^ CONSULT-II will turn ON automatically.
^ Confirm that all electrical loads* (except for the ignition) are OFF.
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 34
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 4123
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 4119
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 13597
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 805
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 10639
Optional Splice
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
CAUTION:
- Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures
Page 14417
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8878
Optional Splice
Page 8097
VERY IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure the DLC-II is pushed in straight and fully plugged in to the vehicle connector.
^ Make sure all other DLC-II cable connections (as shown in Figure 11) are connected properly.
CAUTION
^ Nissan requires the use of essential tools shown in Figure 11 when performing ABS/VDC
reprogramming.
^ J44200-1O "Pigtail" should not be removed from the CONSULT-II DDL Port. This "Pigtail" allows
use of the stronger "quick disconnect" cable set.
^ If cables are very often changed at the DDL Port (base) of the CONSULT-II unit, cable connector
pin damage may result.
^ If there is connector pin damage, ABS/VDC reprogramming may fail. Permanent damage to the
ABS/VDC system can occur.
4. Continue with Section 2
Section 2
Section 2: Check all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTCs.
CAUTION:
It is essential that you check all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTCs before
performing the remaining sections of this procedure.
1. Remove the 8 MB orange card from CONSULT-II.
2. Install the 16 MB (red/white) Diagnostic Card into Slot A (top slot) of CONSULT-II (see Figure
12).
3. Press [START (Nissan BASED VHCL)]
4. In "SELF-DIAG RESULTS", check and erase any DTCs that are stored in the following vehicle
systems:
^ ENGINE
^ A/T
^ ABS
^ AIRBAG
^ ALL MODE AWD/4WD (if applicable)
^ DIFF LOCK (if applicable; 4WD Titan)
^ AIR LEVELIZER (if applicable)
Page 6414
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 4256
Page 4354
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Locations
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Page 1417
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 14052
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 1847
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 190
Disclaimer
Parts 1-4 Descriptions
There are 4 parts to this service procedure. They must be done in order.
Part 1: Make sure DTC C1179 is or can be stored in ABS self diagnosis.
^ Go to Part 1 for this part of the service procedure.
Part 2: Download special VDC Reprogramming Data from ASIST onto your standard 8 MB
(orange) Reprogramming Card.
^ Do NOT use the 16 MB (orange) "QR25 Campaign ECM Software" Card (# J-44200-ECMR-16).
If you use this card, it will be reformatted to an 8MB card.
^ Go to Part 2 for this part of the service procedure.
Part 3: Reprogram the VDC Control Unit with the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card (that now
contains the downloaded VDC reprogramming data from ASIST).
^ Go to Part 3 for this part of the service procedure.
Part 4: Re-program the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card back to its original format so it can be
used for standard ECU reprogramming.
^ Refer to Part 4 for this part of the service procedure.
NOTE:
These procedures should be performed in order by an OBD-II certified Technician.
Part 1
Part 1: Make sure DTC C1179 is, or can be, stored in ABS self diagnosis.
1. Using CONSULT-II, check ABS Self Diagnosis.
^ If DTC C1179 is stored, this bulletin applies; go to Part 2.
^ If DTC C1179 is not stored, go to the next step.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
Page 11809
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 9879
When intake air temperature is higher than the preset value, the compressor turns ON. The
compressor turns OFF when intake air temperature is lower than the preset value.
Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch
Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 13749
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 5741
ECM Inspection Table Part 8
Page 10668
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 7951
Brake Pad: Specifications
Brake Pad
Front brake CLZ31VC Pad Length x width x thickness
.......................................................................................................... 111.0 x 73.5 x 9.5 mm (4.73 x
2.894 x 0.374 inch) Standard thickness (new) ....................................................................................
........................................................................... 11.88 mm (0.468 inch) Repair limit thickness ..........
..............................................................................................................................................................
1.0 mm (0.039 inch)
Rear brake CLZ31VC Pad Length x width x thickness
.......................................................................................................... 83.0 x 33.0 x 8.5 mm (3.266 x
1.299 x 0.335 inch) AD14VE Standard thickness (new) ......................................................................
......................................................................................... 12.13 mm (0.478 inch) Repair limit
thickness ..............................................................................................................................................
.......................... 1.0 mm (0.039 inch)
Page 1371
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 7029
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 5545
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Specifications
Piston: Specifications
PISTON AND PISTON PIN CLEARANCE
Piston Pin Hole Diameter
^ Measure diameter of piston pin hole using suitable tool. Standard: 21.993 - 21.999 mm (0.8659 0.8661 inch)
Piston Pin Diameter
^ Measure diameter of piston pin using suitable tool. Standard: 21.989 - 21.995 mm (0.8657 0.8659 inch)
Piston and Piston Pin Clearance
(Piston pin clearance) = (Piston pin hole diameter) - (Piston pin diameter) Standard: 0.002 - 0.006
mm (0.0001 - 0.0002 inch) ^
If clearance exceeds specification, replace either or both the piston/piston pin assembly and the
connecting rod assembly with reference to the specification of each part.
^ Refer to the piston selection table to replace piston/piston pin assembly.
^ Refer to the connecting rod bearing selection table to replace connecting rod.
NOTE: The connecting rod small end grade and piston pin hole (piston pin) grade are provided
only for the parts installed at the plant. For
Page 11529
16. Remove cable sheath and barrel cable end from upper door latch (see Figure 11)
17. Install barrel cable end and cable sheath onto new upper door latch. See the Parts Information
section of this bulletin.
18. Install new upper door latch to door.
CAUTION:
^ Be careful routing the wiring harness.
^ Do not pinch wire harness between door and upper door latch.
^ Torque bolts to: 5.8 Nm (0.59 Kg-m, 51 in-lb.)
16. Reinstall upper door latch white cable clip into door.
Page 1031
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 9539
^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, position the disc rotor according
to alignment mark.
^ When installing wheel and tire. Refer to "Rotation". See: Tires/Service and Repair/Tire Rotation
Page 14078
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 996
2. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 3. Start engine. 4. Erase self-diagnosis. 5. Check 4WD shift indicator
lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again.
If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new
transfer control unit and retry the above check.
METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT "4H" OR "4LO" 1. Start engine.
Run the engine for at least 10 seconds. 2. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position
with brake pedal depressed. Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn 4WD shift switch to "2WD"
position. Stay in "2WD" for at least 2 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 5. Start engine. 6.
Erase self-diagnosis. 7. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again.
If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new
transfer control unit and retry the above check.
Page 5733
Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
PREPARATION
1. ECM is located in the engine room passenger side behind battery. 2. Remove ECM harness
connector.
3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with levers as far as they will go as
shown in the figure. 4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between the
ECM and ECM harness connector.
- Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
- Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
Page 3429
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Connector Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 8754
Optional Splice
Page 8183
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 12716
Page 592
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 6992
Column Shift Models
REMOVAL
Floor shift 1. Remove A/T finisher. 2. Disconnect A/T device harness connector. 3. Disconnect
selector control cable. 4. Remove control device assembly.
Column shift 1. Remove the column shift control.
2. Remove the A/T cable clip lock plate and remove the cable from column shifter pin.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in reverse order of removal. ^
After installation is completed, be sure to check A/T position.
Page 6877
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 1112
Windshield Washer Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 4968
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 7071
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
NOTE: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "Components". See: Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component
Parts)/Components
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
Locations
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 9198
1. Measure camber and caster of both the right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge
and adjust as necessary to specification.
Camber and caster: Refer to "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*). See: Specifications/Front Suspension
NOTE: Some vehicles may be equipped with straight (non-adjustable) lower link bolts and
washers. In order to adjust camber and caster on these vehicles, first replace the lower link bolts
and washers with adjustable (cam) bolts and washers.
2. If outside of the specified value, adjust camber and caster using the cam bolts (1) in the front
lower link (2).
CAUTION: After adjusting the camber and caster check the toe-in.
NOTE: Camber changes about 3' (0.05°) with each graduation of one cam bolt. Refer to table for
examples of lower link cam bolt effect on camber and caster.
3. Tighten the adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to "Components".
Toe-In
TOE-IN
WARNING: Always perform the following procedure on a flat surface.
- Make sure that no person is in front of the vehicle before pushing it.
1. Bounce the front of vehicle up and down to stabilize the vehicle height (posture).
2. Push the vehicle straight ahead about 5 m (16 ft.). 3. Put a mark on base line of the tread (rear
side) of both front tires at the same height as hub center as shown. These marks are measuring
points.
Page 4835
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 5646
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 2998
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Pantograph Jack
LIFTING POINT
Pantograph Jack
WARNING:
- Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to
support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle.
- Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.
Page 14489
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 642
Attachment General Procedure
Page 12040
Figure 18
31. Re-install the four Seat Bottom Cushion Bolts M8, 12 mm head (see Figure 18). Bolt torque:
13-17 ft-lb (17.5-23.7 Nm).
32. Re-connect the slide motor electrical connector, making sure it snaps in securely.
33. Place the seat assembly back into the vehicle and re-connect all electrical connectors. Make
sure they all snap together securely.
34. Re-connect the battery cables, positive cable first.
35. Finish reinstalling the seat. Torque mounting bolts to 45 N.m (4.6 Kg.m, 35 ft-lbs.).
- If needed, refer to section SE in the Service Manual (ESM) for seat installation information.
36. Operate all seat switches to make sure everything works as it should.
37. If the vehicle is equipped with "ADP", for the ADP entry/exit feature to return to normal
operation, procedure A or B must be performed.
Procedure A:
1. Insert key into the ignition key cylinder. (Ignition switch is "OFF".)
2. Open - close - open the driver side door (dome lamp; "ON" - "OFF" - "ON" ).
3. End
Procedure B:
1. Drive the vehicle at more than 25 km/h (16 MPH).
2. End
38. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
39. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual and perform the following as needed:
- Power Window Initialization
- Power Sunroof Initialization
- Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
- Throttle Valve closed Position Learning
- Idle Air Volume Learning
- Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position
- Rear View Monitor Guiding Line Adjustment
Page 11109
Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 3 - 4)
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System
- TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Page 14009
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1807
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 12589
Page 1181
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 12938
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 13484
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 319
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 12978
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 12715
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8738
52. Remove the rear upper finishers-left and right side.
^ Remove the clip.
^ Use a plastic trim tool.
53. Remove the upper door latch striker covers - left and right side.
^ 1 screw on each side.
54. Remove the coat hangers; left and right side.
^ 1 screw for each coat hanger.
Page 12023
Figure 18
31. Re-install the four Seat Bottom Cushion Bolts M8, 12 mm head (see Figure 18). Bolt torque:
13-17 ft-lb (17.5-23.7 Nm).
32. Re-connect the slide motor electrical connector, making sure it snaps in securely.
33. Place the seat assembly back into the vehicle and re-connect all electrical connectors. Make
sure they all snap together securely.
34. Re-connect the battery cables, positive cable first.
35. Finish reinstalling the seat. Torque mounting bolts to 45 N.m (4.6 Kg.m, 35 ft-lbs.).
- If needed, refer to section SE in the Service Manual (ESM) for seat installation information.
36. Operate all seat switches to make sure everything works as it should.
37. If the vehicle is equipped with "ADP", for the ADP entry/exit feature to return to normal
operation, procedure A or B must be performed.
Procedure A:
1. Insert key into the ignition key cylinder. (Ignition switch is "OFF".)
2. Open - close - open the driver side door (dome lamp; "ON" - "OFF" - "ON" ).
3. End
Procedure B:
1. Drive the vehicle at more than 25 km/h (16 MPH).
2. End
38. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
39. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual and perform the following as needed:
- Power Window Initialization
- Power Sunroof Initialization
- Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
- Throttle Valve closed Position Learning
- Idle Air Volume Learning
- Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position
- Rear View Monitor Guiding Line Adjustment
Page 2109
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 9587
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 5021
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2
Page 12714
Fuel Gauge: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 2377
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 1530
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 1678
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 13326
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12661
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 4100
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not
be carried out successfully. In this case, find
the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that
downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK,
engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the
cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive
Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all
over again: Engine stalls.
- Erroneous idle.
Page 8467
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 6250
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 11083
Seat Memory Switch: Testing and Inspection Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection
Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 11533
^ Torque bolt to: 49 N-m (5.0 Kg-m, 36 ft-lb.)
26. Reassemble remaining parts in reverse order of removal.
27. Reconnect battery.
28. Reprogram radio presets.
Page 13980
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 2126
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Description
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of exhaust valve cam sprocket to
identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder
identification signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to
change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 1073
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 3564
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 12945
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 7836
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 4848
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II.
^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information.
2. Compare your printout to the chart.
a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3.
b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply.
^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information.
3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows:
Page 5462
14. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION is completed.
Page 10265
Page 10286
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 2353
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Description and Operation
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
VSS
Description
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the "ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)" by CAN communication line. The c combination meter then sends a signal to the
ECM by CAN communication line.
ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Component Description
The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from
combination meter and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these
signals for ASCD control. Refer to EC-29, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for
ASCD functions.
Page 9109
55. Remove the assist grip (passenger side only).
^ Open the side bolt covers.
^ Remove the 2 bolts.
56. Remove the dome lamp.
a. Remove the clear lamp cover
b. Remove the 2 screws.
c. Let the lamp hang by the electrical connector.
Page 3490
2. Remove the four screws and remove the upper bracket. 3. Remove the four screws and remove
the heater core cover. 4. Remove the heater core pipe bracket.
5. Remove the heater core.
NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core,
replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new heater core.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 365
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12586
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 3557
Optional Splice
Page 12949
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 9089
16. Attach the new body clip to the body.
Final Quality Check
17. Check the air bag light operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition ON.
b. Look at the air bag light.
c. Make sure the air bag warning light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out.
Harness Replacement Part 1 (Includes Seat Belt Replacement, If Needed)
NOTE:
^ There are several model variations (power seats, audio, side air bag, navigation, etc). Due to
these variations the harness removal photos in this procedure may not have the exact interior trim,
connectors, and harness mounting locations as the vehicle you are working on.
^ It is recommended that you mark the harness mounting location during disassembly.
Floor and Rear Door (Left and/or Right Side)
^ This portion of the procedure is for the sections of the harness that are on the floor of the vehicle
(under the carpet) and inside the rear door.
^ The photos in this portion of the procedure are of the left side (driver side). If you are working on
the right side (passenger side) the photos are a mirror image.
1. Write down the radio station presets.
2. If equipped with power seats; move the seats to the "mid-point" position (half-way between full
forward and full rearward).
3. Put the gear selector in the Neutral position.
4. Disconnect both battery cables-negative cable first.
5. Remove the front seat.
a. Remove the 4 seat mounting bolts.
b. Disconnect all of the seat electrical connectors.
Page 1159
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 4937
ECM Inspection Table Part 6
Page 5658
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9716
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay
Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006
Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra
2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and
model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution
Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for
electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time,
the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM
relay contact due to arcing.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be
performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners
may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Interior - Seat Back Board Installation/Removal
Seat Back: Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Seat Back Board Installation/Removal
Classification: BT08-023A
Reference: NTB08-062A
Date: July 21, 20009
SEAT BACK BOARD REMOVAL / INSTALLATION
This bulletin has been amended. Applied Vehicles has been updated. Discard all previous versions
of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2004 - 2009 Frontier (D40) 2004 - 2009
Pathfinder (R51) 2004 - 2009 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2009 Xterra (N50)
SERVICE INFORMATION
This bulletin contains the Service Procedure for the removal and installation of the seat back board.
Refer to Module A for removal and installation of the soft seat back board.
Refer to Module B for the removal and installation of the hard seat back board.
PARTS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Module A (for soft seat backs)
1. Move / adjust the front passenger seat bottom and seat back to the full forward position.
2. Remove the right front soft seat back board as follows:
NOTE:
The seat back board is held on with:
^ 2 top tabs
^ 2 side tabs
^ 2 bottom clips (do not reuse, replace with new clips from the Parts Information table).
Page 13525
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 6241
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 125
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 12363
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Locations
Throttle Position Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 5821
Oxygen Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 9526
c. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 grams (1.76 ounces), install two balance weight
sheets in line with each other as shown.
CAUTION: Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another.
3. Start wheel balancer again. 4. Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the
wheel balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION: Do not install more than two balance weights.
5. Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual imbalance values are 5 grams
(0.18 ounces) each or below.
^ If either residual imbalance value exceeds 5 grams (0.18 ounces), repeat installation procedures.
Wheel Balance (Maximum Allowable Imbalance)
Page 3705
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Testing and Inspection
Pedal Positioning Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 7307
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 7803
* Headlights, defroster, A/C, audio (radio), video, cellular telephone, etc.
4. Press [START (Nissan BASED VHCL)].
5. In "SELF-DIAG RESULTS", check and erase any DTC(s) in the below noted vehicle systems:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST press "ERASE" and "OK" in all systems (shown below) whether a DTC is displayed or
not. This is required to complete the VDC reprogramming procedure, and it will make sure that all
DTC(s) are erased.
^ ENGINE
^ A/T
^ ABS
^ AIR BAG
^ ALL MODE AWD/4WD (if applicable)
^ DIFF LOCK (if applicable; 4WD Titan)
^ AIR LEVELIZER (if applicable)
6. After all DTC(s) are erased:
^ Turn the ignition switch OFF.
^ Disconnect CONSULT-II and the CAN Cable from the vehicle connector.
^ Disconnect the battery charger from the vehicle.
^ Start the engine and make sure it runs properly and there are NO warning lights illuminated in the
instrument panel.
7. Continue with Part 4.
Part 4
Part 4: Re-program the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card back to its original format so it can be
used for standard ECU reprogramming.
1. Remove the red/white diagnostic card from CONSULT-II and insert the 8 MB orange
Reprogramming card.
2. Go to the ASIST terminal.
3. Follow steps in Part 1 of this bulletin to download (transfer) data from ASIST to CONSULT-II.
^ Use ID Code 050602.
^ This will re-program the 8 MB (orange) card to its original format so it can be used for standard
ECU reprogramming.
END
Page 11211
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 7734
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 12116
^ If you find the old Spacer Washer on the floor of the car, discard it.
Reinstall the Seat and Check its Operation
7. Reinstall the seat, making sure:
^ All wire harnesses are connected and correctly routed to prevent pinching and chaffing.
^ The four seat mounting bolts are tightened to: 45 Nm (4.6 Kg.m, 35 ft-lbs.)
8. Re-connect the battery cables, positive cable first (if you disconnected them in step 2).
9. Check the power seat controls, making sure:
^ They operate correctly.
^ The incident noise is fixed.
10. Re-program the radio station presets and re-set the clock (if you disconnected the battery in
step 2).
11. Initialize the power windows and sunroof as applicable. For Frontier and Pathfinder vehicles
with Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) reset the Steering Angle Sensor as applicable. Reference the
Electronic Service Manual as needed.
Disclaimer
Page 7315
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 8721
b. Disconnect the electrical connectors.
c. Remove the 3 mounting bolts.
d. Remove the control unit from the vehicle.
7. If equipped with front bench seat (shifter on steering column), remove the center seat and cup
holder:
a. Remove the finisher at the rear of the center seat.
a. Remove the 4 center seat mounting bolts.
b. Remove the seat from the vehicle and place it in a clean area.
Page 3191
Engine Oil Pressure: Testing and Inspection
OIL PRESSURE CHECK
WARNING: ^
Be careful not to burn yourself, as engine oil may be hot.
^ Put the selector lever in the Park "P" position.
1. Check the engine oil level. 2. Remove engine front undercover using power tool. 3. Disconnect
the oil pressure sensor harness connector.
4. Remove the oil pressure sensor.
5. Install Tools.
Tool number : ST25051001 (J-25695-1) : ST25052000 (J-25695-2)
6. Start the engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 7. Check the engine oil
pressure with engine running under no-load.
CAUTION: If the difference is extreme, check the oil passages and oil pump for leaks and
blockages.
8. After the inspections, install oil pressure sensor as follows:
a. Remove old liquid gasket adhering to oil pressure sensor and engine. b. Apply liquid gasket and
tighten oil pressure sensor to the specification.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Oil pressure sensor torque: 14.7 Nm (1.5 kg-m,
11 ft. lbs.)
c. After warming up engine, make sure there is no leakage of engine oil with engine running.
Page 6490
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 2960
Wheels: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove inner and outer balance weights from the wheel.
CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal.
2. Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the wheel.
CAUTION: After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from
the wheel.
WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT
^ If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode
setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for wheels.
1. Set wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. 2.
When inner and outer imbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer
imbalance value by 1.6 to determine balance
weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated
value and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the designated angle in relation to the
road wheel.
CAUTION: ^
Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight.
^ Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the wheel.
Indicated imbalance value x 5/3 = balance weight to be installed Calculation example: 23 grams
(0.81 ounces) x 5/3 = 38.33 grams (1.35 ounces) = 40 grams (1.41 ounces) balance weight (closer
to calculated balance weight value) Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated
balance weight value. Example: 37.4 grams = 35 grams (1.23 ounces) 37.5 grams = 40 grams
(1.41 ounces)
a. Install balance weight in the position shown. b. When installing balance weight to wheels, set it
into the grooved area on the inner wall of the wheel as shown so that the balance weight center
is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION: ^
Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights.
^ Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with new ones.
^ Do not install more than three sheets of balance weights.
Page 12606
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 5244
Case 17
Case 18
NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Page 9605
Diagnostic Procedure For Mode Door Motor (Steps 12 - 14)
Page 12858
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8763
Page 5170
Case 6
Page 2901
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire
changing machine and break both tire beads.
Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead.
3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
1. Place first side of tire onto rim.
2. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten transmitter nut to specification.
Transmitter nut 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.)
Specifications
Page 10085
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 7320
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 13266
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 3488
3. Remove the four screws and remove the heater core cover. 4. Remove the heater core pipe
bracket.
5. Remove the heater core.
NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core,
replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new heater core.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAN Communication
Information Bus: Description and Operation CAN Communication
CAN COMMUNICATION
System Description
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a serial communication line for real time application. It is an
on-vehicle multiplex communication line with high data communication speed and excellent error
detection ability. Many electronic control units are equipped onto a vehicle, and each control unit
shares information and links with other control units during operation (not independent). In CAN
communication, control units are connected with 2 communication lines (CAN H line, CAN L line)
allowing a high rate of information transmission with less wiring. Each control unit
transmits/receives data but selectively reads required data only.
CAN Communication Unit
NOTE: Confirming the presence of the following items helps to identify CAN system type.
- Models with 4WD
- Models with ABLS
Page 667
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 4092
ECM Inspection Table Part 8
Page 3168
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine and confirm:
^ if a squeak noise is coming from the drive belt
and
^ using a stethoscope or similar tool, if the drive belt auto tensioner is making abnormal noise.
2. Turn the engine off.
3. Write down the radio presets for later reprogramming.
4. Remove intake duct and engine cover.
5. Disconnect battery, negative cable first, and wait at least 3 minutes before proceeding to step 6.
6. Remove drive belt and drive belt auto tensioner. Refer to section EM of the Electronic Service
Manual for removal procedure.
7. Lift up vehicle by placing it on a hoist.
8. Remove front right wheel.
9. Remove fender protector. Refer to section EXT of the ESM for removal procedure.
10. Remove engine under cover (6 bolts).
11. Check the pulley alignment as follows:
Page 7338
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 3201
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
SAE Viscosity Number GASOLINE ENGINE OIL
SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all temperatures.
SAE 10W-30 and 10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the ambient temperature is above -18°C
(0°F)
API Certification Mark API grade SG, SH or SJ, Energy Conserving II or API grade SL, Energy
Conserving ILSAC grade GF-II & GF-III
Page 12996
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 9983
- Driver side only.
Torque: 4.2 N.m (1.45 kg-m, 10 ft-lb)
Figure C-20
d. Install and torque 2 bolts from the front bumper side bracket (see Figure C-20).
- Driver side only.
Torque: 4.2 N.m (1.45 kg-m, 10 ft-lb)
For Titan with plastic bumper (body color bumper) do the following:
Figure C-21
a. Install 2 bumper to fender screws.
- Driver side only.
Page 7869
Traction Control Module: Description and Operation
TCS CONTROL UNIT
Description
The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line
from "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" to ECM. Be sure to erase the malfunction
information such as DTC not only for "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" but also for
ECM after TCS related repair.
Page 12024
- Rear View Monitor Predicted Course Line Center Position Adjustment
NOTE:
You may need to inform the customer that their Automatic Drive Position will need to be reset.
Disclaimer
Page 4812
Page 4951
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 9157
CLAIMS INFORMATION
NOTE:
This repair can only be used in conjunction with a claim for Front Wheel Alignment (Op-Code
WD44AA) and must be submitted on a separate work order line.
Specifications
Page 1179
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 5112
Case 11
Page 933
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 4339
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 13392
Headlamp Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 3908
Page 5172
Case 8
Automatic Air Conditioner
Control Module HVAC: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Front Air Control
The front air control has a built-in microcomputer which processes information sent from various
sensors needed for air conditioner operation. The air mix door motors, mode door motor, intake
door motor, defroster door motor, blower motor and compressor are then controlled.
The front air control is unitized with control mechanisms. When the various switches and
temperature dials are operated, data is input to the front air control.
Self-diagnostic functions are also built into the front air control to provide quick check of
malfunctions in the auto air conditioner system.
Page 12913
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
Page 11200
Front
Brake Pad: Service and Repair Front
Removal and Installation of Brake Pad
Page 4923
Engine Control Module: Description and Operation
ECM POWER SUPPLY
Component Description
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is turned OFF for the ECM
memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the
idle air volume learning value memory, etc.
ECM
Component Description
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power
supply. The ECM controls the engine.
Page 8296
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Specifications
Fluid Pan: Specifications
Transmission Pan
Tighten new oil pan bolts in numerical order as shown. Oil pan bolts .................................................
................................................................................................................. 7.9 Nm (0.81 kg-m, 70 inch
lbs.)
Page 2959
Wheels: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
1. Check tires for wear and improper inflation. 2. Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other
damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout.
a. Remove tire from wheel and mount wheel on a tire balance machine. b. Set dial indicator as
shown in the illustration.
3. Check front wheel bearings for looseness. 4. Check front suspension for looseness.
Page 3517
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 8
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 2527
Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
With GST
Check idle speed with GST.
Page 4247
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 7054
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
Page 10050
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 12387
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Component Tests
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given
conditions.
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again.
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given
conditions.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again.
Page 4118
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 13476
Optional Splice
Page 3698
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic
Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Page 393
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Warning Chime
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6491
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 218
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair
Brake Shoe: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair
Classification: BR00-004d
Reference: NTB00-033d
Date: August 8, 2007
ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all
previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and
provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur.
^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories:
a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or
released.
b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the
brakes are applied.
c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer.
2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above.
3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident.
BRAKE NOISE
^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no
repair action should be taken.
^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate
repair:
Squeak noise when the brakes are cold:
^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning.
^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary.
Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures:
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information
listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures.
Notes about brake pads and brake noise:
Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory.
^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of
the art resistance to squeal noise.
^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the
terms of the Nissan new car warranty.
Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very
attractive price.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
VIN Registration
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair VIN Registration
VIN Registration
DESCRIPTION
VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is
replaced.
NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance
(I/M).
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to Application and ID. 2. Turn ignition switch ON
and engine stopped.
3. Select "VIN REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of
CONSULT-II display.
Page 8585
Optional Splice
Page 2588
^ Pulley should turn with some dragging
^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator.
Page 10369
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Description and Operation
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Component Description
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay.
The throttle control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is
turned ON, the ECM sends an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is
provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to
throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM.
Page 8289
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 4702
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 6174
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 12928
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 4528
8. Configuration of current BCM is printed out automatically. A listing of manual setting items and
auto setting items will be displayed. Auto setting
items are preset and cannot be changed. Manual setting items can be set by using WRITE
CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE".
9. Touch "BACK" on "READ CONFIGURATION" screen.
WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
ABS
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABS
Wheel Sensors
WHEEL SENSORS
REMOVAL
1. Remove wheel sensor bolt.
^ When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front
wheel sensor bolt.
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
^ Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten wheel sensor bolt to specification.
CAUTION: Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following: ^
Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged.
^ Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
Sensor Rotor
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation FRONT
The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace
wheel hub and bearing assembly.
REAR Removal
1. Remove axle shaft assembly.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor.
2. Pull the sensor rotor off the axle shaft using Tool and a press.
Tool number: ST30031000 ( - )
Installation
1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure
sensor rotor is fully seated.
Mirror Motor LH Circuit Check
Power Mirror Motor: Testing and Inspection Mirror Motor LH Circuit Check
Mirror Motor LH Circuit Check (Step 1)
Testing and Inspection
Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection
Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM)
For example, when current is 30 A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20 seconds.
A circuit breaker is used for the following systems:
- Power windows
- Power door locks
- Remote keyless entry system
- Power sunroof
- Rear window wiper
Page 2902
3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate
relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel and tire assembly. 6. Install wheel and tire
assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle.
NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed.
7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor.
Page 4367
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 4155
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
APP SENSOR
Component Description
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal
assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers
which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to
the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal
and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the
accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the
accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel
cut.
Page 9466
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire
changing machine and break both tire beads.
Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead.
3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
1. Place first side of tire onto rim.
2. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten transmitter nut to specification.
Transmitter nut 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.)
Page 14404
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
Engine Control Module: Recalls Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006
Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra
2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and
model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution
Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for
electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time,
the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM
relay contact due to arcing.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be
performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners
may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 8887
Page 37
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 7818
^ After you click on "OK" an ASIST screen will appear that shows the data transfer progress (see
Figure 10).
c. Wait until the data transfer is complete (see the CAUTION at the end of step 8).
^ When the data transfer is complete, CONSULT-II will shut off automatically.
d. Disconnect the A/C power cord and the Ethernet cable from CONSULT-II.
Procedure
Part 3: Reprogram ABS/VDC Control Unit with 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card
CAUTION:
^ Perform this operation in five (5) sections. DO NOT SKIP any of these sections.
^ The sections must be performed in order, 1 through 5.
Section 1: Connect a battery charger and CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
Section 2: Check all systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTC(s).
Section 3: Confirm the vehicle battery voltage and CONSULT-II "Charger Input".
Section 4: Perform ABS/VDC Control Unit Reprogramming.
Section 5: Again, perform a check of all systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any newly
stored DTCs.
Section 1
Section 1: Connect a battery charger and CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
1. Confirm the ignition switch is OFF.
2. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. Set the charger at a low charge rate (2-amp
"trickle charge").
IMPORTANT
You must connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery when performing ABS/VDC
reprogramming. Permanent ABS/VDC damage can occur if you don't.
Connecting a vehicle battery charger will maintain:
^ Proper CONSULT-II power supply during reprogramming-very important if the CONSULT-II
battery is low.
^ Vehicle battery voltage level-especially on late model vehicles where the cooling fans come on
during reprogramming.
3. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle using the DLC-II cable with black Converter Box (see Figure
11).
Page 4318
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Description
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the A/T assembly facing the gear teeth (cogs)
of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to
change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM
receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 2943
Tire
Page 1585
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4574
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 5978
3. Attach filter to bracket and filter hoses to fittings as shown.
Install Protector (2004 Armada ONLY)
1. Assemble the protector into the left rear wheelhouse as shown.
Page 1792
Page 11319
- through BCM terminal 51
- to trailer turn relay RH terminal 1.
Left turn signal and hazard lamp output is supplied
- through trailer turn relay LH terminal 3
- to trailer connector terminal 1.
Right turn signal and hazard lamp output is supplied
- through trailer turn relay RH terminal 3
- to trailer connector terminal 4.
TRAILER STOP LAMP OPERATION
The trailer stop lamps are controlled by the electric brake. The electric brake receives stop lamp
switch signal when the brake pedal is pressed.
When the brake pedal is pressed, power is supplied
- through electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 3
- to trailer connector terminal 3.
TRAILER POWER SUPPLY OPERATION
The trailer power supply is controlled by the trailer tow relay 2.
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is supplied
- through 10 A fuse (No. 51, located in the IPDM E/R)
- through IPDM E/R terminal 16
- to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 1.
When energized, the trailer tow relay 2 supplies power
- through trailer tow relay 2 terminals 5 and 7
- to trailer connector terminal 5.
Page 6879
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 7384
Control Unit: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove jack and tools. 3.
Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. 4. Remove the necessary
push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way.
5. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to disconnect connector. 6. Remove
the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit.
INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque. Differential lock
control unit nuts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.)
Page 5317
Check Sheet Part 1
Page 6140
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure
Fuel pressure at idling..........................................................................................................................
..........Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi)
Page 5107
Case 6
Page 247
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 5860
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8618
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 10425
After disconnecting ambient sensor connector E1, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2
at sensor component side, using the table. If NG, replace ambient sensor.
Page 8610
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 6213
Page 8525
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 4519
- When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state:
- Ignition switch
- Key switch (insert)
- Hazard switch
- Main door lock/unlock switch
- Front door switch (LH, RH)
- Rear door switch (LH, RH) (Crew Cab)
- Rear door switch upper (LH, RH) (King Cab)
- Rear door switch lower (LH, RH) (King Cab)
- Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp)
- Keyfob (lock/unlock signal)
- Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch)
- When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication
inactive mode.
- Status of combination switch reading function is changed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY
- Power door lock system.
- Remote keyless entry system.
- Power window system.
- Sunroof system.
- Room lamp timer.
- Warning chime system.
- Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system.
- Trailer turn signal and hazard warning lamps system (if equipped). Refer to "TRAILER TOW".
NOTE: Power supply only. No system control.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R
- Panic system.
- Vehicle security (theft warning) system.
- NVIS (NATS) system.
- Headlamp, tail lamp, front fog lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems.
- Front wiper and washer system.
Part 1
Locations
Cruise Control Switch: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 9583
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 8581
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 832
ECM Inspection Table Part 4
Page 9139
SPECIAL TOOLS
Page 6159
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 2131
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Description
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the A/T assembly facing the gear teeth (cogs)
of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to
change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM
receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Wiper Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 9707
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 5863
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 7428
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 4450
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3.
Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower).
INSTALLATION
1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air cleaner case
(upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet).
Page 11066
Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Testing and Inspection
Transmitter Does Not Activate Receiver (Steps 1 - 3)
Transmitter Does Not Activate Receiver (Step 4)
Page 10035
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 6434
Spark should be generated.
CAUTION: Do not approach to the spark plug and the ignition coil within 50 cm. Be careful not to get an
electrical shock while checking, because the electrical discharge voltage becomes 20 kV or more.
- It might cause to damage the ignition coil if the gap of more than 17 mm is taken.
NOTE: When the gap is less than 13 mm, the spark might be generated even if the coil is
malfunctioning.
17. If NG, replace ignition coil with power transistor.
Page 7016
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 12695
f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6).
^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit.
^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires).
^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing.
^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm.
4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
CAUTION:
DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump.
5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Page 2053
Optional Splice
Automatic Air Conditioner
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Automatic Air Conditioner
Intake Sensor Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on the heater & cooling unit assembly. It converts temperature of air
after it passes through the evaporator into a resistance value which is then input to the front air
control.
Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 14263
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 6046
Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent).
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for
connecting the fuel pressure gauge.
2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test".
^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure.
^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble
Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test.
^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test.
> If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and
repair information.
> If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3.
3. Replace the fuel pump.
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the
appropriate Service Manual.
^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information.
^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal.
4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed.
Page 2298
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 13666
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Front Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check
Front Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check
Page 13138
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 8436
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 12385
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 6)
Page 13631
Page 5439
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 6306
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 5230
Case 2
Page 10620
Seat Occupant Sensor: Description and Operation
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
The occupant classification system (OCS) identifies different size occupants, out of position
occupants, and detects if child seat is present in the front passenger seat. The OCS receives
inputs from the occupant classification sensor (located inside the passenger seat cushion
assembly) and belt tension sensor (part of the passenger front seat belt assembly and located at
the belt anchor location). Depending on classification of the passenger, the OCS sends a signal to
the air bag diagnosis sensor unit. The air bag diagnosis sensor unit uses this signal and the seat
belt buckle switch RH signal to determine deployment or non deployment of the passenger front air
bag in the event of a collision. Depending on the signals received, the air bag diagnosis sensor unit
can disable the passenger front air bag completely.
NOTE: In case of customer concern, CONSULT-II can be used to confirm the passenger air bag
status (readiness).
Passenger Air Bag Status Conditions
Page 1419
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 12255
Lifting Sensor (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Lifting Sensor (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 13254
Page 12375
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 333
Page 4823
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 5144
Case 13
Case 14
Page 8498
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 2550
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)
REMOVAL
1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. 2. Remove ignition coil.
3. Remove spark plug using suitable tool.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
^ Do not use a wire brush for cleaning.
^ If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure: Less
than 588 kPa (5.9 bar, 6 kg/cm2, 85 psi) Cleaning time: Less than 20 seconds
Page 4001
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II.
^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information.
2. Compare your printout to the chart.
a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3.
b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply.
^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information.
3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows:
Page 4992
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 2445
CLAIMS INFORMATION
NOTE:
This repair can only be used in conjunction with a claim for Front Wheel Alignment (Op-Code
WD44AA) and must be submitted on a separate work order line.
Page 13043
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 9490
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Page 13412
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
Fuel Gauge Sender: Recalls Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009
Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56
vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some
fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which
could cause a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender
card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or
before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 4021
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7815
b. Keypad will appear (see Figure 6).
c. Using the digit keys on the keypad, enter ID Code 060402.
d. Then click the "Continue" button on the keypad.
^ After you click "Continue", the "CAUTION" screen will appear (see Figure 7).
Page 6875
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 4952
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Diagrams
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams
Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) - Terminal Arrangement
Page 1452
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 60
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 10371
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 6830
13. Connect revolution sensor connector.
14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips.
15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal
CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Brake Light Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 12783
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 5460
6. Touch "A60" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on
"VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See:
Application and ID
7. Touch "WRITE CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen.
8. Touch "YES".
For canceling, touch "NO".
9. Set by touching selection on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen based on the following ITEM
LIST.
Do not apply MODE3 or MODE4.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See:
Application and ID
10. Touch "CHNG SETTING" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
CAUTION: Make sure to touch "CHNG SETTING" even if the indicated configuration of new BCM
is same as the desirable configuration. If
Page 5440
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Page 9059
31. Snap loose the armrest. Use a plastic trim tool.
32. Remove the 3 bolts shown in Figure C40.
33. Remove the rear door panel.
^ Use a plastic trim tool.
Page 10983
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 4594
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 11698
Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder
Switch) Check (Crew Cab)
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 12900
3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5):
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly.
a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap
in place.
^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down
(it should not move).
b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip.
^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib.
c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab.
d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6).
e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place.
Page 10375
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 7443
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 8950
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13917
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
CAUTION:
- Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures
Page 2036
concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in
the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement lambda = 1, but also in the lean and rich range.
Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a
wide lambda range (0.7 < lambda < air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump
and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygen pump cell so that the
composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at lambda = 1. Therefore, the
A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is
integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800 degrees C
(1,292 - 1,472 degrees F).
HO2S2
Component Description
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the
exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is
controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1 V in
richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation.
Page 5736
ECM Inspection Table Part 3
Page 14380
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 11178
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 3791
b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a).
c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed.
^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer.
d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2.
2. Record the radio station presets:
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
NOTE:
Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding.
Power Window System
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Window System
Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Step
1)
Page 4019
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3134
DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART
Page 14501
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 2940
Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment
Locations
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 1719
Optional Splice
Page 5123
Case 6
Page 8551
Inspection With CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)
With Generic Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Without Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Page 12702
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 5028
- Type 10
System Diagram
- Type 11
System Diagram
- Type 12
Page 8282
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 2299
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 13402
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 814
ECM Inspection Table Part 4
Page 5332
Case 13
Page 8801
Page 12512
Key Warning Chime Does Not Operate (Steps 5 - 6)
Light Warning Chime Does Not Operate
Page 6257
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline
Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline
Classification: GI99-001F
Reference: NTB99-020F
Date: August 8, 2008
LIMITATIONS ON FLAT TOWING OF NISSAN VEHICLES
This bulletin has been amended to apply to all current production models. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models
APPLIED DATES: 1992-2009
SERVICE INFORMATION
This Bulletin contains important guidelines and limitations concerning towing of Nissan vehicles
with all four wheels on the ground ("flat towing").
CAUTION:
Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission or drivetrain damage. For all
towing including "emergency towing" procedures refer to the Owners Manual.
1. 4WD/AWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT):
^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components.
^ DO NOT use a tow dolly - doing so will damage drivetrain components.
2. FWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT) and Altima Hybrid:
^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components.
^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's front wheels.
^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.
3. RWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission:
^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components.
^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's rear wheels.
^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.
4. 2WD/4WD vehicles equipped with a manual transmission:
^ Always flat tow with the manual transmission in Neutral.
^ Always flat tow a manual transmission vehicle facing forward.
^ Maximum speed while flat towing: 60 MPH.
^ After towing for 500 miles, stop. Start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two
minutes - failure to do so may cause damage to the transmission.
^ For 4WD vehicles, always flat tow with the transfer case in the 2 HI position.
Page 1649
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11815
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 2461
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Seat Belt Retractor: Customer Interest Restraints - Seat Belt Retract Slowly
Classification: RS01-001B
Reference: NTB01-005B
Date: November 12, 2009
"D" RING RESIDUE CAN CAUSE SLOW SEAT BELT RETRACTION
This bulletin amends NTB01-005a. Please discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
Seat belt retraction of front seat belt(s) is slow, caused by "residue" build-up on the "D" ring(s).
ACTION
Use the "D" ring cleaning and refurbishing kit to:
^ Clean the residue off of the "D" rings.
^ Apply fluorine resin tape to the "D" rings.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
Page 13996
Rear Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Step 4)
Page 12359
Page 13545
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 11735
Power Door Lock Actuator: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder
Switch) Check (King Cab)
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 5209
Case 16
Case 17
NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Page 6141
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION:
- Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
- Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the
quick connector O-ring maintains sealability.
- Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel
pressure.
- Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C,
etc.). Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in
manifold vacuum.
NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out.
The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because A60 models do not have fuel return
system.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove engine
cover. 3. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488.
- Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
- Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
- Keep fuel hose connections clean.
4. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown
in figure.
- Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter.
- When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality.
5. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 6. Start engine and
check for fuel leakage. 7. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
- During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi)
8. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 9. Check the following.
- Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
- Fuel filter for clogging
- Fuel pump
- Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or
replace.
10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel
pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE
RELEASE".
Page 1197
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 632
Page 14096
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 13120
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 4936
ECM Inspection Table Part 5
Page 5041
How To Use Check Sheet Table
HOW TO USE CHECK SHEET TABLE
1. Unit names displayed on CONSULT-II 2. "No indication": Put a check mark to it if the unit name
described in step 1 is not displayed on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen of CONSULT-II.
(Unit communicating with CONSULT-II via CAN communication line) "-": Column not used (Unit
communicating with CONSULT-II excluding CAN communication line)
3. "NG": Display "NG" when malfunction is detected in the initial diagnosis of the diagnosed unit.
Replace the unit if "NG" is displayed.
"-": Column not used (Initial diagnosis is not performed.)
4. "UNKWN": Display "UNKWN" when the diagnosed unit does not transmit the data normally. Put
a check mark to it if "UNKWN" is displayed on
CONSULT-II. "-": Column not used (Transmit diagnosis is not performed.)
5. "UNKWN": Display "UNKWN" when the diagnosed unit does not receive the data normally. Put a
check mark to it if "UNKWN" is displayed on
CONSULT-II. "-": Column not used (It is not necessary for CAN communication trouble diagnosis.)
NOTE: CAN communication diagnosis checks if CAN communication works normally. (Contents of
data are not diagnosed.)
- When the initial conditions are reproduced, refer to "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When
Initial Conditions Are Reproduced".
- When the initial conditions are not reproduced, refer to "Example of Filling in Check Sheet When
Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced".
Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 1035
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 755
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 2279
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Locations
Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 582
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 13793
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 14456
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 424
Page 9097
13. Remove the lower dash side finisher.
^ There is a plastic clip behind the parking brake lever.
14. Disconnect each of the connectors on the connector support.
15. Remove connectors from support. For each connecter that is not part of the body harness:
a. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to unlock the connector mounts,
b. Then slide the connectors forward to remove them from the connector support.
Page 8224
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 9081
^ Each dealer was shipped one pair of Vinyl Tube Scissors.
^ Use these scissors when removing the wiring harness vinyl tubing during the installation of the
Update Kit.
CAUTION:
It is very important that you use the Vinyl Tube Scissors when removing the wiring harness vinyl
tubing. Failure to use the Vinyl Tube Scissors for this procedure could cause damage to the
electrical wiring and may affect vehicle electrical system functions.
^ Replacement or additional Vinyl Tube Scissors can be ordered by completing and faxing the
special tool order form which is available on NNAnet.com under My Documents in the
Parts/Campaign and Service/Campaign categories.
NOTE:
^ If replacement of a wiring harness is required, many trim and finisher parts will be removed.
^ Plastic "Trim Tool Set" J-46534 (an "essential tool") should be used when removing trim and
finisher parts. This tool is available from TECH-MATE.
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Body Control Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Data Link
Connector/Schematic
4. Select item to be diagnosed on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Page 12553
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 13822
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 7235
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Rear Axle
WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION
Check the axial end play, replace as necessary. ^
Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly. Replace as necessary.
Locations
Seat Memory Switch: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11289
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 5374
9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads.
^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12.
Page 5176
Case 13
Case 14
NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Page 5627
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 2159
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 8207
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 8117
e. Read the "CAUTION" screen carefully (see Figure 7). Then click "Okay".
8. Prepare CONSULT-II as follows (see Figure 8):
a. Make sure:
^ CONSULT-II is OFF.
^ The 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card is inserted into CONSULT-II.
^ The A/C Power Adapter is securely connected to CONSULT-II.
^ The Ethernet Cable is securely connected to CONSULT-II and the PC port.
b. Turn CONSULT-II ON.
c. Select "Transfer Files via LAN".
NOTE:
If you accidentally choose a menu option other than "Transfer Files via LAN" turn CONSULT-II
OFF, and then back ON as shown in Figure 8.
d. Set the CONSULT-II unit down for now and go to your ASIST PC.
Page 6922
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 3245
8. Remove access cover
9. Loosen the crankshaft pulley bolts using Tool to secure the crankshaft.
Tool number: ( - ) J47245
a. Remove the crankshaft pulley from the crankshaft using suitable tool.
- Set the bolts in the two bolt holes [M6 x 1.0 mm (0.04 in)] on the front surface.
NOTE: The dimension between the centers of the two bolt holes is 61 mm (2.40 in).
10. Remove the front cover.
a. Loosen and remove the bolts in the reverse of order as shown.
b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using Tool.
Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228)
CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces.
11. Remove the front oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Do not damage front cover.
Page 13522
Optional Splice
Page 595
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 6180
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 10301
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 5788
Page 3359
Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent).
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for
connecting the fuel pressure gauge.
2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test".
^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure.
^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble
Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test.
^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test.
> If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and
repair information.
> If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3.
3. Replace the fuel pump.
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the
appropriate Service Manual.
^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information.
^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal.
4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10173
Diagnostic Procedure For Water Valve (Steps 1 - 4)
Description and Operation
Electric Load Sensor: Description and Operation
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Description
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN
communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R.
Page 6682
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
Page 11114
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3614
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting
Front Door Window Motor: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit
Switch Resetting
EL08-031A
Reference: NTB09-027A
Date: July 15, 2010
FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET
This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other
changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If any of the following work has been done:
^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly
^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator
^ installation of a new glass window
^ installation of a new glass run
....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following:
^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B
NOTE:
The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror.
If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in
this bulletin.
NOTE:
Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will
not reset the Limit Switch.
SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH
1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in
the glass raising (up) direction.
Page 122
Page 4597
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 14149
Windshield: Service and Repair
WINDSHIELD GLASS
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove inside mirror. 2. Partially remove the headlining (front edge). 3. Remove cowl top cover.
4. Apply a protective tape around the windshield glass to protect the painted surface from damage.
- Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag.
- If the windshield glass is to be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks.
WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves
to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION: When the windshield glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool.
- Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
- Do not set or stand glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the
instructions furnished with it.
- While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being
forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
- The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap.
- Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
Page 4510
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Page 11278
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 14305
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5586
Page 3876
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 7656
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Page 8698
64. Take the harness loose from the side of the cabin.
65. If equipped with side curtain air bags; disconnect the side curtain air bag module as follows:
a. Remove the right side sun visor, 2 screws under the trim cover.
^ Use a plastic trim tool to remove the trim cover.
^ Disconnect the electrical connector.
Page 6251
Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Description and Operation
Electric Load Sensor: Description and Operation
ELECTRICAL LOAD SIGNAL
Description
The electrical load signal (Headlamp switch signal, etc.) is transferred through the CAN
communication line from BCM to ECM via IPDM E/R.
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 12578
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 3560
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 1782
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 6774
Attachment General Procedure
Page 3312
EM-6
Page 10213
11. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member, from the
vehicle.
CAUTION: Use care not to damage the seats and interior trim panels when removing the heater
and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member.
12. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly from the steering member.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-rings of the low-pressure pipe and high-pressure pipe with new ones, then apply
compressor oil to them when installing them.
- After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks.
NOTE:
- Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to "Fluids and Lubricants".
- Recharge the A/C system. Refer to "Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant".
Page 4252
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 3482
Heater Control Valve: Testing and Inspection Manual Air Conditioner
Water Valve Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Water Valve
The water valve (1) cuts the flow of engine coolant to the front heater cores to allow for maximum
cooling during A/C operation. It is controlled by the front air control.
Diagnostic Procedure For Water Valve (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 8687
25. Snap the plastic harness protector loose from the floor.
26. Take the harness loose from along the floor.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain air bags, disconnect the air bag satellite sensor that's
located on the rocker panel (see figure above).
27. On the rear door, remove the lower seat belt anchor bolt.
NOTE:
For the passenger side, this bolt does not need to be removed unless you are going to replace the
seat belt.
Page 8891
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 3572
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 4043
Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 10054
When A/C switch or DEF switch is pressed, front air control inputs compressor ON signal to BCM.
BCM sends compressor ON signal to ECM, via CAN communication line.
ECM judges whether compressor can be turned ON, based on each sensor status (refrigerant
pressure sensor signal, throttle angle sensor, etc.). If it judges compressor can be turned ON, it
sends compressor ON signal to IPDM E/R, via CAN communication line.
Upon receipt of compressor ON signal from ECM, IPDM E/R turns air conditioner relay ON to
operate compressor.
Description of Control System
The control system consists of input sensors, switches, the front air control (microcomputer) and
outputs. The relationship of these components is shown in the figure:
Page 4032
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 13868
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 1052
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 11128
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5223
Case 12
Page 7747
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
Removal and Installation
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.
3. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
4. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness.
5. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
6. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Installation
Page 9980
a. Install the jumper harness on the new fan motor as show.
- New fan assembly and harness kit are listed in the Parts Information.
b. Go to Installation of the fan assembly.
Figure C-14
Jumper harness installation on NEW 140 watt fan assembly
Install Condenser Fan Assembly
Figure C-15
10. Pull the bumper forward and install the fan assembly.
Page 13182
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation
WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE
The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. ECM provides an engine
coolant temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines.
Page 3652
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exhaust Manifold and Three Way Catalyst
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
REMOVAL
WARNING: Perform the work when the exhaust and cooling system have cooled sufficiently.
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Drain the engine coolant from the radiator. 3.
Remove the engine undercover using power tool. 4. Remove the radiator and radiator hoses. 5.
Remove the drive belts. 6. Remove the air fuel ratio A/F sensors (bank 1, bank 2).
^ Follow steps below to remove each air fuel ratio A/F sensor.
a. Remove the harness connector of each air fuel ratio A/F sensor, and harness from bracket and
middle clamp.
b. Remove the air fuel ratio A/F sensors from both left and right exhaust manifolds using Tool.
Tool number: - (J-44626)
CAUTION:
Page 13977
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 1164
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 8001
^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior
to the introduction of the NAO compound.
^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level
of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads.
^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must
decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance.
^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake
pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service.
Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise:
^ Occurs with or without braking.
^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor.
^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using
the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service
Manual procedures.
Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop:
^ This is sometimes called "creep groan".
^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary.
Groan noise during stopping:
^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking.
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to
Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes:
^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes
are applied.
^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal.
^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur.
^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly.
^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information.
^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started:
^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary.
^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the
first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the
first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started.
Rear Brake Squeal:
^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or
drums.
^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components.
WARNING:
Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust
precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment.
Page 14189
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start
engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition
switch OFF.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two
or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse
after servicing fuel system.
Page 6309
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 13237
1. Remove rear combination lamp mounting bolts. 2. Pull rear combination lamp to remove from
the vehicle. 3. Disconnect rear combination lamp connector. 4. Installation is in the reverse order of
removal.
Rear combination lamp mounting bolts : 14.2 Nm (1.4 kg-m, 126 in-lb)
Page 9096
d. Remove the seat from the vehicle and place it in a clean area.
NOTE:
Use two people to lift the rear seat out of the vehicle.
11. Remove the front kick plate.
Use a plastic trim tool to snap it loose.
12. Remove the rear kick plate;
^ Use a plastic trim tool to snap it loose.
Page 5867
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 3716
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 3573
Page 2974
^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, position the disc rotor according
to alignment mark.
^ When installing wheel and tire. Refer to "Rotation". See: Tires/Service and Repair/Tire Rotation
Component Locations
Engine Control Module: Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 8095
CAUTION:
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE ETHERNET CABLE UNTIL THE DATA TRANSFER IS COMPLETE
(SEE FIGURE 10).
^ If the cable is disconnected before the data transfer is complete, you MUST restart the transfer
(download) procedure; otherwise ABSNDC damage can occur.
^ If this happens accidentally; wait for ASIST to display an "error" message, then click on "OK".
Reconnect the cable, select "Backup", then return to step 6.
9. Transfer (download) data from ASIST into CONSULT-II.
a. On the ASIST screen, click on "OKAY" (see Figure 8).
b. Verify CONSULT-II IP Address (see Figure 9). Then click on "OK".
^ Your IP address may differ based on the network configuration.
Page 7314
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 12873
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab)
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Step 3)
Page 7164
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way.
^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
2. Remove the rear brake rotor.
^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly.
^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions.
4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers.
5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools.
Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Fuel Pressure: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open
Acceleration
Classification: FE07-004
Reference: NTB07-040
Date: June 6, 2007
2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007
Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223
APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007
IF YOU CONFIRM
When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced,
ACTIONS
1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure).
2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump.
NOTE:
Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 10505
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 33
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 11246
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 4068
ECM Inspection Table Part 2
Fuse and Relay Box
Diagram Information and Instructions
Alarm Horn Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 384
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 12636
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13000
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 2284
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 634
Page 3470
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 4486
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Service and Repair
Splash Guard: Service and Repair
MUDGUARD
Removal and Installation
NOTE: Crew Cab shown King Cab similar.
Page 4239
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 3629
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 860
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 11874
Mirror Motor RH Circuit Check (Step 4)
Page 11133
Speaker: Service and Repair Front Tweeter
FRONT TWEETER
Removal
1. Remove front tweeter grille.
2. Remove front tweeter screws (A). 3. Disconnect connector and remove front tweeter.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5106
Case 5
Page 3593
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation
WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE
The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. ECM provides an engine
coolant temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines.
Page 8098
5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then turn CONSULT-II OFF.
6. Remove the red/white Diagnostic Card and insert the 8 MB orange Reprogramming Card into
CONSULT-II.
The 8 MB reprogramming card should already have special ABS/VDC reprogramming data loaded
into it (see Part 1).
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine).
^ CONSULT-II will turn ON automatically (see Figure 13).
^ Confirm that all electrical loads* (except for the ignition) are "OFF".
* Headlights, defroster, A/C, audio (radio), video, cellular telephone, etc.
8. Roll down the driver's window part way, exit the vehicle, close the door, and hang the CONSULT
II unit on the outside of the window (see Figure 14).
This step is necessary to make sure the CONSULT-II and DLC-II cable will not be disturbed during
reprogramming.
CAUTION:
DO NOT connect the CONSULT-II AC power supply for Steps 1, 2, and 3 in Section 3 below.
9. Continue with Section 3.
Section 3
Section 3: Confirm the vehicle's battery voltage and CONSULT-II "Charger Input"
1. Press [SUB MODE], then select [BATTERY CHARGE]
Page 1804
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 4066
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
Page 4366
Knock Sensor: Connector Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 12710
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 13957
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 2082
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 6254
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B)
Page 777
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored
Classification: EC06-001A
Reference: NTB06-009A
Date: March 31, 2006
MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information
sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of
this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
The MIL is "ON" with
^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR
^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit,
and
There are no drivability incidents.
DETERMINE IF
This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure.
ACTIONS
If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections:
^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections.
^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection.
^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left
side instrument stay assembly.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 2065
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 939
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
- Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
1. Disconnect the harness connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 2.
Remove center console. 3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors. 4. Remove fixing
bolts from the diagnosis sensor unit.
CAUTION:
- Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts.
- Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it
shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one.
- Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures
CAUTION:
- The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark "<=" pointing toward the
front of the vehicle for proper operation.
ECU DISCRIMINATED NO.
After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis sensor unit identification is
correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to "CONSULT-II Function".
Page 12746
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
Page 13599
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 10311
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 4465
Component Parts Location
Page 2689
11. Remove the Tool from the radiator neck opening and install the radiator cap. 12. Remove the
non-vented reservoir cap. 13. Fill the cooling system reservoir tank to the specified level. Run the
engine to warm up the cooling system and top up the system as necessary
before installing the vented reservoir cap.
FLUSHING COOLING SYSTEM
1. Drain the water from the engine cooling system. 2. Fill the radiator and the reservoir tank (to the
"MAX" line), with water. Reinstall the radiator cap and leave the vented reservoir cap off. 3. Run the
engine until it reaches normal operating temperature. 4. Press the engine accelerator two or three
times under no-load. 5. Stop the engine and wait until it cools down. 6. Drain the water from the
engine cooling system. 7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 until clear water begins to drain from the
radiator.
Page 13076
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 4466
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 8777
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 14097
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) (Steps 4 - 5)
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 2477
^ Apply the brakes as shown.
^ Start the engine to allow brake boost.
^ Turn the engine OFF,
^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates".
^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate.
Put the bridge plate in the down position.
^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle.
Page 4970
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 1465
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8822
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 6238
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 13014
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 8709
vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which
are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil
penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to
new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory
before they are retailed.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS
REPAIR OVERVIEW
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Inspection Procedure 1: Seat Belt Retractors
Inspection Procedure 2: Air Bag Light / Codes
Inspection Procedure 3: Harness Damage
Install Update Kit: Replace Vinyl Tube with Corrugated Tube
Harness Replacement: Includes seat belt replacement, if needed.
Floor and Rear Door: Left and/or right side
Rear Cabin Wall Harness Branch: Left side only
High Mount Stop Lamp Harness Branch: Right side only
Side Curtain Air Bag Harness Branch: Right side only
PARTS INFORMATION
NOTE:
Order the body harness indicated in the electronic parts catalog. Your order will be automatically
superseded to the appropriate campaign service harness part number. As noted in steps 45 and 67
campaign service harnesses have some connectors taped to the harness. Those connectors may
or may not be utilized in the repair depending upon the optional equipment on the vehicle being
serviced.
Locations
Amplifier: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5659
Page 13539
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch Ground Circuit Inspection
Page 7620
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 10378
Control Module HVAC: Description and Operation Manual Air Conditioner
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Front Air Control
The front air control has a built-in microcomputer which processes information sent from various
sensors needed for air conditioner operation. The air mix door motor (front), mode door motor,
intake door motor, defroster door motor, blower motor and compressor are then controlled.
The front air control is unitized with control mechanisms. When the various switches and
temperature control dial are operated, data is input to the front air control.
Self-diagnostic functions are also built into the front air control to provide quick check of
malfunctions in the air conditioner system.
Page 1838
Page 7368
9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically.
Page 9366
^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, align the marks.
NOTE: When not using the alignment mark, refer to BR-35, "Front Disc Brake". See: Brakes and
Traction Control/Specifications
^ When installing wheel and tire, refer to "Rotation". See: Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and
Repair/Tire Rotation
Page 8816
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 12254
Lifting Sensor (Front) Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Lifting Sensor (Front) Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 4284
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output
voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases.
Page 12653
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Locations
Power Mirror Switch: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6485
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Diagram Information and Instructions
Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Data Link Connector: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 10685
Child Seat Tether Attachment: Service and Repair Top Tether Strap Child Restraint
TOP TETHER STRAP CHILD RESTRAINT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Fold rear seat backs down.
2. Remove bolts and remove tether anchors.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 9949
"CM" I.D.: PB077-2005 and 2006 vehicles built on or after March 17, 2005. Refer to Service COMM
to confirm the correct campaign ID #.
Page 8376
Page 10854
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 10273
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 5210
Check Sheet Part 1
Page 3449
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 7664
13. Connect revolution sensor connector.
14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips.
15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal
CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level.
Page 4825
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 7939
1. Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal and insert into groove on cylinder body.
CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seal.
2. Apply brake fluid to piston and to piston boot, then install piston boot in to piston groove.
CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boot.
3. Insert piston into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove.
CAUTION: Press piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from
being rubbed.
4. Install sliding boots and sleeves to cylinder body.
Page 2266
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 14071
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 5856
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Recall 08V284000: Condenser Fan Motor Fire Hazard
Condenser Fan Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 08V284000: Condenser Fan Motor
Fire Hazard
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Infiniti/QX56 2005-2006 Nissan/Armada 2005-2006
Nissan/Titan 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: June 24, 2008
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 08V284000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: PE08037 COMPONENT: Equipment: Electrical: Air Conditioner
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 180664
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling 180,664 M/Y 2005-2006 Titan, Armada and Infiniti QX56 vehicles
manufactured after March 17, 2005, That are equipped with a Visteon air conditioning condenser
fan motor. The fan motor may not be properly sealed allowing excessive water intrusion and
inadequate drainage of moisture.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause corrosion in the motor leading possibly to overheating and a
fire.
REMEDY: Dealers will install a "Thermal Protector Kit" and test the air conditioning condenser fan
motor and replace it if necessary. The recall is expected to begin near the end of July 2008.
Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Automatic Air Conditioner
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7868
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 220
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Page 9083
1. Turn the ignition ON and observe the air bag warning light:
^ Light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out: OK, go to Inspection Procedure 3.
^ Light stays ON or blinks: NG, go to next step (step 2).
^ Light does not come on at all: The warning light is not working correctly. This condition is not
covered by this campaign. Use the Service Manual and standard warranty procedures to repair the
warning light before proceeding.
2. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle and retrieve DTCs
Inspection Procedure 3 (Inspect Wire Harness at Rear Door Hinge)
1. Open the rear door and locate the harness in the door hinge area.
2. Inspect the wire harness vinyl tube:
^ Inspect the entire visible area. Look for worn areas, tears, and/or slits.
Page 5524
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 660
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 4636
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389)
Repair Overview
PARTS INFORMATION
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 121
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 12104
5. Remove the snap ring and the lumbar support lever knob.
6. CAUTION: On the passenger seat during installation, the wire harness clips must be installed in
the holes they were originally in.
Do not add additional clips. Disconnect the seatback heater harness. Remove the seatback trim
and pad assembly. Remove the hog ring to separate the seatback trim from the pad and the heater
unit.
Page 2608
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
WARNING: Be sure to perform when the engine is stopped.
1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly when inspecting drive belt. 2. Make sure that indicator
(single line notch) of each auto tensioner is within the allowable working range "A" (between three
line notches) as
shown.
NOTE: ^
Check the auto tensioner indication when the engine is cold.
^ When the new drive belt is installed, the range should be "A" as shown.
^ The indicator notch is located on the moving side of the auto tensioner.
3. Visually check entire belt for wear, damage or cracks. 4. If the indicator is out of allowable
working range or belt is damaged, replace the belt.
Page 14021
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Body - Water on Front Floor After Rain or Washing
Cowl: Customer Interest Body - Water on Front Floor After Rain or Washing
Classification: BT07-011
Reference: NTB07-034
Date: may 9, 2007
2004 - 2008 TITAN AND ARMADA; WATER ON FRONT FLOOR AFTER RAIN OR WASH
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2008 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2008 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The front floor is wet (left or right side) when it rains or when the vehicle is washed.
NOTE:
If the floor is wet on the passenger side only when using the A/C, this bulletin does not apply - see
NTB05-112.
ACTIONS
1. Apply water to the windshield/cowl area with a garden hose at medium flow and check for water
leaks.
2. If water is leaking (floor is wet), continue to apply the water until you find the source of the leak.
3. Use 3M(TM) Fast 'n Firm(TM) Seam Sealer-or equivalent-to seal the leak.
4. Allow the sealer to cure, and then recheck for leaks with the garden hose.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual - Section UY - and use the appropriate
warranty claims coding.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Apply water to the windshield/cowl area with a garden hose at medium flow and check for water
leaks.
^ Make sure to check underneath the carpet and underneath the rubber mat covering the engine
wall.
2. If water is leaking (floor is wet), continue to apply the water until you find the source of the leak.
^ Check body seam seal areas behind the dash and on the floor.
Page 5185
Case 7
Page 5834
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
TP SENSOR
Component Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The
throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which
transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In
addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the
voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from
these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
Page 11941
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature
Sensor 2
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T
Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
COMPONENTS
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect
A/T assembly harness connector.
Page 11007
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 12549
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 10892
Ignition Key In Signal: Testing and Inspection Key Switch (Insert) Check (Floor Shift)
Key Switch (Insert) Check (Floor Shift) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 2064
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 4112
Optional Splice
Page 1463
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 4307
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
TP SENSOR
Component Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The
throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which
transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In
addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the
voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from
these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
Page 6401
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 13938
Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (King
Cab) (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 10404
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Testing and Inspection
Security Indicator Lamp Check
Page 5079
Case 6
Page 1825
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7481
c. Tighten bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
3. Install breather hose to transfer control device. 4. Connect transfer control device harness
connector. 5. After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position
between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to
"Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement". See: Service
Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control
Unit Replacement
Page 9586
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 3911
Page 4126
Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 5216
Case 5
Page 11594
Rear Door Window Motor: Testing and Inspection Rear Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check
(Crew Cab)
Rear Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 14271
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 1881
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11034
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 7018
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 12649
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab)
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Step 3)
Page 13064
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 9099
d. Take the harness branch loose from the body.
17. Remove the lower anchor bolt for the rear seat belt.
18. Remove the lower side finisher.
^ Use a plastic trim tool.
19. Remove the seat belt retractor; 1 bolt.
20. Remove the harness ground bolt.
21. Remove the floor mat holder.
Page 3618
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 12855
Door Switch: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1123
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 4057
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 3171
17. Clean the crankshaft pulley belt ribs/grooves.
^ Remove the debris by hand with a wire brush.
^ Do not use a power tool.
18. Install belt tensioner. Replace if it was found to be noisy.
19. Install new drive belt. Refer to section EM of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for
installation procedure.
20. Connect harness clips.
21. Install fender protector. Refer to section EXT of the ESM for installation procedure.
22. Install front right wheel.
23. Lower the vehicle.
24. Re-connect battery cable, positive side first.
25. Start engine.
26. Confirm the issue is resolved.
27. Reprogram the radio presets.
28. Reinitialize the power sunroof.
Page 7433
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 6940
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1042
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 14289
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 3240
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Clean the oil strainer.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the oil pan (upper) using the following steps.
a. Using a scraper to remove old liquid gasket from mating surfaces.
- Also remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of oil pan (upper).
- Remove old liquid gasket from bolt holes and threads.
CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off old liquid gasket.
b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket as shown using Tool.
Tool number: WS39930000 ( - )
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
CAUTION: Apply liquid gasket to outside of bolt hole for the hole shown by *. Installation should be done within
5 minutes after applying liquid gasket.
c. Install new O-rings to the oil pump and front cover side.
Page 5670
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6185
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 3643
Water Pump: Service and Repair
WATER PUMP
CAUTION: ^
When removing water pump, be careful not to get engine coolant on drive belt.
^ Water pump cannot be disassembled and should be replaced as a unit.
REMOVAL
1. Drain engine coolant so that no engine coolant comes out from water pump fitting hole.
CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold.
2. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool. 3. Remove the air duct and resonator
assembly. 4. Remove the drive belt. 5. Remove the water pump pulley. 6. Remove the water pump.
^ Engine coolant will leak from the cylinder block, so have a receptacle ready below.
CAUTION: Handle water pump vane so that it does not contact any other parts.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
^ Visually check that there is no significant dirt or rust on the water pump body and vane.
^ Make sure there is no looseness in the vane shaft, and that it turns smoothly when rotated by
hand.
^ Replace the water pump assembly, if necessary.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
After installation bleed the air from the cooling system.
Page 3864
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II.
^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information.
2. Compare your printout to the chart.
a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3.
b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply.
^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information.
3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows:
Page 6666
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 9580
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 6562
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 13176
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 1130
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Diagram Information and Instructions
Headlamp Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 8631
IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection
Page 3902
Page 9098
c. Remove the 2 connector support bolts.
d. Slide the connector support UP to remove it.
16. If equipped with side curtain air bags:
^ If you are replacing the passenger side harness; steps for disconnecting the side curtain air bag
will be covered later in this procedure.
^ If you are replacing the driver side harness, disconnect the side curtain air bag as follows.
a. Remove the 3 mounting nuts for the parking brake pedal assembly and move the assembly out
of the way.
b. From the floor, look up towards the front pillar and locate the side curtain air bag connector.
c. Disconnect the side curtain air bag.
Page 1904
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 2236
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 4462
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 5891
Optional Splice
Locations
Page 7032
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 9396
WARNING:
This repair MUST be done with the vehicle's full weight on the suspension.
EITHER:
Place the vehicle on a drive-on hoist or alignment rack to lift the vehicle.
OR
Leave all of the vehicle's weight on all four (4) tires, while parked (do not lift the vehicle).
DO NOT lift the vehicle in any amount. The suspension must support all of the vehicle's weight
during the whole repair procedure or the bushing will be under load and difficult to remove.
1. With the vehicle positioned as stated above, put the shift selector in "P" (PARK) position.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Remove the bolt and bushing from the windup clip (clip).
4. Check the condition of the bolt's and clip's threads, and the bushing.
^ If both the bushing and bolt's threads are okay, reuse them.
^ If the bushing and / or bolt's threads are damaged, replace with all parts in the "Spring Assembly
Kit".
^ If the clip's threads are damaged, replace the leaf spring assembly.
5. Install the bolt (and bushing) with Permatex(R) Medium Strength Threadlocker BLUE or
equivalent thread locking material applied to the threads.
Torque bolt to 32 N.m (3.2 kg-m, 23 ft-lb).
Page 7365
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Page 7321
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Service and Repair
Sunroof / Moonroof Cable: Service and Repair
LINK AND WIRE ASSEMBLY
NOTE: Before replacing any suspect part, carefully ensure it is the source of the noise being
experienced.
1. Visually check to determine if a sufficient amount of petroleum jelly has been applied to the wire
or rail groove. If not, add petroleum jelly as
required.
2. Check wire for any damage or deterioration. If any damage is found, remove rear guide, then
replace wire.
Page 8385
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 7396
Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Remove the
glove box assembly.
3. Disconnect transfer control unit connectors. 4. Remove the transfer control unit.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Transfer control unit
bolts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.)
^ After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer
assembly and transfer control unit. See: Transfer Case/Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage
Warnings/Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement
Page 7569
c. Tighten bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
3. Install breather hose to transfer control device. 4. Connect transfer control device harness
connector. 5. After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position
between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to
"Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement". See: Service
Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control
Unit Replacement
Page 9693
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 11306
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Brakes - Brake/ABS Lamp ON/Pedal Vibration/DTC C1179
Technical Service Bulletin # 06-040 Date: 060512
Brakes - Brake/ABS Lamp ON/Pedal Vibration/DTC C1179
Classification: BR06-007
Reference: NTB06-040
Date: May 12, 2006
2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; ABS AND/OR BRAKE
WARNING LIGHT ON WITH DTC C1179
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) equipped with VDC 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60)
equipped with VDC
IF YOU CONFIRM
A customer reports:
^ The brake warning light is or was ON, and/or
^ The ABS warning light is or was ON, and/or
^ There is or was vibration* in the brake pedal while braking.
* This vibration is the rapid consistent-speed pedal pulsation that is felt when the ABS is activated.
ACTIONS
^ Make sure this bulletin applies (see Part 1 of the Service Procedure). If this bulletin does not
apply, refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding shown.
Page 5250
Case 3
Page 13947
Optional Splice
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6460
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 9184
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 7964
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
BRAKE JUDDER
^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out.
Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not
parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see
Figure 1).
Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on
each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this
point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation
(see Figure 2).
^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake
pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering
wheel.
Vehicle Storage:
^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the
brake pads will rust.
^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface
will be different.
^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off.
Lug Nut Overtorque:
^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over
tightened, especially with an air impact
Page 4759
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab)
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab)
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 81
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 10058
Control Assembly: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner
CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the three control knobs from the front air control unit. 2. Remove the cluster lid C.
3. Remove the four screws securing the front air control unit to the cluster lid C. 4. Disconnect the
two electrical connectors. 5. Remove the front air control unit.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 11525
NOTE:
Clip locations are shown as dots in the picture.
Page 2452
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 4585
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 13905
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 8742
64. Take the harness loose from the side of the cabin.
65. If equipped with side curtain air bags; disconnect the side curtain air bag module as follows:
a. Remove the right side sun visor, 2 screws under the trim cover.
^ Use a plastic trim tool to remove the trim cover.
^ Disconnect the electrical connector.
Page 550
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use
Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036.
1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM.
a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other
damage.
Page 4858
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 3759
Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Page 14449
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 6954
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13860
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 1586
Page 13562
Combination Switch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Combination Switch Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 1871
Combination Switch Inspection (Step 4)
Page 3038
^ Compress the plunger and hold it using a stopper pin when installing.
^ Loosen the slack guide side timing chain by rotating the camshaft hexagonal part if mounting
space is small. Chain tensioner bolts: 6.9 Nm (0.70 kg-m, 61 inch lbs.)
b. Remove the stopper pin and release the plunger, and then apply tension to the timing chain.
c. Install the RH bank timing chain tensioner cover onto the front cover.
^ Apply liquid gasket as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Tensioner cover
bolts: 9.0 Nm (0.92 kg-m, 80 inch lbs.)
7. Check and adjust valve clearances. 8. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse
order of removal.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000
Stored
Classification: EC06-001A
Reference: NTB06-009A
Date: March 31, 2006
MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information
sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of
this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
The MIL is "ON" with
^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR
^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit,
and
There are no drivability incidents.
DETERMINE IF
This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure.
ACTIONS
If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections:
^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections.
^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection.
^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left
side instrument stay assembly.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 4128
Page 12847
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH
Removal
1. Remove cluster lid A.
2. Carefully pry tabs and remove illumination control switch from cluster lid A.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 7607
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 10574
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8612
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 603
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 12244
Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 877
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 4401
7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle
Air Volume Learning will not be carried out
successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
- It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
- It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch
ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the
MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the
MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air
Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find
Page 926
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 462
Page 2139
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 7809
Disclaimer
Parts 1-4 Descriptions
There are 4 parts to this service procedure. They must be done in order.
Part 1: Make sure DTC C1179 is or can be stored in ABS self diagnosis.
^ Go to Part 1 for this part of the service procedure.
Part 2: Download special VDC Reprogramming Data from ASIST onto your standard 8 MB
(orange) Reprogramming Card.
^ Do NOT use the 16 MB (orange) "QR25 Campaign ECM Software" Card (# J-44200-ECMR-16).
If you use this card, it will be reformatted to an 8MB card.
^ Go to Part 2 for this part of the service procedure.
Part 3: Reprogram the VDC Control Unit with the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card (that now
contains the downloaded VDC reprogramming data from ASIST).
^ Go to Part 3 for this part of the service procedure.
Part 4: Re-program the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card back to its original format so it can be
used for standard ECU reprogramming.
^ Refer to Part 4 for this part of the service procedure.
NOTE:
These procedures should be performed in order by an OBD-II certified Technician.
Part 1
Part 1: Make sure DTC C1179 is, or can be, stored in ABS self diagnosis.
1. Using CONSULT-II, check ABS Self Diagnosis.
^ If DTC C1179 is stored, this bulletin applies; go to Part 2.
^ If DTC C1179 is not stored, go to the next step.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
Page 2309
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 8497
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7795
^ After you click on "OK" an ASIST screen will appear that shows the data transfer progress (see
Figure 10).
c. Wait until the data transfer is complete (see the CAUTION at the end of step 8).
^ When the data transfer is complete, CONSULT-II will shut off automatically.
d. Disconnect the A/C power cord and the Ethernet cable from CONSULT-II.
Procedure
Part 3: Reprogram ABS/VDC Control Unit with 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card
CAUTION:
^ Perform this operation in five (5) sections. DO NOT SKIP any of these sections.
^ The sections must be performed in order, 1 through 5.
Section 1: Connect a battery charger and CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
Section 2: Check all systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTC(s).
Section 3: Confirm the vehicle battery voltage and CONSULT-II "Charger Input".
Section 4: Perform ABS/VDC Control Unit Reprogramming.
Section 5: Again, perform a check of all systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any newly
stored DTCs.
Section 1
Section 1: Connect a battery charger and CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
1. Confirm the ignition switch is OFF.
2. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. Set the charger at a low charge rate (2-amp
"trickle charge").
IMPORTANT
You must connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery when performing ABS/VDC
reprogramming. Permanent ABS/VDC damage can occur if you don't.
Connecting a vehicle battery charger will maintain:
^ Proper CONSULT-II power supply during reprogramming-very important if the CONSULT-II
battery is low.
^ Vehicle battery voltage level-especially on late model vehicles where the cooling fans come on
during reprogramming.
3. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle using the DLC-II cable with black Converter Box (see Figure
11).
Page 7658
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
harness.
Page 14428
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 10873
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Locations
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 920
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 9848
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
Removal and Installation
FUNCTION
The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin microfilters when the heater or
A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin microfilters are
located in the front heater and cooling unit assembly.
REPLACEMENT TIMING
Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a regular interval depending on
the driving conditions. Refer to "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE". It may also be necessary to replace
the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are
damaged.
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
1. Remove the two lower glove box hinge pins to remove the glove box from the instrument panel
and let it hang from the cord.
2. Remove the screw and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. 3. Remove the in-cabin microfilters
from the front heater and cooling unit assembly housing.
Page 1469
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 4487
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 9502
3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2.
^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process
Tire:
^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area)
NOTE:
Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may
become un-balanced.
Wheel:
^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area.
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area
4. Before inflating the tire:
^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks.
Page 1916
Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair
HAZARD SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid C.
2. While pressing the tab, push out the hazard switch.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 10220
The electronic refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) is a delicate device. To use the electronic
refrigerant leak detector (J-41995) properly, read the manufacturer's operating instructions and
perform any specified maintenance.
1. Position the probe approximately 5 mm (3/16 in) away from the point to be checked as shown.
2. When checking for leaks, circle each fitting completely with the probe as shown.
3. Move the probe along each component at a speed of approximately 25 - 50 mm (1 - 2 in)/second
as shown.
CHECKING PROCEDURE
NOTE: To prevent inaccurate or false readings, make sure there is no refrigerant vapor, shop
chemicals, or cigarette smoke in the vicinity of the vehicle. Perform the leak test in a calm area (low
air/wind movement) so that the leaking refrigerant is not dispersed.
1. Turn the engine OFF. 2. Connect the manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) to the A/C service ports.
Refer to "SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT". 3. Check if the A/C refrigerant
pressure is at least 345 kPa (3.52 kg/sq.cm, 50 psi) above a temperature of 16 degrees C (61
degrees F). If less than
Locations
Line Pressure Test Port
Page 3051
CAUTION: Do not rotate crankshaft with plastigage installed.
^ Remove the connecting rod bearing cap and bearings. Measure the plastigage width using the
scale on the plastigage bag.
NOTE: The procedure when the measured value exceeds the repair limit is the same as that
described in "Method of Measurement".
CRUSH HEIGHT OF CONNECTING ROD BEARING
^ When connecting rod bearing cap is removed after being tightened to the specified torque with
the connecting rod bearings installed, the tip end of the bearing must protrude. Standard: There
must be crush height.
^ If standard is not met, replace connecting rod bearings.
Connecting Rod Bearing
Page 4346
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 1650
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4933
ECM Inspection Table Part 2
Body - Water on Front Floor After Rain or Washing
Cowl: All Technical Service Bulletins Body - Water on Front Floor After Rain or Washing
Classification: BT07-011
Reference: NTB07-034
Date: may 9, 2007
2004 - 2008 TITAN AND ARMADA; WATER ON FRONT FLOOR AFTER RAIN OR WASH
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2008 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2008 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The front floor is wet (left or right side) when it rains or when the vehicle is washed.
NOTE:
If the floor is wet on the passenger side only when using the A/C, this bulletin does not apply - see
NTB05-112.
ACTIONS
1. Apply water to the windshield/cowl area with a garden hose at medium flow and check for water
leaks.
2. If water is leaking (floor is wet), continue to apply the water until you find the source of the leak.
3. Use 3M(TM) Fast 'n Firm(TM) Seam Sealer-or equivalent-to seal the leak.
4. Allow the sealer to cure, and then recheck for leaks with the garden hose.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual - Section UY - and use the appropriate
warranty claims coding.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Apply water to the windshield/cowl area with a garden hose at medium flow and check for water
leaks.
^ Make sure to check underneath the carpet and underneath the rubber mat covering the engine
wall.
2. If water is leaking (floor is wet), continue to apply the water until you find the source of the leak.
^ Check body seam seal areas behind the dash and on the floor.
Page 9349
2. For rear lower link(s) identified as needing replacement:
Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section RSU, for
link replacement information.
^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts
Information.
^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts
Information.
^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations.
3. Perform a wheel alignment.
^ For Frontier, Xterra, and Titan: Perform a 2 wheel alignment (refer to Section FSU in the
appropriate Service Manual for alignment specifications and
adjustment points).
^ For Pathfinder and Armada: Perform a 4 wheel alignment. (Refer to sections FSU and RSU in the
appropriate Service Manual for alignment
specifications and adjustment points.)
NOTE:
The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need
replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only.
4. Grind a large X (about 1/16 inch deep) on the bottom side of the old link so it can be identified as
a non-usable part.
NOTE:
Make sure to use suitable hand and eye protection.
Page 12214
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 3)
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 4)
Page 2716
Fluid - Differential: Fluid Type Specifications
Final Drive Fluid 2WD & 4WD
Front final Drive Use ............................................................................................................................
...................................................................... API GL-5 SAE 80W-90 For hot climates, viscosity SAE
90 is suitable for ambient temperatures above 0°C (32°F)
Rear final Drive Use ............................................................................................................................
............................................... API GL-5 Synthetic 75W-140 gear oil
Page 13025
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 8620
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9540
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Axle
Axle Shaft
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Before removing the axle shaft, remove the ABS sensor to reposition the ABS sensor
out of the way. Failure to do so may result in damage to the ABS sensor and cause the ABS
sensor to become inoperative.
Page 5806
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 11207
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 10875
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 13538
Page 6725
Attachment General Procedure
Page 10589
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 2060
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 4441
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 8807
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 75
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 250
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 6886
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 12164
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 5422
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 12584
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 13903
Page 10651
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 11213
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 5286
Case 3
Page 8114
6. From the "CONSULT UTILITIES" screen, select "ECU Reprog. Data" (see Figure 4).
Page 5557
b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a).
c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed.
^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer.
d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2.
2. Record the radio station presets:
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
NOTE:
Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding.
Page 1081
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 14448
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 10616
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Air Bag (Satellite) Sensor
SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
- Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
1. Remove seat belt pre-tensioner. 2. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor nuts. 3. Disconnect
the side air bag (satellite) sensor harness connector.
CAUTION:
- Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts.
- Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it
shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one.
- Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor.
- Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics
Page 5547
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 8047
Parking Brake Control: Adjustments
ADJUSTMENT
1. Remove the lower instrument panel LH. 2. Partially engage parking brake pedal to access
adjusting nut.
3. Insert a deep socket wrench to rotate adjusting nut and loosen cable sufficiently. Then,
disengage the parking brake pedal. 4. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool.
5. Remove the disc rotor and measure inner diameter at widest point using Tool.
Tool number: - (J-21177-A)
6. Transfer measurement less 0.6 mm to the parking brake shoes and adjust accordingly. 7. Using
wheel nuts, secure the disc rotor to the hub to prevent it from tilting. 8. Rotate the disc rotor to
make sure there is no drag. 9. Adjust cable as follows:
a. Operate pedal 10 or more times with a force of 490 N (50 kg-f, 110 lbs.). b. Rotate adjusting nut
with deep socket to adjust pedal stroke to specification.
Pedal stroke: 3 - 4 notches [under force of 196 N (20.0 kg-f, 44.1 ft. lbs.)]
c. With parking brake pedal completely disengaged, make sure there is no drag on the parking
brake.
10. Install the disc rotor. 11. Install the wheel and tire using power tool. 12. Install the lower
instrument panel LH.
Collision Diagnosis
Repairs and Inspections Required After a Collision: Service and Repair Collision Diagnosis
COLLISION DIAGNOSIS
For Frontal Collision
Check the SRS components using the table.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics
SRS Inspection (For Frontal Collision) Part 1
Page 11283
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5238
Case 10
Page 5281
Case 16
Case 17
NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Page 8169
Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair G Sensor
G SENSOR
Removal and Installation REMOVAL
1. Remove center console or center seat as required.
2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts as shown.
^ The location of the sensor is the same for all models.
CAUTION: ^
Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
^ Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: After installation, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
Page 9743
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 143
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 1366
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor.
2. Install axle shaft assembly.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 5910
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 12368
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 13137
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 5775
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Connector Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 7967
Brake Rotor/Disc: Specifications
Brake Rotor/Disc
Front brake CLZ31VC Rotor outer diameter x thickness
................................................................................................................................... 320 x 26 mm
(12.60 x 1.02 inch) Standard thickness (new) .....................................................................................
............................................................................ 26.0 mm (1.024 inch) Repair limit thickness ...........
...........................................................................................................................................................
24.5 mm (0.965 inch) Maximum uneven wear (measured at 8 positions)
....................................................................................................................... 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch)
runout limit (with it attached to the vehicle)
.................................................................................................................................... 0.03 mm
(0.001 inch)
Rear brake CLZ31VC Rotor outer diameter x thickness
................................................................................................................................... 320 x 14 mm
(12.60 x 0.55 inch) AD14VE Standard thickness (new) ......................................................................
........................................................................................... 14.0 mm (0.551 inch) REpair limit
thickness ..............................................................................................................................................
........................ 12.0 mm (0.472 inch) Maximum uneven wear (measured at 8 positions)
....................................................................................................................... 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch)
Runout limit (with it attached to the vehicle)
................................................................................................................................... 0.07 mm (0.003
inch)
Page 1969
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of
the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is
disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2
seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and
wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 2103
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 5849
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 9333
2. For rear lower link(s) identified as needing replacement:
Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section RSU, for
link replacement information.
^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts
Information.
^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts
Information.
^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations.
3. Perform a wheel alignment.
^ For Frontier, Xterra, and Titan: Perform a 2 wheel alignment (refer to Section FSU in the
appropriate Service Manual for alignment specifications and
adjustment points).
^ For Pathfinder and Armada: Perform a 4 wheel alignment. (Refer to sections FSU and RSU in the
appropriate Service Manual for alignment
specifications and adjustment points.)
NOTE:
The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need
replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only.
4. Grind a large X (about 1/16 inch deep) on the bottom side of the old link so it can be identified as
a non-usable part.
NOTE:
Make sure to use suitable hand and eye protection.
Page 6571
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 31
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 14466
Optional Splice
Page 12856
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5430
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 718
Page 6692
Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
Components
Components
REMOVAL
Differential Lock Position Switch
Page 13366
NOTE:
^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not
replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control
unit using the old starter.
^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is:
^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb)
Page 10646
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 528
^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay.
9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay.
^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without
causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals.
10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6).
11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs.
Page 8886
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 13663
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
ABS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 11900
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 11286
Page 1732
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Fuel Pressure: By Symptom Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Classification: FE07-004
Reference: NTB07-040
Date: June 6, 2007
2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007
Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223
APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007
IF YOU CONFIRM
When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced,
ACTIONS
1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure).
2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump.
NOTE:
Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 6857
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 9622
Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Passenger) (Steps 13 - 15)
Page 5901
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 10867
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 2474
> Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels
> Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and
inspections.
4. Check the target mounts.
^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before
performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11).
NOTE:
The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines.
Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment.
Page 6271
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 316
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 13639
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 6622
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14230
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 13031
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Service and Repair
Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
Components
Page 13426
2. Using a suitable tool (A), remove map lamp lens (1). 3. Release one side of the bulb (2) from the
tab, then pull straight downward to remove.
Map lamp bulb: 12 V - 8 W
CAUTION: Wrap a cloth around tool to protect the housing and lens.
Page 10026
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Locations
Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 301
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 4656
^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay.
9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay.
^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without
causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals.
10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6).
11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs.
Page 1304
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection
Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Page 77
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Drivetrain - Oil Leaks From The Transfer Case
Case: All Technical Service Bulletins Drivetrain - Oil Leaks From The Transfer Case
Classification: TF10-003
Reference: NTB10-047
Date: March 19, 2010
TITAN, FRONTIER, XTERRA, AND PATHFINDER; OIL LEAKING FROM TRANSFER CASE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2007 Titan (A60) 2005 - 2007 Frontier (D40) 2005 - 2007 Xterra
(N50) 2005 - 2007 Pathfinder (R51)
APPLIED TRANSFER CASES: TX15A and TX15B assemblies
IF YOU CONFIRM:
Oil is leaking from one or a combination of three bolts at rear of the transfer case (See Figure 1).
^ Figure 1 shows the transfer case viewed from the rear.
ACTION:
Refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE on Page 3 of this bulletin.
^ If the bolts are not missing, do NOT replace the transfer case, transfer control device, or transfer
control unit for this incident, if it should occur.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 4259
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 1149
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 9733
2. Take the tie-wrap mount loose (see Figure 3).
3. Measure 5 mm from the tie-wrap (see Figure 3).
4. Carefully cut the tape off of the harness as shown in Figure 3.
^ Use scissors with a blunt end. Don't damage the wires inside the harness.
Page 5349
DESCRIPTION OF CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR SCREEN FOR TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
DESCRIPTION OF CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR SCREEN FOR ABS ACTUATOR AND
ELECTRIC UNIT (CONTROL UNIT)
Description Of "CAN Diag Support MNTR" Screen For ABS Actuator And Electric Unit (Control
Unit)
ABS models
Page 13509
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 14446
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 7947
^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior
to the introduction of the NAO compound.
^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level
of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads.
^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must
decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance.
^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake
pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service.
Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise:
^ Occurs with or without braking.
^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor.
^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using
the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service
Manual procedures.
Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop:
^ This is sometimes called "creep groan".
^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary.
Groan noise during stopping:
^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking.
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to
Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes:
^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes
are applied.
^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal.
^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur.
^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly.
^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information.
^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started:
^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary.
^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the
first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the
first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started.
Rear Brake Squeal:
^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or
drums.
^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components.
WARNING:
Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust
precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment.
On-Board Inspection
Brake Fluid: Service and Repair On-Board Inspection
On-board Inspection LEVEL CHECK
^ Make sure the fluid level in reservoir tank is within the standard (between MAX and MIN lines).
^ Visually check around reservoir tank for fluid leaks.
^ If fluid level is excessively low, check brake system for leaks.
^ If brake warning lamp remains illuminated after parking brake pedal is released, check brake
system for fluid leakage.
Page 11920
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 12782
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 1744
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 13595
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 8103
a. CONSULT-II will display the screen shown in Figure 20.
You will need to turn the ignition OFF for at least one full second and then turn the ignition back
ON.
Then press "OK" on the CONSULT-II screen.
b. CONSULT-II will automatically print out a report (see Figure 21).
^ Attach the print-out report to the Repair Order for future reference.
7. Press [BACK] two times to return to the main menu.
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF and CONSULT-II OFF.
9. Continue with Section 5.
Section 5
Section 5: Again, perform a check of all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any newly
stored DTC(s).
1. Remove the 8 MB orange Reprogramming Card from CONSULT-II.
2. Install the red/white Diagnostic Card into Slot A (top slot) of CONSULT-II.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine).
^ CONSULT-II will turn ON automatically.
^ Confirm that all electrical loads* (except for the ignition) are OFF.
Page 3900
Page 1119
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded
Front Door Panel: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded
Classification: BT10-024
Reference: NTB10-095
Date: August 13, 2010
2004-2010 TITAN; DOOR TRIM PANEL DISCOLORED/FADED
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The pull handle trim panel on a front or rear door is discolored/faded. See Figures 1 and 2.
ACTION
Clean the discolored/faded trim panel as instructed in the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
This condition is not "dirt" on the trim panel surface. This condition exists within the panel itself.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 3929
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 9910
Figure A-3
Page 7788
2. Connect the AC power supply to CONSULT-II.
3. Connect CONSULT-II to the ASIST PC with the special Ethernet cable (P/N 02002554 is printed
on the cable).
a. Connect one end to CONSULT-II at the "PC port".
b. Connect the other end to the ASIST PC at the "Ethernet card" connection port.
4. Confirm the CONSULT-II date and time are correctly set as follows:
(This is necessary to provide a valid print-out for warranty claims.)
a. With the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming card in slot A, turn ON CONSULT-II.
b. Touch [SUB MODE]
c. Touch [SET DATE] (see Figure 2).
1) If the date is not correct, touch the [MONTH], [DAY] or [YEAR] as needed. Then adjust it by
using arrow keys. Once done, press [SAVE], press [BACK], and go to step d.
2) If the date is OK, press [BACK] and go to step d.
d. Touch [SET TIME] (see Figure 2).
1) If time is not correct, touch the [HOUR], [MINUTE] or [AM/PM] as needed. Then adjust it by
using arrow keys. After you are done, press [SAVE], press [BACK] and go to step 5.
2) If time is OK, press [BACK] and go to step 5.
IMPORTANT NOTE
^ If your ASIST PC has already been set up to perform ECU reprogramming, proceed to step 5.
^ If you are unsure whether your ASIST PC has already been set up for ECU reprogramming, look
in ASIST, under "CONSULT Utilities" - "CONSULT-II Info" - "NISSAN" - "ECU Reprogramming".
This will give you instructions for setting the Ethernet (IP) Address of the ASIST PC and
CONSULT-II. You will need to do this before performing ECU reprogramming.
DOWNLOAD (TRANSFER) DATA FROM ASIST INTO CONSULT-II (8 MB Orange Card)
Page 12594
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 5217
Case 6
Page 11573
6. Repeat the cleaning procedure as needed.
^ After treating, the trim panel should be clean as shown in Figure 4 above.
7. Reinstall the trim panel parts removed in step 1.
Page 1309
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection
Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 7176
5. Record the rotating torque.
6. Loosen drive pinion nut while holding companion flange using Tool.
Tool number: KV40104000
7. Put matching mark on the thread edge of drive pinion. The mark should be in line with the mark
on companion flange.
CAUTION: For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage drive pinion.
8. Remove companion flange using a suitable tool.
9. Remove front oil seal using Tool.
Tool number: ST33290001 (J-34286)
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage axle housing.
INSTALLATION
Page 4944
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the
throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each
time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition
switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Page 12577
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 12131
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 4090
ECM Inspection Table Part 6
Page 2267
Tire Pressure Sensor: Service and Repair
Transmitter (Pressure Sensor)
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
REMOVAL 1. Deflate tire. Unscrew transmitter nut and allow transmitter to fall into tire.
2. Gently bounce tire so that transmitter falls to bottom of tire. Place wheel and tire assembly on tire
changing machine and break both tire beads.
Ensure that the transmitter remains at the bottom of the tire while breaking the bead.
3. Turn tire so that valve hole is at bottom, and gently bounce the tire to ensure transmitter is near
valve hole. Carefully lift tire onto turntable and
position valve hole (and transmitter) 270 degrees from mounting/dismounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and remove top side of tire. Reach inside the tire and remove the transmitter.
5. Remove the second side of the tire as normal.
INSTALLATION
1. Place first side of tire onto rim.
2. Mount transmitter on rim and tighten transmitter nut to specification.
Transmitter nut 5.5 Nm (0.56 kg-m, 49 inch lbs.)
Service and Repair
Sun Shade: Service and Repair
SUNSHADE
Removal
1. Remove the sunroof frame assembly. Refer to "SUNROOF UNIT".
2. Remove the sunshade stoppers (2 points) from the rear end of the sunroof frame assembly. 3.
Remove the sunshade assembly from the rear end of the sun roof frame assembly.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 9938
Figure D-14
c. Stick the 2nd piece of protector 4 on the fan shroud as shown.
- Overlap the 2nd piece on top of the 1st piece at the spot shown.
- Overlap about 10 mm (1/4 inch) but not less than 5 mm (1/8 inch).
- Fold and stick the protector under the shroud.
d. Install the 3rd piece in the same manner as the 2nd piece.
Figure D-15
e. Install the 4th piece of Protector 4 as shown.
- Align the protector along the 1 o'clock rib as shown.
- Don't cover up the bolt hole.
- Overlap the 4th piece on top of the 3rd piece at the spot shown.
- Overlap must be at least 5 mm (1/8 inch).
- Fold and stick the protector under the shroud.
12. Press and smooth all parts of protector 4. Make sure it is completely stuck to the fan shroud.
13. Install the motor in the shroud with the harness in the correct location (about 4 o'clock) as
shown in Figure D-16.
Page 5904
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
VDC/TCS/ABS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 5351
DESCRIPTION OF CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR SCREEN FOR IPDM E/R
Page 7411
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 1692
c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip.
d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab.
e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump.
^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector.
f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing.
CAUTION:
DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap.
Page 8280
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 6574
A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate
Page 14166
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 1022
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 1288
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Changeover Switch) Circuit Check (Step 3)
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Mirror Switch) Circuit Check (Step 1)
Page 203
2. Press [INITIATE ECU REPROGRAM] (see Figure 16), then
a. Press [VDC]
b. Review all precautions
C. Press [NEXT]
3. Select the program data (see Figure 17).
Page 12093
Lifting Switch (Front) Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 4059
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 856
Optional Splice
Page 1209
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Sunroof
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1254
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 8419
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 10156
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Manual Air Conditioner
Intake Sensor Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the A/C
evaporator cover. It converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a
resistance value which is then input to the front air control.
Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 14253
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Service and Repair
Wiper Motor Linkage: Service and Repair
Wiper Motor and Linkage
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
REMOVAL
1. Remove the cowl top. 2. Remove wiper frame bolts, and remove wiper frame assembly. 3.
Remove wiper motor from wiper frame assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
- Do not drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts.
- Check the grease condition of the motor arm and wiper link joint(s). Apply grease if necessary.
1. Connect wiper motor to connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate wiper motor, then turn
the wiper switch OFF (auto stop). 2. Disconnect wiper motor connector. 3. Install wiper motor to
wiper frame assembly, and install wiper frame assembly. 4. Install cowl top. 5. Ensure that wiper
blades stop within proper clearance. Refer to front wiper arm adjustment.
Page 12734
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 7425
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Locations
Page 13270
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 14065
Power Window Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 11802
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 8979
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 14043
Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection Rear Power Drop Glass Up Relay Check
Rear Power Drop Glass Up Relay Check (Steps 1 - 2)
Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay
Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006
Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra
2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and
model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution
Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for
electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time,
the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM
relay contact due to arcing.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be
performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners
may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 1083
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Automatic Air Conditioner
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6722
Page 5809
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KS
Component Description
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric
element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This
pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
Description and Operation
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
VSS
Description
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the "ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)" by CAN communication line. The c combination meter then sends a signal to the
ECM by CAN communication line.
ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Component Description
The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from
combination meter and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these
signals for ASCD control. Refer to EC-29, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for
ASCD functions.
Page 9812
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 9571
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 8960
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 6095
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3.
Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower).
INSTALLATION
1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air cleaner case
(upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet).
Page 5992
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install Filter Kit (2004-2006 Titan ONLY)
1. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Note position of yellow marks.
2. Position mounting bracket onto frame as shown, hooking bracket tab onto brake hose bracket.
Attach bracket to frame with the clamp supplied in the kit.
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
ECM Circuit Inspection
Page 6064
Idle Speed: Adjustments
Idle Air Volume Learning
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within
the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
- Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
- Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are
satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a
moment.
- Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
- Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 degrees C (158 - 212 degrees F)
- Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch: ON
- Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp) On vehicles equipped with daytime light
systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is start the headlamp will not be
illuminated.
- Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
- Vehicle speed: Stopped
- Transmission: Warmed-up With CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T"
system indicates less than 0.9 V.
- Without CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode.
6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds.
Page 119
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 3992
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 7025
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 4765
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 13636
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 1431
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 13747
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 363
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 12788
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 123
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 13544
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 10368
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 9087
^ Slide the corrugated tube inside the door grommet about 10 mm. The second paint mark should
just be visible (see Figure B6). You may need to roll the grommet back and then forward over the
tube.
^ At the body end, the corrugated tube should meet the vinyl tube with no gap. The paint marks
must be facing away from the door/body as shown in Figure B6.
10. Install the new body clip over the paint mark on the body-side (see Figure B7).
^ Feed the strap through the buckle so the strap is UP as shown in Figure B7.
11. Install the new hinge rod clip over the center paint mark (see Figure B7). Feed the strap
through the buckle so the strap is UP as shown in Figure B7.
12. Cut off the excess strap. Leave only 3 to 6 mm (1/8 to 1/4 inch).
Page 13022
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 14488
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 7993
6. Tighten bleed valve to the specified torque. Refer to "Components" (front disc brake),
"Components" (rear disc brake). 7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 at each wheel, with master cylinder
reservoir tank filled at least half way, bleeding air in order from the front left, rear
left, and front right bleed valves.
Page 4822
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 13173
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 11199
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 12631
Door Switch: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9326
Repair Overview
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Lower Link Inspection
1. Raise the vehicle.
2. Locate and write down the "Lot Number" stamped on the bottom side of the suspension lower
links.
^ Refer to the Lot Number Locations below.
^ Armada and Pathfinder: Inspect front and rear (all 4) lower links.
^ Frontier, Titan, and Xterra: Inspect both front lower links.
3. Compare the Lot Number of each lower link to the Lot Number examples below.
Page 8134
Repair Flow Chart
Page 1603
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 9754
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 13760
4. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Display Item List - Data Monitor
With Generic Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Without Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Page 2375
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 9619
Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Passenger) (Steps 1 - 4)
Page 1886
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6431
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 11296
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 4891
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 1395
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 5817
NOTES:
^ Rust penetrant is considered a shop supply.
^ Nissan Rust Penetrant can be ordered through the Nissan Direct Ship Chemical Care Product
Program, Website order via link on dealer portal.
^ WD-40 is available from various local sources.
Removal Tool
^ When removing a seized exhaust sensor with a specialty socket (which contains a slit to
accommodate the wiring harness), it may spread open and
strip the sensor.
^ Before this occurs, it is recommended to cut the wiring harness from the sensor and use a box
end wrench or 6-point deep well socket.
1. Clamp the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube in a vice.
2. Spray the sensor with the rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
^ It is important that the spray is directed at the base of the sensor to ensure it penetrates into the
threads.
Page 179
2. Check the CONSULT-II's "Charger Input" reading (see Figure 15).
NOTE:
^ "Battery Voltage" is the voltage level of CONSULT-II's battery.
^ "Charger Input" is the voltage level of the vehicle's battery. (It MUST be above 12 volts.)
3. As mentioned, the "Charger Input" reading MUST be above 12 volts (see Figure 15).
^ A reading above 12 volts confirms;
a. The DLC-II is properly connected to the vehicle,
b. The vehicle battery voltage is sufficient for ABS/VDC reprogramming, and
c. CONSULT-II has a sufficient power supply to perform ABS/VDC reprogramming.
^ If the vehicle's battery voltage ("Charger Input") is below 12 volts, one or more of the following
may be the cause:
a. The battery charger you hooked up in section 1 is not charging the battery (poor connection or it
is not working).
b. The DLC-II does not have a good connection to the vehicle (not straight).
c. The DLC-II cable may have a malfunction (damaged wire or pins).
d. The CONSULT-II Converter (J44200-50 / black box) is not working correctly (see Figure 11).
CAUTION:
^ Do not attempt ABS/VDC reprogramming if the vehicle's battery voltage is below 12 volts.
^ Permanent ABSNDC damage can occur if the vehicle battery does not maintain the minimum
voltage during ABS/VDC reprogramming.
^ If "Charger Input" is above 12 volts, power from the vehicle battery will keep CONSULT-II's power
supply at the correct level during reprogramming (see Figure 15).
4. Continue with Section 4.
Section 4
Section 4: Perform ABSNDC Control Unit Reprogramming
1. Press [BACK] two times.
Page 4607
Page 2318
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
harness.
Page 8989
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 4516
Body Control Module: Description and Operation
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
System Description
- BCM (Body Control Module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the
vehicle.
BCM FUNCTION
BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches
(light, wiper washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various
electrical components. Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the front air
control, and sends signals to ECM using CAN communication.
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
1. Description
- BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components
according to the results.
- BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals
(OUTPUT 1-5) and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5).
2. Operation description
- BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to
flow in turn.
- If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and
input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active.
- At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow.
When voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in
BCM detects voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON.
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Page 8299
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 9345
Sunroof
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8778
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 5911
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 13128
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 12415
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 12207
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8205
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 3827
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10433
Diagnostic Procedure For In-Vehicle Sensor (Steps 9 - 12)
Page 13223
Diagnostic Procedure For Optical Sensor (Step 5)
SYMPTOM: Optical sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B257F or
B2580 is displayed. Without a CONSULT-II code 50 or 52 is indicated on front air control as a
result of conducting self-diagnosis.
Service and Repair
Door Lock Cylinder: Service and Repair
Disassembly and Assembly
FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
Remove the key cylinder escutcheon pawl and remove the door key cylinder.
Page 9975
Figure C-4, Figure C-5
a. Remove 1 bumper bolt shown in Figures C-4 and C-5:
- Driver side only.
Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009
Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56
vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some
fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which
could cause a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender
card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or
before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Locations
Fuel Level Sensor: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13387
Locations
Throttle Position Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 4946
7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle
Air Volume Learning will not be carried out
successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
- It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
- It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal
Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed
Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch
ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the
MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the
MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Page 5960
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install Filter Kit (2004-2006 Titan ONLY)
1. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Note position of yellow marks.
2. Position mounting bracket onto frame as shown, hooking bracket tab onto brake hose bracket.
Attach bracket to frame with the clamp supplied in the kit.
Page 3890
12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install.
13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides.
14. Reinstall the IPDM cover.
15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first.
16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset
their ADP settings (ADP memory).
Power Door Lock System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Automatic Air Conditioner
Heater Core: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner
HEATER CORE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. See: Housing Assembly HVAC/Service and
Repair 2. Remove the four screws and remove the upper bracket.
Page 2373
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 4463
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8511
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb
Page 9650
Inspection Flow
INSPECTION FLOW
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Intake door control system components are:
- Front air control
- Intake door motor
System Operation
The intake door control determines the intake door positions based on the position of the
recirculation switch. When the recirculation switch is depressed the intake door motor rotates
closing off the fresh air inlet and recirculating the cabin air. If the recirculation switch is depressed
again, the intake door motor rotates in the opposite direction, again allowing fresh air into the cabin.
Page 3155
^ Pulley should turn with some dragging
^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator.
Page 11885
Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Check (Step 4)
Page 8437
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 5719
ECM Inspection Table Part 4
Page 5293
Case 10
Page 2287
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 11554
14. Remove latch switch connector from door (see Figure 9).
15. Remove three bolts from upper door latch.
Page 5071
Case 12
Case 13
NOTE: If a check mark is put on "NG" on "INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Page 6287
Idle Speed/Throttle Actuator - Electronic: Service and Repair Perform If Throttle Actuator Is
Replaced
Idle Air Volume Learning
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within
the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
- Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
- Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are
satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a
moment.
- Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
- Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 degrees C (158 - 212 degrees F)
- Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch: ON
- Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp) On vehicles equipped with daytime light
systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is start the headlamp will not be
illuminated.
- Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
- Vehicle speed: Stopped
- Transmission: Warmed-up With CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T"
system indicates less than 0.9 V.
- Without CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode.
6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds.
Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts
Classification: FA05-002D
Reference: NTB05-097D
Date: January 19, 2011
2005-2011 TITAN AND ARMADA; CAM BOLTS FOR FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT
The Applied Vehicles have been updated/amended. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2011 Titan (A60) 2005 - 2011 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINS 2005 Titan built after 1N6AA0(***)5N 566358 2005 Armada built after
5N1AA08(**)5N 733885 2006 - 2011 vehicles: All VINS
APPLIED DATE Vehicles built after June 2, 2005
IF YOU CONFIRM
An Applied Vehicle needs to have the front wheel alignment adjusted,
NOTE:
Applied Vehicles listed above come from the factory with non-adjustable bolts (Not Cam Bolts) for
the lower link (lower control arm) mounting.
ACTIONS
1. Remove the original lower link mounting bolts, washers, and nuts - 2 per side.
^ Refer to section FSU in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for lower link mounting bolt
locations.
2. Install new bolts (cam bolts), cam washers and new nuts.
^ New parts are listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
NOTE:
Cam bolts are used to adjust caster and camber.
3. Perform front wheel alignment per the ESM.
PARTS INFORMATION
Diagram Information and Instructions
DVD Player: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 11961
Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Service and Repair
SUNROOF MOTOR
Removal
CAUTION:
- When removing the sunroof motor, be sure to place the link and wire assembly in the symmetrical
and fully closed position.
- Never run the removed motor as a single unit.
1. Position the sunroof assembly in the fully closed position. 2. Disconnect the negative battery
cable. 3. Remove the roof console assembly. Refer to "HEADLINING".
4. Disconnect the sunroof motor harness connector (2). 5. Remove the sunroof motor screws (3),
then remove the sunroof motor (1).
Installation
CAUTION: Before installing the sunroof motor assembly, be sure to place the link and wire
assembly in the symmetrical and fully closed position.
- :Vehicle front
1. Move the sunroof motor (1) laterally little by little so that the gear is completely engaged into the
wire on the sunroof unit and the installation
surface becomes parallel. Then, secure the motor with screws (3).
Sunroof motor screws :2.3 N.m (0.23 kg-m, 20 in-lb)
2. Connect the wire harness connector (2) to the sunroof motor (1). 3. Install the roof console
assembly. Refer to "HEADLINING". 4. Reset the sunroof motor memory. Refer to "MEMORY
RESET PROCEDURE".
Page 5895
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 594
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 9713
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 9645
Inspection Flow
INSPECTION FLOW
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Air mix door control system components are:
- Front air control
- Air mix door motor (front)
- PBR (built-into air mix motor)
System Operation
The front air control receives data from the temperature selected by the driver. The front air control
then applies a voltage to one circuit of the appropriate air mix door motor (front), while ground is
applied to the other circuit, causing the appropriate air mix door motor (front) to rotate. The
direction of rotation is determined by which circuit has voltage applied to it, and which one has
ground applied to it. The front air control monitors the
Page 1221
Collision Avoidance Sensor: Service and Repair
REAR SONAR SENSORS Refer to "Bumper; Service and Repair" for rear sonar sensor removal
and installation procedures.
Page 5266
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
Page 13332
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 295
Page 2334
2. Install differential lock position switch on axle housing and tighten differential lock position switch
bolts with the specified torque. Refer to
"COMPONENTS".
3. Install side bearing adjusters into axle housing.
4. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races
into axle housing. 5. Apply multi-purpose grease to differential lock position connector.
CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor connector.
6. Connect differential lock solenoid harness (B) and differential lock position switch connector (A).
Then install it to axle housing, tighten to the
specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
Page 4509
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 10804
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 5050
Inspection Between TCM And Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit (Steps 3 - 4)
Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Step 1)
Page 12076
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9775
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 7187
9. Remove side bearing caps.
10. Loosen the side bearing adjusters using Tool.
Tool number: - (C-4164)
11. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side
bearing adjusters together with bearing.
12. Remove side bearing adjusters from axle housing. 13. Remove bracket for the differential lock
position switch connector and bolts. 14. Remove differential lock position switch.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent.
CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to axle housing and differential lock position switch. Also
remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and axle housing and
differential lock position switch.
Page 1023
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 6541
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 8678
c. Remove 2 cup holder mounting bolts.
^ Left side is shown, right side not shown
b. Remove the cup holder from the vehicle.
8. If equipped with front bucket seats (shifter is in the center console); remove the center console:
a. Remove 2 screws from the bottom of the glove box assembly.
b. Remove 4 screws at the top of the glove box assembly, then
c. Remove the glove box assembly.
Page 6489
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Diagnostic Procedure
Page 8866
Component Parts Location
Diagram Information and Instructions
Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 13485
Page 10065
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 3308
EM-2
Page 2154
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 9817
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 5020
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1
Service Precautions
Catalytic Converter: Service Precautions
Precautions for Three Way Catalyst
If a large amount of unburned fuel flows into the catalyst, the catalyst temperature will be
excessively high. To prevent this, follow the instructions.
- Use unleaded gasoline only. Leaded gasoline will seriously damage the three way catalyst.
- When checking for ignition spark or measuring engine compression, make tests quickly and only
when necessary.
- Do not run engine when the fuel tank level is low, otherwise the engine may misfire, causing
damage to the catalyst. Do not place the vehicle on flammable material. Keep flammable material
off the exhaust pipe and the three way catalyst.
Page 10254
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 13489
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 12995
Page 12105
Seat Back: Service and Repair Seatback Assembly
REMOVAL OF SEATBACK ASSEMBLY
1. Remove the seatback board from the back of the seatback. 2. Remove the retainer.
3. Remove the side air bag harness connector from the seat cushion. 4. Remove the seatback
bolts (2 for each side) and seatback assembly.
INSTALLATION OF SEATBACK ASSEMBLY
- Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 8141
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. 3. Drain the brake
fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit).
CAUTION: ^
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts
and brake tubes from being damaged.
^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench. Tighten brake tubes to specification
when installing.
^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with
new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system.
Page 5192
Case 15
Case 16
NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Page 12358
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Body Control Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Data
Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Schematic
4. Select item to be diagnosed on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Locations
Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 8974
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7753
Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
Components
Components
REMOVAL
Differential Lock Position Switch
Page 4060
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 5361
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KS
Component Description
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric
element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This
pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
Page 7628
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 10833
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Service and Repair
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
Wiper and Washer Switch
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper washer switch connector. 3. Pinch tabs at
wiper and washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 668
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 8208
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 13042
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 1310
Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Page 13862
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 9568
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 4798
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 5166
Case 2
Page 9978
Figure C-10, Figure C-11
c. Remove 2 bolts from each of the 3 bumper brackets shown in Figures C-10 and C-11.
6. Make sure the condenser fan electrical connector is disconnected.
IMPORTANT:
Do not lose the rubber seal from inside the connector.
Page 13159
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
General Information and Recommendations
Alignment: Service and Repair General Information and Recommendations
GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS
1. A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should be performed.
- This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN vehicle.
- The four-wheel "thrust" process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering
wheel is centered.
- The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN vehicle.
- The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level.
2. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated.
- Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information.
- Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended
Service/Calibration Schedule.
Page 2203
Optional Splice
Page 810
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
Page 1512
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 6762
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic
Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Page 2148
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 7412
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 593
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 9714
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis
Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis
Classification: EM09-013
Reference: NTB10-002
Date: January 12, 2010
DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS
APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s),
ACTION
Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any
repairs performed.
Page 11469
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the following parts from the trim panel:
^ pull handle cover
^ power window switch assembly (if equipped)
Refer to the INT section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal
instructions.
2. Following the instructions on the label, apply Nissan Vinyl and Leather Cleaner to the trim panel
surface.
3. Use a soft bristle brush to gently clean the surface.
4. Mist the area lightly with water to rinse.
5. Use a clean cloth to wipe the area clean.
Page 11044
Garage Door Opener Transmitter: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 10846
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 1394
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4120
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 13334
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 8830
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 5731
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 8 - 11)
Page 10401
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8741
Don't get butyl sealer from the welt on any of the interior trim surfaces.
60. Carefully pull down the side of the headlining at the rear just enough to get your arm above it.
61. Reach above the headlining and pop loose the rear clips (left and right side).
^ 2 clips on each side.
62. Look above the headlining, locate and disconnect the high mount brake light connector.
63. Take the harness loose from the body roof.
Page 5008
LAN-CAN-03
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 4576
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 919
Specifications
Spark Plug: Specifications
SPARK PLUG
Standard type ......................................................................................................................................
............................................................... PLFR5A-11 Hot type ...........................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
PLFR4A-11 Cold type ..........................................................................................................................
................................................................................. PLFR6A-11
Gap ......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................1.1 mm (0.043 in.)
Torque .................................................................................................................................................
.............................. 24.5 Nm (2.5 kgf-cm, 18 ft. lbs.)
Page 4254
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 12575
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8765
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 12863
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12810
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 2306
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 10644
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 5377
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 13123
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 5202
Case 8
Page 8645
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 2059
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 3755
Part 2
MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM
CAN Communication System Description
Refer to LAN-25, "Information Bus". See: Computers and Control Systems/Information
Bus/Description and Operation/CAN Communication
Page 7242
4. Install the axle shaft bearing and cup on the axle shaft.
^ Prepare an installer tool from a steel tube measuring 762 mm (30 inch) long with an outside
diameter of 53.98 mm (2.125 inch) and an inside diameter of 41.28 mm (1.625 inch).
^ Press the axle shaft bearing and cup onto the axle shaft using a suitable press and the installer
tool, until a 0.038 mm (0.0015 inch) feeler gauge does not fit in between the axle shaft bearing cup
and seat.
CAUTION: Make sure the axle shaft bearing and cup, axle oil seal, and axle shaft bearing cage are
installed facing in the correct direction.
5. Install the bearing ring retainer onto the axle shaft.
^ Press the bearing ring retainer onto the axle shaft with a minimum force of 31,100 N (3172 kg,
6992 lbs.) until a 0.038 mm (0.0015 inch) feeler gauge does not fit between the bearing inner race
and the bearing ring retainer in at least one point.
6. Install the snap ring so it is fully seated into the groove on the axle shaft, using suitable snap ring
pliers. 7. Install the axle shaft assembly into the axle shaft housing. 8. Install the axle shaft bearing
cage lock washers and nuts. Tighten the axle shaft bearing cage nuts to specification. 9. Install the
parking brake assembly onto the back plate.
10. Install the rear brake rotor. 11. Install the rear ABS sensor.
Axle Bearing
Removal and Installation
The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 14245
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Locations
SRS Components Parts Location
Page 11131
Speaker: Service and Repair Front Door Speaker
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
Removal
1. Remove front door finisher.
2. Remove the four front door speaker screws. 3. Disconnect connector and remove front door
speaker.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2767
Page 12360
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 13129
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 10347
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 279
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 2992
Disclaimer
Page 3548
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1182
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 6420
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 4145
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Driveshaft U-Joint Noise/Vibration
Classification: PD10-001
Reference: NTB10-052
Date: April 8, 2010
NOISE AND/OR VIBRATION FROM PROPELLER SHAFT U-JOINT (JOURNAL/JOURNAL
BEARINGS)
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40)
2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The propeller shaft u-joint (journal/journal bearings) is the source of noise and/or vibration on an
Applied Vehicle.
Diagnose by evaluating the u-joint with the propeller shaft removed. If the u-joint axial play or flex
effort exceed the specifications in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM), or if a "ratchety" feel is
exhibited during rotation, the u-joint (journal/journal bearings) should be replaced.
ACTION
Replace the u-joint (journal/journal bearings).
^ Refer to the applicable ESM for removal and installation instructions.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire propeller shaft assembly if u-joint (journal/journal bearings) replacement
can resolve the incident, should it occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
U-joint (journal/journal bearings) kits are now available for all Applied Vehicles. Refer to the
electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) to locate the appropriate parts needed for this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated FRT and
appropriate coding for repairs preformed.
Page 10386
Optional Splice
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab)
Door Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Crew Cab)
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 10483
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 168
3. Make sure the transmission is in Park and the brake pedal is released.
IMPORTANT:
Do not push the brake pedal until step 6.
4. Start the engine and let it idle.
^ Keep the transmission in Park.
5. On CONSULT-II, select ABS Data Monitor.
6. Slowly push the brake pedal approximately 2 inches, then release.
NOTE:
2 inches is approximately half-way between the pedal "see height" and "depressed height".
7. Repeat step 6 ten times.
^ If DTC C1179 is detected (comes up on CONSULT-II), this bulletin applies; go to Part 2.
^ If DTC C1179 is not detected, go to the next step.
8. Repeat steps 2 though 7.
^ If you have done steps 2 through 7 twice, and DIG C1179 is not detected, this bulletin does not
apply. Go to ASIST for further diagnostic information.
Part 2
Part 2: Download special ABS/VDC Reprogramming Data from ASIST onto your standard 8 MB
(orange) Reprogramming Card.
This part of the procedure involves two general steps:
^ Setting up
^ Download (transfer) data from ASIST into CONSULT-II (8 MB orange Reprogramming card).
SETTING UP:
1. Install the standard 8 MB (orange)
Reprogramming Card into CONSULT-II.
Use slot A-top slot (see Figure 1).
CAUTION:
Do NOT use the 16 MB (orange) "QR25 Campaign ECM Software" Card (# J-44200-ECMR-16). If
you use this card, it will be reformatted to an 8 MB card.
Page 14134
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR GLASS
Removal
1. Remove the front door speaker. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the
power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4.
Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts.
6. While holding the front door glass, raise it at the rear end and pull the glass out of the sash
toward the outside of the door.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
Fitting Inspection
Page 10815
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 629
Page 6326
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 10224
Page 5914
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 8703
Page 9024
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 11782
4. Pry off the bottom side actuator hook(s) to separate the actuator from the housing (if necessary).
NOTE:
Some actuators will not require prying. They will separate after removing the screw(s) in step 3.
5. Disconnect the motor electrical connector(s).
6. Remove the old actuator motor.
7. Install the new actuator motor in the reverse order of removal.
Page 13394
Page 5067
Case 7
Page 7728
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 11214
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 10272
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 4907
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 1044
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 2243
Neutral Safety Switch: Description and Operation
PNP SWITCH
Component Description
When the gear position is P or N, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON. TCM detects the
position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists. Then the TCM sends the PNP
switch signal to the ECM via combination meter.
Page 5529
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 8925
Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction
- When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned
OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction.
- When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch
signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay.
Page 8182
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 13796
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb
Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored
Classification: EC06-001A
Reference: NTB06-009A
Date: March 31, 2006
MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information
sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of
this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
The MIL is "ON" with
^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR
^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit,
and
There are no drivability incidents.
DETERMINE IF
This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure.
ACTIONS
If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections:
^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections.
^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection.
^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left
side instrument stay assembly.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 12037
19. Make sure the seat track mounting tab and the rear stopper are touching (see Figure 8).
20. Measure the distance between the gear box and the mounting tab (see left side of Figure 8).
21. Measure and adjust the other seat track mounting tab to the same distance (see right side of
Figure 8).
Figure 9
22. Replace all six rubber grommets with the new ones from the kit 3 on each side (see Figure 9).
23. Put the new worm gears, gear boxes, and drive cable assembly (all as one unit) back into the
seat frame and move both seat tracks back into
position on top of the seat track mounting tabs.
Figure 10
CAUTION:
Avoid bending the drive cable. Bending the drive cable will create a noise when the seat is
operated.
Figure 11
Page 6561
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 288
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 4089
ECM Inspection Table Part 5
Page 12531
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 178
5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then turn CONSULT-II OFF.
6. Remove the red/white Diagnostic Card and insert the 8 MB orange Reprogramming Card into
CONSULT-II.
The 8 MB reprogramming card should already have special ABS/VDC reprogramming data loaded
into it (see Part 1).
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine).
^ CONSULT-II will turn ON automatically (see Figure 13).
^ Confirm that all electrical loads* (except for the ignition) are "OFF".
* Headlights, defroster, A/C, audio (radio), video, cellular telephone, etc.
8. Roll down the driver's window part way, exit the vehicle, close the door, and hang the CONSULT
II unit on the outside of the window (see Figure 14).
This step is necessary to make sure the CONSULT-II and DLC-II cable will not be disturbed during
reprogramming.
CAUTION:
DO NOT connect the CONSULT-II AC power supply for Steps 1, 2, and 3 in Section 3 below.
9. Continue with Section 3.
Section 3
Section 3: Confirm the vehicle's battery voltage and CONSULT-II "Charger Input"
1. Press [SUB MODE], then select [BATTERY CHARGE]
Page 1212
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Locations
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Page 7370
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
Page 12500
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 2088
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 1724
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Front
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front
Removal and Installation
Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control
Unit Replacement
Control Module: Service and Repair Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit
Replacement
Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement
When replacing transfer assembly or transfer control unit, check the 4WD shift indicator pattern
and adjustment of the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit if necessary.
CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR PATTERN 1. Set 4WD shift switch to "2WD", "4H", "4LO", "4H"
and "2WD" in order. Stay at each switch position for at least 2 seconds.
2. Confirm 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp are changed properly as follows.
^ If OK, the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit is correct.
^ If NG, the position is different between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Adjust the
position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to pattern table.
Transfer Position Adjustment Pattern
METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT "2WD" Select Adjustment Pattern
1. Start engine. Run engine for at least 10 seconds.
2. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp.
Pattern A 1. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed.
Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. 2. Turn 4WD shift switch to "4LO" position. Stay in "4LO" for at
least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 4. Start engine. 5. Erase self-diagnosis. 6. Check
4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again.
If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new
transfer control unit and retry the above check.
Pattern B 1. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed.
Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds.
Page 10249
Optional Splice
Page 1843
Combination Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 1058
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 5104
Case 3
Page 4760
Attachment General Procedure
Page 2953
^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps.
5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure.
Generally this is 40psi.
If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure:
a. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
c. Remount the tire.
6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area.
^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel.
NOTE:
Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated.
If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform
1. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
3. Remount the tire.
Page 3037
a. Tighten the front cover bolts (4 for each bank) as shown to the specified torque.
Front cover bolts: 11.0 Nm (1.1 kg-m, 8 ft. lbs.)
5. Install the camshaft sprockets using the following procedure:
^ A: LH bank shown
^ Install the intake and exhaust side camshaft sprockets by selectively using the groove of the
dowel pin according to the bank. (Common part used for both banks.)
^ A: Intake (I)
^ B: Exhaust (E)
^ R: for RH bank
^ L: for LH bank
a. Install the camshaft sprockets aligning them with the matching marks painted (B) on the timing
chain (C) when removed. Align the camshaft
sprocket key groove with the dowel pin on the camshaft front edge at the same time. Then
temporarily tighten camshaft sprocket bolts.
b. Lock the hexagonal part of the camshaft in the same way as for removal, and tighten the
camshaft sprocket bolts. c. Check again that the timing alignment mark on the timing chain and on
each sprocket are aligned.
6. Install the chain tensioner using the following procedure:
NOTE: LH is shown.
a. Install the chain tensioner.
Page 10303
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Service and Repair
Tail Light Bulb: Service and Repair
REAR COMBINATION LAMP
Bulb Replacement
1. Remove rear combination lamp mounting bolts. 2. Pull rear combination lamp to remove from
the vehicle. 3. Turn bulb socket counterclockwise and unlock it. 4. Remove bulb. 5. Installation is in
the reverse order of removal.
Page 5708
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 13849
Power Window Relay: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 464
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 5600
Page 12478
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 13620
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 6649
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 2300
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 12452
Cruise Control Switch: Description and Operation
ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Component Description
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads
voltage variation of switch, and determines which button is operated. Refer to "AUTOMATIC
SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
General Information and Recommendations
Alignment: Service and Repair General Information and Recommendations
GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS
1. A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should be performed.
- This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN vehicle.
- The four-wheel "thrust" process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering
wheel is centered.
- The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN vehicle.
- The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level.
2. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated.
- Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information.
- Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended
Service/Calibration Schedule.
Page 7904
Brake Pedal Assy: Testing and Inspection
BRAKE PEDAL
Inspection and Adjustment INSPECTION
1. Inspect the brake pedal free height "H" from the dash lower panel using Tool.
Tool number: - (J-46532)
2. Adjust the height referring to the following specifications.
CAUTION: When equipped with adjustable pedal, the pedal must be in the forwardmost (closest to
the floor) position for pedal height measurement.
Brake Pedal Specifications
ADJUSTMENT
1. Loosen the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel switch by turning 45° counterclockwise.
Page 9908
Repair Overview
Disclaimer
Recommendation
If this is your first time performing this Service Procedure, it is recommended that you view the
video clip on ASIST before starting. To view the video clip, open the bulletin on ASIST and select
"Video" at the bottom of the screen. To view the video full screen, right click the center of the video
screen and select "Full Screen".
Procedure A - Identify Fan Type
Page 12565
Compass: Description and Operation
COMPASS AND THERMOMETER
System Description
This unit displays the following items:
- Earth magnetism and heading direction of vehicle.
- Outside air temperature.
- Caution for frozen road surfaces.
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
Push the mode switch when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The outside temperature will
be displayed in "degree F".
- Selecting the indication range Push the mode switch to change from degree F -> degree C ->
degree OFF -> degree F.
- The indicated temperature on the thermometer is not readily affected by engine heat. It changes
only when one of the following conditions is present. The temperature detected by the ambient sensor is lower than the indicated temperature on the
thermometer.
- The vehicle speed is greater than 20 km/h (12 MPH).
(This is to prevent the indicated temperature from being affected by engine heat during low-speed
driving.) The ignition switch has been turned to the OFF position for more than 2 hours. (The engine is
cold.)
DIRECTION DISPLAY
Push the mode switch when the ignition switch is in the ON position. The direction will be
displayed.
Page 4501
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 4808
Page 484
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 11020
Symptom Matrix Chart
Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay
Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006
Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra
2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and
model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution
Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for
electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time,
the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM
relay contact due to arcing.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be
performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners
may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 1602
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 4777
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 13824
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 9328
Compare the Lot Numbers of each lower link to these Lot Number examples.
Page 13894
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 13623
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 8701
g. Remove the 10 side curtain air bag mounting bolts.
h. Remove the side curtain air bag module and disconnect the electrical connector.
66. Harness should now be completely loose-remove it from the vehicle.
67. Install the new harness in reverse order. Make sure of the following:
^ All harness mounting clips are installed in the correct locations.
^ Seat, seat belt, and air bag bolts are tightened to correct torque:
IMPORTANT:
Page 12502
Audible Warning Device: Description and Operation
System Description
FUNCTION
Power is supplied at all times
- through 50 A fusible link (letter f, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
- to BCM terminal 70, and
- through 10 A fuse [No. 19, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
- to key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 3 (floor shift) or key switch terminal 3 (column shift).
With ignition switch in ON or START position, power is supplied
- through 10 A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box)
- to BCM terminal 38, and
- through 10 A fuse [No. 14, located in the fuse block (J/B)]
- to combination meter terminal 24.
Ground is supplied
- to BCM terminal 67, and
- to combination meter terminal 17
- through body grounds M57, M61, and M79.
NOTE: When ignition key warning chime, light warning chime, and seat belt warning chime are
required at the same time, the priorities for each chime are the following.
1. Light warning chime 2. Ignition key warning chime 3. Seat belt warning chime
IGNITION KEY WARNING CHIME
With the key inserted in the ignition switch, the ignition switch in OFF position, and the driver's door
open, the warning chime will sound.
Power is supplied
- through key switch and key lock solenoid terminal 4 (floor shift) or key switch terminal 4 (column
shift)
- to BCM terminal 37.
Ground is supplied
- to BCM terminal 47
- through front door switch LH terminal 2
- through body grounds B7 and B19 (king cab) or through front door switch LH case ground (crew
cab).
BCM detects key inserted into the ignition switch, and sends key warning signal to combination
meter via CAN communication lines. When the combination meter receives key warning signal, it
sounds warning chime.
LIGHT WARNING CHIME
With the key removed from the ignition switch, the driver's door open, and the lighting switch (part
of the combination switch) in 1st or 2nd position, the warning chime will sound. [Except when
headlamp battery saver control operates (5 minutes after ignition switch is turned to OFF or ACC
position) and headlamps do not illuminate.]
Signal is supplied
- from combination switch (lighting switch) terminals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10
- to BCM terminals 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 32, 33, 34, 35 and 36.
NOTE: BCM detected lighting switch in 1st or 2nd position. Refer to "COMBINATION SWITCH
READING FUNCTION".
Ground is supplied
- to BCM terminal 47
- through front door switch LH terminal 2.
- through body grounds B7 and B19 (king cab) or through front door switch LH case ground (crew
cab).
BCM detects headlamps are illuminated, and sends light warning signal to combination meter CAN
communication lines. When the combination meter receives light warning signal, it sounds warning
chime.
Page 13508
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 2924
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Page 3501
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 375
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8508
Optional Splice
Page 4469
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14044
Rear Power Drop Glass Up Relay Check (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 4817
Attachment General Procedure
Page 3577
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 9152
^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep.
7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and
adjustments.
NOTE:
If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not
necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster
and easier.
^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system.
If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a
centered steering wheel.
^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right.
This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall
mounted rack and pinion units.
IMPORTANT:
If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to
jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct.
After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment
8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order.
9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight
flat road.
Page 5162
Case 16
Case 17
NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Specifications
Spark Plug: Specifications
SPARK PLUG
Standard type ......................................................................................................................................
............................................................... PLFR5A-11 Hot type ...........................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
PLFR4A-11 Cold type ..........................................................................................................................
................................................................................. PLFR6A-11
Gap ......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................1.1 mm (0.043 in.)
Torque .................................................................................................................................................
.............................. 24.5 Nm (2.5 kgf-cm, 18 ft. lbs.)
Page 909
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8897
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 6943
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 2707
Disclaimer
Page 7923
IMPORTANT:
If you remove the brake pad retainers from the torque member, lift them in the direction indicated
by the arrow (see Figure 3) so retainers will not deform.
Page 12301
CAUTION:
Make sure the rail stops are installed before releasing the vehicle.
Page 11339
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 9407
2. Remove the shock absorber lower bolt using power tool. 3. Remove the three shock absorber
upper nuts using power tool. 4. Remove the coil spring and shock absorber assembly.
^ Turn steering knuckle out to gain enough clearance for removal.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
^ The lower seat step (2) in the shock absorber assembly (1) faces outside of vehicle. Upper spring insulator (3)
- <=: Front
^ Tighten all nuts and bolts to specification. Refer to "Components".
^ When installing wheel and tire, refer to "Rotation". See: Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and
Repair/Tire Rotation
Rear Suspension
Removal and Installation
Page 7239
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Axle
Axle Shaft
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Before removing the axle shaft, remove the ABS sensor to reposition the ABS sensor
out of the way. Failure to do so may result in damage to the ABS sensor and cause the ABS
sensor to become inoperative.
Page 13272
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 14110
3. Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag.
WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves
to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION: When the rear window glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool.
- Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
- Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the
instructions furnished with it.
- While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being
forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
- The molding must be installed securely so that it is in position and leaves no gap.
- Check gap along bottom to confirm that glass does not contact sheet metal.
- Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
WARNING:
- Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable.
- The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
- Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if
inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air.
- Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the
performance of the rear window in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
- Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date
printed on the box.
- Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
- Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
- The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidity. The curing time will
increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities.
Page 9183
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
Page 8902
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Locations
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 1519
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 5833
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 11593
Rear Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Step 4)
Page 11401
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Data Link
Connector/Schematic
4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Page 10099
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 13540
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 10817
Alarm Horn Relay: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 12141
Testing and Inspection
Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection
Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM)
For example, when current is 30 A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20 seconds.
A circuit breaker is used for the following systems:
- Power windows
- Power door locks
- Remote keyless entry system
- Power sunroof
- Rear window wiper
Page 9773
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 14269
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 9656
Diagnostic Procedure For Defroster Door Motor (Steps 2 - 5)
Page 2388
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 27
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 7740
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
harness.
Page 2142
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8800
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab)
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Crew Cab)
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 1410
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 14056
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 2786
6. Tighten bleed valve to the specified torque. Refer to "Components" (front disc brake),
"Components" (rear disc brake). 7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 at each wheel, with master cylinder
reservoir tank filled at least half way, bleeding air in order from the front left, rear
left, and front right bleed valves.
Page 4355
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 3559
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9189
Page 13157
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 7841
CAUTION: ^
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Page 11555
16. Remove cable sheath and barrel cable end from upper door latch (see Figure 11)
17. Install barrel cable end and cable sheath onto new upper door latch. See the Parts Information
section of this bulletin.
18. Install new upper door latch to door.
CAUTION:
^ Be careful routing the wiring harness.
^ Do not pinch wire harness between door and upper door latch.
^ Torque bolts to: 5.8 Nm (0.59 Kg-m, 51 in-lb.)
16. Reinstall upper door latch white cable clip into door.
Page 6572
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 6443
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 12151
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 9115
g. Remove the 10 side curtain air bag mounting bolts.
h. Remove the side curtain air bag module and disconnect the electrical connector.
66. Harness should now be completely loose-remove it from the vehicle.
67. Install the new harness in reverse order. Make sure of the following:
^ All harness mounting clips are installed in the correct locations.
^ Seat, seat belt, and air bag bolts are tightened to correct torque:
IMPORTANT:
Page 1010
Optional Splice
Page 10625
Side Air Bag: Description and Operation
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
Front Side Air Bag
Front side air bag modules are built into the front seatback assemblies. Vehicles with side air bags
are equipped with labels as shown.
Side Curtain Air Bag
Side curtain air bag modules are located above the vehicle headlining. Vehicles with side curtain
air bags are equipped with labels as shown.
Page 9577
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 10410
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 5617
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 5874
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 5723
ECM Inspection Table Part 8
Page 12781
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 3603
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 10858
Alarm Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 9760
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Locations
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 2360
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 4500
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 13110
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 7180
1. Apply multi-purpose grease to oil seal lips. Install front oil seal into axle housing using Tool.
Tool number: ST15310000
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse oil seal.
^ When installing, do not incline oil seal.
2. Align the matching mark of drive pinion with the mark of companion flange, then install
companion flange.
3. Assemble washer if required and new drive pinion nut on pinion gear and tighten nut until there
is zero bearing end play
CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion nut and washer.
4. Rotate drive pinion using an inch-pound torque wrench and flange wrench. Rotating torque
should be equal to the reading recorded in step 5 above
during removal plus an additional 0.56 Nm (5 inch lbs.). Tool number: KV40104000
5. If the rotating torque is low, continue to tighten drive pinion nut in 6.8 Nm (5 ft. lbs.) increments
until proper rotating torque is achieved. Refer to
"COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Do not loosen drive pinion nut to decrease drive pinion rear bearing rotating torque and
do not exceed specified preload torque. If preload torque or rotating torque is exceeded a new
collapsible spacer must be installed. If the minimum tightening torque is reached prior to reaching
the required rotating torque, collapsible spacer may have been damaged. Replace collapsible
spacer.
6. Install rear propeller shaft. 7. Check gear lubricant level and fill with proper lubricant if required.
8. Install brake rotors, calipers, wheel and tire assemblies.
Page 5265
Check Sheet Part 1
Page 2310
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 9521
Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels - Chrome Wheel Handling When Mounting Tires
Classification: WT06-002
Reference: NTB06-076
Date: November 7, 2006
PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING CHROME TYPE WHEELS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan vehicles with chrome type wheels
SERVICE INFORMATION
The appearance of chrome type wheels can be damaged if they are not handled correctly during
wheel and tire service.
Tire Changing:
^ Make sure to use tire changing equipment that clamps (secures) the wheel from the inside
(internal jaws).
^ Do not use any metal tools that may touch the outside of the wheel.
^ Tools and machine equipment that touch the outside of the rim should be made of plastic, or
have rubber/plastic protective covers.
Wheel Balancing:
Page 4505
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Headlamp Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 4991
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Component Locations
Engine Control Module: Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 8774
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
ABS
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABS
Wheel Sensors
WHEEL SENSORS
REMOVAL
1. Remove wheel sensor bolt.
^ When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front
wheel sensor bolt.
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
^ Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten wheel sensor bolt to specification.
CAUTION: Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following: ^
Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged.
^ Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
Sensor Rotor
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation FRONT
The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace
wheel hub and bearing assembly.
REAR Removal
1. Remove axle shaft assembly.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor.
2. Pull the sensor rotor off the axle shaft using Tool and a press.
Tool number: ST30031000 ( - )
Installation
1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure
sensor rotor is fully seated.
Page 11523
4. Remove upper and lower seatbelt anchor trim (see Figure 1).
5. Remove upper seatbelt anchor bolt (see Figure 2).
6. Remove arm rest.
Page 8523
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 13971
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 6495
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 905
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 4435
Valve Clearance: Adjustments
Valve Clearance ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: ^
Perform adjustment depending on the selected head thickness of the valve lifter.
^ The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional
differences caused by temperature. Use the specifications for hot engine condition to adjust.
1. Remove the camshaft. 2. Remove the valve lifters at the locations that are out of specification.
3. Measure the center thickness of the removed valve lifters using suitable tool. 4. Use the equation
below to calculate the valve lifter thickness for replacement.
^ Valve lifter thickness calculation: Thickness of replacement valve lifter = t1 + (C1 - C2) t1 =
Thickness of removed valve lifter C1 = Measured valve clearance C2 = Standard valve clearance:
^ Thickness of a new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the
cylinder). Stamp mark N788 indicates 7.88 mm (0.3102 inch) in thickness.
^ Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 inch) in
steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) (when manufactured at factory).
5. Install the selected valve lifter. 6. Install the camshaft. 7. Manually turn the crankshaft pulley a
few turns. 8. Make sure the valve clearances for a cold engine are within specifications by referring
to the specified values. 9. After completing the repair, check the valve clearances again with the
specifications for a warmed engine. Make sure the values are within
specifications.
Page 3865
a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section
EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits).
NOTE:
This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different.
b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify
the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check.
C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the
terminal eyelet(s).
d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the
connections.
^ Both sides of the eyelet
^ Eyelet mounting surface
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Nut/bolt threads.
Page 9834
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 3928
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 7377
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 9327
Lot Number Locations.
Page 1654
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10082
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 1854
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 2295
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 11855
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Pull UP on the bottom side of the mirror to separate the glass from the actuator.
2. Separate the electrical connectors from the mirror.
NOTE:
^ Some mirrors have heater and turn signal connectors.
^ There are three different mirrors. The other two can be seen in Figures 6 and 7.
3. Remove the actuator base mounting screw(s).
Page 1746
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 4340
Page 3760
Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Work Support
WORK SUPPORT
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT
DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch "RESET SETTING VALUE" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. 4.
Touch "START". 5. "RESET SETTING VALUE OK?" is displayed, and touch "YES". 6. The setting
will be changed and "COMPLETED" will be displayed. 7. Touch "END".
Display Item List - Work Support
Display Item List
CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)
Front Axle
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Axle
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove engine undercover if equipped, using
power tool. 3. Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove the torque member bolts using
power tool. Then reposition brake caliper aside with wire.
NOTE: Do not press brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
4. Put alignment mark on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor.
5. For 4WD model, perform the following:
^ Remove cotter pin, then lock nut from drive shaft using power tool.
^ Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly.
6. Remove wheel sensor.
^ Inspect the wheel sensor O-ring, replace the wheel sensor assembly if damaged.
^ Clean the wheel sensor hole and mating surface with a suitable brake cleaner and clean lint-free
shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle bearing area.
^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
CAUTION: Do not pull on the wheel sensor harness.
7. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool. 8. Remove splash guard and
wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 8575
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 1673
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Page 13915
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 1627
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 9590
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 13450
NOTE:
^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not
replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control
unit using the old starter.
^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is:
^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb)
Page 192
2. Connect the AC power supply to CONSULT-II.
3. Connect CONSULT-II to the ASIST PC with the special Ethernet cable (P/N 02002554 is printed
on the cable).
a. Connect one end to CONSULT-II at the "PC port".
b. Connect the other end to the ASIST PC at the "Ethernet card" connection port.
4. Confirm the CONSULT-II date and time are correctly set as follows:
(This is necessary to provide a valid print-out for warranty claims.)
a. With the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming card in slot A, turn ON CONSULT-II.
b. Touch [SUB MODE]
c. Touch [SET DATE] (see Figure 2).
1) If the date is not correct, touch the [MONTH], [DAY] or [YEAR] as needed. Then adjust it by
using arrow keys. Once done, press [SAVE], press [BACK], and go to step d.
2) If the date is OK, press [BACK] and go to step d.
d. Touch [SET TIME] (see Figure 2).
1) If time is not correct, touch the [HOUR], [MINUTE] or [AM/PM] as needed. Then adjust it by
using arrow keys. After you are done, press [SAVE], press [BACK] and go to step 5.
2) If time is OK, press [BACK] and go to step 5.
IMPORTANT NOTE
^ If your ASIST PC has already been set up to perform ECU reprogramming, proceed to step 5.
^ If you are unsure whether your ASIST PC has already been set up for ECU reprogramming, look
in ASIST, under "CONSULT Utilities" - "CONSULT-II Info" - "NISSAN" - "ECU Reprogramming".
This will give you instructions for setting the Ethernet (IP) Address of the ASIST PC and
CONSULT-II. You will need to do this before performing ECU reprogramming.
DOWNLOAD (TRANSFER) DATA FROM ASIST INTO CONSULT-II (8 MB Orange Card)
Page 12679
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
Page 11505
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair King Cab
REAR DOOR LOCK
Component Structure
CREW CAB
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door window and rear door module assembly. Refer to "Rear Door Glass".
Page 7209
Page 6723
Page 5359
Knock Sensor: Connector Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Diagram Information and Instructions
Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 3497
Optional Splice
Page 1793
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 5431
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 2406
Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (King
Cab) (Step 4)
Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Step
1)
Page 4517
3. BCM - Operation table of combination switch
- BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the table.
NOTE: Headlamp has a dual system switch.
4. Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON)
- When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this
time if OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5.
- When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges
lighting switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN
communication.
- When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and
recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON.
NOTE: Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10 ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch
is turned ON, electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it
cannot be noticed.
5. Operation mode
- Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows:
Page 13119
Temperature Gauge: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 11348
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 12705
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 2810
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 3587
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 13146
Optional Splice
Page 4935
ECM Inspection Table Part 4
Page 6303
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 6348
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1080
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 8862
Component Parts Location
Locations
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 4953
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the
fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel
level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor
output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
Page 2828
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Component Locations
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 7437
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 78
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 1028
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 4795
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 9506
Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 10596
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 3499
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 11079
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4793
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 12355
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 13220
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Tools and Equipment
Fuel Supply Line: Tools and Equipment
Niss./Toy. Line Disconnect Tool
AST tool# 8026
5/16"Fuel Line Disconnect Tool. Used for disconnecting the fuel line from the fuel rail. Applicable to
2004 and newer Nissan and Toyota Models
- 5/16" Fuel Line Disconnect Tool
- Quick Line Removal*Green-Anodized Aluminum Construction
- See Application Chart
- Included in the #8110 Line Disconnect Set.
Contact AST for pricing.
Assenmacher Specialty Tools 1-800-525-2943
This Tool is also available in the following kits:
Page 1841
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Navigation Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Service and Repair
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair
HYDRAULIC LINE
Removal and Installation
Refer to the following illustration for hydraulic line removal.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb
Page 8066
INSTALLATION
1. Loosen lock nut to adjust input rod length so that the length "B", as shown, satisfies the specified
value.
Length "B": 151 mm (5.94 inch)
2. After adjusting "B", temporarily tighten lock nut and install booster assembly to the vehicle.
^ Install a gaskets and spacer block between booster assembly and the dash panel.
3. Connect brake pedal with clevis of input rod. 4. Install pedal bracket nuts and tighten them to the
specified torque. 5. Install brake piping from brake master cylinder to ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit). 6. Connect vacuum hose to brake booster. 7. Install master cylinder to booster
assembly. 8. Adjust the height and play of brake pedal. 9. Tighten lock nut of input rod to the
specified torque.
10. Install engine air duct assembly. 11. Install engine room cover. 12. Refill brake fluid and bleed
air.
CAUTION: ^
Refill with new brake fluid.
^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
With VDC
BRAKE BOOSTER
REMOVAL
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to deform or bend brake piping while removing and installing brake booster.
^ Replace clevis pin if it is damaged.
Page 12016
- DO NOT replace the entire seat adjuster assembly when only a slide motor or gear assembly is
needed.
- This is the ONLY approved repair procedure for repair of seat slide motor or gear incidents on the
Applied Vehicles. A claim to Nissan for the repair of seat slide motor or gear incidents on the
Applied Vehicles may be denied if the repair is not performed exactly as outlined in this bulletin.
- The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Figure 1
NOTE: This is the ONLY approved repair procedure for seat slide motor or gear assembly incidents
on the Applied Vehicles. A claim to Nissan for the repair of seat slide motor or gear incidents on the
Applied Vehicles may be denied if the repair is not performed exactly as outlined in this bulletin.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Locations
Page 8622
Power Distribution Module: Electrical Diagrams
Additional/Related Diagrams
For information regarding additional/related diagrams for this component, please refer to Power
and Ground Distribution Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Power Distribution/Wiring
Diagram Index
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) Schematic
Page 8942
Power Distribution Module: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7630
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 1819
Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation
BRAKE SWITCH
Description
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is
depressed. This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.
Page 4087
ECM Inspection Table Part 3
Page 1921
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 10432
Diagnostic Procedure For In-Vehicle Sensor (Steps 5 - 8)
Page 3407
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
^ Check for leaks of engine coolant.
^ Start and warm up engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant.
Page 14031
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 10916
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check ((King Cab) (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 8743
b. Remove the right side sun visor holder, twist 1/4 turn to remove.
c. Remove the right side dual sun visor assembly.
Use plastic trim tool as shown.
d. Remove front pillar assist grip; 2 bolts; under end covers.
Page 658
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 14118
- Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position.
FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR ASSEMBLY
Removal
1. Remove the front door speaker. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the
power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4.
Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts. 6. Raise the front door glass and hold it in
place with suitable tool. 7. Disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly. 8.
Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly.
Disassembly And Assembly
Remove the regulator motor from the regulator assembly.
Inspection After Removal
Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or
grease it.
- Wire wear
- Regulator deformation
- Grease condition for each sliding part
The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease.
Installation
1. Install the regulator assembly.
Front door glass regulator assembly nuts and bolt : 7.5 N.m (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb)
2. Connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly. 3. Align the glass and install the glass
bolts.
Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
4. Reset the limit switch. Refer to "Setting of Limit Switch". 5. Install front door speaker.
SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION
Setting of Limit Switch
If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor).
- Removal and installation of the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the glass.
- Removal and installation of the glass run.
Resetting
Page 10150
Adjustments
Wiper Arm: Adjustments
FRONT WIPER ARM ADJUSTMENT
1. Operate windshield washer and wiper motor one full cycle, then turn "OFF" (Auto Stop).
2. Lift the wiper blade up and then rest it onto glass surface, check the blade clearance "L1" and
"L2".
Clearance "L1" : 41.5 - 56.5 mm (1.634 - 2.224 in) Clearance "L2" : 52.5 - 67.5 mm (2.067 - 2.657
in)
3. Remove wiper arm covers and wiper arm nuts. 4. Adjust front wiper arms on wiper motor pivot
shafts to obtain above specified blade clearances. 5. Tighten wiper arm nuts to specified torque,
and install wiper arm covers.
Front wiper arm nuts : 23.6 N-m (2.4 kg-m, 17 ft-lb)
Page 5525
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 12486
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 2840
Fuse: Testing and Inspection
Fuse
- If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of incident before installing new fuse.
- Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating.
- Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly.
- Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time.
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-009 Date: 100119
Engine Controls - Seized O2 Sensor Removal Procedure
Classification: EM09-015
Reference: NTB10-009
Date: January 19, 2010
REMOVAL PROCEDURE FOR SEIZED EXHAUST SENSOR
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
If an exhaust sensor is seized in the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube, perform the procedure
described in this bulletin to remove the sensor and prevent unnecessary replacement of the
exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
In most cases this procedure is successful. This is because the threads of the exhaust sensors are
made of a softer material than the part they thread into on the exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube.
NOTE:
The replacement of exhaust manifolds/catalysts/front tubes for stripped exhaust sensor threads
may not be considered a warrantable expense.
This procedure can be performed by two methods:
Method #1 - If the Sensor Can Be Easily Accessed
^ The procedure can be performed on the vehicle.
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube will not have to be removed.
Method #2 - If the Sensor Cannot Be Easily Accessed
^ The exhaust manifold/catalyst/front tube must be removed from the vehicle.
^ The procedure will be performed with the part clamped in a vice.
Method #2 is described in this bulletin. Method #1 is the same as Method #2 except that it is
performed on the vehicle.
Service Procedure
Rust Penetrant
Recommended rust penetrants to be used in this procedure:
Page 10708
^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times.
14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt.
Page 6872
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 10753
Seat Belt Retractor: Testing and Inspection Off-Vehicle Check
SEAT BELT RETRACTOR OFF-VEHICLE CHECK
1. Remove the seat belt retractor assembly.
2. Slowly pull out belt while tilting the retractor assembly forward from the mounted position without
twisting the retractor assembly as shown in the
illustration.
3. If NG, replace the retractor assembly.
Page 13602
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 1)
Page 2188
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Air Bag (Satellite) Sensor
SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
- Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
1. Remove seat belt pre-tensioner. 2. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor nuts. 3. Disconnect
the side air bag (satellite) sensor harness connector.
CAUTION:
- Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts.
- Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it
shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one.
- Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor.
- Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures
Page 13187
Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light comes on for about 1 second and turns off.
This light warns of low tire pressure.
NISSAN's low tire pressure warning system is a tire pressure monitoring system. It monitors tire
pressure of all tires except the spare. When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light is lit,
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated, You should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's tire
information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire malfunction. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efticiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked
monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle
placard and Owner's Manual.
The recommended inflation pressure may also be found on the Tire and Loading Information label.
It the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the light will illuminate and the chime will sound
for about 10 seconds.
Page 297
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 5113
Case 12
Page 8617
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 2034
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 13533
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 5196
Case 2
Page 8747
Engine - Drive Belt Squeaking Noise
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-058 Date: 080606
Engine - Drive Belt Squeaking Noise
Classification: EM-08-002
Reference: NTB08-058
Date: June 6, 2008
TITAN / ARMADA; DRIVE BELT SQUEAK NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2008 Armada (TA60) 2006-2008 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is a squeak noise coming from the drive belt.
ACTION
A. Check to see if the drive belt auto tensioner is also noisy. If it is, you will replace it as part of this
Service Procedure.
B. Check the alignment of the power steering pump/pulley to the crankshaft pulley using a
straightedge. If it is mis-aligned, perform the steps in this Bulletin to align it.
C. Clean the crankshaft pulley belt ribs.
D. Replace the drive belt and, if necessary, replace the drive belt auto tensioner.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 7206
Repair Flow Chart
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Inspect the six flange bolts that hold the front drive shaft (axle) to the front differential side flange as
follows.
NOTE:
Perform this procedure on both the LH and RH front drive shafts (axles).
1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
Page 9662
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the center console lower cover LH. 2. Disconnect the mode door motor electrical
connector. 3. Remove the two screws and remove the mode door motor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Air Mix Door Motor
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
Page 2653
6. Repeat the cleaning procedure as needed.
^ After treating, the trim panel should be clean as shown in Figure 4 above.
7. Reinstall the trim panel parts removed in step 1.
Page 4573
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 10696
5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5).
^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit.
6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure
6A.
NOTE:
^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle.
^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle.
Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8:
^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned.
^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring.
^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no
wrinkles or ridges are present.
^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D"
ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece.
7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B).
Page 8933
Front Oil Seal
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Front Oil Seal
Removal and Installation
Components
Page 14478
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 5134
Case 3
Page 3659
EXHAUST MANIFOLD
Page 5200
Case 6
Page 3309
EM-3
Page 7790
6. From the "CONSULT UTILITIES" screen, select "ECU Reprog. Data" (see Figure 4).
Entertainment System - DVD Screen Rattles
DVD Player: Customer Interest Entertainment System - DVD Screen Rattles
Classification: BT07-016
Reference: NTB07-O49
Date: June 28, 2007
TITAN AND ARMADA; DVD SCREEN RATTLE NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006 - 2007 Titan (A60) 2006 - 2007 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINS: Vehicles built before: 5N1AA08(**)8N600030 Vehicles built before:
1N6(*)AO(*)D88N300038
APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before: April 10, 2007
IF YOU CONFIRM
Rattle noise is coming from the DVD screen:
When driving at speeds of 10 mph or more.
And
While driving on rough roads.
ACTIONS
^ Wrap adhesive foam around the DVD harness wire.
^ Do not remove the DVD monitor from the console for this service procedure.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the overhead console and place it on a clean surface. Refer to section AV of the
Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal procedure.
Page 444
Component Parts Location
Locations
Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 3323
4. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
- Check fluid levels and add as needed if necessary.
- Start the engine and check for fluid leaks of any type.
- Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes.
- Check all fluid levels again.
- Check if steering wheel turns smoothly when it is turned several times fully to the left and right
lock positions.
TIMING CHAIN COVER
Page 6403
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 12350
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 14287
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 4395
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION:
- Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
- Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the
quick connector O-ring maintains sealability.
- Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel
pressure.
- Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C,
etc.). Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in
manifold vacuum.
NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out.
The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because A60 models do not have fuel return
system.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove engine
cover. 3. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488.
- Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
- Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
- Keep fuel hose connections clean.
4. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown
in figure.
- Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter.
- When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality.
5. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 6. Start engine and
check for fuel leakage. 7. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
- During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi)
8. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 9. Check the following.
- Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
- Fuel filter for clogging
- Fuel pump
- Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or
replace.
10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel
pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE
RELEASE".
Page 3329
- B: Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (LH)
5. Install the crankshaft pulley.
- Install the key of the crankshaft.
- Insert the pulley by lightly tapping it.
CAUTION: Do not tap pulley on the side surface where the belt is installed (outer circumference).
6. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt.
- Lock the crankshaft using suitable tool then tighten the bolt.
- Perform the following steps for angular tightening:
a. Apply engine oil onto the threaded parts of the bolt and seating area.
b. Select the one most visible notch of the four on the bolt flange. Corresponding to the selected
notch put a alignment mark (such as paint) on the
crankshaft pulley.
Crankshaft pulley bolt torque
Step 1: 93.1 N-m (9.5 kg-m, 69 ft-lb)
Step 2: additional 90° (angle tightening)
7. Rotate the crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to
check for parts interference.
8. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse of order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
- Before starting the engine check oil/fluid levels including engine coolant and engine oil. If the
levels are lower than required quantity fill to the specified level.
- Run engine to check for unusual noise and vibration.
- Warm up engine thoroughly to make sure there is no leakage of any oils/fluids including engine oil
and engine coolant.
Page 403
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 2227
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 6413
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 14441
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 8459
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Locations
Cruise Control Switch: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Automatic Air Conditioner
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner
Defroster Door Motor
DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the BCM. 2. Remove the audio amplifier, if equipped. 3. Disconnect the defroster door
motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the three screws and remove the defroster door motor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Intake Door Motor
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
Page 1051
Optional Splice
Page 884
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay
Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement
Reference: NTB10-137B
Date: December 22, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006
FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY
This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have
been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068
NHTSA#: 10V-517
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40)
2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM
relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles,
oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including
the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Automatic Air Conditioner
Compressor Clutch: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner
Removal and Installation for Compressor Clutch
REMOVAL
1. Remove the compressor.
2. Remove the center bolt while holding the clutch disc stationary using Tool as shown.
Tool number : J-44614
3. Remove the clutch disc.
4. Remove the snap ring using external snap ring pliers or suitable tool.
Page 9686
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 11572
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the following parts from the trim panel:
^ pull handle cover
^ power window switch assembly (if equipped)
Refer to the INT section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal
instructions.
2. Following the instructions on the label, apply Nissan Vinyl and Leather Cleaner to the trim panel
surface.
3. Use a soft bristle brush to gently clean the surface.
4. Mist the area lightly with water to rinse.
5. Use a clean cloth to wipe the area clean.
Page 3810
12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install.
13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides.
14. Reinstall the IPDM cover.
15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first.
16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset
their ADP settings (ADP memory).
Page 7720
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 13802
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 5907
Front Axle
Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Front Axle
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove engine undercover if equipped, using
power tool. 3. Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove the torque member bolts using
power tool. Then reposition brake caliper aside with wire.
NOTE: Do not press brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
4. Put alignment mark on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor.
5. For 4WD model, perform the following:
^ Remove cotter pin, then lock nut from drive shaft using power tool.
^ Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly.
6. Remove wheel sensor.
^ Inspect the wheel sensor O-ring, replace the wheel sensor assembly if damaged.
^ Clean the wheel sensor hole and mating surface with a suitable brake cleaner and clean lint-free
shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle bearing area.
^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
CAUTION: Do not pull on the wheel sensor harness.
7. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool. 8. Remove splash guard and
wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 13180
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 10805
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 7336
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 833
ECM Inspection Table Part 5
Page 5348
DESCRIPTION OF CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR SCREEN FOR FRONT AIR CONTROL
Page 5406
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 4940
ECM Inspection Table Part 9
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 1180
Optional Splice
Page 12083
Reclining Switch Inspection (Step 3)
Page 9626
Inspection Flow
INSPECTION FLOW
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Intake door control system components are:
- Front air control
- Intake door motor (PRB built into the intake door motor)
- In-vehicle sensor
- Ambient sensor
- Optical sensor
- Intake sensor
System Operation
Page 146
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 5655
Page 11174
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 908
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 2321
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
Page 8834
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 12300
13. Turn the nut on each slider until it just touches the plastic insert.
^ Use a 3/4" (19 mm) wrench.
^ Be Careful - don't over tighten - turn each nut just enough to touch the plastic end piece.
CAUTION:
Make sure the organizer is all the way forward, in the deployed position and the lids snapped
closed before turning the nuts. Tightening the nuts with the organizer in any other position may
cause the sliders to jamb in the rails when moving / sliding the organizer.
14. Make sure the organizer sides freely.
^ Loosen the hand knobs and slide the organizer backward and forward.
NOTE:
When sliding the organizer, apply light force to the center, or evenly to both sides.
If the organizer does not slide freely when the hand knobs are loose:
a. Slide the organizer all the way forward until it stops against the front of the bed.
b. Turn each nut (loosen) until there are at least two (2) threads showing between the nut and the
end of the plastic insert.
Page 9329
Page 3695
Component Parts Location
Page 8259
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II.
^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information.
2. Compare your printout to the chart.
a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3.
b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply.
^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information.
3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows:
Page 8836
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 2804
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 4993
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 7414
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 4736
^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay.
9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay.
^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without
causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals.
10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6).
11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs.
Page 5477
b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a).
c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed.
^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer.
d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2.
2. Record the radio station presets:
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
NOTE:
Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding.
Page 11366
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 3466
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 5174
Case 10
Page 8915
Power Distribution Module: Electrical Diagrams
Additional/Related Diagrams
For information regarding additional/related diagrams for this component, please refer to Power
and Ground Distribution Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Power Distribution/Wiring
Diagram Index
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) Schematic
Page 2585
DRIVE BELT / PULLEY NOISE DIAGNOSIS FLOW CHART
Page 3399
Valve Clearance: Testing and Inspection
Valve Clearance INSPECTION
NOTE: Perform the following inspection after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or
valve-related parts, or if there are unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve clearance
over time (starting, idling, and/or noise).
1. Warm up the engine. Then stop the engine. 2. Remove the engine cover. 3. Remove the battery
cover. 4. Remove the air cleaner and air duct assembly. 5. Remove the RH bank and LH bank
rocker covers using power tool.
6. Turn the crankshaft pulley in the normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to
align TDC identification notch (without paint
mark) with timing indicator.
7. At this time, make sure both the intake and exhaust cam noses of No. 1 cylinder (top front on LH
bank) face outside.
^ If they do not face outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more.
8. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table (locations indicated
with black arrow).
^ <- : Engine front
^ <- (black): Measurable at No.1 cylinder compression top dead center
^ <- (white): Measurable at No. 3 cylinder compression top dead center
^ A: RH
^ B: LH
^ C: Exhaust
Diagram Information and Instructions
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 11011
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 3457
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 12680
2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows:
a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit
b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots
^ For Type A see Figure 1
^ For Type B see Figure 2
Page 1100
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 1839
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Service and Repair
Center Mounted Brake Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
High-Mounted Stop Lamp
BULB REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the high-mounted stop lamp. 2. Turn bulb socket counter clockwise to remove it from
lamp housing. 3. Pull bulb from socket.
Page 11269
Disclaimer
Page 4909
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 5132
Case 1
Page 13035
Speedometer Head: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 412
Inspection With CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)
With Generic Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Without Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Page 13820
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 262
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 8890
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 5181
Case 3
Page 6223
Page 9023
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 11333
Body Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 2832
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 12929
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 7012
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 2747
Engine Oil: Technician Safety Information
Precautions for Engine Oils
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct
skin contact with used oil.
If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS
- Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils.
- Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable.
- Do not put oily rags in pockets.
- Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil.
- Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be
cleaned regularly.
- First aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds.
- Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the
skin.
- Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help).
Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed.
- Do not use gasoline, kerosene, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinners or solvents for cleaning skin.
- If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay.
- Where practical, degrease components prior to handling.
- Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, chemical
goggles or face shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided.
Page 12446
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Component Tests
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given
conditions.
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again.
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given
conditions.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again.
Page 7945
IMPORTANT:
If you remove the brake pad retainers from the torque member, lift them in the direction indicated
by the arrow (see Figure 3) so retainers will not deform.
Page 12875
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 13052
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 4399
Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
With GST
Check idle speed with GST.
Description and Operation
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
FTT SENSOR
Component Description
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The
sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature.
The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 14177
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 1407
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Crew Cab
Rear Door Exterior Handle: Service and Repair Crew Cab
REAR DOOR LOCK
Component Structure
CREW CAB
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door window and rear door module assembly. Refer to "Rear Door Glass".
Page 4815
Warning Chime
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8223
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 7272
Model 2S1350
Model 3S1350
Page 8857
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 4181
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Description
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the A/T assembly facing the gear teeth (cogs)
of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to
change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM
receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 7873
Traction Control Module: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. 3. Drain the brake
fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit).
CAUTION: ^
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts
and brake tubes from being damaged.
^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench. Tighten brake tubes to specification
when installing.
^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with
new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system.
Locations
Ambient Light Sensor: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9595
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 1924
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 11092
Navigation Module: Service and Repair
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
Removal
CAUTION: To avoid damage, eject map DVD-ROM before removing the NAVI control unit.
1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove front passenger seat.
3. Remove NAVI control unit kick shield screws (A). 4. Remove NAVI control unit kick shield (1). 5.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connectors. 6. Remove NAVI control unit screws (B). 7. Remove
NAVI control unit (2).
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 13396
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 12018
- Use a fender cover or large floor-mat. Place it with the seat back lying flat so you can reach the
underside of the seat.
Figure 3
10. Remove the four seat bottom cushion bolts-M8, 12 mm head (see Figure 3).
- Removing these bolts will release the cushion from the frame.
11. Remove the two seat track mounting tab bolts (M6, 10 mm head), one on each side. They re
near the cushion bolts you just removed (see Figure
3).
- Removing these bolts will release the seat slide rails from the "worm gears".
Figure 4
12. Remove the top screw only from the RH & LH side finishers (see Figure 4).
13. Remove both screws and finisher from the front edge of the seat (see Figure 4).
Figure 5
14. Disconnect the seat sub-harness connector from the slide motor (see Figure 5).
15. Remove two bolts, one from each side of the seat frame-M8, 12 mm head (see "Remove this
bolt first" in Figure 5).
Page 7274
CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and nuts. Always install new ones.
Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Model 2S1350
Page 13028
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 8468
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 3242
4. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
- Check fluid levels and add as needed if necessary.
- Start the engine and check for fluid leaks of any type.
- Stop engine and wait for 10 minutes.
- Check all fluid levels again.
- Check if steering wheel turns smoothly when it is turned several times fully to the left and right
lock positions.
TIMING CHAIN COVER
Page 11913
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 5282
Check Sheet Part 1
Page 447
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4767
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 4779
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 4994
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 9197
Components
Page 13565
Combination Switch: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Combination Switch Reading Function
Combination Switch Reading Function
For details, refer to BCS-3, "COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION. See: Body and
Frame/Body Control Systems/Body Control Module/Description and Operation
Data Monitor
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT
DIAG MODE" screen.
3. Touch either "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "SELECT MONITOR ITEM"
screen. 4. Touch "START". 5. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch items to be
monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the signals will be
monitored.
6. Touch "RECORD" while monitoring, then the status of the monitored item can be recorded. To
stop recording, touch "STOP".
Display Item List - Data Monitor
Display Item List
Page 12540
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 2378
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 5492
Page 6898
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
harness.
Page 1024
Power Window Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 4671
Page 3505
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 10494
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 13094
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 6325
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 9919
Figure C-2
b. IMPORTANT: Make sure all 7 clips are released prior to the next step.
c. Hold the grill as shown and give it a sharp pull.
- Do this for both sides.
Figure C-3
4. Remove 2 bolts from the front bumper side bracket.
- Left side (driver side) only.
5. Remove bumper mounting bolts as follows:
For Titan and Armada with steel bumper do the following:
Page 4755
Page 11194
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 8401
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 11370
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Diagram Information and Instructions
Combination Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 13253
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 2171
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 6544
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 13634
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 1470
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 219
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Locations
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 14468
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 10218
Refrigerant: Fluid Type Specifications
Refrigerant
Type......................................................................................................................................................
....................................................HFC-134a (R-134a)
Page 12411
Page 10580
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Crash Zone Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor
CRASH ZONE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
- Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
1. Remove front grille. 2. Disconnect the crash zone sensor harness connector. 3. Remove crash
zone sensor nuts.
CAUTION:
- Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
- Do not disassemble crash zone sensor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS- 20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics
Page 11538
Component Parts Location
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Reference: NTB10-037A
Date: May 19, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE
INACCURACY
This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010
NHTSA #: 10V-074
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan
vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel
gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel
tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary
Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts
or labor.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 3891
Service and Repair
Upper Side Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING
Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR OUTSIDE MOLDING
Page 7273
REMOVAL
1. Move the A/T select lever to the N position and release the parking brake.
2. Put matching marks on the rear propeller shaft flange yoke and the companion flange of the rear
final drive as shown.
CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the rear propeller shaft flange yoke or
the companion flange.
3. Remove the bolts, then remove the propeller shaft from the rear final drive.
4. For model 3S1350, remove the center support bearing bracket nuts, and remove the propeller
shaft from the rear final drive.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
^ Inspect the propeller shaft runout. If runout exceeds the limit, replace the propeller shaft
assembly. Propeller shaft runout limit: 1.02 mm (0.0402 inch) or less
^ While holding the flange yoke on one side, check axial play of the journal as shown. If the journal
axial play exceeds the specification, replace the propeller shaft assembly. Journal axial play: 0.02
mm (0.0008 inch) or less ^
Check the propeller shaft tube for bend and damage. If damage is detected, replace the propeller
shaft assembly.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
After installation, check for vibration by driving the vehicle.
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Power Distribution Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
CONSULT-II Basic Operation
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT- II CONVERTER to the data
link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
- If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed refer to "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit".
Page 10245
Page 14308
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 10374
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 11293
Page 14493
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 10965
2. Wrap adhesive foam around the DVD harness wire as shown in Figure 1.
3. Reinstall the console in reverse order of removal.
4. With the DVD in the open position, check for rattle noise by tapping around the console to make
sure the incident has been resolved.
Disclaimer
Page 7177
1. Apply multi-purpose grease to new oil seal lips. Install new front oil seal into axle housing using
Tool.
Tool number: ST15310000
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse oil seal.
^ When installing, do not incline oil seal.
2. Align the matching mark of drive pinion with the mark of companion flange, then install
companion flange.
3. Assemble washer if required and new drive pinion nut on pinion gear and tighten nut until there
is zero bearing end play.
CAUTION: Do not reuse drive pinion nut and washer.
4. Rotate drive pinion using an inch-pound torque wrench and flange wrench. Rotating torque
should be equal to the reading recorded in step 5 above
during removal plus an additional 0.56 Nm (5 inch lbs.). Tool number: KV40104000
5. If the rotating torque is low, continue to tighten drive pinion nut in 6.8 Nm (5 ft. lbs.) increments
until proper rotating torque is achieved. Refer to
"COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Do not loosen drive pinion nut to decrease drive pinion rear bearing rotating torque and
do not exceed specified preload torque. If preload torque or rotating torque is exceeded a new
collapsible spacer must be installed. If the minimum tightening torque is reached prior to reaching
the required rotating torque, collapsible spacer may have been damaged. Replace collapsible
spacer.
6. Install rear propeller shaft. 7. Check gear lubricant level and fill with proper lubricant if required.
8. Install brake rotors, calipers, wheel and tire assemblies.
Page 13859
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 12703
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 13614
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 4894
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 6211
3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5):
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly.
a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap
in place.
^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down
(it should not move).
b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip.
^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib.
c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab.
d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6).
e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place.
Page 13604
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 12932
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 4905
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 9871
Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch (Steps 3 - 6)
Page 7424
Page 2955
Print this page and keep it by your tire mounting equipment
Page 8598
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 13276
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 9749
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 5261
Case 14
Page 730
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 8905
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 5237
Case 9
Page 3963
Page 5829
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation
PSP SENSOR
Component Description
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and
detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering
load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric
throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed
and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
Page 1885
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3781
a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section
EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits).
NOTE:
This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different.
b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify
the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check.
C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the
terminal eyelet(s).
d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the
connections.
^ Both sides of the eyelet
^ Eyelet mounting surface
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Nut/bolt threads.
Page 6092
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 10351
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 8714
In both of these examples, the opening is larger than 2 mm (NG)
3. Any areas where you can see the wires inside the vinyl tube, measure the size of the opening.
^ OK; no opening in the vinyl tube or opening is 2 mm or smaller; replace the vinyl tube with the
corrugated tube - Update Kit.
^ NG; opening in the vinyl tube is larger than 2 mm: Replace the wire harness.
Update Kit Installation (Replace Vinyl Tube With Corrugated Tube)
1. Remove the body clip from the body (see Figure B1).
2. Remove the hinge rod clip from the hinge rod (see Figure B1).
3. Cut both clips off of the harness.
NOTE:
These clips will not be reused.
4. Remove the tape that is holding the door grommet to the vinyl tube (see Figure B1).
IMPORTANT:
Do not use a cutting tool to remove the tape. Remove it by hand so you won't damage the door
grommet.
Page 13307
Dimmer Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
ILLUMINATION CONTROL SWITCH
Removal
1. Remove cluster lid A.
2. Carefully pry tabs and remove illumination control switch from cluster lid A.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5063
Case 3
Page 1956
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 11685
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Disconnect both terminals from battery in advance.
1. Remove body side trim. 2. Remove rear trim. Refer to "BODY SIDE TRIM". 3. Remove sun visor
assemblies. 4. Remove sun visor holders. 5. Remove front roof console (if equipped).
- Disconnect harnesses.
6. Remove rear roof console (if equipped).
- Disconnect harnesses.
7. Remove center roof console (if equipped).
- Disconnect harnesses.
8. Remove assist grips. 9. Remove striker covers (if equipped).
10. Remove room lamp. 11. Remove headlining.
- Disconnect harnesses.
12. Remove rear audio control assembly from rear roof console (if equipped).
- Disconnect harness.
13. Remove lamp assemblies from roof console.
- Disconnect harnesses.
14. Remove rear roof console bracket (if equipped). 15. Remove center roof console front bracket
(if equipped). 16. Remove assist grip brackets from roof (if equipped).
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Interior - Noise From Drivers Power Seat Lifter
Seat Bottom Frame: Customer Interest Interior - Noise From Drivers Power Seat Lifter
Classification: BT05-003a
Reference: NTB05-010a
Date: February 7, 2008
NISSAN; NOISE FROM DRIVER'S POWER SEAT LIFTER
This bulletin supersedes NTB03-040 and amends NTB05-010. The Applied Vehicles / VINs / Dates
have been updated. No other changes have been made.
APPLIED VEHICLES
APPLIED VINs / DATES
IF YOU CONFIRM: The driver's power seat makes a popping or clicking noise when using the seat
lifter.
ACTIONS:
^ Remove the four drivers seat mounting bolts and tilt the seat to access the bottom.
^ Install the new Spacer Washer (see Parts Information).
NOTE:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You must closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Locations
Power Mirror Switch: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13325
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Locations
Ambient Light Sensor: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12815
- To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign
materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown.
8. Remove the four bolts and remove the fuel tank shield using power tool.
9. Remove the fuel tank strap bolts while supporting the fuel tank with a suitable lift jack.
10. Lower the fuel tank using a suitable lift jack and remove it from the vehicle to access the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly.
11. Remove the lock ring using Tool as shown.
Tool number : -- (J-46536)
12. Remove the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly. Remove and discard the fuel
level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly
O-ring.
CAUTION: Do not bend the float arm during removal.
- Avoid impacts such as dropping when handling the components.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- For installation, use a new fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly O-ring.
- Connect the quick connector as follows: Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials.
- Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is
heard.
Page 6645
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 4703
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 10746
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor
mechanism (see Figure 2).
2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor
mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip.
Page 10893
Key Switch (Insert) Check (Floor Shift) (Step 3)
Page 11847
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Pull UP on the bottom side of the mirror to separate the glass from the actuator.
2. Separate the electrical connectors from the mirror.
NOTE:
^ Some mirrors have heater and turn signal connectors.
^ There are three different mirrors. The other two can be seen in Figures 6 and 7.
3. Remove the actuator base mounting screw(s).
Page 4893
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 70
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 8923
active test mode is activated successfully, CAN communication between IPDM E/R and BCM is
normal.
Part 1
Part 2
- If any of the systems controlled by IPDM E/R cannot be operated, possible cause can be easily
diagnosed using auto active test.
Page 9698
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 7743
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
Page 13011
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 6860
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 14180
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 4269
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 2168
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 6172
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 621
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 6252
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 12308
4. Slide the organizer out of the tracks and place the assembly on the tailgate.
5. Remove all four slider assemblies from the organizer as follows:
CAUTION:
Be careful when removing the insert / slider assemblies to avoid damaging the metal tube or the
plastic panel.
a. Carefully use a medium flat blade screwdriver between the end of the metal tube and the plastic
insert.
b. Use the screwdriver to very carefully begin moving the plastic insert out of the metal tube as
shown in Figure 4.
c. When the insert begins to move, hold the assembly as shown in Figure 5 and pull it out of the
tube.
NOTE:
If the insert is difficult to remove:
Page 14014
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 7627
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 5270
Case 4
Page 9818
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Reference: NTB10-037A
Date: May 19, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE
INACCURACY
This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010
NHTSA #: 10V-074
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan
vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel
gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel
tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary
Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts
or labor.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 4470
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2821
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 6224
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
Page 4488
Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 4990
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 7547
Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Remove the
glove box assembly.
3. Disconnect transfer control unit connectors. 4. Remove the transfer control unit.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Transfer control unit
bolts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.)
^ After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer
assembly and transfer control unit. See: Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage
Warnings/Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement
Page 8011
CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, KRE00 00010 01) when
assembling.
1. Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal and insert seal in to groove on cylinder body.
CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seal.
2. Apply clean brake fluid to piston and piston boot, then install piston boot in to piston groove.
CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boot.
3. Insert into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove.
CAUTION: Press piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from
being rubbed.
4. Install sliding pins and sliding pin boots to torque member.
CAUTION: Trailing/upper sliding pin must be replaced at each service.
5. Install cylinder body. Tighten sliding pin bolt to the specified torque. Refer to "Components".
Page 9247
^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, position the disc rotor according
to alignment mark.
^ When installing wheel and tire. Refer to "Rotation". See: Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and
Repair/Tire Rotation
Page 4511
Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic (Part 1)
Page 4323
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 8387
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 112
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Warning Chime
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2398
Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Crew
Cab) (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 7925
^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior
to the introduction of the NAO compound.
^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level
of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads.
^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must
decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance.
^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake
pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service.
Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise:
^ Occurs with or without braking.
^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor.
^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using
the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service
Manual procedures.
Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop:
^ This is sometimes called "creep groan".
^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary.
Groan noise during stopping:
^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking.
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to
Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes:
^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes
are applied.
^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal.
^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur.
^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly.
^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information.
^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started:
^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary.
^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the
first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the
first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started.
Rear Brake Squeal:
^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or
drums.
^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components.
WARNING:
Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust
precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment.
Page 3978
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 1835
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 9717
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 9519
7. After the tire/wheel is balanced, apply an index mark to the tire at the location of the valve stem
(see Figure 6).
^ This index mark will allow you to tell if the tire has slipped on the rim (see Figure 7).
Tire to Rim Slippage:
^ Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs, the tire
may become un-balanced.
^ Overtime the tire lubricate will dry, eliminating the lubricant as a cause of tire slippage.
^ Some tire lubricants may require up to 24 hours to completely dry.
^ If slippage occurs, the tire/wheel will need to be re-balanced.
WORK - AID AVOID CUSTOMER RETURNS FOR VIBRATION
Page 11676
3. Reposition lid spring on the guide pins as shown in Figure 1.
4. Slide nylon washer onto the screw, then insert spring retention screw into the guide pin and
tighten the screw into place (see Figure 2).
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the other side.
6. Reinstall the cup holder/console finisher in reverse order of removal.
7. Check the cup holder lid to make sure it correctly operates and the incident is resolved.
Disclaimer
Page 5684
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5763
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from air
cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4.
Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower)
^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type)
NOTE: ^
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals.
^ Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance.
Page 6937
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 10675
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
- Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
1. Disconnect the harness connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 2.
Remove center console. 3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors. 4. Remove fixing
bolts from the diagnosis sensor unit.
CAUTION:
- Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts.
- Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it
shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one.
- Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics
CAUTION:
- The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark "<=" pointing toward the
front of the vehicle for proper operation.
ECU DISCRIMINATED NO.
After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis sensor unit identification is
correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to "CONSULT-II Function".
Page 10926
e. A "Basic Features" list showing specific phone features and "Compatibility" for each feature will
be displayed.
f. Use this list to determine if the customer's concern(s) relates to any of the listed features.
g. If the feature related to the customer's concern(s) shows as "N" (not compatible):
^ STOP YOUR DIAGNOSIS HERE.
^ Do NOT perform any further diagnosis for this incident.
^ Do NOT perform any repairs for this incident.
^ Do NOT replace any parts for this incident.
^ The customer concern(s) cannot be addressed due the phone's feature(s) being incompatible.
^ If the customer still wants the feature(s) to function, they will need to get an approved phone
showing the feature(s) as "Y" (compatible) in the "Basic
Features" list.
h. If the feature related to the customer's concern(s) shows as "Y" (compatible), perform diagnosis
in the applicable section of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
Quick Reference
QUICK REFERENCE
Poor Sound Quality
1. If a customer concern of poor sound quality is verified, in the vehicle and / or "land" side (other
end of the call), perform the following steps.
^ Have the customer lower the in-vehicle phone volume by using the audio system volume control.
NOTE:
Lowering the in-vehicle phone volume improves noise canceling performance.
Speaker Adaptation
1. If a customer concern related to Voice Recognition is verified:
a. Verify the vehicle you are working on has Speaker Adaptation feature.
Page 4840
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 3465
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 1532
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 14051
Optional Splice
Page 2817
Fuse: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 71
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 14476
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 3125
A. Set straight edge on front surface of crankshaft pulley to check the clearance at the top of the
pump pulley. See Figure 2.
B. Check clearance of lower part of the power steering pump pulley and crankshaft pulley. See
Figure 3.
NOTE:
The goal is to make sure the power steering pump pulley is aligned as true as possible with the
crankshaft pulley.
^ If the pulleys are aligned there is no need to adjust the bracket, skip ahead to step 17.
^ If the pulleys are not aligned, go on to step 12.
Page 13962
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 3439
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Locations
Ambient Light Sensor: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10098
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 12816
- After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as
follows:
- Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipes and hose
connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the
system.
2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the
fuel pipe and hose connections.
Page 1414
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 9972
- Find the intersecting point of your RPM and Voltage readings that you wrote down in step 10.
NOTE:
If voltage reading is less than 10.0 V, charge the vehicle battery and retest. Do not perform fan
motor test with a charger attached to the battery.
15. Determine your next steps as follows:
If the fan motor is OK:
a. Remove the Condenser Fan Motor Assembly - Procedure C steps 1 though 9.
b. Install the Condenser Fan Motor Protective Coverings - Procedure D.
c. Reinstall the Condenser Fan Motor Assembly - Procedure C steps 10 through 18.
d. Confirm Condenser Fan Motor operation - Procedure F.
Page 1118
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 5434
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 2724
COMPONENTS
NOTE: Rear final drive shown, front final drive similar.
DRAINING 1. Stop the engine. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain the gear oil. 3. Apply sealant to
the drain plug. Install the drain plug on the final drive assembly and tighten to specification.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS", (FFD). Refer to
"Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD). See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential
Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear
Page 10490
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 8532
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 10458
Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 3 - 6)
Page 7305
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 3704
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1550
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the cluster lid D.
2. Remove the two screws and remove the in-vehicle sensor from cluster lid D.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 12162
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 4826
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 12599
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit Switch Resetting
Front Door Window Regulator: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Front Door Window Motor Limit
Switch Resetting
EL08-031A
Reference: NTB09-027A
Date: July 15, 2010
FRONT WINDOW REGULATOR MOTOR LIMIT SWITCH RESET
This bulletin has been amended. The APPLIED VEHICLES section has been revised. No other
changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2010 Armada (TA60) 2006-2009 Quest (V42) 2006-2010 Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If any of the following work has been done:
^ removal and installation of the regulator assembly
^ removal and installation of the motor from the regulator
^ installation of a new glass window
^ installation of a new glass run
....check the label on the window motor to see if the part number is one of the following:
^ 80730-ZT01A ^ 80731-ZT01A ^ 80730-ZM70B ^ 80731-ZM70B
NOTE:
The label can be checked with the motor in the vehicle by using a mirror.
If the window motor is listed above, the Limit Switch will need to be reset using the procedure in
this bulletin.
NOTE:
Some of the window motors with these part numbers may appear to have a reset switch, but it will
not reset the Limit Switch.
SETTING OF LIMIT SWITCH
1. Connect the door harness to the power window motor, and rotate the motor more than 5 turns in
the glass raising (up) direction.
Page 12696
Locations
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Page 13410
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 1544
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
In-vehicle Sensor Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
In-vehicle Sensor
The in-vehicle sensor is located on cluster lid D. It converts variations in temperature of passenger
compartment air (drawn in through the integrated fan) into a resistance value. It is then input into
the front air control.
Page 10355
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8710
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Required Special Tools
Page 13261
Page 8260
a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section
EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits).
NOTE:
This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different.
b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify
the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check.
C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the
terminal eyelet(s).
d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the
connections.
^ Both sides of the eyelet
^ Eyelet mounting surface
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Nut/bolt threads.
Page 67
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 12200
Pedal Positioning Switch: Testing and Inspection
Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 9917
- Find the intersecting point of your RPM and Voltage readings that you wrote down in step 10.
NOTE:
If voltage reading is less than 10.0 V, charge the vehicle battery and retest. Do not perform fan
motor test with a charger attached to the battery.
15. Determine your next steps as follows:
If the fan motor is OK:
a. Remove the Condenser Fan Motor Assembly - Procedure C steps 1 though 9.
b. Install the Condenser Fan Motor Protective Coverings - Procedure D.
c. Reinstall the Condenser Fan Motor Assembly - Procedure C steps 10 through 18.
d. Confirm Condenser Fan Motor operation - Procedure F.
Page 9989
Figure D-6
- Wrap protector 2 around protector 1 and fold the fingers back as shown.
Figure D-7
5. Slide protector 2 against the fan motor and press / stick the fingers to the fan motor as shown.
- Make sure to press and smooth the fingers so they are completely stuck to the fan motor.
Figure D-8
6. Remove the adhesive backing from Protector 3 and stick it to the fan motor as shown.
Page 4378
Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent).
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for
connecting the fuel pressure gauge.
2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test".
^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure.
^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble
Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test.
^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test.
> If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and
repair information.
> If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3.
3. Replace the fuel pump.
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the
appropriate Service Manual.
^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information.
^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal.
4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed.
Page 5405
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 6597
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
harness.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Blower Motor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 5605
Page 2238
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 10326
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 7847
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2875
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair 2-Pole Lift
2-Pole Lift
WARNING:
- When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear
of the vehicle are well balanced.
- When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, or fuel
lines.
Page 9997
Figure D-22
Figure D-23
Figure D-24
- Refer to Figures D-22 through D-24 for tie-wrap locations.
- Use the large 11 o'clock rib for reference.
Page 10211
11. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member, from the
vehicle.
CAUTION: Use care not to damage the seats and interior trim panels when removing the heater
and cooling unit assembly with it attached to the steering member.
12. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly from the steering member.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-rings of the low-pressure pipe and high-pressure pipe with new ones, then apply
compressor oil to them when installing them.
- After charging the refrigerant, check for leaks.
NOTE:
- Fill the engine cooling system with the specified coolant mixture. Refer to "REFILLING ENGINE
COOLANT".
- Recharge the A/C system. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 14445
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 9607
Diagnostic Procedure For Mode Door Motor (Steps 19 - 22)
Page 10031
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 477
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 13630
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5227
Check Sheet Part 2
Page 1614
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 9016
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 12470
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 6569
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 3634
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 2235
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 13318
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13079
Page 2161
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 196
b. Keypad will appear (see Figure 6).
c. Using the digit keys on the keypad, enter ID Code 060402.
d. Then click the "Continue" button on the keypad.
^ After you click "Continue", the "CAUTION" screen will appear (see Figure 7).
Page 10412
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 11209
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 5312
Case 12
Page 11472
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1774
Diagnostic Procedure For Optical Sensor (Step 5)
SYMPTOM: Optical sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B257F or
B2580 is displayed. Without a CONSULT-II code 50 or 52 is indicated on front air control as a
result of conducting self-diagnosis.
Page 9093
d. At the front of the console; remove side covers and screws.
^ Left side cover shown; remove right side cover also.
1 screw on each side.
e. Remove the shift knob; unscrew it counterclockwise.
f. Lift and remove the shift finisher.
^ Disconnect electrical connectors.
g. Disconnect the shift cable.
^ Push the shift lever release to move shift lever to Park.
Page 7435
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 8262
7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs.
Disclaimer
Procedures
Oil Pan: Procedures
OIL PAN AND OIL STRAINER
Image Symbols
REMOVAL
Page 2652
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the following parts from the trim panel:
^ pull handle cover
^ power window switch assembly (if equipped)
Refer to the INT section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal
instructions.
2. Following the instructions on the label, apply Nissan Vinyl and Leather Cleaner to the trim panel
surface.
3. Use a soft bristle brush to gently clean the surface.
4. Mist the area lightly with water to rinse.
5. Use a clean cloth to wipe the area clean.
A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Customer Interest A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air
Vents
Classification: HA09-001A
Reference: NTB09-028A
Date: November 17, 2010
LOW AIRFLOW FROM HVAC FRONT AIR VENTS
The Applied Vehicles have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Quest (V42) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Pathfinder
(R51) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) 2004-2008 Titan (A60) 2004-2008 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
An Applied Vehicle has low airflow coming from the HVAC front air vents due to evaporator
freeze-up.
AND
The HVAC unit surface temperature around the evaporator is about 32°F (0°C) causing ice to form
on the evaporator.
NOTE:
The incident may be described as:
^ Only occurring after a long drive with the HVAC on continuously and the blower set on low.
AND
^ Under conditions such as high ambient temperature and high humidity.
ACTION
^ Replace the intake sensor with the part listed in Parts Information.
^ Refer to the Service Procedure below.
Page 11003
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 4877
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 12393
Cruise Control Switch: Description and Operation
ASCD STEERING SWITCH
Component Description
ASCD steering switch has variant values of electrical resistance for each button. ECM reads
voltage variation of switch, and determines which button is operated. Refer to "AUTOMATIC
SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for the ASCD function.
Page 13946
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 3026
Standard: 0.013 - 0.039 mm (0.0005 - 0.0015 inch) ^
If the measurement is not within specification, referring to each specification of the valve lifter
diameter and hole diameter, replace either or both the valve lifter and cylinder head.
CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING
CAMSHAFT AND CAMSHAFT BEARING
Page 145
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 7924
Brake Caliper: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair
Classification: BR00-004d
Reference: NTB00-033d
Date: August 8, 2007
ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all
previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and
provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur.
^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories:
a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or
released.
b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the
brakes are applied.
c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer.
2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above.
3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident.
BRAKE NOISE
^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no
repair action should be taken.
^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate
repair:
Squeak noise when the brakes are cold:
^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning.
^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary.
Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures:
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information
listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures.
Notes about brake pads and brake noise:
Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory.
^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of
the art resistance to squeal noise.
^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the
terms of the Nissan new car warranty.
Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very
attractive price.
Page 1613
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 2749
Engine Oil: Testing and Inspection
Inspection OIL LEVEL
^ Before starting the engine make sure the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface, then check
the oil level. If the engine is already running, turn it off and allow 10 minutes before checking.
^ Check that the oil level is within the low (L) and high (H) range as indicated on the dipstick.
^ If the engine oil level is out of range, add oil as necessary.
OIL APPEARANCE
^ Check the engine oil for a white milky appearance or excessive contamination.
^ If the engine oil is milky, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant. Repair
the broken parts.
Page 3509
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 3951
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 2402
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH (Steps 2 - 5)
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Window Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Locations
Brake Light Switch: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Diagram Information and Instructions
Brake Light Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 466
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 10075
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Low Airflow From
Front Air Vents
Classification: HA09-001A
Reference: NTB09-028A
Date: November 17, 2010
LOW AIRFLOW FROM HVAC FRONT AIR VENTS
The Applied Vehicles have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Quest (V42) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Pathfinder
(R51) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) 2004-2008 Titan (A60) 2004-2008 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
An Applied Vehicle has low airflow coming from the HVAC front air vents due to evaporator
freeze-up.
AND
The HVAC unit surface temperature around the evaporator is about 32°F (0°C) causing ice to form
on the evaporator.
NOTE:
The incident may be described as:
^ Only occurring after a long drive with the HVAC on continuously and the blower set on low.
AND
^ Under conditions such as high ambient temperature and high humidity.
ACTION
^ Replace the intake sensor with the part listed in Parts Information.
^ Refer to the Service Procedure below.
Interior - Driver's Seat Arm Rest Loose
Arm Rest: Customer Interest Interior - Driver's Seat Arm Rest Loose
Classification: BT08-037
Reference: NTB09-005
Date: January 15, 2009
FRONT DRIVER SEAT ARMREST LOOSE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2009 Armada (TA60) 2004-2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The front driver seat armrest is loose.
ACTION
Remove bolt and apply Permatex(R) Threadlocker Blue or equivalent to bolt threads.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. a. Move the driver seat to the full rearward position.
b. Fully recline the driver seatback.
Page 5700
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 1676
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (Step 3)
Page 7846
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2610
Drive Belt: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation REMOVAL
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly.
2. Install Tool on drive belt auto tensioner pulley bolt, move in the direction of arrow (loosening
direction of tensioner) as shown.
Tool number: - (J-46535)
CAUTION: Avoid placing hand in a location where pinching may occur if the holding tool
accidentally comes off.
3. Remove the drive belt.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Make sure belt is securely installed around all pulleys.
^ Rotate the crankshaft pulley several turns clockwise to equalize belt tension between pulleys.
^ Make sure belt tension is within the allowable working range, using the indicator notch on the
drive belt auto tensioner.
Page 4337
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 11263
Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 2145
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 10995
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Power Distribution Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
CONSULT-II Basic Operation
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT- II CONVERTER to the data
link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
- If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed refer to "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit".
Page 5110
Case 9
Interior - No/Erratic Seat Forward/Backward Operation
Power Seat Motor: Customer Interest Interior - No/Erratic Seat Forward/Backward Operation
Classification: BT05-052a
Reference: NTB05-105a
Date: October 31, 2008
FRONT POWER SEAT NO OR IMPROPER FORWARD / BACKWARD MOVEMENT
This bulletin has been amended to expand Applied Vehicles and to incorporate NTB05-056 into
this bulletin. No other changes have been made. Please discard the previous version of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) 2004 - 2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Quest
(V42) 2005 - 2007 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2007 Frontier (D40) 2004 - 2006 Altima (L31) 2004 2007 Maxima (A34)*
^ *2004 Maxima (A34); Applies to left and right front seats, with or without ADP (memory seat).
^ *2005 - 2006 Maxima (A34); Applies only to the left front (driver s) seat with ADP (memory seat).
APPLIED VINS: TA60 Built before: 5N1AA08A (*) 7N718400 A60 Built before: 1N6BA07B (*)
7N231607 V42 Built before: 5N1BV28U (*) 7N134315 A34 Built before: 1N4BA41E (*) 7C853209
D40 2005 - 2007 All VINS R51 2005 - 2007 All VINS L31 2004 - 2006 All VINS
APPLIED DATES: TA60 Built before: 05-Feb-2007 A60 Built before: 05-Feb-2007 V42 Built before:
15-Feb-2007 R51 All Dates D40 All Dates A34 Built before: 28-Feb-2007 L31 All Dates
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The seat slide motor or gear assembly needs to be replaced for any reason.
NOTE:
Incidents that require slide motor and gear assembly replacement include:
- The power seat has voltage (power) to it, but it will not move forward or backward.
- While moving the seat forward or backward, the seat won't track straight; it becomes cocked
(crooked) on the seat tracks.
- Noise from the slide motor or gears.
ACTION:
Replace only the Seat Slide Motor Kit listed in the Parts Information. Do Not replace the entire seat
adjuster assembly.
IMPORTANT:
Page 9018
Page 8543
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 12761
Page 12364
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 14223
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 4341
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 13107
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Diagnostic Procedure
Page 8343
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 8472
Fuse: Testing and Inspection
Fuse
- If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of incident before installing new fuse.
- Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating.
- Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly.
- Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time.
Page 586
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 9105
38. Remove the upper door hinge finisher; 2 clips.
39. Take the harness loose from the hinge rod and the body.
40. Pull the harness through the body.
For passenger side (right side) harness. go to step 51
Rear Cabin Wall Harness Branch (driver side-left side-only; if equipped with rear sonar and/or
differential lock
41. Lift the carpet on the rear cabin wall.
42. Disconnect the control unit(s).
43. Take the harness loose from the rear cabin wall.
Page 11173
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 11764
Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection (Step 4)
Page 6772
Page 10836
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 13751
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 13697
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 14240
Optional Splice
Page 8246
Neutral Safety Switch: Description and Operation
PNP SWITCH
Component Description
When the gear position is P or N, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON. TCM detects the
position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists. Then the TCM sends the PNP
switch signal to the ECM via combination meter.
Page 1584
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 13510
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 650
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 3496
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 11375
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 4832
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Axle Nut
Torque .................................................................................................................................................
............................ 137 Nm (14 kg-cm, 101 ft. lbs.)
Page 4125
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 10985
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 9762
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 8682
d. Remove the seat from the vehicle and place it in a clean area.
NOTE:
Use two people to lift the rear seat out of the vehicle.
11. Remove the front kick plate.
Use a plastic trim tool to snap it loose.
12. Remove the rear kick plate;
^ Use a plastic trim tool to snap it loose.
Page 5002
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 5739
ECM Inspection Table Part 6
Page 10507
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 9351
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 13398
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 4480
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 14255
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 4176
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ECT SENSOR
Component Description
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The
sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in
temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 8772
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 302
Page 12801
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 11524
7. Remove three 10 mm door panel bolts, behind arm rest (see Figure 3).
NOTE:
Bolts thread into plastic. Use a Phillips screwdriver to remove.
8. Remove seatbelt retractor cover (see Figure 4)
9. Remove door panel.
a. Start at the lower left corner, where the seatbelt retractor cover was.
b. From there, "pop" the clips off working around the panel in a counter-clockwise direction.
Page 5694
Page 4140
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 5692
Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
SRS Components Parts Location
Page 6331
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 6694
9. Remove side bearing caps.
10. Loosen the side bearing adjusters using Tool.
Tool number: - (C-4164)
11. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side
bearing adjusters together with bearing.
12. Remove side bearing adjusters from axle housing. 13. Remove bracket for the differential lock
position switch connector and bolts. 14. Remove differential lock position switch.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent.
CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to axle housing and differential lock position switch. Also
remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and axle housing and
differential lock position switch.
Page 8340
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 10479
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 3551
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ECT SENSOR
Component Description
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The
sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in
temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 12554
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 1507
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 4910
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 13763
Combination Switch Inspection (Step 3)
Page 14101
Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Crew
Cab) (Steps 3 - 4)
A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: All Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Low Airflow From
Front Air Vents
Classification: HA09-001A
Reference: NTB09-028A
Date: November 17, 2010
LOW AIRFLOW FROM HVAC FRONT AIR VENTS
The Applied Vehicles have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Quest (V42) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Pathfinder
(R51) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) 2004-2008 Titan (A60) 2004-2008 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
An Applied Vehicle has low airflow coming from the HVAC front air vents due to evaporator
freeze-up.
AND
The HVAC unit surface temperature around the evaporator is about 32°F (0°C) causing ice to form
on the evaporator.
NOTE:
The incident may be described as:
^ Only occurring after a long drive with the HVAC on continuously and the blower set on low.
AND
^ Under conditions such as high ambient temperature and high humidity.
ACTION
^ Replace the intake sensor with the part listed in Parts Information.
^ Refer to the Service Procedure below.
Page 13178
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 6312
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 7000
Shift Cable: Service and Repair
SHIFT CONTROL SYSTEM Control Device Removal and Installation
Floor Shift Models
Page 3822
Page 5140
Case 9
Page 5653
Automatic Air Conditioner
Refrigerant: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner
Contaminated Refrigerant
Contaminated Refrigerant
If a refrigerant other than pure HFC-134a (R-134a) is identified in a vehicle, your options are:
- Explain to the customer that environmental regulations prohibit the release of contaminated
refrigerant into the atmosphere.
- Explain that recovery of the contaminated refrigerant could damage your service equipment and
refrigerant supply.
- Suggest the customer return the vehicle to the location of previous service where the
contamination may have occurred.
- If you choose to perform the repair, recover the refrigerant using only dedicated equipment and
containers. Do not recover contaminated refrigerant into your existing service equipment. If your
facility does not have dedicated recovery equipment, you may contact a local refrigerant product
retailer for available service. This refrigerant must be disposed of in accordance with all federal and
local regulations. In addition, replacement of all refrigerant system components on the vehicle is
recommended.
- If the vehicle is within the warranty period, the air conditioner warranty is void. Please contact
NISSAN Customer Affairs for further assistance.
HFC-134A (R-134A) Service Procedure
REFRIGERANT LINES
HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure
SETTING OF SERVICE TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Discharging Refrigerant
WARNING: Avoid breathing A/C refrigerant and oil vapor or mist. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose
and throat. Remove HFC-134a (R-134a) refrigerant from the A/C system using certified service
equipment meeting requirements of SAE J2210 HFC-134a (R-134a) recycling equipment or SAE
J2201 HFC-134a (R-134a) recovery equipment. If an accidental system discharge occurs, ventilate
the work area before resuming service. Additional health and safety information may be obtained
from the refrigerant and oil manufacturers.
Page 8900
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 5056
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 4)
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 6400
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 12597
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 10581
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 2384
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock
Installation/Removal
Wheel Fastener: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock
Installation/Removal
Classification: WT09-002
Reference: NTB09-056
Date: July 14, 2009
ACCESSORY WHEEL LOCKS INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
Always use hand tools when installing or removing accessory wheel lock nuts.
WARNING:
Do not use power tools to install or remove accessory wheel lock nuts.
Use of an impact wrench or other power tool may cause permanent damage to the wheel lock nut
and/or key.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Accessory wheel locks, wheel lock keys, or vehicle wheels that are damaged due to improper
installation or removal will not be considered a manufacturer defect and will not be covered under
warranty.
Accessory Wheel Lock Installation / Removal Guidelines
^ For ease of removal, the wheel lock nut should always be the first lug nut removed.
^ If needed, clean threads on lug studs with a wire brush.
^ The wheel lock nut should always be the last lug nut tightened.
^ Always use the special key supplied in the wheel lock set to install and remove the wheel locks.
^ Always tighten the wheel lock nuts using a hand torque wrench to the torque specification in the
Service Manual.
Disclaimer
Page 13034
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 8827
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 7984
^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior
to the introduction of the NAO compound.
^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level
of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads.
^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must
decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance.
^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake
pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service.
Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise:
^ Occurs with or without braking.
^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor.
^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using
the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service
Manual procedures.
Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop:
^ This is sometimes called "creep groan".
^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary.
Groan noise during stopping:
^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking.
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to
Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes:
^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes
are applied.
^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal.
^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur.
^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly.
^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information.
^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started:
^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary.
^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the
first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the
first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started.
Rear Brake Squeal:
^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or
drums.
^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components.
WARNING:
Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust
precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment.
Page 5326
Case 7
Page 9051
k. Remove 2 bolts from the sides of the console.
^ Left side is shown, right side not shown.
l. Remove the center console from the vehicle.
9. Disconnect the harness SRS connector from the SRS control unit.
10. Remove the rear seat from the vehicle:
a. Move the jack out of the way.
b. Remove the center seat belt retractor anchor bolt.
c. Remove the 8 seat mounting bolts.
Page 3789
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389)
Repair Overview
PARTS INFORMATION
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 8529
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 3948
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 7833
Repair Flow Chart
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay
Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement
Reference: NTB10-137B
Date: December 22, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006
FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY
This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have
been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068
NHTSA#: 10V-517
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40)
2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM
relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles,
oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including
the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 7390
Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 12445
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 10)
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 11)
Page 7629
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 13350
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 11148
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 9640
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Testing and Inspection Manual Air Conditioner
Mode Door Motor Circuit
Mode Door Motor Circuit
SYMPTOM:
- Air outlet does not change.
- Mode door motor does not operate normally.
Inspection Flow
INSPECTION FLOW
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Wheels: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Tire Mounting Information
Classification: WT11-003
Reference: NTB11-029
Date: March 21, 2011
TIRE MOUNTING INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When mounting tires to wheels, it is important that the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ A tire bead that is not seated correctly may cause a vehicle vibration.
^ High performance tires and tires with shorter sidewalls (low aspect tires) may require more care
to make sure the tire bead is seated correctly.
^ Follow the Tire Mounting Tips in this bulletin.
Tire Mounting Tips:
NOTE:
These tips are not intended to be a complete instruction for mounting tires to wheels. Make sure to
read and follow the instruction for your specific tire service equipment
1. Clean the tire bead with an approved rubber cleaning fluid.
^ Rubber cleaning fluid is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process.
2. Clean the wheel (flange and bead seat area) see Figure 2 Make sure to clean off all rust and
corrosion.
Page 1729
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3510
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 7014
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 10411
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 5644
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 3515
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 1399
Page 7166
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way.
^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
2. Remove the rear brake rotor.
^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly.
^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions.
Page 10647
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 13115
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 148
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 11188
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 5872
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 7175
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking)
Removal and Installation
COMPONENTS
REMOVAL
1. Remove rear propeller shaft. 2. Remove wheel and tire assemblies. 3. Remove brake calipers
and rotors. 4. Using an inch-pound, torque wrench, rotate the pinion three or four times.
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 3361
Fuel Pressure: Specifications
Fuel Pressure
Fuel pressure at idling..........................................................................................................................
..........Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi)
Page 876
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 12466
Optional Splice
Page 6600
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
Page 12069
1. Write down the radio station presets.
2. Move / adjust the passenger seat bottom and seatback to the middle and upright positions.
3. Turn the ignition OFF. Disconnect both 12V battery cables, negative cable first, and wait at least
3 minutes before proceeding to step 4.
CAUTION:
Do not drop, tilt, or bump the side air bag module while removing/installing the seat. Always handle
it with care.
4. Remove the four bolts holding the seat to the body.
5. Place the seat, back side down, on a clean covered workbench.
6. Remove the lower flap cover.
Page 5248
Case 1
Locations
Page 1930
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Locations
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 2252
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 8719
16. Attach the new body clip to the body.
Final Quality Check
17. Check the air bag light operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition ON.
b. Look at the air bag light.
c. Make sure the air bag warning light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out.
Harness Replacement Part 1 (Includes Seat Belt Replacement, If Needed)
NOTE:
^ There are several model variations (power seats, audio, side air bag, navigation, etc). Due to
these variations the harness removal photos in this procedure may not have the exact interior trim,
connectors, and harness mounting locations as the vehicle you are working on.
^ It is recommended that you mark the harness mounting location during disassembly.
Floor and Rear Door (Left and/or Right Side)
^ This portion of the procedure is for the sections of the harness that are on the floor of the vehicle
(under the carpet) and inside the rear door.
^ The photos in this portion of the procedure are of the left side (driver side). If you are working on
the right side (passenger side) the photos are a mirror image.
1. Write down the radio station presets.
2. If equipped with power seats; move the seats to the "mid-point" position (half-way between full
forward and full rearward).
3. Put the gear selector in the Neutral position.
4. Disconnect both battery cables-negative cable first.
5. Remove the front seat.
a. Remove the 4 seat mounting bolts.
b. Disconnect all of the seat electrical connectors.
Page 1207
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 7174
1. Apply 3.2 mm (0.126 inch) bead of sealant to the rear cover.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV sealant or equivalent.
2. Install rear cover and tighten rear cover bolts in the order as shown. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
3. Fill final drive with recommended gear oil. 4. Install front final drive.
Page 1040
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 8909
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 13251
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 8666
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Required Special Tools
Page 10408
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 1393
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 5660
Page 3228
EM-11
Page 8494
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 7326
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 12699
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 9593
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 5081
Case 8
Page 13170
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Automatic Air Conditioner
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner
INTAKE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel.
2. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
NOTE: The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the
A/C evaporator cover.
3. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the heater and cooling unit assembly.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Rear Sonar System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9271
Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Inspection Before Disassembly
INSPECTION BEFORE DISASSEMBLY
Disassemble the power steering oil pump only if the following items are found. ^
Deformed or damaged pulley, bracket, connector or suction pipe.
^ Oil leakage from the suction pipe or connector.
Page 6410
Ignition Coil: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 1467
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 10497
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 2364
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 5581
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use
Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036.
1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM.
a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other
damage.
Page 13505
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
ABLS/ABS
Traction Control Module: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. 3. Drain the brake
fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit).
CAUTION: ^
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts
and brake tubes from being damaged.
^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench. Tighten brake tubes to specification
when installing.
^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with
new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system.
Page 14444
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 4306
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 5850
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Relay Box: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 10583
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
VIN Registration
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair VIN Registration
VIN Registration
DESCRIPTION
VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is
replaced.
NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance
(I/M).
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to Application and ID. 2. Turn ignition switch ON
and engine stopped.
3. Select "VIN REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of
CONSULT-II display.
Page 453
Optional Splice
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic
Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Page 9348
LINK REPLACEMENT
1. For front lower link(s) identified as needing replacement:
Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section FSU, for
link replacement information.
^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts
Information.
^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts
Information.
NOTE:
The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need
replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only.
^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations.
Page 1537
Diagnostic Procedure For Ambient Sensor (Steps 3 - 6)
Page 5346
DESCRIPTION OF "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR" SCREEN FOR TCM
DESCRIPTION OF CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR SCREEN FOR DIFFERENTIAL LOCK
CONTROL UNIT
Page 4011
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 1540
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair
AMBIENT SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the ambient sensor electrical connector.
NOTE: The ambient sensor is located behind the front bumper, in front of the condenser.
2. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 9968
Figure B-3
5. Before connecting to the vehicle battery, make sure the Fan Motor Tester is switched OFF.
Switched to OFF
6. Connect the Fan Motor Tester and the Fluke 73 Digital Multimeter (using the fluke meter test
leads) as follows (see Figure B-4):
- Connect Fan Motor Tester harness connector to the condenser fan.
- Connect Fan Motor Tester to the vehicle battery; Red clamp to + (positive) / Black clamp to (negative).
- Connect the Fluke 73 digital multimeter to the MOTOR VOLTAGE test ports on the Fan Motor
Tester; V+ red probe to POS / COM black probe to NEG.
Figure B-4
NOTE:
When connected as above with the Fan Motor Tester switched OFF, the LED on the switch will
illuminate green; this indicates the tester has battery power.
Page 3054
Tool number: KV10112100 (BT-8653-A) Connecting rod bolts Step 1 ...............................................
................................................................................................................................. 19.6 Nm (1.5
kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.) Step 2 .......................................................................................................................
................................................................................... 90° clockwise Apply engine oil to threads and
seats of connecting rod bolts. After tightening bolts, make sure the crankshaft rotates smoothly.
Check connecting rod side clearance.
CONNECTING ROD BOLT DIAMETER
^ Measure diameter "d" at position shown.
^ When "d" is out of specifications (when it becomes thinner), replace bolt with a new one. Limit .....
..............................................................................................................................................................
........ 7.75 mm (0.3051 inch) or less.
Connecting Rod Bearing
Connecting Rod Bearing
Undersize
Undersize
Connecting Rod Bearing Oil Clearance
Connecting Rod Bearing Oil Clearance
Page 13590
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 5117
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
Page 43
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 205
NOTE:
This process will take from 4 to 5 minutes.
CAUTION:
You must leave the vehicle and the CONSULT-II unit "undisturbed" (don't touch) until
reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If the CONSULT-II screen gives you an error message "Unmatch of Vehicle Data":
^ You tried to reprogram with incorrect reprogramming data, or
^ You are trying to reprogram with the same file that is already in the ABS/VDC control unit.
For your reference, the old and new ABS/VDC Control Unit part numbers for vehicles equipped
with VDC are listed below.
ABS/VDC CONTROL UNIT PART NUMBERS
6. When VDC Reprogramming is complete:
Page 1146
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 5916
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 4816
Page 5404
Optional Splice
Page 10157
Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 3 - 4)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR
SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B2581 or B2582
is displayed.
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Intake Sensor
After disconnecting intake sensor connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at
sensor harness side, using the table.
Page 3345
Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent).
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for
connecting the fuel pressure gauge.
2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test".
^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure.
^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble
Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test.
^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test.
> If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and
repair information.
> If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3.
3. Replace the fuel pump.
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the
appropriate Service Manual.
^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information.
^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal.
4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed.
Page 9692
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 5277
Case 11
Page 6740
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 2140
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 13262
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Specifications
Page 10255
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 2587
2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and
forth) movement (see Example 2):
^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm.
^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended.
Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped)
No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible.
Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the rotor.
NOTE:
The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is
removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected.
1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel.
2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front.
^ Pulley should be locked.
^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator.
3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front.
Page 721
Locations
Memory Positioning Module: Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 9984
Figure C-22
b. Install 3 screws at the front of the fender protector.
- Driver side only.
Figure C-23, Figure C-24
c. Install and Torque 2 bolts at each of the 3 bumper brackets as shown (see Figures C-23 and
C-24).
Page 8780
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 4240
Optional Splice
Page 6603
13. Connect revolution sensor connector.
14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips.
15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal
CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level.
Page 13385
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 10979
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8461
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 5068
Case 8
Page 3811
Page 13902
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 1951
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 8187
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS
Wheel Sensors
WHEEL SENSORS
REMOVAL
1. Remove wheel sensor bolt.
^ When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front
wheel sensor bolt.
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
^ Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten wheel sensor bolt to specification.
CAUTION: Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following: ^
Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged.
^ Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
Sensor Rotor
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation FRONT
The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace
wheel hub and bearing assembly.
REAR Removal
1. Remove axle shaft assembly.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor.
2. Pull the sensor rotor off the axle shaft using Tool and a press.
Tool number: ST30031000 ( - )
Installation
1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure
sensor rotor is fully seated.
Page 8127
* Headlights, defroster, A/C, audio (radio), video, cellular telephone, etc.
4. Press [START (Nissan BASED VHCL)].
5. In "SELF-DIAG RESULTS", check and erase any DTC(s) in the below noted vehicle systems:
IMPORTANT:
You MUST press "ERASE" and "OK" in all systems (shown below) whether a DTC is displayed or
not. This is required to complete the VDC reprogramming procedure, and it will make sure that all
DTC(s) are erased.
^ ENGINE
^ A/T
^ ABS
^ AIR BAG
^ ALL MODE AWD/4WD (if applicable)
^ DIFF LOCK (if applicable; 4WD Titan)
^ AIR LEVELIZER (if applicable)
6. After all DTC(s) are erased:
^ Turn the ignition switch OFF.
^ Disconnect CONSULT-II and the CAN Cable from the vehicle connector.
^ Disconnect the battery charger from the vehicle.
^ Start the engine and make sure it runs properly and there are NO warning lights illuminated in the
instrument panel.
7. Continue with Part 4.
Part 4
Part 4: Re-program the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card back to its original format so it can be
used for standard ECU reprogramming.
1. Remove the red/white diagnostic card from CONSULT-II and insert the 8 MB orange
Reprogramming card.
2. Go to the ASIST terminal.
3. Follow steps in Part 1 of this bulletin to download (transfer) data from ASIST to CONSULT-II.
^ Use ID Code 050602.
^ This will re-program the 8 MB (orange) card to its original format so it can be used for standard
ECU reprogramming.
END
Page 9982
Figure C-17, Figure C-18
b. Install and Torque 4 bumper bolts (see Figure C-17).
Torque: 14.2 N.m (1.45 kg-m, 10 ft-lb)
Figure C-19
c. Install and Torque the bumper bolt shown in Figure C-19.
Page 6770
Page 1663
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 9177
Alignment: By Symptom
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
Page 14436
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 4167
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 4194
Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check
Page 4518
Normal status When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms.
Sleep status
- When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters
low-current-consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 60 ms intervals, and
receives lighting switch input only.
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L,
CAN-H) connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives
data, but selectively reads required data only.
BCM STATUS CONTROL
BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to reduce power consumption.
1. CAN communication status
- With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally.
- Control by BCM is being operated properly.
- When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible.
- Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter
is active, CAN communication status is active.
2. Sleep transient status
- This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF.
- It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter.
- Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to
inactive status.
3. CAN communication inactive status
- With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active.
- With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active.
- Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches
to inactive status.
4. Sleep status
- BCM is activated with low current consumption mode.
- CAN communication is not active.
- When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status.
Page 5555
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389)
Repair Overview
PARTS INFORMATION
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 4785
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 2814
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 898
Air Bag Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Locations
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 2232
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 5606
Page 3859
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 3841
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 12402
Optional Splice
Page 6924
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 6170
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Systems Controlled By BCM Directly
Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM Directly
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY
- Power door lock system.
- Remote keyless entry system.
- Power window system.
- Sunroof system.
- Room lamp timer.
- Warning chime system.
- Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system.
- Trailer turn signal and hazard warning lamps system (if equipped). Refer to "TRAILER TOW".
NOTE: Power supply only. No system control.
Page 4097
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully closed position of the
throttle valve by monitoring the throttle position sensor output signal. It must be performed each
time harness connector of electric throttle control actuator or ECM is disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON. 3. Turn ignition
switch OFF wait at least 10 seconds.
Make sure that throttle valve moves during above 10 seconds by confirming the operating sound.
Page 11313
Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams
Trailor Tow Schematic
LT-T/TOW
Page 13672
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 14250
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 6783
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 5030
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1
Specifications
Camshaft Bearing: Specifications
Camshaft Bearing Cap
Tighten the camshaft bracket bolts as follows: Camshaft bracket bolts Step 1 (bolts 9 - 12)
.........................................................................................................................................................
2.0 Nm (0.2 kg-m, 17 inch lbs.) Step 2 (bolts 1 - 8)
...........................................................................................................................................................
2.0 Nm (0.2 kg-m, 17 inch lbs.) Step 3 (all bolts)
..............................................................................................................................................................
5.9 Nm (0.6 kg-m, 52 inch lbs.) Step 4 (all bolts)
............................................................................................................................................................
10.4 Nm (1.1 kg-m, 92 inch lbs.)
CAUTION: After tightening the camshaft bracket bolts, be sure to wipe off excessive liquid gasket
from the parts listed below. Mating surface of rocker cover Mating surface of front cover
Page 6656
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 4613
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Connector Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 10812
Page 5427
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 2018
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 12165
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 6556
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 4879
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 8756
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 4002
a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section
EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits).
NOTE:
This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different.
b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify
the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check.
C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the
terminal eyelet(s).
d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the
connections.
^ Both sides of the eyelet
^ Eyelet mounting surface
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Nut/bolt threads.
Locations
Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 5100
Check Sheet Part 1
Page 9667
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the center console lower cover LH. 2. Disconnect the mode door motor electrical
connector. 3. Remove the two screws and remove the mode door motor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Air Mix Door Motor
AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR
Diagram Information and Instructions
Wiper Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 2033
Oxygen Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Specifications
Brake Pedal Assy: Specifications
Brake Pedal Specifications
Page 1723
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 12372
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 1113
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8534
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 4263
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 8676
c. Remove the seat from the vehicle and place it in a clean area.
6. If equipped; remove sub woofer or navigation control unit.
Sub Woofer-under driver's seat
a. Disconnect the electrical connector
b. Remove the 3 mounting bolts.
c. Remove the sub-woofer from the vehicle.
Navigation Control Unit-under passenger seat
a. Remove the control unit cover; 2 bolts.
Page 11928
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 8545
Power Distribution Module: Electrical Diagrams
Additional/Related Diagrams
For information regarding additional/related diagrams for this component, please refer to Power
and Ground Distribution Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Power Distribution/Wiring
Diagram Index
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) Schematic
Page 13268
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 11144
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 6897
Control Module: Service and Repair
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
COMPONENTS
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect
A/T assembly harness connector.
Page 13549
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 3583
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 8728
c. Remove the 2 connector support bolts.
d. Slide the connector support UP to remove it.
16. If equipped with side curtain air bags:
^ If you are replacing the passenger side harness; steps for disconnecting the side curtain air bag
will be covered later in this procedure.
^ If you are replacing the driver side harness, disconnect the side curtain air bag as follows.
a. Remove the 3 mounting nuts for the parking brake pedal assembly and move the assembly out
of the way.
b. From the floor, look up towards the front pillar and locate the side curtain air bag connector.
c. Disconnect the side curtain air bag.
Page 4726
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 6951
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 14429
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 8411
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 3644
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
^ Check for leaks of engine coolant.
^ Start and warm up engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant.
Page 4862
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 8815
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 1806
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 1450
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 10077
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 5500
Page 9986
RECOMMENDATION: If this is your first time performing this Service Procedure, it is
recommended that you view the video clip on ASIST before starting. To view the video clip, open
the bulletin on ASIST and select "Video" at the bottom of the screen. To view the video full screen,
right click the center of the video screen and select "Full Screen".
Figure D-1
1. Remove the fan motor from the shroud as follows:
a. Disconnect the harness connector from the shroud.
b. Disconnect the harness from the shroud clip.
c. Remove the fan motor bolts x 3.
- Discard the bolts; they will not be reused.
d. Carefully separate the motor from the shroud:
Don't damage the fan harness.
Figure D-2
2. Thoroughly clean all dirt and debris from the top and sides of the fan motor and the fan motor
harness.
- Use a locally approved brake cleaner and a clean rag.
- The areas indicated must be completely clean to insure proper adhesion of the self adhesive
protectors.
Page 4130
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 737
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 6923
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 11202
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 10496
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 11042
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 4082
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 8 - 11)
Page 14011
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 10387
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 13162
Page 12593
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 13819
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 1740
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 1423
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 8624
- When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status.
2. Sleep waiting status
- Process to stop CAN communication is activated.
- All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN
communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status.
3. Sleep status
- IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode.
- CAN communication is stopped.
- When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
- When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
CAN Communication System Description
Refer to LAN-25, Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus
Page 10662
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 2748
Engine Oil: Vehicle Damage Warnings
SAE Viscosity Number GASOLINE ENGINE OIL
^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all temperatures. SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40 viscosity oils
may be used if the ambient temperature is above -18°C (0°F).
^ Use of 5W-30 viscosity oil will increase fuel economy.
Page 1755
Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check
Page 11100
Pedal Positioning Motor: Testing and Inspection
Pedal Adjusting Motor Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 4978
Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded
Rear Door Panel: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded
Classification: BT10-024
Reference: NTB10-095
Date: August 13, 2010
2004-2010 TITAN; DOOR TRIM PANEL DISCOLORED/FADED
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The pull handle trim panel on a front or rear door is discolored/faded. See Figures 1 and 2.
ACTION
Clean the discolored/faded trim panel as instructed in the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
This condition is not "dirt" on the trim panel surface. This condition exists within the panel itself.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 11881
Power Mirror Switch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Check (Step 1)
Page 2226
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 296
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 11014
AV-DVD-01
Page 12707
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 1383
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 8771
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Fuel Pressure: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open
Acceleration
Classification: FE07-004
Reference: NTB07-040
Date: June 6, 2007
2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007
Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223
APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007
IF YOU CONFIRM
When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced,
ACTIONS
1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure).
2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump.
NOTE:
Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 7824
NOTE:
This process will take from 4 to 5 minutes.
CAUTION:
You must leave the vehicle and the CONSULT-II unit "undisturbed" (don't touch) until
reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If the CONSULT-II screen gives you an error message "Unmatch of Vehicle Data":
^ You tried to reprogram with incorrect reprogramming data, or
^ You are trying to reprogram with the same file that is already in the ABS/VDC control unit.
For your reference, the old and new ABS/VDC Control Unit part numbers for vehicles equipped
with VDC are listed below.
ABS/VDC CONTROL UNIT PART NUMBERS
6. When VDC Reprogramming is complete:
Page 1546
Diagnostic Procedure For In-Vehicle Sensor (Steps 5 - 8)
Page 4325
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 12061
Power Seat Motor: Testing and Inspection Lifting Motor (Front) Circuit Inspection
Lifting Motor (Front) Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Page 9970
Figure B-7
- The beam should be aimed between / through the slots in the fan shroud.
9. Measure the fan motor speed (RPM) and the fan motor voltage as follows:
a. Turn the Fan Motor Tester ON.
NOTE:
In the ON position, the LED light on the switch will illuminate yellow.
b. Press and hold the TEST button on the Phototach Digital Tachometer.
WARNING:
Do not shine or point the red light beam from the Phototach Digital Tachometer into anyone's eyes
(including your own).
b. Hold the digital tachometer about 4 inches away from the condenser fan.
c. Aim the red beam at the painted area on the fan blade.
Figure B-8
Page 863
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 14204
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 14256
Page 2354
Optional Splice
Page 72
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 4831
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 14442
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 1661
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Locations
Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 480
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 10155
Intake Sensor
After disconnecting intake sensor connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at
sensor harness side, using the table. If NG, replace intake sensor.
Page 368
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 10527
Page 11810
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 683
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 7602
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded
Rear Door Panel: By Symptom Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded
Classification: BT10-024
Reference: NTB10-095
Date: August 13, 2010
2004-2010 TITAN; DOOR TRIM PANEL DISCOLORED/FADED
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The pull handle trim panel on a front or rear door is discolored/faded. See Figures 1 and 2.
ACTION
Clean the discolored/faded trim panel as instructed in the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
This condition is not "dirt" on the trim panel surface. This condition exists within the panel itself.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 4003
^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap).
e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet.
4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under
the dash):
a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly
(cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3).
b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads.
C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners.
5. Clean the negative battery cable connections.
a. Write down all the radio presets.
b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection.
c. Clean the following items:
^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides)
^ Body connection bolt (head and threads)
^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap)
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Battery negative post
^ Negative cable battery terminal
d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery).
e. Reprogram the radio presets.
6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs.
Page 13041
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 10291
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor electrical connector. 2. Disconnect the refrigerant
pressure sensor electrical connector and remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the
condenser.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
- Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil
to it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 9458
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Locations
Page 1191
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 12490
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 7070
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
Page 11196
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 389
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 844
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not
be carried out successfully. In this case, find
the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that
downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK,
engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the
cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all
over again: Engine stalls.
- Erroneous idle.
Page 5208
Case 14
Case 15
Page 11151
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 9279
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation
PSP SENSOR
Component Description
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and
detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering
load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric
throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed
and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
Page 6888
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab)
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab)
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 3452
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 10750
^ Latch and unlatch it. Allow it to retract back into the retractor mechanism several times.
14. Repeat steps 1 through 13 on the remaining front seat belt.
Page 11314
LT-T/TOW-01
Page 11599
FITTING INSPECTION
- Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator bolt, guide rail bolts, and glass and carrier plate bolts to correct the glass position.
Rear Door Glass Regulator Assembly
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - CREW CAB".
2. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be
seen. 3. Remove the inside seal. 4. Remove the glass bolts, raise the glass and hold in place with
suitable tool.
5. Remove the bolts and the regulator and guide channel from the panel. 6. Disconnect the
connector for the regulator assembly.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or
grease it.
- Gear wear
- Regulator deformation
- Spring damage
- Grease condition for each sliding part
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Window Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 3464
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 14426
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 12503
SEAT BELT WARNING CHIME
When the ignition switch is turned ON with the seat belt unfastened (seat belt buckle switch LH
unfastened), warning chime will sound for approximately 6 seconds.
Ground is supplied
- to combination meter terminal 27
- through seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 1.
Seat belt buckle switch LH terminal 2 is grounded through body grounds B7 and B19.
The combination meter sends seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened signal to BCM via CAN
communication line.
BCM receives seat belt buckle switch LH unfastened signal from combination meter via CAN
communication line, and sends seat belt warning signal to the combination meter via CAN
communication line. When the combination meter receives the seat belt warning signal, it sounds
the warning chime. The BCM controls the (6 second) duration of the seat belt warning chime.
CAN Communication System Description
Refer to LAN-25, Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus
Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a
bulb check. If the MIL does not light up, refer to
"WARNING LAMPS", or see "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR".
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic
system has detected an engine system
malfunction.
Page 8634
All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu
Page 4141
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 14246
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8416
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 12745
Page 1589
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 12034
NOTE:
- Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpeting, etc. when performing this Procedure.
- The illustrations in this bulletin are for the left side (driver side) seat. The right side (passenger
side) seat is a "mirror image" of these illustrations.
If needed; use steps 1 and 2 to confirm you have voltage (power) to the seat slide motor.
1. Using the power seat switch, tilt the front edge of the seat bottom all the way UP.
2. Check/measure voltage to the seat slide motor. Use a voltmeter and "Back-probe" into the
connector, harness side, between the following color
wires:
NOTES:
For wire color codes and connector layouts for the vehicle you are working on refer to the Wiring
Diagram in chapter SE, section POWER SEAT or AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER as
applicable in the appropriate Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
If needed, refer to "How to Back Probe Connectors" is the Nissan and Infiniti Connector and
Terminal Service Manual. This manual is in ASIST under Tools & Equipment.
Figure 2
Figure 2 shows an example of the driver s side seat slide motor connector location. The vehicle
you are working on may be different.
- This voltage check can be done with the seat slide motor connected.
- If the voltage is about 12 V when the seat slide switch is pressed to the "forward" and "backward"
positions, voltage (power) is getting to the seat slide motor.
- If voltage is 0 V, this bulletin doesn't apply. Check your power and ground circuits to the seat slide
motor.
Remove Old Seat Slide Parts
3. Record the radio station pre-sets for later reprogramming after the procedure.
4. If the power seat won't move, lightly tap the seat slide motor (see Figure 2).
- Sometimes this will get the motor working again temporarily so the seat can be moved to access
the seat mounting bolts.
- Don't remove the seat yet.
5. Follow steps 6 through 9 to remove the seat from the vehicle.
- If needed, refer to section SE in the Service Manual (ESM) for seat removal information.
6. Turn the ignition key "OFF".
7. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first, and wait three (3) minutes.
- This will allow the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) to deactivate. This includes the front
seat side air bags.
8. Tilt the entire seat assembly back and disconnect the harness-to-seat connectors.
9. Remove the seat assembly from vehicle and place it on a clean dry surface.
Page 3578
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 5608
Attachment General Procedure
Page 3758
ITEMS OF EACH PART
Display Item List - Work Support
With Generic Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Without Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Power Door Lock System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4368
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KS
Component Description
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric
element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This
pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
Page 9428
8. Strike the bearing ring retainer using a suitable chisel and hammer, with the chisel positioned
across the drilled hole. Break the bearing ring
retainer to remove it.
CAUTION: Do not heat or cut the axle shaft bearing or bearing ring retainer with a torch during
removal, doing so will damage the axle shaft.
9. Remove the axle shaft bearing cage studs using a suitable hammer or press.
10. Pull the axle shaft bearing off of the axle shaft using Tool and a suitable press.
Tool number: ST30031000
CAUTION: ^
Do not tighten the Tool against the axle shaft.
^ Do not heat or cut the axle shaft bearing or bearing ring retainer with a torch during removal,
doing so will damage the axle shaft.
11. Remove the axle oil seal and discard.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
12. Remove the wheel bearing cage.
NOTE: ^
If reinstalling the old axle shaft, it may not be necessary to remove the ABS sensor rotor. Inspect
the ABS sensor rotor and replace as necessary.
^ The ABS sensor rotor cannot be reused after it is removed. If replacing the axle shaft, install a
new ABS sensor rotor on the new axle shaft.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Axle Shaft ^
Clean and remove all nicks and burrs.
^ Check for straightness and distortion. Replace if necessary.
^ Inspect machined surfaces for evidence of overheating, damage and wear. Replace if necessary.
^ Measure the bearing ring retainer axle journal diameter. Replace if necessary Bearing ring
retainer axle journal diameter (minimum): 39.726 mm (1.5640 inch)
Axle Shaft Bearing and Cup ^
Check that the axle shaft bearing and cup roll freely and are free from noise, cracks, pitting and
wear. Replace if necessary.
Axle Shaft Bearing Cage ^
Check for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary.
Axle Shaft Housing ^
Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces for deformation and cracks. Replace if necessary
INSTALLATION
1. If installing a new axle shaft, install a new ABS sensor rotor onto the new axle shaft.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old ABS sensor rotor.
2. Install the axle shaft bearing cage. 3. Install a new axle oil seal.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Service and Repair
Map Light Bulb: Service and Repair
MAP LAMP
Bulb Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal.
Page 10492
Page 12657
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 2721
Differential (Without Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Refer to "Removal and
Installation" (RFD with ELD). See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and
Repair/Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation
FILLING
1. Remove the filler plug. Fill with new specified gear oil until the gear oil level reaches the
specified limit near the filler plug mounting hole as
shown. Oil grade and capacity: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". See:
2. After refilling the gear oil, check the gear oil level as shown. Apply sealant to the filler plug. Install
the filler plug on the final drive assembly and
tighten to specification. ^
Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS" (FFD). Refer to
"Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD). See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Differential
Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking)/Removal and
Installation Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD with ELD). See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Differential Assembly/Service and Repair/Rear Differential (With Electronic
Locking)/Removal and Installation
Page 5716
ECM Inspection Table Part 1
Page 13744
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 6173
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 6668
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 6260
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 10341
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 8944
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7615
Adjustable Accelerator Pedal Assembly
Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair Adjustable Accelerator Pedal Assembly
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal adjusting mechanism.
- Before removal and installation, the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the frontmost
position. This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals.
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Removal
1. Move the accelerator and brake pedals to the frontmost position. 2. Turn the ignition switch OFF
and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 3. Disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from
the adjustable brake pedal.
- Unlock, then pull the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable brake
pedal.
Page 11254
Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch)
Check (Crew Cab)
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 12134
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Automatic Air Conditioner
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor electrical connector and remove the refrigerant
pressure sensor from the condenser.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
- Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil
to it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 12587
Cruise Control Indicator Lamp: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 5290
Case 7
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Inspection For Power Supply And Ground Circuit
Page 1664
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Sunroof
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Page 4685
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 10478
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 11823
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 2397
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check (Crew Cab)
Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Crew
Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 617
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 9071
g. Remove the 10 side curtain air bag mounting bolts.
h. Remove the side curtain air bag module and disconnect the electrical connector.
66. Harness should now be completely loose-remove it from the vehicle.
67. Install the new harness in reverse order. Make sure of the following:
^ All harness mounting clips are installed in the correct locations.
^ Seat, seat belt, and air bag bolts are tightened to correct torque:
IMPORTANT:
Page 9611
The driver and front passenger air mix door motors are attached to the front heater & cooling unit
assembly. The rear air mix door motor is attached to the rear heater & cooling unit assembly. These
motors rotate so that the air mix door is opened or closed to a position set by the front (or rear) air
control. Motor rotation is then conveyed through a shaft and the air mix door position is then fed
back to the front air control by the PBR built into the air mix door motors.
Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Driver) (Step 1)
Recall PB081/PB077 - A/C Condenser Fan Modification
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-068B Date: 080909
Recall PB081/PB077 - A/C Condenser Fan Modification
Reference: NTB08-068b
Date: September 9, 2008
VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004 - 2006 NISSAN TITAN AND ARMADA AIR
CONDITIONER CONDENSER FAN
This bulletin has been amended. The Claims Information has changed. Please discard previous
versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID # : PB081 - for Applied Vehicles built before March 17, 2005 PB077 - for Applied
Vehicles built on or after March 17, 2005
NHTSA # : 08V-284
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60)
2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60)
Refer to Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility and correct campaign ID #.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a Voluntary Recall Campaign on certain Model Year 2004, 2005, and 2006
Nissan Titan and Armada vehicles:
- All vehicles manufactured from March 17, 2005 to August 21, 2006 are subject to this campaign.
- Model Year 2004 vehicles and Model Year 2005 vehicles manufactured before March 17, 2005
are included only if the air conditioning condenser fan was replaced after the vehicle was originally
purchased using one of the affected replacement parts.
The air conditioning condenser fan motor in the subject vehicles was manufactured out of
specification allowing for excessive water intrusion and inadequate drainage of moisture. If enough
moisture accumulates in the motor, corrosion may occur, leading to increased temperature in the
motor. Because of the motor's unique structure, this increased temperature could melt its wiring
insulation and other plastic components and ultimately result in a fire. To correct the issue, Nissan
will inspect, and as needed, install a thermal protector kit on the air conditioning condenser fan at
no charge for parts or labor.
Also, to ensure continued customer satisfaction with the air conditioning system in these vehicles,
the condenser fan motor will be tested for excessive friction. If necessary, the motor will be
replaced with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. (If a new motor is installed, the protector kit
is not needed.)
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification numbers PB077 and PB081 to this campaign. PB077 or PB081
must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
- PB081 is for 2004 and 2005 vehicles built before March 17, 2005.
- PB077 is for 2005 and 2006 vehicles built on or after March 17, 2005.
- Refer to Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility and correct campaign ID #.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 5447
3. BCM - Operation table of combination switch
- BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the table.
NOTE: Headlamp has a dual system switch.
4. Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON)
- When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this
time if OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5.
- When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges
lighting switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN
communication.
- When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and
recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON.
NOTE: Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10 ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch
is turned ON, electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it
cannot be noticed.
5. Operation mode
- Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows:
Page 13679
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 9199
4. Measure the distance "A" on the rear side of the front tires as shown. 5. Push the vehicle slowly
ahead to rotate the wheels 180° degrees (1/2 a turn).
CAUTION: If the wheels have rotated more than 180° (1/2 turn), start this procedure again from the
beginning. Never push the vehicle backward.
6. Measure the distance "B" on the front side of the front tires at the same marks as shown. Total
toe-in is calculated as "A" - "B".
Total toe-in: Refer to "Wheel Alignment, (Unladen*1)". See: Specifications/Front Suspension
7. Adjust the toe-in by varying the length of the steering outer socket.
a. Loosen the outer tie-rod lock nuts. b. Adjust the toe-in by screwing the outer tie-rods in or out.
Standard length "L": Refer to "Steering Outer Socket and Inner Socket". See:
Steering/Specifications/Steering Outer Socket and Inner Socket
c. Tighten the outer tie-rod lock nuts to specification.
Lock nut: Refer to "Disassembly and Assembly". See: Steering/Steering Gear/Service and
Repair/Disassembly and Assembly
Front Wheel Turning Angle
FRONT WHEEL TURNING ANGLE
NOTE: Check front wheel turning angle after the toe-in inspection.
1. Place front wheels on turning radius gauges in straight ahead position and rear wheels on
stands so that vehicle can be level.. Check the maximum
inner and outer wheel turning angles for LH and RH road wheels.
2. Start engine and run at idle, turn steering wheel all the way right and left, measure the turning
angle.
Wheel turning angle (full turn): Refer to "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*1)". See: Specifications/Front
Suspension Any turning angles are not adjustable. If any of steering angles are out of the specification, check if
the following parts are worn or damaged. Steering gear
- Steering column
- Front suspension components If found that they are worn or damaged, replace them with new
ones.
Page 7934
materials.
CAUTION: While removing cylinder body never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
- It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or
replacement of cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake
hose.
- Do not damage piston boot.
- Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft
pedal occurs at very low mileage.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove sliding pin bolt, and then remove the pad, shim, shim cover, and pad retainer from the
torque member. 2. Remove sliding pins and sliding pin boots from torque member.
3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove pistons
and piston boots.
CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston.
4. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove piston seal from cylinder body.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall.
CALIPER INSPECTION Cylinder Body
CAUTION: Use new brake fluid for cleaning. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene.
- Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust, wear, damage or foreign materials. If any of the
above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body.
- Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine
emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary.
Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace
the affected part.
Piston Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any
of the above conditions are observed.
CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust of foreign
materials are stuck to sliding surface.
Sliding Pins, and Sliding Pin Boots Check sliding pin and sliding pin boot for wear, damage, and
cracks. If damage or deformation is present, replace the affected part.
CAUTION: Trailing/upper sliding pin must be replaced at each service.
ASSEMBLY
Page 7438
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 6863
Page 11005
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 4494
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 9875
Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch (Steps 18 -20)
Page 5688
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 4331
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 2031
9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads.
^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12.
Page 828
Engine Control Module: Pinout Values and Diagnostic Parameters
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
ECM Terminals and Reference Value
PREPARATION
1. ECM is located in the engine room passenger side behind battery. 2. Remove ECM harness
connector.
3. When disconnecting ECM harness connector, loosen it with levers as far as they will go as
shown in the figure. 4. Connect a break-out box (SST) and Y-cable adapter (SST) between the
ECM and ECM harness connector.
- Use extreme care not to touch 2 pins at one time.
- Data is for comparison and may not be exact.
Page 8970
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 113
Optional Splice
Page 13647
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 3222
EM-4
Page 11442
NOTE:
The above illustration is only an example of a body seam seal leak. Your vehicle may have a leak
in a different location, and it may have more than one leak.
3. Seal water leak (body seam) with seam sealer:
^ Use 3M(TM) Fast n Firm(TM) Seam Sealer-part number 08505-or equivalent.
^ Follow product application instructions.
4. Allow sealer to cure and then recheck for leaks.
^ Make sure the leak you fixed is sealed (not leaking).
^ Make sure there are no other leaks; it's possible to have more than one leak.
Disclaimer
Diagram Information and Instructions
Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb
Page 3264
^ Perform the following steps to disconnect the quick connector using Tool. Tool number: 16441
6N210 (J-45488)
a. Remove quick connector cap (engine side only).
b. With the sleeve side of Tool facing quick connector, install Tool onto fuel tube. c. Insert Tool into
quick connector until sleeve contacts and goes no further. Hold the Tool in that position.
CAUTION: Inserting the Tool hard will not disconnect quick connector. Hold Tool where it contacts
and goes no further.
d. Draw and pull out quick connector straight from fuel tube.
CAUTION: ^
Pull quick connector holding "A" position in illustration.
^ Do not pull with lateral force applied. O-ring inside quick connector may be damaged.
^ Prepare container and cloth beforehand as fuel will leak out.
^ Avoid fire and sparks.
^ Be sure to cover openings of disconnected pipes with plug or plastic bag to avoid fuel leakage
and entry of foreign materials.
6. Remove or disconnect harnesses, brackets, vacuum hose, vacuum gallery and PCV hose and
tube from intake manifold. 7. Remove electric throttle control actuator by loosening bolts diagonally.
CAUTION: ^
Handle carefully to avoid any damage to the electric throttle control actuator.
^ Do not disassemble.
8. Remove the fuel injectors and fuel tube assembly.
9. Loosen the bolts in reverse order shown using power tool.
10. Remove the intake manifold.
CAUTION: Cover engine openings to avoid entry of foreign materials.
Page 8290
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 12690
Page 11704
Remote Keyless Entry Receiver System Check (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 12142
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 5597
Page 10855
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 8686
22. Remove the carpet clips shown in the figure below.
23. Pull the seat branch through the carpet.
24. Lift the floor carpet, remove the ground bolt and take the SRS branch loose from the floor.
Page 13401
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 7864
Page 14360
1. Remove Washer Tank Assembly.
^ Refer to "Removal and Installation of Washer Tank" in the "WW" chapter of the ESM.
2. Remove washer motor and washer pump seal.
^ Photo of washer motor and washer pump seal.
3. Replace washer pump seal.
NOTE:
Lubricate the pump seal with washer fluid to ease installation.
4. Install washer motor onto the washer tank.
5. Reinstall the washer tank in reverse order of removal.
Disclaimer
Page 7727
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 2322
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
NOTE: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "Components". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
Page 1365
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
Wheel Sensors
WHEEL SENSORS
REMOVAL
1. Remove wheel sensor bolt.
^ When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front
wheel sensor bolt.
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
^ Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten wheel sensor bolt to specification.
CAUTION: Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following: ^
Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged.
^ Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
Sensor Rotor
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation FRONT
The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace
wheel hub and bearing assembly.
REAR Removal
1. Remove axle shaft assembly.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor.
2. Pull the sensor rotor off the axle shaft using Tool and a press.
Tool number: ST30031000 ( - )
Installation
1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure
sensor rotor is fully seated.
Page 8209
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 14485
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 11911
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay
Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement
Reference: NTB10-137B
Date: December 22, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006
FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY
This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have
been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068
NHTSA#: 10V-517
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40)
2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM
relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles,
oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including
the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 9196
Alignment: Service and Repair
General Information and Recommendations
GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS
1. A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should be performed.
- This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN vehicle.
- The four-wheel "thrust" process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering
wheel is centered.
- The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN vehicle.
- The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level.
2. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated.
- Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information.
- Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended
Service/Calibration Schedule.
The Alignment Process
THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS
IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed.
1. When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use "indicators": (Green/red,
plus or minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use these
indicators. The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these
indicators may not be correct.
- This may result in an ERROR.
2. Some newer alignment machines are equipped with an optional "Rolling Compensation" method
to "compensate" the sensors (alignment targets or
head units). Do NOT use this "Rolling Compensation" method. Use the "Jacking Compensation" method. After installing the alignment targets or head units, raise
the vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways.
- See Instructions in the alignment machine you are using for more information.
Preliminary Inspection
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
WARNING: Always adjust the alignment with the vehicle on a flat surface.
NOTE: If alignment is out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn suspension
parts before making any adjustments.
1. Check and adjust the wheel alignment with the vehicle under unladen conditions. "Unladen
conditions" means that the fuel, coolant, and lubricant
are full; and that the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in their designated positions.
2. Check the tires for incorrect air pressure and excessive wear. 3. Check the wheels for run out
and damage. 4. Check the wheel bearing axial end play. 5. Check the shock absorbers for leaks or
damage. 6. Check each mounting point of the suspension components for any excessive
looseness or damage. 7. Check each link, arm, and the rear suspension member for any damage.
8. Check the vehicle height.
- Verify the level using Consult-II memory register 1103 and set to 0 ° 10 mm (0 ° 0.39 inch) as
necessary.
Camber and Caster
CAMBER AND CASTER
Page 4143
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 6349
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MAF SENSOR
Component Description
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by
measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows
around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to the hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of
the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
Page 10609
8. While pressing tabs, pull lighting and turn signal switch toward driver door and disconnect from
base.
9. Remove the screws, release the clip, and remove the spiral cable.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble spiral cable.
- Do not apply lubricant to the spiral cable.
10. Remove the spiral cable connectors.
CAUTION: With the steering linkage disconnected, the spiral cable may snap by turning the
steering wheel beyond the limited number of turns. The spiral cable can be turned
counterclockwise about 2.5 turns from the neutral position.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Align spiral cable correctly when installing steering wheel. Make sure that the spiral cable is in the
neutral position. The neutral position is detected by turning left 2.5 revolutions from the right end
position and ending with the knob at the top.
- If equipped with VDC, refer to BRC-146, "Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position"
for steering angle sensor adjustment. See: Brakes and Traction Control/Antilock Brakes / Traction
Control Systems/Steering Angle Sensor/Adjustments
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to make sure no malfunction is detected.
Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics
Locations
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 3532
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 386
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 12263
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10829
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 9654
Inspection Flow
INSPECTION FLOW
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Defroster door control system components are:
- Front air control
- Defroster door motor
- PBR (built into defroster door motor)
System Operation
The front air control determines defroster door position based on the position of the mode switch.
When the mode switch is in the defroster position, the defroster door motor rotates directing air to
the defroster ducts. When any mode other than defroster is selected, the defroster motor rotates in
the opposite direction closing off air flow to the defroster ducts.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Page 8516
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD)
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD)
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Description
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is
turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Page 1731
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Headlamp Bulb: Technical Service Bulletins Lighting - Xenon Headlamp Service Info.
Classification: EL10-021A
Reference: NTB10-061A
Date: June 29, 2010
XENON HEAD LAMP SERVICE
This bulletin has been amended. The Parts Information has been updated. Please discard previous
versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2010 Nissan with xenon headlamps
IF YOU CONFIRM
A xenon headlamp is not functioning because of an issue inside the headlamp assembly (an
internal issue),
ACTION
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, follow the diagnostic and repair information for xenon
headlamps.
NOTE: ^ In most cases, replacement of a bulb or HID control unit will solve the incident.
^ Do not replace the entire xenon headlamp assembly when a bulb or HID control unit is available
to solve the incident, if one should occur.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
^ Reference the current Nissan Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for the
repair performed.
^ For HID control unit replacement, use Operation Code RJ36AA.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 2822
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 5310
Case 10
Page 14274
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 6435
Ignition Coil: Service and Repair
IGNITION COIL
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from the
ignition coil. 3. Remove the ignition coil.
CAUTION: Do not shock ignition coil.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5604
Locations
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 3903
Page 9330
Power Door Lock System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12992
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 7011
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 10394
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 8992
Power Distribution Module: Electrical Diagrams
Additional/Related Diagrams
For information regarding additional/related diagrams for this component, please refer to Power
and Ground Distribution Diagrams. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Power Distribution/Wiring
Diagram Index
IPDM E/R (Intelligent Power Distribution Module Engine Room) Schematic
Page 8335
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 2687
Coolant: Service and Repair
Changing Engine Coolant
WARNING: ^
To avoid being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
^ Wrap a thick cloth around the cap to carefully remove the cap. First, turn the cap a quarter of a
turn to release any built-up pressure, then push down and turn the cap all the way to remove it.
DRAINING ENGINE COOLANT
1. Turn ignition switch ON and set temperature control lever all the way to HOT position or the
highest temperature position. Wait 10 seconds and
turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool.
3. Open the radiator drain plug at the bottom of the radiator, and remove the radiator filler cap. This
is the only step required when partially draining
the cooling system (radiator only).
CAUTION: Do not to allow the coolant to contact the drive belts.
4. When draining all of the coolant in the system for engine removal or repair, it is necessary to
drain the cylinder block. Remove the RH cylinder
block drain plug to drain the right bank and the oil cooler hose to drain the left bank as shown.
5. Remove the reservoir tank to drain the engine coolant, then clean the reservoir tank before
installing it. 6. Check the drained coolant for contaminants such as rust, corrosion or discoloration.
If the coolant is contaminated, flush the engine cooling system.
REFILLING ENGINE COOLANT
1. Close the radiator drain plug. Install the reservoir tank, cylinder block drain plug, and the oil
cooler hose, if removed for a total system drain or for
engine removal or repair. ^
The radiator must be completely empty of coolant and water.
^ Apply sealant to the threads of the cylinder block drain plug. Use Genuine High Performance
Thread Sealant or equivalent. Radiator drain plug: Refer to CO-14, "RADIATOR". See: Engine,
Cooling and Exhaust/Cooling System/Radiator/Service and Repair RH cylinder block drain plug:
Refer to EM-78, "CYLINDER BLOCK". See: Engine, Cooling and Exhaust/Engine/Cylinder Block
Assembly/Service and Repair/Disassembly and Assembly
Page 1115
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 10017
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Engine - Drive Belt Squeaking Noise
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-058 Date: 080606
Engine - Drive Belt Squeaking Noise
Classification: EM-08-002
Reference: NTB08-058
Date: June 6, 2008
TITAN / ARMADA; DRIVE BELT SQUEAK NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2006-2008 Armada (TA60) 2006-2008 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is a squeak noise coming from the drive belt.
ACTION
A. Check to see if the drive belt auto tensioner is also noisy. If it is, you will replace it as part of this
Service Procedure.
B. Check the alignment of the power steering pump/pulley to the crankshaft pulley using a
straightedge. If it is mis-aligned, perform the steps in this Bulletin to align it.
C. Clean the crankshaft pulley belt ribs.
D. Replace the drive belt and, if necessary, replace the drive belt auto tensioner.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 935
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 10278
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 11292
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 14258
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 10147
ERROR: stackunderflow
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Page 5085
Check Sheet Part 1
Page 8764
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 13174
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 14383
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12729
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 7325
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 9552
Wheel Fastener: Specifications
Wheel Fastener
Rotate the tires on each side from front to back as shown. Do not include the spare tire when
rotating the tires. Wheel nut .................................................................................................................
.......................................................... 133 Nm (14 kg-m, 98 ft. lbs.)
Page 6424
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 14291
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 11921
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 5285
Case 2
Page 4289
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 11516
Navigation Module: Service and Repair
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
Removal
CAUTION: To avoid damage, eject map DVD-ROM before removing the NAVI control unit.
1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove front passenger seat.
3. Remove NAVI control unit kick shield screws (A). 4. Remove NAVI control unit kick shield (1). 5.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connectors. 6. Remove NAVI control unit screws (B). 7. Remove
NAVI control unit (2).
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 7395
2. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 3. Start engine. 4. Erase self-diagnosis. 5. Check 4WD shift indicator
lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again.
If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new
transfer control unit and retry the above check.
METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT "4H" OR "4LO" 1. Start engine.
Run the engine for at least 10 seconds. 2. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position
with brake pedal depressed. Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn 4WD shift switch to "2WD"
position. Stay in "2WD" for at least 2 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 5. Start engine. 6.
Erase self-diagnosis. 7. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again.
If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new
transfer control unit and retry the above check.
Page 10663
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Classification: WT04-004C
Reference: NTB04-054C
Date: April 6, 2011
WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION
This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION.
No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the
following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
General Information and Recommendations
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions
supplied with your alignment equipment.
^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions.
^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment.
General Information and Recommendations
1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed.
^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles.
^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure
proper "centering" of the steering wheel.
2. Use the right alignment machine.
^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing
alignment checks.
^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment
equipment.
^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be
checked to ensure that it is level.
3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated.
^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings.
^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should
be checked immediately.
^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended
service/calibration schedule.
NOTE:
In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached
to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
Specifications
Harmonic Balancer - Crankshaft Pulley: Specifications
Crankshaft Pulley
Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt. Lock the crankshaft using suitable tool, then tighten the bolt.
Perform the following steps for angular tightening:
Apply engine oil onto the threaded parts of the bolt and seating area.
Select the one most visible notch of the four on the bolt flange. Corresponding to the selected
notch, put a alignment mark (such as paint) on the crankshaft pulley. Crankshaft pulley bolt torque
Step 1 ..................................................................................................................................................
.............................. 93.1 Nm (9.5 kg-m, 69 ft. lbs.) Step 2 ...................................................................
........................................................................................................... additional 90° (angle
tightening) Rotate the crankshaft pulley in normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine
front) to check for parts interference.
Page 12489
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 6014
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output
voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases.
Page 4638
b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a).
c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed.
^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer.
d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2.
2. Record the radio station presets:
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
NOTE:
Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding.
Component Locations
Knock Sensor: Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Diagram Information and Instructions
Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 10768
SRS Components Parts Location
Page 11390
Normal status When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms.
Sleep status
- When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters
low-current-consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 60 ms intervals, and
receives lighting switch input only.
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L,
CAN-H) connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives
data, but selectively reads required data only.
BCM STATUS CONTROL
BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to reduce power consumption.
1. CAN communication status
- With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally.
- Control by BCM is being operated properly.
- When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible.
- Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter
is active, CAN communication status is active.
2. Sleep transient status
- This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF.
- It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter.
- Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to
inactive status.
3. CAN communication inactive status
- With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active.
- With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active.
- Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches
to inactive status.
4. Sleep status
- BCM is activated with low current consumption mode.
- CAN communication is not active.
- When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status.
Page 4961
7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle
Air Volume Learning will not be carried out
successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
- It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
- It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal
Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed
Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch
ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the
MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the
MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Page 1289
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Mirror Switch) Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 5102
Case 1
Page 10097
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 4012
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B)
Page 11369
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 11830
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 2506
Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent).
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for
connecting the fuel pressure gauge.
2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test".
^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure.
^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble
Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test.
^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test.
> If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and
repair information.
> If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3.
3. Replace the fuel pump.
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the
appropriate Service Manual.
^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information.
^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal.
4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed.
Page 12869
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Window System
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Page 5792
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 13588
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 720
Page 13686
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 2045
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 553
^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay.
9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay.
^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without
causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals.
10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6).
11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs.
Page 9916
- The beam should be aimed between / through the slots in the fan shroud.
d. Observe the RPM reading on the tachometer and the volt reading on the Fluke 73 meter.
IMPORTANT:
The RPM and voltage reading should be observed at the same time with the fan motor running.
10. Record / write down the RPM and Volt readings you observed in step 9d.
NOTE:
Pressing the MEM (memory) button on the Phototach Digital Tachometer will display the last RPM
measurement.
11. Switch the Fan Motor Tester to OFF.
12. Disconnect the testers from the vehicle.
13. Use the chart below to determine if the fan motor is OK or No Good.
Page 7711
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 5819
9. Use compressed air to remove any metal debris from inside the boss threads.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
10. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
11. Spray the boss threads with rust penetrant for 2 to 3 seconds.
12. Run a thread chaser through the boss to clean the threads.
^ Use Kent Moore part number J-43897-18 or J43897-12.
Page 65
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 2733
Components
Inspection
FLUID LEAKAGE AND FLUID LEVEL 1. Make sure that fluid is not leaking from the transfer
assembly or around it.
Page 4995
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 8288
Page 11399
4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
6. Touch "A60" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on
"VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See:
Application and ID
7. Touch "READ CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen.
Page 1660
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 10018
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 13024
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 1120
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 2387
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 2594
A. Set straight edge on front surface of crankshaft pulley to check the clearance at the top of the
pump pulley. See Figure 2.
B. Check clearance of lower part of the power steering pump pulley and crankshaft pulley. See
Figure 3.
NOTE:
The goal is to make sure the power steering pump pulley is aligned as true as possible with the
crankshaft pulley.
^ If the pulleys are aligned there is no need to adjust the bracket, skip ahead to step 17.
^ If the pulleys are not aligned, go on to step 12.
Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Fuel Pressure: By Symptom Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Classification: FE07-004
Reference: NTB07-040
Date: June 6, 2007
2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007
Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223
APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007
IF YOU CONFIRM
When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced,
ACTIONS
1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure).
2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump.
NOTE:
Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 456
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 10016
Optional Splice
Page 132
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 13248
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 13955
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 12960
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 10446
ERROR: stackunderflow
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Page 2040
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 9855
Diagnostic Procedure For In-Vehicle Sensor (Steps 5 - 8)
Page 7322
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 170
5. From the ASIST PC main menu screen, select CONSULT UTILITIES (see Figure 3).
Page 13598
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Front
Brake Hose/Line: Service and Repair Front
Removal and Installation of Front Brake Piping and Brake Hose REMOVAL
1. Drain brake fluid. 2. Using a flare nut wrench, remove brake tube from brake hose. 3. Remove
lock plate and brake hose from bracket. 4. Remove union bolt and then remove brake hose from
cylinder body.
INSTALLATION
1. Install brake hose by aligning with the protrusion on cylinder body, then install the union bolt and
new copper washers.
NOTE: Do not reuse copper washer.
2. Insert brake hose end through bracket, then secure it to bracket with lock plate. 3. Install brake
tube to brake hose, then tighten the flare nut using a flare nut wrench. 4. Refill brake fluid and
bleed air.
Page 3062
Image Symbols
Follow the steps below to tighten each main bearing cap bolt. Apply engine oil to threads and
seating surfaces of bolts, and tighten all bolts temporarily. Main bearing cap bolts in order of 1 to 10
....................................................................................................................... 39.2 Nm (4.0 kg-m, 29
ft. lbs.) Main bearing cap sub bolts in order of 11 to 20
............................................................................................................... 29.4 Nm (3.0 kg-m, 22 ft.
lbs.)
Measure tightening angle using Tool. Tool number: KV10112100 (BT-8653-A)
CAUTION: Measure tightening angle using Tool. Do not measure visually.
Page 640
Page 10984
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 11262
Pedal Positioning Switch: Testing and Inspection
Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 10868
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 3909
Page 4292
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of
the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is
disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2
seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and
wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 13486
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 8406
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 1931
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab)
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Crew Cab)
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 2164
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 8640
Page 387
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 3400
^ D: Intake
NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
^ No. 1 cylinder compression TDC
^ Measure valve clearance using suitable tool.
CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully
warmed up engine are still within specifications.
9. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 270° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC
to obtain No. 3 cylinder compression TDC.
10. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table (locations
indicated with white arrow).
^ <- : Engine front
^ <- (black): Measurable at No.1 cylinder compression top dead center
^ <- (white): Measurable at No. 3 cylinder compression top dead center
^ A: RH
^ B: LH
^ C: Exhaust
^ D: Intake
NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-2-3-6-5-4-2
^ No. 3 cylinder compression TDC
Page 11008
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 3855
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Service and Repair
Fuel Line Coupler: Service and Repair
Fuel Line Disconnect/Connect Procedure
Disconnect the quick connector as follows:
- Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube.
- If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to
move. Then disconnect them by pulling.
CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist
the quick connector more than necessary.
- Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector.
- Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube.
- Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube.
- Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection.
- Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin
tube or the retainer is replaced.
- When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a
new one (white colored retainer).
- To keep the quick connector clean and to avoid damage and contamination from foreign
materials, cover the quick connector with plastic bags or suitable material as shown.
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 2493
Alignment: Service and Repair
General Information and Recommendations
GENERAL INFORMATION AND RECOMMENDATIONS
1. A Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should be performed.
- This type of alignment is recommended for any NISSAN vehicle.
- The four-wheel "thrust" process helps ensure that the vehicle is properly aligned and the steering
wheel is centered.
- The alignment machine itself should be capable of accepting any NISSAN vehicle.
- The alignment machine should be checked to ensure that it is level.
2. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated.
- Your alignment machine should be regularly calibrated in order to give correct information.
- Check with the manufacturer of your specific alignment machine for their recommended
Service/Calibration Schedule.
The Alignment Process
THE ALIGNMENT PROCESS
IMPORTANT: Use only the alignment specifications listed.
1. When displaying the alignment settings, many alignment machines use "indicators": (Green/red,
plus or minus, Go/No Go). Do NOT use these
indicators. The alignment specifications programmed into your alignment machine that operate these
indicators may not be correct.
- This may result in an ERROR.
2. Some newer alignment machines are equipped with an optional "Rolling Compensation" method
to "compensate" the sensors (alignment targets or
head units). Do NOT use this "Rolling Compensation" method. Use the "Jacking Compensation" method. After installing the alignment targets or head units, raise
the vehicle and rotate the wheels 1/2 turn both ways.
- See Instructions in the alignment machine you are using for more information.
Preliminary Inspection
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
WARNING: Always adjust the alignment with the vehicle on a flat surface.
NOTE: If alignment is out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn suspension
parts before making any adjustments.
1. Check and adjust the wheel alignment with the vehicle under unladen conditions. "Unladen
conditions" means that the fuel, coolant, and lubricant
are full; and that the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in their designated positions.
2. Check the tires for incorrect air pressure and excessive wear. 3. Check the wheels for run out
and damage. 4. Check the wheel bearing axial end play. 5. Check the shock absorbers for leaks or
damage. 6. Check each mounting point of the suspension components for any excessive
looseness or damage. 7. Check each link, arm, and the rear suspension member for any damage.
8. Check the vehicle height.
- Verify the level using Consult-II memory register 1103 and set to 0 ° 10 mm (0 ° 0.39 inch) as
necessary.
Camber and Caster
CAMBER AND CASTER
Page 9261
Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection Checking Fluid Leakage
Checking Fluid Leakage
Check the hydraulic piping lines for improper attachment and for leaks, cracks, damage, loose
connections, chafing or deterioration. 1. Run engine until fluid temperature reaches 50° - 80°C
(122° - 176°F) in reservoir tank. Keep engine speed idle. 2. Turn steering wheel right-to-left several
times. 3. Hold steering wheel at each "lock" position for five seconds to check fluid leakage.
CAUTION: Do not hold steering wheel in a locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is the
possibility that oil pump may be damaged.)
4. If fluid leakage at connections is noticed, then loosen flare nut and then retighten. Do not over
tighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer
and connector.
5. If fluid leakage from oil pump is noticed, check oil pump. 6. Check steering gear boots for
accumulation of fluid indicating a leak from the steering gear.
Page 4851
7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs.
Disclaimer
Page 9831
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 14270
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 14384
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 4723
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 9911
Figure A-4
2. Use the photos to identify the fan type.
Procedure B - Cooling Fan Motor Inspection/Comparison Chart: RPM to Fan Motor Volt.
RECOMMENDATION: If this is your first time performing this Service Procedure, it is
recommended that you view the video clip on ASIST before starting. To view the video clip, open
the bulletin on ASIST and select "Video" at the bottom of the screen. To view the video full screen,
right click the center of the video screen and select "Full Screen".
1. Inspect the wires near the condenser fan motor:
- Make sure there is no damage to the wire insulation and the wires are in good condition.
Testing and Inspection
Fusible Link: Testing and Inspection
Fusible Link
A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its
condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp.
CAUTION:
- If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying
circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of incident.
- Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape.
- Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts.
Page 5073
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
Page 12136
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 10997
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 14022
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 13818
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 200
VERY IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure the DLC-II is pushed in straight and fully plugged in to the vehicle connector.
^ Make sure all other DLC-II cable connections (as shown in Figure 11) are connected properly.
CAUTION
^ Nissan requires the use of essential tools shown in Figure 11 when performing ABS/VDC
reprogramming.
^ J44200-1O "Pigtail" should not be removed from the CONSULT-II DDL Port. This "Pigtail" allows
use of the stronger "quick disconnect" cable set.
^ If cables are very often changed at the DDL Port (base) of the CONSULT-II unit, cable connector
pin damage may result.
^ If there is connector pin damage, ABS/VDC reprogramming may fail. Permanent damage to the
ABS/VDC system can occur.
4. Continue with Section 2
Section 2
Section 2: Check all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTCs.
CAUTION:
It is essential that you check all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTCs before
performing the remaining sections of this procedure.
1. Remove the 8 MB orange card from CONSULT-II.
2. Install the 16 MB (red/white) Diagnostic Card into Slot A (top slot) of CONSULT-II (see Figure
12).
3. Press [START (Nissan BASED VHCL)]
4. In "SELF-DIAG RESULTS", check and erase any DTCs that are stored in the following vehicle
systems:
^ ENGINE
^ A/T
^ ABS
^ AIRBAG
^ ALL MODE AWD/4WD (if applicable)
^ DIFF LOCK (if applicable; 4WD Titan)
^ AIR LEVELIZER (if applicable)
Page 9880
Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch (Steps 3 - 6)
Page 8176
Steering Angle Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle
sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel
alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle.
NOTE: Adjustment of steering angle sensor neutral position requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and
CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not
start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on
CONSULT-II screen in this order.
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels
in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU",
and "STR ANGLE SIG" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "STR ANGLE
SIG" is within 0 ± 3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 1 to 5.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
Page 8100
2. Press [INITIATE ECU REPROGRAM] (see Figure 16), then
a. Press [VDC]
b. Review all precautions
C. Press [NEXT]
3. Select the program data (see Figure 17).
Page 12467
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Fluid Capacity ......................................................................................................................................
.......................... 10.6 L (11 1/4 US qt. 9 3/8 Imp qt)
Page 9574
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 12152
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 167
Disclaimer
Parts 1-4 Descriptions
There are 4 parts to this service procedure. They must be done in order.
Part 1: Make sure DTC C1179 is or can be stored in ABS self diagnosis.
^ Go to Part 1 for this part of the service procedure.
Part 2: Download special VDC Reprogramming Data from ASIST onto your standard 8 MB
(orange) Reprogramming Card.
^ Do NOT use the 16 MB (orange) "QR25 Campaign ECM Software" Card (# J-44200-ECMR-16).
If you use this card, it will be reformatted to an 8MB card.
^ Go to Part 2 for this part of the service procedure.
Part 3: Reprogram the VDC Control Unit with the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card (that now
contains the downloaded VDC reprogramming data from ASIST).
^ Go to Part 3 for this part of the service procedure.
Part 4: Re-program the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card back to its original format so it can be
used for standard ECU reprogramming.
^ Refer to Part 4 for this part of the service procedure.
NOTE:
These procedures should be performed in order by an OBD-II certified Technician.
Part 1
Part 1: Make sure DTC C1179 is, or can be, stored in ABS self diagnosis.
1. Using CONSULT-II, check ABS Self Diagnosis.
^ If DTC C1179 is stored, this bulletin applies; go to Part 2.
^ If DTC C1179 is not stored, go to the next step.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
Page 5954
3. Attach filter to bracket and filter hoses to fittings as shown.
Install Protector (2004 Armada ONLY)
1. Assemble the protector into the left rear wheelhouse as shown.
Page 9524
Wheels: Testing and Inspection
Inspection
1. Check tires for wear and improper inflation. 2. Check wheels for deformation, cracks and other
damage. If deformed, remove wheel and check wheel runout.
a. Remove tire from wheel and mount wheel on a tire balance machine. b. Set dial indicator as
shown in the illustration.
3. Check front wheel bearings for looseness. 4. Check front suspension for looseness.
Page 9017
Page 13827
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 14184
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 10697
8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D"
ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7).
9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A).
10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make
sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B).
11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is
firmly applied (see Figure 9).
12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt.
13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring.
Automatic Air Conditioner
Blower Motor: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner
Blower Motor
BLOWER MOTOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL RH AND GLOVE
BOX". 2. Disconnect the blower motor electrical connector. 3. Remove the three screws and
remove the blower motor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Variable Blower Control
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL
Page 5299
Check Sheet Part 1
Page 1593
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 13084
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 7010
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 7825
a. CONSULT-II will display the screen shown in Figure 20.
You will need to turn the ignition OFF for at least one full second and then turn the ignition back
ON.
Then press "OK" on the CONSULT-II screen.
b. CONSULT-II will automatically print out a report (see Figure 21).
^ Attach the print-out report to the Repair Order for future reference.
7. Press [BACK] two times to return to the main menu.
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF and CONSULT-II OFF.
9. Continue with Section 5.
Section 5
Section 5: Again, perform a check of all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any newly
stored DTC(s).
1. Remove the 8 MB orange Reprogramming Card from CONSULT-II.
2. Install the red/white Diagnostic Card into Slot A (top slot) of CONSULT-II.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine).
^ CONSULT-II will turn ON automatically.
^ Confirm that all electrical loads* (except for the ignition) are OFF.
Page 7922
3. Remove the upper and lower sliding pin bolts (see Figure 1).
4. Support / hang the caliper cylinder body with a wire or other suitable support (see Figure 2).
^ Make sure the brake hose is not stretched or stressed.
^ Make sure the sensor harness bracket will not be bent by weight of the caliper cylinder body.
5. Refer to the BR Section of the Service Manual as needed to complete the brake service.
Page 12517
Terminals And Reference Value For BCM Part 2
Terminals And Reference Value For Combination Meter
Page 14099
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH (Steps 2 - 5)
Page 4880
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 13579
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10748
5. Peel off the top (smaller) backing sheet from one of the fluorine resin tapes (see Figure 5).
^ Two fluorine resin tape pieces are provided in the kit.
6. Place the fluorine resin tape (adhesive side toward you) against the seat belt as shown in Figure
6A.
NOTE:
^ The sticky half should be down, toward the floor of the vehicle.
^ The unexposed (not sticky yet) half should be up, toward the ceiling of the vehicle.
Note the following before performing steps 7 and 8:
^ Once the fluorine resin tape is applied to the "D" ring, it cannot be repositioned.
^ Take care to properly attach the tape to the "D" ring.
^ Center the tape correctly on the "D" ring and smoothly apply it to the "D" ring surface so that no
wrinkles or ridges are present.
^ Wrinkles or ridges in the tape may prevent the seat belt from moving smoothly through the "D"
ring. If this should occur, replace the tape with a new piece.
7. Pull on the top of the seat belt to roll the tape up and around the "D" ring (see Figure 6B).
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6428
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 13681
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 12872
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 4916
ECM Inspection Table Part 3
Page 9755
Blower Motor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 5712
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 6640
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 254
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11150
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 1236
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check ((King Cab) (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 2437
5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly.
^ Mount the top claws first.
^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13.
^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14.
^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level.
IMPORTANT:
On-Vehicle Service
Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair On-Vehicle Service
On-Vehicle Service PEDAL STROKE
^ When parking brake pedal is operated with the specified force, make sure the stroke is within the
specified number of notches. Check by listening and counting the ratchet clicks. Pedal stroke: 3 - 4
notches [under force of 196 N (20.0 kg-f, 44.1 ft. lbs.)]
Page 767
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5623
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 8013
Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor
WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the
hazard of airborne particles or other materials.
CAUTION: While removing cylinder body, never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
- It is not necessary to remove the torque member and disconnect the brake hose except for
disassembly or replacement of cylinder body. When replacing brake pads, hang cylinder body with
a wire so as not to stretch brake hose.
- Do not damage piston boot.
- Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or it a soft
pedal occurs at very low mileage.
REMOVAL
1. Remove tires from vehicle with power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid as necessary.
NOTE: Do not disconnect brake hose unless removing the cylinder body.
3. Remove bolts (2) as shown, and cylinder body (3).
- (1): Brake hose
NOTE: Position cylinder body aside using suitable wire, as necessary.
4. Remove disc rotor.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid.
- Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Install disc rotor. 2. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, and tighten bolts to specification. Refer to
BR-30, "Components".
CAUTION: Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off mounting surface of cylinder
body.
3. Install brake hose to cylinder body with new copper washer and tighten to specification. Refer to
BR-30, "Components".
CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washer.
- Securely attach brake hose to protrusion on cylinder body.
4. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. 5. Install tires to the vehicle.
Disassembly and Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove pads from cylinder body. 2. Remove sliding sleeve and boot from cylinder body.
Page 1451
Page 7331
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 314
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded
Front Door Panel: By Symptom Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded
Classification: BT10-024
Reference: NTB10-095
Date: August 13, 2010
2004-2010 TITAN; DOOR TRIM PANEL DISCOLORED/FADED
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The pull handle trim panel on a front or rear door is discolored/faded. See Figures 1 and 2.
ACTION
Clean the discolored/faded trim panel as instructed in the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
This condition is not "dirt" on the trim panel surface. This condition exists within the panel itself.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 10277
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 13177
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 8809
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 10627
- After replacement of side curtain air bag module, perform self-diagnosis to check that no
malfunction is detected. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Page 377
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 13347
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (Step 3)
Page 5665
Attachment General Procedure
Page 9380
^ Before installing the new bushings, use Nissan Brake Cleaner (or equivalent) to clean the
stabilizer bar where the bushings make contact. See Figure 1
above.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 4714
7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs.
Disclaimer
Page 12806
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 9102
28. Remove the seatbelt retractor cover.
^ Use a plastic trim tool.
29. Carefully remove the D-ring bolt cover.
30. Remove the D-ring bolt.
Page 1398
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 3703
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5799
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 14093
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH (Steps 2 - 5)
Page 5122
Case 5
Page 11480
After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch.
1. Raise the glass to the top position. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the
glass to the bottom position. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the
original position, if not, pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position.
Page 12775
Optional Splice
Page 6773
Page 5195
Case 1
Page 2776
Refrigerant Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
Refrigerant Oil
Name:................................................................................................................................................
Nissan A/C System Oil Type S (DH-PS) or equivalent
Page 14457
Wiper Motor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Wiper Motor and Linkage
REMOVAL
1. Remove the cowl top. 2. Remove wiper frame bolts, and remove wiper frame assembly. 3.
Remove wiper motor from wiper frame assembly.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION:
- Do not drop the wiper motor or cause it to contact other parts.
- Check the grease condition of the motor arm and wiper link joint(s). Apply grease if necessary.
1. Connect wiper motor to connector. Turn the wiper switch ON to operate wiper motor, then turn
the wiper switch OFF (auto stop). 2. Disconnect wiper motor connector. 3. Install wiper motor to
wiper frame assembly, and install wiper frame assembly. 4. Install cowl top. 5. Ensure that wiper
blades stop within proper clearance. Refer to front wiper arm adjustment.
Page 526
b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a).
c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed.
^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer.
d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2.
2. Record the radio station presets:
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
NOTE:
Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding.
Page 14191
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 11154
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 12787
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Specifications
Valve Spring
Page 4673
Page 12603
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 1345
Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair G Sensor
G SENSOR
Removal and Installation REMOVAL
1. Remove center console or center seat as required.
2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts as shown.
^ The location of the sensor is the same for all models.
CAUTION: ^
Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
^ Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: After installation, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
Page 13918
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 9676
Removal and Installation
DEFROSTER NOZZLE
Removal
1. Remove the instrument panel trim. 2. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. 3. Remove
the defroster nozzle.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
RH AND LH SIDE DEMISTER DUCT
Removal
1. Remove the instrument panel trim. 2. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. 3. Remove
the RH or LH side demister duct.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
RH AND LH VENTILATOR DUCT
Removal
1. Remove the instrument panel trim. 2. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. 3. Remove
the RH or LH ventilator duct.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 8986
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Window Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 13753
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 7713
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 7908
Brake Pedal Assy: Service and Repair
BRAKE PEDAL
Non-Adjustable Pedals
Page 985
Control Unit: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove jack and tools. 3.
Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. 4. Remove the necessary
push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way.
5. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to disconnect connector. 6. Remove
the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit.
INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque. Differential lock
control unit nuts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.)
Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 1794
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 9781
Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Steps 1 - 5)
Page 5883
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Fuel Pressure: By Symptom Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Classification: FE07-004
Reference: NTB07-040
Date: June 6, 2007
2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007
Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223
APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007
IF YOU CONFIRM
When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced,
ACTIONS
1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure).
2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump.
NOTE:
Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 13113
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 9695
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Ignition Coil: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 842
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Idle Air Volume Learning
Idle Air Volume Learning
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within
the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
- Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
- Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are
satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a
moment.
- Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
- Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 degrees C (158 - 212 degrees F)
- Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch: ON
- Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp) On vehicles equipped with daytime light
systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is start the headlamp will not be
illuminated.
- Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
- Vehicle speed: Stopped
- Transmission: Warmed-up With CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T"
system indicates less than 0.9 V.
- Without CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode.
6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds.
Page 1855
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 12258
Lifting Switch (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 5383
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 8899
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 1200
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 6377
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Description
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of exhaust valve cam sprocket to
identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder
identification signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to
change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 834
ECM Inspection Table Part 6
Page 10033
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 4297
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MAF SENSOR
Component Description
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by
measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows
around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to the hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of
the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
Page 10578
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 9946
Figure E-6
9. Position the Maxi Fuse, wires, and connector into the IPDM E/R box as shown in Figure E-6.
10. Reinstall the IPDM E/R cover and the relay / fuse cover.
11. Connect the negative battery cable.
12. Reprogram the radio presets and set the clock.
13. Go to Procedure F.
Procedure F - Confirm Fan Operation
1. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition ON.
3. Select START (NISSAN BASED VHCL) > ENGINE > ACTIVE TEST > COOLING FAN
4. Use CONSULT-II to turn the condenser fan ON and then make sure the condenser fan is
running.
5. Turn CONSULT-II OFF, turn the ignition OFF, and disconnect CONSULT-II from the vehicle.
Parts Information
Page 13093
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 10197
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Remove the
low-pressure pipe.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipes with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-ring of the high/low-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 11352
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 14220
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 7456
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
Removal and Installation
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.
3. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
4. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness.
5. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
6. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Installation
Page 12658
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Step 3)
Page 5436
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 10493
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 6899
9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically.
Page 12228
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Mirror Switch) Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 575
Service and Repair
Brake Bleeding: Service and Repair
Bleeding Brake System
Image Symbols
Page 5624
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 304
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 12346
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 7034
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 7802
a. CONSULT-II will display the screen shown in Figure 20.
You will need to turn the ignition OFF for at least one full second and then turn the ignition back
ON.
Then press "OK" on the CONSULT-II screen.
b. CONSULT-II will automatically print out a report (see Figure 21).
^ Attach the print-out report to the Repair Order for future reference.
7. Press [BACK] two times to return to the main menu.
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF and CONSULT-II OFF.
9. Continue with Section 5.
Section 5
Section 5: Again, perform a check of all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any newly
stored DTC(s).
1. Remove the 8 MB orange Reprogramming Card from CONSULT-II.
2. Install the red/white Diagnostic Card into Slot A (top slot) of CONSULT-II.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine).
^ CONSULT-II will turn ON automatically.
^ Confirm that all electrical loads* (except for the ignition) are OFF.
Page 11872
Mirror Motor LH Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 13587
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Window System
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Page 4053
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 11410
NOTE:
See Figure 6 above for an example of damaged caused by incorrect removal.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the bolts at the front of the cover:
CAUTION:
^ Do not pull up on the front of the cover.
^ If you pull up on the front of the cover, it will break the cover.
Page 8454
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 3888
5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box.
6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3.
NOTE:
There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is
easily accessible.
7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3).
8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4).
Page 11177
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 14265
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 2837
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 8690
34. Disconnect the 5 connectors shown in the figure.
NOTE:
The passenger side will have a 6th connector (not shown).
35. If the result for Inspection Procedure 1 was NG (seat belt retractor will not extend or retract;
remove the 2 seat belt retractor bolts and remove the seat belt.
^ During reassembly, install a new seat belt.
NOTE:
Seat belt retractor with seat belt pretensioner should be disposed of in accordance with local and
state regulations.
36. Take the harness loose from the door mounting points.
37. Pull the harness out of the door.
Harness Replacement Part 2 (Includes Seat Belt Replacement, If Needed)
Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000
Stored
Classification: EC06-001A
Reference: NTB06-009A
Date: March 31, 2006
MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information
sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of
this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
The MIL is "ON" with
^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR
^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit,
and
There are no drivability incidents.
DETERMINE IF
This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure.
ACTIONS
If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections:
^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections.
^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection.
^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left
side instrument stay assembly.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 7155
CAUTION:
^ The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully
so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft
housing.
^ If gear lubricant contacts brake shoe material, clean immediately using a Nissan approved brake
cleaner.
6. Remove the back plate, torque member, and parking brake assembly.
7. Check the exterior and inner machined surfaces of the axle shaft housing for deformation and
cracks. Clean/replace, if necessary.
8. Reinstall the back plate and torque member.
9. Install the new axle shaft assembly listed in the Parts Information table into the axle shaft
housing.
10. Reinstall the remaining parts in the reverse order of removal.
Page 13131
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 4749
Page 1590
Optional Splice
Page 5376
Oxygen Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 8824
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 7681
Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 2820
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start
engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition
switch OFF.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two
or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse
after servicing fuel system.
Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check
Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check
Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check (Step 1)
Page 4072
ECM Inspection Table Part 6
Page 7310
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 11944
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 12138
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 14055
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 5480
12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install.
13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides.
14. Reinstall the IPDM cover.
15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first.
16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset
their ADP settings (ADP memory).
Page 12002
- DO NOT replace the entire seat adjuster assembly when only a slide motor or gear assembly is
needed.
- This is the ONLY approved repair procedure for repair of seat slide motor or gear incidents on the
Applied Vehicles. A claim to Nissan for the repair of seat slide motor or gear incidents on the
Applied Vehicles may be denied if the repair is not performed exactly as outlined in this bulletin.
- The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Figure 1
NOTE: This is the ONLY approved repair procedure for seat slide motor or gear assembly incidents
on the Applied Vehicles. A claim to Nissan for the repair of seat slide motor or gear incidents on the
Applied Vehicles may be denied if the repair is not performed exactly as outlined in this bulletin.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 5663
Page 2291
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 4069
ECM Inspection Table Part 3
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 13038
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 1849
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 1758
7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the
fuel feed hose.
Disconnect the quick connector as follows: Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube.
- If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to
move. Then disconnect them by pulling.
CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist
the quick connector more than necessary.
- Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector.
- Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube.
- Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube.
- Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection.
- Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin
tube or the retainer is replaced.
- When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a
new one (white colored retainer).
Page 9168
5. Make sure the targets are mounted correctly.
^ Mount the top claws first.
^ Claws must be flush against the wheel as shown in Figure 13.
^ Target must be flush against the center support as shown in Figure 14.
^ Make sure the targets are positioned with the arrow UP or level.
IMPORTANT:
Page 6275
2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full
or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank
until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less. If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified
level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through
the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from
fuel filler pipe.
b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire.
c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield.
d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and disconnect the vent hose quick
connector. e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel
from the fuel tank.
3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 4.
Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump
protector.
6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister.
Page 897
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11336
Body Control Module: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5017
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2
Page 9833
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 1820
Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given
conditions.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again.
Page 14437
Page 482
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 8123
2. Press [INITIATE ECU REPROGRAM] (see Figure 16), then
a. Press [VDC]
b. Review all precautions
C. Press [NEXT]
3. Select the program data (see Figure 17).
Page 5808
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 6305
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 13837
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 5920
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 6182
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 12786
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 6255
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 14183
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 11470
6. Repeat the cleaning procedure as needed.
^ After treating, the trim panel should be clean as shown in Figure 4 above.
7. Reinstall the trim panel parts removed in step 1.
Page 2007
Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check
Page 10354
Control Module HVAC: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 14379
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 13600
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Step 3)
Page 5256
Case 9
Page 13640
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 8702
^ During installation of the new harness you will find some connectors taped to the harness as
shown.
^ Some of the connectors will be for options that the vehicle you are working on does not have.
^ Un-tape the connectors that are needed. Leave the connectors that are not needed taped to the
harness.
68. Connect both battery cables-positive cable first.
69. Reset the radio station presets.
70. If Inspection Procedure 1 was NG, or Inspection Procedure 2 result was "light stays on or
blinks"; connect CONSULT-II and clear codes from the Air Bag Control Unit SELF-DIAG [PAST].
Final Quality Checks
71. Check the air bag light operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition OFF and then ON.
b. Observe the air bag warning light.
c. Make sure the air bag warning light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out.
72. Confirm that all systems related to the harness replacement are functioning correctly.
Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control
Unit Replacement
Control Module: Service and Repair Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit
Replacement
Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement
When replacing transfer assembly or transfer control unit, check the 4WD shift indicator pattern
and adjustment of the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit if necessary.
CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR PATTERN 1. Set 4WD shift switch to "2WD", "4H", "4LO", "4H"
and "2WD" in order. Stay at each switch position for at least 2 seconds.
2. Confirm 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp are changed properly as follows.
^ If OK, the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit is correct.
^ If NG, the position is different between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Adjust the
position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to pattern table.
Transfer Position Adjustment Pattern
METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT "2WD" Select Adjustment Pattern
1. Start engine. Run engine for at least 10 seconds.
2. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp.
Pattern A 1. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed.
Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. 2. Turn 4WD shift switch to "4LO" position. Stay in "4LO" for at
least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 4. Start engine. 5. Erase self-diagnosis. 6. Check
4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again.
If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new
transfer control unit and retry the above check.
Pattern B 1. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed.
Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds.
Page 8307
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Locations
Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 12557
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 10130
Evaporator Core: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner
Removal and Installation for Evaporator
REMOVAL
1. Remove the heater core. See: Heater Core/Service and Repair/Manual Air Conditioner 2.
Remove the defroster mode door arm. 3. Separate the heater core and cooling unit case.
Page 8939
Component Parts Location
Page 6921
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 12353
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 1911
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 11774
4. Pry off the bottom side actuator hook(s) to separate the actuator from the housing (if necessary).
NOTE:
Some actuators will not require prying. They will separate after removing the screw(s) in step 3.
5. Disconnect the motor electrical connector(s).
6. Remove the old actuator motor.
7. Install the new actuator motor in the reverse order of removal.
Page 8443
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 1203
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 997
Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Remove the
glove box assembly.
3. Disconnect transfer control unit connectors. 4. Remove the transfer control unit.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Transfer control unit
bolts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.)
^ After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer
assembly and transfer control unit. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Transfer Case/Service
Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control
Unit Replacement
Page 9601
Component Parts
Mode door control system components are:
- Front air control
- Mode door motor
- PBR (built into mode door motor)
- In-vehicle sensor
- Ambient sensor
- Optical sensor
- Intake sensor
System Operation
The mode door position (vent, B/L, foot, D/F, and defrost) is set by the front air control by means of
the mode door motor. When a mode door position is selected on the front air control, voltage is
applied to one circuit of the mode door motor while ground is applied to the other circuit, causing
the mode door motor to rotate. The direction of rotation is determined by which circuit has voltage
applied to it, and which one has ground applied to it. The front air control monitors the mode door
position by measuring the voltage signal on the PBR circuit. In AUTO mode the mode door position
is set by the front air control which determines the proper position based on inputs from the
in-vehicle sensor, ambient sensor, optical sensor, intake sensor, and the temperature selected by
the driver or passenger.
Mode Door Control Specification
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Mode Door Motor
Page 13039
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 3294
M6 × 50 mm (1.97 inch): No. 1, 20, 25, 26, 27 M6 × 80 mm (3.15 inch): No. 4, 5, 7 M6 × 20 mm
(0.79 inch): Except the above
e. After tightening, re-tighten to the specified torque.
CAUTION: Be sure to wipe off any excessive liquid gasket leaking onto surface mating with oil pan.
11. Install the timing chain case cover RH bank (A) and timing chain case cover LH bank (B) as
follows:
^ *: Cross mark (c) that can not be seen after assembly D: 2.6 - 3.6 mm (0.102 - 0.142 inch) dia.
a. Apply liquid gasket (a) as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
CAUTION: The start and end of the application of the liquid gasket should be crossed at a position
that cannot be seen after attaching the chain case cover.
b. Install the bolts in the numerical order shown.
12. Install the crankshaft pulley.
^ Install the key of the crankshaft.
^ Insert the pulley by lightly tapping it.
CAUTION: Do not tap pulley on the side surface where the belt is installed (outer circumference).
13. Tighten the crankshaft pulley bolt.
^ Lock the crankshaft using suitable tool, then tighten the bolt.
^ Perform the following steps for angular tightening:
a. Apply engine oil onto the threaded parts of the bolt and seating area.
Page 2968
Wheel Bearing: Fluid Type Specifications
NLGI No. 2 Multi Purpose Grease (Lithium Soap Base)
Service and Repair
Antenna Amplifier: Service and Repair
How to Replace NATS Antenna Amp.
NOTE:
- If NATS antenna amp. is not installed correctly, NVIS (NATS) system will not operate properly
and SELF-DIAG RESULTS on CONSULT-II screen will show "LOCK MODE" or "CHAIN OF
IMMU-KEY".
- Initialization is not necessary when only NATS antenna amp. is replaced with a new one.
On-Board Inspection
Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair On-Board Inspection
On-board Inspection LEAK INSPECTION
^ Check for leaks at master cylinder to brake booster attachment point, reservoir tank, and brake
tube connections.
Image Symbols
CAUTION: Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it way cause paint damage. If
brake fluid is splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
Page 786
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 8984
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 12764
c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip.
d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab.
e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump.
^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector.
f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing.
CAUTION:
DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap.
Page 11350
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 64
Alarm Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 2280
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 9638
Diagnostic Procedure For Defroster Door Motor (Steps 20 - 23)
Page 7313
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 10807
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 3782
^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap).
e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet.
4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under
the dash):
a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly
(cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3).
b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads.
C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners.
5. Clean the negative battery cable connections.
a. Write down all the radio presets.
b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection.
c. Clean the following items:
^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides)
^ Body connection bolt (head and threads)
^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap)
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Battery negative post
^ Negative cable battery terminal
d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery).
e. Reprogram the radio presets.
6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs.
Page 3617
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 13360
Hazard Warning Switch: Service and Repair
HAZARD SWITCH
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove cluster lid C.
2. While pressing the tab, push out the hazard switch.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 10422
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection
Ambient Sensor Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Ambient Sensor
The ambient sensor is attached on the radiator core support (left side). It detects ambient
temperature and converts it into a value which is then input into the front air control.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INPUT PROCESS
The front air control includes a processing circuit for the ambient sensor input. However, when the
temperature detected by the ambient sensor increases quickly, the processing circuit retards the
front air control function. It only allows the front air control to recognize an ambient temperature
increase of 0.33 degree C (0.6 degree F) per 100 seconds.
This prevents constant adjustments due to momentary conditions, such as stopping after high
speed driving. Although the actual ambient temperature has not changed, the temperature
detected by the ambient sensor will increase. This is because the heat from the engine
compartment can radiate to the front grille area, location of the ambient sensor.
Diagnostic Procedure For Ambient Sensor (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 549
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389)
Repair Overview
PARTS INFORMATION
PARTS INFORMATION
Testing and Inspection
Condenser: Testing and Inspection
CONDENSER-1
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect condenser-1 harness connector.
3. Check resistance between condenser-1 terminals 1 and 2.
CONDENSER-2
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect condenser-2 harness connector.
3. Check resistance between condenser-2 terminals as 1 and 2.
Page 11559
^ Torque bolt to: 49 N-m (5.0 Kg-m, 36 ft-lb.)
26. Reassemble remaining parts in reverse order of removal.
27. Reconnect battery.
28. Reprogram radio presets.
Page 13343
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 9472
Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light comes on for about 1 second and turns off.
This light warns of low tire pressure.
NISSAN's low tire pressure warning system is a tire pressure monitoring system. It monitors tire
pressure of all tires except the spare. When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light is lit,
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated, You should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's tire
information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire malfunction. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efticiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked
monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle
placard and Owner's Manual.
The recommended inflation pressure may also be found on the Tire and Loading Information label.
It the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the light will illuminate and the chime will sound
for about 10 seconds.
Page 13844
Page 3592
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 2855
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 9992
Figure D-12, Figure D-13
- Align the protector along the 5 o'clock rib as shown.
- Don't cover up the bolt hole.
- Fold and stick the protector under the shroud.
Side Marker Lamp (Front)
Marker Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair Side Marker Lamp (Front)
SIDE MARKER LAMP (FRONT)
Removal
NOTE: Reach through wheel opening for access.
1. Turn the side marker lamp (front) bulb socket counterclockwise and remove side marker lamp
(front) bulb socket. 2. Pull to remove side marker lamp (front) from the side marker lamp (front)
bulb socket.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 12419
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5680
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 1895
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 5869
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 13961
Power Window Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 8125
NOTE:
This process will take from 4 to 5 minutes.
CAUTION:
You must leave the vehicle and the CONSULT-II unit "undisturbed" (don't touch) until
reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If the CONSULT-II screen gives you an error message "Unmatch of Vehicle Data":
^ You tried to reprogram with incorrect reprogramming data, or
^ You are trying to reprogram with the same file that is already in the ABS/VDC control unit.
For your reference, the old and new ABS/VDC Control Unit part numbers for vehicles equipped
with VDC are listed below.
ABS/VDC CONTROL UNIT PART NUMBERS
6. When VDC Reprogramming is complete:
Page 9440
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair 2-Pole Lift
2-Pole Lift
WARNING:
- When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear
of the vehicle are well balanced.
- When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, or fuel
lines.
Page 12581
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 10417
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 12718
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 5458
8. Configuration of current BCM is printed out automatically. A listing of manual setting items and
auto setting items will be displayed. Auto setting
items are preset and cannot be changed. Manual setting items can be set by using WRITE
CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE".
9. Touch "BACK" on "READ CONFIGURATION" screen.
WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
Page 140
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 4796
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14257
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 7789
5. From the ASIST PC main menu screen, select CONSULT UTILITIES (see Figure 3).
Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
Fuel Gauge Sender: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009
Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56
vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some
fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which
could cause a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender
card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or
before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 11301
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Specifications
Page 6639
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 4614
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1946
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 7186
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller
shaft.
^ Before removing final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness
connector from the assembly and move it away from final drive/rear axle assembly area. Failure to
do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative.
1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft.
^ Plug rear end of transfer.
3. Remove both RH and LH axle shafts. 4. Remove carrier cover bolts.
5. Remove carrier cover using Tool.
Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
^ Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the mating surface.
6. Remove differential lock solenoid connector (B) bolt and disconnect differential lock position
connector (A).
7. For installation, apply a paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap.
CAUTION: ^
Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to install them
in their original positions.
^ For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap.
8. Remove adjuster lock plates.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7542
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 1879
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8619
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Locations
Number One Cylinder: Locations
Firing Order
1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
#1 cylinder
Page 1060
Page 12534
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 14008
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 3967
Page 2602
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2292
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 11849
Other Mirror Types
Disclaimer
Page 11046
Page 1297
10. Remove the outboard J-Clip.
WARNING:
Only the outboard J-Clip can be removed. Removal of any other J-Clips may affect OCS
performance.
11. Remove the two clips securing the switch harness to the seat pan. See Figure 7.
WARNING:
Before removal, make careful note of the exact routing and clip placement for reassembly.
Page 930
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 7698
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Service and Repair
Power Steering Line/Hose: Service and Repair
HYDRAULIC LINE
Removal and Installation
Refer to the following illustration for hydraulic line removal.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4146
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 524
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389)
Repair Overview
PARTS INFORMATION
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 4932
ECM Inspection Table Part 1
Page 5269
Case 3
Page 12245
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection
Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 13954
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 3436
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 4550
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 7663
8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM.
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 ->
3), and then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See:
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and
Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with
terminal clips.
Page 8313
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 13062
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 5433
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 7820
5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then turn CONSULT-II OFF.
6. Remove the red/white Diagnostic Card and insert the 8 MB orange Reprogramming Card into
CONSULT-II.
The 8 MB reprogramming card should already have special ABS/VDC reprogramming data loaded
into it (see Part 1).
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine).
^ CONSULT-II will turn ON automatically (see Figure 13).
^ Confirm that all electrical loads* (except for the ignition) are "OFF".
* Headlights, defroster, A/C, audio (radio), video, cellular telephone, etc.
8. Roll down the driver's window part way, exit the vehicle, close the door, and hang the CONSULT
II unit on the outside of the window (see Figure 14).
This step is necessary to make sure the CONSULT-II and DLC-II cable will not be disturbed during
reprogramming.
CAUTION:
DO NOT connect the CONSULT-II AC power supply for Steps 1, 2, and 3 in Section 3 below.
9. Continue with Section 3.
Section 3
Section 3: Confirm the vehicle's battery voltage and CONSULT-II "Charger Input"
1. Press [SUB MODE], then select [BATTERY CHARGE]
Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts
Classification: FA05-002D
Reference: NTB05-097D
Date: January 19, 2011
2005-2011 TITAN AND ARMADA; CAM BOLTS FOR FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT
The Applied Vehicles have been updated/amended. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2011 Titan (A60) 2005 - 2011 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINS 2005 Titan built after 1N6AA0(***)5N 566358 2005 Armada built after
5N1AA08(**)5N 733885 2006 - 2011 vehicles: All VINS
APPLIED DATE Vehicles built after June 2, 2005
IF YOU CONFIRM
An Applied Vehicle needs to have the front wheel alignment adjusted,
NOTE:
Applied Vehicles listed above come from the factory with non-adjustable bolts (Not Cam Bolts) for
the lower link (lower control arm) mounting.
ACTIONS
1. Remove the original lower link mounting bolts, washers, and nuts - 2 per side.
^ Refer to section FSU in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for lower link mounting bolt
locations.
2. Install new bolts (cam bolts), cam washers and new nuts.
^ New parts are listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
NOTE:
Cam bolts are used to adjust caster and camber.
3. Perform front wheel alignment per the ESM.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 12867
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 13049
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 7008
Optional Splice
Page 5069
Case 9
Page 13603
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 12943
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 13857
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 14024
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 11304
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 8121
5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then turn CONSULT-II OFF.
6. Remove the red/white Diagnostic Card and insert the 8 MB orange Reprogramming Card into
CONSULT-II.
The 8 MB reprogramming card should already have special ABS/VDC reprogramming data loaded
into it (see Part 1).
7. Turn the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine).
^ CONSULT-II will turn ON automatically (see Figure 13).
^ Confirm that all electrical loads* (except for the ignition) are "OFF".
* Headlights, defroster, A/C, audio (radio), video, cellular telephone, etc.
8. Roll down the driver's window part way, exit the vehicle, close the door, and hang the CONSULT
II unit on the outside of the window (see Figure 14).
This step is necessary to make sure the CONSULT-II and DLC-II cable will not be disturbed during
reprogramming.
CAUTION:
DO NOT connect the CONSULT-II AC power supply for Steps 1, 2, and 3 in Section 3 below.
9. Continue with Section 3.
Section 3
Section 3: Confirm the vehicle's battery voltage and CONSULT-II "Charger Input"
1. Press [SUB MODE], then select [BATTERY CHARGE]
Service and Repair
Radio Tuner: Service and Repair
SATELLITE RADIO TUNER
Removal
1. Remove the accelerator pedal assembly. 2. Remove BCM. 3. Disconnect audio amp. and
satellite radio tuner connectors.
4. Remove audio amp./satellite radio tuner bracket screws and slide audio amp./satellite radio
tuner bracket down.
5. Remove satellite radio tuner screws (A) and remove satellite radio tuner from audio
amp./satellite radio tuner bracket (1).
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 12497
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 1382
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Connector Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 6430
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 4580
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 14252
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 7072
8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM.
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 ->
3), and then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component
Parts)/Components
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with
terminal clips.
Page 12701
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 6564
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 5534
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II.
^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information.
2. Compare your printout to the chart.
a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3.
b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply.
^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information.
3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows:
Specifications
Front Axle
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Front Axle
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service
Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component
status (wear, damage) are normal.
WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION
^ Move wheel hub in the axial direction by hand. Make sure there is no looseness of wheel bearing.
Axial end play limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) or less
^ Rotate wheel hub and make sure there is no unusual noise or other irregular conditions. If there
are any irregular conditions, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly
Service and Repair
Auxiliary Step / Running Board: Service and Repair
RUNNING BOARDS
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove bolts and remove running board from running board brackets.
Page 1443
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 2730
Fluid - Transfer Case: Fluid Type Specifications
Transfer Fluid Type Genuine NISSAN Matic D ATF (Continental US and Alaska) or Canada
NISSAN Automatic Transmission Fluid Dexron III, Mercon or equivalent.
Page 84
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 14482
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS
Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Page 2021
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KS
Component Description
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric
element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This
pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
Page 13087
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 10066
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 2756
Power Steering Fluid: Testing and Inspection Checking Fluid Leakage
Checking Fluid Leakage
Check the hydraulic piping lines for improper attachment and for leaks, cracks, damage, loose
connections, chafing or deterioration. 1. Run engine until fluid temperature reaches 50° - 80°C
(122° - 176°F) in reservoir tank. Keep engine speed idle. 2. Turn steering wheel right-to-left several
times. 3. Hold steering wheel at each "lock" position for five seconds to check fluid leakage.
CAUTION: Do not hold steering wheel in a locked position for more than 10 seconds. (There is the
possibility that oil pump may be damaged.)
4. If fluid leakage at connections is noticed, then loosen flare nut and then retighten. Do not over
tighten connector as this can damage O-ring, washer
and connector.
5. If fluid leakage from oil pump is noticed, check oil pump. 6. Check steering gear boots for
accumulation of fluid indicating a leak from the steering gear.
Page 868
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 1162
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 5761
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 12298
A. Position the organizer assembly on end as shown.
B. Spray lubricant (WD-40(R) or equivalent) between the inset and the tube.
C. Spray lubricant all the way around the insert.
D. Wait about 30 seconds for the lubricant to penetrate down the inside of the tube and around the
rubber o-ring.
E. Pull / remove the insert as shown in Figure 5.
F. Wipe off any residual or over spray lubricant.
6. Insert the new slider assemblies into the organizer.
^ Push the slider in until the plastic insert stops against the end of the metal tube.
7. Completely loosen the hand knob on all 4 slider assemblies.
^ This will allow maximum gap between the washer and slider base.
8. Slide the organizer back into the tracks.
Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Page 4496
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 11813
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 9108
52. Remove the rear upper finishers-left and right side.
^ Remove the clip.
^ Use a plastic trim tool.
53. Remove the upper door latch striker covers - left and right side.
^ 1 screw on each side.
54. Remove the coat hangers; left and right side.
^ 1 screw for each coat hanger.
Electrical Units
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Page 10040
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 12101
^ 2 top tabs
^ 2 side tabs
^ 2 bottom clips (do not reuse, replace with new clips listed in the Parts Information table).
a. Lift up and pull bottom of seat back board away from seat back. See Figure 5.
b. Lift the middle part of the seat back board up and pull away from the seat back.
c. Slide the top part of the seat back board down, then pull away from the seat back.
7. Install seat back board:
a. Starting at the top place tabs underneath seat back frame and apply pressure until it is securely
in place.
b. Install 2 new clips on the bottom part of the seat back board, then align bottom clips with holes in
seat back frame until it clicks into place. See Parts Information table.
c. Apply pressure to both sides of the seat back board until the tabs click into place.
Disclaimer
Page 1950
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Locations
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Page 8872
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 11186
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 10485
Page 4475
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 5661
Page 4105
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1449
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 10305
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 10323
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 13080
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 13258
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 12950
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 8351
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 13488
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 2701
6. Allow the ATF temperature to fall to approximately 65°C (149°F). Use the CONSULT-II to
monitor the fluid temperature as follows:
NOTE: Fluid level will be greatly affected by temperature as shown. Therefore monitor the fluid
temperature data using the CONSULT-II.
a. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector. b. Select "MAIN SIGNALS" in "DATA MONITOR"
mode for "A/T" with CONSULT-II. c. Read out the value of "ATF TEMP 1".
7. Re-check the fluid level at fluid temperatures of approximately 65°C (149°F) using the "HOT"
range on the A/T fluid level gauge as shown.
CAUTION: ^
When wiping the fluid from the ATF level gauge, always use lint-free paper, not a cloth.
^ To check the fluid level, insert the ATF level gauge until the cap contacts the top of the charging
pipe, with the gauge reversed from the normal inserted position as shown.
8. Check the fluid condition.
^ If the fluid is very dark or has some burned smell, there may bean internal problem with the
transmission. Flush the transmission cooling system after repairing the transmission.
^ If the ATF contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.) replace the radiator and flush the
transmission cooler line using cleaning solvent and compressed air after repairing the transmission.
9. Install the ATF level gauge in the fluid charging pipe and install the level gauge bolt.
10. Tighten the level gauge bolt to specification.
Level gauge bolt: Refer to "Components". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul
Page 2825
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 5327
Case 8
Page 4857
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 7267
Model 2F1310
REMOVAL
1. Put matching marks on the front propeller shaft flange yoke and the companion flange of the
front final drive as shown.
CAUTION: For matching marks, use paint. Never damage the flange yoke and companion flange of
the front final drive.
2. Remove the bolts and then remove the front propeller shaft from the front final drive and transfer.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
^ Inspect the propeller shaft tube runout. If run out exceeds the limit, replace the propeller shaft
assembly Propeller shaft runout limit: 0.6 mm (0.024 inch) or less
Page 1739
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 13605
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 3)
Page 972
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
NOTE: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "Components". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
Page 11940
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 6157
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8588
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 3231
Tighten the oil pan (lower) bolts in numerical order as shown.
Page 8595
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 1273
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 3)
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 4)
Page 4064
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 13051
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 460
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 14244
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 1901
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 2722
Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking)
Checking Final Drive Oil
Checking Final Drive Oil
COMPONENTS
NOTE: Rear final drive shown, front final drive similar.
Service and Repair
Wiper Switch: Service and Repair
Wiper and Washer Switch
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper washer switch connector. 3. Pinch tabs at
wiper and washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1121
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 6160
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Service and Repair
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Remove rear propeller shaft.
2. Remove transfer from transmission (4WD models). 3. Remove rear oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch rear extension assembly (2WD models) or adapter case
assembly (4WD models).
Installation
1. Install new rear oil seal until it is flush with component face into the extension case (2WD
models) using Tool, or adapter case (4WD models)
using suitable tool. Tool number: ST33400001 (J-26082)
CAUTION: ^
Apply ATF to rear oil seal.
^ Do not reuse rear oil seal.
2. Install transfer to transmission (4WD models).
Page 1837
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Wiper Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 8232
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 697
5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box.
6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3.
NOTE:
There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is
easily accessible.
7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3).
8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4).
Page 8544
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 872
Page 12591
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 13013
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 3731
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 6471
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 474
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 11384
BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic (Part 2)
Service and Repair
Windshield Washer Switch: Service and Repair
Wiper and Washer Switch
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
1. Remove steering column covers. 2. Remove wiper washer switch connector. 3. Pinch tabs at
wiper and washer switch base and slide switch away from steering column to remove.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 9624
Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Passenger) (Steps 19 - 22)
Page 9849
4. Insert the first new in-cabin microfilter into the front heater and cooling unit assembly housing
and slide it over to the right. Insert the second new
in-cabin microfilter into the front heater and cooling unit assembly housing.
NOTE: The in-cabin microfilters are marked with air flow arrows. The end of the microfilter with the
arrow should face the rear of the vehicle. The arrows should point downward.
5. Install the in-cabin microfilter cover.
6. Install the lower glove box in the instrument panel and secure it with the two hinge pins.
Page 5375
13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part.
16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
Page 6974
3. Disconnect the holder from the key cylinder and remove the key interlock cable.
Installation
1. Set key interlock cable to key cylinder and install holder. 2. Set selector lever to P position. 3.
Turn key to lock position.
4. Insert key interlock rod into adjuster holder. 5. Install casing cap to bracket. 6. Move slider in
order to lock adjuster holder to interlock rod.
CAUTION: ^
Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be damaged by sharp bends, twists or
interference with adjacent parts.
^ After installing key interlock cable to control device, make sure that casing cap and bracket are
firmly secured in their positions. If casing cap can be removed with an external load of less than
39.2 N (4.0 kg, 8.8 lbs.), replace key interlock cable with new one.
Page 5245
Check Sheet Part 1
Page 6493
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
A/C - Heater/Cooler Unit Assembly Replacement
Evaporator Case: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Heater/Cooler Unit Assembly Replacement
Classification: HA07-002
Reference: NTB07-017
Date: March 8, 2007
2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; HEATER AND COOLING UNIT ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is a need to replace the front heater and cooling unit assembly for any reason,
ACTION
Modify and re-route the blower motor harness branch so it will reach the new connection point.
NOTE:
In the new assembly, the blower motor position is rotated 120°.
PARTS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 1986
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 8629
Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Auto Active Test
Auto Active Test
DESCRIPTION
- In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive
signal to the following systems: Rear window defogger (crew cab only)
- Front wipers
- Tail, parking, and license lamps
- Front fog lamps
- Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
- A/C compressor (magnetic clutch)
- Cooling fan
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass
damage by wiper operation).
NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield
beforehand.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door
switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds
after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6. After a
series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF.
CAUTION: Be sure to perform BL-36, "Door Switch Check (King Cab)" when the auto active test
cannot be performed. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch Check (King Cab)
INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE
- When auto active test mode is actuated, the six steps are repeated three times.
Concept of Auto Active Test
- IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN
communication line. Therefore, when auto
Page 4022
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7722
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 14104
Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Steps
2 - 4)
Page 10869
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Service and Repair
Lower Side Moulding / Trim: Service and Repair
SIDE GUARD MOLDING
Removal and Installation A Double-faced adhesive tape application locations
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Never apply tack-paper adhesive remover to body panel surface finished with
lacquer-based paints.
- Original side guard molding is affixed to body panel with double-faced adhesive tape.
Page 5571
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II.
^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information.
2. Compare your printout to the chart.
a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3.
b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply.
^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information.
3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows:
Page 9665
Air Door Actuator / Motor: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner
Defroster Door Motor
DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the BCM. 2. Remove the audio amplifier, if equipped. 3. Disconnect the defroster door
motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the three screws and remove the defroster door motor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Intake Door Motor
INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
Page 11463
6. Repeat the cleaning procedure as needed.
^ After treating, the trim panel should be clean as shown in Figure 4 above.
7. Reinstall the trim panel parts removed in step 1.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 5091
Case 5
Description and Operation
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
VSS
Description
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the "ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)" by CAN communication line. The c combination meter then sends a signal to the
ECM by CAN communication line.
ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Component Description
The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from
combination meter and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these
signals for ASCD control. Refer to EC-29, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for
ASCD functions.
Page 9791
Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 6418
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 1389
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 2004
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 14006
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 5059
Check Sheet Part 1
Page 4701
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 14288
Optional Splice
Page 911
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 4983
Information Bus: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 12250
Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 12431
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 7455
13. Connect revolution sensor connector.
14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips.
15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal
CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level.
Page 258
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 1484
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 4786
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 10385
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis
Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis
Classification: EM09-013
Reference: NTB10-002
Date: January 12, 2010
DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS
APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s),
ACTION
Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any
repairs performed.
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Garage Jack and Safety Stand
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
CAUTION: Place a wooden or rubber block between safety stand and vehicle body when the
supporting body is flat.
Page 9923
Figure C-10, Figure C-11
c. Remove 2 bolts from each of the 3 bumper brackets shown in Figures C-10 and C-11.
6. Make sure the condenser fan electrical connector is disconnected.
IMPORTANT:
Do not lose the rubber seal from inside the connector.
Page 9079
vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which
are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil
penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to
new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory
before they are retailed.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS
REPAIR OVERVIEW
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Inspection Procedure 1: Seat Belt Retractors
Inspection Procedure 2: Air Bag Light / Codes
Inspection Procedure 3: Harness Damage
Install Update Kit: Replace Vinyl Tube with Corrugated Tube
Harness Replacement: Includes seat belt replacement, if needed.
Floor and Rear Door: Left and/or right side
Rear Cabin Wall Harness Branch: Left side only
High Mount Stop Lamp Harness Branch: Right side only
Side Curtain Air Bag Harness Branch: Right side only
PARTS INFORMATION
NOTE:
Order the body harness indicated in the electronic parts catalog. Your order will be automatically
superseded to the appropriate campaign service harness part number. As noted in steps 45 and 67
campaign service harnesses have some connectors taped to the harness. Those connectors may
or may not be utilized in the repair depending upon the optional equipment on the vehicle being
serviced.
Page 4042
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 11887
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Changeover Switch) Circuit Check (Step 3)
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Mirror Switch) Circuit Check (Step 1)
Warning Chime
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4433
^ D: Intake
NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
^ No. 1 cylinder compression TDC
^ Measure valve clearance using suitable tool.
CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully
warmed up engine are still within specifications.
9. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 270° from the position of No. 1 cylinder compression TDC
to obtain No. 3 cylinder compression TDC.
10. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table (locations
indicated with white arrow).
^ <- : Engine front
^ <- (black): Measurable at No.1 cylinder compression top dead center
^ <- (white): Measurable at No. 3 cylinder compression top dead center
^ A: RH
^ B: LH
^ C: Exhaust
^ D: Intake
NOTE: Firing order 1-8-7-2-3-6-5-4-2
^ No. 3 cylinder compression TDC
Page 5905
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 39
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 13081
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 13066
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 14424
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 12860
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9752
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 11895
Page 4313
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Description
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of exhaust valve cam sprocket to
identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder
identification signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to
change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 2938
^ Make sure the tire is evenly positioned on the lower safety humps.
5. WARNING: Do not exceed the tire manufactures recommended bead seating inflation pressure.
Generally this is 40psi.
If the bead does not seat with the appropriate pressure:
a. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
b. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
c. Remount the tire.
6. After inflating the tires, inspect the bead area.
^ Make sure bead is seated uniformly (the same) around the entire circumference of the wheel.
NOTE:
Many tires have Aligning Rings that will help confirm the bead is uniformly seated.
If uniform; bead is seated correctly. If not uniform
1. Break down the tire/rim assembly.
2. Re-apply lubricant as shown in Figures 1 and 2.
3. Remount the tire.
Page 1670
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 10084
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 8422
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Service and Repair Front Power Socket RH (For Cigarette Lighter), Front
Power Socket (Center Armrest), Console Power Socket
Front Power Socket RH (For Cigarette Lighter), Front Power Socket (Center Armrest), Console
Power Socket
REMOVAL
1. Remove inner socket from the ring, while pressing the hook on the ring out from square hole. 2.
Disconnect power socket connector. 3. Remove ring from power socket finisher while pressing
pawls.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5683
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1252
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 3805
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389)
Repair Overview
PARTS INFORMATION
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 5147
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
Front Propeller Shaft
Drive/Propeller Shaft: Service and Repair Front Propeller Shaft
Propeller Shaft Vibration
PROPELLER SHAFT VIBRATION
NOTE: If a vibration is present at high speed, inspect the propeller shaft runout first.
1. Measure the runout of the propeller shaft tube at several points by rotating the final drive
companion flange with your hands.
Propeller shaft runout limit: 0.6 mm (0.024 inch) or less
2. If the runout still exceeds specifications, disconnect the propeller shaft at the final drive
companion flange; then rotate the companion flange 90°,
180°, 270° and reconnect the propeller shaft.
3. Check the runout again. If the runout still exceeds specifications, replace the propeller shaft
assembly 4. After installation, check for vibration by driving the vehicle.
Inspection
INSPECTION
Inspect the propeller shaft tube for dents or cracks. If damaged, replace the propeller shaft
assembly
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
Front Axle
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Front Axle
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service
Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component
status (wear, damage) are normal.
WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION
^ Move wheel hub in the axial direction by hand. Make sure there is no looseness of wheel bearing.
Axial end play limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) or less
^ Rotate wheel hub and make sure there is no unusual noise or other irregular conditions. If there
are any irregular conditions, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly
Page 6651
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Locations
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 1030
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 1153
Wiper Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 10154
Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 7 - 9)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR
SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B2581 or B2582
is displayed. Without a CONSULT-II code 56 or 57 is indicated on front air control as a result of
conducting self-diagnosis.
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Page 3734
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 8964
Page 2471
^ Make sure the rear slide plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place.
NOTE:
Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep.
The Alignment Process
The Alignment Process
IMPORTANT:
Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the
alignment.
1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack.
^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in
Figure 4.
^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5).
^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then
re-enter the rack.
^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front
wheels straight.
Page 11218
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 14310
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 4246
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 9757
Page 10275
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 6351
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3.
Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower).
INSTALLATION
1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air cleaner case
(upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet).
Page 2999
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair 2-Pole Lift
2-Pole Lift
WARNING:
- When lifting the vehicle, open the lift arms as wide as possible and ensure that the front and rear
of the vehicle are well balanced.
- When setting the lift arm, do not allow the arm to contact the brake tubes, brake cable, or fuel
lines.
Page 11670
3. Reposition lid spring on the guide pins as shown in Figure 1.
4. Slide nylon washer onto the screw, then insert spring retention screw into the guide pin and
tighten the screw into place (see Figure 2).
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the other side.
6. Reinstall the cup holder/console finisher in reverse order of removal.
7. Check the cup holder lid to make sure it correctly operates and the incident is resolved.
Disclaimer
Page 8769
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 3030
Standard: 0.013 - 0.039 mm (0.0005 - 0.0015 inch) ^
If the measurement is not within specification, referring to each specification of the valve lifter
diameter and hole diameter, replace either or both the valve lifter and cylinder head.
Page 8350
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 9664
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Specifications
Valve Clearance: Specifications
Valve Clearance
Valve Lifter
Page 12381
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation ASCD Brake Switch
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Description
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is
turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Page 13935
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH (Steps 2 - 5)
Page 4422
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)
REMOVAL
1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. 2. Remove ignition coil.
3. Remove spark plug using suitable tool.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
^ Do not use a wire brush for cleaning.
^ If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure: Less
than 588 kPa (5.9 bar, 6 kg/cm2, 85 psi) Cleaning time: Less than 20 seconds
Page 3438
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 4036
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 5221
Case 10
Page 11309
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 3996
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 3743
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 3447
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 6693
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller
shaft.
^ Before removing final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness
connector from the assembly and move it away from final drive/rear axle assembly area. Failure to
do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative.
1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft.
^ Plug rear end of transfer.
3. Remove both RH and LH axle shafts. 4. Remove carrier cover bolts.
5. Remove carrier cover using Tool.
Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
^ Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the mating surface.
6. Remove differential lock solenoid connector (B) bolt and disconnect differential lock position
connector (A).
7. For installation, apply a paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap.
CAUTION: ^
Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to install them
in their original positions.
^ For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap.
8. Remove adjuster lock plates.
Diagrams
Multiple Junction Connector: Diagrams
Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) - Terminal Arrangement
Page 11216
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 12004
- Use a fender cover or large floor-mat. Place it with the seat back lying flat so you can reach the
underside of the seat.
Figure 3
10. Remove the four seat bottom cushion bolts-M8, 12 mm head (see Figure 3).
- Removing these bolts will release the cushion from the frame.
11. Remove the two seat track mounting tab bolts (M6, 10 mm head), one on each side. They re
near the cushion bolts you just removed (see Figure
3).
- Removing these bolts will release the seat slide rails from the "worm gears".
Figure 4
12. Remove the top screw only from the RH & LH side finishers (see Figure 4).
13. Remove both screws and finisher from the front edge of the seat (see Figure 4).
Figure 5
14. Disconnect the seat sub-harness connector from the slide motor (see Figure 5).
15. Remove two bolts, one from each side of the seat frame-M8, 12 mm head (see "Remove this
bolt first" in Figure 5).
Page 13750
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 1017
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Locations
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 13523
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 6268
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 6083
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
APP SENSOR
Component Description
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal
assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers
which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to
the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal
and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the
accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the
accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel
cut.
Page 1752
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 3699
Body Control Module: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5082
Case 9
Page 11379
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 9810
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 4221
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 11960
Sunroof Motor Assembly Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Step 4)
Page 3873
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 798
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 10067
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 14162
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 14443
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 11821
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Locations
Speaker: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13400
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 12416
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 9408
Components
REMOVAL
1. Support the rear final drive and suspension assembly using a suitable jack.
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Reference: NTB10-037A
Date: May 19, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE
INACCURACY
This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010
NHTSA #: 10V-074
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan
vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel
gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel
tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary
Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts
or labor.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 320
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 10346
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8869
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 2472
2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows:
^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates.
^ Center the turn plates to the tires.
^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel.
DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body.
Page 3226
EM-8
Page 3737
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 5737
ECM Inspection Table Part 4
Page 9726
After disconnecting ambient sensor connector E1, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2
at sensor component side, using the table. If NG, replace ambient sensor.
Page 2080
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 10820
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 6827
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
Page 13406
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 2808
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 9564
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 6865
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 2097
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Description and Operation
EVAP CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
The EVAP control system pressure sensor detects pressure in the purge line. The sensor output
voltage to the ECM increases as pressure increases.
Page 1147
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 12050
16. Remove the six nuts (3 on each side) and two base plates shown in Figure 5.
- Removing these nuts will release the gear boxes.
Figure 6
17. Slide both sides of the seat rail back to the rear position (towards the seat back) and remove
the worm gears, drive cable, motor, and gear boxes,
all as one unit, from the seat adjuster assembly (see Figure 6).
CAUTION:
Avoid bending the drive cable. Bending the cable will result in noise during seat operation.
18. Remove the drive cable from the Motor.
Figure 7
- To release the drive cable from the motor end, pull up on the tab using a small flat blade
screwdriver or equivalent (see Figure 7).
Install new Seat Slide Motor Kit
Figure 8
Page 10153
Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 3 - 6)
Page 4612
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 7311
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 8222
Page 13644
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 4689
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 1757
2. Check the fuel level on level gauge. If the fuel gauge indicates more than the level as shown (full
or almost full), drain the fuel from the fuel tank
until the fuel gauge indicates the level as shown, or less. If the fuel pump does not operate, use the following procedure to drain the fuel to the specified
level. a. Insert a suitable hose of less than 15 mm (0.59 in) diameter into the fuel filler pipe through
the fuel filler opening to drain the fuel from
fuel filler pipe.
b. Remove the LH rear wheel and tire.
c. Remove the fuel filler pipe shield.
d. Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler pipe and disconnect the vent hose quick
connector. e. Insert a suitable hose into the fuel tank through the fuel filler hose to drain the fuel
from the fuel tank.
3. Release the fuel pressure from the fuel lines. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 4.
Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 5. Remove the three nuts and remove fuel line pump
protector.
6. Disconnect the EVAP hose at the EVAP canister.
Page 14084
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 3524
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 7715
Page 8980
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Specifications
Power Steering Fluid: Specifications
Recommended fluid is Genuine Nissan PSF or equivalent.
Page 9751
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 8988
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 741
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 6156
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 11988
Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 14053
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 1316
Lifting Sensor (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Lifting Sensor (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 4333
Page 10029
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 1939
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 6186
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 7543
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9426
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Rear Axle
Axle Shaft
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Before removing the axle shaft, remove the ABS sensor to reposition the ABS sensor
out of the way. Failure to do so may result in damage to the ABS sensor and cause the ABS
sensor to become inoperative.
Page 9040
In both of these examples, the opening is larger than 2 mm (NG)
3. Any areas where you can see the wires inside the vinyl tube, measure the size of the opening.
^ OK; no opening in the vinyl tube or opening is 2 mm or smaller; replace the vinyl tube with the
corrugated tube - Update Kit.
^ NG; opening in the vinyl tube is larger than 2 mm: Replace the wire harness.
Update Kit Installation (Replace Vinyl Tube With Corrugated Tube)
1. Remove the body clip from the body (see Figure B1).
2. Remove the hinge rod clip from the hinge rod (see Figure B1).
3. Cut both clips off of the harness.
NOTE:
These clips will not be reused.
4. Remove the tape that is holding the door grommet to the vinyl tube (see Figure B1).
IMPORTANT:
Do not use a cutting tool to remove the tape. Remove it by hand so you won't damage the door
grommet.
Page 12347
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 9644
Diagnostic Procedure For Mode Door Motor (Steps 11 - 12)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MODE DOOR MOTOR
Air Mix Door Motor Circuit
Air Mix Door Motor Circuit
SYMPTOM:
- Discharge air temperature does not change.
- Air mix door motor (front) does not operate.
Page 10822
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 12853
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9273
Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Inspection After Disassembly
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Body Assembly Inspection Check the power steering oil pump body assembly for damage. If any
damage is found, replace with a new power steering oil pump assembly.
Page 5537
7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs.
Disclaimer
Page 13121
Page 5251
Case 4
Page 4073
ECM Inspection Table Part 7
Page 11389
3. BCM - Operation table of combination switch
- BCM reads operation status of combination switch by the combination shown in the table.
NOTE: Headlamp has a dual system switch.
4. Example operation: (When lighting switch 1st position turned ON)
- When lighting switch 1st position is turned ON, contact in combination switch turns ON. At this
time if OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5.
- When OUTPUT 4 transistor is ON, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5, and judges
lighting switch 1st position is ON. Then BCM sends tail lamp ON signal to IPDM E/R using CAN
communication.
- When OUTPUT 4 transistor is activated again, BCM detects that voltage changes in INPUT 5 and
recognizes that lighting switch 1st position is continuously ON.
NOTE: Each OUTPUT terminal transistor is activated at 10 ms intervals. Therefore, after a switch
is turned ON, electrical loads are activated with a time delay. But this time delay is so short that it
cannot be noticed.
5. Operation mode
- Combination switch reading function has operation modes as follows:
Page 13700
Trailer Lamps: Electrical Diagrams
Trailor Tow Schematic
LT-T/TOW
Page 8295
Page 13033
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 10694
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor
mechanism (see Figure 2).
2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor
mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip.
Page 5178
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start
engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition
switch OFF.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two
or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse
after servicing fuel system.
Page 4483
Page 7633
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 10140
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
^ For Titan and Armada: follow the procedure outlined in this bulletin for intake sensor replacement.
^ For Quest, Xterra, Frontier and Pathfinder: refer to the appropriate section in the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for intake sensor replacement.
1. Remove six bolts from the glove box.
2. Remove glove box. The intake sensor is located behind the glove box.
3. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
4. Remove the intake sensor by pulling it up and out from the front heater and cooling unit assy.
5. Install new intake sensor in reverse order of removal and connect the intake sensor electrical
connector.
6. Install glove box in reverse order of removal.
Page 8386
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 3314
EM-8
Locations
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 14210
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 13512
Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation
BRAKE SWITCH
Description
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is
depressed. This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.
Page 13835
Optional Splice
Page 8600
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 9576
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 1659
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 4484
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 4843
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 14199
Optional Splice
Page 12917
f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6).
^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit.
^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires).
^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing.
^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm.
4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
CAUTION:
DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump.
5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Page 8667
^ Each dealer was shipped one pair of Vinyl Tube Scissors.
^ Use these scissors when removing the wiring harness vinyl tubing during the installation of the
Update Kit.
CAUTION:
It is very important that you use the Vinyl Tube Scissors when removing the wiring harness vinyl
tubing. Failure to use the Vinyl Tube Scissors for this procedure could cause damage to the
electrical wiring and may affect vehicle electrical system functions.
^ Replacement or additional Vinyl Tube Scissors can be ordered by completing and faxing the
special tool order form which is available on NNAnet.com under My Documents in the
Parts/Campaign and Service/Campaign categories.
NOTE:
^ If replacement of a wiring harness is required, many trim and finisher parts will be removed.
^ Plastic "Trim Tool Set" J-46534 (an "essential tool") should be used when removing trim and
finisher parts. This tool is available from TECH-MATE.
Page 8848
Page 765
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Mechanical Specifications
Wheel Bearing
Page 6939
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 11307
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 483
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 5641
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 1144
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 7716
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 8151
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 10602
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 9765
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 61
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 11395
ITEMS OF EACH PART
Display Item List - Work Support
With Generic Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Without Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Page 13856
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 9104
34. Disconnect the 5 connectors shown in the figure.
NOTE:
The passenger side will have a 6th connector (not shown).
35. If the result for Inspection Procedure 1 was NG (seat belt retractor will not extend or retract;
remove the 2 seat belt retractor bolts and remove the seat belt.
^ During reassembly, install a new seat belt.
NOTE:
Seat belt retractor with seat belt pretensioner should be disposed of in accordance with local and
state regulations.
36. Take the harness loose from the door mounting points.
37. Pull the harness out of the door.
Harness Replacement Part 2 (Includes Seat Belt Replacement, If Needed)
Page 13725
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Locations
Power Mirror Switch: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6226
c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip.
d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab.
e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump.
^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector.
f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing.
CAUTION:
DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap.
Page 9106
44. Harness should now be completely loose-remove it from the vehicle.
NOTE:
The vehicle you are working on may have a differential lock control unit (not shown) mounted near
the sonar control unit.
45. Install the new harness in reverse order. Make sure of the following:
^ All harness mounting clips are installed in the correct locations.
^ Seat, seat belt, and parking brake pedal bolts are tightened to correct torque:
IMPORTANT:
^ During installation of the new harness you will find some connectors taped to the harness as
shown in the figure below.
^ Some of the connectors will be for options that the vehicle you are working on does not have.
Page 13746
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 8724
h. Take the shift finisher harness loose from the console.
i. At the front of the console, release harness mounting clips, disconnect harness connector, and
remove 2 screws.
j. Remove 4 screws from the bottom of the console compartments.
Page 5768
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 13680
Page 14427
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 266
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 9041
5. Mark the harness vinyl tube 10 mm above the spot where the body harness clip was located
(see Figure B2).
6. Mark the harness vinyl tube 15 mm from the door grommet (see Figure B2).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure you have marked the vinyl tube correctly.
^ You will be removing the vinyl tube between the marks that you just made.
^ It is very important that you remove only the amount of vinyl tube between the marks.
7. Using the Vinyl Tube Scissors carefully cut off the vinyl tube between the marks you made in
steps 5 and 6.
IMPORTANT:
^ DO NOT use a razorblade.
^ Keep the lower (protected-blunt end) shear of the scissors towards the wires inside the vinyl tube.
^ Don't damage the wires inside the vinyl tube.
CAUTION:
It is very important that you use the Vinyl Tube Scissors when removing the wiring harness vinyl
tubing. Failure to use the Vinyl Tube Scissors for this procedure could cause damage to the
electrical wiring and may affect vehicle electrical system functions.
Page 5521
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 8599
Power Distribution Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 687
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 4711
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II.
^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information.
2. Compare your printout to the chart.
a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3.
b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply.
^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information.
3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows:
Page 8008
3. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, then tighten the torque member bolts to the specified torque.
Refer to BR-24, "Components"
CAUTION: When attaching cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe any oil off knuckle spindle, washers and cylinder
body attachment surfaces.
- Do not reuse caliper torque member bolts.
4. Install brake hose to cylinder body, then tighten union bolt to specification. Refer to BR-24,
"Components".
CAUTION: -
Do not reuse copper washers for union bolt.
- Attach brake hose to cylinder body together with union bolt and washers.
5. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. 6. Attach tires to the vehicle.
Disassembly and Assembly
Front
Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Front
DISC ROTOR INSPECTION
Visual Inspection Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If any
of them is detected, replace applicable part.
Runout Inspection 1. Using wheel nuts, install disc rotor to wheel hub at 2 or more positions and
tighten wheel nuts temporarily to 40 ft. lbs.
2. Inspect runout using a dial gauge. (Measured at 10 mm (0.39 inch) inside the disc edge.)
Runout limit (on vehicle): 0.03 mm (0.001 inch)
NOTE: Make sure that wheel bearing axial end play is within the specifications before measuring
runout.
3. If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by shifting mounting positions of disc
rotor and wheel hub by one hole. 4. If runout still out of specification, turn rotor with on-car brake
lathe.
Thickness Inspection
Using a micrometer, check thickness of disc rotor. If thickness is either at or below the wear limit, or
exceeds maximum uneven wear, replace disc rotor.
Standard thickness: 26.0 mm (1.024 inch) Repair limit thickness: 24.5 mm (0.965 inch) Maximum
uneven wear (Measured at 8 positions): 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch)
Page 6509
Spark Plug: Application and ID
SPARK PLUG
Standard type ......................................................................................................................................
............................................................... PLFR5A-11 Hot type ...........................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
PLFR4A-11 Cold type ..........................................................................................................................
................................................................................. PLFR6A-11
Gap ......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................1.1 mm (0.043 in.)
Torque .................................................................................................................................................
.............................. 24.5 Nm (2.5 kgf-cm, 18 ft. lbs.)
Page 11553
12. Peel, then remove gray anti-rattle foam.
NOTE:
Gray anti-rattle foam will be re-used. Store with adhesive side up.
13. Disconnect latch switch connector (see Figure 8).
Page 4250
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 3588
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 14190
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 9148
> Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels
> Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and
inspections.
4. Check the target mounts.
^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before
performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11).
NOTE:
The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines.
Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment.
Page 6139
NOTE:
^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB.
Disclaimer
Page 4049
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 12927
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 840
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of
the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is
disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2
seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and
wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 6019
4. Check refueling EVAP vapor cut valve for being stuck to open as follows.
a. Connect vacuum pump to hose end. b. Remove fuel gauge retainer with fuel gauge unit. Always
replace O-ring with new one. c. Put fuel tank upside down. d. Apply vacuum pressure to hose end
[-13.3 kPa (-100 mmHg, -3.94 inHg)] with fuel gauge retainer remaining open and check that the
pressure is applicable.
Page 2157
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 4460
Component Parts Location
Page 4918
ECM Inspection Table Part 5
Page 4129
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 9828
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 286
Optional Splice
Page 7883
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor.
2. Install axle shaft assembly.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 966
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Page 6488
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 280
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 4348
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 9641
Mode door control system components are:
- Front air control
- Mode door motor
- PBR (built into mode door motor)
System Operation
The mode door position (vent, B/L, D/F, foot, and defrost) is set by the front air control by means of
the mode door motor. When a mode door position is selected on the front air control, voltage is
applied to one circuit of the mode door motor while ground is applied to the other circuit, causing
the mode door motor to rotate. The direction of rotation is determined by which circuit has voltage
applied to it, and which one has ground applied to it. The front air control monitors the mode door
position by measuring the voltage signal on the PBR circuit.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Mode Door Motor
The mode door motor is attached to the heater & cooling unit. It rotates so that air is discharged
from the outlet as indicated by the front air control. Motor rotation is conveyed to a link which
activates the mode door.
Page 6132
NOTE:
^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB.
Disclaimer
Page 11527
12. Peel, then remove gray anti-rattle foam.
NOTE:
Gray anti-rattle foam will be re-used. Store with adhesive side up.
13. Disconnect latch switch connector (see Figure 8).
Page 4191
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3158
Drive Belt: Adjustments
DRIVE BELT TENSION
There is no manual drive belt tension adjustment. The drive belt tension is automatically adjusted
by the auto tensioner.
Page 2331
Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
Components
Components
REMOVAL
Differential Lock Position Switch
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3360
NOTE:
^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB.
Disclaimer
Page 885
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 2639
3. Attach filter to bracket and filter hoses to fittings as shown.
Install Protector (2004 Armada ONLY)
1. Assemble the protector into the left rear wheelhouse as shown.
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Information Bus: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
With Manufacturer's Scan Tool
Diagnosis Procedure
Page 7632
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 5682
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 899
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 2577
12. Disconnect harness clips (2 clips).
13. Unbolt alternator and set aside.
14. Loosen, but do not remove, the bolts that hold the alternator and power steering pump
mounting bracket to the engine block (5 bolts).
NOTE:
^ When the power steering pump bracket bolts are loose, the pump/bracket assembly can be
rotated or shifted slightly clockwise and counterclockwise.
^ The best position for the bracket is when the clearance measured at the top and the bottom of the
pulleys are equal.
15. When the bracket is set to the best position, tighten the bolts (5 bolts).
^ Torque 60 Nm (6.11 kg-m, 44.25 ft-lb)
16. Install alternator in reverse order of removal.
Page 5847
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 12683
f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6).
^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit.
^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires).
^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing.
^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm.
4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
CAUTION:
DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump.
5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Page 1989
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ECT SENSOR
Component Description
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The
sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in
temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 7452
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
Page 8826
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Removal and Replacement
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Removal and Replacement
Front Coil Spring And Strut
Removal and Installation
Components
REMOVAL
1. Remove the wheel and tire using power tool.
Page 14498
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 6824
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
harness.
Page 4402
the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that
downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK,
engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the
cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive
Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all
over again: Engine stalls.
- Erroneous idle.
Page 4856
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 13748
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 878
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 9690
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 686
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 9625
Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Passenger) (Steps 23 - 25)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (PASSENGER)
Intake Door Motor Circuit
Intake Door Motor Circuit
SYMPTOM:
- Intake door does not change.
- Intake door motor does not operate normally.
Page 9559
Page 10814
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Locations
Throttle Position Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 6364
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
TP SENSOR
Component Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The
throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which
transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In
addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the
voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from
these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
Page 8955
Optional Splice
Page 10074
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 9720
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 5993
3. Attach filter to bracket and filter hoses to fittings as shown.
Install Protector (2004 Armada ONLY)
1. Assemble the protector into the left rear wheelhouse as shown.
Page 7910
WARNING: Do not deform the brake tube.
CAUTION: ^
Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the forwardmost
position (closest to the floor). This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals
(adjustable type only).
^ Do not disassemble the brake pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only).
^ Avoid damage from dropping the brake pedal assembly during handling.
^ Keep the brake pedal assembly away from water.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check brake pedal assembly for following items.
^ Crack or deformation of clevis pin stopper
^ Clevis pin deformation
^ Crack of any welded portion
^ Brake pedal bend
INSTALLATION
1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
^ Check the brake pedal for smooth operation. There should be no binding or sticking when
applying or releasing the brake pedal.
^ Check the brake pedal adjustable feature for smooth operation. There should be no binding or
sticking when adjusting the brake pedal forward or backward.
^ After installing the brake pedal assembly in the vehicle, be sure to adjust it.
Page 12062
Lifting Motor (Front) Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 12766
f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6).
^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit.
^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires).
^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing.
^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm.
4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
CAUTION:
DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump.
5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Page 1067
Page 917
Air Bag Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 8216
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 5129
Case 13
Case 14
NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Page 1775
Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
OPTICAL SENSOR
Removal
1. Remove defroster grille. "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY"
2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Turn the optical sensor counterclockwise to remove it from
defroster grille.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 6912
3. Install rear propeller shaft.
CAUTION: After completing installation, check for A/T fluid leakage and fluid level.
Page 5186
Case 8
Page 12033
- DO NOT replace the entire seat adjuster assembly when only a slide motor or gear assembly is
needed.
- This is the ONLY approved repair procedure for repair of seat slide motor or gear incidents on the
Applied Vehicles. A claim to Nissan for the repair of seat slide motor or gear incidents on the
Applied Vehicles may be denied if the repair is not performed exactly as outlined in this bulletin.
- The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Figure 1
NOTE: This is the ONLY approved repair procedure for seat slide motor or gear assembly incidents
on the Applied Vehicles. A claim to Nissan for the repair of seat slide motor or gear incidents on the
Applied Vehicles may be denied if the repair is not performed exactly as outlined in this bulletin.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 6479
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 299
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Service and Repair
Sunroof / Moonroof Weatherstrip: Service and Repair
WEATHERSTRIP
Visually check weatherstrip for any damage, deterioration, or flattening.
- In the case of leakage around glass lid, close glass lid and pour water around it to find the
damaged or gaped portion, remove glass lid assembly.
- If any damage is found, replace glass lid assembly.
CAUTION: Do not remove the weatherstrip.
Page 9814
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 3712
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 13939
Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (King
Cab) (Step 4)
Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Step
1)
Page 463
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11341
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7541
Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 10093
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 12984
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8838
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 14033
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 1142
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 14229
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Recall 06V064000: R/H Rear Door Upper Latch
Replacement
Rear Door Latch: Recalls Recall 06V064000: R/H Rear Door Upper Latch Replacement
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Nissan/Titan 2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North
America, Inc. NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 06V064000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: February 28,
2006
COMPONENT: Latches/Locks/Linkages: Doors: Latch
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 427
SUMMARY: Certain light trucks fail to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 206, "Door Locks and Door Retention Components." An arc weld is missing
on some right side rear door upper latch assemblies.
CONSEQUENCE: This may result in the right side doors coming partially open increasing the risk
of injury to occupants.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the upper latch assembly free of charge. The recall is expected to
begin on April 15, 2006. Owners may contact Nissan at 800-662-6200.
NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 12724
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 9715
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Locations
Page 4775
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 7599
Optional Splice
Page 9996
Figure D-20
Figure D-21
- Refer to Figures D-18 through D-21 for clip locations.
- Use the large 7 o'clock and 11 o'clock ribs for reference.
- Count the slots in the fan shroud to confirm locations for clips 3 and 4.
16. Install 2 tie-wraps on the fan motor cover.
- Use 1 inch (28 cm) tie-wraps from the protector kit.
Page 13854
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 1456
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 2160
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 13974
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 7858
Steering Angle Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Adjustment of Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), steering angle
sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or after adjusting wheel
alignment, be sure to adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor before running vehicle.
NOTE: Adjustment of steering angle sensor neutral position requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position. 2. Connect CONSULT-II and
CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and turn ignition switch ON (do not
start engine). 3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "ST ANGLE SENSOR ADJUSTMENT" on
CONSULT-II screen in this order.
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Do not touch steering wheel while adjusting steering angle sensor.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again. 7. Run vehicle with front wheels
in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR", "SELECTION FROM MENU",
and "STR ANGLE SIG" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that "STR ANGLE
SIG" is within 0 ± 3.5 deg. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 1 to 5.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
Page 8398
Auxiliary Power Outlet: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 1333
Sunroof Switch System Check
Page 5437
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 441
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 3736
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 7496
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Clean off the bolt area(s) where oil has leaked out.
2. Torque all three bearing retainer bolts (see picture below):
^ 19.6 - 23.5 Nm (1.2 - 2.4 Kg-m, 14.5 - 17.3 ft-lb).
^ If any of the bolts are missing, replace the transfer case assembly.
CAUTION:
Do NOT remove any of the bolts. Bearing damage may occur.
3. Add Nissan Matic "D" ATF to the transfer case as needed.
Page 9095
k. Remove 2 bolts from the sides of the console.
^ Left side is shown, right side not shown.
l. Remove the center console from the vehicle.
9. Disconnect the harness SRS connector from the SRS control unit.
10. Remove the rear seat from the vehicle:
a. Move the jack out of the way.
b. Remove the center seat belt retractor anchor bolt.
c. Remove the 8 seat mounting bolts.
Page 9981
Figure C-16
11. Install the condenser fan mounting bolt.
12. Install and torque 2 nuts to the air bag sensor.
- Torque: 15 N.m (1.52 Kg-m, 11 ft-lb)
- Apply medium strength thread-locker to the studs (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM005P or equivalent).
13. Make sure the Rubber Seal is inside the condenser fan electrical connector and then connect
the connector.
14. Install the bumper as follows:
For Titan and Armada with steel bumper do the following:
a. Lift bumper ON the locating tabs; both sides (see Figure C-18).
Page 2222
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 8503
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13171
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 984
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 5115
Case 15
Case 16
NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Page 5116
Check Sheet Part 1
Page 1409
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 862
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 11238
Collision Avoidance Sensor: Service and Repair
REAR SONAR SENSORS Refer to "Bumper; Service and Repair" for rear sonar sensor removal
and installation procedures.
Page 12988
Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R)
Battery Replacement
Classification: EL09-042
Reference: NTB09-118
Date: October 28, 2009
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR
RESET
APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below.
IF YOU CONFIRM
^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side.
And
^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery.
2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display.
NOTES:
^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage
the printed circuit board (PCB).
^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver.
Page 8186
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor.
2. Install axle shaft assembly.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 12750
f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6).
^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit.
^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires).
^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing.
^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm.
4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
CAUTION:
DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump.
5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Page 1065
Power Window Relay: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Rear Door Glass
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - CREW CAB".
2. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be
seen. 3. Remove the inside seal. 4. Remove the glass run from the partition glass. 5. Remove the
partition sash bolt (lower) and screw (upper) to remove the sash. 6. Remove the glass bolts and
the glass. 7. Remove the partition glass from the panel.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the partition glass in the panel. 2. Install the partition sash. 3. Install the glass from outside
to ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass the bolts to the specified
torque.
Glass bolts : 6.1 N-m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
4. Install the inside seal. 5. Install the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - CREW CAB".
Page 12868
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 7909
Adjustable Pedals
REMOVAL
CAUTION: ^
Before removal and installation the accelerator and brake pedals must be in the forwardmost
position (closest to the floor). This is to align the base position of the accelerator and brake pedals
(adjustable type only).
^ Do not disassemble the brake pedal adjusting mechanism (adjustable type only).
^ Avoid damage from dropping the brake pedal assembly during handling.
^ Keep the brake pedal assembly away from water.
1. Remove the lower instrument panel LH. 2. Remove the stop lamp switch and ASCD cancel
switch from the pedal assembly by turning 45° counterclockwise.
3. On adjustable pedal assembly, disconnect the adjustable brake pedal cable from the adjustable
pedal electric motor.
^ Unlock (1) then pull (2) the adjustable brake pedal cable to disconnect it from the adjustable
pedal electric motor as shown.
4. Remove snap pin and clevis pin from the clevis of brake booster. 5. Remove brake pedal
assembly nuts and the pedal assembly.
^ Temporarily install nuts by hand to support booster.
Page 7453
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
NOTE: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "Components". See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and
Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
Page 6310
Page 7756
2. Install differential lock position switch on axle housing and tighten differential lock position switch
bolts with the specified torque. Refer to
"COMPONENTS".
3. Install side bearing adjusters into axle housing.
4. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races
into axle housing. 5. Apply multi-purpose grease to differential lock position connector.
CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor connector.
6. Connect differential lock solenoid harness (B) and differential lock position switch connector (A).
Then install it to axle housing, tighten to the
specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
Page 2813
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 9799
Blower Motor: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner
Blower Motor
BLOWER MOTOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the glove box assembly. 2. Disconnect the blower motor electrical connector. 3.
Remove the three screws and remove the blower motor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Variable Blower Control
VARIABLE BLOWER CONTROL
Page 9782
Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Steps 6 - 9)
Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 2301
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 13546
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 8393
Page 9931
RECOMMENDATION: If this is your first time performing this Service Procedure, it is
recommended that you view the video clip on ASIST before starting. To view the video clip, open
the bulletin on ASIST and select "Video" at the bottom of the screen. To view the video full screen,
right click the center of the video screen and select "Full Screen".
Figure D-1
1. Remove the fan motor from the shroud as follows:
a. Disconnect the harness connector from the shroud.
b. Disconnect the harness from the shroud clip.
c. Remove the fan motor bolts x 3.
- Discard the bolts; they will not be reused.
d. Carefully separate the motor from the shroud:
Don't damage the fan harness.
Figure D-2
2. Thoroughly clean all dirt and debris from the top and sides of the fan motor and the fan motor
harness.
- Use a locally approved brake cleaner and a clean rag.
- The areas indicated must be completely clean to insure proper adhesion of the self adhesive
protectors.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Air Bag Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 11176
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 12876
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 1018
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 1624
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 7415
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 9933
Figure D-4
3. Install Protector 1 around the fan harness:
- Wrap / roll the protector tightly around the harness.
- While holding the protector rolled tightly, remove the adhesive backing and secure the protector.
NOTE:
The protector should slide on the harness.
Figure D-5
4. Remove the adhesive backing from Protector 2 and install it around protector 1:
- Fingers / slits on protector 2 must be facing the fan motor.
- Align the bottom of protector 2 fingers with the end of protector 1.
Page 5747
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Idle Air Volume Learning
Idle Air Volume Learning
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within
the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
- Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
- Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are
satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a
moment.
- Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
- Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 degrees C (158 - 212 degrees F)
- Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch: ON
- Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp) On vehicles equipped with daytime light
systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is start the headlamp will not be
illuminated.
- Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
- Vehicle speed: Stopped
- Transmission: Warmed-up With CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T"
system indicates less than 0.9 V.
- Without CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal
Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed
Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode.
6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds.
Page 9790
- Variable blower control
- Front blower motor
- Front blower motor relay
System Operation
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Variable Blower Control
The variable blower control is located on the cooling unit. The variable blower control receives a
gate voltage from the front air control to steplessly maintain the blower motor voltage in the 0 to 5
volt range (approx.).
Page 887
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
VDC/TCS/ABS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 10038
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 4193
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the
fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel
level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor
output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
Page 1105
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 543
7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs.
Disclaimer
Page 6336
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9811
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 5453
ITEMS OF EACH PART
Display Item List - Work Support
With Generic Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Without Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Page 5023
Input/output signal chart
TYPE 5/TYPE 6/TYPE 7
System diagram
System Diagram
- Type 5
System Diagram
- Type 6
Page 6496
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1514
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 4892
Page 5046
Example of Filling in Check Sheet When Initial Conditions Are Not Reproduced
1. See "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" of all units attached to the check sheet. If "CAN COMM CIRCUIT"
or "CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]" is
displayed, put a check mark to the applicable column of self-diagnostic results of the check sheet
table.
NOTE: For "ENGINE", "CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1001]" is displayed. Put a check mark to it.
- For "A/T", "CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]" is displayed. Put a check mark to it.
- For "AUTO DRIVE POS.", "CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]" is displayed. Put a check mark to it.
- For "BCM", "NO DTC IS DETECTED" is displayed. Do not put a check mark to it.
- For "HVAC", "NO DTC IS DETECTED" is displayed. Do not put a check mark to it.
- For "ABS", "CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]" is displayed. Put a check mark to it.
- For "IPDM E/R", "CAN COMM CIRCUIT [U1000]" is displayed. Put a check mark to it.
Page 4906
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 181
4. The "REPROGRAM START" window should appear (see Figure 18).
NOTE:
If you get an error message, refer to the ECU Reprogramming Software Operations Manual *.
* This is found in ASIST under:
CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-II info.
CAUTION DURING REPROGRAMMING:
^ Do not unplug CONSULT-II from the vehicle during reprogramming. Permanent ABS/VDC
damage can occur.
^ Do not open any door or the trunk during reprogramming.
^ On some vehicles, the cooling fans may come on during reprogramming. This is a normal
condition. Do not disconnect the cooling fans. Forgetting to reconnect them may cause severe
engine damage. A vehicle battery charger is needed* to maintain the battery voltage level during
reprogramming.
* You should have hooked up a battery charger in Section 1.
5. Press [START]. See Figure 18.
^ After a few seconds, the window shown in Figure 19 will appear.
^ The screen backlight in CONSULT-II will now turn OFF.
^ When the screen backlight goes OFF, ABS/VDC reprogramming has started.
Page 5628
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 9710
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 12608
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Fuel Pressure: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open
Acceleration
Classification: FE07-004
Reference: NTB07-040
Date: June 6, 2007
2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007
Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223
APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007
IF YOU CONFIRM
When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced,
ACTIONS
1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure).
2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump.
NOTE:
Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 4639
5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box.
6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3.
NOTE:
There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is
easily accessible.
7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3).
8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4).
Page 875
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 12959
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 8535
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 2180
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 4592
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Automatic Air Conditioner
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner
OIL
Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor
The oil in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add oil to compressor
when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to
maintain the specified amount.
If oil quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result:
- Lack of oil: May lead to a seized compressor
- Excessive oil: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference)
OIL
Name: NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S (DH-PS) or equivalent Part number: KLH00-PAGS0
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING
CAUTION: If excessive oil leakage is noted, do not perform the oil return operation.
Start the engine and set the following conditions:
Test Condition
- Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm
- A/C switch: On
- Blower fan speed: MAX position
- Temp. control: Optional [Set so that intake air temperature is 25 degrees to 30 degrees C (77
degrees to 86 degrees F)]
- Intake position: Recirculation
- Perform oil return operation for about ten minutes
Adjust the oil quantity according to the table.
Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor
After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of oil to the system.
Oil Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement
Page 12980
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 5701
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Balancing Wheels
Tires: Service and Repair Balancing Wheels
REMOVAL
1. Remove inner and outer balance weights from the wheel.
CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal.
2. Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the wheel.
CAUTION: After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from
the wheel.
WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT
^ If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode
setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for wheels.
1. Set wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. 2.
When inner and outer imbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer
imbalance value by 1.6 to determine balance
weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated
value and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the designated angle in relation to the
road wheel.
CAUTION: ^
Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight.
^ Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the wheel.
Indicated imbalance value x 5/3 = balance weight to be installed Calculation example: 23 grams
(0.81 ounces) x 5/3 = 38.33 grams (1.35 ounces) = 40 grams (1.41 ounces) balance weight (closer
to calculated balance weight value) Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated
balance weight value. Example: 37.4 grams = 35 grams (1.23 ounces) 37.5 grams = 40 grams
(1.41 ounces)
a. Install balance weight in the position shown. b. When installing balance weight to wheels, set it
into the grooved area on the inner wall of the wheel as shown so that the balance weight center
is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION: ^
Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights.
^ Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with new ones.
Service and Repair
Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
Components
Page 9723
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Testing and Inspection
Ambient Sensor Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Ambient Sensor
The ambient sensor is attached on the radiator core support (left side). It detects ambient
temperature and converts it into a value which is then input into the front air control.
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE INPUT PROCESS
The front air control includes a processing circuit for the ambient sensor input. However, when the
temperature detected by the ambient sensor increases quickly, the processing circuit retards the
front air control function. It only allows the front air control to recognize an ambient temperature
increase of 0.33 degree C (0.6 degree F) per 100 seconds.
This prevents constant adjustments due to momentary conditions, such as stopping after high
speed driving. Although the actual ambient temperature has not changed, the temperature
detected by the ambient sensor will increase. This is because the heat from the engine
compartment can radiate to the front grille area, location of the ambient sensor.
Diagnostic Procedure For Ambient Sensor (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 504
Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Work Support
WORK SUPPORT
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT
DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch "RESET SETTING VALUE" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. 4.
Touch "START". 5. "RESET SETTING VALUE OK?" is displayed, and touch "YES". 6. The setting
will be changed and "COMPLETED" will be displayed. 7. Touch "END".
Display Item List - Work Support
Display Item List
CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)
Page 2824
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 12558
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 2453
Page 1592
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9816
Page 8409
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 2404
Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Crew
Cab) (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 6481
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Locations
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 14434
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 4468
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13638
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Mirror Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 13330
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 3730
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Fuse Block-Junction Box (J/B)
Page 1829
Optional Splice
Page 9594
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 313
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 2575
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine and confirm:
^ if a squeak noise is coming from the drive belt
and
^ using a stethoscope or similar tool, if the drive belt auto tensioner is making abnormal noise.
2. Turn the engine off.
3. Write down the radio presets for later reprogramming.
4. Remove intake duct and engine cover.
5. Disconnect battery, negative cable first, and wait at least 3 minutes before proceeding to step 6.
6. Remove drive belt and drive belt auto tensioner. Refer to section EM of the Electronic Service
Manual for removal procedure.
7. Lift up vehicle by placing it on a hoist.
8. Remove front right wheel.
9. Remove fender protector. Refer to section EXT of the ESM for removal procedure.
10. Remove engine under cover (6 bolts).
11. Check the pulley alignment as follows:
Page 7708
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Testing and Inspection
Heated Glass Element Switch: Testing and Inspection
Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Check (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 1560
ERROR: stackunderflow
OFFENDING COMMAND: ~
STACK:
Diagram Information and Instructions
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Crash Zone Sensor
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Crash Zone Sensor
CRASH ZONE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
- Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
1. Remove front grille. 2. Disconnect the crash zone sensor harness connector. 3. Remove crash
zone sensor nuts.
CAUTION:
- Replace crash zone sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
- Do not disassemble crash zone sensor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- After the work is complete, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS- 20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures
Page 10315
Page 381
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 3472
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 8733
31. Snap loose the armrest. Use a plastic trim tool.
32. Remove the 3 bolts shown in Figure C40.
33. Remove the rear door panel.
^ Use a plastic trim tool.
Page 3035
3. Install the RH bank (B) and LH bank (D) camshaft brackets.
^ Install by referring to the installation location mark (E) on the upper surface.
^ Install so that the installation location mark (E) can be correctly read when viewed from the intake
manifold side.
^ Install No. 1 camshaft bracket using the following procedure:
^ a: 11 mm (0.43 inch)
^ b: 2.0 - 3.0 mm (0.079 - 0.118 inch) dia.
- Apply liquid gasket to No. 1 camshaft bracket as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or
equivalent.
CAUTION: ^
After installation, be sure to wipe off any excessive liquid gasket leaking from part (C) and (D) both
on RH and LH sides.
^ Remove completely any excess of liquid gasket inside bracket.
^ a: 2.6 - 3.6 mm (0.102 - 0.142 inch) dia.
- Apply liquid gasket (C) to the back side of the LH (A) bank front cover and RH (B) bank front
cover as shown. Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
Page 8338
Page 1596
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 4586
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 6269
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 6065
7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle
Air Volume Learning will not be carried out
successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
- It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
- It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Programming and
Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch
ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the
MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the
MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air
Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find
Page 2035
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine
operating condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range.
HO2S2 HEATER
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the
engine speed, amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the
A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst
Page 8157
CAUTION: ^
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
^ Adjust the steering angle sensor.
^ Calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
Page 5026
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 3
Input/output signal chart
TYPE 8/TYPE 9/TYPE 10/TYPE 11/TYPE 12/TYPE 13
System diagram
Page 7442
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Service and Repair
Oil Filter: Service and Repair
OIL FILTER
Removal and Installation REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine front undercover using power tool. 2. Remove the oil filter using Tool.
Tool number: KV10115801 (J-38956)
CAUTION: ^
The oil filter is provided with a relief valve. Use Genuine NISSAN oil filter or equivalent.
^ Be careful not to get burned when the engine and engine oil are hot.
^ When removing, prepare a shop cloth to absorb any engine oil leakage or spillage.
^ Do not allow engine oil to adhere to the drive belts.
^ Completely wipe off any engine oil that adheres to the engine and the vehicle.
INSTALLATION
1. Remove foreign materials adhering to the oil filter installation surface.
2. Apply engine oil to the oil seal circumference of the new oil filter.
3. Screw the oil filter manually until it touches the installation surface, then tighten it by 2/3 turn. Or
tighten to specification.
Oil filter: 17.7 Nm (1.8 kg-m, 13 ft. lbs.)
4. Inspect the engine for oil leakage. 5. Install the engine front undercover using power tool.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1. Check the engine oil level. 2. Start the engine and check for engine oil leakage. 3. Stop the
engine and wait for 10 minutes. 4. Check the engine oil level and add engine oil as required.
Page 8059
^ Assemble adjuster so that threaded part expands when rotating it in the direction shown by the
arrow.
^ Shorten adjuster by rotating it.
NOTE: After replacing brake shoes or disc rotors, or if brakes do not function well, perform break-in
operation as follows.
1. Adjust parking brake pedal stroke.
CAUTION: ^
To prevent lining from getting too hot, allow a cool off period of approximately 5 minutes after every
break-in operation.
^ Do not perform excessive break-in operations, because it may cause uneven or early wear of
lining.
2. Perform parking brake burnishing operation by driving the vehicle forward under the following
conditions:
^ Vehicle speed at 40 km/h (25 MPH)
^ Parking brake operating force of 196 N (20.0 kg, 44.1 ft. lbs.) set
^ For a period of 30 seconds
3. After burnishing operation, check pedal stroke of parking brake. Readjust if it is no longer at the
specified stroke.
Page 5409
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8412
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Specifications
Piston Ring: Specifications
PISTON RING SIDE CLEARANCE
^ Measure side clearance of the piston ring and piston ring groove using suitable tool. Standard:
Top ring: 0.035 - 0.085 mm (0.0014 - 0.0033 inch) 2nd ring: 0.030 - 0.070 mm (0.0012 - 0.0028
inch) Oil ring: 0.015 - 0.050 mm (0.0006 - 0.0020 inch) Limit: Top ring: 0.11 mm (0.0043 inch) 2nd
ring: 0.10 mm (0.0039 inch)
^ If out of specification, replace piston and/or piston ring assembly.
PISTON RING END GAP
^ Check if the diameter of the cylinder bore is within specification.
^ Insert the piston ring into the middle of the cylinder using the piston, and measure the gap.
Standard Top ring: 0.23 - 0.33 mm (0.0091 - 0.0130 inch) 2nd ring: 0.25 - 0.40 mm (0.0098 0.0157 inch) Oil ring: 0.20 - 0.60 mm (0.0079 - 0.0236 inch) Limit: Top ring: 0.56 mm (0.0220 inch)
2nd ring: 0.52 mm (0.0205 inch) Oil ring: 0.96 mm (0.0378 inch)
^ If out of specification, replace piston ring. If the gap still exceeds the limit even with a new ring,
re-bore the cylinder and use oversized piston and piston ring.
Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection
Seat Memory Switch: Testing and Inspection Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection
Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Page 4780
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 5450
Part 2
MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM
CAN Communication System Description
Refer to LAN-25, "Information Bus". See: Information Bus/Description and Operation/CAN
Communication
Page 1090
Power Window Relay: Testing and Inspection Rear Power Drop Glass Up Relay Check
Rear Power Drop Glass Up Relay Check (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 14074
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 4980
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 5698
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 4628
a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section
EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits).
NOTE:
This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different.
b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify
the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check.
C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the
terminal eyelet(s).
d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the
connections.
^ Both sides of the eyelet
^ Eyelet mounting surface
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Nut/bolt threads.
Page 6929
Page 9722
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 8353
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 13674
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 8896
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 9721
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1525
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 14307
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 9603
Diagnostic Procedure For Mode Door Motor (Steps 4 - 7)
Page 4562
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 12082
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Reclining Switch Inspection
Reclining Switch Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 7726
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 8961
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair
Brake Rotor/Disc: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair
Classification: BR00-004d
Reference: NTB00-033d
Date: August 8, 2007
ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all
previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and
provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur.
^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories:
a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or
released.
b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the
brakes are applied.
c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer.
2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above.
3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident.
BRAKE NOISE
^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no
repair action should be taken.
^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate
repair:
Squeak noise when the brakes are cold:
^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning.
^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary.
Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures:
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information
listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures.
Notes about brake pads and brake noise:
Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory.
^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of
the art resistance to squeal noise.
^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the
terms of the Nissan new car warranty.
Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very
attractive price.
Page 6653
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Rear Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check (Crew Cab)
Rear Door Window Motor: Testing and Inspection Rear Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check
(Crew Cab)
Rear Power Window Motor LH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 3)
Removal and Installation
Steering Gear: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
POWER STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
Removal and Installation
CAUTION: Spiral cable may snap due to steering operation if steering column is separated from
steering gear assembly. Therefore secure steering wheel to avoid turning.
REMOVAL
1. Turn wheels to the straight-ahead position. 2. Remove wheel and tire from vehicle using power
tool. 3. Remove undercover using power tool. 4. On 4WD model, remove front final drive, then
support drive shafts with wire.
5. Make sure slit of lower joint fits with the projection on rear cover cap, while checking that mark
on steering gear assembly aligns with mark on
rear cover cap.
6. Remove cotter pin at steering outer socket and discard, then loosen nut.
7. Remove steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool. Be careful not to damage ball
joint boot.
CAUTION: Temporarily tighten nut to prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming
off.
Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis
Drive Belt: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Drive Belt Noise Diagnosis
Classification: EM09-013
Reference: NTB10-002
Date: January 12, 2010
DRIVE BELT SYSTEM NOISE DIAGNOSIS
APPLIED VEHICLES All Nissan
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is noise coming from the drive belt(s), or drive belt pulley(s),
ACTION
Use the flow chart in this bulletin to help diagnose and identify the source / cause of the noise.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the indicated claims coding for any
repairs performed.
Page 1298
12. Remove and replace the switch.
13. Secure the switch harness with the 2 clips to the seat pan.
14. Roll the side facing trim down over the new seat switch. Re-attach the loose J-Clip back onto
the seat frame.
^ Make sure the upholstered edge is flat and smooth with no bumps. See Figure 9.
^ Make sure the upholstered edge is flat and level with the side of the switch. See Figure 9.
WARNING:
Make sure the J-Clip is securely attached. A loose J-Clip may affect OCS performance.
15. Install the switch plate and switch knobs.
16. Set the seat pan back onto the seat frame and secure with the 4 bolts. Torque 27.5 Nm (2.8
Kg-m, 20 ft-lb).
17. Re-attach the seat harnesses to the seat pan.
18. Re-attach the lower flap cover.
Page 4296
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 13701
LT-T/TOW-01
Balancing Wheels
Tires: Service and Repair Balancing Wheels
REMOVAL
1. Remove inner and outer balance weights from the wheel.
CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal.
2. Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the wheel.
CAUTION: After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from
the wheel.
WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT
^ If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode
setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for wheels.
1. Set wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. 2.
When inner and outer imbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer
imbalance value by 1.6 to determine balance
weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated
value and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the designated angle in relation to the
road wheel.
CAUTION: ^
Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight.
^ Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the wheel.
Indicated imbalance value x 5/3 = balance weight to be installed Calculation example: 23 grams
(0.81 ounces) x 5/3 = 38.33 grams (1.35 ounces) = 40 grams (1.41 ounces) balance weight (closer
to calculated balance weight value) Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated
balance weight value. Example: 37.4 grams = 35 grams (1.23 ounces) 37.5 grams = 40 grams
(1.41 ounces)
a. Install balance weight in the position shown. b. When installing balance weight to wheels, set it
into the grooved area on the inner wall of the wheel as shown so that the balance weight center
is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION: ^
Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights.
^ Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with new ones.
Page 12700
Optional Splice
Page 13044
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 11374
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 12537
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 7755
9. Remove side bearing caps.
10. Loosen the side bearing adjusters using Tool.
Tool number: - (C-4164)
11. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side
bearing adjusters together with bearing.
12. Remove side bearing adjusters from axle housing. 13. Remove bracket for the differential lock
position switch connector and bolts. 14. Remove differential lock position switch.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent.
CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to axle housing and differential lock position switch. Also
remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and axle housing and
differential lock position switch.
Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored
Engine Control Module: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored
Classification: EC06-001A
Reference: NTB06-009A
Date: March 31, 2006
MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information
sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of
this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
The MIL is "ON" with
^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR
^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit,
and
There are no drivability incidents.
DETERMINE IF
This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure.
ACTIONS
If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections:
^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections.
^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection.
^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left
side instrument stay assembly.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 12948
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 11888
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Mirror Switch) Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 13492
Page 13689
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 14500
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 14102
Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (King
Cab) (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 13799
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1457
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 10723
7. Attach harness attachment clips to new hole locations on seat pan.
8. Install connector attachment clip to seat bracket to attach buckle assy. to seat.
9. Reinstall seat cushion outer finisher.
10. Install seat in reverse order of removal.
11. Reconnect the battery cables (positive cable first).
12. Operate all switches to make sure everything works as it should.
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 4809
Page 4971
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 10640
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 13247
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 13117
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 10462
Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 3 - 4)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR
SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B2581 or B2582
is displayed.
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Intake Sensor
After disconnecting intake sensor connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at
sensor harness side, using the table.
Page 12005
16. Remove the six nuts (3 on each side) and two base plates shown in Figure 5.
- Removing these nuts will release the gear boxes.
Figure 6
17. Slide both sides of the seat rail back to the rear position (towards the seat back) and remove
the worm gears, drive cable, motor, and gear boxes,
all as one unit, from the seat adjuster assembly (see Figure 6).
CAUTION:
Avoid bending the drive cable. Bending the cable will result in noise during seat operation.
18. Remove the drive cable from the Motor.
Figure 7
- To release the drive cable from the motor end, pull up on the tab using a small flat blade
screwdriver or equivalent (see Figure 7).
Install new Seat Slide Motor Kit
Figure 8
Page 5164
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
Page 222
CAUTION: ^
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Page 8968
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 3239
b. Insert Tool between the oil pan (lower) and the oil pan (upper).
Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228)
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
- Do not insert a screwdriver, this will damage the mating surfaces.
c. Tap (1) Tool to insert it then slide (2) Tool by tapping its side with a hammer to remove the oil
pan (lower) from the oil pan (upper).
21. Remove the oil strainer from the oil pan (upper).
22. Remove the oil pan (upper) using the following steps.
a. Remove the oil pan (upper) bolts in the reverse order as shown.
b. Remove the oil pan (upper) from the cylinder block by prying it at the points shown using suitable
tool.
CAUTION: Do not damage mating surface.
23. Remove the O-rings from the oil pump and front cover.
CAUTION: Do not reuse O-rings.
Page 4028
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 740
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 9746
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 4939
ECM Inspection Table Part 8
Page 1437
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 6191
7. Remove fuel injector from fuel tube.
a. Spread open to remove clip. b. Remove fuel injector from the fuel tube by pulling straight out.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful with remaining fuel that may leak out from fuel tube.
^ Do not damage injector nozzle during removal.
^ Do not bump or drop fuel injectors.
^ Do not disassemble fuel injectors.
8. Remove fuel damper from each fuel tube.
INSTALLATION
1. Install fuel damper to each fuel tube.
a. Apply engine oil to O-ring and set it into the cap of fuel tube.
CAUTION: ^
Handle O-ring with bare hands. Never wear gloves.
^ Lubricate O-ring with new engine oil.
^ Do not clean O-ring with solvent.
^ Make sure that O-ring and its mating part are free of foreign material.
^ When installing O-ring, be careful not to scratch it with tool or fingernails. Also be careful not to
twist or stretch O-ring.
b. Make sure that backup spacer is in the O-ring connecting surface of fuel damper.
NOTE: Backup spacer is fuel damper assembly part.
c. Insert fuel damper until it seats on fuel tube.
CAUTION: ^
Insert straight, making sure that the axis is lined up.
^ Do not pressure-fit with excessive force.
Page 40
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 9419
Wheel Bearing: Fluid Type Specifications
NLGI No. 2 Multi Purpose Grease (Lithium Soap Base)
Page 8607
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 8448
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 8917
- When sleep request signal is received from BCM, mode is switched to sleep waiting status.
2. Sleep waiting status
- Process to stop CAN communication is activated.
- All systems controlled by IPDM E/R are stopped. When 1 second has elapsed after CAN
communication with other control units is stopped, mode switches to sleep status.
3. Sleep status
- IPDM E/R operates in low current-consumption mode.
- CAN communication is stopped.
- When a change in CAN communication signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
- When a change in ignition switch signal is detected, mode switches to CAN communication
status.
CAN Communication System Description
Refer to LAN-25, Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus
Automatic Air Conditioner
Heater Control Valve: Testing and Inspection Automatic Air Conditioner
Water Valve Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Water Valve
The water valve (1) cuts the flow of engine coolant to the front and rear heater cores to allow for
maximum cooling during A/C operation. It is controlled by the front air control.
Page 5774
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 14057
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5429
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 4997
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Calibration of Decel G Sensor
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Calibration of Decel G Sensor
Calibration of Decel G Sensor
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw
rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or
after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the decel G sensor before running vehicle.
NOTE: Calibration of decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position.
CAUTION: ^
The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle.
^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified
pressure value.
2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and
turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine).
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen
in this order.
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR",
"SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that
"DECEL G SEN" is
within ± 0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7662
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
NOTE: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "Components". See: Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and
Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
Page 12211
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Door Lock System
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 260
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 13931
Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Crew
Cab) (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 9091
b. Disconnect the electrical connectors.
c. Remove the 3 mounting bolts.
d. Remove the control unit from the vehicle.
7. If equipped with front bench seat (shifter on steering column), remove the center seat and cup
holder:
a. Remove the finisher at the rear of the center seat.
a. Remove the 4 center seat mounting bolts.
b. Remove the seat from the vehicle and place it in a clean area.
Page 4317
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1600
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements
Fluid - M/T: Technical Service Bulletins M/T - Warranty Repair Fluid Requirements
Classification: MT02-001B
Reference: NTB03-015B
Date: December 21, 21009
2001-2010 NISSAN; MANUAL TRANSMISSION OIL REQUIRED FOR WARRANTY REPAIRS
This bulletin has been amended. Please discard all copies of the earlier version.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2001-2010 Nissan Manual Transmission-Equipped Vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
If an Applied Vehicle equipped with Manual Transmission (MT) needs servicing for warranty
repairs, Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80,
or Nissan GTR R35 Special is required. See the chart above.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or
Nissan GTR R35 Special oil must be used when performing manual transmission repairs paid by
Nissan. These include warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs.
Nissan will not reimburse dealers for manual transmission repairs when Nissan Manual
Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85, Nissan TransElf NFJ 75W-80, or Nissan GTR R35
Special oil is not used.
Nissan recommends use of the above listed manual transmission fluids, which optimize shift
quality, for customer pay use as well.
Nissan Manual Transmission Fluid and all Nissan chemicals are ordered through the Direct Ship
Chemical Care Product Program.
Disclaimer
Page 7015
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch Ground Circuit Inspection
Page 10594
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 9881
Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch (Steps 7 - 9)
Specifications
Valve Seat
Page 6179
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 14311
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Description and Operation
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
FTT SENSOR
Component Description
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The
sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature.
The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Headlamp (For USA)
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7037
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 10459
Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 7 - 9)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE SENSOR
SYMPTOM: Intake sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B2581 or B2582
is displayed. Without a CONSULT-II code 56 or 57 is indicated on front air control as a result of
conducting self-diagnosis.
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Page 5672
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11918
Page 7687
Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Remove the
glove box assembly.
3. Disconnect transfer control unit connectors. 4. Remove the transfer control unit.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Transfer control unit
bolts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.)
^ After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer
assembly and transfer control unit. See: Transfer Case/Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage
Warnings/Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement
Diagram Information and Instructions
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 4805
Page 8046
Parking Brake Control: Testing and Inspection
INSPECTION
^ Make sure the components are attached properly, checking for looseness or backlash.
^ Check parking brake pedal assembly for bends, damage and cracks, and replace if necessary.
^ Check cable for wear and damage, and replace if necessary.
^ Check parking brake warning lamp switch for malfunction, and replace if necessary.
Page 3946
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 9084
In both of these examples, the opening is larger than 2 mm (NG)
3. Any areas where you can see the wires inside the vinyl tube, measure the size of the opening.
^ OK; no opening in the vinyl tube or opening is 2 mm or smaller; replace the vinyl tube with the
corrugated tube - Update Kit.
^ NG; opening in the vinyl tube is larger than 2 mm: Replace the wire harness.
Update Kit Installation (Replace Vinyl Tube With Corrugated Tube)
1. Remove the body clip from the body (see Figure B1).
2. Remove the hinge rod clip from the hinge rod (see Figure B1).
3. Cut both clips off of the harness.
NOTE:
These clips will not be reused.
4. Remove the tape that is holding the door grommet to the vinyl tube (see Figure B1).
IMPORTANT:
Do not use a cutting tool to remove the tape. Remove it by hand so you won't damage the door
grommet.
Page 10287
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 6)
Page 6225
2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows:
a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit
b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots
^ For Type A see Figure 1
^ For Type B see Figure 2
Entertainment Systems - Ticking From DVD Monitor
DVD Player: All Technical Service Bulletins Entertainment Systems - Ticking From DVD Monitor
Classification: BT07-001
Reference: NTB07-015
Date: February 23, 2007
2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN; TICKING NOISE FROM DVD MONITOR WHILE OPENED
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60) 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60)
APPLIED VINS: Vehicles built before: 5N1(******)7N701300 Vehicles built before:
1N6(******)7N202494
APPLIED DATE: Vehicles built before: August 31, 2006
IF YOU CONFIRM
Ticking noise coming from DVD Monitor while opened.
ACTIONS
^ Remove part of the roof console to access DVD wire.
^ Apply foam pad to wire and felt tape to hinge.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding table.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 1034
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 3462
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Testing and Inspection
Fuel Filler Cap: Testing and Inspection
FUEL TANK VACUUM RELIEF VALVE (BUILT INTO FUEL FILLER CAP)
1. Wipe clean valve housing.
2. Check valve opening pressure and vacuum.
Pressure: 15.3 - 20.0 kPa (0.156 - 0.204 kg/sq.cm, 2.22 - 2.90 psi) Vacuum: -6.0 to -3.3 kPa
(-0.061 to -0.034 kg/sq.cm, -0.87 to -0.48 psi)
3. If out of specification, replace fuel filler cap as an assembly.
CAUTION: Use only a genuine fuel filler cap as a replacement. If an incorrect fuel filler cap is used,
the MIL may come on.
Page 8032
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13718
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2771
Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant
Page 4725
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 8655
Page 5528
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 4747
Page 5463
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
BCM
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference
when configuring new BCM after installation. Refer to "Configuration". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
1. Disconnect battery negative cable. 2. Remove lower knee bolster.
3. Remove screw and release BCM. 4. Disconnect connectors and then remove BCM.
Installation
Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
- When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to "Configuration". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
- When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition
key IDs. Refer to BL-139, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)". See: Accessories
and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems
- When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system.
Refer to WT-15, "ID Registration Procedure".
Page 1025
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 3708
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
ABS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 4113
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 13139
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 10784
Seat Occupant Sensor: Service and Repair
OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
The occupant classification system control unit, occupant classification (pressure) sensor, and
bladder are an integral part of the front passenger seat cushion and are replaced as an assembly.
Refer to "Removal" to remove the seat, and "SEAT CUSHION TRIM AND PAD" to replace the seat
cushion.
Automatic Air Conditioner
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner
OIL
Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor
The oil in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add oil to compressor
when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to
maintain the specified amount.
If oil quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result:
- Lack of oil: May lead to a seized compressor
- Excessive oil: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference)
OIL
Name: NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S (DH-PS) or equivalent Part number: KLH00-PAGS0
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING
CAUTION: If excessive oil leakage is noted, do not perform the oil return operation.
Start the engine and set the following conditions:
Test Condition
- Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm
- A/C switch: On
- Blower fan speed: MAX position
- Temp. control: Optional [Set so that intake air temperature is 25 degrees to 30 degrees C (77
degrees to 86 degrees F)]
- Intake position: Recirculation
- Perform oil return operation for about ten minutes
Adjust the oil quantity according to the table.
Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor
After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of oil to the system.
Oil Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 2433
^ Make sure the rear slide plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place.
NOTE:
Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep.
The Alignment Process
The Alignment Process
IMPORTANT:
Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the
alignment.
1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack.
^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in
Figure 4.
^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5).
^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then
re-enter the rack.
^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front
wheels straight.
Page 6407
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Locations
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 10402
Page 6896
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Page 10803
Optional Splice
Page 7786
Disclaimer
Parts 1-4 Descriptions
There are 4 parts to this service procedure. They must be done in order.
Part 1: Make sure DTC C1179 is or can be stored in ABS self diagnosis.
^ Go to Part 1 for this part of the service procedure.
Part 2: Download special VDC Reprogramming Data from ASIST onto your standard 8 MB
(orange) Reprogramming Card.
^ Do NOT use the 16 MB (orange) "QR25 Campaign ECM Software" Card (# J-44200-ECMR-16).
If you use this card, it will be reformatted to an 8MB card.
^ Go to Part 2 for this part of the service procedure.
Part 3: Reprogram the VDC Control Unit with the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card (that now
contains the downloaded VDC reprogramming data from ASIST).
^ Go to Part 3 for this part of the service procedure.
Part 4: Re-program the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card back to its original format so it can be
used for standard ECU reprogramming.
^ Refer to Part 4 for this part of the service procedure.
NOTE:
These procedures should be performed in order by an OBD-II certified Technician.
Part 1
Part 1: Make sure DTC C1179 is, or can be, stored in ABS self diagnosis.
1. Using CONSULT-II, check ABS Self Diagnosis.
^ If DTC C1179 is stored, this bulletin applies; go to Part 2.
^ If DTC C1179 is not stored, go to the next step.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
Page 3825
Locations
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 8943
Component Parts Location
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12572
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 9045
16. Attach the new body clip to the body.
Final Quality Check
17. Check the air bag light operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition ON.
b. Look at the air bag light.
c. Make sure the air bag warning light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out.
Harness Replacement Part 1 (Includes Seat Belt Replacement, If Needed)
NOTE:
^ There are several model variations (power seats, audio, side air bag, navigation, etc). Due to
these variations the harness removal photos in this procedure may not have the exact interior trim,
connectors, and harness mounting locations as the vehicle you are working on.
^ It is recommended that you mark the harness mounting location during disassembly.
Floor and Rear Door (Left and/or Right Side)
^ This portion of the procedure is for the sections of the harness that are on the floor of the vehicle
(under the carpet) and inside the rear door.
^ The photos in this portion of the procedure are of the left side (driver side). If you are working on
the right side (passenger side) the photos are a mirror image.
1. Write down the radio station presets.
2. If equipped with power seats; move the seats to the "mid-point" position (half-way between full
forward and full rearward).
3. Put the gear selector in the Neutral position.
4. Disconnect both battery cables-negative cable first.
5. Remove the front seat.
a. Remove the 4 seat mounting bolts.
b. Disconnect all of the seat electrical connectors.
Locations
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 10081
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 6076
Accelerator Pedal: Service and Repair Non-Adjustable Accelerator Pedal Assembly
ACCELERATOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Removal and Installation
NON-ADJUSTABLE ACCELERATOR PEDAL ASSEMBLY
CAUTION:
- Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Removal
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Disconnect the
accelerator position sensor electrical connector. 3. Remove the two upper and one lower
accelerator pedal nuts. 4. Remove the adjustable accelerator pedal assembly.
CAUTION: Do not disassemble the accelerator pedal assembly.
- Do not remove the accelerator pedal position sensor from the accelerator pedal bracket.
- Avoid damage from dropping the accelerator pedal assembly during handling.
- Keep the accelerator pedal assembly away from water.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Inspection After Installation
- Check that the accelerator pedal moves smoothly within the specified range.
Page 5074
Case 1
Page 9005
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect negative battery cable.
2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover.
3. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and
remove the IPDM E/R.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 6082
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2900
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 5032
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 3
Input/output signal chart
TYPE 14/TYPE 15/TYPE 16/TYPE 17
System diagram
System Diagram
- Type 14
Page 2857
Page 9053
13. Remove the lower dash side finisher.
^ There is a plastic clip behind the parking brake lever.
14. Disconnect each of the connectors on the connector support.
15. Remove connectors from support. For each connecter that is not part of the body harness:
a. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to unlock the connector mounts,
b. Then slide the connectors forward to remove them from the connector support.
Page 1597
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Specifications
Shifter A/T: Specifications
Floor Shift Models
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Window Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 379
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 12784
Page 2156
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 1167
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 5580
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389)
Repair Overview
PARTS INFORMATION
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 4543
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 4046
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 1295
7. Using a plastic pry tool, remove the switch knobs and switch plate.
8. Remove the four bolts securing the seat pan to the frame. See Figure 3.
Page 728
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 2458
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 7706
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 2214
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 4842
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 1900
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 12692
2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows:
a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit
b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots
^ For Type A see Figure 1
^ For Type B see Figure 2
Adjustments
Front Door Striker: Adjustments
STRIKER ADJUSTMENT
1. Adjust the striker so that it becomes parallel with the lock insertion direction.
Striker Bolts: 16.6 N.m (1.7 kg-m, 12 ft-lb)
Page 5086
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
Page 8695
55. Remove the assist grip (passenger side only).
^ Open the side bolt covers.
^ Remove the 2 bolts.
56. Remove the dome lamp.
a. Remove the clear lamp cover
b. Remove the 2 screws.
c. Let the lamp hang by the electrical connector.
Steel Bumper
Front Bumper: Service and Repair Steel Bumper
FRONT BUMPER
Removal and Installation
Removal
1. Remove radiator grille. Refer to "FRONT GRILLE". 2. Remove engine under cover or skid plate.
3. Remove the fog lamp (if equipped). 4. Remove the front bumper side bracket nuts. 5. Remove
front bumper assembly. 6. Remove front bumper RH and LH side finishers.
Page 799
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 9633
Diagnostic Procedure For Defroster Door Motor (Steps 1 - 4)
Page 2216
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 5722
ECM Inspection Table Part 7
Page 3886
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use
Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036.
1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM.
a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other
damage.
Page 13887
Optional Splice
Page 10536
SRS Inspection (For Frontal Collision) Part 2
SRS INSPECTION (FOR FRONTAL COLLISION)
For Side and Rollover Collision
Check the SRS components using the table.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics
WHEN SRS IS ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE OR ROLLOVER COLLISION
1. Replace the following components:
- Front seat back assembly (on the side on which side air bag is activated)
- Diagnosis sensor unit
- (LH or RH) side air bag (satellite) sensor (on the side on which side air bag is activated)
2. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the table.
- Replace any SRS components and the related parts showing visible signs of damage (dents,
cracks, deformation).
3. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II and "AIR BAG" warning lamp. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS
Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire
SRS operates properly. See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics
WHEN SRS IS NOT ACTIVATED IN THE SIDE OR ROLLOVER COLLISION
1. Check the SRS components and the related parts using the table.
- If the front seat back assembly is damaged, the front seat back assembly must be replaced.
2. Conduct self-diagnosis using CONSULT-II and "AIR BAG" warning lamp. Refer to SRS-20, "SRS
Operation Check" for details. Ensure entire
SRS operates properly. See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and
General Diagnostics
Page 3508
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Suspension - Front End Popping/Squeaking/Clunking
Noises
Stabilizer Bushing: Customer Interest Suspension - Front End Popping/Squeaking/Clunking Noises
Classification: FA10-003A
Reference: NTB10-072A
Date: October 6, 2010
FRONT SUSPENSION NOISE
This bulletin has been amended. The PARTS INFORMATION section has been revised. No other
changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder
(R51) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
APPLIED VINS/DATES: 2004-2009 Armada: All 2010 Armada built before: 5N1(*)A(*)N(**)AN
6067281 Oct 23, 2009 2004-2009 Titan: All 2010 Titan built before: 1N6(*)A(****)AN 3037881 Oct
23, 2009 2005-2010 Frontier/Pathfinder/Xterra: All
IF YOU CONFIRM
A noise (clunking, squeaking, popping) can be heard when performing at least one of the following
actions:
^ turning the steering wheel left or right
^ driving over speed bumps
^ driving on rough roads
^ accelerating or decelerating
AND
The noise is coming from the front stabilizer bar bushing.
ACTIONS
Replace the front stabilizer bar bushing on both sides (RH & LH) with the part listed in the Parts
Information section of this bulletin.
^ Refer to the FSU section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal and
installation instructions.
Page 8946
Page 649
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 4038
Page 9003
Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Active Test
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG-MODE" screen. 2. Touch item to be tested, and
check operation. 3. Touch "START".
Part 1
Part 2
4. Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation.
Data Monitor
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
2. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "DATA
MONITOR" screen. 3. Touch "START". 4. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch
items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be
monitored. When "MAIN SIGNALS" is selected, predetermined items are monitored.
5. Touch RECORD while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop
recording, touch STOP.
Page 7013
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 8116
b. Keypad will appear (see Figure 6).
c. Using the digit keys on the keypad, enter ID Code 060402.
d. Then click the "Continue" button on the keypad.
^ After you click "Continue", the "CAUTION" screen will appear (see Figure 7).
Page 10861
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 10568
Optional Splice
Page 8089
2. Connect the AC power supply to CONSULT-II.
3. Connect CONSULT-II to the ASIST PC with the special Ethernet cable (P/N 02002554 is printed
on the cable).
a. Connect one end to CONSULT-II at the "PC port".
b. Connect the other end to the ASIST PC at the "Ethernet card" connection port.
4. Confirm the CONSULT-II date and time are correctly set as follows:
(This is necessary to provide a valid print-out for warranty claims.)
a. With the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming card in slot A, turn ON CONSULT-II.
b. Touch [SUB MODE]
c. Touch [SET DATE] (see Figure 2).
1) If the date is not correct, touch the [MONTH], [DAY] or [YEAR] as needed. Then adjust it by
using arrow keys. Once done, press [SAVE], press [BACK], and go to step d.
2) If the date is OK, press [BACK] and go to step d.
d. Touch [SET TIME] (see Figure 2).
1) If time is not correct, touch the [HOUR], [MINUTE] or [AM/PM] as needed. Then adjust it by
using arrow keys. After you are done, press [SAVE], press [BACK] and go to step 5.
2) If time is OK, press [BACK] and go to step 5.
IMPORTANT NOTE
^ If your ASIST PC has already been set up to perform ECU reprogramming, proceed to step 5.
^ If you are unsure whether your ASIST PC has already been set up for ECU reprogramming, look
in ASIST, under "CONSULT Utilities" - "CONSULT-II Info" - "NISSAN" - "ECU Reprogramming".
This will give you instructions for setting the Ethernet (IP) Address of the ASIST PC and
CONSULT-II. You will need to do this before performing ECU reprogramming.
DOWNLOAD (TRANSFER) DATA FROM ASIST INTO CONSULT-II (8 MB Orange Card)
Page 2893
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Page 55
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 10582
Air Bag Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 13721
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 274
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Relay Box: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 10086
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 5527
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 4575
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 6825
9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically.
Page 4524
Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage
Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision
Damage
Classification: FA10-006
Reference: NTB10-126
Date: October 21, 2010
WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight
indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise.
NOTE:
Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a
warrantable repair
If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension
damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows:
1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle.
2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands.
3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise).
4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one.
Page 4134
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
CAN Communication
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9756
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 1460
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 8230
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 1709
3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5):
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly.
a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap
in place.
^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down
(it should not move).
b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip.
^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib.
c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab.
d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6).
e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place.
Page 2735
Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Transfer Fluid Replacement
TRANSFER FLUID
Components
Page 5094
Case 8
Environmental Impact Information
Engine Oil: Environmental Impact Information
ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS
Dispose of used oil and used oil filters through authorized waste disposal contractors to licensed
waste disposal sites, or to the waste oil reclamation trade. If in doubt, contact the local authority for
advice on disposal facilities.
It is illegal to pour used oil on to the ground, down sewers or drains, or into water sources. The
regulations concerning pollution vary between regions.
Page 12802
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 8736
44. Harness should now be completely loose-remove it from the vehicle.
NOTE:
The vehicle you are working on may have a differential lock control unit (not shown) mounted near
the sonar control unit.
45. Install the new harness in reverse order. Make sure of the following:
^ All harness mounting clips are installed in the correct locations.
^ Seat, seat belt, and parking brake pedal bolts are tightened to correct torque:
IMPORTANT:
^ During installation of the new harness you will find some connectors taped to the harness as
shown in the figure below.
^ Some of the connectors will be for options that the vehicle you are working on does not have.
Page 4768
11. Enter the VIN into C-III two times (see Figure 7).
^ Touch the C-III screen in the "VIN box" before typing.
^ Make sure to use all CAPITAL LETTERS.
^ Use the VIN from the vehicle you are working on.
12. Select Start
13. Turn the ignition OFF, and wait 10 seconds.
14. After waiting 10 seconds, turn the ignition ON.
Page 4037
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 5824
concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in
the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement lambda = 1, but also in the lean and rich range.
Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a
wide lambda range (0.7 < lambda < air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump
and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygen pump cell so that the
composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at lambda = 1. Therefore, the
A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is
integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800 degrees C
(1,292 - 1,472 degrees F).
HO2S2
Component Description
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the
exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is
controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1 V in
richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation.
Page 6944
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 8959
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 9046
c. Remove the seat from the vehicle and place it in a clean area.
6. If equipped; remove sub woofer or navigation control unit.
Sub Woofer-under driver's seat
a. Disconnect the electrical connector
b. Remove the 3 mounting bolts.
c. Remove the sub-woofer from the vehicle.
Navigation Control Unit-under passenger seat
a. Remove the control unit cover; 2 bolts.
Page 1511
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 7040
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 237
CAUTION: ^
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
^ Adjust the steering angle sensor.
^ Calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
Page 3502
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 7464
9. Remove side bearing caps.
10. Loosen the side bearing adjusters using Tool.
Tool number: - (C-4164)
11. Keep side bearing outer races together with inner races. Do not mix them up. Also, keep side
bearing adjusters together with bearing.
12. Remove side bearing adjusters from axle housing. 13. Remove bracket for the differential lock
position switch connector and bolts. 14. Remove differential lock position switch.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply sealant to threads of differential lock position switch.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent.
CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to axle housing and differential lock position switch. Also
remove any moisture, oil, or foreign material adhering to application and axle housing and
differential lock position switch.
Page 6480
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 663
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 8195
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 13114
Page 9876
Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch (Steps 21 - 23)
Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts
Alignment: All Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Front End Alignment Cam Bolts
Classification: FA05-002D
Reference: NTB05-097D
Date: January 19, 2011
2005-2011 TITAN AND ARMADA; CAM BOLTS FOR FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT
The Applied Vehicles have been updated/amended. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2011 Titan (A60) 2005 - 2011 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINS 2005 Titan built after 1N6AA0(***)5N 566358 2005 Armada built after
5N1AA08(**)5N 733885 2006 - 2011 vehicles: All VINS
APPLIED DATE Vehicles built after June 2, 2005
IF YOU CONFIRM
An Applied Vehicle needs to have the front wheel alignment adjusted,
NOTE:
Applied Vehicles listed above come from the factory with non-adjustable bolts (Not Cam Bolts) for
the lower link (lower control arm) mounting.
ACTIONS
1. Remove the original lower link mounting bolts, washers, and nuts - 2 per side.
^ Refer to section FSU in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for lower link mounting bolt
locations.
2. Install new bolts (cam bolts), cam washers and new nuts.
^ New parts are listed in the Parts Information section of this bulletin.
NOTE:
Cam bolts are used to adjust caster and camber.
3. Perform front wheel alignment per the ESM.
PARTS INFORMATION
Locations
Fuel Level Sensor: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10991
DVD Player: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 10334
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 13349
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 2596
17. Clean the crankshaft pulley belt ribs/grooves.
^ Remove the debris by hand with a wire brush.
^ Do not use a power tool.
18. Install belt tensioner. Replace if it was found to be noisy.
19. Install new drive belt. Refer to section EM of the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for
installation procedure.
20. Connect harness clips.
21. Install fender protector. Refer to section EXT of the ESM for installation procedure.
22. Install front right wheel.
23. Lower the vehicle.
24. Re-connect battery cable, positive side first.
25. Start engine.
26. Confirm the issue is resolved.
27. Reprogram the radio presets.
28. Reinitialize the power sunroof.
Page 1932
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 3307
EM-1
Page 5710
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 10309
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 4175
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 10891
Key Switch (Insert) Check (Column Shift) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 4888
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 13399
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 914
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 13154
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 10876
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 1809
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 2605
2. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley axial/lateral (back and
forth) movement (see Example 2):
^ Maximum movement specification is 1 mm.
^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended.
Idler Pulley / Manual Tensioner Inspection (if equipped)
No more than 1 mm of pulley rock should be visible.
Alternator One-way Clutch Pulley Inspection
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the rotor.
NOTE:
The following steps can be done while the alternator is installed on the vehicle if the drive belt is
removed and the alternator electrical connectors are disconnected.
1. Secure the rotor using a medium size screwdriver and a rolled shop towel.
2. Turn the pulley clockwise when viewed from the front.
^ Pulley should be locked.
^ If it rotates in both directions, replace the alternator.
3. Turn the pulley counterclockwise when viewed from the front.
Page 1237
Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch)
Check (Crew Cab)
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 635
Page 9332
LINK REPLACEMENT
1. For front lower link(s) identified as needing replacement:
Use the appropriate illustration in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual, section FSU, for
link replacement information.
^ Make sure to replace the ball joint securing nut with a new one. New nut is listed in the Parts
Information.
^ Make sure to replace both lower link nuts with new ones. New nuts are listed in the Parts
Information.
NOTE:
The original (factory installed) bolts for the front lower links are self centering and should not need
replacement. The vehicle should need toe adjustment only.
^ Follow torque specifications in the illustrations.
Page 124
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 3628
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 2085
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 4981
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 7009
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 10055
Control Operation
TEMPERATURE CONTROL DIAL (TEMPERATURE CONTROL)
Increases or decreases the set temperature.
RECIRCULATION SWITCH
- When REC switch is ON, REC switch indicator turns ON, and air inlet is set to REC.
- When REC switch is turned OFF, or when compressor is turned from ON to OFF, REC switch is
automatically turned OFF. REC mode can be re-entered by pressing REC switch again.
- REC switch is not operated when DEF switch is turned ON, at the D/F position or in floor mode.
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER SWITCH (CREW CAB)
When switch is ON, rear window and door mirrors are defogged.
OFF SWITCH (BLOWER SPEED SET TO 0)
The compressor and blower are OFF, the intake doors are set to the outside air position, and the
air outlet doors are set to the foot position.
A/C SWITCH
The compressor is ON or OFF.
MODE CONTROL DIAL
Controls the air discharge outlets through control of the mode and defroster doors.
FRONT BLOWER CONTROL DIAL
Manually control the blower speed. Fourteen speeds are available for manual control.
Page 1274
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 9363
Front Steering Knuckle: Service and Repair Front Suspension
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service
KNUCKLE
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of
each component and component status (wear, damage) are within specifications.
Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation
Page 439
Component Parts Location
Page 6164
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 10608
Clockspring Assembly / Spiral Cable: Service and Repair
SPIRAL CABLE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
- Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
- When servicing the SRS, do not work from directly in front of air bag module.
1. Set the front wheels in the straight-ahead position. 2. Remove driver air bag module. 3. Remove
the steering wheel center nut. 4. Disconnect the steering wheel switch/ horn connector from the
spiral cable. 5. Remove the steering wheel. 6. Remove the column cover upper and lower.
7. Remove wiper washer switch connector, then pinch the tabs at wiper and washer switch base
and slide switch away from steering column to
remove.
Page 6570
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 2102
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2019
Knock Sensor: Connector Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 11171
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 13861
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 2032
13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part.
16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
Page 2246
Neutral Safety Switch: Testing and Inspection A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection
(Floor Shift)
A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Floor Shift) (Steps 1 - 2)
A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Floor Shift) (Step 3)
Page 12708
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 9691
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 1425
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 13459
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 3531
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 14234
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 8997
4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Self-Diagnostic Results
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Self-diagnosis results are
displayed.
Display Item List - Self-Diagnostic Results
Display Item List
Page 3518
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 11355
Page 5228
Check Sheet Part 3
Check Sheet Results (Example)
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
Page 6212
f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6).
^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit.
^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires).
^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing.
^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm.
4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
CAUTION:
DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump.
5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Page 5130
Check Sheet Part 1
Page 10845
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 13594
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 14315
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 9798
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL RH AND GLOVE
BOX". 2. Disconnect the variable blower control electrical connector. 3. Remove the two screws
and remove the variable blower control.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 8856
Multiple Junction Connector: Description and Operation
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
Page 2179
Knock Sensor: Connector Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 13551
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 5403
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 14386
Page 5795
Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check
Page 869
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 4810
Page 13649
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 12484
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 270
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 3585
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 5308
Case 8
Page 4531
not, configuration which is set automatically by selecting vehicle model cannot be memorized.
11. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
If "CANCEL" is touched, it will return to previous screen.
12. Wait until the next screen during setting.
13. WRITE CONFIGURATION results are printed out automatically. Confirm "WRITE
CONFIGURATION" is correctly executed by comparing
sheet automatically printed out with applicable configuration list shown in step 9.
Page 1940
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 6486
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Relay Box: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 14264
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 3445
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 10288
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 9)
Page 8271
7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs.
Disclaimer
Page 6881
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 5668
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 9182
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a customers reports their "vehicle pulls" or the "steering wheel is off-center," use the Diagnostic
Flow Chart below and the other information in this bulletin to diagnose and correct the issue.
Diagnostic Flow Chart
Road Test
Determine if the vehicle has a pull or steering wheel off-center issue that requires repair.
IMPORTANT:
^ If the vehicle has any tire issues, such as:
> Tires that are different sizes (except when specified from the factory)
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
Page 12403
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 11400
8. Configuration of current BCM is printed out automatically. A listing of manual setting items and
auto setting items will be displayed. Auto setting
items are preset and cannot be changed. Manual setting items can be set by using WRITE
CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE".
9. Touch "BACK" on "READ CONFIGURATION" screen.
WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
Page 10091
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 8236
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 5350
ABLS models
VDC models
Page 1851
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 10405
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Non-Trouble Code Procedures
Power Supply Circuit Inspection
Page 8206
Optional Splice
Locations
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 711
Page 6411
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 6289
13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air Volume Learning will not
be carried out successfully. In this case, find
the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that
downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK,
engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the
cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive
Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all
over again: Engine stalls.
- Erroneous idle.
Page 10665
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 2523
Fuel Pressure: Testing and Inspection
FUEL PRESSURE CHECK
CAUTION:
- Before disconnecting fuel line, release fuel pressure from fuel line to eliminate danger.
- Be careful not to scratch or get the fuel hose connection area dirty when servicing, so that the
quick connector O-ring maintains sealability.
- Use Fuel Pressure Gauge Kit J-44321 and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 to check fuel
pressure.
- Do not perform fuel pressure check with electrical system operating (i.e. lights, rear defog, A/C,
etc.). Fuel pressure gauge may indicate false readings due to varying engine loads and changes in
manifold vacuum.
NOTE: Prepare pans or saucers under the disconnected fuel line because the fuel may spill out.
The fuel pressure cannot be completely released because A60 models do not have fuel return
system.
1. Release fuel pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE". 2. Remove engine
cover. 3. Remove fuel hose using Quick Connector Release J-45488.
- Do not twist or kink fuel hose because it is plastic hose.
- Do not remove fuel hose from quick connector.
- Keep fuel hose connections clean.
4. Install Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6 and Fuel Pressure Gauge (from kit J-44321) as shown
in figure.
- Do not distort or bend fuel rail tube when installing fuel pressure gauge adapter.
- When reconnecting fuel hose, check the original fuel hose for damage and abnormality.
5. Turn ignition switch ON (reactivate fuel pump), and check for fuel leakage. 6. Start engine and
check for fuel leakage. 7. Read the indication of fuel pressure gauge.
- During fuel pressure check, check for fuel leakage from fuel connection every 3 minutes.
At idling: Approximately 350 kPa (3.57 kg/sq.cm, 51 psi)
8. If result is unsatisfactory, go to next step. 9. Check the following.
- Fuel hoses and fuel tubes for clogging
- Fuel filter for clogging
- Fuel pump
- Fuel pressure regulator for clogging If OK, replace fuel pressure regulator. If NG, repair or
replace.
10. Before disconnecting Fuel Pressure Gauge and Fuel Pressure Adapter J-44321-6, release fuel
pressure to zero. Refer to "FUEL PRESSURE
RELEASE".
Page 4086
ECM Inspection Table Part 2
Page 12233
1. Write down the radio station presets.
2. Move / adjust the passenger seat bottom and seatback to the middle and upright positions.
3. Turn the ignition OFF. Disconnect both 12V battery cables, negative cable first, and wait at least
3 minutes before proceeding to step 4.
CAUTION:
Do not drop, tilt, or bump the side air bag module while removing/installing the seat. Always handle
it with care.
4. Remove the four bolts holding the seat to the body.
5. Place the seat, back side down, on a clean covered workbench.
6. Remove the lower flap cover.
Page 12805
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 10264
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 11358
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 7978
wrench.
Brake Judder Repair
^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series
On-Car Brake Lathe.
^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe.
^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout
(see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin).
PEDAL FEEL
^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes.
^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer
comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car.
^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and
determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items:
a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely.
b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly
installed.
c. Bleed all air from the brake system.
d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of
the appropriate service manual.
NOTE:
Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and
adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE.
BRAKE SERVICE
To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to:
1. Finish rotors properly.
^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise.
^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for
rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information).
2. Correctly install pads and shims.
IMPORTANT:
Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for
proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations.
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
3. Perform the following post-installation checks.
^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary.
^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance,
including noise.
a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph).
b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph
(50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds.
c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without
stopping.
Page 1952
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 3159
Drive Belt: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation REMOVAL
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly.
2. Install Tool on drive belt auto tensioner pulley bolt, move in the direction of arrow (loosening
direction of tensioner) as shown.
Tool number: - (J-46535)
CAUTION: Avoid placing hand in a location where pinching may occur if the holding tool
accidentally comes off.
3. Remove the drive belt.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Make sure belt is securely installed around all pulleys.
^ Rotate the crankshaft pulley several turns clockwise to equalize belt tension between pulleys.
^ Make sure belt tension is within the allowable working range, using the indicator notch on the
drive belt auto tensioner.
Page 21
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 5296
Case 13
Locations
Camshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 9927
Figure C-17, Figure C-18
b. Install and Torque 4 bumper bolts (see Figure C-17).
Torque: 14.2 N.m (1.45 kg-m, 10 ft-lb)
Figure C-19
c. Install and Torque the bumper bolt shown in Figure C-19.
Page 12426
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 11558
b. Pull release handle on door (see Figure 15).
NOTE:
Upper door latch should close and open without binding or use of excessive force.
23. Reinstall door panel and seatbelt retractor cover.
24. Reinstall three door panel bolts, then reinstall armrest.
CAUTION:
Door panel bolts thread into plastic. Use a Phillips screwdriver to install.
25. Reinstall upper seat belt anchor bolt.
Page 9940
- Pay close attention to the tie wrap locations. Count the slots in the fan shroud to confirm correct
tie-wrap locations.
15. Install the fan motor cover:
- Make sure the 4 clips are installed in the correct locations.
Figure D-18
Figure D-19
Page 9827
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 13901
Power Window Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 35
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 4133
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 4919
ECM Inspection Table Part 6
Page 2138
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 10063
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 5709
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 8712
Inspection Procedure 1 (Front Seatbelt Retractors)
1. Extend (pull out) the front seat belt, and then let it retract (pull back).
2. Confirm the seat belt extends and retracts.
NG: Replace the seat belt and wire harness for that side.
OK: Go to Inspection Procedure 2.
Inspection Procedure 2 ( Air Bag Warning Light / Codes Stored)
Page 14112
8. Remove the bolts and the regulator and motor assembly.
Installation
1. Position the regulator and motor assembly and install the bolts.
Regulator and motor assembly 7.5 N·m (0.76 Kg-m, 66 in-lb)
2. Connect the rear window motor wiring harness connector.
3. Install the rear window.
- While installing the rear window, make sure that the bottom clips are engaged on the back panel,
then rotate the glass into position.
Page 7742
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
Page 2862
Low Tire Pressure Indicator: Description and Operation
Low Tire Pressure Warning Light
After the ignition switch is turned ON, this light comes on for about 1 second and turns off.
This light warns of low tire pressure.
NISSAN's low tire pressure warning system is a tire pressure monitoring system. It monitors tire
pressure of all tires except the spare. When the tire pressure monitoring system warning light is lit,
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated, You should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's tire
information placard. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can
lead to tire malfunction. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efticiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability. Each tire, including the spare, should be checked
monthly when cold and set to the recommended inflation pressure as specified in the vehicle
placard and Owner's Manual.
The recommended inflation pressure may also be found on the Tire and Loading Information label.
It the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the light will illuminate and the chime will sound
for about 10 seconds.
Page 2141
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 14402
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Diagnostic Procedure
Page 13108
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 7979
d. Repeat steps 1, 2, and 3 ten times to complete the burnishing process.
4. Follow-up to ensure customer satisfaction, safety, and proper brake performance.
^ Confirm the procedures described in steps 2 - 4 above have been strictly followed.
ROTOR INDEXING
When installing a new rotor, a rotor that has been surfaced off the car, or a rotor that has been
removed for any reason, use the following indexing procedure to ensure the minimum amount of
rotor run-out.
1. Make sure the rotor is fully contacting the hub. Clean the rotor-to-hub surface if it is rusty.
NOTE:
For cleaning the hub surface, specifically around the wheel studs, it is recommended to use the
Wheel Hub Cleaning Kit # J-42450-A, which can be ordered from Nissan TECH-MATE.
2. Install the rotor and all lug nuts. Tighten the lug nuts to 40 ft-lbs (for this indexing process only).
3. Place a reference mark on the rotor and hub.
4. Measure rotor run-out with a dial indicator. If the run-out is above limit continue with step 5.
For more detail of the run-out limit refer to the ESM.
5. Remove the lug nuts and shift the position of the rotor one lug clockwise, then reinstall the lug
nuts and torque to 40 ft-lbs (again, for this indexing process only).
^ Repeat step 4 and 5 until the rotor is positioned with the least amount of runout.
6. After you find the position with the least amount of runout, if the runout is still more than the limit,
you'll need to turn (resurface) the new rotors using the ProCut(TM) PFM Series on-car brake lathe.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Please reference the current Nissan "Warranty Flat Rate Manual" and submit your claim(s) using
the Operation Code (Op Code) or combination of Op Codes that best describes the operations
performed.
Disclaimer
Page 1893
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 12942
Page 11932
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair
Brake Drum: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair
Classification: BR00-004d
Reference: NTB00-033d
Date: August 8, 2007
ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all
previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and
provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur.
^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories:
a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or
released.
b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the
brakes are applied.
c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer.
2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above.
3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident.
BRAKE NOISE
^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no
repair action should be taken.
^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate
repair:
Squeak noise when the brakes are cold:
^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning.
^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary.
Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures:
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information
listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures.
Notes about brake pads and brake noise:
Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory.
^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of
the art resistance to squeal noise.
^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the
terms of the Nissan new car warranty.
Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very
attractive price.
Page 11383
Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic (Part 1)
Page 1358
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 1502
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 252
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 1974
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MAF SENSOR
Component Description
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by
measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows
around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to the hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of
the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
Page 9336
Page 5320
Case 1
Page 1408
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 14214
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 14060
Page 10023
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 10852
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 14064
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 7977
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
BRAKE JUDDER
^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out.
Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not
parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see
Figure 1).
Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on
each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this
point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation
(see Figure 2).
^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake
pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering
wheel.
Vehicle Storage:
^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the
brake pads will rust.
^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface
will be different.
^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off.
Lug Nut Overtorque:
^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over
tightened, especially with an air impact
Page 572
Service and Repair
Rear Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
REAR DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Rear Door Glass
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - CREW CAB".
2. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be
seen. 3. Remove the inside seal. 4. Remove the glass run from the partition glass. 5. Remove the
partition sash bolt (lower) and screw (upper) to remove the sash. 6. Remove the glass bolts and
the glass. 7. Remove the partition glass from the panel.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the partition glass in the panel. 2. Install the partition sash. 3. Install the glass from outside
to ensure that it is in both the front and rear glass channels. Tighten glass the bolts to the specified
torque.
Glass bolts : 6.1 N-m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
4. Install the inside seal. 5. Install the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - CREW CAB".
Page 8591
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 12763
2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows:
a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit
b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots
^ For Type A see Figure 1
^ For Type B see Figure 2
Page 14490
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 3081
^ Measure point "H". Distance from the top: 39 mm (1.54 inch)
Piston to Cylinder Bore Clearance ^
Calculate by using diameter of the piston skirt and the cylinder bore diameter (direction X, position
B). (Clearance) = (Cylinder bore diameter) - (piston skirt diameter) Standard: 0.010 - 0.030 mm
(0.0004 - 0.0012 inch) Limit: 0.08 mm (0.0031 inch)
^ If calculation exceeds the limit, replace piston/piston pin assembly.
Reboring Cylinder Bore 1. Cylinder bore size is determined by adding piston-to-bore clearance to
piston diameter "A".
Rebored size calculation: D = A + B - C where, D: Bored diameter A: Piston diameter as measured
B: Piston - to - bore clearance (standard value) C: Honing allowance 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch)
2. Install main bearing caps, and tighten them to the specified torque. Otherwise, cylinder bores
may be distorted in final assembly. 3. Cut the cylinder bores.
NOTE: ^
When any cylinder needs boring, all other cylinders must also be bored.
^ Do not cut too much out of cylinder bore at one time. Cut only 0.05 mm (0.0020 inch) or so in
diameter at a time.
4. Hone cylinders to obtain the specified piston-to-bore clearance. 5. Measure finished cylinder
bore for out-of-round and taper.
NOTE: Measurement should be done after cylinder bore cools down.
PISTON, PISTON RING AND PISTON PIN
Page 815
ECM Inspection Table Part 5
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab)
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Crew Cab)
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 5173
Case 9
Page 268
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 3790
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use
Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036.
1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM.
a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other
damage.
Page 3709
Optional Splice
Page 8945
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Service and Repair
Console Lamp: Service and Repair
CONSOLE ILLUMINATION LAMP (if equipped)
Removal
The console illumination lamp (1) is replaced as part of the map lamp assembly (2). Refer to
INTERIOR ROOM LAMP.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Bulb Replacement
1. Disconnect the negative battery terminal. 2. Remove overhead console. Refer to INTERIOR HEADLINER.
3. Rotate console illumination lamp bulb (1) counterclockwise, then pull straight out away from map
lamp assembly (2) to remove.
Page 14083
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 13810
Page 2606
^ Pulley should turn with some dragging
^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator.
Page 9826
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 753
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 175
CAUTION:
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE ETHERNET CABLE UNTIL THE DATA TRANSFER IS COMPLETE
(SEE FIGURE 10).
^ If the cable is disconnected before the data transfer is complete, you MUST restart the transfer
(download) procedure; otherwise ABSNDC damage can occur.
^ If this happens accidentally; wait for ASIST to display an "error" message, then click on "OK".
Reconnect the cable, select "Backup", then return to step 6.
9. Transfer (download) data from ASIST into CONSULT-II.
a. On the ASIST screen, click on "OKAY" (see Figure 8).
b. Verify CONSULT-II IP Address (see Figure 9). Then click on "OK".
^ Your IP address may differ based on the network configuration.
Recall R0616 - Rear Door Wiring Harness
Technical Service Bulletin # 07-009 Date: 070216
Recall R0616 - Rear Door Wiring Harness
RECALL CAMPAIGN BULLETIN
Reference: NTBO7-009
Date: February 16, 2007
VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 TITAN REAR DOOR HARNESS
CAMPAIGN I.D. # R0616
NHTSA # : 06V-459
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) King Cab only
APPLIED VINs: 2004: 1N6*A06A*4N 500006 - 593463 1N6*A06B*4N 500000 - 593471
2005: 1N6*A06A*5N 500002 - 580219 1N6*A06B*5N 500007 - 580226
2006: 1N6*A06A*6N 500003 - 576810 1N6*A06B*6N 500000 - 576805
NOTE:
Use Service Comm to determine campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan has determined that on some 2004 - 2006 model year Titan King Cab vehicles, a defect
that relates to motor vehicle safety exists.
In some affected vehicles, there is the possibility that the wires in the harness routed through the
rear doors and into the body on each side of the vehicle may break due to over bending of the
harness as the doors are opened and closed. The wires in the harness control various systems
including the seat belt pretensioners, the passenger side seat belt tension sensor, and rear audio
speakers.
If the wire for the seat belt pretensioners breaks and makes contact with a wire for the speaker,
there is a possibility that the pretensioner may deploy and tighten the seat belt. If this happens
when the belt is retracted, it will not be possible to use the seat belt. If one of the wires for the seat
belt tension sensor breaks inside the passenger side harness, the passenger side front air bag will
not deploy as designed in a frontal crash. Nissan is conducting a Voluntary Recall Campaign to
inspect the wire harness cover for damage and, if necessary, a new wiring harness with a new type
cover will be installed and rerouted.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R0616 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
NUMBER OF VEHICLES POTENTIALLY AFFECTED
The number of vehicles potentially affected is approximately 96,500
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealers responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and
Page 12939
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 2006
Fuel Level Sensor: Description and Operation
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
Component Description
The fuel level sensor is mounted in the fuel level sensor unit. The sensor detects a fuel level in the
fuel tank and transmits a signal to the combination meter. The combination meter sends the fuel
level sensor signal to the ECM through CAN communication line.
It consists of two parts, one is mechanical float and the other is variable resistor. Fuel level sensor
output voltage changes depending on the movement of the fuel mechanical float.
Page 8603
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 10020
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 6247
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 3181
Drive Belt Tensioner: Service and Repair
DRIVE BELTS
REMOVAL
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the drive belt. 3. Remove the drive belt
auto tensioner and idler pulley using power tool.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2604
Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped)
1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side)
movement (see Example 1):
^ See above table for maximum movement specification.
^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended.
Service and Repair
Video Cassette Player / Recorder: Service and Repair
VIDEO MONITOR
Removal
1. Remove rear roof console assembly.Refer to "HEADLINING". 2. Disconnect the video monitor
connector.
3. Remove the video housing screws. 4. Remove the video monitor and housing.
5. Remove the video monitor hinge screws and remove the video, monitor.
Installation
Installation is in reverse order of removal.
Page 9961
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Required Special Tools........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................3 Repair Overview (flow chart)..........................
..............................................................................................................................................................
..........3 Service Procedure (Armada / Titan)........................................................................................
................................................................................................5
Procedure A: Identify Fan Type............................................................................................................
..............................................................................5 Procedure B: Cooling Fan Motor Inspection........
..............................................................................................................................................................
9
Comparison Chart: RPM to Fan Motor Voltage....................................................................................
.....................................................................15
Procedure C: Remove and Install or Replace the Condenser Fan Assembly
................................................................................................................... 17 Procedure D: Install
Protective Covering to Fan Motor and Harness
..............................................................................................................................30 Procedure E:
Install Maxi Fuse...................................................................................................................................
......................................................41 Procedure F: Confirm Fan Operation........................................
........................................................................................................................................45
Parts Information..................................................................................................................................
.................................................................................46 Claims Information..........................................
..............................................................................................................................................................
.......48 Owner's Letter..........................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................49
Required Special Tools:
- Any of these special tools can be ordered from TECH-MATE.
Fluke 73 Digital Multimeter and Test Leads (Fluke 73 Digital Multimeter is part of the J-48602
QR25 Engine Kit).
Fan Motor Tester: Part of test kit J-49489
- Part number for Fan Motor Tester - J-49489-1
Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000
Stored
Classification: EC06-001A
Reference: NTB06-009A
Date: March 31, 2006
MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information
sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of
this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
The MIL is "ON" with
^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR
^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit,
and
There are no drivability incidents.
DETERMINE IF
This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure.
ACTIONS
If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections:
^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections.
^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection.
^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left
side instrument stay assembly.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 10312
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 8514
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 11337
Component Parts Location
Page 9085
5. Mark the harness vinyl tube 10 mm above the spot where the body harness clip was located
(see Figure B2).
6. Mark the harness vinyl tube 15 mm from the door grommet (see Figure B2).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure you have marked the vinyl tube correctly.
^ You will be removing the vinyl tube between the marks that you just made.
^ It is very important that you remove only the amount of vinyl tube between the marks.
7. Using the Vinyl Tube Scissors carefully cut off the vinyl tube between the marks you made in
steps 5 and 6.
IMPORTANT:
^ DO NOT use a razorblade.
^ Keep the lower (protected-blunt end) shear of the scissors towards the wires inside the vinyl tube.
^ Don't damage the wires inside the vinyl tube.
CAUTION:
It is very important that you use the Vinyl Tube Scissors when removing the wiring harness vinyl
tubing. Failure to use the Vinyl Tube Scissors for this procedure could cause damage to the
electrical wiring and may affect vehicle electrical system functions.
Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD)
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation Automatic Speed Control Device (ASCD)
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Description
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is
turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Page 10160
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner
INTAKE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel.
2. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
NOTE: The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the
A/C evaporator cover.
3. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the heater and cooling unit assembly.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3662
Exhaust Manifold: Service and Repair Removal And Installation
EXHAUST MANIFOLD AND THREE WAY CATALYST
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: Perform the work when the exhaust and cooling system have cooled sufficiently. 1.
Remove the engine undercover (rear) using power tool (4WD models). 2. Remove front final drive
assembly (4WD models). . 3. Remove the main muffler assembly and center exhaust tube. . 4.
Remove the front exhaust tubes. . 5. Remove front tires. . 6. Remove fender protectors. . 7.
Remove the LH and RH air fuel ratio A/F sensors. Follow steps below to remove each air fuel ratio A/F sensor. a. Remove the harness connector of
each air fuel ratio A/F sensor, and harness from bracket and middle clamp.
b. Remove the air fuel ratio A/F sensors from both LH and RH exhaust manifolds using Tool.
Tool number : - (J-44626)
CAUTION: Do not damage the air fuel ratio A/F sensors
Discard any air fuel ratio A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5m
(19.7 in) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor. Replace it with a new one.
8. Support the engine using a suitable tool.
9. Remove the exhaust manifold (LH) (A) following the steps below. Arrow indicates Front
- B: Exhaust manifold (RH) a. Remove the engine mounting insulator. . b. Remove the exhaust
manifold cover. c. Remove the engine mounting bracket. . d. Loosen the nuts in reverse order as
shown using power tool. e. Remove the exhaust manifold (LH) (A).
Page 6790
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 4327
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 9272
Power Steering Pump: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY
NOTE: Mount the power steering oil pump in a vise as needed.
1. Remove the connector bolt, connector and copper washers.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper washers.
2. Remove the suction pipe and O-ring.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the O-ring.
3. Remove the pulley nut and pulley. 4. Remove the bracket bolts and bracket.
ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly
CAUTION: Do not reuse the copper gaskets Do not reuse the O-ring. Apply a coat of Genuine
Nissan PSF or equivalent to the O-ring.
Page 4523
ITEMS OF EACH PART
Display Item List - Work Support
With Generic Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Without Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Page 13338
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 6266
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 9508
Tire
Page 1230
Door Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (King Cab)
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 1)
Locations
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 7810
3. Make sure the transmission is in Park and the brake pedal is released.
IMPORTANT:
Do not push the brake pedal until step 6.
4. Start the engine and let it idle.
^ Keep the transmission in Park.
5. On CONSULT-II, select ABS Data Monitor.
6. Slowly push the brake pedal approximately 2 inches, then release.
NOTE:
2 inches is approximately half-way between the pedal "see height" and "depressed height".
7. Repeat step 6 ten times.
^ If DTC C1179 is detected (comes up on CONSULT-II), this bulletin applies; go to Part 2.
^ If DTC C1179 is not detected, go to the next step.
8. Repeat steps 2 though 7.
^ If you have done steps 2 through 7 twice, and DIG C1179 is not detected, this bulletin does not
apply. Go to ASIST for further diagnostic information.
Part 2
Part 2: Download special ABS/VDC Reprogramming Data from ASIST onto your standard 8 MB
(orange) Reprogramming Card.
This part of the procedure involves two general steps:
^ Setting up
^ Download (transfer) data from ASIST into CONSULT-II (8 MB orange Reprogramming card).
SETTING UP:
1. Install the standard 8 MB (orange)
Reprogramming Card into CONSULT-II.
Use slot A-top slot (see Figure 1).
CAUTION:
Do NOT use the 16 MB (orange) "QR25 Campaign ECM Software" Card (# J-44200-ECMR-16). If
you use this card, it will be reformatted to an 8 MB card.
Page 11184
Optional Splice
Page 5445
Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM and IPDM E/R
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R
- Panic system.
- Vehicle security (theft warning) system.
- NVIS (NATS) system.
- Headlamp, tail lamp, front fog lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems.
- Front wiper and washer system.
Page 14319
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 11648
2. Remove plastic bolt cover located on the side of the armrest.
3. Remove bolt and armrest assembly.
4. a. Push the insert out of the armrest as shown in Figure 3 using a suitable tool.
b. Remove the insert as shown in Figure 4.
Page 9724
Diagnostic Procedure For Ambient Sensor (Steps 3 - 6)
Page 12342
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 14090
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab)
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 5052
Inspection Between Differential Lock Control Unit And Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit
Inspection Between Differential Lock Control Unit And Data Link Connector Circuit (Step 1)
Page 6669
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 13845
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: Customer Interest Tire Monitor System - TPMS
Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Page 8407
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 10722
4. Unclip harness attachment clips from seat pan.
5. Unclip connector attachment clip from seat bracket to remove buckle assy from seat.
6. install seat belt buckle and bolt.
Page 259
Blower Motor Relay: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 3143
A. Set straight edge on front surface of crankshaft pulley to check the clearance at the top of the
pump pulley. See Figure 2.
B. Check clearance of lower part of the power steering pump pulley and crankshaft pulley. See
Figure 3.
NOTE:
The goal is to make sure the power steering pump pulley is aligned as true as possible with the
crankshaft pulley.
^ If the pulleys are aligned there is no need to adjust the bracket, skip ahead to step 17.
^ If the pulleys are not aligned, go on to step 12.
Page 10006
Page 12944
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 6967
13. Connect revolution sensor connector.
14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips.
15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal
CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level.
Page 32
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 8563
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Distribution Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 11362
Page 9774
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 4029
Optional Splice
Page 742
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 11387
Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM and IPDM E/R
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R
- Panic system.
- Vehicle security (theft warning) system.
- NVIS (NATS) system.
- Headlamp, tail lamp, front fog lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems.
- Front wiper and washer system.
Specifications
Valve Guide
Page 6962
9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically.
Service and Repair
Courtesy Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
Page 1192
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Automatic Air Conditioner
Heater Core: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner
HEATER CORE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. See: Heating and Air Conditioning/Housing
Assembly HVAC/Service and Repair 2. Remove the four screws and remove the upper bracket.
Page 9925
a. Install the jumper harness on the new fan motor as show.
- New fan assembly and harness kit are listed in the Parts Information.
b. Go to Installation of the fan assembly.
Figure C-14
Jumper harness installation on NEW 140 watt fan assembly
Install Condenser Fan Assembly
Figure C-15
10. Pull the bumper forward and install the fan assembly.
Page 9859
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair
IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the cluster lid D.
2. Remove the two screws and remove the in-vehicle sensor from cluster lid D.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 221
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. 3. Drain the brake
fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit).
CAUTION: ^
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts
and brake tubes from being damaged.
^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench. Tighten brake tubes to specification
when installing.
^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with
new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system.
Page 7780
Page 2369
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5235
Case 7
Page 7369
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
Page 5119
Case 2
Page 8371
Neutral Safety Switch: Testing and Inspection A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection
(Floor Shift)
A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Floor Shift) (Steps 1 - 2)
A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Floor Shift) (Step 3)
Page 11857
Other Mirror Types
Disclaimer
Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Page 5503
Attachment General Procedure
Page 8403
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 13179
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 10567
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 14224
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 3969
Page 835
ECM Inspection Table Part 7
Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection
Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 130
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 2136
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 14203
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 13890
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Service and Repair
License Plate Bulb: Service and Repair
Page 10863
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Brakes - Brake/ABS Lamp ON/Pedal Vibration/DTC C1179
Technical Service Bulletin # 06-040 Date: 060512
Brakes - Brake/ABS Lamp ON/Pedal Vibration/DTC C1179
Classification: BR06-007
Reference: NTB06-040
Date: May 12, 2006
2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; ABS AND/OR BRAKE
WARNING LIGHT ON WITH DTC C1179
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) equipped with VDC 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60)
equipped with VDC
IF YOU CONFIRM
A customer reports:
^ The brake warning light is or was ON, and/or
^ The ABS warning light is or was ON, and/or
^ There is or was vibration* in the brake pedal while braking.
* This vibration is the rapid consistent-speed pedal pulsation that is felt when the ABS is activated.
ACTIONS
^ Make sure this bulletin applies (see Part 1 of the Service Procedure). If this bulletin does not
apply, refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding shown.
Page 8572
Power Distribution Module: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2150
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 10724
13. Reprogram the radio station presets.
14. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual and perform the following as needed:
^ Power Window Initialization
^ Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
^ Throttle Valve closed Position Learning
^ Idle Air Volume Learning
^ Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position
NOTE:
You may need to inform the customer that their Automatic Drive Position will need to be reset.
Page 2941
Tires: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 5231
Case 3
Page 1954
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 13148
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 2311
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 8673
^ Slide the corrugated tube inside the door grommet about 10 mm. The second paint mark should
just be visible (see Figure B6). You may need to roll the grommet back and then forward over the
tube.
^ At the body end, the corrugated tube should meet the vinyl tube with no gap. The paint marks
must be facing away from the door/body as shown in Figure B6.
10. Install the new body clip over the paint mark on the body-side (see Figure B7).
^ Feed the strap through the buckle so the strap is UP as shown in Figure B7.
11. Install the new hinge rod clip over the center paint mark (see Figure B7). Feed the strap
through the buckle so the strap is UP as shown in Figure B7.
12. Cut off the excess strap. Leave only 3 to 6 mm (1/8 to 1/4 inch).
Page 9569
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 3346
NOTE:
^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB.
Disclaimer
Page 7323
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Locations
Remote Control: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8327
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 11927
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 4261
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 12580
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 3807
b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a).
c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed.
^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer.
d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2.
2. Record the radio station presets:
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
NOTE:
Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding.
Page 1621
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 4546
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ECT SENSOR
Component Description
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The
sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in
temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 12156
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9993
Figure D-14
c. Stick the 2nd piece of protector 4 on the fan shroud as shown.
- Overlap the 2nd piece on top of the 1st piece at the spot shown.
- Overlap about 10 mm (1/4 inch) but not less than 5 mm (1/8 inch).
- Fold and stick the protector under the shroud.
d. Install the 3rd piece in the same manner as the 2nd piece.
Figure D-15
e. Install the 4th piece of Protector 4 as shown.
- Align the protector along the 1 o'clock rib as shown.
- Don't cover up the bolt hole.
- Overlap the 4th piece on top of the 3rd piece at the spot shown.
- Overlap must be at least 5 mm (1/8 inch).
- Fold and stick the protector under the shroud.
12. Press and smooth all parts of protector 4. Make sure it is completely stuck to the fan shroud.
13. Install the motor in the shroud with the harness in the correct location (about 4 o'clock) as
shown in Figure D-16.
Page 9990
Figure D-8A
- Make sure the harness is routed through the harness hole in Protector 3 (refer to Figure D-8A).
Figure D-9
7. Fold and stick protector 3 to the top of the fan motor as shown.
Fold and stick the flap shown in Figure D-9 to the side of the fan motor.
Figure D-10
8. Wrap the long strip of protector 3 completely around the motor.
Page 5280
Case 14
Case 15
Page 2208
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 2946
^ Do not install more than three sheets of balance weights.
c. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 grams (1.76 ounces), install two balance weight
sheets in line with each other as shown.
CAUTION: Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another.
3. Start wheel balancer again. 4. Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the
wheel balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION: Do not install more than two balance weights.
5. Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual imbalance values are 5 grams
(0.18 ounces) each or below.
^ If either residual imbalance value exceeds 5 grams (0.18 ounces), repeat installation procedures.
Wheel Balance (Maximum Allowable Imbalance)
Page 1743
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 4921
ECM Inspection Table Part 8
Page 4492
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 8308
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 8092
^ After you select "ECU Reprog. Data", the "ECU Reprogramming Data" screen will be displayed
(see Figure 5).
NOTE
^ This is a special ABS/VDC reprogram that uses an ID Code FOR THIS INCIDENT ONLY!
^ Step 7 (below) is different from the typical ECU Reprogramming procedure.
7. Select the new ABS/VDC Control Unit data as follows:
a. Click on the Keypad button (see Figure 5).
Page 9643
Diagnostic Procedure For Mode Door Motor (Steps 7 - 10)
Page 12886
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 13803
Page 8220
Ignition Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 11223
Collision Avoidance Module: Service and Repair
SONAR CONTROL UNIT
Removal
1. Remove the rear panel. 2. For king cab models only, pull up the carpet to gain access to the
sonar control unit. 3. Disconnect the sonar control unit connector. 4. Remove the sonar control unit
bolts and remove sonar control unit.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 9687
Optional Splice
Page 2396
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH (Steps 2 - 5)
Page 6828
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
NOTE: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "Components". See: Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component
Parts)/Components
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
Page 9301
Steering Gear: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly
CAUTION: ^
Secure steering gear assembly with a vise, using copper plates or something similar to prevent it
from being damaged. Do not grip cylinder with a vise.
^ Before performing disassembly, clean steering gear assembly with kerosene. Be careful not to
bring any kerosene into contact with the discharge and return port connectors.
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove cylinder tubes from gear housing assembly 2. Loosen lock nuts of outer sockets, and
remove outer sockets. 3. Remove boot clamps of the small diameter side and the large diameter
side, then remove boot.
CAUTION: When removing boots, be careful not to damage inner socket and gear housing
assembly. If they are damaged, change them to avoid oil leaks.
4. Remove inner sockets.
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Boot
Check boot for tears, cracks and deformation. Replace if necessary.
Gear Housing Assembly Check gear housing assembly for dents, cracks or damage. Replace as
an assembly if necessary.
Outer Socket and Inner Socket
SWING TORQUE
Page 13342
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Page 6719
Page 5096
Case 10
Page 5396
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 6928
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 10986
Component Locations
Knock Sensor: Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 10094
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 10167
Expansion Valve: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner
Removal and Installation for Expansion Valve
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Remove the
evaporator.
3. Remove the cooler grommet. 4. Remove the expansion valve.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Expansion valve bolts : 4 N.m (0.41 kg-m, 35 in-lb)
A/C refrigerant pipe to expansion valve bolt : Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-rings on the A/C refrigerant pipes with new ones, then apply compressor oil to
them when installing them.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 9732
1. Use a 3/64 drill bit to slightly enlarge the holes shown in Figure 2.
^ These holes will be used to mount new harness clips for the new harness routing.
Page 10399
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 1170
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 10957
1. Lower DVD screen as shown in Figure 1.
2. Remove (2) 10 mm screws from the console.
3. Use hooked trim tool (essential tool J-46534 Plastic Trim Tool Set or equivalent) to pull down
console at 2 locations (both sides).
Page 1594
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 10491
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8716
8. Once the vinyl tube is cut off, put vinyl tape on the harness in two spots as shown in Figure B4.
9. Install the corrugated tube over the harness.
^ The corrugated tube will replace the vinyl tube that you cut off. Install the corrugated tube in the
direction shown in Figure B5.
Page 1071
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Headlamp (For USA)
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9025
Page 9116
^ During installation of the new harness you will find some connectors taped to the harness as
shown.
^ Some of the connectors will be for options that the vehicle you are working on does not have.
^ Un-tape the connectors that are needed. Leave the connectors that are not needed taped to the
harness.
68. Connect both battery cables-positive cable first.
69. Reset the radio station presets.
70. If Inspection Procedure 1 was NG, or Inspection Procedure 2 result was "light stays on or
blinks"; connect CONSULT-II and clear codes from the Air Bag Control Unit SELF-DIAG [PAST].
Final Quality Checks
71. Check the air bag light operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition OFF and then ON.
b. Observe the air bag warning light.
c. Make sure the air bag warning light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out.
72. Confirm that all systems related to the harness replacement are functioning correctly.
Page 13490
Brake Light Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
CAN Communication
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3186
Page 402
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
CAUTION:
- Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures
Page 8533
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System
- TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Automatic Air Conditioner
Control Module HVAC: Description and Operation Automatic Air Conditioner
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Front Air Control
The front air control has a built-in microcomputer which processes information sent from various
sensors needed for air conditioner operation. The air mix door motors, mode door motor, intake
door motor, defroster door motor, blower motor and compressor are then controlled.
The front air control is unitized with control mechanisms. When the various switches and
temperature dials are operated, data is input to the front air control.
Self-diagnostic functions are also built into the front air control to provide quick check of
malfunctions in the auto air conditioner system.
Page 12809
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 13068
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 13099
Tachometer: Description and Operation
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revolutions per minute rpm). ECM provides an engine
speed signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines.
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 1527
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 1045
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 5520
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 1679
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 910
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 8873
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 565
Page 13570
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14150
WARNING:
- Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable.
- The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
- Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if
inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation, immediately move to an area with fresh air.
- Driving the vehicle before the urethane adhesive has completely cured may affect the
performance of the windshield in case of an accident.
CAUTION:
- Do not use an adhesive which is past its usable term. Shelf life of this product is limited to six
months after the date of manufacture. Carefully adhere to the expiration or manufacture date
printed on the box.
- Keep primers and adhesive in a cool, dry place. Ideally, they should be stored in a refrigerator.
- Do not leave primers or adhesive cartridge unattended with their caps open or off.
- The vehicle should not be driven for at least 24 hours or until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured. Curing time varies depending on temperature and humidities. The curing time
will increase under lower temperatures and lower humidities.
Repairing Water Leaks for Windshield
Leaks can be repaired without removing and reinstalling glass. If water is leaking between the
urethane adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of leakage. This can be done
by applying water to the windshield area while pushing glass outward.
To stop the leak, apply primer (if necessary) and then urethane adhesive to the leak point.
Page 1141
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 12343
Optional Splice
Page 11878
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10819
Page 1174
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 10407
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 5496
Page 661
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 3664
- Tighten the exhaust manifold nuts LH and RH in the numerical order shown. Then recheck the
torque of the nuts.
- A: Exhaust manifold LH - B: Exhaust manifold RH - White Arrow indicates Front Before installing new air fuel ratio A/F sensors, clean the exhaust system threads using suitable
tool and apply anti-seize lubricant.
CAUTION: Do not over tighten the air fuel ratio A/F sensors. Doing so may cause damage to the sensor,
resulting in the MIL coming on.
Page 14440
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 3157
Drive Belt: Testing and Inspection
ENGINE MAINTENANCE
WARNING: Be sure to perform when the engine is stopped.
1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly when inspecting drive belt. 2. Make sure that indicator
(single line notch) of each auto tensioner is within the allowable working range "A" (between three
line notches) as
shown.
NOTE: ^
Check the auto tensioner indication when the engine is cold.
^ When the new drive belt is installed, the range should be "A" as shown.
^ The indicator notch is located on the moving side of the auto tensioner.
3. Visually check entire belt for wear, damage or cracks. 4. If the indicator is out of allowable
working range or belt is damaged, replace the belt.
Page 4365
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 6242
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 12213
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 2393
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab)
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 2764
specification, recover/evacuate and recharge the system with the specified amount of refrigerant.
Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
NOTE: At temperatures below 16 degrees C (61 degrees F), leaks may not be detected since the
system may not reach 345 kPa (3.52 kg/sq.cm, 50 psi) pressure.
4. Perform the leak test from the high-pressure side (A/C compressor discharge "a"to evaporator
inlet "f") to the low-pressure side (evaporator drain
hose "g" to compressor shaft seal "k"). Refer to "Components". Clean the component to be
checked and carefully move the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe completely around the
following connections and components. Check the compressor shaft seal
- Check the high and low-pressure pipe and hose fittings, and relief valve
- Check the liquid tank
- Check the refrigerant pressure sensor
- Check all around the service valves. Ensure service valve caps are secured on the service valves
(to prevent leaks).
NOTE: After removing manifold gauge set (J-39183-C) from the service valves, wipe any residue
from the service valves to prevent any false readings by the electronic refrigerant leak detector
(J-41995).
- Evaporator With engine OFF, turn blower fan on "High" for at least 15 seconds to dissipate any
refrigerant trace in the heater and cooling unit assembly. Wait a minimum of 10 minutes
accumulation time (refer to the manufacturer's recommended procedure for actual wait time) before
inserting the electronic refrigerant leak detector probe into the heater and cooling unit assembly
drain hose.
NOTE: Keep the probe inserted for at least 10 seconds. Use caution not to contaminate the probe
tip with water or dirt that may be in the drain hose.
5. If a leak is detected, verify at least once by blowing compressed air into the area of the
suspected leak, then repeat the leak check. 6. Do not stop when one leak is found. Continue to
check for additional leaks at all system components and connections. 7. If no leaks are found,
perform steps 8 - 11. 8. Start the engine. 9. Set the heater A/C controls as follows:
a. A/C switch to ON b. Air flow to VENT mode c. Intake position to RECIRCULATION mode d.
Temperature to MAX cold e. Blower fan speed to HIGH
10. Run the engine at 1,500 rpm for at least 2 minutes.
11. Turn the engine OFF and perform the leak check again following steps 4 through 6.
Refrigerant leaks should be checked immediately after turning the engine OFF. Begin with the leak
detector at the compressor. The pressure on the high pressure side will gradually drop after the
refrigerant circulation stops and pressure on the low pressure side will gradually rise, as shown in
the graph. Some leaks are more easily detected when the pressure is high.
12. Before connecting the recovery/recycling equipment to the vehicle, check the
recovery/recycling equipment gauges. No refrigerant pressure should
be displayed. If pressure is displayed, recover the refrigerant from the equipment lines and then
check the refrigerant purity.
13. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant
identifier equipment. 14. Confirm the refrigerant purity in the vehicle's A/C system using
recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant identifier equipment. 15. Discharge the A/C system
using recovery/recycling equipment. Repair the leaking fitting or component as necessary. 16.
Evacuate and recharge the A/C system and perform the leak test to confirm that there are no
refrigerant leaks. 17. Conduct the Operational Check to ensure system works properly. Refer to
"Operational Check".
Page 3676
^ If it applies: Position the band clamp(s) between the "dimples or on top where the "stand-offs" are
located (see Figure 1 and 2 above).
> The "stand-offs" cannot be seen: They are welded on the underside of the heat shield.
> If the "stand-off" is missing, this bulletin does not apply.
5. Secure the band clamp with the hex bolt located on the side (or on top, if needed). See Figure 1
above for example.
WARNING:
Do Not install the hex bolt on the bottom of the exhaust tube.
^ Band clamp hex bolt torque: 4.0 - 5.5 Nm (0.4 - 0.56 Kg-m, 2.9 - 4.0 ft-lb)
6. After securing the band clamp, cut off the clamp's excess at the end.
^ Wrap the end of the band clamp over the hex bolt, and then cut off the excess band clamp within
5 mm (0.2 inches) past the hex bolt (see Figure 2 for
example).
Page 9507
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 12987
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 6329
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 766
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12487
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 9661
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. 2. Remove the steering member from the heater
and cooling unit assembly. 3. Disconnect the intake door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove the
three screws and remove the intake door motor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Mode Door Motor
MODE DOOR MOTOR
Page 11373
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 5738
ECM Inspection Table Part 5
Page 729
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Testing and Inspection
Heated Glass Element Switch: Testing and Inspection
Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Check (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 4526
Body Control Module: Programming and Relearning
Configuration
DESCRIPTION
CONFIGURATION has two functions as follows:
- READ CONFIGURATION is the function to confirm vehicle configuration of current BCM.
- WRITE CONFIGURATION is the function to write vehicle configuration on BCM.
CAUTION: When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-II.
- Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order.
- If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur.
- Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Data
Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Schematic
Page 4244
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 2151
Ignition Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 1787
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 7619
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 308
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Relay Box: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 13851
Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
Fuel Gauge Sender: Recalls Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009
Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56
vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some
fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which
could cause a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender
card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or
before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 9425
^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, position the disc rotor according
to alignment mark.
^ When installing wheel and tire. Refer to "Rotation". See: Wheels and Tires/Tires/Service and
Repair/Tire Rotation
Page 9065
55. Remove the assist grip (passenger side only).
^ Open the side bolt covers.
^ Remove the 2 bolts.
56. Remove the dome lamp.
a. Remove the clear lamp cover
b. Remove the 2 screws.
c. Let the lamp hang by the electrical connector.
CAN Communication
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6416
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 13730
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 808
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 2167
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 14036
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 14079
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 5498
Page 138
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 9882
Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch (Steps 10 - 12)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR MAGNET CLUTCH
SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage when A/C switch is ON.
Page 3589
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 14484
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
ABLS/ABS
Traction Control Module: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. 3. Drain the brake
fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit).
CAUTION: ^
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts
and brake tubes from being damaged.
^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench. Tighten brake tubes to specification
when installing.
^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with
new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system.
Page 4312
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 4154
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 11381
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 3866
^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap).
e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet.
4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under
the dash):
a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly
(cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3).
b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads.
C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners.
5. Clean the negative battery cable connections.
a. Write down all the radio presets.
b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection.
c. Clean the following items:
^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides)
^ Body connection bolt (head and threads)
^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap)
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Battery negative post
^ Negative cable battery terminal
d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery).
e. Reprogram the radio presets.
6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs.
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 3950
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 11392
Part 2
MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM
CAN Communication System Description
Refer to LAN-25, "Information Bus". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation/CAN Communication
Page 9195
1. Measure camber and caster of both the right and left wheels with a suitable alignment gauge
and adjust as necessary to specification.
Camber and caster: Refer to "Wheel Alignment (Unladen*). See: Specifications/Front Suspension
NOTE: Some vehicles may be equipped with straight (non-adjustable) lower link bolts and
washers. In order to adjust camber and caster on these vehicles, first replace the lower link bolts
and washers with adjustable (cam) bolts and washers.
2. If outside of the specified value, adjust camber and caster using the cam bolts (1) in the front
lower link (2).
CAUTION: After adjusting the camber and caster check the toe-in.
NOTE: Camber changes about 3' (0.05°) with each graduation of one cam bolt. Refer to table for
examples of lower link cam bolt effect on camber and caster.
3. Tighten the adjusting bolt nuts to specification. Refer to "Components".
Page 6647
Page 540
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II.
^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information.
2. Compare your printout to the chart.
a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3.
b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply.
^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information.
3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows:
Page 1980
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 9873
Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch (Steps 10 - 12)
Page 1396
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 9830
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications
Front
Front Final Drive Oil Capacity
.................................................................................................................................................. 1.6 l (3
3/8 pt, 2 7/8 imp pt)
Rear
Rear Final Drive Oil Capacity
................................................................................................................................................ 2.01L
(4 1/4 pt, 3 1/2 imp pt.)
Sunroof
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9316
Ball Joint: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
The ball joints are part of the upper and lower links.
Inspection
^ Check the ball joint for excessive play. Replace the upper or lower link assembly if any of the
following exists: Ball joint stud is worn.
- Ball joint is hard to swing.
- Ball joint play in axial directions or end play is excessive.
SWINGING FORCE
NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10
revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in.
1. Measure the ball joint swinging force using a suitable tool.
^ Measure at the cotter pin hole for upper ball joint as shown.
^ Measure at the groove for lower ball joint as shown.
2. Verify the ball joint swinging force is within specification.
Swinging force "A" Upper ball joint: 8.1 - 103.2 N (0.8 - 10.5 kgf, 1.8 - 23.2 ft. lbs.) Lower ball joint:
11.4 - 145.5 N (1.1 - 14.8 kgf, 2.5 - 32.7 ft. lbs.)
TURNING FORCE
NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10
revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in.
Turning torque "B": 0.5 - 6.4 Nm (0.05 - 0.65 kg-m, 4 - 57 inch lbs.)
VERTICAL END PLAY
Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Fuel Pressure: Customer Interest Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Classification: FE07-004
Reference: NTB07-040
Date: June 6, 2007
2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007
Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223
APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007
IF YOU CONFIRM
When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced,
ACTIONS
1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure).
2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump.
NOTE:
Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 9604
Diagnostic Procedure For Mode Door Motor (Steps 8 - 11)
Page 8339
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 12370
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 11504
7. Remove the TORX bolts (T30), remove the door lock assembly.
Door lock assembly bolts 6.0 N.m (0.61 kg-m, 53 in-lb)
8. While pulling outside handle bracket, slide toward rear of vehicle to remove outside handle
bracket and door lock assembly.
9. Disconnect the outside handle cable.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4738
Page 9512
Tires: Service and Repair Tire Rotation
Rotation
NOTE: Follow the maintenance schedule for tire rotation service intervals. Refer to MA-7,
"PERIODIC MAINTENANCE". See: Maintenance/Service Intervals
1. Rotate the tires on each side from front to back as shown. Do not include the spare tire when
rotating the tires.
Wheel nut: 133 Nm (14 kg-m, 98 ft. lbs.)
CAUTION: When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing the work two to three times
in order to prevent the wheels from developing any distortion.
2. Adjust the tire pressure to specification. 3. After the tire rotation, retighten the wheel nuts after
the vehicle has been driven for 1,000 km (600 miles), and also after every wheel and tire have
been installed such as after repairing a flat tire.
Page 5149
Case 2
Page 8648
Page 8210
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Locations
Brake Light Switch: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 12155
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 13168
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 5704
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 14451
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 1753
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 4096
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of
the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is
disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2
seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and
wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Engine Control Component Parts Locations
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 13133
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 1324
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2125
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3611
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 4298
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from air
cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4.
Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower)
^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type)
NOTE: ^
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals.
^ Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance.
Page 12792
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 2219
Page 3977
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 9100
22. Remove the carpet clips shown in the figure below.
23. Pull the seat branch through the carpet.
24. Lift the floor carpet, remove the ground bolt and take the SRS branch loose from the floor.
Page 1772
Ambient Light Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Optical Sensor Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The optical sensor is located in the center of the defroster grille. It detects sunload entering through
windshield by means of a photo diode. The sensor converts the sunload into a current value which
is then input into the front air control.
OPTICAL INPUT PROCESS
The front air control includes a processing circuit which averages the variations in detected sunload
over a period of time. This prevents adjustments in the ATC system operation due to small or quick
variations in detected sunload.
For example, consider driving along a road bordered by an occasional group of large trees. The
sunload detected by the optical sensor will vary whenever the trees obstruct the sunlight. The
processing circuit averages the detected sunload over a period of time, so that the (insignificant)
effect of the trees momentarily obstructing the sunlight does not cause any change in the ATC
system operation. On the other hand, shortly after entering a long tunnel, the system will recognize
the change in sunload, and the system will react accordingly.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR OPTICAL SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure For Optical Sensor (Step 1)
Page 4912
Engine Control Module: Connector Views
ECM Harness Connector Terminal Layout
Page 2211
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections
A/C Coupler O-ring: Customer Interest A/C - Refrigerant Leaks From Connections
Classification: HA09-003
Reference: NTB09-099
Date: September 25, 2009
A/C SYSTEM O-RING SEAL LEAKS
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with A/C system
IF YOU CONFIRM
A refrigerant leak at a refrigerant pipe/hose joint location,
NOTE:
Follow the leak detection information in the Service Manual to determine the source of refrigerant
leaks.
ACTIONS
NOTE:
The O-ring seal is the most common cause of a refrigerant leak at an A/C joint.
1. Inspect the metal surfaces of the pipe/hose joint for damage or contamination.
NOTE:
Do not replace a refrigerant pipe, hose, or other A/C component if an o-ring seal will solve the leak
incident, if it should occur.
2. If no damage is found to the joint metal surfaces, replace the O-ring seal.
CAUTION:
^ When replacing O-ring seals, use lint-free gloves,
^ Make sure no foreign material is introduced into the system when the joint is open.
^ Apply A/C oil to the O-ring before installation.
^ After recharging the system, recheck for leaks.
PARTS INFORMATION
Reference an electronic parts catalog (FAST or equivalent) for any needed parts.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the correct coding for repairs
performed.
Page 12474
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 648
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 10089
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 6464
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 12048
NOTE:
- Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpeting, etc. when performing this Procedure.
- The illustrations in this bulletin are for the left side (driver side) seat. The right side (passenger
side) seat is a "mirror image" of these illustrations.
If needed; use steps 1 and 2 to confirm you have voltage (power) to the seat slide motor.
1. Using the power seat switch, tilt the front edge of the seat bottom all the way UP.
2. Check/measure voltage to the seat slide motor. Use a voltmeter and "Back-probe" into the
connector, harness side, between the following color
wires:
NOTES:
For wire color codes and connector layouts for the vehicle you are working on refer to the Wiring
Diagram in chapter SE, section POWER SEAT or AUTOMATIC DRIVE POSITIONER as
applicable in the appropriate Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
If needed, refer to "How to Back Probe Connectors" is the Nissan and Infiniti Connector and
Terminal Service Manual. This manual is in ASIST under Tools & Equipment.
Figure 2
Figure 2 shows an example of the driver s side seat slide motor connector location. The vehicle
you are working on may be different.
- This voltage check can be done with the seat slide motor connected.
- If the voltage is about 12 V when the seat slide switch is pressed to the "forward" and "backward"
positions, voltage (power) is getting to the seat slide motor.
- If voltage is 0 V, this bulletin doesn't apply. Check your power and ground circuits to the seat slide
motor.
Remove Old Seat Slide Parts
3. Record the radio station pre-sets for later reprogramming after the procedure.
4. If the power seat won't move, lightly tap the seat slide motor (see Figure 2).
- Sometimes this will get the motor working again temporarily so the seat can be moved to access
the seat mounting bolts.
- Don't remove the seat yet.
5. Follow steps 6 through 9 to remove the seat from the vehicle.
- If needed, refer to section SE in the Service Manual (ESM) for seat removal information.
6. Turn the ignition key "OFF".
7. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first, and wait three (3) minutes.
- This will allow the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) to deactivate. This includes the front
seat side air bags.
8. Tilt the entire seat assembly back and disconnect the harness-to-seat connectors.
9. Remove the seat assembly from vehicle and place it on a clean dry surface.
Page 927
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 12637
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10664
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 13477
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Diagram Information and Instructions
Body Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 9002
Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction
- When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned
OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction.
- When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch
signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay.
Page 10344
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 10669
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 3369
the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
If idle air volume learning cannot be performed successfully, proceed as follows:
1. Check that throttle valve is fully closed. 2. Check PCV valve operation. 3. Check that
downstream of throttle valve is free from air leakage. 4. When the above three items check out OK,
engine component parts and their installation condition are questionable. Check and eliminate the
cause of the incident. It is useful to perform EC-140, "TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - SPECIFICATION
VALUE". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Monitors, Trips, Drive Cycles and Readiness Codes/Specification (SP) Value
5. If any of the following conditions occur after the engine has started, eliminate the cause of the
incident and perform Idle Air Volume Learning all
over again: Engine stalls.
- Erroneous idle.
Page 10342
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 12433
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 9705
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 5518
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 1867
4. Touch "COMB SW" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Display Item List - Data Monitor
With Generic Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Without Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Page 4654
b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a).
c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed.
^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer.
d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2.
2. Record the radio station presets:
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
NOTE:
Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding.
Page 5818
3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees.
4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees.
^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily.
6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the
sensor will not unscrew any further.
7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed.
Page 13026
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 7126
OIL LEAKAGE AND OIL LEVEL 1. Check that gear oil is not leaking from the final drive assembly
or around it.
2. Check the gear oil level from filler plug mounting hole as shown.
CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking oil level.
3. Apply sealant to the filler plug. Install the filler plug on the final drive assembly and tighten to
specification.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Oil grade and viscosity. Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and
Lubricants". See: Maintenance/Fluids Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS" (FFD). Refer to
"Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD). See: Service and Repair/Rear Differential (Without
Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD with ELD).
See: Service and Repair/Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation
Changing Final Drive Oil
Changing Final Drive Oil
Locations
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 3137
^ Pulley should turn with some dragging
^ If it locks or has unusual resistance, replace the alternator.
Page 12767
Page 1730
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 4713
^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap).
e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet.
4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under
the dash):
a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly
(cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3).
b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads.
C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners.
5. Clean the negative battery cable connections.
a. Write down all the radio presets.
b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection.
c. Clean the following items:
^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides)
^ Body connection bolt (head and threads)
^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap)
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Battery negative post
^ Negative cable battery terminal
d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery).
e. Reprogram the radio presets.
6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs.
Page 3783
7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs.
Disclaimer
Page 6868
Shift Indicator: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 69
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 4048
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 10499
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 10090
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 396
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 9785
Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Steps 19 - 22)
Page 1905
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Page 2289
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 4886
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 11377
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 120
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 12730
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 12492
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 3288
4. Obtain compression TDC of No. 1 cylinder as follows:
a. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise to align the TDC identification notch (without paint mark)
with the timing indicator on the front cover.
b. At this time, make sure both intake and exhaust cam lobes of No. 1 cylinder (top front on LH
bank) point outside.
^ If they do not point outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more.
5. Remove the crankshaft pulley.
a. Loosen the crankshaft pulley bolts using a hammer handle to secure the crankshaft.
b. Remove the crankshaft pulley from the crankshaft using suitable tool.
^ Remove the crankshaft pulley using suitable tool. Set the bolts in the two bolt holes [M6 x 1.0 mm
(0.04 inch)] on the front surface.
NOTE: The dimension between the centers of the two bolt holes is 61 mm (2.40 inch).
Page 13530
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 469
Page 4996
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 4023
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14140
FITTING INSPECTION
- Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)], and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator bolt, guide rail bolts, and glass and carrier plate bolts to correct the glass position.
Rear Door Glass Regulator Assembly
REMOVAL
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - CREW CAB".
2. Operate the power window switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be
seen. 3. Remove the inside seal. 4. Remove the glass bolts, raise the glass and hold in place with
suitable tool.
5. Remove the bolts and the regulator and guide channel from the panel. 6. Disconnect the
connector for the regulator assembly.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or
grease it.
- Gear wear
- Regulator deformation
- Spring damage
- Grease condition for each sliding part
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 716
Mechanical Specifications
Wheel Bearing
Page 1533
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview
ECM Circuit Inspection
Page 10461
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection Manual Air Conditioner
Intake Sensor Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Intake Sensor
The intake sensor is located on top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the A/C
evaporator cover. It converts temperature of air after it passes through the evaporator into a
resistance value which is then input to the front air control.
Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Sensor (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 14382
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 7985
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
BRAKE JUDDER
^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out.
Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not
parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see
Figure 1).
Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on
each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this
point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation
(see Figure 2).
^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake
pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering
wheel.
Vehicle Storage:
^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the
brake pads will rust.
^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface
will be different.
^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off.
Lug Nut Overtorque:
^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over
tightened, especially with an air impact
Page 7419
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 10042
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 10654
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 2669
O-Ring Part Number And Specifications
Page 2805
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Specifications
Axle Nut: Specifications
Axle Nut
Torque .................................................................................................................................................
............................ 137 Nm (14 kg-cm, 101 ft. lbs.)
Page 13617
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 5755
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3975
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 9703
Page 4677
Page 11530
NOTE:
Use the lower locating hole (see Figure 12).
17. Reinstall upper door latch grey cable clip into door (See Figure 12.
18. Reinstall handle release cable into upper door latch white cable clip.
Page 5526
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 5358
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 12410
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
Fuel Gauge Sender: Recalls Recall 10V074000: Fuel Sender Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2005-2009 Nissan/Armada 2005-2009
Nissan/Titan 2005-2009 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: February 26, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V074000 N/A
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Fuel System, Other: Storage: Fuel Gauge System
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 340000
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2005-2009 Titan, Armada, and Infiniti QX56
vehicles. The instrument panel fuel gauge may inaccurately display that the vehicle still has some
fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel tank is empty.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause the vehicle to run out of gas and stall on the highway, which
could cause a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the fuel sender unit inside the fuel tank with a new improved sender
card. This service will be performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin on or
before March 22, 2010. Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay
Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006
Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra
2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and
model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution
Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for
electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time,
the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM
relay contact due to arcing.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be
performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners
may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 7462
Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
Components
Components
REMOVAL
Differential Lock Position Switch
Page 13699
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9920
Figure C-4, Figure C-5
a. Remove 1 bumper bolt shown in Figures C-4 and C-5:
- Driver side only.
Page 13006
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 2563
Valve Clearance: Adjustments
Valve Clearance ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: ^
Perform adjustment depending on the selected head thickness of the valve lifter.
^ The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional
differences caused by temperature. Use the specifications for hot engine condition to adjust.
1. Remove the camshaft. 2. Remove the valve lifters at the locations that are out of specification.
3. Measure the center thickness of the removed valve lifters using suitable tool. 4. Use the equation
below to calculate the valve lifter thickness for replacement.
^ Valve lifter thickness calculation: Thickness of replacement valve lifter = t1 + (C1 - C2) t1 =
Thickness of removed valve lifter C1 = Measured valve clearance C2 = Standard valve clearance:
^ Thickness of a new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the
cylinder). Stamp mark N788 indicates 7.88 mm (0.3102 inch) in thickness.
^ Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 inch) in
steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) (when manufactured at factory).
5. Install the selected valve lifter. 6. Install the camshaft. 7. Manually turn the crankshaft pulley a
few turns. 8. Make sure the valve clearances for a cold engine are within specifications by referring
to the specified values. 9. After completing the repair, check the valve clearances again with the
specifications for a warmed engine. Make sure the values are within
specifications.
Page 4482
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 8908
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 4136
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 5626
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 7392
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2209
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8958
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 10244
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11938
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Tightening Torques & Sequences
Exhaust Manifold: Specifications Tightening Torques & Sequences
Exhaust Manifold
^ Tighten the exhaust manifold nuts in the numerical order shown.
Automatic Air Conditioner
Evaporator Core: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner
Removal and Installation for Evaporator
REMOVAL
1. Remove the heater core. See: Heater Core/Service and Repair 2. Remove the defroster mode
door arm. 3. Separate the heater core and cooling unit case.
Page 14390
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 8152
Traction Control Module: Description and Operation
TCS CONTROL UNIT
Description
The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line
from "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" to ECM. Be sure to erase the malfunction
information such as DTC not only for "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" but also for
ECM after TCS related repair.
Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set
Canister Purge Control Valve: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set
Classification: EC06-009B
Reference: NTB06-095B
Date: September 2, 2008
2004 ARMADA / 2004-2006 TITAN; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446
APPLIED VEHICLES:2004-2006 Titan (A60)
2004 Armada (TA60)
This bulletin has been amended to add DTC P0448. No other changes have been made.
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(s) stored:
^ P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446
AND
^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed.
ACTIONS:
All applied vehicles:
Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V.
Clear any DTC(s) stored in the ECM.
AND IF the vehicle is a 2004-2006 Titan:
Refer to the Install Filter Kit Service Procedure of this bulletin.
AND IF the vehicle is a 2004 Armada:
Refer to the Install Protector Service Procedure of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay
Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006
Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra
2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and
model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution
Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for
electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time,
the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM
relay contact due to arcing.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be
performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners
may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 14473
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 2576
A. Set straight edge on front surface of crankshaft pulley to check the clearance at the top of the
pump pulley. See Figure 2.
B. Check clearance of lower part of the power steering pump pulley and crankshaft pulley. See
Figure 3.
NOTE:
The goal is to make sure the power steering pump pulley is aligned as true as possible with the
crankshaft pulley.
^ If the pulleys are aligned there is no need to adjust the bracket, skip ahead to step 17.
^ If the pulleys are not aligned, go on to step 12.
Page 2744
Engine Oil: Fluid Type Specifications
SAE Viscosity Number GASOLINE ENGINE OIL
SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil is preferred for all temperatures.
SAE 10W-30 and 10W-40 viscosity oil may be used if the ambient temperature is above -18°C
(0°F)
API Certification Mark API grade SG, SH or SJ, Energy Conserving II or API grade SL, Energy
Conserving ILSAC grade GF-II & GF-III
Diagram Information and Instructions
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 499
Part 2
MAJOR COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SYSTEM
CAN Communication System Description
Refer to LAN-25, "Information Bus". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus/Description and Operation/CAN Communication
A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection
(Column Shift)
Neutral Safety Switch: Testing and Inspection A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection
(Column Shift)
A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Column Shift) (Steps 1 - 2)
A/T Device (Park Position Switch) Circuit Inspection (Column Shift) (Step 3)
Page 9054
c. Remove the 2 connector support bolts.
d. Slide the connector support UP to remove it.
16. If equipped with side curtain air bags:
^ If you are replacing the passenger side harness; steps for disconnecting the side curtain air bag
will be covered later in this procedure.
^ If you are replacing the driver side harness, disconnect the side curtain air bag as follows.
a. Remove the 3 mounting nuts for the parking brake pedal assembly and move the assembly out
of the way.
b. From the floor, look up towards the front pillar and locate the side curtain air bag connector.
c. Disconnect the side curtain air bag.
Page 13869
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 8087
Disclaimer
Parts 1-4 Descriptions
There are 4 parts to this service procedure. They must be done in order.
Part 1: Make sure DTC C1179 is or can be stored in ABS self diagnosis.
^ Go to Part 1 for this part of the service procedure.
Part 2: Download special VDC Reprogramming Data from ASIST onto your standard 8 MB
(orange) Reprogramming Card.
^ Do NOT use the 16 MB (orange) "QR25 Campaign ECM Software" Card (# J-44200-ECMR-16).
If you use this card, it will be reformatted to an 8MB card.
^ Go to Part 2 for this part of the service procedure.
Part 3: Reprogram the VDC Control Unit with the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card (that now
contains the downloaded VDC reprogramming data from ASIST).
^ Go to Part 3 for this part of the service procedure.
Part 4: Re-program the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card back to its original format so it can be
used for standard ECU reprogramming.
^ Refer to Part 4 for this part of the service procedure.
NOTE:
These procedures should be performed in order by an OBD-II certified Technician.
Part 1
Part 1: Make sure DTC C1179 is, or can be, stored in ABS self diagnosis.
1. Using CONSULT-II, check ABS Self Diagnosis.
^ If DTC C1179 is stored, this bulletin applies; go to Part 2.
^ If DTC C1179 is not stored, go to the next step.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
Page 10674
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Page 10424
Diagnostic Procedure For Ambient Sensor (Steps 7 - 9)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AMBIENT SENSOR
SYMPTOM: Ambient sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B257B or
B257C is displayed. Without a CONSULT-II, code 40 or 41 is indicated on front air control as a
result of conducting the front air control self-diagnosis.
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Ambient Sensor
Page 8118
CAUTION:
DO NOT DISCONNECT THE ETHERNET CABLE UNTIL THE DATA TRANSFER IS COMPLETE
(SEE FIGURE 10).
^ If the cable is disconnected before the data transfer is complete, you MUST restart the transfer
(download) procedure; otherwise ABSNDC damage can occur.
^ If this happens accidentally; wait for ASIST to display an "error" message, then click on "OK".
Reconnect the cable, select "Backup", then return to step 6.
9. Transfer (download) data from ASIST into CONSULT-II.
a. On the ASIST screen, click on "OKAY" (see Figure 8).
b. Verify CONSULT-II IP Address (see Figure 9). Then click on "OK".
^ Your IP address may differ based on the network configuration.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1810
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 10343
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 1953
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 8821
Page 356
Power Distribution Module: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12221
Power Mirror Switch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Check (Step 1)
Page 14323
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9067
Don't get butyl sealer from the welt on any of the interior trim surfaces.
60. Carefully pull down the side of the headlining at the rear just enough to get your arm above it.
61. Reach above the headlining and pop loose the rear clips (left and right side).
^ 2 clips on each side.
62. Look above the headlining, locate and disconnect the high mount brake light connector.
63. Take the harness loose from the body roof.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1858
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 11732
Door Lock Actuator Check (Front RH)
Page 8507
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 7275
Model 3S1350
DISASSEMBLY
Journal 1. Remove the propeller shaft assembly from the vehicle.
2. Put matching marks on the rear propeller shaft tube and flange yoke as shown.
CAUTION: For matching marks use paint. Never damage the rear propeller shaft or flange yoke.
3. Remove the snap rings.
Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection
Seat Memory Switch: Testing and Inspection Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection
Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Page 5078
Case 5
Page 5706
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 7304
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 4600
EC-MIL/DL-02
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 1246
Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 5313
Case 13
Page 9857
Diagnostic Procedure For In-Vehicle Sensor (Step 13)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR IN-VEHICLE SENSOR
SYMPTOM: In-vehicle sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B2578 or
B2579 is displayed. Without a CONSULT-II code 30, 31 is indicated on front air control as a result
of conducting self-diagnosis.
COMPONENT INSPECTION
In-vehicle Sensor
Page 13337
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab)
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Step 3)
Page 3204
Engine Oil: Technician Safety Information
Precautions for Engine Oils
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer. Try to avoid direct
skin contact with used oil.
If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
HEALTH PROTECTION PRECAUTIONS
- Avoid prolonged and repeated contact with oils, particularly used engine oils.
- Wear protective clothing, including impervious gloves where practicable.
- Do not put oily rags in pockets.
- Avoid contaminating clothes, particularly underpants, with oil.
- Heavily soiled clothing and oil-impregnated footwear should not be worn. Overalls must be
cleaned regularly.
- First aid treatment should be obtained immediately for open cuts and wounds.
- Use barrier creams, applying them before each work period, to help the removal of oil from the
skin.
- Wash with soap and water to ensure all oil is removed (skin cleansers and nail brushes will help).
Preparations containing lanolin replace the natural skin oils which have been removed.
- Do not use gasoline, kerosene, diesel fuel, gas oil, thinners or solvents for cleaning skin.
- If skin disorders develop, obtain medical advice without delay.
- Where practical, degrease components prior to handling.
- Where there is a risk of eye contact, eye protection should be worn, for example, chemical
goggles or face shields; in addition an eye wash facility should be provided.
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-029 Date: 090421
Engine Controls - CONSULTIII(R) ECM Programming
Classification: EC09-007
Reference: NTB09-029
Date: April 21, 2009
CONSULT-III ECM REPROGRAMMING PROCEDURE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All CONSULT-III (C-III) compatible Nissan vehicles
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for C-III ECM Reprogramming is now available in the
on-line version of this bulletin.
This General Procedure is also available via hyperlink from specific C-III symptom-based Technical
Service Bulletins in ASIST.
CAUTION
Part 1
Updated March 25, 2009
CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM REPROGRAMMING
A symptom based TSB is required before using this procedure.
IMPORTANT: Before starting, make sure:
^ ASIST on the C-III computer has been freshly synchronized (updated).
^ All C-III software updates (if any) have been installed.
NOTE:
The C-III computer automatically gets applicable ECM reprogramming data during ASIST
synchronization.
Body - Truck Bed Storage Organizer Rusting
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-074 Date: 090807
Body - Truck Bed Storage Organizer Rusting
Classification: BT09-004
Reference: NTB09-074
Date: August 7, 2009
2004 - 2009 TITAN; RUST ON SLIDERS FOR COLLAPSIBLE STORAGE ORGANIZER
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
There is rust on the threads of the sliders for the truck bed collapsible storage organizer.
ACTION
Replace the sliders with the new ones listed in the parts information.
NOTE
Do Not replace the entire storage organizer for this incident, if it should occur.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 5236
Case 8
Page 10482
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 9171
^ DO NOT push/pull on the tire to perform the caster sweep.
7. Make sure the steering wheel is centered when performing toe-in measurements and
adjustments.
NOTE:
If you are using a Hunter alignment machine equipped with the WinToe(R)-Adjustment System:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The WinToe(R) system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ Bumping the tire or re-centering the steering wheel when adjusting "near frozen" tie rods is not
necessary. This makes the adjustment process faster
and easier.
^ WinToe(R) eliminates the effect of lash in the steering system.
If you are using a John Bean alignment machine equipped with EZ Toe:
^ There is no need to lock the steering wheel. The EZ Toe system is not affected by steering
system movement during the adjustment process.
^ This software routine is an improved method of setting front toe, making it easier to obtain a
centered steering wheel.
^ With EZ Toe, it is possible to adjust toe with the steering wheel turned at any angle left or right.
This is helpful when setting toe on engine wall
mounted rack and pinion units.
IMPORTANT:
If during the alignment process the vehicle was lifted off of the rack; after lowering, make sure to
jounce (bounce) the vehicle before confirming adjustments are correct.
After you have checked and adjusted vehicle alignment
8. Print the BEFORE and AFTER measurements and attach them to the Repair Order.
9. Road test the vehicle to make sure the steering wheel is "centered" when driving on a straight
flat road.
Page 993
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5894
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 3238
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery negative terminal.
2. Remove the air dam and necessary undercovers if equipped.
3. Drain engine oil.
WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the engine oil when the engine is
hot.
4. Remove the oil cooler.
5. Disconnect A/T cooler hoses from radiator.
6. Remove lower radiator hose and pipe assembly.
7. Remove RH and LH front wheel and tire using power tool.
8. Remove the power steering pump without disconnecting the power steering hoses and position
aside.
9. Remove air duct and resonator assembly.
10. Remove upper radiator hose.
11. Disconnect coolant reservoir hose from radiator.
12. Remove crankshaft driven type cooling fan.
13. Disconnect the following connectors.
- Harness ground
- Power steering switch
- A/C compressor
- Oil pressure switch
14. Remove generator and generator bracket.
15. Remove A/C compressor without disconnecting the A/C pipes and position aside.
16. Remove front frame crossmember using power tool.
17. Remove the front final drive (4WD only).
18. Remove the steering gear.
19. Remove the oil pressure switch.
20. Remove the oil pan (lower). Using the following steps.
a. Remove the oil pan (lower) bolts in the reverse order as shown using power tool.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Trailer Lamps: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 4432
Valve Clearance: Testing and Inspection
Valve Clearance INSPECTION
NOTE: Perform the following inspection after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or
valve-related parts, or if there are unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve clearance
over time (starting, idling, and/or noise).
1. Warm up the engine. Then stop the engine. 2. Remove the engine cover. 3. Remove the battery
cover. 4. Remove the air cleaner and air duct assembly. 5. Remove the RH bank and LH bank
rocker covers using power tool.
6. Turn the crankshaft pulley in the normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to
align TDC identification notch (without paint
mark) with timing indicator.
7. At this time, make sure both the intake and exhaust cam noses of No. 1 cylinder (top front on LH
bank) face outside.
^ If they do not face outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more.
8. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table (locations indicated
with black arrow).
^ <- : Engine front
^ <- (black): Measurable at No.1 cylinder compression top dead center
^ <- (white): Measurable at No. 3 cylinder compression top dead center
^ A: RH
^ B: LH
^ C: Exhaust
Description and Operation
Vehicle Speed Sensor/Transducer - Cruise Control: Description and Operation
ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Component Description
The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from
combination meter and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these
signals for ASCD control. Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD
functions.
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch)
Check (King Cab)
Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder
Switch) Check (King Cab)
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Step 1)
Page 14455
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 9764
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 6171
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 12536
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 959
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Page 7128
and Installation Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD with ELD). See: Service and Repair/Rear
Differential (With Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation
FILLING
1. Remove the filler plug. Fill with new specified gear oil until the gear oil level reaches the
specified limit near the filler plug mounting hole as
shown. Oil grade and capacity: Refer to MA-11, "Fluids and Lubricants". See: Maintenance/Fluids
2. After refilling the gear oil, check the gear oil level as shown. Apply sealant to the filler plug. Install
the filler plug on the final drive assembly and
tighten to specification. ^
Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS" (FFD). Refer to
"Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD). See: Service and Repair/Rear Differential (Without
Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation Refer to "Removal and Installation" (RFD with ELD).
See: Service and Repair/Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking)/Removal and Installation
Service and Repair
Dome Lamp Bulb: Service and Repair
Page 855
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Component Locations
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 9928
- Driver side only.
Torque: 4.2 N.m (1.45 kg-m, 10 ft-lb)
Figure C-20
d. Install and torque 2 bolts from the front bumper side bracket (see Figure C-20).
- Driver side only.
Torque: 4.2 N.m (1.45 kg-m, 10 ft-lb)
For Titan with plastic bumper (body color bumper) do the following:
Figure C-21
a. Install 2 bumper to fender screws.
- Driver side only.
Page 6169
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 8096
^ After you click on "OK" an ASIST screen will appear that shows the data transfer progress (see
Figure 10).
c. Wait until the data transfer is complete (see the CAUTION at the end of step 8).
^ When the data transfer is complete, CONSULT-II will shut off automatically.
d. Disconnect the A/C power cord and the Ethernet cable from CONSULT-II.
Procedure
Part 3: Reprogram ABS/VDC Control Unit with 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card
CAUTION:
^ Perform this operation in five (5) sections. DO NOT SKIP any of these sections.
^ The sections must be performed in order, 1 through 5.
Section 1: Connect a battery charger and CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
Section 2: Check all systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTC(s).
Section 3: Confirm the vehicle battery voltage and CONSULT-II "Charger Input".
Section 4: Perform ABS/VDC Control Unit Reprogramming.
Section 5: Again, perform a check of all systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any newly
stored DTCs.
Section 1
Section 1: Connect a battery charger and CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
1. Confirm the ignition switch is OFF.
2. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. Set the charger at a low charge rate (2-amp
"trickle charge").
IMPORTANT
You must connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery when performing ABS/VDC
reprogramming. Permanent ABS/VDC damage can occur if you don't.
Connecting a vehicle battery charger will maintain:
^ Proper CONSULT-II power supply during reprogramming-very important if the CONSULT-II
battery is low.
^ Vehicle battery voltage level-especially on late model vehicles where the cooling fans come on
during reprogramming.
3. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle using the DLC-II cable with black Converter Box (see Figure
11).
Page 14103
Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (King
Cab) (Step 4)
Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Step
1)
Page 5127
Case 10
Page 5298
Case 16
Case 17
NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Page 6933
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Automatic Air Conditioner
Page 9819
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Locations
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 5394
Body Control Module: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6878
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 12408
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 5756
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
APP SENSOR
Component Description
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal
assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers
which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to
the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal
and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the
accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the
accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel
cut.
Headlamp (For CANADA) - Daytime Light System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 684
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Specifications
Page 9642
Diagnostic Procedure For Mode Door Motor (Steps 1 - 2)
Diagnostic Procedure For Mode Door Motor (Steps 3 - 6)
Page 6596
Control Module: Service and Repair
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
COMPONENTS
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect
A/T assembly harness connector.
Page 4721
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Locations
Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 13978
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 263
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 12561
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Locations
Throttle Position Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System
- TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Page 12493
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 3765
6. Touch "A60" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on
"VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See:
Application and ID
7. Touch "WRITE CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen.
8. Touch "YES".
For canceling, touch "NO".
9. Set by touching selection on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen based on the following ITEM
LIST.
Do not apply MODE3 or MODE4.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See:
Application and ID
10. Touch "CHNG SETTING" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
CAUTION: Make sure to touch "CHNG SETTING" even if the indicated configuration of new BCM
is same as the desirable configuration. If
Page 6323
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 9700
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 14066
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Diagnostic Procedure
Page 3949
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 5459
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Data
Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Schematic
4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Page 10364
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 5398
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11494
Front Door Window Regulator: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR GLASS
Removal
1. Remove the front door speaker. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the
power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4.
Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts.
6. While holding the front door glass, raise it at the rear end and pull the glass out of the sash
toward the outside of the door.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
Fitting Inspection
Page 3537
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold.
1. Remove engine room cover. 2. Drain engine coolant from the radiator. 3. Remove air cleaner
and air duct assembly. 4. Disconnect A/T fluid cooler hoses.
^ Install blind plug to avoid leakage of A/T fluid.
5. Disconnect radiator upper and lower hoses from radiator.
CAUTION: Do not allow coolant to contact drive belts.
6. Remove the lower radiator shroud.
^ Release the tabs, pull lower radiator shroud rearwards and down to remove.
7. Remove the radiator shroud upper bolts and remove the radiator shroud upper A.
8. Remove the A/C condenser bolts and brackets.
NOTE: Lift A/C condenser up and forward to remove from radiator.
Page 13705
Trailer Lamps: Description and Operation
TRAILER TOW
System Description
Power is supplied at all times
- to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R (intelligent power distribution module engine room), and
- through 50 A fusible link (letter f, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
- to BCM (body control module) terminal 70, and
- to 15 A fuse (No. 60, located in the fuse and relay box)
- through 15 A fuse (No. 60, located in the fuse and relay box)
- to trailer turn relay LH and RH terminal 5, and
- through 10 A fuse (No. 32, located in the IPDM E/R)
- through IPDM E/R terminal 61
- to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 3, and
- through 20 A fuse (No. 53, located in the IPDM E/R)
- to CPU (central processing unit) of the IPDM E/R, and
- to tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
- through 30 A fusible link (letter j, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
- to trailer tow relay 2 terminals 3 and 6, and
- through 40 A fusible link (letter k, located in the fuse and fusible link box)
- to electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 5.
With the ignition switch in the ON or START position, power is supplied
- to ignition relay, located in the IPDM E/R, and
- through 10 A fuse (No. 59, located in the fuse and relay box)
- to BCM terminal 38, and
- through 10 A fuse (No. 51, located in the IPDM E/R)
- to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 1.
Ground is supplied
- to BCM terminal 67
- to electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 1 and
- to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 2
- through grounds M57, M61 and M79, and
- to IPDM E/R terminals 38 and 59
- to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 2
- to trailer connector terminal 2
- to trailer turn relay LH and RH terminal 2
- through grounds E9, E15 and E24.
TRAILER TAIL LAMP OPERATION
The trailer tail lamps are controlled by the trailer tow relay 1.
With the lighting switch in the parking and tail lamp ON (1ST) position, AUTO position (and the auto
light system is activated) or headlamp ON (2ND) position, power is supplied
- through the tail lamp relay, located in the IPDM E/R
- through 10 A fuse (No. 36, located in the IPDM E/R)
- to IPDM E/R terminal 49
- to trailer tow relay 1 terminal 1.
When energized, trailer tow relay 1 supplies tail lamp power to trailer connector terminal 6.
TRAILER TURN SIGNAL AND HAZARD LAMP OPERATION
The trailer turn signal and hazard lamps are controlled by the BCM through trailer turn relays (LH
and RH). If either turn signal or the hazard lamps are turned on, the BCM supplies voltage to the
trailer turn relays (LH and RH) to make them cycle on and off.
Trailer turn relay LH output is supplied
- through BCM terminal 52
- to trailer turn relay LH terminal 1.
Trailer turn relay RH output is supplied
Page 285
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 3847
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 13384
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 11833
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 6936
Page 7264
NVH Troubleshooting Chart
Page 12662
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 9772
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 3480
Diagnostic Procedure For Water Valve (Steps 5 - 7)
Page 10389
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 10051
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 1098
Optional Splice
Page 13616
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 9926
Figure C-16
11. Install the condenser fan mounting bolt.
12. Install and torque 2 nuts to the air bag sensor.
- Torque: 15 N.m (1.52 Kg-m, 11 ft-lb)
- Apply medium strength thread-locker to the studs (Nissan P/N 999MP-AM005P or equivalent).
13. Make sure the Rubber Seal is inside the condenser fan electrical connector and then connect
the connector.
14. Install the bumper as follows:
For Titan and Armada with steel bumper do the following:
a. Lift bumper ON the locating tabs; both sides (see Figure C-18).
Page 14216
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 8430
Page 3874
d. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds, then
e. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" again for 10 seconds (see Figure 2).
f. Proceed with step 6.
Perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
NOTE:
Make sure all electrical loads are turned OFF, including A/C, defroster, radio, lights, etc. while
performing the following procedures. Also, make sure the engine cooling fans are NOT operating
during the following procedures.
6. Perform the Idle Air Volume Learning procedure as follows:
a. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
b. Warm up engine and transmission to operating temperature.
c. In the [CONSULT WORK SUPPORT] mode, select [IDLE AIR VOL LEARN]. See Figure 3.
NOTE:
^ If IDLE AIR VOL LEARN is not shown as a SELECT WORK ITEM on CONSULT, the vehicle
does not need the procedure.
^ In this case only, this bulletin is complete, no further action is needed.
Page 3550
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1359
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 13281
Brake Light Switch: Description and Operation
BRAKE SWITCH
Description
Brake switch signal is applied to the ECM through the stop lamp switch when the brake pedal is
depressed. This signal is used mainly to decrease the engine speed when the vehicle is driving.
Page 7710
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 12115
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpeting, etc. when performing this Procedure.
Preliminary Steps
NOTE:
^ Steps 1, 2 and 3 below, only apply to vehicles equipped with Front Side (SRS) Air Bags.
^ These vehicles equipped with Front Side (SRS) Air Bags have a tag on the front seatback (see
Figure 1).
1. Write down all radio station presets.
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Wait at least 3 minutes after the negative battery cable is disconnected before proceeding with
step 4 below.
Tilt Seat and Add Spacer Washer
4. Remove the four bolts that secure the driver's seat to the floor.
^ Refer to section SE in the Service Manual (ESM) for seat removal information.
5. Carefully tilt the seat back to reach the bottom of the seat (see Figure 2).
^ If needed, disconnect electrical connectors so you can tilt the seat.
6. Install the new Spacer Washer as shown in Figure 2.
^ Make sure the new Spacer Washer is fully inserted and locked into position.
Page 7449
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
harness.
Page 1695
Page 470
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5267
Case 1
Page 12345
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 487
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 3500
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 8697
Don't get butyl sealer from the welt on any of the interior trim surfaces.
60. Carefully pull down the side of the headlining at the rear just enough to get your arm above it.
61. Reach above the headlining and pop loose the rear clips (left and right side).
^ 2 clips on each side.
62. Look above the headlining, locate and disconnect the high mount brake light connector.
63. Take the harness loose from the body roof.
Page 1229
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 4581
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 10666
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 10174
Diagnostic Procedure For Water Valve (Steps 5 - 7)
Page 11479
- Check that the glass is securely fit into the glass run groove.
- Lower the glass slightly [approximately 10 to 20 mm (0.39 to 0.79 in)] and check that the
clearance to the sash is parallel. If the clearance between the glass and sash is not parallel, loosen
the regulator bolts, guide rail bolts, and glass and guide rail bolts to correct the glass position.
FRONT DOOR GLASS REGULATOR ASSEMBLY
Removal
1. Remove the front door speaker. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the
power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4.
Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts. 6. Raise the front door glass and hold it in
place with suitable tool. 7. Disconnect the harness connector from the regulator assembly. 8.
Remove the bolts and the regulator assembly.
Disassembly And Assembly
Remove the regulator motor from the regulator assembly.
Inspection After Removal
Check the regulator assembly for the following items. If a malfunction is detected, replace or
grease it.
- Wire wear
- Regulator deformation
- Grease condition for each sliding part
The arrows in the figure show the application points of the body grease.
Installation
1. Install the regulator assembly.
Front door glass regulator assembly nuts and bolt : 7.5 N.m (0.77 kg-m, 66 in-lb)
2. Connect the harness connector to the regulator assembly. 3. Align the glass and install the glass
bolts.
Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
4. Reset the limit switch. Refer to "Setting of Limit Switch". 5. Install front door speaker.
SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION
Setting of Limit Switch
If any of the following work has been done, set the limit switch (integrated in the motor).
- Removal and installation of the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the glass.
- Removal and installation of the glass run.
Resetting
Page 395
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set
PROM - Programmable Read Only Memory: All Technical Service Bulletins Emissions - MIL
ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set
Classification: EC06-009B
Reference: NTB06-095B
Date: September 2, 2008
2004 ARMADA / 2004-2006 TITAN; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446
APPLIED VEHICLES:2004-2006 Titan (A60)
2004 Armada (TA60)
This bulletin has been amended to add DTC P0448. No other changes have been made.
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(s) stored:
^ P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446
AND
^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed.
ACTIONS:
All applied vehicles:
Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V.
Clear any DTC(s) stored in the ECM.
AND IF the vehicle is a 2004-2006 Titan:
Refer to the Install Filter Kit Service Procedure of this bulletin.
AND IF the vehicle is a 2004 Armada:
Refer to the Install Protector Service Procedure of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 13863
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 1402
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Front Differential
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Front Differential
Front Oil Seal
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove front propeller shaft. 2. Separate the RH and LH drive shafts from the front
final drive. 3. Measure the drive pinion bearing preload with front oil seal resistance using Tool.
Tool number: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)
NOTE: Record the preload measurement.
4. Loosen drive pinion nut while holding the companion flange using Tool.
Tool number: KV38108300
5. Remove companion flange using a suitable puller.
6. Place a small hole in seal case, using a suitable punch or drill.
7. Remove oil seal using Tool as shown.
Tool number: - (SP8P)
INSTALLATION
Page 9783
Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Steps 10 - 14)
Page 12898
2. Remove the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit from the Fuel Pump Assembly as follows:
a. First, press in on the two locking tabs on the sides of the Fuel Gauge Sender Unit
b. Then, pull the unit UP and OUT of the attachment slots
^ For Type A see Figure 1
^ For Type B see Figure 2
Page 8388
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 3721
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 8356
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 13241
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 817
ECM Inspection Table Part 7
Page 10749
8. As the tape rolls up to the "D" ring, center and smooth the tape around the back side of the "D"
ring. Press the bubbles and wrinkles out with your fingers (see Figure 7).
9. Peel off the remaining tape backing (see Figure 8A).
10. Carefully apply the tape around the remainder of the "D" ring. Press down the edges and make
sure there are no wrinkles (see Figure 8B).
11. Pull the seat belt back and forth against the tape-covered "D" ring to ensure that the tape is
firmly applied (see Figure 9).
12. Remove the binder clip from the seat belt.
13. Confirm the seat belt moves smoothly and quickly through the "D" ring.
Page 11775
Other Mirror Types
Disclaimer
Page 7145
Control Unit: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove jack and tools. 3.
Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. 4. Remove the necessary
push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way.
5. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to disconnect connector. 6. Remove
the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit.
INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque. Differential lock
control unit nuts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.)
Page 10390
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 4116
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 4878
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 1074
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 10064
Optional Splice
Page 8156
Traction Control Module: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. 3. Drain the brake
fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit).
CAUTION: ^
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts
and brake tubes from being damaged.
^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench. Tighten brake tubes to specification
when installing.
^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with
new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system.
Page 850
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Description and Operation
FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM)
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system controls the fuel pump operation. The amount of fuel flow delivered from the fuel pump
is altered between two flow rates by the FPCM operation. The FPCM determines the voltage
supplied to the fuel pump (and therefore fuel flow) according to the given conditions.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The FPCM adjusts the voltage supplied to the fuel pump to control the amount of fuel flow. When
the FPCM increases the voltage supplied to the fuel pump, the fuel flow is increased. When the
FPCM decreases the voltage, the fuel flow is decreased.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Control Assembly: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 6643
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 309
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Window Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 2401
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) (Steps 3 - 5)
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH (Step 1)
Page 10398
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 11856
4. Pry off the bottom side actuator hook(s) to separate the actuator from the housing (if necessary).
NOTE:
Some actuators will not require prying. They will separate after removing the screw(s) in step 3.
5. Disconnect the motor electrical connector(s).
6. Remove the old actuator motor.
7. Install the new actuator motor in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2234
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 8594
Page 3574
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 12937
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 6720
Page 9974
Figure C-2
b. IMPORTANT: Make sure all 7 clips are released prior to the next step.
c. Hold the grill as shown and give it a sharp pull.
- Do this for both sides.
Figure C-3
4. Remove 2 bolts from the front bumper side bracket.
- Left side (driver side) only.
5. Remove bumper mounting bolts as follows:
For Titan and Armada with steel bumper do the following:
Page 14387
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 10340
Optional Splice
Page 10316
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 6009
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-037A Date: 100519
Recall R1010 - Fuel Level Sending Unit Replacement
Reference: NTB10-037A
Date: May 19, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2005 - 2009 ARMADA AND TITAN FUEL GAUGE
INACCURACY
This bulletin has been amended. Additions were made to the Parts Information. Please discard
previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID #: R1010
NHTSA #: 10V-074
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2005 - 2009 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2009 Titan (A60)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary recall campaign on certain MY2005-2009 Armada and Titan
vehicles to address a potential fuel gauge inaccuracy. Specifically, the issue can cause the fuel
gauge to show that the vehicle still has some fuel, typically about one quarter tank, when the fuel
tank is actually empty. To remedy this potential condition, Nissan is conducting this Voluntary
Safety Recall Campaign to replace the fuel level sending unit with a new one at no charge for parts
or labor.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number R1010 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 6408
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 6494
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 568
Page 3616
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 10333
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 9787
Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Steps 27 - 30)
Diagnostic Procedure For Blower Motor (Step 31)
Page 9930
Torque for bolts on brackets 1, 2, & 3: 9.6 N.m (0.97 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Figure C-25
d. Install and torque 2 bolts for the front bumper side bracket.
- Driver side only.
Torque: 14.2 N.m (1.45 kg-m, 10 ft-lb)
15. Install the grill.
Figure C-26
IMPORTANT:
Make sure all 7 clips are properly located in the grill before installing.
If you have installed a new fan, skip steps 16 - 19 and go to Procedure E.
16. Reconnect the Negative battery cable.
17. Reset the radio station presets.
18. Reset the clock.
19. Go to Procedure F.
Procedure D - Install Protective Covering to Fan Motor and Harness
(Only for Type 2-90 Wat-Fan Motors That Tested OK)
Page 8390
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
Brake Fluid .......................................................................................................................... Genuine
Nissan Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or Dot 3
Page 10199
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure". 2. Remove the
low-pressure pipe.
CAUTION: Cap or wrap the joint of the pipes with suitable material such as vinyl tape to avoid the
entry of air.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Replace the O-ring of the high/low-pressure pipe with a new one, then apply compressor oil to it
when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Recall 08V284000: Condenser Fan Motor Fire Hazard
Condenser Fan Motor: Recalls Recall 08V284000: Condenser Fan Motor Fire Hazard
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Infiniti/QX56 2005-2006 Nissan/Armada 2005-2006
Nissan/Titan 2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: June 24, 2008
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 08V284000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: PE08037 COMPONENT: Equipment: Electrical: Air Conditioner
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 180664
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling 180,664 M/Y 2005-2006 Titan, Armada and Infiniti QX56 vehicles
manufactured after March 17, 2005, That are equipped with a Visteon air conditioning condenser
fan motor. The fan motor may not be properly sealed allowing excessive water intrusion and
inadequate drainage of moisture.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause corrosion in the motor leading possibly to overheating and a
fire.
REMEDY: Dealers will install a "Thermal Protector Kit" and test the air conditioning condenser fan
motor and replace it if necessary. The recall is expected to begin near the end of July 2008.
Owners may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 12726
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 2084
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 2925
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuse: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Capacity Specifications
Coolant: Capacity Specifications
Cooling System Capacity (Approximate)
With reservoir ......................................................................................................................................
.......................... 3 1/4 gal. (2 5/8 Imp gal, 12.2 L)
Page 1318
Lifting Switch (Front) Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 3)
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Traction Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Page 1943
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 13005
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 12693
c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip.
d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab.
e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump.
^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector.
f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing.
CAUTION:
DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap.
Page 1779
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 4507
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 3599
Optional Splice
Page 2694
Disclaimer
Page 5913
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 12227
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Changeover Switch) Circuit Check (Step 3)
Door Mirror Remote Control Switch (Mirror Switch) Circuit Check (Step 1)
Page 6270
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 4265
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 12351
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 8555
Power Distribution Module: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Function of Detecting Ignition Relay Malfunction
- When the integrated ignition relay is stuck in a "closed contact" position and cannot be turned
OFF, IPDM E/R turns ON tail and parking lamps for 10 minutes to indicate IPDM E/R malfunction.
- When the state of the integrated ignition relay does not agree with the state of the ignition switch
signal received via CAN communication, the IPDM E/R activates the tail lamp relay.
Page 14388
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 7028
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 5475
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389)
Repair Overview
PARTS INFORMATION
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 974
13. Connect revolution sensor connector.
14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips.
15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal
CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level.
Page 12095
Lifting Switch (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Step 3)
Page 13321
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9856
Diagnostic Procedure For In-Vehicle Sensor (Steps 9 - 12)
Page 3287
Image Symbols
NOTE: ^
To remove timing chain and associated parts, start with those on the LH bank. The procedure for
removing parts on the RH bank is omitted because it is the same as that for removal on the LH
bank.
^ To install timing chain and associated parts, start with those on the RH bank. The procedure for
installing parts on the LH bank is omitted because it is the same as that for installation on the RH
bank.
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine assembly from the vehicle. 2. Remove the following components and related
parts:
^ Drive belt auto tensioner and idler pulley.
^ Thermostat housing and water hose.
^ Power steering oil pump bracket.
^ Oil pan (lower), (upper) and oil strainer.
^ Ignition coil.
^ Rocker cover.
3. Remove the chain case cover RH bank (A) and chain case cover LH bank (B) as follows:
a. Loosen and remove the bolts as shown. b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using
Tool.
Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces.
Page 12371
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 8672
8. Once the vinyl tube is cut off, put vinyl tape on the harness in two spots as shown in Figure B4.
9. Install the corrugated tube over the harness.
^ The corrugated tube will replace the vinyl tube that you cut off. Install the corrugated tube in the
direction shown in Figure B5.
Page 10659
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 1846
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 3321
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Clean the oil strainer.
INSTALLATION
1. Install the oil pan (upper) using the following steps.
a. Using a scraper to remove old liquid gasket from mating surfaces.
- Also remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of oil pan (upper).
- Remove old liquid gasket from bolt holes and threads.
CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off old liquid gasket.
b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket as shown using Tool.
Tool number: WS39930000 ( - )
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
CAUTION: Apply liquid gasket to outside of bolt hole for the hole shown by *. Installation should be done within
5 minutes after applying liquid gasket.
c. Install new O-rings to the oil pump and front cover side.
Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay
Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006
Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra
2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and
model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution
Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for
electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time,
the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM
relay contact due to arcing.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be
performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners
may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 10271
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 4591
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 4461
Body Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 9688
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Locations
Number One Cylinder: Locations
Firing Order
1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
#1 cylinder
Page 14164
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8767
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Firing Order
1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
#1 cylinder
Page 7927
wrench.
Brake Judder Repair
^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series
On-Car Brake Lathe.
^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe.
^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout
(see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin).
PEDAL FEEL
^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes.
^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer
comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car.
^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and
determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items:
a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely.
b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly
installed.
c. Bleed all air from the brake system.
d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of
the appropriate service manual.
NOTE:
Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and
adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE.
BRAKE SERVICE
To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to:
1. Finish rotors properly.
^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise.
^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for
rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information).
2. Correctly install pads and shims.
IMPORTANT:
Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for
proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations.
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
3. Perform the following post-installation checks.
^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary.
^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance,
including noise.
a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph).
b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph
(50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds.
c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without
stopping.
Page 11506
2. Remove the door side grommet and the bolt (TORX T30) from the grommet hole.
Torx bolt 5.3 N.m (0.54 kg-m, 47 in-lb)
3. While pulling the outside handle, remove the door handle escutcheon.
4. While pulling the outside handle, slide it toward the rear of vehicle to remove.
5. Remove the front and rear gaskets. 6. Remove the inside handle screws.
Page 1012
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 8832
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 13958
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 4476
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Description and Operation
Vehicle Speed Sensor/Transducer - Cruise Control: Description and Operation
ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Component Description
The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from
combination meter and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these
signals for ASCD control. Refer to "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for ASCD
functions.
Page 10044
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 12795
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 171
6. From the "CONSULT UTILITIES" screen, select "ECU Reprog. Data" (see Figure 4).
Page 8314
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 6315
Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 12428
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 12719
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 11595
Rear Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 3994
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 6229
Page 5696
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 11048
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 5016
System Diagram
- Type 1
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1
Page 601
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 14497
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Front Axle
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Front Axle
On-Vehicle Inspection and Service
Make sure the mounting conditions (looseness, backlash) of each component and component
status (wear, damage) are normal.
WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION
^ Move wheel hub in the axial direction by hand. Make sure there is no looseness of wheel bearing.
Axial end play limit: 0.05 mm (0.002 inch) or less
^ Rotate wheel hub and make sure there is no unusual noise or other irregular conditions. If there
are any irregular conditions, replace wheel hub and bearing assembly
Page 4582
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 7718
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 4479
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 14300
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 4917
ECM Inspection Table Part 4
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature
Sensor 2
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T
Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
COMPONENTS
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect
A/T assembly harness connector.
Page 12469
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 6625
2. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 3. Start engine. 4. Erase self-diagnosis. 5. Check 4WD shift indicator
lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again.
If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new
transfer control unit and retry the above check.
METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT "4H" OR "4LO" 1. Start engine.
Run the engine for at least 10 seconds. 2. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position
with brake pedal depressed. Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn 4WD shift switch to "2WD"
position. Stay in "2WD" for at least 2 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 5. Start engine. 6.
Erase self-diagnosis. 7. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again.
If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new
transfer control unit and retry the above check.
Interior - No/Erratic Seat Forward/Backward Operation
Power Seat Drive Gear: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - No/Erratic Seat Forward/Backward
Operation
Classification: BT05-052a
Reference: NTB05-105a
Date: October 31, 2008
FRONT POWER SEAT NO OR IMPROPER FORWARD / BACKWARD MOVEMENT
This bulletin has been amended to expand Applied Vehicles and to incorporate NTB05-056 into
this bulletin. No other changes have been made. Please discard the previous version of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) 2004 - 2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Quest
(V42) 2005 - 2007 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2007 Frontier (D40) 2004 - 2006 Altima (L31) 2004 2007 Maxima (A34)*
^ *2004 Maxima (A34); Applies to left and right front seats, with or without ADP (memory seat).
^ *2005 - 2006 Maxima (A34); Applies only to the left front (driver s) seat with ADP (memory seat).
APPLIED VINS: TA60 Built before: 5N1AA08A (*) 7N718400 A60 Built before: 1N6BA07B (*)
7N231607 V42 Built before: 5N1BV28U (*) 7N134315 A34 Built before: 1N4BA41E (*) 7C853209
D40 2005 - 2007 All VINS R51 2005 - 2007 All VINS L31 2004 - 2006 All VINS
APPLIED DATES: TA60 Built before: 05-Feb-2007 A60 Built before: 05-Feb-2007 V42 Built before:
15-Feb-2007 R51 All Dates D40 All Dates A34 Built before: 28-Feb-2007 L31 All Dates
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The seat slide motor or gear assembly needs to be replaced for any reason.
NOTE:
Incidents that require slide motor and gear assembly replacement include:
- The power seat has voltage (power) to it, but it will not move forward or backward.
- While moving the seat forward or backward, the seat won't track straight; it becomes cocked
(crooked) on the seat tracks.
- Noise from the slide motor or gears.
ACTION:
Replace only the Seat Slide Motor Kit listed in the Parts Information. Do Not replace the entire seat
adjuster assembly.
IMPORTANT:
ABS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 11010
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 4421
Spark Plug: Application and ID
SPARK PLUG
Standard type ......................................................................................................................................
............................................................... PLFR5A-11 Hot type ...........................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
PLFR4A-11 Cold type ..........................................................................................................................
................................................................................. PLFR6A-11
Gap ......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................1.1 mm (0.043 in.)
Torque .................................................................................................................................................
.............................. 24.5 Nm (2.5 kgf-cm, 18 ft. lbs.)
Page 1840
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 3959
Page 8321
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 2381
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 11972
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Recall 06V064000: R/H Rear Door Upper Latch
Replacement
Rear Door Latch: Recalls Recall 06V064000: R/H Rear Door Upper Latch Replacement
MAKE/MODELS: MODEL/BUILD YEARS: Nissan/Titan 2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North
America, Inc. NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 06V064000 MFG'S REPORT DATE: February 28,
2006
COMPONENT: Latches/Locks/Linkages: Doors: Latch
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 427
SUMMARY: Certain light trucks fail to comply with the requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 206, "Door Locks and Door Retention Components." An arc weld is missing
on some right side rear door upper latch assemblies.
CONSEQUENCE: This may result in the right side doors coming partially open increasing the risk
of injury to occupants.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the upper latch assembly free of charge. The recall is expected to
begin on April 15, 2006. Owners may contact Nissan at 800-662-6200.
NOTES: Customers may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 8806
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 5272
Case 6
Page 1317
Lifting Switch (Front) Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Page 13762
Combination Switch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Combination Switch Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 8893
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 12249
Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Page 5776
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 5442
BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic (Part 2)
Page 9725
Diagnostic Procedure For Ambient Sensor (Steps 7 - 9)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AMBIENT SENSOR
SYMPTOM: Ambient sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B257B or
B257C is displayed. Without a CONSULT-II, code 40 or 41 is indicated on front air control as a
result of conducting the front air control self-diagnosis.
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Ambient Sensor
Page 28
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 8453
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 8383
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 5970
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install Filter Kit (2004-2006 Titan ONLY)
1. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Note position of yellow marks.
2. Position mounting bracket onto frame as shown, hooking bracket tab onto brake hose bracket.
Attach bracket to frame with the clamp supplied in the kit.
Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Suspension - Front End Popping/Squeaking/Clunking
Noises
Stabilizer Bushing: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Front End
Popping/Squeaking/Clunking Noises
Classification: FA10-003A
Reference: NTB10-072A
Date: October 6, 2010
FRONT SUSPENSION NOISE
This bulletin has been amended. The PARTS INFORMATION section has been revised. No other
changes have been made. Please discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier (D40) 2005-2010 Pathfinder
(R51) 2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
APPLIED VINS/DATES: 2004-2009 Armada: All 2010 Armada built before: 5N1(*)A(*)N(**)AN
6067281 Oct 23, 2009 2004-2009 Titan: All 2010 Titan built before: 1N6(*)A(****)AN 3037881 Oct
23, 2009 2005-2010 Frontier/Pathfinder/Xterra: All
IF YOU CONFIRM
A noise (clunking, squeaking, popping) can be heard when performing at least one of the following
actions:
^ turning the steering wheel left or right
^ driving over speed bumps
^ driving on rough roads
^ accelerating or decelerating
AND
The noise is coming from the front stabilizer bar bushing.
ACTIONS
Replace the front stabilizer bar bushing on both sides (RH & LH) with the part listed in the Parts
Information section of this bulletin.
^ Refer to the FSU section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal and
installation instructions.
Page 13755
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 11747
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 3)
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 4)
Page 776
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 8556
Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Active Test
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG-MODE" screen. 2. Touch item to be tested, and
check operation. 3. Touch "START".
Part 1
Part 2
4. Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation.
Data Monitor
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
2. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "DATA
MONITOR" screen. 3. Touch "START". 4. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch
items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be
monitored. When "MAIN SIGNALS" is selected, predetermined items are monitored.
5. Touch RECORD while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop
recording, touch STOP.
Page 11789
Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent).
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for
connecting the fuel pressure gauge.
2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test".
^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure.
^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble
Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test.
^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test.
> If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and
repair information.
> If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3.
3. Replace the fuel pump.
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the
appropriate Service Manual.
^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information.
^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal.
4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed.
Page 13407
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 5918
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Classification: AT07-006B
Reference: NTB08-049B
Date: March 13, 2009
NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT
This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard
all earlier versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information,
the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to
the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used
as specified by the part number in this bulletin.
If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in
the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan
ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 9991
Figure D-11
9. Press and smooth all parts of protector 3. Make sure it is completely stuck to the fan motor.
- Pay special attention to the area shown in Figure D-11. Make sure there is good adhesion in this
area.
NOTE:
The large support ribs on the fan shroud are labeled 1 o'clock, 5 o'clock, 7 o'clock, and 11 o'clock
for reference when installing parts on to the fan shroud.
10. Thoroughly clean all dirt and debris from the fan shroud between the 1 o'clock and 5 o'clock
ribs (see Figure D-12).
- Use a locally approved brake cleaner and a clean rag.
11. Install Protector 4 on the fan shroud.
a. Remove 1 of the 4 sections from protector 4 adhesive backing.
b. Stick the 1st section next to the 5 o'clock support rib.
Page 8605
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 3458
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 12052
Figure 12
24. Make sure the "dimples" on the seat track mounting tabs are aligned with the holes in the seat
track (see Figures 11 and 12).
Figure 13
25. Install and hand tighten both seat track mounting tab bolts (M6, 10 mm head, see Figure 13).
Figure 14
26. Next, install and tighten the six nuts (three on each side) with the base plates. This will secure
the gear boxes (see Figure 14). Nut torque: 64-85
in-lb (7.17-9.69 Nm).
27. Re-install and tighten the two Seat Frame Side Bolts M8, 12 mm head (see Figure 14). Bolt
torque: 13-17 ft-lb (17.5-23.7 Nm).
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay
Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement
Reference: NTB10-137B
Date: December 22, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006
FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY
This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have
been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068
NHTSA#: 10V-517
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40)
2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM
relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles,
oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including
the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 10332
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 7328
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 10299
Optional Splice
Diagram Information and Instructions
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 4934
ECM Inspection Table Part 3
Page 14173
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 9117
Page 8471
Page 6263
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 8669
1. Turn the ignition ON and observe the air bag warning light:
^ Light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out: OK, go to Inspection Procedure 3.
^ Light stays ON or blinks: NG, go to next step (step 2).
^ Light does not come on at all: The warning light is not working correctly. This condition is not
covered by this campaign. Use the Service Manual and standard warranty procedures to repair the
warning light before proceeding.
2. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle and retrieve DTCs
Inspection Procedure 3 (Inspect Wire Harness at Rear Door Hinge)
1. Open the rear door and locate the harness in the door hinge area.
2. Inspect the wire harness vinyl tube:
^ Inspect the entire visible area. Look for worn areas, tears, and/or slits.
Page 9924
Figure C-12
7. Remove 2 nuts from the air bag sensor.
- Position the sensor out of the way.
WARNING:
Do not drop or otherwise impact the air bag sensor.
8. Remove the condenser fan mounting bolt.
Figure C-13
9. Pull the bumper forward and remove the fan.
If your fan motor tested OK in Procedure B:
a. Go to Procedure D to install the Fan Motor Protective covers.
- Protective Covering Kit is listed in the Parts Information.
b. Return here for installation of the fan assembly.
If your fan motor tested NG in Procedure B:
Page 2229
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 8789
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 13808
Power Window Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 6638
Optional Splice
Locations
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1140
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 11790
NOTE:
^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB.
Disclaimer
Page 5923
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 8325
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Electrical Units
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Specifications
Connecting Rod Bearing: Specifications
CONNECTING ROD BEARING (BIG END)
^ Install the connecting rod cap without the connecting rod bearing installed. After tightening the
connecting rod bolt to the specified torque, measure the connecting rod large end inside diameter.
Standard: 57.000 - 57.013 mm (2.2441 - 2.2446 inch)
^ If measurement exceeds the standard, replace connecting rod.
CONNECTING ROD BUSHING OIL CLEARANCE (SMALL END)
Connecting Rod Inside Diameter (Small End)
^ Measure inside diameter of bushing using suitable tool. Standard: 22.000 - 22.006 mm (0.8661 0.8664 inch)
Piston Pin Diameter
^ Measure diameter of piston pin using suitable tool. Standard: 21.989 - 21.995 mm (0.8657 0.8659 inch)
Connecting Rod Bushing Oil Clearance (Small End)
(Connecting rod small end oil clearance) = (Inside diameter of connecting rod small end) - (Piston
pin diameter) Standard: 0.005 - 0.017 mm (0.0002 - 0.0007 inch)
Page 4833
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 4233
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
TP SENSOR
Component Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The
throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which
transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In
addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the
voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from
these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
Automatic Air Conditioner
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor electrical connector and remove the refrigerant
pressure sensor from the condenser.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
- Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil
to it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 8727
13. Remove the lower dash side finisher.
^ There is a plastic clip behind the parking brake lever.
14. Disconnect each of the connectors on the connector support.
15. Remove connectors from support. For each connecter that is not part of the body harness:
a. Use a small flat blade screwdriver to unlock the connector mounts,
b. Then slide the connectors forward to remove them from the connector support.
Page 13578
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10192
8. Use 2 new harness clips to attach the harness as shown in Figure 6.
^ P/N for new harness clips: 24225-79900
Page 958
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Service and Repair
Backup Light Bulb: Service and Repair
REAR COMBINATION LAMP
Removal and Installation
Page 8734
34. Disconnect the 5 connectors shown in the figure.
NOTE:
The passenger side will have a 6th connector (not shown).
35. If the result for Inspection Procedure 1 was NG (seat belt retractor will not extend or retract;
remove the 2 seat belt retractor bolts and remove the seat belt.
^ During reassembly, install a new seat belt.
NOTE:
Seat belt retractor with seat belt pretensioner should be disposed of in accordance with local and
state regulations.
36. Take the harness loose from the door mounting points.
37. Pull the harness out of the door.
Harness Replacement Part 2 (Includes Seat Belt Replacement, If Needed)
Page 7430
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 12663
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 3)
Page 4720
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 4477
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 12774
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 1599
Page 8233
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 1788
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1208
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 5226
Check Sheet Part 1
Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000
Stored
Classification: EC06-001A
Reference: NTB06-009A
Date: March 31, 2006
MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information
sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of
this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
The MIL is "ON" with
^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR
^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit,
and
There are no drivability incidents.
DETERMINE IF
This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure.
ACTIONS
If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections:
^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections.
^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection.
^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left
side instrument stay assembly.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 14454
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 2894
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Page 9971
- The beam should be aimed between / through the slots in the fan shroud.
d. Observe the RPM reading on the tachometer and the volt reading on the Fluke 73 meter.
IMPORTANT:
The RPM and voltage reading should be observed at the same time with the fan motor running.
10. Record / write down the RPM and Volt readings you observed in step 9d.
NOTE:
Pressing the MEM (memory) button on the Phototach Digital Tachometer will display the last RPM
measurement.
11. Switch the Fan Motor Tester to OFF.
12. Disconnect the testers from the vehicle.
13. Use the chart below to determine if the fan motor is OK or No Good.
Page 9334
PARTS INFORMATION
Front
Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Front
On-vehicle Inspection PAD WEAR INSPECTION
- Inspect the thickness of pad through cylinder body inspection hole. Use a scale for inspection if
necessary. Standard thickness: 11.88 mm (0.468 inch) Repair limit thickness: 1.0 mm (0.039 inch)
Page 12874
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Power Window System
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Window System
Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Step
1)
Page 9951
Page 8889
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 11155
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 14075
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 1126
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 11829
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 13745
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 13323
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Front Suspension
Diagram Information and Instructions
Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 13165
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises
Shackle: All Technical Service Bulletins Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises
Classification: RA09-006
Reference: NTB10-011
Date: January 20, 2010
TITAN; LEAF SPRING NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLE: 2004-2009 Titan (A60)
APPLIED VINS: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before 1N6(*)A0(***)9N 319522
APPLIED DATES: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before August 26, 2009
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A clicking noise is coming from one or both leaf springs.
ACTION: Inspect the anti-windup clip bolts and bushings.
^ If replacement is determined as necessary, use the parts listed in PARTS INFORMATION in this
bulletin.
^ For repair procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE in this bulletin.
^ Do not replace the leaf spring assembly when anti-windup bolt and bushing replacement will
resolve the incident, if it should occur.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown.
PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
VIN Registration
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair VIN Registration
VIN Registration
DESCRIPTION
VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is
replaced.
NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance
(I/M).
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to Application and ID. 2. Turn ignition switch ON
and engine stopped.
3. Select "VIN REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of
CONSULT-II display.
Page 12935
Page 13805
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Specifications
Timing Chain Tensioner: Specifications
Page 4824
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 10426
Ambient Temperature Sensor / Switch HVAC: Service and Repair
AMBIENT SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the ambient sensor electrical connector.
NOTE: The ambient sensor is located behind the front bumper, in front of the condenser.
2. Release the ambient sensor clip and then remove the ambient sensor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4208
Knock Sensor: Description and Operation
KS
Component Description
The knock sensor is attached to the cylinder block. It senses engine knocking using a piezoelectric
element. A knocking vibration from the cylinder block is sensed as vibrational pressure. This
pressure is converted into a voltage signal and sent to the ECM.
Page 42
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 10591
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 8592
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 10726
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF CENTER BENCH SEAT BELT AND SEAT BELT BUCKLE
Removal
1. Remove center front seat. 2. Remove anchor bolt cover, bolt and seat belt. 3. Remove anchor
bolt cover, bolt and seat belt buckle.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4784
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 9825
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 4299
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3.
Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower).
INSTALLATION
1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air cleaner case
(upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet).
Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips
Engine Oil: Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Cold Weather Engine Starting Tips
Classification: PI95-005A
Reference: NTB95-120A
Date: January 10, 2003
COLD WEATHER STARTING TIPS
This bulletin supersedes PI95-005. The Service Information has been amended. Please discard all
paper copies of PI95-005
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All models
SERVICE INFORMATION
In case a vehicle is hard to start during cold weather, we suggest the following procedure.
^ These steps are a review of the procedure outlined in the Owner's Manual.
^ Use these steps when the weather is cold and the engine is hard to start.
1. Press the accelerator pedal down approximately 1/3 of the way to the floor.
2. Hold the accelerator pedal in this position while cranking the engine.
3. Once the engine has started release the accelerator pedal.
NOTE:
Do not race the engine while warming it up.
4. If the engine does not start within 15 seconds, stop cranking, wait at least 10 seconds. Then
repeat steps 1 through 3.
Once an engine is started in cold weather condition:
^ You should keep the engine running for a minimum of 2-3 minutes before shutting it off.
^ Starting and stopping of the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more
difficult to restart.
^ It may also adversely affect a vehicle's fuel economy.
Another factor which may affect a vehicles "startability" is the viscosity or thickness of the oil that is
used.
^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity engine oil is preferred for all temperatures, all year-round for most models.
^ SAE 5W-30 viscosity oil makes it easier to start the engine and maintain a stable idle during
warm-up.
Please communicate these cold weather starting tips to your customers.
Disclaimer
Page 8099
2. Check the CONSULT-II's "Charger Input" reading (see Figure 15).
NOTE:
^ "Battery Voltage" is the voltage level of CONSULT-II's battery.
^ "Charger Input" is the voltage level of the vehicle's battery. (It MUST be above 12 volts.)
3. As mentioned, the "Charger Input" reading MUST be above 12 volts (see Figure 15).
^ A reading above 12 volts confirms;
a. The DLC-II is properly connected to the vehicle,
b. The vehicle battery voltage is sufficient for ABS/VDC reprogramming, and
c. CONSULT-II has a sufficient power supply to perform ABS/VDC reprogramming.
^ If the vehicle's battery voltage ("Charger Input") is below 12 volts, one or more of the following
may be the cause:
a. The battery charger you hooked up in section 1 is not charging the battery (poor connection or it
is not working).
b. The DLC-II does not have a good connection to the vehicle (not straight).
c. The DLC-II cable may have a malfunction (damaged wire or pins).
d. The CONSULT-II Converter (J44200-50 / black box) is not working correctly (see Figure 11).
CAUTION:
^ Do not attempt ABS/VDC reprogramming if the vehicle's battery voltage is below 12 volts.
^ Permanent ABSNDC damage can occur if the vehicle battery does not maintain the minimum
voltage during ABS/VDC reprogramming.
^ If "Charger Input" is above 12 volts, power from the vehicle battery will keep CONSULT-II's power
supply at the correct level during reprogramming (see Figure 15).
4. Continue with Section 4.
Section 4
Section 4: Perform ABSNDC Control Unit Reprogramming
1. Press [BACK] two times.
Page 6442
Knock Sensor: Connector Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 9585
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 8405
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 11051
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 13670
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Component Locations
Knock Sensor: Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 7060
1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "Components". See: Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component
Parts)/Components
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
4. Securely fasten A/T temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clip. 5. Install oil pan to
transmission case. 6. Connect the negative battery terminal
CAUTION: After completing installation, check for A/T fluid leakage and fluid level.
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 5218
Case 7
Page 1922
Optional Splice
Page 779
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 4900
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 3857
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 12009
Figure 18
31. Re-install the four Seat Bottom Cushion Bolts M8, 12 mm head (see Figure 18). Bolt torque:
13-17 ft-lb (17.5-23.7 Nm).
32. Re-connect the slide motor electrical connector, making sure it snaps in securely.
33. Place the seat assembly back into the vehicle and re-connect all electrical connectors. Make
sure they all snap together securely.
34. Re-connect the battery cables, positive cable first.
35. Finish reinstalling the seat. Torque mounting bolts to 45 N.m (4.6 Kg.m, 35 ft-lbs.).
- If needed, refer to section SE in the Service Manual (ESM) for seat installation information.
36. Operate all seat switches to make sure everything works as it should.
37. If the vehicle is equipped with "ADP", for the ADP entry/exit feature to return to normal
operation, procedure A or B must be performed.
Procedure A:
1. Insert key into the ignition key cylinder. (Ignition switch is "OFF".)
2. Open - close - open the driver side door (dome lamp; "ON" - "OFF" - "ON" ).
3. End
Procedure B:
1. Drive the vehicle at more than 25 km/h (16 MPH).
2. End
38. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
39. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual and perform the following as needed:
- Power Window Initialization
- Power Sunroof Initialization
- Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
- Throttle Valve closed Position Learning
- Idle Air Volume Learning
- Steering Angle Sensor Neutral Position
- Rear View Monitor Guiding Line Adjustment
Page 6842
6. Allow the ATF temperature to fall to approximately 65°C (149°F). Use the CONSULT-II to
monitor the fluid temperature as follows:
NOTE: Fluid level will be greatly affected by temperature as shown. Therefore monitor the fluid
temperature data using the CONSULT-II.
a. Connect CONSULT-II to data link connector. b. Select "MAIN SIGNALS" in "DATA MONITOR"
mode for "A/T" with CONSULT-II. c. Read out the value of "ATF TEMP 1".
7. Re-check the fluid level at fluid temperatures of approximately 65°C (149°F) using the "HOT"
range on the A/T fluid level gauge as shown.
CAUTION: ^
When wiping the fluid from the ATF level gauge, always use lint-free paper, not a cloth.
^ To check the fluid level, insert the ATF level gauge until the cap contacts the top of the charging
pipe, with the gauge reversed from the normal inserted position as shown.
8. Check the fluid condition.
^ If the fluid is very dark or has some burned smell, there may bean internal problem with the
transmission. Flush the transmission cooling system after repairing the transmission.
^ If the ATF contains frictional material (clutches, bands, etc.) replace the radiator and flush the
transmission cooler line using cleaning solvent and compressed air after repairing the transmission.
9. Install the ATF level gauge in the fluid charging pipe and install the level gauge bolt.
10. Tighten the level gauge bolt to specification.
Level gauge bolt: Refer to "Components". See: Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component
Parts)/Components
Page 1579
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner
INTAKE SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the instrument panel.
2. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
NOTE: The intake sensor is located on the top of the heater and cooling unit assembly next to the
A/C evaporator cover.
3. Twist the intake sensor to remove the intake sensor from the heater and cooling unit assembly.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 11302
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 7729
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 2281
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 785
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 647
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 14249
Page 5634
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 6162
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 11822
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 9144
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order:
^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface.
If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the front turn plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
Page 246
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 11016
AV-DVD-03
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 6626
Control Module: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
TRANSFER CONTROL UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Remove the
glove box assembly.
3. Disconnect transfer control unit connectors. 4. Remove the transfer control unit.
INSTALLATION Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
When installing the transfer control unit, tighten bolts to the specified torque. Transfer control unit
bolts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.)
^ After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position between transfer
assembly and transfer control unit. See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Transfer Case/Service
Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control
Unit Replacement
Page 3315
EM-10
Page 4241
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 529
12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install.
13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides.
14. Reinstall the IPDM cover.
15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first.
16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset
their ADP settings (ADP memory).
Page 14330
Windshield Washer Motor: Service and Repair
Washer Motor
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
1. Remove washer fluid reservoir.
2. Remove washer motor (1) in the direction of the arrow as shown, from washer fluid reservoir (2).
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: When installing front and rear washer motor, there should be no packing twists, etc.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 8770
Page 6474
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 4004
7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs.
Disclaimer
Page 3223
EM-5
Page 13756
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 2293
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5441
Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic (Part 1)
Page 4839
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 14391
Wiper Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 8328
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 9800
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the glove box assembly. Refer to "LOWER INSTRUMENT PANEL RH AND GLOVE
BOX". 2. Disconnect the variable blower control electrical connector. 3. Remove the two screws
and remove the variable blower control.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 11514
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 8981
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 1520
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 10776
Impact Sensor: Service and Repair Side Air Bag (Satellite) Sensor
SIDE AIR BAG (SATELLITE) SENSOR
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
- Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
1. Remove seat belt pre-tensioner. 2. Remove side air bag (satellite) sensor nuts. 3. Disconnect
the side air bag (satellite) sensor harness connector.
CAUTION:
- Do not use old nuts after removal; replace with new nuts.
- Check side air bag (satellite) sensor to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it
shows any visible signs of damage, replace it with new one.
- Do not disassemble side air bag (satellite) sensor.
- Replace side air bag (satellite) sensor if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Air Bag Systems/Testing and Inspection/Component
Tests and General Diagnostics
Page 7451
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
Page 4114
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 503
Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Page 5057
CAN Communication Circuit Inspection (Steps 5 - 6)
Work Flow
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES WORK FLOW
When Displaying CAN Communication System Errors
WHEN A MALFUNCTION IS DETECTED BY CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
- CAN communication line is open. (CAN H, CAN L, or both)
- CAN communication line is shorted. (Ground, between CAN lines, or other harnesses)
- The areas related to CAN communication of unit is malfunctioning.
WHEN A MALFUNCTION IS DETECTED EXCEPT CAN COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
- Removal and installation of parts: When the units that perform CAN communication or the
sensors related to CAN communication are removed and installed, malfunction may be detected
(or DTC other than CAN communication may be detected).
- Fuse blown out (removed): CAN communication of the unit may be stopped at such time.
- Low voltage: If the voltage decreases because of battery discharge when IGN is ON, malfunction
may be detected by self-diagnosis according to the units.
Trouble Diagnosis Flow Chart
Page 3962
Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Fuel Pressure: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open
Acceleration
Classification: FE07-004
Reference: NTB07-040
Date: June 6, 2007
2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007
Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223
APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007
IF YOU CONFIRM
When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced,
ACTIONS
1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure).
2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump.
NOTE:
Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 968
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
harness.
Page 8883
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 5083
Case 10
Case 11
Page 13032
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 3762
4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
6. Touch "A60" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on
"VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See:
Application and ID
7. Touch "READ CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen.
Page 1612
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 5669
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 6748
3. Attach filter to bracket and filter hoses to fittings as shown.
Install Protector (2004 Armada ONLY)
1. Assemble the protector into the left rear wheelhouse as shown.
Page 3885
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389)
Repair Overview
PARTS INFORMATION
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 7039
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 820
Engine Control Module: Description and Operation
ECM POWER SUPPLY
Component Description
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is turned OFF for the ECM
memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the
idle air volume learning value memory, etc.
ECM
Component Description
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power
supply. The ECM controls the engine.
Page 1816
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 10667
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 5705
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 8613
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 13585
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 13278
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Service and Repair
Axle Bearing: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 1830
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab)
Door Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Crew Cab)
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 9649
Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Front) (Steps 10 - 12)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AIR MIX DOOR MOTOR (FRONT)
Intake Door Motor Circuit
Intake Door Motor Circuit
SYMPTOM:
- Intake door does not change.
- Intake door motor does not operate normally.
Page 14063
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 8677
b. Disconnect the electrical connectors.
c. Remove the 3 mounting bolts.
d. Remove the control unit from the vehicle.
7. If equipped with front bench seat (shifter on steering column), remove the center seat and cup
holder:
a. Remove the finisher at the rear of the center seat.
a. Remove the 4 center seat mounting bolts.
b. Remove the seat from the vehicle and place it in a clean area.
Page 2621
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
Removal and Installation
FUNCTION
The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin microfilters when the heater or
A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin microfilters are
located in the front heater and cooling unit assembly.
REPLACEMENT TIMING
Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a regular interval depending on
the driving conditions. Refer to "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE". It may also be necessary to replace
the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are
damaged.
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
1. Remove the two lower glove box hinge pins to remove the glove box from the instrument panel
and let it hang from the cord.
2. Remove the screw and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. 3. Remove the in-cabin microfilters
from the front heater and cooling unit assembly housing.
Service and Repair
Valve Guide Seal: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of Valve Oil Seal REMOVAL
1. Remove the camshaft relating to the valve oil seal to be removed. 2. Remove the valve lifters.
^ Correctly identify the location where each part is removed from. Keep parts organized to avoid
mixing them up.
3. Turn the crankshaft until the cylinder requiring new oil seals is at TDC. This will prevent the valve
from dropping into the cylinder.
4. Remove the valve collet using Tool.
Tool number : KV10116200 (J-26336-A) : KV10115900 (J-26336-20) : KV10109220 ( - )
CAUTION: Do not damage the valve lifter holes.
5. Remove the valve spring retainer and valve spring.
CAUTION: Do not remove the valve spring seat from the valve spring.
6. Remove the valve oil seal using Tool.
Tool number: KV10107902 (J-38959)
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
^ Install the valve oil seal using Tool. Tool number: KV10115600 (J-38958)
^ Apply new engine oil on the new valve oil seal joint and seal lip.
^ Install the valve oil seal to the specified height "H". Height "H" (without valve spring installed)
Intake and exhaust: 14.3 - 14.9 mm (0.563 - 0.587 inch)
Page 244
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 6969
1. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
2. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "Components". See: Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component
Parts)/Components
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
3. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
4. Securely fasten A/T temperature sensor 2 harness with terminal clip. 5. Install oil pan to
transmission case. 6. Connect the negative battery terminal
CAUTION: After completing installation, check for A/T fluid leakage and fluid level.
Page 9854
Diagnostic Procedure For In-Vehicle Sensor (Steps 1 - 4)
Page 1882
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9146
2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows:
^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates.
^ Center the turn plates to the tires.
^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel.
DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body.
Page 555
Page 13057
Speedometer Head: Description and Operation
SPEEDOMETER
ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) provides a vehicle speed signal to the combination
meter via CAN communication lines.
Page 7558
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair Rear Oil Seal
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Partially drain transfer fluid. 2. Remove the rear propeller shaft.
3. Remove dust cover from rear case.
CAUTION: Do not damage the rear case.
4. Remove rear oil seal from rear case, using Tool.
CAUTION: Do not damage the rear case.
Tool number: KV381054S0 (J-34286)
INSTALLATION
1. Install new rear oil seal until it is flush with end face of rear case, using Tool.
Tool number: KV38100500
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse oil seal.
^ Apply petroleum jelly to oil seal.
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Technical Service Bulletin # 04-054C Date: 110406
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Alignment Info.
Classification: WT04-004C
Reference: NTB04-054C
Date: April 6, 2011
WHEEL ALIGNMENT INFORMATION
This bulletin has been amended to correct some typographical errors in SERVICE INFORMATION.
No other changes have been made. Discard all previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
Warranty Claim Information: In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the
following item MUST be attached to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
General Information and Recommendations
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ When performing a wheel alignment it is important that you read and follow all of the instructions
supplied with your alignment equipment.
^ The information in this bulletin is not intended to be complete wheel alignment instructions.
^ Use the information in this bulletin as a supplement to the instructions for your equipment.
General Information and Recommendations
1. Four-Wheel Thrust Alignment should always be performed.
^ This type of alignment is recommended for all Nissan vehicles.
^ The four-wheel thrust process ensures that the vehicle is properly aligned, and helps ensure
proper "centering" of the steering wheel.
2. Use the right alignment machine.
^ You must use a quality alignment machine that will give accurate results when performing
alignment checks.
^ Refer to the Nissan TECH-MATE Service Equipment Catalog for recommended alignment
equipment.
^ The alignment rack itself should be capable of accepting any Nissan vehicle. The rack should be
checked to ensure that it is level.
3. Make sure the alignment machine is properly calibrated.
^ Your alignment equipment should be regularly calibrated in order to give accurate readings.
^ If any instrument that is part of the alignment machine is dropped or damaged, calibration should
be checked immediately.
^ Check with the manufacturer of your specific equipment for their recommended
service/calibration schedule.
NOTE:
In order to properly document any warranty alignment claim, the following item MUST be attached
to the Repair Order:
^ A copy of the alignment machine printout showing the BEFORE and AFTER alignment readings.
Page 4797
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 7503
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4903
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 6385
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Description
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the A/T assembly facing the gear teeth (cogs)
of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to
change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM
receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 11783
Other Mirror Types
Disclaimer
Page 13684
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 6278
- After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as
follows:
- Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
1. Turn the ignition switch ON but do not start engine, then check the fuel pipes and hose
connections for leaks while applying fuel pressure to the
system.
2. Start the engine and rev it above idle speed, then check that there are no fuel leaks at any of the
fuel pipe and hose connections.
Page 10597
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 5109
Case 8
Recall PB081/PB077 - A/C Condenser Fan Modification
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-068B Date: 080909
Recall PB081/PB077 - A/C Condenser Fan Modification
Reference: NTB08-068b
Date: September 9, 2008
VOLUNTARY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004 - 2006 NISSAN TITAN AND ARMADA AIR
CONDITIONER CONDENSER FAN
This bulletin has been amended. The Claims Information has changed. Please discard previous
versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID # : PB081 - for Applied Vehicles built before March 17, 2005 PB077 - for Applied
Vehicles built on or after March 17, 2005
NHTSA # : 08V-284
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60)
2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60)
Refer to Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility and correct campaign ID #.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a Voluntary Recall Campaign on certain Model Year 2004, 2005, and 2006
Nissan Titan and Armada vehicles:
- All vehicles manufactured from March 17, 2005 to August 21, 2006 are subject to this campaign.
- Model Year 2004 vehicles and Model Year 2005 vehicles manufactured before March 17, 2005
are included only if the air conditioning condenser fan was replaced after the vehicle was originally
purchased using one of the affected replacement parts.
The air conditioning condenser fan motor in the subject vehicles was manufactured out of
specification allowing for excessive water intrusion and inadequate drainage of moisture. If enough
moisture accumulates in the motor, corrosion may occur, leading to increased temperature in the
motor. Because of the motor's unique structure, this increased temperature could melt its wiring
insulation and other plastic components and ultimately result in a fire. To correct the issue, Nissan
will inspect, and as needed, install a thermal protector kit on the air conditioning condenser fan at
no charge for parts or labor.
Also, to ensure continued customer satisfaction with the air conditioning system in these vehicles,
the condenser fan motor will be tested for excessive friction. If necessary, the motor will be
replaced with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. (If a new motor is installed, the protector kit
is not needed.)
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification numbers PB077 and PB081 to this campaign. PB077 or PB081
must appear on all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
- PB081 is for 2004 and 2005 vehicles built before March 17, 2005.
- PB077 is for 2005 and 2006 vehicles built on or after March 17, 2005.
- Refer to Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility and correct campaign ID #.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 6040
NOTE:
^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB.
Disclaimer
Page 2230
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 4153
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 13244
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 6739
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 6528
Components
REMOVAL
1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Disconnect transfer
control device harness connector. 3. Remove breather hose from transfer control device.
Page 9525
Wheels: Service and Repair
REMOVAL
1. Remove inner and outer balance weights from the wheel.
CAUTION: Be careful not to scratch the wheel during removal.
2. Using releasing agent, remove double-faced adhesive tape from the wheel.
CAUTION: After removing double-faced adhesive tape, wipe clean traces of releasing agent from
the wheel.
WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT
^ If a tire balance machine has adhesion balance weight mode settings and drive-in weight mode
setting, select and adjust a drive-in weight mode suitable for wheels.
1. Set wheel on wheel balancer using the center hole as a guide. Start the tire balance machine. 2.
When inner and outer imbalance values are shown on the wheel balancer indicator, multiply outer
imbalance value by 1.6 to determine balance
weight that should be used. Select the outer balance weight with a value closest to the calculated
value and install it to the designated outer position of, or at the designated angle in relation to the
road wheel.
CAUTION: ^
Do not install the inner balance weight before installing the outer balance weight.
^ Before installing the balance weight, be sure to clean the mating surface of the wheel.
Indicated imbalance value x 5/3 = balance weight to be installed Calculation example: 23 grams
(0.81 ounces) x 5/3 = 38.33 grams (1.35 ounces) = 40 grams (1.41 ounces) balance weight (closer
to calculated balance weight value) Note that balance weight value must be closer to the calculated
balance weight value. Example: 37.4 grams = 35 grams (1.23 ounces) 37.5 grams = 40 grams
(1.41 ounces)
a. Install balance weight in the position shown. b. When installing balance weight to wheels, set it
into the grooved area on the inner wall of the wheel as shown so that the balance weight center
is aligned with the wheel balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION: ^
Always use Genuine NISSAN adhesion balance weights.
^ Balance weights are not reusable; always replace with new ones.
^ Do not install more than three sheets of balance weights.
Page 8715
5. Mark the harness vinyl tube 10 mm above the spot where the body harness clip was located
(see Figure B2).
6. Mark the harness vinyl tube 15 mm from the door grommet (see Figure B2).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure you have marked the vinyl tube correctly.
^ You will be removing the vinyl tube between the marks that you just made.
^ It is very important that you remove only the amount of vinyl tube between the marks.
7. Using the Vinyl Tube Scissors carefully cut off the vinyl tube between the marks you made in
steps 5 and 6.
IMPORTANT:
^ DO NOT use a razorblade.
^ Keep the lower (protected-blunt end) shear of the scissors towards the wires inside the vinyl tube.
^ Don't damage the wires inside the vinyl tube.
CAUTION:
It is very important that you use the Vinyl Tube Scissors when removing the wiring harness vinyl
tubing. Failure to use the Vinyl Tube Scissors for this procedure could cause damage to the
electrical wiring and may affect vehicle electrical system functions.
Page 5420
Specifications
Knock Sensor: Specifications
Knock Sensor Torque ..........................................................................................................................
....................................................... 21.1 Nm, 16 ft lb
Page 9331
Page 10393
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 12476
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 6560
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 10327
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 12682
3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5):
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly.
a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap
in place.
^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down
(it should not move).
b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip.
^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib.
c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab.
d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6).
e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place.
Page 7332
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 4572
Page 3456
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 8633
Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Active Test
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG-MODE" screen. 2. Touch item to be tested, and
check operation. 3. Touch "START".
Part 1
Part 2
4. Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation.
Data Monitor
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
2. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "DATA
MONITOR" screen. 3. Touch "START". 4. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch
items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be
monitored. When "MAIN SIGNALS" is selected, predetermined items are monitored.
5. Touch RECORD while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop
recording, touch STOP.
Page 5284
Case 1
Page 7555
Components
REMOVAL
1. Partially drain transfer fluid. 2. Remove front propeller shaft.
Page 5330
Case 11
Page 4974
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 1039
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 10039
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 3968
Page 5193
Check Sheet Part 1
Page 8337
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
A/C - Compressor Clutch Replacement Information
Compressor Clutch: Technical Service Bulletins A/C - Compressor Clutch Replacement Information
Classification: HA10-006
Reference: NTB10-043
Date: March 17, 2010
A/C COMPRESSOR CLUTCH REPLACEMENT
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2002-2008 Altima (L31, L32) 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) 2005-2010 Frontier
(D40) 2004-2010 Maxima (A34, A35) 2005-2010 Pathfinder (R51) 2004-2009 Quest (V42)
2004-2010 Titan (A60) 2005-2010 Xterra (N50)
SERVICE INFORMATION
The A/C compressor clutch is available separately as a service part for the Applied Vehicles.
If the compressor clutch needs to be replaced for any reason AND the compressor is operating
normally:
^ Replace the compressor clutch only. Do not replace the compressor assembly.
^ Refer to the applicable Electronic Service Manual for compressor clutch removal and installation
instructions.
Page 10884
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 9839
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 14294
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 10322
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 9941
Figure D-20
Figure D-21
- Refer to Figures D-18 through D-21 for clip locations.
- Use the large 7 o'clock and 11 o'clock ribs for reference.
- Count the slots in the fan shroud to confirm locations for clips 3 and 4.
16. Install 2 tie-wraps on the fan motor cover.
- Use 1 inch (28 cm) tie-wraps from the protector kit.
Key Switch (Insert) Check (Column Shift)
Ignition Key In Signal: Testing and Inspection Key Switch (Insert) Check (Column Shift)
Key Switch (Insert) Check (Column Shift) (Step 1)
Page 7631
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 10261
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 12607
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 1645
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1306
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection
Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Reclining Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 13807
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 8730
22. Remove the carpet clips shown in the figure below.
23. Pull the seat branch through the carpet.
24. Lift the floor carpet, remove the ground bolt and take the SRS branch loose from the floor.
Page 4088
ECM Inspection Table Part 4
Page 925
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 11290
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 1271
Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Steps
2 - 4)
Page 4705
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 12483
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 7161
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the ABS sensor, and position it out of the way.
^ See the BRC section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
2. Remove the rear brake rotor.
^ See the BR section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for removal instructions.
3. Disconnect the parking brake cable from the parking brake assembly.
^ See the PB section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual for instructions.
4. Remove the four (4) axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers.
5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using suitable tools.
Locations
Page 12506
Audible Warning Device: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
CONSULT-II Basic Operation Procedure
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT- II CONVERTER to the data
link connector, and turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen. If "BCM" is not indicated, go to "CONSULT-II Data
Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Data Link
Connector/Schematic
Page 1728
Page 12185
^ If you find the old Spacer Washer on the floor of the car, discard it.
Reinstall the Seat and Check its Operation
7. Reinstall the seat, making sure:
^ All wire harnesses are connected and correctly routed to prevent pinching and chaffing.
^ The four seat mounting bolts are tightened to: 45 Nm (4.6 Kg.m, 35 ft-lbs.)
8. Re-connect the battery cables, positive cable first (if you disconnected them in step 2).
9. Check the power seat controls, making sure:
^ They operate correctly.
^ The incident noise is fixed.
10. Re-program the radio station presets and re-set the clock (if you disconnected the battery in
step 2).
11. Initialize the power windows and sunroof as applicable. For Frontier and Pathfinder vehicles
with Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) reset the Steering Angle Sensor as applicable. Reference the
Electronic Service Manual as needed.
Disclaimer
Page 3367
Idle Speed: Adjustments
Idle Air Volume Learning
DESCRIPTION
Idle Air Volume Learning is an operation to learn the idle air volume that keeps each engine within
the specific range. It must be performed under any of the following conditions:
- Each time electric throttle control actuator or ECM is replaced.
- Idle speed or ignition timing is out of specification.
PREPARATION
Before performing Idle Air Volume Learning, make sure that all of the following conditions are
satisfied. Learning will be cancelled if any of the following conditions are missed for even a
moment.
- Battery voltage: More than 12.9 V (At idle)
- Engine coolant temperature: 70 - 100 degrees C (158 - 212 degrees F)
- Park/Neutral position (PNP) switch: ON
- Electric load switch: OFF (Air conditioner, headlamp) On vehicles equipped with daytime light
systems, if the parking brake is applied before the engine is start the headlamp will not be
illuminated.
- Steering wheel: Neutral (Straight-ahead position)
- Vehicle speed: Stopped
- Transmission: Warmed-up With CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle until "ATF TEMP SE 1" in "DATA MONITOR" mode of "A/T"
system indicates less than 0.9 V.
- Without CONSULT-II: Drive vehicle for 10 minutes.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order.
5. Select "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode.
6. Touch "START" and wait 20 seconds.
Page 9026
Page 3530
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 10260
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 1066
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 4989
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 11349
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 1413
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 13053
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 2680
Brake Fluid: Service and Repair Drain and Refill
Drain and Refill
CAUTION: ^
Refill with new brake fluid.
^ Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
^ Do not let brake fluid splash on the painted surfaces of the body. This might damage the paint, so
if splashing it, immediately wipe off the area and wash away with water.
^ Before servicing, disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector or battery
negative cable.
1. Connect a vinyl tube to each bleed valve.
2. Depress brake pedal, loosen each bleed valve, and gradually remove brake fluid.
3. Make sure there is no foreign material in reservoir tank, and refill with new brake fluid. 4. Rest
foot on brake pedal. Loosen bleed valve. Slowly depress pedal until it stops. Tighten bleed valve.
Release brake pedal. Repeat this process a
few times, then pause to add new brake fluid to master cylinder. Continue until new brake fluid
flows out. Bleed air.
Page 8357
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 763
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 12413
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 12475
Page 7058
13. Connect revolution sensor connector.
14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips.
15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal
CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level.
Front Axle
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Axle
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove engine undercover if equipped, using
power tool. 3. Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove the torque member bolts using
power tool. Then reposition brake caliper aside with wire.
NOTE: Do not press brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
4. Put alignment mark on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor.
5. For 4WD model, perform the following:
^ Remove cotter pin, then lock nut from drive shaft using power tool.
^ Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly.
6. Remove wheel sensor.
^ Inspect the wheel sensor O-ring, replace the wheel sensor assembly if damaged.
^ Clean the wheel sensor hole and mating surface with a suitable brake cleaner and clean lint-free
shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle bearing area.
^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
CAUTION: Do not pull on the wheel sensor harness.
7. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool. 8. Remove splash guard and
wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 8540
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 4972
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 2427
SPECIAL TOOLS
Page 1211
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 267
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 5126
Case 9
Page 3033
c. Remove the bolts and the RH bank timing chain tensioner (A).
NOTE: If it is difficult to push plunger on RH bank timing chain tensioner (A), remove the plunger
under extended condition.
8. Loosen camshaft sprocket bolts as shown and remove camshaft sprockets.
CAUTION: To avoid interference between valves and pistons, do not turn crankshaft or camshaft
with timing chain disconnected.
9. Remove the RH front cover bolts (A) and LH front cover bolts (B).
10. Remove RH (A) camshaft bracket bolts and LH (C) camshaft bracket bolts in the reverse of
order shown to remove camshaft brackets.
Page 8298
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 2451
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Page 11922
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 4039
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Service and Repair
Brake Light Bulb: Service and Repair
REAR COMBINATION LAMP
Removal and Installation
Page 924
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 4590
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Windshield Washer Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 7127
COMPONENTS
NOTE: Rear final drive shown, front final drive similar.
DRAINING 1. Stop the engine. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain the gear oil. 3. Apply sealant to
the drain plug. Install the drain plug on the final drive assembly and tighten to specification.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS", (FFD). Refer to
"Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD). See: Service and Repair/Rear Differential (Without
Electronic Locking)/Removal
Page 10225
Evacuating System and Charging Refrigerant
Page 13922
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 14082
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 1188
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 3528
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 1988
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 8147
Page 6422
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 4895
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 620
^ CONSULT will display "CMPLT" in the top right corner of the screen when the IAVL procedure is
finished. See Figure 7.
f. Once the IAVL procedure is finished, proceed with step 7.
For 2005 and Later MY Vehicles ONLY: Enter VIN Into New Service Replacement ECM
7. Enter the VIN into the new service replacement ECM as follows:
a. Select [ENGINE] on the "Select System" screen. See Figure 8.
b. Select [WORK SUPPORT] on the "Select Diag Mode" screen. See Figure 9.
Page 14401
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 11965
Sunroof Switch System Check
Page 6294
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 13467
Diagnostic Procedure For Optical Sensor (Step 5)
SYMPTOM: Optical sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B257F or
B2580 is displayed. Without a CONSULT-II code 50 or 52 is indicated on front air control as a
result of conducting self-diagnosis.
Page 11308
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 2874
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Pantograph Jack
LIFTING POINT
Pantograph Jack
WARNING:
- Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to
support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle.
- Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.
Page 8573
Component Parts Location
Page 12157
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 10671
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 5820
13. Use compressed air to remove any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
14. If metal debris remains trapped in the boss threads, use a spiral nylon brush to remove it.
15. Tilt the manifold/catalyst/front tube so that the metal debris falls out of the part.
16. Apply compressed air through the boss to blow out any remaining debris.
CAUTION:
DO NOT perform this step if the procedure is being done on the vehicle (Method #1). Doing so may
cause metal debris to enter the engine cylinders.
17. Install the new sensor as described in the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
Page 8408
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 10406
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 5098
Case 12
Case 13
Page 13916
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 12779
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 10391
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 12508
Audible Warning Device: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Diagnostic Strategies
How to Proceed With Trouble Diagnosis
1. Confirm the symptom or customer complaint. 2. Understand operation description and function
description. Refer to "System Description". 3. Perform the preliminary check. Refer to DI-49,
"Preliminary Check". See: Initial Inspection and Diagnostic Overview 4. Check symptom and repair
or replace the cause of malfunction. 5. Does the warning chime operate properly? If so, go to 6. If
not, go to 3. 6. Inspection End.
Page 5198
Case 4
Page 1131
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 5379
concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in
the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement lambda = 1, but also in the lean and rich range.
Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a
wide lambda range (0.7 < lambda < air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump
and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygen pump cell so that the
composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at lambda = 1. Therefore, the
A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is
integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800 degrees C
(1,292 - 1,472 degrees F).
HO2S2
Component Description
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the
exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is
controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1 V in
richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation.
Page 8509
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 1813
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 10879
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 508
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Data Link
Connector/Schematic
4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection
Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Sliding Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 4326
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 12515
Audible Warning Device: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Data Monitor
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "BUZZER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT
DIAG MODE" screen.
3. Touch "ALL SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on "DATA MONITOR" screen. 4. If
"SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch the item you desire to monitor. If "ALL SIGNALS" is
selected, all control items are
monitored.
5. Touch "START". 6. During monitoring, touching "RECORD" can start recording the monitored
item status.
Display Item List - Data Monitor
Display Item List
Active Test
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "BUZZER" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT
DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch the item to be tested, and check the operation. 4. During the
operation check, touching "OFF" deactivates the operation.
Display Item List - Active Test
Display Item List
Page 7434
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 13069
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 3905
Page 3653
^ Do not damage the air fuel ratio A/F sensors
^ Discard any air fuel ratio A/F sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 inch) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor. Replace it with a new one.
7. Remove the front cross bar. 8. Remove the exhaust manifold (LH) following the steps below.
a. Remove the exhaust front tube. b. Remove the exhaust manifold cover. c. Loosen the nuts in
reverse order of illustration (A) using power tool. d. Remove the exhaust studs from positions 2, 4,
6, 8 and remove left exhaust manifold
9. Remove the exhaust manifold (RH) following the steps below.
a. Remove the exhaust front tube. b. Remove the oil level gauge guide. Refer to AT-271,
"Components". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components
c. Remove the exhaust manifold cover. d. Loosen the nuts in reverse order of illustration (B) using
power tool A/F. e. Remove the exhaust studs from positions 2, 4, 6, 8 and remove right exhaust
manifold.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Surface Distortion
^ Check the flatness of each exhaust manifold flange surface using suitable tools. Flatness limit:
0.3 mm (0.012 inch)
^ If measurement exceeds the limit, replace the exhaust manifold.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
^ Install new exhaust manifold gasket with the top of the triangular up mark on it facing up and its
coated face (gray side) toward the exhaust manifold side.
Page 5707
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Testing and Inspection
Radiator: Testing and Inspection
Checking Radiator
Check radiator for mud or clogging. If necessary, clean radiator as follows.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to bend or damage the radiator fins.
^ When radiator is cleaned without removal, remove all surrounding parts such as cooling fan,
radiator shroud and horns. Then tape the harness and electrical connectors to prevent water from
entering.
1. Apply water by hose to the back side of the radiator core vertically downward. 2. Apply water
again to all radiator core surfaces. 3. Stop washing when dirt and debris no longer flow out from the
radiator. 4. Blow air into the back side of radiator core vertically downward.
^ Use compressed air lower than 490 kPa (5 kg/cm2, 71 psi) and keep distance more than 30 cm
(11.8 inch).
5. Blow air again into all the radiator core surfaces until no water sprays out.
Page 14086
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 5146
Check Sheet Part 1
Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline
Towing Information: Technical Service Bulletins Vehicle - Flat Towing Guideline
Classification: GI99-001F
Reference: NTB99-020F
Date: August 8, 2008
LIMITATIONS ON FLAT TOWING OF NISSAN VEHICLES
This bulletin has been amended to apply to all current production models. Please discard all earlier
versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models
APPLIED DATES: 1992-2009
SERVICE INFORMATION
This Bulletin contains important guidelines and limitations concerning towing of Nissan vehicles
with all four wheels on the ground ("flat towing").
CAUTION:
Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission or drivetrain damage. For all
towing including "emergency towing" procedures refer to the Owners Manual.
1. 4WD/AWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT):
^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components.
^ DO NOT use a tow dolly - doing so will damage drivetrain components.
2. FWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission (including CVT) and Altima Hybrid:
^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components.
^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's front wheels.
^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.
3. RWD vehicles equipped with Automatic Transmission:
^ DO NOT Flat Tow - doing so will damage internal transmission components.
^ An appropriate vehicle tow dolly MUST be placed under the vehicle's rear wheels.
^ Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.
4. 2WD/4WD vehicles equipped with a manual transmission:
^ Always flat tow with the manual transmission in Neutral.
^ Always flat tow a manual transmission vehicle facing forward.
^ Maximum speed while flat towing: 60 MPH.
^ After towing for 500 miles, stop. Start and idle the engine with the transmission in Neutral for two
minutes - failure to do so may cause damage to the transmission.
^ For 4WD vehicles, always flat tow with the transfer case in the 2 HI position.
Page 5491
A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Fluid - A/T: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Classification: AT07-006B
Reference: NTB08-049B
Date: March 13, 2009
NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT
This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard
all earlier versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information,
the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to
the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used
as specified by the part number in this bulletin.
If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in
the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan
ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 6655
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Rear Sonar System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 14207
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 11053
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 4890
Engine Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 5187
Case 9
Page 8949
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 541
a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section
EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits).
NOTE:
This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different.
b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify
the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check.
C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the
terminal eyelet(s).
d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the
connections.
^ Both sides of the eyelet
^ Eyelet mounting surface
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Nut/bolt threads.
Page 1803
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10998
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 13344
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Page 11021
DVD Player: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
DVD PLAYER
Removal
1. Disconnect battery negative terminal. 2. Remove center console bin.
3. Remove the DVD player screws. 4. Remove DVD player.
Installation
Installation is in reverse order of removal.
Page 1077
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 7479
Components
REMOVAL
1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Disconnect transfer
control device harness connector. 3. Remove breather hose from transfer control device.
Page 13336
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 11335
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2785
WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the
hazard of airborne particles or other materials.
CAUTION: ^
While removing cylinder body never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
^ It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or
replacement of cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake
hose.
^ Do not damage piston boot.
^ Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft
pedal occurs at very low mileage.
WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the
hazard of airborne particles or other materials.
CAUTION: ^
While removing cylinder body, never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
^ It is not necessary to remove the torque member and disconnect the brake hose except for
disassembly or replacement of cylinder body. When replacing brake pads, hang cylinder body with
a wire so as not to stretch brake hose.
^ Do not damage piston boot.
^ Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or it a soft
pedal occurs at very low mileage.
CAUTION: While bleeding, pay attention to master cylinder fluid level.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector
or battery negative cable. 2. Connect a vinyl tube to the rear right bleed valve. 3. Fully depress
brake pedal 4 to 5 times. 4. With brake pedal depressed, loosen bleed valve to let the air out, and
then tighten it immediately. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until no more air comes out.
Page 2294
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 1504
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 1666
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab)
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Step 3)
Page 1011
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 3290
NOTE: ^
Stop the plunger in the fully extended position by using the return-proof clip 1 if the stopper pin is
removed.
^ Push the plunger 2 into the tensioner body while squeezing the return-proof clip 1. Secure it using
stopper pin 3.
11. Remove the timing chain tension guide and timing chain slack guide. 12. Remove the timing
chain and crankshaft sprocket.
13. Loosen the camshaft sprocket bolts as shown and remove the camshaft sprocket.
CAUTION: To avoid interference between valves and pistons, do not turn crankshaft or camshaft
when timing chain is disconnected.
14. Repeat the same procedure to remove the RH timing chain and associated parts.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check for cracks and any excessive wear at link plates. Replace chain if necessary. ^
In the same way as for the LH bank, inspect the timing chain and associated parts on the RH bank.
INSTALLATION
Page 7023
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8142
CAUTION: ^
Never reuse drained brake fluid.
Page 2434
2. Position vehicle on the front turn plates as follows:
^ Stop vehicle just behind the turn plates.
^ Center the turn plates to the tires.
^ Move the vehicle onto the turn plates by turning/pushing the rear wheel.
DO NOT push/pull on the vehicle body.
Page 623
i. Once the entire VIN is entered (a second time), select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See
Figure 16.
j. Select [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen to complete the VIN registration process. See
Figure 17.
k. Turn the ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 10345
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 2856
Page 2374
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 4217
3. Loosen the sensor approximately 10 degrees.
4. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
5. Tighten the sensor 10 degrees, then loosen the sensor 10 degrees.
^ Repeat this motion several times until the sensor begins to turn more easily.
6. Continue the tightening/loosening motion while gradually unscrewing the sensor. Stop when the
sensor will not unscrew any further.
7. Spray with rust penetrant again for 2 to 3 seconds.
8. Repeat steps 6 and 7 until the sensor is removed.
Page 13696
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 6997
Column Shift Models
Page 4356
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 3241
d. Tighten the bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown.
M6 x 30 mm (1.18 in): No.15,16 M8 x 25 mm (0.98in): No.1,3,5,7, 11,13 M8 x 45 mm (1.77 in):
No.2,4,6,8, 10, 14 M8 x 123 mm (4.84in): No.9, 12
2. Install the oil strainer to the oil pan (upper).
3. Install the oil pan (lower).
a. Using a scraper to remove old liquid gasket from mating surfaces.
- Also remove old liquid gasket from mating surface of oil pan (upper).
- Remove old liquid gasket from bolt holes and thread.
CAUTION: Do not scratch or damage the mating surfaces when cleaning off old liquid gasket.
b. Apply a continuous bead of liquid gasket using Tool as shown.
Tool number: WS39930000 ( - )
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent. Refer to Service Manual GI Section.
CAUTION: Installation should be done within 5 minutes after applying liquid gasket.
c. Tighten the oil pan (lower) bolts to the specified torque in numerical order as shown.
Page 7591
c. Tighten bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
3. Install breather hose to transfer control device. 4. Connect transfer control device harness
connector. 5. After the installation, check 4WD shift indicator pattern. If NG, adjust position
between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to
"Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement". See: Transfer
Case/Service Precautions/Vehicle Damage Warnings/Precautions For Transfer Assembly and
Transfer Control Unit Replacement
Page 12961
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 1677
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 1)
Page 6146
Fuel Pump Control Unit: Description and Operation
FUEL PUMP CONTROL MODULE (FPCM)
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
This system controls the fuel pump operation. The amount of fuel flow delivered from the fuel pump
is altered between two flow rates by the FPCM operation. The FPCM determines the voltage
supplied to the fuel pump (and therefore fuel flow) according to the given conditions.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The FPCM adjusts the voltage supplied to the fuel pump to control the amount of fuel flow. When
the FPCM increases the voltage supplied to the fuel pump, the fuel flow is increased. When the
FPCM decreases the voltage, the fuel flow is decreased.
Testing and Inspection
Pedal Positioning Sensor: Testing and Inspection
Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Pedal Adjusting Sensor Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Interior - Cup Holder Lid Won't Open/Close Properly
Drink Holders: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Cup Holder Lid Won't Open/Close Properly
Classification: BT06-030
Reference: NTB07~O36
Date: May 21, 2007
2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; CUP HOLDER LID WILL NOT OPEN/CLOSE PROPERLY
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2007 Titan (A60) 2004-2007 Armada (TA6O)
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The front center console cup holder lid will not open or close properly.
ACTIONS:
1. Reposition the lid spring.
2. Install spring retention nylon washer and spring retention screw.
NOTE:
Do not replace the Console Finisher.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Use appropriate covers to protect upholstery, carpet, etc. during this procedure.
1. Remove cup holder/console finisher.
^ Refer to section IP in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for Console Finisher removal.
2. Place the cup holder/finisher upside down on a clean surface.
Page 2632
3. Attach filter to bracket and filter hoses to fittings as shown.
Install Protector (2004 Armada ONLY)
1. Assemble the protector into the left rear wheelhouse as shown.
Page 13082
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Service and Repair
Quarter Window Glass: Service and Repair
SIDE WINDOW GLASS
Removal
1. Remove the rear door finisher. Refer to "REAR DOOR - KING CAB". 2. If the window glass is to
be reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks.
3. Remove glass using piano wire or power cutting tool and an inflatable pump bag.
WARNING: When cutting the glass from the vehicle, always wear safety glasses and heavy gloves
to help prevent glass splinters from entering your eyes or cutting your hands.
CAUTION:
- When the side window glass is to be reused, do not use a cutting knife or power cutting tool.
- Be careful not to scratch the glass when removing.
- Do not set or stand the glass on its edge. Small chips may develop into cracks.
Installation
- Use a genuine NISSAN Urethane Adhesive Kit (if available) or equivalent and follow the
instructions furnished with it.
- While the urethane adhesive is curing, open a door window. This will prevent the glass from being
forced out by passenger compartment air pressure when a door is closed.
- Check gap along bottom to confirm that glass does not contact sheet metal.
- Inform the customer that the vehicle should remain stationary until the urethane adhesive has
completely cured (preferably 24 hours). Curing time varies with temperature and humidity.
- Install removed parts.
WARNING:
- Keep heat and open flames away as primers and adhesive are flammable.
- The materials contained in the kit are harmful if swallowed, and may irritate skin and eyes. Avoid
contact with the skin and eyes.
- Use in an open, well ventilated location. Avoid breathing the vapors. They can be harmful if
inhaled. If affected by vapor inhalation,
Page 388
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 2212
Testing and Inspection
Keyless Entry Receiver: Testing and Inspection
Remote Keyless Entry Receiver System Check (Step 1)
Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattling Noises
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-094 Date: 100812
Exhaust System - Heat Shield Rattling Noises
Classification: EM-10-009
Reference: NTB10-094
Date: August 12, 2010
EXHAUST HEAT SHIELD NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60) 2005 - 2010 Pathfinder
(R51) 2005- 2010 Xterra (N 50) 2005 - 2010 Frontier (D40)
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A noise is coming from the front exhaust tube heat shield(s) due to rattle.
ACTION: Secure the heat shield(s) with new band clamps (see PARTS INFORMATION).
^ Refer to the SERVICE PROCEDURE.
NOTE:
Do not replace the front exhaust tube for this incident, if it should occur.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire SERVICE PROCEDURE as it contains information that is essential
to successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
WARNING:
Page 4091
ECM Inspection Table Part 7
Page 3591
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 800
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 8447
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 11515
Component Parts Location
Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set
Canister Purge Solenoid: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set
Classification: EC06-009B
Reference: NTB06-095B
Date: September 2, 2008
2004 ARMADA / 2004-2006 TITAN; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446
APPLIED VEHICLES:2004-2006 Titan (A60)
2004 Armada (TA60)
This bulletin has been amended to add DTC P0448. No other changes have been made.
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(s) stored:
^ P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446
AND
^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed.
ACTIONS:
All applied vehicles:
Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V.
Clear any DTC(s) stored in the ECM.
AND IF the vehicle is a 2004-2006 Titan:
Refer to the Install Filter Kit Service Procedure of this bulletin.
AND IF the vehicle is a 2004 Armada:
Refer to the Install Protector Service Procedure of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 12579
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 11452
4. While pulling the outside handle, remove the door key cylinder assembly or escutcheon. 5.
Separate the key cylinder rod from the door key cylinder assembly (if equipped).
6. While pulling the outside handle, slide it toward rear of vehicle to remove.
7. Remove the front and rear gaskets.
8. Remove the TORX bolts (T30), and the door lock assembly.
Door lock assembly bolts 7.5 N-m (0.77 kg-m, 00 in-lb)
Page 7598
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 4954
Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check
Page 11808
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 4041
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 14058
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 13040
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 12933
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 3990
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 2770
Page 6240
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 8198
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair G Sensor
G SENSOR
Removal and Installation REMOVAL
1. Remove center console or center seat as required.
2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts as shown.
^ The location of the sensor is the same for all models.
CAUTION: ^
Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
^ Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: After installation, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
Page 1981
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Description
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of exhaust valve cam sprocket to
identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder
identification signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to
change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 1050
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 13723
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 8839
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 5510
7. Select VIN Registration
8. Select Next
9. Make sure the ignition is ON with engine OFF.
10. Select Start
Page 1506
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 3230
Oil Pan: Specifications
Oil Pan
Upper
Tighten the bolts in numerical order as shown. M6 × 30 mm (1.18 inch) ............................................
....................................................................................................................................... No. 15, 16
M8 × 25 mm (0.98 inch) ......................................................................................................................
............................................. No. 1, 3, 5, 7, 11, 13 M8 × 45 mm (1.77 inch) .......................................
............................................................................................................................ No. 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 14
M8 × 123 mm (4.84 inch) ....................................................................................................................
............................................................... No. 9, 12
Lower
Page 8413
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 4657
12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install.
13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides.
14. Reinstall the IPDM cover.
15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first.
16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset
their ADP settings (ADP memory).
Page 2595
12. Disconnect harness clips (2 clips).
13. Unbolt alternator and set aside.
14. Loosen, but do not remove, the bolts that hold the alternator and power steering pump
mounting bracket to the engine block (5 bolts).
NOTE:
^ When the power steering pump bracket bolts are loose, the pump/bracket assembly can be
rotated or shifted slightly clockwise and counterclockwise.
^ The best position for the bracket is when the clearance measured at the top and the bottom of the
pulleys are equal.
15. When the bracket is set to the best position, tighten the bolts (5 bolts).
^ Torque 60 Nm (6.11 kg-m, 44.25 ft-lb)
16. Install alternator in reverse order of removal.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Seat Heater: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 11444
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 6028
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3638
Thermostat: Service and Repair
THERMOSTAT AND WATER PIPING
REMOVAL
Removal of Thermostat 1. Drain engine coolant from the radiator.
CAUTION: Perform when engine is cold.
2. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 3. Remove the engine room cover using power
tools. 4. Disconnect the water suction hose from the water inlet. 5. Remove the water inlet and
thermostat.
Removal of Thermostat Housing, Water Outlet and Heater Pipe 1. Remove the intake manifold. 2.
Remove the thermostat housing, water outlet and heater pipe.
Removal of Water Cut Valve 1. Drain the engine coolant from the radiator.
CAUTION: Perform when the engine is cold.
2. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 3. Remove the engine room cover using power
tool.
Page 8284
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 7017
Page 8831
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 62
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 1442
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 12268
Seat Memory Indicator Lamp Circuit Inspection (Step 4)
Page 8978
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 4009
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 5777
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Description and Operation
ECT SENSOR
Component Description
The engine coolant temperature sensor is used to detect the engine coolant temperature. The
sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the
engine coolant temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in
temperature. The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 9536
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Rear Axle
WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION
Check the axial end play, replace as necessary. ^
Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly. Replace as necessary.
Page 459
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 9820
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 6826
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
Page 10910
3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1.
4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2).
5. Replace the battery.
^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece.
6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together.
7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated
in the dot matrix display.
8. If the indicator is still illuminated:
a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door.
b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off.
Page 13390
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Locations
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Page 11404
14. Touch "OK" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen. WRITE CONFIGURATION is completed.
Page 8616
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 1311
Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 9241
3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate
relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel and tire assembly. 6. Install wheel and tire
assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle.
NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed.
7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor.
Page 5542
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Service and Repair
Transfer Case Actuator: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
Components
Page 1526
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 4914
ECM Inspection Table Part 1
Page 13391
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 3413
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Coolant Type
Use Genuine Nissan Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent with the mixture ratio of 50%
anti-freeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water when adding or replacing coolant.
Page 5864
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 9410
Suspension Strut / Shock Absorber: Overhaul
Disassembly and Assembly
Components
DISASSEMBLY
Page 13706
- through BCM terminal 51
- to trailer turn relay RH terminal 1.
Left turn signal and hazard lamp output is supplied
- through trailer turn relay LH terminal 3
- to trailer connector terminal 1.
Right turn signal and hazard lamp output is supplied
- through trailer turn relay RH terminal 3
- to trailer connector terminal 4.
TRAILER STOP LAMP OPERATION
The trailer stop lamps are controlled by the electric brake. The electric brake receives stop lamp
switch signal when the brake pedal is pressed.
When the brake pedal is pressed, power is supplied
- through electric brake (pre-wiring) terminal 3
- to trailer connector terminal 3.
TRAILER POWER SUPPLY OPERATION
The trailer power supply is controlled by the trailer tow relay 2.
When the ignition switch is in the ON or START position, power is supplied
- through 10 A fuse (No. 51, located in the IPDM E/R)
- through IPDM E/R terminal 16
- to trailer tow relay 2 terminal 1.
When energized, the trailer tow relay 2 supplies power
- through trailer tow relay 2 terminals 5 and 7
- to trailer connector terminal 5.
Page 666
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 7065
REPAIR FLOW CHART
Page 12166
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 6686
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
Removal and Installation
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.
3. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
4. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness.
5. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
6. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Installation
Page 673
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II.
^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information.
2. Compare your printout to the chart.
a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3.
b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply.
^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information.
3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows:
Page 5229
Case 1
Page 10572
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 7036
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 880
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 4173
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 14431
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 10576
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 6409
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 1801
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 11733
Door Lock Actuator Check (Rear RH/LH)
Page 9344
Compare the Lot Numbers of each lower link to these Lot Number examples.
Page 5476
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use
Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036.
1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM.
a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other
damage.
Page 12861
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 2976
REMOVAL
1. Remove the ABS sensor. 2. Remove the rear brake rotor. 3. Remove the parking brake
assembly from the back plate.
4. Remove the four axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers.
5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using Tools as shown.
CAUTION: ^
The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully
so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing.
^ Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft
assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Tool number: A: KV40101000 (J-25604-01) B:
ST36230000 (J-25840-A)
6. Remove the snap ring from the axle shaft using suitable snap ring pliers. 7. Secure the axle shaft
in a suitable vise, then use a 1/4 in size drill bit to drill a hole approximately 3/4 into the thickness of
the bearing ring retainer
[3/4 thickness is approximately 6.3 mm (0.25 inch) deep].
CAUTION: ^
Mount the axle shaft using a soft jaw vise to avoid damaging the axle shaft.
^ Do not drill all the way through the bearing ring retainer, the drill may damage the axle shaft
surface.
Page 611
7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs.
Disclaimer
Page 1420
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Body - Water on Front Floor After Rain or Washing
Cowl: Customer Interest Body - Water on Front Floor After Rain or Washing
Classification: BT07-011
Reference: NTB07-034
Date: may 9, 2007
2004 - 2008 TITAN AND ARMADA; WATER ON FRONT FLOOR AFTER RAIN OR WASH
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2008 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2008 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The front floor is wet (left or right side) when it rains or when the vehicle is washed.
NOTE:
If the floor is wet on the passenger side only when using the A/C, this bulletin does not apply - see
NTB05-112.
ACTIONS
1. Apply water to the windshield/cowl area with a garden hose at medium flow and check for water
leaks.
2. If water is leaking (floor is wet), continue to apply the water until you find the source of the leak.
3. Use 3M(TM) Fast 'n Firm(TM) Seam Sealer-or equivalent-to seal the leak.
4. Allow the sealer to cure, and then recheck for leaks with the garden hose.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual - Section UY - and use the appropriate
warranty claims coding.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Apply water to the windshield/cowl area with a garden hose at medium flow and check for water
leaks.
^ Make sure to check underneath the carpet and underneath the rubber mat covering the engine
wall.
2. If water is leaking (floor is wet), continue to apply the water until you find the source of the leak.
^ Check body seam seal areas behind the dash and on the floor.
Page 9963
Repair Overview
Disclaimer
Recommendation
If this is your first time performing this Service Procedure, it is recommended that you view the
video clip on ASIST before starting. To view the video clip, open the bulletin on ASIST and select
"Video" at the bottom of the screen. To view the video full screen, right click the center of the video
screen and select "Full Screen".
Procedure A - Identify Fan Type
Page 9745
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 13794
Optional Splice
Page 13728
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8928
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect negative battery cable.
2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover.
3. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and
remove the IPDM E/R.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 4506
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 12414
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 7171
1. Apply multi-purpose grease to cavity at sealing lips of front oil seal. Press front oil seal into gear
carrier using suitable tool.
2. Install companion flange and a new drive pinion nut. Tighten drive pinion nut while holding the
companion flange using Tool until there is no end
play Tool number: KV38108300
3. Measure the drive pinion bearing preload with front oil seal resistance using Tool.
Tool number: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A)
NOTE: ^
Drive pinion bearing preload should equal the measurement taken during removal plus an
additional 0.56 Nm (0.06 Kg-m, 5 inch lbs.).
^ If drive pinion bearing preload is low, tighten drive pinion nut in 6.8 Nm (0.69 Kg-m, 5 ft. lbs.)
increments until drive pinion preload is met.
CAUTION: Never loosen the drive pinion nut to decrease drive pinion bearing preload. Do not
exceed specified preload. If preload torque is exceed a new collapsible spacer must be installed. If
maximum torque is reached prior to reaching the required preload, the collapsible spacer may have
been damaged. Replace the collapsible spacer.
Drive pinion nut: 298 - 678 Nm (31 - 69 Kg-m, 220 - 500 ft. lbs.)
4. Attach the RH and LH drive shafts. 5. Install the front propeller shaft.
Side Oil Seals
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Remove front final drive.
2. Remove differential side shaft and side flange using suitable tool.
Page 2942
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6550
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 12041
- Rear View Monitor Predicted Course Line Center Position Adjustment
NOTE:
You may need to inform the customer that their Automatic Drive Position will need to be reset.
Disclaimer
Page 4750
Page 6559
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 13252
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 9872
Diagnostic Procedure For Magnet Clutch (Steps 7 - 9)
Page 7324
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 10477
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Diagram Information and Instructions
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 306
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 13691
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 12852
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7316
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 1189
Page 1680
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 3)
Page 11001
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 6404
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 12079
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection
Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Page 4979
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 791
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 13712
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Interior - No/Erratic Seat Forward/Backward Operation
Power Seat Drive Gear: Customer Interest Interior - No/Erratic Seat Forward/Backward Operation
Classification: BT05-052a
Reference: NTB05-105a
Date: October 31, 2008
FRONT POWER SEAT NO OR IMPROPER FORWARD / BACKWARD MOVEMENT
This bulletin has been amended to expand Applied Vehicles and to incorporate NTB05-056 into
this bulletin. No other changes have been made. Please discard the previous version of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60) 2004 - 2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Quest
(V42) 2005 - 2007 Pathfinder (R51) 2005 - 2007 Frontier (D40) 2004 - 2006 Altima (L31) 2004 2007 Maxima (A34)*
^ *2004 Maxima (A34); Applies to left and right front seats, with or without ADP (memory seat).
^ *2005 - 2006 Maxima (A34); Applies only to the left front (driver s) seat with ADP (memory seat).
APPLIED VINS: TA60 Built before: 5N1AA08A (*) 7N718400 A60 Built before: 1N6BA07B (*)
7N231607 V42 Built before: 5N1BV28U (*) 7N134315 A34 Built before: 1N4BA41E (*) 7C853209
D40 2005 - 2007 All VINS R51 2005 - 2007 All VINS L31 2004 - 2006 All VINS
APPLIED DATES: TA60 Built before: 05-Feb-2007 A60 Built before: 05-Feb-2007 V42 Built before:
15-Feb-2007 R51 All Dates D40 All Dates A34 Built before: 28-Feb-2007 L31 All Dates
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The seat slide motor or gear assembly needs to be replaced for any reason.
NOTE:
Incidents that require slide motor and gear assembly replacement include:
- The power seat has voltage (power) to it, but it will not move forward or backward.
- While moving the seat forward or backward, the seat won't track straight; it becomes cocked
(crooked) on the seat tracks.
- Noise from the slide motor or gears.
ACTION:
Replace only the Seat Slide Motor Kit listed in the Parts Information. Do Not replace the entire seat
adjuster assembly.
IMPORTANT:
Page 8766
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 3556
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 13015
A/T Indicator Does Not Illuminate
Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open Acceleration
Fuel Pressure: All Technical Service Bulletins Fuel System - Low Power On Wide Open
Acceleration
Classification: FE07-004
Reference: NTB07-040
Date: June 6, 2007
2004-2007 TITAN AND ARMADA; LOW POWER WITH WIDE OPEN THROTTLE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 -2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60)
APPLIED VINs: 2004 - 2006, all VINs 2007 Titan built before 1N6(*)A0(***)7N 236037 2007
Armada built before 5N1AA08(**)7N 720223
APPLIED DATE: Built before February 22, 2007
IF YOU CONFIRM
When accelerating with Wide Open Throttle (WOT) the engine power is reduced,
ACTIONS
1. Check fuel pressure during a transmission "Stall Test" (see Service Procedure).
2. If fuel pressure test is NG, replace the fuel pump.
NOTE:
Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident, first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 14188
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 3459
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 6862
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 12020
19. Make sure the seat track mounting tab and the rear stopper are touching (see Figure 8).
20. Measure the distance between the gear box and the mounting tab (see left side of Figure 8).
21. Measure and adjust the other seat track mounting tab to the same distance (see right side of
Figure 8).
Figure 9
22. Replace all six rubber grommets with the new ones from the kit 3 on each side (see Figure 9).
23. Put the new worm gears, gear boxes, and drive cable assembly (all as one unit) back into the
seat frame and move both seat tracks back into
position on top of the seat track mounting tabs.
Figure 10
CAUTION:
Avoid bending the drive cable. Bending the drive cable will create a noise when the seat is
operated.
Figure 11
Page 6039
Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent).
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for
connecting the fuel pressure gauge.
2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test".
^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure.
^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble
Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test.
^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test.
> If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and
repair information.
> If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3.
3. Replace the fuel pump.
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the
appropriate Service Manual.
^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information.
^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal.
4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed.
Page 9613
Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Driver) (Steps 5 - 8)
Page 6463
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
VIN Registration
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair VIN Registration
VIN Registration
DESCRIPTION
VIN Registration is an operation to registering VIN in ECM. It must be performed each time ECM is
replaced.
NOTE: Accurate VIN which is registered in ECM may be required for Inspection & Maintenance
(I/M).
OPERATION PROCEDURE
With CONSULT-II
1. Check the VIN of the vehicle and note it. Refer to Application and ID. 2. Turn ignition switch ON
and engine stopped.
3. Select "VIN REGISTRATION" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode. 4. Follow the instruction of
CONSULT-II display.
Page 9038
Inspection Procedure 1 (Front Seatbelt Retractors)
1. Extend (pull out) the front seat belt, and then let it retract (pull back).
2. Confirm the seat belt extends and retracts.
NG: Replace the seat belt and wire harness for that side.
OK: Go to Inspection Procedure 2.
Inspection Procedure 2 ( Air Bag Warning Light / Codes Stored)
Page 6659
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 12253
Reclining Switch Inspection (Step 3)
Power Seat Switch Ground Inspection
Page 10395
Diagram Information and Instructions
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 5685
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 1286
Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Check (Step 4)
Page 4882
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 10754
Seat Belt Retractor: Service and Repair
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SEAT BELT RETRACTOR
CAUTION:
- Before servicing SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at least
3 minutes.
- For installing/removing seat belt pre-tensioner connector, insert a thin screwdriver wrapped in
tape into the notch, lift the lock and remove the connector.
- Install the connector with the lock raised, and push the lock into the connector.
Page 5315
Case 15
Case 16
Page 13256
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 8571
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Keyless Entry Transmitter Battery: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R)
Battery Replacement
Classification: EL09-042
Reference: NTB09-118
Date: October 28, 2009
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR
RESET
APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below.
IF YOU CONFIRM
^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side.
And
^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery.
2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display.
NOTES:
^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage
the printed circuit board (PCB).
^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver.
Page 6548
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 3601
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 2372
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 8528
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 5224
Case 13
Case 14
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Garage Jack and Safety Stand
Garage Jack and Safety Stand
CAUTION: Place a wooden or rubber block between safety stand and vehicle body when the
supporting body is flat.
Page 807
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 11485
^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise.
^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise.
2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator.
3. Install the regulator assembly into the door.
4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to
regulator.
5. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top.
Page 5919
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 1902
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Specifications
Page 8880
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 1070
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Systems Controlled By BCM Directly
Body Control Module: Application and ID Systems Controlled By BCM Directly
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY
- Power door lock system.
- Remote keyless entry system.
- Power window system.
- Sunroof system.
- Room lamp timer.
- Warning chime system.
- Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system.
- Trailer turn signal and hazard warning lamps system (if equipped). Refer to "TRAILER TOW".
NOTE: Power supply only. No system control.
Page 806
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 3620
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 7302
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 12035
- Use a fender cover or large floor-mat. Place it with the seat back lying flat so you can reach the
underside of the seat.
Figure 3
10. Remove the four seat bottom cushion bolts-M8, 12 mm head (see Figure 3).
- Removing these bolts will release the cushion from the frame.
11. Remove the two seat track mounting tab bolts (M6, 10 mm head), one on each side. They re
near the cushion bolts you just removed (see Figure
3).
- Removing these bolts will release the seat slide rails from the "worm gears".
Figure 4
12. Remove the top screw only from the RH & LH side finishers (see Figure 4).
13. Remove both screws and finisher from the front edge of the seat (see Figure 4).
Figure 5
14. Disconnect the seat sub-harness connector from the slide motor (see Figure 5).
15. Remove two bolts, one from each side of the seat frame-M8, 12 mm head (see "Remove this
bolt first" in Figure 5).
Page 6968
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
Removal and Installation
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.
3. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
4. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness.
5. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
6. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Installation
Page 10738
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Pull the affected seat belt more than 20 inches (500 mm) out of the B pillar seat belt retractor
mechanism (see Figure 2).
2. Attach a binder clip (or similar clamping device) to the seat belt at the base of the retractor
mechanism to allow for slack in the seat belt (see Figure 2).
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the seat belt fabric when attaching or removing the clip.
Headlamp (For CANADA) - Daytime Light System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6151
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 13378
Optional Splice
Page 12529
Optional Splice
Page 5246
Check Sheet Part 2
Page 9114
e. Remove the front pillar finisher.
^ Use a plastic trim tool.
NOTE:
With the sun visor and front pillar finisher removed the headlining will be loose all along the
passenger side. This will allow access to the side curtain air bag mounting bolts.
f. Take the side curtain air bag branch of the harness loose from the body.
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch)
Check (King Cab)
Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder
Switch) Check (King Cab)
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Step 1)
Page 9386
^ Before installing the new bushings, use Nissan Brake Cleaner (or equivalent) to clean the
stabilizer bar where the bushings make contact. See Figure 1
above.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 376
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 5294
Case 11
Page 10328
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 11284
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 25
Page 7408
Optional Splice
Page 1545
Diagnostic Procedure For In-Vehicle Sensor (Steps 1 - 4)
Page 610
^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap).
e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet.
4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under
the dash):
a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly
(cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3).
b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads.
C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners.
5. Clean the negative battery cable connections.
a. Write down all the radio presets.
b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection.
c. Clean the following items:
^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides)
^ Body connection bolt (head and threads)
^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap)
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Battery negative post
^ Negative cable battery terminal
d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery).
e. Reprogram the radio presets.
6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs.
Page 5454
Body Control Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Page 1975
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from air
cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4.
Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower)
^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type)
NOTE: ^
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals.
^ Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance.
Page 5823
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine
operating condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range.
HO2S2 HEATER
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the
engine speed, amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the
A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst
Page 13547
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 6244
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 6779
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 10562
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1706
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the Fuel Pump Assembly from the vehicle.
^ Refer to section FL in the applicable Service Manual for removal information.
^ Make sure to follow all Service Manual warnings and cautions.
Page 8138
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10358
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Component Locations
Knock Sensor: Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 13479
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 12953
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 13963
Page 6540
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9082
Inspection Procedure 1 (Front Seatbelt Retractors)
1. Extend (pull out) the front seat belt, and then let it retract (pull back).
2. Confirm the seat belt extends and retracts.
NG: Replace the seat belt and wire harness for that side.
OK: Go to Inspection Procedure 2.
Inspection Procedure 2 ( Air Bag Warning Light / Codes Stored)
Page 3144
12. Disconnect harness clips (2 clips).
13. Unbolt alternator and set aside.
14. Loosen, but do not remove, the bolts that hold the alternator and power steering pump
mounting bracket to the engine block (5 bolts).
NOTE:
^ When the power steering pump bracket bolts are loose, the pump/bracket assembly can be
rotated or shifted slightly clockwise and counterclockwise.
^ The best position for the bracket is when the clearance measured at the top and the bottom of the
pulleys are equal.
15. When the bracket is set to the best position, tighten the bolts (5 bolts).
^ Torque 60 Nm (6.11 kg-m, 44.25 ft-lb)
16. Install alternator in reverse order of removal.
Page 2205
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Diagram Information and Instructions
Wiper Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 3833
Attachment General Procedure
Page 7712
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 13008
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 11908
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 1284
Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Check (Step 4)
Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Check (Step 1)
Page 7992
WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the
hazard of airborne particles or other materials.
CAUTION: ^
While removing cylinder body never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
^ It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or
replacement of cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake
hose.
^ Do not damage piston boot.
^ Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft
pedal occurs at very low mileage.
WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the
hazard of airborne particles or other materials.
CAUTION: ^
While removing cylinder body, never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
^ It is not necessary to remove the torque member and disconnect the brake hose except for
disassembly or replacement of cylinder body. When replacing brake pads, hang cylinder body with
a wire so as not to stretch brake hose.
^ Do not damage piston boot.
^ Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or it a soft
pedal occurs at very low mileage.
CAUTION: While bleeding, pay attention to master cylinder fluid level.
1. Turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) connector
or battery negative cable. 2. Connect a vinyl tube to the rear right bleed valve. 3. Fully depress
brake pedal 4 to 5 times. 4. With brake pedal depressed, loosen bleed valve to let the air out, and
then tighten it immediately. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until no more air comes out.
Headlamp (For USA)
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3889
^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay.
9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay.
^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without
causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals.
10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6).
11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs.
Page 10243
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3007
2. Pull up / lift one side of the cover near the rear.
^ A small amount of force will be needed to pop loose the locating stud.
3. Pull up / lift the other side of the cover near the rear.
^ A small amount of force will be needed to pop loose the locating stud.
4. Remove the cover from the engine.
Disclaimer
Testing and Inspection
Vacuum Brake Booster: Testing and Inspection
On-Vehicle Service OPERATING CHECK
With engine stopped, change the vacuum to the atmospheric pressure by depressing brake pedal
several times. Then with brake pedal fully depressed, start engine and when the vacuum pressure
reaches the standard, make sure the clearance between brake pedal and floor panel decreases.
CAUTION: Depressing pedal interval is approximately 5 seconds.
AIRTIGHT CHECK
^ Run engine at idle for approximately 1 minute, and stop it after applying vacuum to booster.
Depress brake pedal normally to change the vacuum to the atmospheric pressure. Make sure
distance between brake pedal and floor panel gradually increases.
^ Depress brake pedal while engine is running and stop engine with pedal depressed. The pedal
stroke should not change after holding pedal down for 30 seconds.
CAUTION: Depressing pedal interval is approximately 5 seconds.
Page 11208
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 11172
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 6734
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 9998
- Count the slots in the fan shroud to confirm locations as needed.
17. Return to Procedure C (step 10) for fan assembly installation.
Procedure E - Install Maxi Fuse
(Install the Maxi Fuse only when a new fan is installed)
Figure E-1
NOTE:
Maxi Fuse is installed only when replacing the fan motor assembly with a new one. The battery
should already be disconnected and the radio station presets should have been recorded before
removing the fan motor at the beginning of procedure C.
Figure E-2
1. Remove the IPDM E/R upper cover.
- IPDM E/R = Intelligent Power Distribution Module, Engine Room.
2. Remove the relay and fuse cover.
Page 12322
NOTE:
The above illustration is only an example of a body seam seal leak. Your vehicle may have a leak
in a different location, and it may have more than one leak.
3. Seal water leak (body seam) with seam sealer:
^ Use 3M(TM) Fast n Firm(TM) Seam Sealer-part number 08505-or equivalent.
^ Follow product application instructions.
4. Allow sealer to cure and then recheck for leaks.
^ Make sure the leak you fixed is sealed (not leaking).
^ Make sure there are no other leaks; it's possible to have more than one leak.
Disclaimer
Page 7033
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 14206
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 353
Component Parts Location
Page 888
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Non-Trouble Code Procedures
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Non-Trouble Code Procedures
Diagnostic Procedure (Step 1)
Page 11312
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 5800
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
IAT SENSOR
Component Description
The intake air temperature sensor is built-into mass air flow sensor. The sensor detects intake air
temperature and transmits a signal to the ECM.
The temperature sensing unit uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature.
Electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases in response to the temperature rise.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded
Rear Door Panel: All Technical Service Bulletins Interior - Door Trim Panel(s) Discolored/Faded
Classification: BT10-024
Reference: NTB10-095
Date: August 13, 2010
2004-2010 TITAN; DOOR TRIM PANEL DISCOLORED/FADED
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The pull handle trim panel on a front or rear door is discolored/faded. See Figures 1 and 2.
ACTION
Clean the discolored/faded trim panel as instructed in the Service Procedure.
NOTE:
This condition is not "dirt" on the trim panel surface. This condition exists within the panel itself.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 1733
Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 3390
^ Checking and adjusting plug gap is not required between change intervals.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Use standard type spark plug for normal condition.
^ The hot type spark plug is suitable when fouling occurs with the standard type spark plug under
conditions such as: Frequent engine starts
- Low ambient temperatures
^ The cold type spark plug is suitable when spark knock occurs with the standard type spark plug
under conditions such as: Extended highway driving
- Frequent high engine revolution
CAUTION: Do not drop or shock spark plug.
Page 10818
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 7559
2. Apply petroleum jelly to the circumference of the new dust cover. Position the new dust cover
using the identification mark as shown.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse dust cover.
^ Apply petroleum jelly to dust cover.
3. Install new dust cover to rear case, using Tool.
Tool number: KV40105310 ( - )
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse dust cover.
^ Apply petroleum jelly to dust cover.
4. Install the rear propeller shaft. 5. Refill transfer fluid, check fluid level and for fluid leakage.
Page 13601
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (Step 3)
Page 3507
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 1320
Lifting Switch (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Step 3)
Locations
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 8212
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 7926
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
BRAKE JUDDER
^ Brake Judder is caused by rotor thickness variation and/or rotor run out.
Rotor Thickness Variation: When the inner and outer surface of the rotor are not flat and not
parallel, the brake pads will travel in and out as they follow the low and high spots on the rotor (see
Figure 1).
Rotor Run Out: If the brake rotor is not true to the hub center, the brake pads contact one point on
each side of the rotor with each wheel rotation, even if the brakes are not applied. Over time, this
point contact will cause the rotor to wear more in these areas and cause rotor thickness variation
(see Figure 2).
^ This motion of the brake pads is transferred through the caliper pistons and is felt in the brake
pedal as a pulsation. In severe cases it can also cause a back and forth oscillation in the steering
wheel.
Vehicle Storage:
^ If the vehicle is not operated for periods of time, the area of the brake rotors not covered by the
brake pads will rust.
^ The friction characteristics between the rusted and un-rusted areas of the rotor braking surface
will be different.
^ This difference may cause brake judder at low and/or high mileage, even after the rust wears off.
Lug Nut Overtorque:
^ Another contributor of brake judder is lug nut overtorque. This can occur if the lug nuts are over
tightened, especially with an air impact
Page 1434
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 10500
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 8718
13. First, tape the door grommet to the corrugated tube, then
14. Wrap the entire length of the corrugated tube with vinyl tape.
^ As you wrap, keep the tape tight and the tape roll close to the harness.
^ Over-lap the tape 50% as you wrap.
^ Make sure to wrap around the clips (diaper wrap) so they will not move-the clips must stay in
position.
^ Make sure to cover the area on the body side between the corrugated tube and the vinyl tube.
^ Double wrap the entire length; one layer left to right and another layer right to left.
15. Attach the new hinge rod clip below the bracket as shown in Figure B9.
Page 7660
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
Page 8842
Fuse: Testing and Inspection
Fuse
- If fuse is blown, be sure to eliminate cause of incident before installing new fuse.
- Use fuse of specified rating. Never use fuse of more than specified rating.
- Do not partially install fuse; always insert it into fuse holder properly.
- Remove fuse for "ELECTRICAL PARTS (BAT)" if vehicle is not used for a long period of time.
Locations
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 13405
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 6934
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 14185
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 1689
Page 1155
Locations
Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 8349
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 13224
Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
OPTICAL SENSOR
Removal
1. Remove defroster grille. "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY"
2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Turn the optical sensor counterclockwise to remove it from
defroster grille.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 13573
Door Switch: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control
Unit Replacement
Control Module: Service and Repair Precautions For Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit
Replacement
Precautions for Transfer Assembly and Transfer Control Unit Replacement
When replacing transfer assembly or transfer control unit, check the 4WD shift indicator pattern
and adjustment of the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit if necessary.
CHECK 4WD SHIFT INDICATOR PATTERN 1. Set 4WD shift switch to "2WD", "4H", "4LO", "4H"
and "2WD" in order. Stay at each switch position for at least 2 seconds.
2. Confirm 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp are changed properly as follows.
^ If OK, the position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit is correct.
^ If NG, the position is different between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Adjust the
position between transfer assembly and transfer control unit. Refer to pattern table.
Transfer Position Adjustment Pattern
METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT "2WD" Select Adjustment Pattern
1. Start engine. Run engine for at least 10 seconds.
2. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp.
Pattern A 1. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed.
Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. 2. Turn 4WD shift switch to "4LO" position. Stay in "4LO" for at
least 2 seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 4. Start engine. 5. Erase self-diagnosis. 6. Check
4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again.
If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new
transfer control unit and retry the above check.
Pattern B 1. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position with brake pedal depressed.
Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds.
Page 272
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 5301
Case 1
Page 4766
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 3872
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Disclaimer
Page 8871
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 11029
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 5118
Case 1
Page 8438
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 1944
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 8431
Page 4275
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 7796
VERY IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure the DLC-II is pushed in straight and fully plugged in to the vehicle connector.
^ Make sure all other DLC-II cable connections (as shown in Figure 11) are connected properly.
CAUTION
^ Nissan requires the use of essential tools shown in Figure 11 when performing ABS/VDC
reprogramming.
^ J44200-1O "Pigtail" should not be removed from the CONSULT-II DDL Port. This "Pigtail" allows
use of the stronger "quick disconnect" cable set.
^ If cables are very often changed at the DDL Port (base) of the CONSULT-II unit, cable connector
pin damage may result.
^ If there is connector pin damage, ABS/VDC reprogramming may fail. Permanent damage to the
ABS/VDC system can occur.
4. Continue with Section 2
Section 2
Section 2: Check all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTCs.
CAUTION:
It is essential that you check all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTCs before
performing the remaining sections of this procedure.
1. Remove the 8 MB orange card from CONSULT-II.
2. Install the 16 MB (red/white) Diagnostic Card into Slot A (top slot) of CONSULT-II (see Figure
12).
3. Press [START (Nissan BASED VHCL)]
4. In "SELF-DIAG RESULTS", check and erase any DTCs that are stored in the following vehicle
systems:
^ ENGINE
^ A/T
^ ABS
^ AIRBAG
^ ALL MODE AWD/4WD (if applicable)
^ DIFF LOCK (if applicable; 4WD Titan)
^ AIR LEVELIZER (if applicable)
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab)
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Crew Cab)
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 498
- When a state of the following switches changes, it switches to CAN communication state:
- Ignition switch
- Key switch (insert)
- Hazard switch
- Main door lock/unlock switch
- Front door switch (LH, RH)
- Rear door switch (LH, RH) (Crew Cab)
- Rear door switch upper (LH, RH) (King Cab)
- Rear door switch lower (LH, RH) (King Cab)
- Combination switch (passing, lighting switch 1st position, front fog lamp)
- Keyfob (lock/unlock signal)
- Front door lock assembly LH (key cylinder switch)
- When control performed only by BCM is required by switch, it shifts to CAN communication
inactive mode.
- Status of combination switch reading function is changed.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM DIRECTLY
- Power door lock system.
- Remote keyless entry system.
- Power window system.
- Sunroof system.
- Room lamp timer.
- Warning chime system.
- Turn signal and hazard warning lamps system.
- Trailer turn signal and hazard warning lamps system (if equipped). Refer to "TRAILER TOW".
NOTE: Power supply only. No system control.
SYSTEMS CONTROLLED BY BCM AND IPDM E/R
- Panic system.
- Vehicle security (theft warning) system.
- NVIS (NATS) system.
- Headlamp, tail lamp, front fog lamp, auto light and battery saver control systems.
- Front wiper and washer system.
Part 1
Page 10087
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 1069
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 12884
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 1)
Page 11295
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 13212
3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate
relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel and tire assembly. 6. Install wheel and tire
assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle.
NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed.
7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor.
Page 659
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 2490
Alignment: Service and Repair Preliminary Inspection
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
WARNING: Always adjust the alignment with the vehicle on a flat surface.
NOTE: If alignment is out of specification, inspect and replace any damaged or worn suspension
parts before making any adjustments.
1. Check and adjust the wheel alignment with the vehicle under unladen conditions. "Unladen
conditions" means that the fuel, coolant, and lubricant
are full; and that the spare tire, jack, hand tools and mats are in their designated positions.
2. Check the tires for incorrect air pressure and excessive wear. 3. Check the wheels for run out
and damage. 4. Check the wheel bearing axial end play. 5. Check the shock absorbers for leaks or
damage. 6. Check each mounting point of the suspension components for any excessive
looseness or damage. 7. Check each link, arm, and the rear suspension member for any damage.
8. Check the vehicle height.
- Verify the level using Consult-II memory register 1103 and set to 0 ° 10 mm (0 ° 0.39 inch) as
necessary.
Brakes - Front Brake Pad Service Supplement
Brake Pad: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front Brake Pad Service Supplement
Classification: BR10-005
Reference: NTB10-081
Date: June 25, 2010
2004 - 2010 TITAN AND ARMADA; FRONT BRAKE PAD SERVICE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
Front brake service is needed that will require the removal of the front brake caliper cylinder body
or brake pads,
ACTION:
Follow the Service Procedure in this bulletin as a supplement to the brake service.
NOTE:
The supplemental items in the Service Procedure of this bulletin supersede any previous detailed
brake pad removal procedures.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Partially drain the brake fluid.
^ Refer to section BR (DRAIN and REFILL) in the Service Manual.
2. Remove the front wheels.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed for front wheel removal.
Page 9744
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 6462
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 4641
12. Place the new relay into the IPDM and press straight down to install.
13. Reinstall the IPDM. Make sure it is latched into place on both sides.
14. Reinstall the IPDM cover.
15. Reinstall the battery cables - positive cable first.
16. Reset the clock and the radio station presets.
17. If equipped with Automatic Drive Position (ADP), inform the customer they will need to reset
their ADP settings (ADP memory).
Page 8812
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 5677
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 8014
3. Place a wooden block as shown, and blow air from union bolt mounting hole to remove piston
and piston boot.
CAUTION: Do not get your fingers caught in piston.
4. Using a flat-bladed screwdriver, remove piston seal from cylinder body.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage cylinder inner wall.
CALIPER INSPECTION
Cylinder Body
CAUTION: Use new brake fluid to clean. Do not use mineral oils such as gasoline or kerosene.
- Check inside surface of cylinder for score, rust wear, damage or foreign materials. If any of the
above conditions are observed, replace cylinder body.
- Minor damage from rust or foreign materials may be eliminated by polishing surface with a fine
emery paper. Replace cylinder body if necessary.
Torque Member Check for wear, cracks, and damage. If damage or deformation is present, replace
the affected part.
Piston
CAUTION: Piston sliding surface is plated, do not polish with emery paper even if rust or foreign materials are
stuck to sliding surface.
- Check piston for score, rust, wear, damage or presence of foreign materials. Replace if any of the
above conditions are observed.
Sliding Pin Bolts and Sliding Pin Boots Make sure there is no wear, damage, or cracks in sliding
sleeve and sliding sleeve boots, and if there are, replace them.
ASSEMBLY
CAUTION: Do not use NISSAN Rubber Grease (KRE00 00010, KRE00 00010 01) when
assembling.
Page 1877
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 10579
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Locations
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Page 3101
6. Remove the PCV hose from the PCV control valves.
^ <-: Engine front
7. Loosen the bolts in reverse order shown using power tool for rocker cover (A) or (B).
CAUTION: Do not hold the rocker cover (RH) (B) by the oil filler neck.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply liquid gasket to the joint part of the cylinder head and camshaft bracket following the steps
below.
NOTE: Illustration shows an example of (LH) side (zoomed in shows No.1 camshaft bracket).
a. Refer to illustration "a" to apply liquid gasket to the joint part of No.1 camshaft bracket and
cylinder head. b. Refer to illustration "b" to apply liquid gasket 90° to illustration "a".
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
2. Install the rocker cover (A) or (B).
^ Make sure the new rocker cover gasket is installed in the groove of the rocker cover (A) or (B).
^ Tighten the bolts in two steps in the numerical order shown. 1st step: 2.0 Nm (0.2 kg-m, 18 inch
lbs.)
Page 9113
b. Remove the right side sun visor holder, twist 1/4 turn to remove.
c. Remove the right side dual sun visor assembly.
Use plastic trim tool as shown.
d. Remove front pillar assist grip; 2 bolts; under end covers.
Page 6788
27. Select the correct vehicle and model year from the list (see Figure 13 example).
28. Select Select
29. Make sure the correct vehicle is displayed (see Figure 14 example).
30. Select Confirm
Page 6441
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2054
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab)
Door Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (Crew Cab)
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 10353
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 289
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 5205
Case 11
Page 1947
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 360
Page 6308
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 7932
3. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, then tighten the torque member bolts to the specified torque.
Refer to BR-24, "Components"
CAUTION: When attaching cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe any oil off knuckle spindle, washers and cylinder
body attachment surfaces.
- Do not reuse caliper torque member bolts.
4. Install brake hose to cylinder body, then tighten union bolt to specification. Refer to BR-24,
"Components".
CAUTION: -
Do not reuse copper washers for union bolt.
- Attach brake hose to cylinder body together with union bolt and washers.
5. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. 6. Attach tires to the vehicle.
Disassembly and Assembly
Page 12651
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 5432
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 9317
Check dust cover for damage. Replace it and the cover clamp if necessary.
NOTE: Before checking the axial forces and end play, turn the lower ball joint at least 10
revolutions so that the ball joint is properly broken in.
Vertical end play "C": 0 mm (0 inch)
Page 10598
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 468
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8495
Power Distribution Module: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7605
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 11532
b. Pull release handle on door (see Figure 15).
NOTE:
Upper door latch should close and open without binding or use of excessive force.
23. Reinstall door panel and seatbelt retractor cover.
24. Reinstall three door panel bolts, then reinstall armrest.
CAUTION:
Door panel bolts thread into plastic. Use a Phillips screwdriver to install.
25. Reinstall upper seat belt anchor bolt.
Page 5180
Case 2
Page 13584
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 10661
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 7885
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor.
2. Install axle shaft assembly.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 4596
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Specifications
Brake Fluid: Specifications
Brake Fluid .......................................................................................................................... Genuine
Nissan Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or Dot 3
Page 8312
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 4904
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 871
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 2395
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH (Step 1)
Page 1648
Door Switch: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 13
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 8088
3. Make sure the transmission is in Park and the brake pedal is released.
IMPORTANT:
Do not push the brake pedal until step 6.
4. Start the engine and let it idle.
^ Keep the transmission in Park.
5. On CONSULT-II, select ABS Data Monitor.
6. Slowly push the brake pedal approximately 2 inches, then release.
NOTE:
2 inches is approximately half-way between the pedal "see height" and "depressed height".
7. Repeat step 6 ten times.
^ If DTC C1179 is detected (comes up on CONSULT-II), this bulletin applies; go to Part 2.
^ If DTC C1179 is not detected, go to the next step.
8. Repeat steps 2 though 7.
^ If you have done steps 2 through 7 twice, and DIG C1179 is not detected, this bulletin does not
apply. Go to ASIST for further diagnostic information.
Part 2
Part 2: Download special ABS/VDC Reprogramming Data from ASIST onto your standard 8 MB
(orange) Reprogramming Card.
This part of the procedure involves two general steps:
^ Setting up
^ Download (transfer) data from ASIST into CONSULT-II (8 MB orange Reprogramming card).
SETTING UP:
1. Install the standard 8 MB (orange)
Reprogramming Card into CONSULT-II.
Use slot A-top slot (see Figure 1).
CAUTION:
Do NOT use the 16 MB (orange) "QR25 Campaign ECM Software" Card (# J-44200-ECMR-16). If
you use this card, it will be reformatted to an 8 MB card.
Page 9612
Diagnostic Procedure For Air Mix Door Motor (Driver) (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 12161
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
ABS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 9588
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 3289
6. Remove the front cover.
a. Loosen and remove the bolts in the reverse of order shown. b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove
the covers using Tool.
Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces.
7. Remove the front oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Do not damage front cover.
8. Remove the oil pump drive spacer.
^ Hold and remove the flat space of the oil pump drive spacer by pulling it forward.
9. Remove the oil pump.
10. Remove the chain tensioner on the LH bank using the following steps.
NOTE: To remove the timing chain and associated parts, start with those on the LH bank. The
procedure for removing parts on the RH bank is omitted because it is the same as that for the LH
bank.
a. Squeeze the return-proof clip ends using suitable tool and push the plunger into the tensioner
body. b. Secure the plunger using stopper pin.
^ Stopper pin is made from hard wire approximately 1 mm (0.04 inch) in diameter.
c. Remove the bolts and chain tensioner.
WARNING: Plunger, spring, and spring seat pop out when (squeezing) return-proof clip without
holding plunger head. It may cause serious injuries. Always hold plunger head when removing.
Page 2947
Tires: Service and Repair Tire Rotation
Rotation
NOTE: Follow the maintenance schedule for tire rotation service intervals. Refer to MA-7,
"PERIODIC MAINTENANCE". See: Service Intervals
1. Rotate the tires on each side from front to back as shown. Do not include the spare tire when
rotating the tires.
Wheel nut: 133 Nm (14 kg-m, 98 ft. lbs.)
CAUTION: When installing wheels, tighten them diagonally by dividing the work two to three times
in order to prevent the wheels from developing any distortion.
2. Adjust the tire pressure to specification. 3. After the tire rotation, retighten the wheel nuts after
the vehicle has been driven for 1,000 km (600 miles), and also after every wheel and tire have
been installed such as after repairing a flat tire.
Page 11819
Page 10267
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 1339
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 14408
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 7970
Brake Rotor/Disc: Testing and Inspection Rear
DISC ROTOR INSPECTION
Visual Inspection Check surface of disc rotor for uneven wear, cracks, and serious damage. If any
non-standard condition is detected, replace applicable part.
Runout Inspection 1. Using wheel nuts, install disc rotor to wheel hub at 2 or more positions.
2. Inspect runout using a dial gauge. [Measured at 10 mm (0.39 inch) inside disk edge.]
Runout limit (on vehicle): 0.07 mm (0.003 inch)
NOTE: Make sure that wheel bearing axial end play is within the specification before measuring
runout.
3. If runout is outside the limit, find the minimum runout point by shifting mounting positions of disc
rotor and wheel hub by one hole. 4. If runout still out of specification, turn rotor with on-car brake
lathe.
Thickness Inspection
Using a micrometer, check thickness of disc rotor. If thickness is either at or below the wear limit, or
exceeds maximum uneven wear, replace disc rotor.
Standard thickness: 14.0 mm (0.551 inch) Wear limit: 12.0 mm (0.472 inch) Maximum uneven wear
(measured at 8 positions): 0.015 mm (0.0006 inch)
Page 9737
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 5051
Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Steps 2 - 4)
Inspection Between TCM And Data Link Connector Circuit (Step 5)
Page 13163
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 9063
^ Un-tape the connectors that are needed. Leave the connectors you don't need taped to the
harness.
46. Connect both battery cables-positive cable first.
47. Reset the radio station presets.
48. If Inspection Procedure 1 was NG, or Inspection Procedure 2 result was "light stays on or
blinks"; connect CONSULT-II and clear codes from the Air Bag Control Unit SELF-DIAG [PAST].
Final Quality Checks
49. Check the air bag light operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition OFF and then ON.
b. Observe the air bag warning light.
c. Make sure the air bag warning light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out.
50. Confirm that all systems related to the harness replacement are functioning correctly.
High Mount Stop Lamp Harness Branch (Passenger Side-Right Side-Only)
51. Remove the rear seat belt D-ring covers and bolts-left and right side.
Page 11653
7. Remove carpet.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 11411
2. Pull up / lift one side of the cover near the rear.
^ A small amount of force will be needed to pop loose the locating stud.
3. Pull up / lift the other side of the cover near the rear.
^ A small amount of force will be needed to pop loose the locating stud.
4. Remove the cover from the engine.
Disclaimer
Page 5022
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 3
Page 6063
Idle Speed: Testing and Inspection
IDLE SPEED
With CONSULT-II
Check idle speed in "DATA MONITOR" mode with CONSULT-II.
With GST
Check idle speed with GST.
Page 5681
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 8835
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 13970
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 13704
LT-T/TOW-04
Diagrams: Other diagrams referred to by name within these diagrams can be found at Diagrams By
Diagram Name. See: Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Diagrams By Diagram Name
Page 2120
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
TP SENSOR
Component Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The
throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which
transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In
addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the
voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from
these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
Page 13501
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Component Locations
Knock Sensor: Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 49
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 7309
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 9969
Testing Condenser Fan Motor
CAUTION:
Make sure there are no objects in the way of the fan blades. Keep all objects away from directly
contacting the fan blades when the fan motor is running.
7. Switch the Fan Motor Tester to ON, observe the fan operation for 3 to 4 seconds and then turn
the Fan Motor Tester OFF:
- If the fan turned and operated freely; go to step 8.
- If the fan did not operate freely; this indicates the fan motor is NG and must be replaced. No
further testing is needed; go to Procedure C
8. Prepare the Fluke 73 and the Phototach Digital Tachometer for the next test as follows.
a. Switch the Fluke 73 to read DC Volts.
b. Remove the Phototach Digital Tachometer from its case and have it ready to check the fan
RPM.
Figure B-5, Figure B-6
NOTE:
It is important that readings from these two meters be read and recorded at the same time in the
next test.
c. Practice using the Phototach Digital Tachometer as follows:
1. Do not turn the fan motor tester ON at this time.
2. Press and hold the TEST button on the Phototach Digital Tachometer.
WARNING:
Do not shine or point the red light beam from the Phototach Digital Tachometer into anyone's eyes
(including your own).
3. Hold the digital tachometer about 4 inches away from the condenser fan.
4. Aim the red beam at the painted area on the fan blade.
Page 8635
Power Distribution Module: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of IPDM E/R
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect negative battery cable.
2. Remove IPDM E/R upper cover.
3. Release 2 clips and pull IPDM E/R up from case. 4. Disconnect IPDM E/R connectors and
remove the IPDM E/R.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1363
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS
Wheel Sensors
WHEEL SENSORS
REMOVAL
1. Remove wheel sensor bolt.
^ When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front
wheel sensor bolt.
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
^ Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten wheel sensor bolt to specification.
CAUTION: Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following: ^
Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged.
^ Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
Sensor Rotor
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation FRONT
The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace
wheel hub and bearing assembly.
REAR Removal
1. Remove axle shaft assembly.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor.
2. Pull the sensor rotor off the axle shaft using Tool and a press.
Tool number: ST30031000 ( - )
Installation
1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure
sensor rotor is fully seated.
Page 1528
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 5899
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 12808
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 10403
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 1629
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 9)
Page 183
a. CONSULT-II will display the screen shown in Figure 20.
You will need to turn the ignition OFF for at least one full second and then turn the ignition back
ON.
Then press "OK" on the CONSULT-II screen.
b. CONSULT-II will automatically print out a report (see Figure 21).
^ Attach the print-out report to the Repair Order for future reference.
7. Press [BACK] two times to return to the main menu.
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF and CONSULT-II OFF.
9. Continue with Section 5.
Section 5
Section 5: Again, perform a check of all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any newly
stored DTC(s).
1. Remove the 8 MB orange Reprogramming Card from CONSULT-II.
2. Install the red/white Diagnostic Card into Slot A (top slot) of CONSULT-II.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine).
^ CONSULT-II will turn ON automatically.
^ Confirm that all electrical loads* (except for the ignition) are OFF.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1524
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 1160
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 4667
Page 13526
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 13698
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Locations
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 13927
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) (Steps 3 - 5)
Page 8452
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 8068
Vacuum Brake Booster: Service and Repair Vacuum Lines
VACUUM LINES
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect vacuum hose from hose clip. 2. Release clamps and disconnect vacuum hose. 3.
Remove check valve from brake booster.
INSTALLATION
1. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: ^
Insert vacuum hose for at least 24 mm (0.94 inch).
^ Do not use lubricating oil during assembly.
Inspection VISUAL INSPECTION
Check for improper assembly, damage and deterioration.
CHECK VALVE INSPECTION Airtightness Inspection
Use a suitable vacuum pump to check. Connect to brake booster side of check valve. Check valve
specification: Vacuum decrease should be within 1.3 kPa (10 mmHg, 0.39 inHg) for 15 seconds
under a vacuum of -66.7 kPa (-500 mmHg, -19.69 inHg)
Page 6228
f. Use the new tie-wrap to secure all the wires to the black corrugated tubing (see Figure 6).
^ New tie-wrap is included with the new sender unit.
^ Make sure all wires are tied together (3 fuel level sending unit wires and 2 fuel pump wires).
^ Place the Tie-Wrap 90 mm (about 3.5 inches) from the top of the tubing.
^ Make sure the wires do not interfere with the movement of the float arm.
4. Carefully reinstall the Fuel Pump Assembly back into the vehicle in reverse of removal.
^ IMPORTANT: Use a new seal (O-Ring) when reinstalling the Fuel Pump Assembly.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
CAUTION:
DO NOT bend the Float Arm when reinstalling the Fuel Pump.
5. Confirm the Fuel Gauge operates properly.
Control Operation
Control Assembly: Description and Operation Control Operation
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL
Description
The front air control provides regulation of the vehicle's interior temperature. The system is based
on the position of the front air controls temperature switch selected by the driver. This is done by
utilizing a microcomputer, also referred to as the front air control, which receives input signals from
the following two sensors:
- Intake sensor
- PBR (position balanced resistor).
The front air control uses these signals (including the set position of the temperature switch) to
control:
- Outlet air volume
- Air temperature
- Air distribution
Operation
AIR MIX DOOR CONTROL
The air mix door is controlled so that in-vehicle temperature changed based on the position of the
temperature control dial.
BLOWER SPEED CONTROL
Blower speed is controlled based on front blower switch settings.
When blower switch is turned, the blower motor starts and increases air flow volume each time the
blower switch is turned clockwise, and decreases air flow volume each time the blower switch is
turned counterclockwise.
INTAKE DOORS CONTROL
The intake doors are controlled by the recirculation switch setting, and the mode (recirculation is
not allowed in floor, floor/defrost or defrost modes) control dial setting.
MODE DOOR CONTROL
The mode door is controlled by the position of the mode control dial.
DEFROSTER DOOR CONTROL
The defroster door is controlled by turning the defroster dial to front defroster.
MAGNET CLUTCH CONTROL
Page 5044
NOTE: In the CAN diagnosis support monitor check sheet (B), check marks are put to "CAN CIRC
3", "CAN CIRC 6", "CAN CIRC 8" and "CAN CIRC 9". But, in the column of the check sheet table
indication in Display control unit Translation Sheet (C), "ECM" is listed only for "CAN CIRC 3".
Therefore, put a check mark to "ECM" because "UNKWN" is listed on the column of reception
diagnosis of the check sheet table.
5. Confirm the unit name that "UNKWN" is displayed on the copy of "CAN DIAG SUPPORT MNTR"
screen of "BCM", "HVAC", "ABS" and
"IPDM E/R" as well as "ENGINE". And then, put a check mark to the check sheet table.
Page 9747
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay
Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement
Reference: NTB10-137B
Date: December 22, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006
FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY
This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have
been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068
NHTSA#: 10V-517
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40)
2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM
relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles,
oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including
the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored
Battery Cable: Customer Interest Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored
Classification: EC06-001A
Reference: NTB06-009A
Date: March 31, 2006
MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information
sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of
this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
The MIL is "ON" with
^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR
^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit,
and
There are no drivability incidents.
DETERMINE IF
This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure.
ACTIONS
If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections:
^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections.
^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection.
^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left
side instrument stay assembly.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Page 3906
Page 8268
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type claim using the claims coding table.
SERVICE PROCEDURE:
1. Print the engine Freeze Frame (FF) data using CONSULT-II.
^ Refer to section EC in the appropriate Service Manual for Freeze Frame diagnostic information.
2. Compare your printout to the chart.
a. If your readings match exactly to the readings above, go to step 3.
b. If your readings do not match exactly, this bulletin does not apply.
^ Go to section LAN in the appropriate Service Manual for additional diagnostic information.
3. Make sure all ECM ground terminal connections are clean and tight as follows:
Page 14179
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 13445
Page 10281
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuel Pump Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 3058
CONNECTING ROD
CONNECTING ROD
Page 5264
Case 17
Case 18
Case 19
NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Electrical Units
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Page 4080
Wiring Diagram
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 8090
5. From the ASIST PC main menu screen, select CONSULT UTILITIES (see Figure 3).
Page 5344
Front Aie Control Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Transfer Control Unit Circuit Inspection
Page 13589
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Sunroof
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 11270
Towing Information: Service and Repair
TOW TRUCK TOWING
WARNING:
- Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to
support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle.
- Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.
CAUTION:
- All applicable State or Provincial (in Canada) laws and local laws regarding the towing operation
must be obeyed.
- It is necessary to use proper towing equipment to avoid possible damage during towing operation.
Towing is in accordance with Towing Procedure Manual at dealer.
- Always attach safety chains before towing.
- When towing, make sure that the transmission, steering system and power train are in good
order. If any unit is damaged, dollies must be used.
- Never tow an automatic transmission model from the rear (i.e., backward) with four wheels on the
ground as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission.
4WD MODEL
NISSAN does not recommend towing automatic transmission equipped vehicles with the drive
wheels on the ground.
CAUTION:
- Never tow 4WD models with any of the tires on the ground as this may cause serious and
expensive damage to the transfer case and transmission.
Vehicle Recovery (Freeing a stuck vehicle)
- Tow chains or cables must be attached only to the main structural members of the vehicle.
- Pulling devices should be routed so they do not touch any part of the suspension, steering, brake
or cooling systems
- Always pull the cable straight out from the front or rear of the vehicle. Never pull the vehicle at a
sideways angle.
- Pulling devices such as ropes or canvas straps are not recommended for use for vehicle towing
or recovery.
Page 144
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 13124
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 8294
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 1390
Optional Splice
Service and Repair
Solar Sensor: Service and Repair
OPTICAL SENSOR
Removal and Installation
The optical sensor is located in the top center of the instrument panel.
Page 8590
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Headlamp (For CANADA) - Daytime Light System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5333
Case 14
Page 4615
Electronic Throttle Actuator: Description and Operation
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL FUNCTION
Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc.
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The
current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides
feedback to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle
properly in response to driving condition.
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR
Component Description
The throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The
current opening angle of the throttle valve is detected by the throttle position sensor and it provides
feedback to the ECM to control the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening angle
properly in response to driving condition.
ELECTRIC THROTTLE CONTROL ACTUATOR
Component Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The
throttle control motor is operated by the ECM and it opens and closes the throttle valve. The throttle
position sensor detects the throttle valve position, and the opening and closing speed of the throttle
valve and feeds the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the
throttle valve from these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle
valve opening angle properly in response to driving condition.
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Page 4538
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Description
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of exhaust valve cam sprocket to
identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder
identification signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to
change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 2155
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 2056
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 12642
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 7949
wrench.
Brake Judder Repair
^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series
On-Car Brake Lathe.
^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe.
^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout
(see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin).
PEDAL FEEL
^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes.
^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer
comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car.
^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and
determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items:
a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely.
b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly
installed.
c. Bleed all air from the brake system.
d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of
the appropriate service manual.
NOTE:
Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and
adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE.
BRAKE SERVICE
To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to:
1. Finish rotors properly.
^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise.
^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for
rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information).
2. Correctly install pads and shims.
IMPORTANT:
Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for
proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations.
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
3. Perform the following post-installation checks.
^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary.
^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance,
including noise.
a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph).
b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph
(50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds.
c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without
stopping.
Page 8745
g. Remove the 10 side curtain air bag mounting bolts.
h. Remove the side curtain air bag module and disconnect the electrical connector.
66. Harness should now be completely loose-remove it from the vehicle.
67. Install the new harness in reverse order. Make sure of the following:
^ All harness mounting clips are installed in the correct locations.
^ Seat, seat belt, and air bag bolts are tightened to correct torque:
IMPORTANT:
Page 8589
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 3907
Page 7172
3. Place a small hole in seal case, using suitable punch or drill.
4. Remove oil seal using Tool as shown.
Tool number: - (SP8P)
5. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Rear Cover Gasket
Removal and Installation
Page 7884
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair ABLS/ABS
Wheel Sensors
WHEEL SENSORS
REMOVAL
1. Remove wheel sensor bolt.
^ When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front
wheel sensor bolt.
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
^ Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten wheel sensor bolt to specification.
CAUTION: Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following: ^
Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged.
^ Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
Sensor Rotor
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation FRONT
The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace
wheel hub and bearing assembly.
REAR Removal
1. Remove axle shaft assembly.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor.
2. Pull the sensor rotor off the axle shaft using Tool and a press.
Tool number: ST30031000 ( - )
Installation
1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure
sensor rotor is fully seated.
Page 114
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 8435
Optional Splice
Page 3792
5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box.
6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3.
NOTE:
There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is
easily accessible.
7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3).
8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4).
Page 9090
c. Remove the seat from the vehicle and place it in a clean area.
6. If equipped; remove sub woofer or navigation control unit.
Sub Woofer-under driver's seat
a. Disconnect the electrical connector
b. Remove the 3 mounting bolts.
c. Remove the sub-woofer from the vehicle.
Navigation Control Unit-under passenger seat
a. Remove the control unit cover; 2 bolts.
Page 11197
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 3927
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Cruise Control Indicator Lamp: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 1117
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 6657
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 5613
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 8947
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 5842
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 3719
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 4889
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 9127
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Service and Repair
Air Filter Element: Service and Repair
Changing Engine Air Cleaner Filter
NOTE: ^
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals.
^ Replace the air filter as necessary for required maintenance.
1. Remove air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case (upper). 2. Remove air cleaner
filter from air cleaner case. 3. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5324
Case 5
Page 12532
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 10396
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 2224
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 7892
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Locations
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 10866
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 14145
Most windshield damage that occurs due to impact is easily identified as shown above.
Cracks can spread and become larger from the original strike point or crush mark due to:
^ Thermal stresses caused by temperature fluctuation
^ External physical stresses, such as hand touch, wind force, or vehicle vibration during driving (pot
holes)
A lead, or crack from one of the star cracked impact points can run to the edge of the glass and
appear to be a low stress crack starting from the glass outside edge.
Single crack beginning or ending at the edge of the glass
Single cracks must be inspected along the entire crack for impact marks.
^ If any impact mark is found anywhere along the crack, it indicates the damage occurred from an
object striking the windshield. This is not covered
under warranty.
Page 792
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 12602
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Alternator: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 573
Page 2394
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) (Steps 3 - 5)
Page 5414
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 7965
wrench.
Brake Judder Repair
^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series
On-Car Brake Lathe.
^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe.
^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout
(see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin).
PEDAL FEEL
^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes.
^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer
comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car.
^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and
determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items:
a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely.
b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly
installed.
c. Bleed all air from the brake system.
d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of
the appropriate service manual.
NOTE:
Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and
adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE.
BRAKE SERVICE
To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to:
1. Finish rotors properly.
^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise.
^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for
rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information).
2. Correctly install pads and shims.
IMPORTANT:
Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for
proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations.
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
3. Perform the following post-installation checks.
^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary.
^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance,
including noise.
a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph).
b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph
(50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds.
c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without
stopping.
Page 11687
REMOVAL
CAUTION: Disconnect both terminals from battery in advance.
1. Remove body side trim. 2. Remove rear trim. Refer to "BODY SIDE TRIM". 3. Remove sun visor
assemblies. 4. Remove sun visor holders. 5. Remove front roof console (if equipped).
- Disconnect harnesses.
6. Remove rear roof console (if equipped).
- Disconnect harnesses.
7. Remove center roof console (if equipped).
- Disconnect harnesses.
8. Remove assist grips. 9. Remove striker covers (if equipped).
10. Remove room lamp. 11. Remove headlining.
- Disconnect harnesses.
12. Remove rear audio control assembly from rear roof console (if equipped).
- Disconnect harness.
13. Remove lamp assemblies from roof console.
- Disconnect harnesses.
14. Remove rear roof console bracket (if equipped). 15. Remove center roof console front bracket
(if equipped). 16. Remove assist grip brackets from roof (if equipped).
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3609
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 2087
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 1626
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Description and Operation
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SENSOR
Component Description
The refrigerant pressure sensor is installed at the condenser of the air conditioner system. The
sensor uses an electrostatic volume pressure transducer to convert refrigerant pressure to voltage.
The voltage signal is sent to ECM, and ECM controls cooling fan system.
Page 6390
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1231
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 176
^ After you click on "OK" an ASIST screen will appear that shows the data transfer progress (see
Figure 10).
c. Wait until the data transfer is complete (see the CAUTION at the end of step 8).
^ When the data transfer is complete, CONSULT-II will shut off automatically.
d. Disconnect the A/C power cord and the Ethernet cable from CONSULT-II.
Procedure
Part 3: Reprogram ABS/VDC Control Unit with 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card
CAUTION:
^ Perform this operation in five (5) sections. DO NOT SKIP any of these sections.
^ The sections must be performed in order, 1 through 5.
Section 1: Connect a battery charger and CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
Section 2: Check all systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTC(s).
Section 3: Confirm the vehicle battery voltage and CONSULT-II "Charger Input".
Section 4: Perform ABS/VDC Control Unit Reprogramming.
Section 5: Again, perform a check of all systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any newly
stored DTCs.
Section 1
Section 1: Connect a battery charger and CONSULT-II to the vehicle.
1. Confirm the ignition switch is OFF.
2. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery. Set the charger at a low charge rate (2-amp
"trickle charge").
IMPORTANT
You must connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery when performing ABS/VDC
reprogramming. Permanent ABS/VDC damage can occur if you don't.
Connecting a vehicle battery charger will maintain:
^ Proper CONSULT-II power supply during reprogramming-very important if the CONSULT-II
battery is low.
^ Vehicle battery voltage level-especially on late model vehicles where the cooling fans come on
during reprogramming.
3. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle using the DLC-II cable with black Converter Box (see Figure
11).
Page 4927
Wiring Diagram
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 2323
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM.
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 ->
3), and then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See:
Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with
terminal clips.
Page 1403
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 2202
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 3854
21. When the screen in Figure 10 appears, ECM reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If you can't print the above screen:
a. Select the Print icon.
b. Select Save.
c. Select OK.
A copy of the screen is now saved in the Toughbook(R) PC.
NOTE:
If you saved a copy of the screen in Figure 10 and need to print it at a later date, you can find it in
the following file location:
At the bottom left corner of the computer screen click on Start.
Page 4637
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
For this campaign only, if it is determined the ECM relay in the IPDM needs to be replaced, use
Special Tool J-50389. This is an exception to the information contained in NTB09-036.
1. Verify the repair in this campaign applies by inspecting the IPDM.
a. Open the hood, and then place covers on the fenders for protection against scratches or other
damage.
Page 11736
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 9057
25. Snap the plastic harness protector loose from the floor.
26. Take the harness loose from along the floor.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain air bags, disconnect the air bag satellite sensor that's
located on the rocker panel (see figure above).
27. On the rear door, remove the lower seat belt anchor bolt.
NOTE:
For the passenger side, this bolt does not need to be removed unless you are going to replace the
seat belt.
Page 4769
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 694
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOL (J-50389)
Repair Overview
PARTS INFORMATION
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 3402
Valve Clearance: Adjustments
Valve Clearance ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: ^
Perform adjustment depending on the selected head thickness of the valve lifter.
^ The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional
differences caused by temperature. Use the specifications for hot engine condition to adjust.
1. Remove the camshaft. 2. Remove the valve lifters at the locations that are out of specification.
3. Measure the center thickness of the removed valve lifters using suitable tool. 4. Use the equation
below to calculate the valve lifter thickness for replacement.
^ Valve lifter thickness calculation: Thickness of replacement valve lifter = t1 + (C1 - C2) t1 =
Thickness of removed valve lifter C1 = Measured valve clearance C2 = Standard valve clearance:
^ Thickness of a new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the
cylinder). Stamp mark N788 indicates 7.88 mm (0.3102 inch) in thickness.
^ Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 inch) in
steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) (when manufactured at factory).
5. Install the selected valve lifter. 6. Install the camshaft. 7. Manually turn the crankshaft pulley a
few turns. 8. Make sure the valve clearances for a cold engine are within specifications by referring
to the specified values. 9. After completing the repair, check the valve clearances again with the
specifications for a warmed engine. Make sure the values are within
specifications.
Page 9185
Page 12063
Power Seat Motor: Testing and Inspection Lifting Motor (Rear) Circuit Inspection
Lifting Motor (Rear) Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 6644
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 1193
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 8696
57. Remove the 5 screws (shown in the figure) from the center roof console.
58. Pull the console loose at the rear and let it hang in place.
59. Pull the door welt loose from the top and rear of the door opening.
CAUTION:
Page 3630
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 7185
Position Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
Components
Components
REMOVAL
Differential Lock Position Switch
Page 4117
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 13118
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 14423
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 1863
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 12954
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 4774
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 12140
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 7372
8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM.
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 ->
3), and then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See:
Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and
Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with
terminal clips.
Page 14412
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air Vents
Evaporator Temperature Sensor / Switch: Customer Interest A/C - Low Airflow From Front Air
Vents
Classification: HA09-001A
Reference: NTB09-028A
Date: November 17, 2010
LOW AIRFLOW FROM HVAC FRONT AIR VENTS
The Applied Vehicles have been amended. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Quest (V42) 2005-2011 Xterra (N50) 2005-2011 Pathfinder
(R51) 2005-2011 Frontier (D40) 2004-2008 Titan (A60) 2004-2008 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
An Applied Vehicle has low airflow coming from the HVAC front air vents due to evaporator
freeze-up.
AND
The HVAC unit surface temperature around the evaporator is about 32°F (0°C) causing ice to form
on the evaporator.
NOTE:
The incident may be described as:
^ Only occurring after a long drive with the HVAC on continuously and the blower set on low.
AND
^ Under conditions such as high ambient temperature and high humidity.
ACTION
^ Replace the intake sensor with the part listed in Parts Information.
^ Refer to the Service Procedure below.
Page 13204
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 7757
7. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on axle housing and install side bearing
caps on axle housing without tightening to
specification.
CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters.
8. Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool.
Tool number: - (C-4164)
9. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion.
10. Check total preload. 11. Check tooth contact.
12. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent.
CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or
foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces.
13. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts with the specified torque.
Refer to "COMPONENTS". 14. Install both RH and LH axle shafts. 15. Install propeller shaft. 16.
Refill rear final drive oil.
Page 3702
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 6864
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 11493
^ LH motor: Rotate counterclockwise.
^ RH motor: Rotate clockwise.
2. Install the power window motor onto the regulator.
3. Install the regulator assembly into the door.
4. Secure regulator assembly to door inner with fasteners then install glass into door and attach to
regulator.
5. Raise the glass to the top position.
CAUTION:
Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top.
Page 11032
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 2463
Page 6926
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 12177
SERVICE PROCEDURE
NOTE:
Use suitable covers to protect upholstery, carpeting, etc. when performing this Procedure.
Preliminary Steps
NOTE:
^ Steps 1, 2 and 3 below, only apply to vehicles equipped with Front Side (SRS) Air Bags.
^ These vehicles equipped with Front Side (SRS) Air Bags have a tag on the front seatback (see
Figure 1).
1. Write down all radio station presets.
2. Disconnect both battery cables, negative cable first.
3. Wait at least 3 minutes after the negative battery cable is disconnected before proceeding with
step 4 below.
Tilt Seat and Add Spacer Washer
4. Remove the four bolts that secure the driver's seat to the floor.
^ Refer to section SE in the Service Manual (ESM) for seat removal information.
5. Carefully tilt the seat back to reach the bottom of the seat (see Figure 2).
^ If needed, disconnect electrical connectors so you can tilt the seat.
6. Install the new Spacer Washer as shown in Figure 2.
^ Make sure the new Spacer Washer is fully inserted and locked into position.
Page 3683
The exhaust system may be hot. Allow to cool down before inspection/repairs.
NOTE: Exhaust system parts do not need to be removed for this inspection/repair.
1. Raise the vehicle on a hoist.
2. Inspect the heat shields on the front exhaust tube for the following:
^ Heat shield contact with the exhaust tube.
^ Separated/missing band clamp(s).
^ Missing "stand-off" (see Figure 4).
3. If a heat shield is found contacting the exhaust tube, pry it away to allow a minimum 1 mm (.040
inch) space.
^ Road test the vehicle to verify the repair.
4. If a band clamp is separated or missing, install new band clamps as needed.
Page 3246
12. Remove chain tensioner cover using Tool (if necessary).
Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228)
INSTALLATION
1. Install the front oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Do not scratch or make burrs on the circumference of the oil seal.
2. Install the chain tensioner cover (if removed).
- Apply liquid gasket as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
3. Install the front cover as follows:
a. Install a new O-ring on the cylinder block.
b. Apply liquid gasket as shown.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
Page 6904
13. Connect revolution sensor connector.
14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips.
15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal
CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level.
Page 10604
Air Bag Control Module: Service and Repair
DIAGNOSIS SENSOR UNIT
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
CAUTION:
- Before servicing the SRS, turn the ignition switch off, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
1. Disconnect the harness connectors for each air bag module and seat belt pre-tensioner. 2.
Remove center console. 3. Disconnect diagnosis sensor unit harness connectors. 4. Remove fixing
bolts from the diagnosis sensor unit.
CAUTION:
- Do not use old bolts; replace with new bolts.
- Check diagnosis sensor unit bracket to ensure it is free of deformities, dents, cracks or rust. If it
shows any visible signs of damage, replace with new one.
- Replace diagnosis sensor unit if it has been dropped or sustained an impact.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Testing and Inspection/Component Tests and General
Diagnostics
CAUTION:
- The diagnosis sensor unit must always be installed with the arrow mark "<=" pointing toward the
front of the vehicle for proper operation.
ECU DISCRIMINATED NO.
After replacing the diagnosis sensor unit, confirm that the diagnosis sensor unit identification is
correct for the vehicle as equipped. Refer to "CONSULT-II Function".
Page 5111
Case 10
Page 413
Power Distribution Module: Symptom Related Diagnostic Procedures
Auto Active Test
Auto Active Test
DESCRIPTION
- In auto active test mode, operation inspection can be performed when IPDM E/R sends a drive
signal to the following systems: Rear window defogger (crew cab only)
- Front wipers
- Tail, parking, and license lamps
- Front fog lamps
- Headlamps (Hi, Lo)
- A/C compressor (magnetic clutch)
- Cooling fan
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Close hood and front door RH, and lift wiper arms away from windshield (to prevent glass
damage by wiper operation).
NOTE: When auto active test is performed with hood opened, sprinkle water on windshield
beforehand.
2. Turn ignition switch OFF. 3. Turn ignition switch ON and, within 20 seconds, press front door
switch LH 10 times. Then turn ignition switch OFF. 4. Turn ignition switch ON within 10 seconds
after ignition switch OFF. 5. When auto active test mode is actuated, horn chirps once. 6. After a
series of operations is repeated three times, auto active test is completed.
NOTE: When auto active test mode has to be cancelled halfway, turn ignition switch OFF.
CAUTION: Be sure to perform BL-36, "Door Switch Check (King Cab)" when the auto active test
cannot be performed. See: Body and Frame/Locks/Power Locks/Testing and
Inspection/Component Tests and General Diagnostics/Door Switch Check (King Cab)
INSPECTION IN AUTO ACTIVE TEST MODE
- When auto active test mode is actuated, the six steps are repeated three times.
Concept of Auto Active Test
- IPDM E/R actuates auto active test mode when it receives door switch signal from BCM via CAN
communication line. Therefore, when auto
Page 7515
Components
Inspection
FLUID LEAKAGE AND FLUID LEVEL 1. Make sure that fluid is not leaking from the transfer
assembly or around it.
Page 1749
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 6780
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 1014
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Keyless Start Transmitter: Technical Service Bulletins Keyless Systems - Intelligent Key(R) Battery
Replacement
Classification: EL09-042
Reference: NTB09-118
Date: October 28, 2009
INTELLIGENT KEY BATTERY REPLACEMENT AND BATTERY DISCHARGE INDICATOR
RESET
APPLIED VEHICLES: Vehicles equipped with the Intelligent Key type shown below.
IF YOU CONFIRM
^ The Intelligent Key is the type that has a notch on each side.
And
^ The battery in the Intelligent Key needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
1. Open the Intelligent Key as described in the Service Procedure, and replace the battery.
2. Confirm the battery discharge indicator has reset/is not illuminated in the dot matrix display.
NOTES:
^ DO NOT insert a tool into the notches of the Intelligent Key to pry it open, as this may damage
the printed circuit board (PCB).
^ The battery is a maintenance item and is not warrantable.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Place a piece of tape on the end of a small flathead screwdriver.
Page 9668
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. 2. Remove the steering member from the heater
and cooling unit assembly. 3. Disconnect the air mix door motor electrical connector. 4. Remove
the three screws and remove the air mix door motor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 2204
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Specifications
Power Steering Fluid: Specifications
Recommended fluid is Genuine Nissan PSF or equivalent.
Page 4695
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 2253
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation
PSP SENSOR
Component Description
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and
detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering
load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric
throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed
and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
Page 13045
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 13592
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 8874
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6450
Camshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CMP SENSOR (PHASE)
Component Description
The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the protrusion of exhaust valve cam sprocket to
identify a particular cylinder. The camshaft position sensor (PHASE) senses the piston position.
When the crankshaft position sensor (POS) system becomes inoperative, the camshaft position
sensor (PHASE) provides various controls of engine parts instead, utilizing timing of cylinder
identification signals.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to
change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change.
Due to the changing magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
ECM receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 13167
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 10904
3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1.
4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2).
5. Replace the battery.
^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece.
6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together.
7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated
in the dot matrix display.
8. If the indicator is still illuminated:
a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door.
b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off.
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 5276
Case 10
Page 10993
Page 6735
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 13264
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 3568
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 4567
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 4139
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 4385
Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent).
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for
connecting the fuel pressure gauge.
2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test".
^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure.
^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble
Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test.
^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test.
> If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and
repair information.
> If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3.
3. Replace the fuel pump.
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the
appropriate Service Manual.
^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information.
^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal.
4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed.
Service and Repair
Fuel Rail: Service and Repair
FUEL INJECTOR AND FUEL TUBE
CAUTION: Do not remove or disassemble parts unless instructed as shown in the figure.
REMOVAL
1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. 2. Release fuel pressure. 3. Disconnect the
negative battery terminal. 4. Disconnect fuel injector harness connectors. 5. Disconnect fuel hose
assembly from fuel tube (right bank and left bank).
CAUTION: ^
While hoses are disconnected, plug them to prevent fuel from draining.
^ Do not separate fuel connector and fuel hose.
6. Remove fuel injectors with fuel tube assembly.
Page 12791
Page 8215
Page 9072
^ During installation of the new harness you will find some connectors taped to the harness as
shown.
^ Some of the connectors will be for options that the vehicle you are working on does not have.
^ Un-tape the connectors that are needed. Leave the connectors that are not needed taped to the
harness.
68. Connect both battery cables-positive cable first.
69. Reset the radio station presets.
70. If Inspection Procedure 1 was NG, or Inspection Procedure 2 result was "light stays on or
blinks"; connect CONSULT-II and clear codes from the Air Bag Control Unit SELF-DIAG [PAST].
Final Quality Checks
71. Check the air bag light operation as follows:
a. Turn the ignition OFF and then ON.
b. Observe the air bag warning light.
c. Make sure the air bag warning light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out.
72. Confirm that all systems related to the harness replacement are functioning correctly.
Page 3422
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 11101
Pedal Adjusting Motor Circuit Inspection (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 3053
Image Symbols
Install the piston and connecting rod assembly to the crankshaft using Tool. Tool number:
EM03470000 (J-8037) Position the crankshaft pin corresponding to the connecting rod to be
installed onto bottom dead center. Apply engine oil sufficiently to the cylinder bore, piston, and
crankshaft pin. Match the cylinder position with the cylinder No. on the connecting rod to install.
Install the piston with the front mark on the piston crown facing the front of the engine.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the crankshaft pin, resulting from an interference of the
connecting rod big end.
Install connecting rod cap. Match the stamped cylinder number marks on the connecting rod with
those on the cylinder cap to install.
Tighten connecting rod bolts using Tool.
Page 4722
d. Press [START] on the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARN" screen. See Figure 4.
e. Press [START] on the "WORK SUPPORT" screen to begin the Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL)
procedure. See Figure 5.
^ The IAVL procedure will take several minutes to complete.
^ CONSULT will display "Please Wait" in the center of the screen while the IAVL procedure is in
process. See Figure 6.
Page 2464
SPECIAL TOOLS
Page 8744
e. Remove the front pillar finisher.
^ Use a plastic trim tool.
NOTE:
With the sun visor and front pillar finisher removed the headlining will be loose all along the
passenger side. This will allow access to the side curtain air bag mounting bolts.
f. Take the side curtain air bag branch of the harness loose from the body.
Page 1307
Power Seat Switch: Testing and Inspection Reclining Switch Inspection
Reclining Switch Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 12007
Figure 12
24. Make sure the "dimples" on the seat track mounting tabs are aligned with the holes in the seat
track (see Figures 11 and 12).
Figure 13
25. Install and hand tighten both seat track mounting tab bolts (M6, 10 mm head, see Figure 13).
Figure 14
26. Next, install and tighten the six nuts (three on each side) with the base plates. This will secure
the gear boxes (see Figure 14). Nut torque: 64-85
in-lb (7.17-9.69 Nm).
27. Re-install and tighten the two Seat Frame Side Bolts M8, 12 mm head (see Figure 14). Bolt
torque: 13-17 ft-lb (17.5-23.7 Nm).
Page 14299
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 1464
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 10080
Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12247
Reclining Switch Inspection (Step 3)
Page 2491
Alignment: Service and Repair Camber and Caster
CAMBER AND CASTER
Components
Page 3746
Body Control Module: Electrical Diagrams
BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic (Part 1)
Page 2335
7. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on axle housing and install side bearing
caps on axle housing without tightening to
specification.
CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters.
8. Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool.
Tool number: - (C-4164)
9. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion.
10. Check total preload. 11. Check tooth contact.
12. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent.
CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or
foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces.
13. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts with the specified torque.
Refer to "COMPONENTS". 14. Install both RH and LH axle shafts. 15. Install propeller shaft. 16.
Refill rear final drive oil.
Page 9467
3. Place wheel on turntable of tire machine. Ensure that transmitter is 270 degrees from
mounting/dismounting head.
NOTE: Do not touch transmitter with mounting head.
4. Lubricate tire well, and install second side of tire as normal. Ensure that tire does not rotate
relative to rim. 5. Inflate tire and balance wheel and tire assembly. 6. Install wheel and tire
assembly in appropriate wheel position on vehicle.
NOTE: If replacing the transmitter, then transmitter wake up operation must be performed.
7. Adjust neutral position of steering angle sensor.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Alarm Horn Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 4050
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 3684
Page 13826
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 3442
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 7421
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Engine Control Component Parts Locations
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Locations Engine Control Component Parts Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 8515
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Locations
Intake Air Temperature Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1479
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Testing and Inspection Component Tests
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect ASCD brake switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between ASCD brake switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given
conditions.
If NG, adjust ASCD brake switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again.
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given
conditions.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again.
Page 1942
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Locations
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 4897
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 11135
2. Remove the three rear door speaker screws and remove rear door speaker.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Front Tweeter
FRONT TWEETER
Removal
1. Remove front tweeter grille.
2. Remove front tweeter screws (A). 3. Disconnect connector and remove front tweeter.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Rear Door Tweeter
REAR DOOR TWEETER
Removal
1. Remove rear door finisher.
2. Remove rear door tweeter screws and remove rear door tweeter. 3. Disconnect rear door
tweeter connector.
Installation
Page 8033
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Technical Service Bulletin # 00-052C Date: 040416
Engine Controls - ECM Replacement Procedures
Classification: EC00-007C
Reference: NTB00-052C
Date: April 16, 2004
ECM REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
ATTENTION:
THIS BULLETIN HAS BEEN REVISED.
^ The Service Procedures for replacing an ECM on an Applied vehicle were revised.
^ Please use this bulletin NTB00-052c for complete information.
^ Discard all previously distributed copies of NTB00-052.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All 2000 and later 1999 Frontier (D22) 1999 Quest (V41) 1999 Pathfinder
(R50) from VIN JN8AR07**XW350101
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The Electronic Control Module (ECM) needs to be replaced on a 2000 MY and later vehicle, or an
Applied 1999 MY vehicle (see above).
ACTIONS:
^ Re-register all customer keys if the vehicle has ECM based NATS (see step 1).
^ Check ASIST for any new updates for the new ECM you're installing (see steps 2 - 4).
^ Perform the "ACCELERATOR PEDAL & THROTTLE VALVE CLOSED POSITION LEARNING"
procedure (see step 5).
^ After installing the new ECM, perform the "IDLE AIR VOL LEARNING" procedure (when
applicable) using CONSULT-II. See step 6.
^ For 2005 and later vehicles, enter the vehicle VIN into the new ECM (see step 7).
CAUTION:
Failure to perform all the work steps in the specified order can cause poor engine running, MIL
'ON', or vehicle emission test rejection.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Page 9579
Page 7600
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 13908
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 1213
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Locations
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 11324
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 6510
Spark Plug: Service and Repair
SPARK PLUG (PLATINUM-TIPPED TYPE)
REMOVAL
1. Remove engine room cover using power tool. 2. Remove ignition coil.
3. Remove spark plug using suitable tool.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
^ Do not use a wire brush for cleaning.
^ If plug tip is covered with carbon, spark plug cleaner may be used. Cleaner air pressure: Less
than 588 kPa (5.9 bar, 6 kg/cm2, 85 psi) Cleaning time: Less than 20 seconds
Page 2220
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 10300
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 10510
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Firing Order
1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
#1 cylinder
Page 1299
19. Install the seat into the body. Torque the bolts to 45 Nm (4.6 Kg-m, 33 ft-lb).
20. Re-connect the battery cables.
21. Confirm OCS operation. See the applicable Electronic Service Manual for details.
22. Re-program the radio presets.
23. Re-initialize the Automatic Sunroof as applicable. See the applicable Owner's Manual for
details.
Page 3745
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Page 12989
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 12427
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 12811
Fuel Level Sensor Unit Check
Page 9887
6. Check the pulley clearance all the way around the clutch disc as shown.
Clutch disc-to-pulley clearance : 0.3 - 0.6 (0.012 - 0.024 in)
7. If the specified clearance is not obtained, replace the adjusting spacer to readjust. 8. Connect
the compressor electrical connector. 9. Install the drive belt.
10. Install the engine under cover and the splash shield.
BREAK-IN OPERATION
When replacing compressor clutch assembly, always conduct the break-in operation. This is done
by engaging and disengaging the clutch about 30 times. Break-in operation raises the level of
transmitted torque.
Page 7816
e. Read the "CAUTION" screen carefully (see Figure 7). Then click "Okay".
8. Prepare CONSULT-II as follows (see Figure 8):
a. Make sure:
^ CONSULT-II is OFF.
^ The 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card is inserted into CONSULT-II.
^ The A/C Power Adapter is securely connected to CONSULT-II.
^ The Ethernet Cable is securely connected to CONSULT-II and the PC port.
b. Turn CONSULT-II ON.
c. Select "Transfer Files via LAN".
NOTE:
If you accidentally choose a menu option other than "Transfer Files via LAN" turn CONSULT-II
OFF, and then back ON as shown in Figure 8.
d. Set the CONSULT-II unit down for now and go to your ASIST PC.
Page 8957
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 277
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 12354
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 14113
- If reusing the existing window assembly, clean the opening and assembly, then apply new butyl to
the window assembly.
- If installing a new window, clean the opening and remove the plastic liner from the butyl on the
new window assembly. Rear window assembly nuts 3.0 N·m (0.31 Kg-m, 27 in-lb)
4. Connect the rear window defogger.
5. Lower the window and install the rear window glass bolts.
Rear window glass bolts 6.0 N·m (0.61 Kg-m, 53 in-lb)
6. Install the sealing screen. 7. Install the headliner.
SETTING AFTER INSTALLATION
Setting of Limit Switch
If any of the following operations are performed the limit switch must be reset.
- Motor operation when not installed in the vehicle.
- Removal and installation of the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the motor from the regulator.
- Removal and installation of the glass.
- Removal and installation of the glass run.
Resetting
After installing each component, perform the following procedure to reset the limit switch.
1. Raise the glass to the top. 2. While pressing and holding the reset switch, lower the glass to the
bottom. 3. Release the reset switch. Verify that the reset switch returns to the original position, if
not pull the switch using suitable tool. 4. Raise the glass to the top position
CAUTION: Do not operate the glass automatically to raise the glass to the top position.
REPAIRING WATER LEAKS FOR REAR WINDOW GLASS
Leaks can be repaired without removing or reinstalling glass.
If water is leaking between butyl adhesive material and body or glass, determine the extent of
leakage. This can be done by applying water to the rear window area while pushing glass outward.
Tire Monitor System - TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Tire Pressure Monitor Receiver / Transponder: All Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System
- TPMS Sensor Seal Leak
Classification: WT08-005
Reference: NTB08-032
Date: March 10, 2008
TPMS SENSOR SEAL LEAK
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2004-2008 with TPMS
SERVICE INFORMATION
When repairing an air leak at a TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitor System) sensor seal, a seal is now
available separately.
Do not replace the entire sensor when only a seal is needed.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Reference the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual for claims coding information.
Disclaimer
Page 12735
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Locations
Four Wheel Drive Selector Switch: Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Location of Electrical Parts
Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set
Evaporative Canister Filter: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set
Classification: EC06-009B
Reference: NTB06-095B
Date: September 2, 2008
2004 ARMADA / 2004-2006 TITAN; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446
APPLIED VEHICLES:2004-2006 Titan (A60)
2004 Armada (TA60)
This bulletin has been amended to add DTC P0448. No other changes have been made.
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(s) stored:
^ P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446
AND
^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed.
ACTIONS:
All applied vehicles:
Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V.
Clear any DTC(s) stored in the ECM.
AND IF the vehicle is a 2004-2006 Titan:
Refer to the Install Filter Kit Service Procedure of this bulletin.
AND IF the vehicle is a 2004 Armada:
Refer to the Install Protector Service Procedure of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 1458
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 5917
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 13475
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 6681
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
Page 10205
1. Use a 3/64 drill bit to slightly enlarge the holes shown in Figure 2.
^ These holes will be used to mount new harness clips for the new harness routing.
Page 8122
2. Check the CONSULT-II's "Charger Input" reading (see Figure 15).
NOTE:
^ "Battery Voltage" is the voltage level of CONSULT-II's battery.
^ "Charger Input" is the voltage level of the vehicle's battery. (It MUST be above 12 volts.)
3. As mentioned, the "Charger Input" reading MUST be above 12 volts (see Figure 15).
^ A reading above 12 volts confirms;
a. The DLC-II is properly connected to the vehicle,
b. The vehicle battery voltage is sufficient for ABS/VDC reprogramming, and
c. CONSULT-II has a sufficient power supply to perform ABS/VDC reprogramming.
^ If the vehicle's battery voltage ("Charger Input") is below 12 volts, one or more of the following
may be the cause:
a. The battery charger you hooked up in section 1 is not charging the battery (poor connection or it
is not working).
b. The DLC-II does not have a good connection to the vehicle (not straight).
c. The DLC-II cable may have a malfunction (damaged wire or pins).
d. The CONSULT-II Converter (J44200-50 / black box) is not working correctly (see Figure 11).
CAUTION:
^ Do not attempt ABS/VDC reprogramming if the vehicle's battery voltage is below 12 volts.
^ Permanent ABSNDC damage can occur if the vehicle battery does not maintain the minimum
voltage during ABS/VDC reprogramming.
^ If "Charger Input" is above 12 volts, power from the vehicle battery will keep CONSULT-II's power
supply at the correct level during reprogramming (see Figure 15).
4. Continue with Section 4.
Section 4
Section 4: Perform ABSNDC Control Unit Reprogramming
1. Press [BACK] two times.
Page 12535
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 8221
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5211
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
Page 7819
VERY IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure the DLC-II is pushed in straight and fully plugged in to the vehicle connector.
^ Make sure all other DLC-II cable connections (as shown in Figure 11) are connected properly.
CAUTION
^ Nissan requires the use of essential tools shown in Figure 11 when performing ABS/VDC
reprogramming.
^ J44200-1O "Pigtail" should not be removed from the CONSULT-II DDL Port. This "Pigtail" allows
use of the stronger "quick disconnect" cable set.
^ If cables are very often changed at the DDL Port (base) of the CONSULT-II unit, cable connector
pin damage may result.
^ If there is connector pin damage, ABS/VDC reprogramming may fail. Permanent damage to the
ABS/VDC system can occur.
4. Continue with Section 2
Section 2
Section 2: Check all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTCs.
CAUTION:
It is essential that you check all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTCs before
performing the remaining sections of this procedure.
1. Remove the 8 MB orange card from CONSULT-II.
2. Install the 16 MB (red/white) Diagnostic Card into Slot A (top slot) of CONSULT-II (see Figure
12).
3. Press [START (Nissan BASED VHCL)]
4. In "SELF-DIAG RESULTS", check and erase any DTCs that are stored in the following vehicle
systems:
^ ENGINE
^ A/T
^ ABS
^ AIRBAG
^ ALL MODE AWD/4WD (if applicable)
^ DIFF LOCK (if applicable; 4WD Titan)
^ AIR LEVELIZER (if applicable)
Page 5049
Inspection Between TCM And Differential Lock Control Unit (Step 4)
Inspection Between TCM And Driver Seat Control Unit Circuit (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 8510
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Component Locations
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 11247
Door Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (King Cab)
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 1)
Page 3443
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 10600
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 2806
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 9035
vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in dealer inventory which
are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to do so can result in civil
penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While federal law applies only to
new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used vehicles in their inventory
before they are retailed.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
REQUIRED SPECIAL TOOLS
REPAIR OVERVIEW
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Inspection Procedure 1: Seat Belt Retractors
Inspection Procedure 2: Air Bag Light / Codes
Inspection Procedure 3: Harness Damage
Install Update Kit: Replace Vinyl Tube with Corrugated Tube
Harness Replacement: Includes seat belt replacement, if needed.
Floor and Rear Door: Left and/or right side
Rear Cabin Wall Harness Branch: Left side only
High Mount Stop Lamp Harness Branch: Right side only
Side Curtain Air Bag Harness Branch: Right side only
PARTS INFORMATION
NOTE:
Order the body harness indicated in the electronic parts catalog. Your order will be automatically
superseded to the appropriate campaign service harness part number. As noted in steps 45 and 67
campaign service harnesses have some connectors taped to the harness. Those connectors may
or may not be utilized in the repair depending upon the optional equipment on the vehicle being
serviced.
Page 13277
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 11045
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 38
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Brakes - Brake/ABS Lamp ON/Pedal Vibration/DTC C1179
Technical Service Bulletin # 06-040 Date: 060512
Brakes - Brake/ABS Lamp ON/Pedal Vibration/DTC C1179
Classification: BR06-007
Reference: NTB06-040
Date: May 12, 2006
2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; ABS AND/OR BRAKE
WARNING LIGHT ON WITH DTC C1179
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) equipped with VDC 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60)
equipped with VDC
IF YOU CONFIRM
A customer reports:
^ The brake warning light is or was ON, and/or
^ The ABS warning light is or was ON, and/or
^ There is or was vibration* in the brake pedal while braking.
* This vibration is the rapid consistent-speed pedal pulsation that is felt when the ABS is activated.
ACTIONS
^ Make sure this bulletin applies (see Part 1 of the Service Procedure). If this bulletin does not
apply, refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding shown.
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage
Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision
Damage
Classification: FA10-006
Reference: NTB10-126
Date: October 21, 2010
WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight
indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise.
NOTE:
Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a
warrantable repair
If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension
damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows:
1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle.
2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands.
3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise).
4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one.
Page 12541
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 10027
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Locations
Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 12047
- DO NOT replace the entire seat adjuster assembly when only a slide motor or gear assembly is
needed.
- This is the ONLY approved repair procedure for repair of seat slide motor or gear incidents on the
Applied Vehicles. A claim to Nissan for the repair of seat slide motor or gear incidents on the
Applied Vehicles may be denied if the repair is not performed exactly as outlined in this bulletin.
- The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Figure 1
NOTE: This is the ONLY approved repair procedure for seat slide motor or gear assembly incidents
on the Applied Vehicles. A claim to Nissan for the repair of seat slide motor or gear incidents on the
Applied Vehicles may be denied if the repair is not performed exactly as outlined in this bulletin.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 1615
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 9365
1. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly.
^ Disconnect wheel sensor harness connector. Do not remove wheel sensor from wheel hub and
bearing assembly for this procedure.
2. Remove steering outer socket from steering knuckle using Tool.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage ball joint boot.
^ Temporarily tighten nut to prevent damage to threads and to prevent Tool from coming off.
Tool number: HT72520000 (J-25730-A)
3. Remove the coil spring and shock absorber assembly using power tool. 4. Support lower link
using a suitable jack. 5. Remove cotter pin and nut from upper link ball joint and discard the cotter
pin.
6. Separate upper link ball joint from steering knuckle using Tool.
Tool number: ST29020001 (J-24319-01)
7. Remove pinch bolt from steering knuckle using power tool, then separate lower link ball joint
from steering knuckle. 8. Remove steering knuckle from vehicle.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary. ^
Perform ball joint inspection.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
Refer to "Components" for tightening torques.
CAUTION: Use a new cotter pin for installation of lock nut.
Page 609
a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section
EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits).
NOTE:
This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different.
b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify
the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check.
C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the
terminal eyelet(s).
d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the
connections.
^ Both sides of the eyelet
^ Eyelet mounting surface
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Nut/bolt threads.
Page 12471
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 9596
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 10034
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 7327
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 11397
Body Control Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Work Support
WORK SUPPORT
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "WORK SUPPORT" on "SELECT
DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Touch "RESET SETTING VALUE" on "SELECT WORK ITEM" screen. 4.
Touch "START". 5. "RESET SETTING VALUE OK?" is displayed, and touch "YES". 6. The setting
will be changed and "COMPLETED" will be displayed. 7. Touch "END".
Display Item List - Work Support
Display Item List
CAN Communication Inspection Using CONSULT-II (Self-Diagnosis)
Page 13934
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) (Steps 3 - 5)
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH (Step 1)
Engine - Engine Mounting Bolt Size Change
Engine Mount: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Engine Mounting Bolt Size Change
Classification: EM09-008
Reference: NTB10-034
Date: March 1, 2010
2004-2009 ARMADA & TITAN; ENGINE MOUNTING BOLT SIZE CHANGE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2009 Armada (TA60) and Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If for any reason one of the Old P/N engines listed in the Parts Information table above needs to be
ordered, note that Service Files have or will be created for these engines.
Page 1163
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 6473
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 5160
Case 13
A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - 5 Speed A/T DTC Diagnostics
Classification: AT09-016A
Reference: NTB10-003A
Date: February 11, 2010
5 SPEED A/T DTC DIAGNOSES FOR P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759,
P1764, P1769, P1774
This bulletin has been amended. Additional DTCs were applied. Discard all previous copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2003 - 2010 Nissan vehicles with 5-Speed A/T
APPLIED TRANSMISSION: RE5R05A ONLY
SERVICE INFORMATION
If one or more DTCs listed below are found stored in Self Diagnosis, use the REPAIR FLOW
CHART shown below to assist in diagnosis.
^ DTCs: P1701, P1702, P1703, P1704, P1705, P1754, P1759, P1764, P1769, P1774.
IMPORTANT NOTE:
If DTC(s) not listed above is/are found stored in Self Diagnosis, this bulletin does not apply. Refer
to ASIST and the appropriate Service Manual for diagnostic procedure(s) as needed.
Page 2700
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Checking A/T Fluid
Checking A/T Fluid
1. Warm up the engine. 2. Check for any fluid leaks. 3. Remove the ATF level gauge bolt.
4. Before driving, the fluid level can be checked at fluid temperatures of 30° to 50°C (86° to 122°F)
using the "COLD" range on the ATF level
gauge as follows: a. Park the vehicle on a level surface and set the parking brake. b. Start the
engine and move the selector lever through each gear position. Shift the selector lever into the "P"
position. c. Check the fluid level with the engine idling. d. Remove the ATF level gauge and wipe it
clean with a lint-free paper.
CAUTION: When wiping the fluid from the ATF level gauge, always use a lint-free paper, not a
cloth.
e. Re-insert the ATF level gauge into the charging pipe until the cap contacts the top of the
charging pipe as shown.
CAUTION: To check fluid level, insert the ATF level gauge until the cap contacts the top of the
charging pipe, with the gauge reversed from the normal inserted position.
f. Remove the ATF level gauge and note the fluid level. If the fluid level is at low side of range, add
fluid to the transmission through the charging pipe.
CAUTION: Do not overfill the transmission with fluid.
5. Drive the vehicle to increase the ATF temperature to 80°C (176°F).
Page 12432
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 12059
Power Seat Motor: Testing and Inspection Reclining Motor LH Circuit Inspection
Reclining Motor LH Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 3651
^ Check to ensure that mounting brackets and mounting rubbers are installed properly and free
from undue stress. Improper installation could result in excessive noise and vibration.
Page 698
^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay.
9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay.
^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without
causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals.
10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6).
11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs.
Exhaust System
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exhaust System
EXHAUST SYSTEM
CAUTION: ^
Be sure to use genuine exhaust system parts or equivalents which are specially designed for heat
resistance, corrosion resistance, and shape.
^ Perform the operation with the exhaust system fully cooled. The system will be hot just after the
engine stops.
^ Be careful not to cut your hand on the heat insulator edge.
REMOVAL
Remove exhaust system components using power tool.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: ^
Always replace exhaust gaskets with new ones when reassembling.
^ Before installing a new heated oxygen sensor, clean and lube the exhaust tube threads using
Tool. Tool number A: - (J-43897-18) B: - (J-43897-12)
^ Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 inch) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new one.
^ Do not over-torque the heated oxygen sensor. Doing so may damage the heated oxygen sensor,
resulting in the MIL coming on.
^ If any mounting insulator is badly deformed, repair or replace it. If deposits such as mud pile up
on the mounting insulators, clean and inspect them.
^ Temporarily tighten the nuts on the exhaust manifold side and the bolts on the vehicle side.
Check each part for interference with other components, and then tighten the nuts and bolts to
specification.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
^ With the engine running, check exhaust tube joints for gas leakage and unusual noises.
Page 7111
7. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on axle housing and install side bearing
caps on axle housing without tightening to
specification.
CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters.
8. Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool.
Tool number: - (C-4164)
9. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion.
10. Check total preload. 11. Check tooth contact.
12. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent.
CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or
foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces.
13. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts with the specified torque.
Refer to "COMPONENTS". 14. Install both RH and LH axle shafts. 15. Install propeller shaft. 16.
Refill rear final drive oil.
Page 10460
Intake Sensor
After disconnecting intake sensor connector, measure resistance between terminals 1 and 2 at
sensor harness side, using the table. If NG, replace intake sensor.
Description and Operation
Vehicle Speed Sensor: Description and Operation
VSS
Description
The vehicle speed signal is sent to the combination meter from the "ABS actuator and electric unit
(control unit)" by CAN communication line. The c combination meter then sends a signal to the
ECM by CAN communication line.
ASCD VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
Component Description
The ECM receives two vehicle speed sensor signals via CAN communication line. One is sent from
combination meter and the other is from TCM (Transmission control module). The ECM uses these
signals for ASCD control. Refer to EC-29, "AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL DEVICE (ASCD)" for
ASCD functions.
Page 9750
Page 2077
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 15
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 780
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 13646
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 9628
Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Door Motor (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 4142
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 4056
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 3082
Available Piston
Available Piston
Piston Ring
Piston Ring
Piston Pin
Piston Pin
Page 358
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3986
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Fuse and Relay Box
Page 14026
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 182
NOTE:
This process will take from 4 to 5 minutes.
CAUTION:
You must leave the vehicle and the CONSULT-II unit "undisturbed" (don't touch) until
reprogramming is complete.
NOTE:
If the CONSULT-II screen gives you an error message "Unmatch of Vehicle Data":
^ You tried to reprogram with incorrect reprogramming data, or
^ You are trying to reprogram with the same file that is already in the ABS/VDC control unit.
For your reference, the old and new ABS/VDC Control Unit part numbers for vehicles equipped
with VDC are listed below.
ABS/VDC CONTROL UNIT PART NUMBERS
6. When VDC Reprogramming is complete:
Page 8009
Image Symbols
Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper
WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the
hazard of airborne particles or other
Page 3549
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Connector Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Diagram Information and Instructions
Shift Indicator: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 7771
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 12748
c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip.
d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab.
e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump.
^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector.
f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing.
CAUTION:
DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap.
Page 161
Page 675
^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap).
e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet.
4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under
the dash):
a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly
(cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3).
b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads.
C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners.
5. Clean the negative battery cable connections.
a. Write down all the radio presets.
b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection.
c. Clean the following items:
^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides)
^ Body connection bolt (head and threads)
^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap)
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Battery negative post
^ Negative cable battery terminal
d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery).
e. Reprogram the radio presets.
6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs.
Page 12163
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 12135
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 2486
Page 4943
Engine Control Module: Service and Repair Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of
the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is
disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2
seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and
wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 9517
3. Apply an approved tire lubricant to the tire and wheel in the areas shown in Figures 1 and 2.
^ Tire lubricant is a locally sourced common product used in the tire service process
Tire:
^ Apply lube to the inner bead only of both beads
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area (outer bead area)
NOTE:
Too much tire lubricant may allow the tire to slip on the rim while driving. If this occurs the tire may
become un-balanced.
Wheel:
^ Apply lube to the Safety Humps and Bead Seating area.
^ Do not apply lube to the flange area
4. Before inflating the tire:
^ If there are "match-mount" marks on the tire and rim, align the marks.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6964
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
Page 13899
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 9824
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 8456
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 1796
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 8542
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 13531
Page 7440
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 14148
^ These scratches are typically long and have several scratches concentrated together.
^ These scratches can be found anywhere on the glass surface.
^ Thoroughly examine the entire length of the crack to identify any scratch as a start point.
3) How to determine if glass has distortion or cracks due to manufacturing Issue.
Disclaimer
Page 169
2. Connect the AC power supply to CONSULT-II.
3. Connect CONSULT-II to the ASIST PC with the special Ethernet cable (P/N 02002554 is printed
on the cable).
a. Connect one end to CONSULT-II at the "PC port".
b. Connect the other end to the ASIST PC at the "Ethernet card" connection port.
4. Confirm the CONSULT-II date and time are correctly set as follows:
(This is necessary to provide a valid print-out for warranty claims.)
a. With the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming card in slot A, turn ON CONSULT-II.
b. Touch [SUB MODE]
c. Touch [SET DATE] (see Figure 2).
1) If the date is not correct, touch the [MONTH], [DAY] or [YEAR] as needed. Then adjust it by
using arrow keys. Once done, press [SAVE], press [BACK], and go to step d.
2) If the date is OK, press [BACK] and go to step d.
d. Touch [SET TIME] (see Figure 2).
1) If time is not correct, touch the [HOUR], [MINUTE] or [AM/PM] as needed. Then adjust it by
using arrow keys. After you are done, press [SAVE], press [BACK] and go to step 5.
2) If time is OK, press [BACK] and go to step 5.
IMPORTANT NOTE
^ If your ASIST PC has already been set up to perform ECU reprogramming, proceed to step 5.
^ If you are unsure whether your ASIST PC has already been set up for ECU reprogramming, look
in ASIST, under "CONSULT Utilities" - "CONSULT-II Info" - "NISSAN" - "ECU Reprogramming".
This will give you instructions for setting the Ethernet (IP) Address of the ASIST PC and
CONSULT-II. You will need to do this before performing ECU reprogramming.
DOWNLOAD (TRANSFER) DATA FROM ASIST INTO CONSULT-II (8 MB Orange Card)
Locations
Brake Light Switch: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 79
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 8050
Parking Brake Control: Service and Repair Removal and Installation
Removal and Installation REMOVAL
1. Remove lower instrument panel. 2. On models with floor shift, remove center console. 3.
Remove floor trim.
4. Remove adjusting nut. 5. Remove the lock plate from the front cable. 6. Remove front cable
retaining bolts and nut. 7. Disconnect return spring from equalizer. 8. Disconnect right and left rear
cables from equalizer. 9. Remove rear disc rotors.
10. Remove parking brake shoe, and remove rear cable from toggle lever. 11. Remove right and
left rear cables retaining bolts and nuts, then remove right and left rear cables.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: Do not reuse adjusting nut after removing it. ^
Adjust parking brake.
Page 5031
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2
Page 2593
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Start the engine and confirm:
^ if a squeak noise is coming from the drive belt
and
^ using a stethoscope or similar tool, if the drive belt auto tensioner is making abnormal noise.
2. Turn the engine off.
3. Write down the radio presets for later reprogramming.
4. Remove intake duct and engine cover.
5. Disconnect battery, negative cable first, and wait at least 3 minutes before proceeding to step 6.
6. Remove drive belt and drive belt auto tensioner. Refer to section EM of the Electronic Service
Manual for removal procedure.
7. Lift up vehicle by placing it on a hoist.
8. Remove front right wheel.
9. Remove fender protector. Refer to section EXT of the ESM for removal procedure.
10. Remove engine under cover (6 bolts).
11. Check the pulley alignment as follows:
Page 1783
Optional Splice
Page 3823
Page 9043
^ Slide the corrugated tube inside the door grommet about 10 mm. The second paint mark should
just be visible (see Figure B6). You may need to roll the grommet back and then forward over the
tube.
^ At the body end, the corrugated tube should meet the vinyl tube with no gap. The paint marks
must be facing away from the door/body as shown in Figure B6.
10. Install the new body clip over the paint mark on the body-side (see Figure B7).
^ Feed the strap through the buckle so the strap is UP as shown in Figure B7.
11. Install the new hinge rod clip over the center paint mark (see Figure B7). Feed the strap
through the buckle so the strap is UP as shown in Figure B7.
12. Cut off the excess strap. Leave only 3 to 6 mm (1/8 to 1/4 inch).
Brakes - Front Brake Pad Service Supplement
Brake Caliper: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Front Brake Pad Service Supplement
Classification: BR10-005
Reference: NTB10-081
Date: June 25, 2010
2004 - 2010 TITAN AND ARMADA; FRONT BRAKE PAD SERVICE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2010 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2010 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
Front brake service is needed that will require the removal of the front brake caliper cylinder body
or brake pads,
ACTION:
Follow the Service Procedure in this bulletin as a supplement to the brake service.
NOTE:
The supplemental items in the Service Procedure of this bulletin supersede any previous detailed
brake pad removal procedures.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTION (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing. You
MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Partially drain the brake fluid.
^ Refer to section BR (DRAIN and REFILL) in the Service Manual.
2. Remove the front wheels.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed for front wheel removal.
Page 9541
REMOVAL
1. Remove the ABS sensor. 2. Remove the rear brake rotor. 3. Remove the parking brake
assembly from the back plate.
4. Remove the four axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers.
5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using Tools as shown.
CAUTION: ^
The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully
so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing.
^ Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft
assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Tool number: A: KV40101000 (J-25604-01) B:
ST36230000 (J-25840-A)
6. Remove the snap ring from the axle shaft using suitable snap ring pliers. 7. Secure the axle shaft
in a suitable vise, then use a 1/4 in size drill bit to drill a hole approximately 3/4 into the thickness of
the bearing ring retainer
[3/4 thickness is approximately 6.3 mm (0.25 inch) deep].
CAUTION: ^
Mount the axle shaft using a soft jaw vise to avoid damaging the axle shaft.
^ Do not drill all the way through the bearing ring retainer, the drill may damage the axle shaft
surface.
Page 5257
Case 10
Page 6246
Page 13880
Rear Window Defogger Switch Circuit Check (Step 3)
Page 8920
4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Self-Diagnostic Results
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Self-diagnosis results are
displayed.
Display Item List - Self-Diagnostic Results
Display Item List
Page 11579
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the following parts from the trim panel:
^ pull handle cover
^ power window switch assembly (if equipped)
Refer to the INT section of the applicable Electronic Service Manual (ESM) for removal
instructions.
2. Following the instructions on the label, apply Nissan Vinyl and Leather Cleaner to the trim panel
surface.
3. Use a soft bristle brush to gently clean the surface.
4. Mist the area lightly with water to rinse.
5. Use a clean cloth to wipe the area clean.
Page 12717
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 10570
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 12352
Page 1948
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 4272
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 2068
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 1412
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 1108
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Automatic Air Conditioner
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 1282
Power Mirror Switch: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Check (Step 1)
Page 3401
^ Measure valve clearance using suitable tool.
CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully
warmed up engine are still within specifications.
11. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 90° from the position of No. 3 cylinder compression TDC
(clockwise by 360° from the position of No. 1
cylinder compression TDC) to measure the intake and exhaust valve clearances of No. 6 cylinder
and the exhaust valve clearance of No. 2 cylinder.
12. If out of specifications, adjust as necessary.
Page 10739
Page 9278
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 12522
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 11882
Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 3)
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch)
Check (King Cab)
Door Lock Cylinder Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder
Switch) Check (King Cab)
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Step 1)
Page 14069
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 9780
Blower Speed Control Specification
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Variable Blower Control
The variable blower control is located on the cooling unit. The variable blower control receives a
gate voltage from the front air control to steplessly maintain the blower motor voltage in the 0 to 5
volt range (approx.).
Page 14085
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 1538
Diagnostic Procedure For Ambient Sensor (Steps 7 - 9)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR AMBIENT SENSOR
SYMPTOM: Ambient sensor circuit is open or shorted. Using the CONSULT-II, DTC B257B or
B257C is displayed. Without a CONSULT-II, code 40 or 41 is indicated on front air control as a
result of conducting the front air control self-diagnosis.
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Ambient Sensor
Page 7319
Page 13482
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 2839
Page 10388
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9170
^ Apply the brakes as shown.
^ Start the engine to allow brake boost.
^ Turn the engine OFF,
^ Remove all lock pins-front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates".
^ Make sure the bridge plate will not interfere with movement of the turn plate.
Put the bridge plate in the down position.
^ Perform caster sweep by turning the steering wheel from outside the vehicle.
Calibration of Decel G Sensor
Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair Calibration of Decel G Sensor
Calibration of Decel G Sensor
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw
rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or
after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the decel G sensor before running vehicle.
NOTE: Calibration of decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position.
CAUTION: ^
The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle.
^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified
pressure value.
2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and
turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine).
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen
in this order.
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR",
"SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that
"DECEL G SEN" is
within ± 0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
Page 5902
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 3319
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect battery negative terminal.
2. Remove the air dam and necessary undercovers if equipped.
3. Drain engine oil.
WARNING: To avoid the danger of being scalded, never drain the engine oil when the engine is
hot.
4. Remove the oil cooler.
5. Disconnect A/T cooler hoses from radiator.
6. Remove lower radiator hose and pipe assembly.
7. Remove RH and LH front wheel and tire using power tool.
8. Remove the power steering pump without disconnecting the power steering hoses and position
aside.
9. Remove air duct and resonator assembly.
10. Remove upper radiator hose.
11. Disconnect coolant reservoir hose from radiator.
12. Remove crankshaft driven type cooling fan.
13. Disconnect the following connectors.
- Harness ground
- Power steering switch
- A/C compressor
- Oil pressure switch
14. Remove generator and generator bracket.
15. Remove A/C compressor without disconnecting the A/C pipes and position aside.
16. Remove front frame crossmember using power tool.
17. Remove the front final drive (4WD only).
18. Remove the steering gear.
19. Remove the oil pressure switch.
20. Remove the oil pan (lower). Using the following steps.
a. Remove the oil pan (lower) bolts in the reverse order as shown using power tool.
Page 14159
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 14296
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 8015
1. Apply clean brake fluid to new piston seal and insert into groove on cylinder body.
CAUTION: Do not reuse piston seal.
2. Apply brake fluid to piston and to piston boot, then install piston boot in to piston groove.
CAUTION: Do not reuse piston boot.
3. Insert piston into cylinder body by hand and insert piston boot piston-side lip into piston groove.
CAUTION: Press piston evenly and vary the pressing point to prevent cylinder inner wall from
being rubbed.
4. Install sliding boots and sleeves to cylinder body.
Page 14242
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 5395
Component Parts Location
Page 2169
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 13911
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 8805
Optional Splice
Page 3740
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 6301
Optional Splice
Page 3311
EM-5
Page 6652
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 551
b. Remove the IPDM cover, and then make note of the IPDM's color (see Figure 1 and 1a).
c. If the body of the IPDM is black in color, STOP HERE. No further work needed.
^ Reinstall the IPDM cover, and then return the vehicle to the customer.
d. If the body of the IPDM is white in color, continue below to Step 2.
2. Record the radio station presets:
3. Turn the ignition OFF.
4. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
NOTE:
Make sure 3 minutes have passed after battery cables were disconnected before proceeding.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Power Window Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 10862
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 401
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 1800
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 3741
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 5456
Body Control Module: Programming and Relearning
Configuration
DESCRIPTION
CONFIGURATION has two functions as follows:
- READ CONFIGURATION is the function to confirm vehicle configuration of current BCM.
- WRITE CONFIGURATION is the function to write vehicle configuration on BCM.
CAUTION: When replacing BCM, you must perform WRITE CONFIGURATION with CONSULT-II.
- Complete the procedure of WRITE CONFIGURATION in order.
- If you set incorrect WRITE CONFIGURATION, incidents will occur.
- Configuration is different for each vehicle model. Confirm configuration of each vehicle model.
READ CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Data
Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Schematic
Page 9511
^ Do not install more than three sheets of balance weights.
c. If calculated balance weight value exceeds 50 grams (1.76 ounces), install two balance weight
sheets in line with each other as shown.
CAUTION: Do not install one balance weight sheet on top of another.
3. Start wheel balancer again. 4. Install drive-in balance weight on inner side of road wheel in the
wheel balancer indication position (angle).
CAUTION: Do not install more than two balance weights.
5. Start wheel balancer. Make sure that inner and outer residual imbalance values are 5 grams
(0.18 ounces) each or below.
^ If either residual imbalance value exceeds 5 grams (0.18 ounces), repeat installation procedures.
Wheel Balance (Maximum Allowable Imbalance)
Page 5183
Case 5
Page 7240
REMOVAL
1. Remove the ABS sensor. 2. Remove the rear brake rotor. 3. Remove the parking brake
assembly from the back plate.
4. Remove the four axle shaft bearing cage nuts and lock washers.
5. Remove the axle shaft assembly using Tools as shown.
CAUTION: ^
The axle shaft bearing cup may stay in place in the axle shaft housing. Remove the cup carefully
so as not to damage the inner surface of the axle shaft housing.
^ Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft
assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing. Tool number: A: KV40101000 (J-25604-01) B:
ST36230000 (J-25840-A)
6. Remove the snap ring from the axle shaft using suitable snap ring pliers. 7. Secure the axle shaft
in a suitable vise, then use a 1/4 in size drill bit to drill a hole approximately 3/4 into the thickness of
the bearing ring retainer
[3/4 thickness is approximately 6.3 mm (0.25 inch) deep].
CAUTION: ^
Mount the axle shaft using a soft jaw vise to avoid damaging the axle shaft.
^ Do not drill all the way through the bearing ring retainer, the drill may damage the axle shaft
surface.
Page 13389
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 11723
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (King Cab) (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 10359
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 4499
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Tightening Torques & Sequences
Intake Manifold: Specifications Tightening Torques & Sequences
Intake Manifold
^ Tighten the intake manifold bolts in numerical order as shown.
Exhaust System
Catalytic Converter: Service and Repair Exhaust System
EXHAUST SYSTEM
CAUTION: ^
Be sure to use genuine exhaust system parts or equivalents which are specially designed for heat
resistance, corrosion resistance, and shape.
^ Perform the operation with the exhaust system fully cooled. The system will be hot just after the
engine stops.
^ Be careful not to cut your hand on the heat insulator edge.
REMOVAL
Remove exhaust system components using power tool.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: ^
Always replace exhaust gaskets with new ones when reassembling.
^ Before installing a new heated oxygen sensor, clean and lube the exhaust tube threads using
Tool. Tool number A: - (J-43897-18) B: - (J-43897-12)
^ Discard any heated oxygen sensor which has been dropped from a height of more than 0.5 m
(19.7 inch) onto a hard surface such as a concrete floor; replace with a new one.
^ Do not over-torque the heated oxygen sensor. Doing so may damage the heated oxygen sensor,
resulting in the MIL coming on.
^ If any mounting insulator is badly deformed, repair or replace it. If deposits such as mud pile up
on the mounting insulators, clean and inspect them.
^ Temporarily tighten the nuts on the exhaust manifold side and the bolts on the vehicle side.
Check each part for interference with other components, and then tighten the nuts and bolts to
specification.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
^ With the engine running, check exhaust tube joints for gas leakage and unusual noises.
Page 12100
a. Starting at the top of the seat back board pull the top down and away from the seat back. See
Figure 2.
b. Pull the middle part of the seat back board away from the seat back to disengage the middle 2
tabs.
c. Pull bottom of the seat back board away from the seat back.
NOTE:
A trim tool can be used to assist in the removal of the 2 bottom clips.
8. Install the seat back board:
a. Install 2 new clips at the bottom and push the seat back board in until it clicks into place.
b. Locate the 2 tabs at the top and push in the seat back board until it is securely in place.
c. Press in the seat back board at the 2 tabs located on the side until it clicks into place.
Module B (for hard seat backs)
1 Move / adjust the right front passenger seat bottom and seat back to the full forward position.
2. Remove the right front hard seat back board as follows:
NOTE:
The seat back board is held on with:
Page 10409
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 10036
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 5328
Case 9
Page 12647
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Sunroof
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Page 11832
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 7879
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 12528
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 475
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 11047
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 12417
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 4062
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Body Control Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Data Link
Connector/Schematic
4. Select item to be diagnosed on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Page 136
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 5263
Case 16
Page 6207
Page 9807
Optional Splice
Page 7270
1. Assemble the journal bearings. Apply multipurpose grease on the bearing inner surface.
NOTE: During assembly, use caution so that the needle bearings do not fall down.
2. Select snap rings that will provide the specified play in an axial direction of the journal, and install
them. Refer to "Snap Ring". See:
Specifications/Snap Ring
NOTE: Select snap rings with a difference in thickness at both sides within 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch).
3. Adjust the thrust clearance between the bearing and snap ring to zero by tapping the yoke.
4. Make sure that the journal moves smoothly and is below the propeller shaft joint flex effort
specification.
Propeller shaft joint flex effort: 1.96 Nm (0.20 kg-m, 17 inch lbs.) or less
Page 4359
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 11836
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 1245
Pedal Positioning Switch: Testing and Inspection
Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 12240
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8881
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 3473
Temperature Sensor (Gauge): Description and Operation
WATER TEMPERATURE GAUGE
The water temperature gauge indicates the engine coolant temperature. ECM provides an engine
coolant temperature signal to combination meter via CAN communication lines.
Page 8914
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 11035
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 7933
Image Symbols
Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper
WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the
hazard of airborne particles or other
Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision Damage
Wheel Bearing: Technical Service Bulletins Steering/Suspension - Wheel Bearing Collision
Damage
Classification: FA10-006
Reference: NTB10-126
Date: October 21, 2010
WHEEL BEARING COLLISION DAMAGE
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
Impacts to wheel bearings (such as a collision or other suspension damage) may create slight
indents in the bearing surfaces. These indents may not be visible but can cause bearing noise.
NOTE:
Hub/bearing replacement due to impact (collision or other suspension damage) is not a
warrantable repair
If a vehicle has visible wheel or suspension damage due to impact (collision or other suspension
damage), it is recommended that the wheel bearing assembly be inspected as follows:
1. Remove the hub/bearing assembly from the vehicle.
2. Hold the hub/bearing assembly with both hands.
3. Rotate the hub/bearing assembly in both directions (clockwise and counterclockwise).
4. If any gritty or rough feeling is detected in the bearing replace it with a new one.
Page 6945
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 731
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 1068
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Locations
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Service and Repair
Parking Light Bulb: Service and Repair
Bulb Replacement
FRONT TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP
NOTE: Reach through wheel opening for access.
1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock it. 2. Pull the bulb to remove it from the socket.
3. Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 8499
Page 9673
Components
Removal and Installation
DEFROSTER NOZZLE
Removal
1. Remove the instrument panel trim. 2. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. 3. Remove
the defroster nozzle.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
RH AND LH VENTILATOR DUCT
Removal
1. Remove the instrument panel trim. 2. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. 3. Remove
the RH or LH ventilator duct.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CENTER VENTILATOR DUCT
Removal
1. Remove the instrument panel trim. 2. Remove the heater and cooling unit assembly. 3. Remove
the defroster nozzle. 4. Remove the RH and LH side demister ducts. 5. Remove the RH and LH
ventilator ducts.
Page 14023
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 1114
Page 6785
20. The screen in Figure 9 is displayed during data transfer.
CAUTION: During data transfer:
^ DO NOT disturb the VI, DDL, or USB connections.
^ DO NOT try to start the engine or turn the ignition OFF.
^ The engine fans may turn on. This is normal.
NOTE:
^ If "Transfer To VI" reaches 100%, and "Transfer To ECU" does not start, or
^ The Error in Figure 9A displays.
a. DO NOT replace the ECM. The ECM is not damaged.
b. Check / make sure the battery voltage is above 12 V and all vehicle electrical loads are turned
OFF (see step 3 and 4).
c. Select Cancel Data Transmission, then click on the "Home" icon (upper left corner of C-III
screen) and re-start from the beginning (step 1).
Part 2
Page 9150
Once you have set the target position, DO NOT reset it at anytime during the alignment process.
6. Begin the alignment procedure.
^ Follow all of the instructions for your particular equipment.
^ Refer to the Service Manual for alignment specifications.
If your equipment requires "rolling compensation". follow these additional tips:
^ DO NOT push or pull on the vehicle body.
IMPORTANT:
After performing "rolling compensation", DO NOT reset the target position.
When performing "caster sweep". follow these tips:
Page 10041
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 10329
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 118
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 10503
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 12765
3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5):
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly.
a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap
in place.
^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down
(it should not move).
b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip.
^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib.
c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab.
d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6).
e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place.
Page 2242
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5859
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 3024
^ Tighten the camshaft bracket bolt to the specified torque.
^ Measure the inner diameter of the camshaft bracket. Standard: 26.000 - 26.021 mm (1.0236 1.0244 inch) Calculation of Camshaft Journal Clearance (Journal clearance) = (camshaft bracket
inner diameter) - (camshaft journal diameter) Standard: 0.030 - 0.068 mm (0.0012 - 0.0027 inch)
^ If measurement is not within specification, replace either or both camshaft and cylinder head.
NOTE: The inner diameter of the camshaft bracket is manufactured together with the cylinder
head. Replace the whole cylinder head as an assembly.
Camshaft End Play
^ Install dial gauge in the thrust direction on the front end of the camshaft. Measure the end play
when the camshaft is moved forward/backward (in direction to axis). Standard: 0.115 - 0.188 mm
(0.0045 - 0.0074 inch)
^ If measurement is out of the specified range, replace the camshaft and measure again.
^ If measurement is still out of the specified range, replace the cylinder head.
^ Measure the following parts if end play is outside the specified value. Dimension "A" for camshaft No. 1 journal Standard: 30.500 - 30.548 mm (1.2008 - 1.2027 inch)
- Dimension "B" for cylinder head No. 1 journal Standard: 30.360 - 30.385 mm (1.1953 - 1.1963
inch)
^ If measurements are not within specification, replace the camshaft and/or cylinder head.
Camshaft Sprocket Runout
Page 13981
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 8670
In both of these examples, the opening is larger than 2 mm (NG)
3. Any areas where you can see the wires inside the vinyl tube, measure the size of the opening.
^ OK; no opening in the vinyl tube or opening is 2 mm or smaller; replace the vinyl tube with the
corrugated tube - Update Kit.
^ NG; opening in the vinyl tube is larger than 2 mm: Replace the wire harness.
Update Kit Installation (Replace Vinyl Tube With Corrugated Tube)
1. Remove the body clip from the body (see Figure B1).
2. Remove the hinge rod clip from the hinge rod (see Figure B1).
3. Cut both clips off of the harness.
NOTE:
These clips will not be reused.
4. Remove the tape that is holding the door grommet to the vinyl tube (see Figure B1).
IMPORTANT:
Do not use a cutting tool to remove the tape. Remove it by hand so you won't damage the door
grommet.
Page 10853
Page 5114
Case 13
Case 14
Page 13635
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 8570
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Diagram Information and Instructions
Engine Control Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 4776
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 9164
^ Make sure the rear slide plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the slide plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
5. Make sure the lock pins for the front "turn plates" and rear "slide plates" are in place.
NOTE:
Lock pins should remain in place until caster sweep.
The Alignment Process
The Alignment Process
IMPORTANT:
Use only the alignment specifications listed in the appropriate Service Manual when adjusting the
alignment.
1. Make sure the vehicle is straight on the alignment rack.
^ Vehicle must be straight (in line) with the alignment rack before entering the rack as shown in
Figure 4.
^ Do not straighten the vehicle while on the rack (see Figure 5).
^ If the vehicle needs to be straightened, exit the alignment rack, straighten the vehicle and then
re-enter the rack.
^ Once the vehicle is straight on the rack, do not turn/center the steering wheel-keep the front
wheels straight.
Page 4464
Body Control Module: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11745
Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch RH Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Steps
2 - 4)
Page 13075
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 8788
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 3219
EM-1
Page 7268
^ While holding the flange yoke on one side, check axial play of the journal as shown. If the journal
axial play exceeds the specification, replace the propeller shaft assembly. Journal axial play: 0.02
mm (0.0008 inch) or less
^ Check the propeller shaft tube for bend and damage. If damage is detected, replace the propeller
shaft assembly.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
After installation, check for vibration by driving the vehicle.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the bolts and nuts. Always install new ones.
Disassembly and Assembly
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Model 2F1310
DISASSEMBLY
Journal
Page 394
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 4223
concentration cell (sensor cell) with an oxygen-pump cell, which transports ions. It has a heater in
the element.
The sensor is capable of precise measurement lambda = 1, but also in the lean and rich range.
Together with its control electronics, the sensor outputs a clear, continuous signal throughout a
wide lambda range (0.7 < lambda < air).
The exhaust gas components diffuse through the diffusion gap at the electrode of the oxygen pump
and Nernst concentration cell, where they are brought to thermodynamic balance.
An electronic circuit controls the pump current through the oxygen pump cell so that the
composition of the exhaust gas in the diffusion gap remains constant at lambda = 1. Therefore, the
A/F sensor 1 is able to indicate air/fuel ratio by this pumping of current. In addition, a heater is
integrated in the sensor to ensure the required operating temperature of 700 - 800 degrees C
(1,292 - 1,472 degrees F).
HO2S2
Component Description
The heated oxygen sensor 2, after three way catalyst (manifold), monitors the oxygen level in the
exhaust gas on each bank.
Even if switching characteristics of the air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 are shifted, the air-fuel ratio is
controlled to stoichiometric, by the signal from the heated oxygen sensor 2.
This sensor is made of ceramic zirconia. The zirconia generates voltage from approximately 1 V in
richer conditions to 0 V in leaner conditions.
Under normal conditions the heated oxygen sensor 2 is not used for engine control operation.
Page 3713
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Locations
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 9758
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 3590
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 3738
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 1619
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 8615
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 14089
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) (Steps 4 - 5)
Page 13571
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 837
ECM Inspection Table Part 9
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 10088
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 9543
4. Install the axle shaft bearing and cup on the axle shaft.
^ Prepare an installer tool from a steel tube measuring 762 mm (30 inch) long with an outside
diameter of 53.98 mm (2.125 inch) and an inside diameter of 41.28 mm (1.625 inch).
^ Press the axle shaft bearing and cup onto the axle shaft using a suitable press and the installer
tool, until a 0.038 mm (0.0015 inch) feeler gauge does not fit in between the axle shaft bearing cup
and seat.
CAUTION: Make sure the axle shaft bearing and cup, axle oil seal, and axle shaft bearing cage are
installed facing in the correct direction.
5. Install the bearing ring retainer onto the axle shaft.
^ Press the bearing ring retainer onto the axle shaft with a minimum force of 31,100 N (3172 kg,
6992 lbs.) until a 0.038 mm (0.0015 inch) feeler gauge does not fit between the bearing inner race
and the bearing ring retainer in at least one point.
6. Install the snap ring so it is fully seated into the groove on the axle shaft, using suitable snap ring
pliers. 7. Install the axle shaft assembly into the axle shaft housing. 8. Install the axle shaft bearing
cage lock washers and nuts. Tighten the axle shaft bearing cage nuts to specification. 9. Install the
parking brake assembly onto the back plate.
10. Install the rear brake rotor. 11. Install the rear ABS sensor.
Axle Bearing
Removal and Installation
The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 4222
Oxygen Sensor: Description and Operation
A/F SENSOR 1 HEATER
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM performs ON/OFF duty control of the A/F sensor 1 heater corresponding to the engine
operating condition to keep the temperature of A/F sensor 1 element at the specified range.
HO2S2 HEATER
Description
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The ECM performs ON/OFF control of the heated oxygen sensor 2 heater corresponding to the
engine speed, amount of intake air and engine coolant temperature.
OPERATION
A/F SENSOR 1
Component Description
The air fuel ratio (A/F) sensor 1 is a planar dual-cell limit current sensor. The sensor element of the
A/F sensor 1 is the combination of a Nernst
Page 355
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 13650
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 12257
Lifting Switch (Front) Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 12507
4. Touch "BUZZER" or "BCM".
5. Select "DATA MONITOR", "ACTIVE TEST" or "SELF-DIAG RESULTS".
Self-Diagnostic Results
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen. 2. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT
DIAG MODE" screen. 3. Self-diagnostic results are displayed.
Display Item List - Self-Diagnostic Results
Display Item List
NOTE: If "CAN communication [U1000]" is displayed, after printing the monitor item, go to "CAN
System". Refer to LAN-25, Information Bus. See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Information Bus
With Generic Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Without Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Page 1198
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 11556
NOTE:
Use the lower locating hole (see Figure 12).
17. Reinstall upper door latch grey cable clip into door (See Figure 12.
18. Reinstall handle release cable into upper door latch white cable clip.
Page 11065
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 232
Traction Control Module: Description and Operation
TCS CONTROL UNIT
Description
The malfunction information related to TCS is transferred through the CAN communication line
from "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" to ECM. Be sure to erase the malfunction
information such as DTC not only for "ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit)" but also for
ECM after TCS related repair.
Calibration of Decel G Sensor
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair Calibration of Decel G Sensor
Calibration of Decel G Sensor
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw
rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or
after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the decel G sensor before running vehicle.
NOTE: Calibration of decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position.
CAUTION: ^
The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle.
^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified
pressure value.
2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and
turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine).
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen
in this order.
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR",
"SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that
"DECEL G SEN" is
within ± 0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
Page 2217
Ignition Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 6731
CAUTION
4. Turn the ignition ON with the engine OFF.
^ The engine must be OFF (not running) during the reprogramming procedure.
^ For Hybrid vehicles, Make sure the dash warning lights are ON and the "READY" light is OFF.
^ Turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads such as exterior lights, interior lights, HVAC, blower, rear
defogger, audio, NAVI, seat heater, steering wheel
heater, etc.
CAUTION
5. Make sure the engine cooling fan(s) are not running.
If the cooling fans are running:
a. Turn the ignition OFF.
b. Wait for the engine to cool.
c. Turn the ignition ON (with engine OFF).
d. Make sure the engine cooling fans are not running.
6. Open / start ASIST on the C-III computer.
7. Select CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-III, and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress"
message to clear.
Page 934
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 12022
Figure 15
28. Check the gear box to mounting tab distance again (as you did in steps 20 and 21). Make sure
the distance has not changed (see Figure 15).
- If N/G, adjust.
Figure 16
29. Tighten/torque the Seat Track Mounting Tab Bolts that you installed in step 25 (see Figure 16).
- Bolt torque: 65-84 in-lb (7.3-9.4 Nm)
Figure 17
30. Reinstall screws to attach the side finishers and the front finisher (see Figure 17).
Page 12983
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Diagram Information and Instructions
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 8608
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 6999
Shift Cable: Adjustments
Adjustment of A/T Position
1. Loosen nut of control cable. 2. Place PNP switch and selector lever in "P" position. 3. After
pushing the control cable in the direction shown with a force of 9.8 Nm (1 kg-m, 2.2 ft. lbs.), release
it. This is in the natural state, tighten
control cable nut to specifications. Control cable nut: 14.5 Nm (1.5 kg-m, 11 ft. lbs.)
Page 11039
Page 5703
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 13409
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 13468
Ambient Light Sensor: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
OPTICAL SENSOR
Removal
1. Remove defroster grille. "INSTRUMENT PANEL ASSEMBLY"
2. Disconnect the connector. 3. Turn the optical sensor counterclockwise to remove it from
defroster grille.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 3094
Valve Clearance: Adjustments
Valve Clearance ADJUSTMENT
NOTE: ^
Perform adjustment depending on the selected head thickness of the valve lifter.
^ The specified valve lifter thickness is the dimension at normal temperatures. Ignore dimensional
differences caused by temperature. Use the specifications for hot engine condition to adjust.
1. Remove the camshaft. 2. Remove the valve lifters at the locations that are out of specification.
3. Measure the center thickness of the removed valve lifters using suitable tool. 4. Use the equation
below to calculate the valve lifter thickness for replacement.
^ Valve lifter thickness calculation: Thickness of replacement valve lifter = t1 + (C1 - C2) t1 =
Thickness of removed valve lifter C1 = Measured valve clearance C2 = Standard valve clearance:
^ Thickness of a new valve lifter can be identified by stamp marks on the reverse side (inside the
cylinder). Stamp mark N788 indicates 7.88 mm (0.3102 inch) in thickness.
^ Available thickness of valve lifter: 25 sizes with range 7.88 to 8.36 mm (0.3102 to 0.3291 inch) in
steps of 0.02 mm (0.0008 inch) (when manufactured at factory).
5. Install the selected valve lifter. 6. Install the camshaft. 7. Manually turn the crankshaft pulley a
few turns. 8. Make sure the valve clearances for a cold engine are within specifications by referring
to the specified values. 9. After completing the repair, check the valve clearances again with the
specifications for a warmed engine. Make sure the values are within
specifications.
Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises
Shackle: Customer Interest Suspension - Rear Leaf Spring Clicking Noises
Classification: RA09-006
Reference: NTB10-011
Date: January 20, 2010
TITAN; LEAF SPRING NOISE
APPLIED VEHICLE: 2004-2009 Titan (A60)
APPLIED VINS: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before 1N6(*)A0(***)9N 319522
APPLIED DATES: 2004-2008 All 2009 vehicles built before August 26, 2009
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A clicking noise is coming from one or both leaf springs.
ACTION: Inspect the anti-windup clip bolts and bushings.
^ If replacement is determined as necessary, use the parts listed in PARTS INFORMATION in this
bulletin.
^ For repair procedure, refer to SERVICE PROCEDURE in this bulletin.
^ Do not replace the leaf spring assembly when anti-windup bolt and bushing replacement will
resolve the incident, if it should occur.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Failed Part (PP) line claim using the claims coding shown.
PARTS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Page 4045
Page 364
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9838
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 5339
Differential Lock Control Unit Circuit Inspection
Display Control Unit Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
Display Control Unit Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 5201
Case 7
Page 6654
Page 4804
Page 10350
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 10885
Door Sensor/Switch (For Alarm): Testing and Inspection Door Switch Check (King Cab)
Door Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 1)
Page 6314
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Locations
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Locations
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 13865
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 7812
5. From the ASIST PC main menu screen, select CONSULT UTILITIES (see Figure 3).
Specifications
Page 5103
Case 2
Page 6782
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Component Locations
Engine Control Module: Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 9842
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 11372
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 4357
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 3206
Engine Oil: Testing and Inspection
Inspection OIL LEVEL
^ Before starting the engine make sure the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface, then check
the oil level. If the engine is already running, turn it off and allow 10 minutes before checking.
^ Check that the oil level is within the low (L) and high (H) range as indicated on the dipstick.
^ If the engine oil level is out of range, add oil as necessary.
OIL APPEARANCE
^ Check the engine oil for a white milky appearance or excessive contamination.
^ If the engine oil is milky, it is highly probable that it is contaminated with engine coolant. Repair
the broken parts.
Page 6227
3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5):
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly.
a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap
in place.
^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down
(it should not move).
b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip.
^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib.
c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab.
d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6).
e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place.
Page 3598
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 5961
3. Attach filter to bracket and filter hoses to fittings as shown.
Install Protector (2004 Armada ONLY)
1. Assemble the protector into the left rear wheelhouse as shown.
Page 6077
Non-adjustable accelerator pedal - total pedal applied stroke : 48 mm (1.89 in)
- Depress and release the accelerator pedal to check that it returns smoothly to the original
released position.
- Perform an electrical inspection of the accelerator pedal position sensor. Refer to EC-562, "DTC
P2138 APP SENSOR". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic
Trouble Code Tests and Associated Procedures/P Code Charts/P2138
CAUTION: When the harness connector of the accelerator pedal position sensor is disconnected,
perform "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". Refer to EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal
Released Position Learning". See: Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
Page 311
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 747
34. CAN diagnosis will run again. When it reaches 51% and the icons light, click on the
"Duplication Test" icon.
35. When the screen in Figure 18 appears, click on All Erase.
36. Click on Yes (see Figure 18).
37. Use the scroll bar to scroll down the page and make sure all DTCs are erased.
^ For any DTCs that do not erase: diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs.
^ Refer to the Service Manual as needed.
Reprogramming is finished. Continue with the Procedure below.
38. Close C-III, then turn the ignition OFF.
39. Make sure the throttle is released and your foot is NOT pressing either the brake or clutch
(M/T) pedal;
Page 3064
^ Install the main bearings to the cylinder block and main bearing cap, and tighten the main bearing
bolts to the specified torque.
CAUTION: Do not rotate crankshaft with plastigage installed.
^ Remove bearing cap and bearings. Measure plastigage width using the scale on the plastigage
bag.
NOTE: The procedure when the measured value exceeds the repair limit is the same as that
described in "Method of Measurement".
CRUSH HEIGHT OF MAIN BEARING
^ When the bearing cap is removed after being tightened to the specified torque with main bearings
installed, the tip end of the bearing must protrude. Standard: There must be crush height
^ If standard is not met, replace main bearings.
MAIN BEARING CAP BOLT DIAMETER
^ Check for bolts (M9 and M12) installed from lower side using the following procedure.
NOTE: ^
Side bolt (M10) is outside the target.
^ Figure shows M12 bolt.
^ Measure bolt diameter "d1" from tip of the bolt to dimension "a".
^ Measure bolt diameter "d2" from the dimension between tip of the bolt and dimension "b" as base
station to dimension "c".
NOTE: If a narrower part in the threads is determined by visual check, measure "d2" at that point.
^ Calculate the difference between "d1" and "d2". M9 bolt
Dimension "a": 9 mm (0.35 inch) Dimension "b": 15 mm (0.59 inch) Dimension "c": 20 mm (0.79
inch) Limit: 0.10 mm (0.0039 inch)
M12 bolt
Dimension "a": 12 mm (0.47 inch) Dimension "b": 55 mm (2.17 inch) Dimension "c": 20 mm (0.79
inch) Limit: 0.15 mm (0.0059 inch)
^ Replace applicable bolts if outside the limit.
Page 3809
^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay.
9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay.
^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without
causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals.
10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6).
11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs.
Page 476
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Transfer Case: Capacity Specifications
Transfer Case Fluid Capacity
................................................................................................................................................. 2.0 L
(2 1/8 qt., 1 3/4 Imp qt.)
Page 13210
Recommended tire inflating tools.
Aftermarket Tire Sealers
Aftermarket tire sealants and/or aerosol repair kits should not be used (refer to the vehicle's
Owner's Manual).
^ Some aftermarket tire sealers and/or aerosol repair kits contain chemicals and propellants that
can cause damage to TPMS sensors.
NOTE:
Damage caused by use of aftermarket tire sealants contrary to recommendations in the vehicle
Owner's Manual is not covered under the Nissan New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Page 1152
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 12925
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 4814
Page 432
Page 1936
Headlamp Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 4751
Page 13001
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 6542
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 2366
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 8985
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 882
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Component Locations
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 4075
ECM Inspection Table Part 9
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 1515
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 2559
Available Valve Lifter
Page 8888
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Locations
Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 11145
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9735
8. Use 2 new harness clips to attach the harness as shown in Figure 6.
^ P/N for new harness clips: 24225-79900
Page 14232
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 497
Normal status When BCM is not in sleep status, OUTPUT terminals (1-5) each turn ON-OFF every 10 ms.
Sleep status
- When BCM is in sleep mode, transistors of OUTPUT 1 and 5 stop the output, and BCM enters
low-current-consumption mode. OUTPUTS (2, 3, and 4) turn ON-OFF at 60 ms intervals, and
receives lighting switch input only.
CAN COMMUNICATION CONTROL
CAN communication allows a high rate of information through the two communication lines (CAN-L,
CAN-H) connecting the various control units in the system. Each control unit transmits/receives
data, but selectively reads required data only.
BCM STATUS CONTROL
BCM changes its status depending on the operation status in order to reduce power consumption.
1. CAN communication status
- With ignition switch ON, CAN communicates with other control units normally.
- Control by BCM is being operated properly.
- When ignition switch is OFF, switching to sleep mode is possible.
- Even when ignition switch is OFF, if CAN communication with IPDM E/R and combination meter
is active, CAN communication status is active.
2. Sleep transient status
- This status shuts down CAN communication when ignition switch is turned OFF.
- It transmits sleep request signal to IPDM E/R and combination meter.
- Two seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches to
inactive status.
3. CAN communication inactive status
- With ignition switch OFF, CAN communication is not active.
- With ignition switch OFF, control performed only by BCM is active.
- Three seconds after CAN communication of all control units stops, CAN communication switches
to inactive status.
4. Sleep status
- BCM is activated with low current consumption mode.
- CAN communication is not active.
- When CAN communication operation is detected, it switches to CAN communication status.
Page 10592
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 8007
Image Symbols
Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor
WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the
hazard of airborne particles or other materials.
CAUTION: While removing cylinder body never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
- It is not necessary to remove bolts on torque member and brake hose except for disassembly or
replacement of cylinder body. In this case, hang cylinder body with a wire so as not to stretch brake
hose.
- Do not damage piston boot.
- Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or if a soft
pedal occurs at very low mileage.
REMOVAL
1. Remove tires from vehicle using power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid as necessary.
NOTE: Do not remove union bolt unless removing cylinder body from vehicle.
3. Remove union bolt as necessary and torque member bolts, then remove cylinder body.
NOTE: Position cylinder body aside using suitable wire, as necessary.
NOTE: When servicing cylinder body, remove sliding pin bolts and caliper from torque member.
4. Remove disc rotor.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid.
- Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Install disc rotor. 2. Install sliding pin bolts if removed and tighten to specified torque. Refer to
BR-24, "Components".
Page 4595
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 1392
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 1013
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 11325
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12979
Optional Splice
Page 3538
9. Remove A/T oil cooler bolts and oil cooler from radiator and position aside.
10. Lift up and remove the radiator.
CAUTION: Do not damage or scratch air conditioner condenser and radiator core when removing.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
^ Check for leaks of engine coolant.
^ Start and warm up the engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant and A/T fluid.
Page 7821
2. Check the CONSULT-II's "Charger Input" reading (see Figure 15).
NOTE:
^ "Battery Voltage" is the voltage level of CONSULT-II's battery.
^ "Charger Input" is the voltage level of the vehicle's battery. (It MUST be above 12 volts.)
3. As mentioned, the "Charger Input" reading MUST be above 12 volts (see Figure 15).
^ A reading above 12 volts confirms;
a. The DLC-II is properly connected to the vehicle,
b. The vehicle battery voltage is sufficient for ABS/VDC reprogramming, and
c. CONSULT-II has a sufficient power supply to perform ABS/VDC reprogramming.
^ If the vehicle's battery voltage ("Charger Input") is below 12 volts, one or more of the following
may be the cause:
a. The battery charger you hooked up in section 1 is not charging the battery (poor connection or it
is not working).
b. The DLC-II does not have a good connection to the vehicle (not straight).
c. The DLC-II cable may have a malfunction (damaged wire or pins).
d. The CONSULT-II Converter (J44200-50 / black box) is not working correctly (see Figure 11).
CAUTION:
^ Do not attempt ABS/VDC reprogramming if the vehicle's battery voltage is below 12 volts.
^ Permanent ABSNDC damage can occur if the vehicle battery does not maintain the minimum
voltage during ABS/VDC reprogramming.
^ If "Charger Input" is above 12 volts, power from the vehicle battery will keep CONSULT-II's power
supply at the correct level during reprogramming (see Figure 15).
4. Continue with Section 4.
Section 4
Section 4: Perform ABSNDC Control Unit Reprogramming
1. Press [BACK] two times.
Page 1898
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab)
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Step 3)
Page 3326
8. Remove access cover
9. Loosen the crankshaft pulley bolts using Tool to secure the crankshaft.
Tool number: ( - ) J47245
a. Remove the crankshaft pulley from the crankshaft using suitable tool.
- Set the bolts in the two bolt holes [M6 x 1.0 mm (0.04 in)] on the front surface.
NOTE: The dimension between the centers of the two bolt holes is 61 mm (2.40 in).
10. Remove the front cover.
a. Loosen and remove the bolts in the reverse of order as shown.
b. Cut the liquid gasket and remove the covers using Tool.
Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228)
CAUTION: Do not damage mating surfaces.
11. Remove the front oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Do not damage front cover.
Page 5318
Check Sheet Part 2
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Body Control Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
CONSULT-II Inspection Procedure
CONSULT-II INSPECTION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Data
Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Schematic
4. Select item to be diagnosed on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
Page 1726
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 7490
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Clean off the bolt area(s) where oil has leaked out.
2. Torque all three bearing retainer bolts (see picture below):
^ 19.6 - 23.5 Nm (1.2 - 2.4 Kg-m, 14.5 - 17.3 ft-lb).
^ If any of the bolts are missing, replace the transfer case assembly.
CAUTION:
Do NOT remove any of the bolts. Bearing damage may occur.
3. Add Nissan Matic "D" ATF to the transfer case as needed.
Page 5574
7. Test drive and re-check for DTCs.
Disclaimer
Page 11919
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 10045
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 14389
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 1139
Optional Splice
Page 1089
Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 13979
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 4530
6. Touch "A60" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on
"VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See:
Application and ID
7. Touch "WRITE CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen.
8. Touch "YES".
For canceling, touch "NO".
9. Set by touching selection on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen based on the following ITEM
LIST.
Do not apply MODE3 or MODE4.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See:
Application and ID
10. Touch "CHNG SETTING" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
CAUTION: Make sure to touch "CHNG SETTING" even if the indicated configuration of new BCM
is same as the desirable configuration. If
Page 12212
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 3)
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (King Cab) (Step 4)
Page 3930
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Page 12880
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Page 4712
a. Make a list of ground terminals for your vehicle. Refer to the appropriate Service Manual, section
EC (Power Supply and Ground Circuits).
NOTE:
This is an example only. Your vehicle may be different.
b. Take your list and go to section PG in the appropriate Service Manual. You'll be able to identify
the exact location of the ECM ground terminals you'll need to check.
C. Now go to the ground terminal(s) on the vehicle and remove the nut or bolt that holds the
terminal eyelet(s).
d. Clean the following surfaces on each ECM ground terminal. This will ensure good contact in the
connections.
^ Both sides of the eyelet
^ Eyelet mounting surface
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Nut/bolt threads.
Page 5136
Case 5
Page 8877
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay
Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 10-137B Date: 101222
Recall PC068 - Engine Control Module Relay Replacement
Reference: NTB10-137B
Date: December 22, 2010
VOLUNTARY SAFETY RECALL CAMPAIGN 2004-2006 ARMADA AND TITAN 2005-2006
FRONTIER, PATHFINDER AND XTERRA ECM RELAY
This bulletin has been amended. The SERVICE PROCEDURE and CLAIMS INFORMATION have
been revised. A Repair Overview has been added. Please discard previous versions of this bulletin.
CAMPAIGN ID#: PC068
NHTSA#: 10V-517
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2006 Armada (TA60) 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2005-2006 Frontier (D40)
2005-2006 Xterra (N50) 2005-2006 Pathfinder (R51)
Check Service COMM to confirm campaign eligibility.
INTRODUCTION
Nissan is conducting a voluntary safety recall campaign on Applied Vehicles to replace an ECM
relay with a new one at no charge for parts or labor. On some of the potentially affected vehicles,
oxidation on the electrical contacts in the relay may lead to engine performance issues, including
the possibility of stalling at low engine speeds.
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Nissan has assigned identification number PC068 to this campaign. This number must appear on
all communications and documentation of any nature dealing with this campaign.
DEALER RESPONSIBILITY
It is the dealer's responsibility to check Service Comm for the campaign status on each vehicle
falling within the range of this voluntary safety recall which for any reason enters the service
department. This includes vehicles purchased from private parties or presented by transient
(tourist) owners and vehicles in a dealer's inventory. Federal law requires that new vehicles in
dealer inventory which are the subject of a safety recall must be corrected prior to sale. Failure to
do so can result in civil penalties by the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. While
federal law applies only to new vehicles, Nissan strongly encourages dealers to correct any used
vehicles in their inventory before they are retailed.
Page 3536
Radiator: Service and Repair
RADIATOR
Image Symbols
WARNING: Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could occur from
high-pressure engine coolant escaping from the radiator.
Page 5062
Case 2
Page 14450
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 7567
Components
REMOVAL
1. Switch 4WD shift switch to 2WD and set transfer assembly to 2WD. 2. Disconnect transfer
control device harness connector. 3. Remove breather hose from transfer control device.
Page 12513
Key Warning Chime And Light Warning Chime Do Not Operate (Seat Belt Warning Chime Does
Operate) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 5060
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
Page 7954
Brake Pad: Testing and Inspection Rear
On-vehicle Inspection PAD WEAR INSPECTION
- Inspect the thickness of pad through cylinder body inspection hole. Use a scale for inspection if
necessary. Standard thickness: 12.13 mm (0.478 inch) Repair limit thickness: 1.0 mm (0.039 inch)
ABS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 1272
Power Door Lock Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Door Lock System
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 11717
Page 4512
BCM (Body Control Module) Schematic (Part 2)
Page 3725
Page 12436
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 10361
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 7518
Components
Replacement
DRAINING 1. Stop engine. 2. Remove the drain plug and gasket. Drain the fluid.
Page 5479
^ Use the guide plate to center the tool over the relay.
9. Press down on top of Special Tool J-50389 while lifting the extraction side bars (see Figure 5).
IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure to use Special Tool J-50389 to extract the relay.
^ Using Special Tool J-50389 will ensure the relay is extracted straight up from the IPDM without
causing damage to the IPDM female relay terminals.
10. Lift Special Tool J-50389 away from the IPDM (see Figure 6).
11. Make the old relay unusable by bending the connector prongs.
Page 12055
- Rear View Monitor Predicted Course Line Center Position Adjustment
NOTE:
You may need to inform the customer that their Automatic Drive Position will need to be reset.
Disclaimer
Page 14267
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 9853
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
In-vehicle Sensor Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
In-vehicle Sensor
The in-vehicle sensor is located on cluster lid D. It converts variations in temperature of passenger
compartment air (drawn in through the integrated fan) into a resistance value. It is then input into
the front air control.
Page 13936
Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Crew
Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Electronic Brake Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic
Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Page 8445
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 8410
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp: Description and Operation
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)
DESCRIPTION
The MIL is located on the instrument panel.
1. The MIL will light up when the ignition switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is a
bulb check. If the MIL does not light up, refer to
"WARNING LAMPS", or see "MIL AND DATA LINK CONNECTOR".
2. When the engine is started, the MIL should go off. If the MIL remains on, the on board diagnostic
system has detected an engine system
malfunction.
Page 11230
Navigation Module: Service and Repair
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
Removal
CAUTION: To avoid damage, eject map DVD-ROM before removing the NAVI control unit.
1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove front passenger seat.
3. Remove NAVI control unit kick shield screws (A). 4. Remove NAVI control unit kick shield (1). 5.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connectors. 6. Remove NAVI control unit screws (B). 7. Remove
NAVI control unit (2).
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 7110
2. Install differential lock position switch on axle housing and tighten differential lock position switch
bolts with the specified torque. Refer to
"COMPONENTS".
3. Install side bearing adjusters into axle housing.
4. Apply gear oil to side bearings. Install differential case assembly with side bearing outer races
into axle housing. 5. Apply multi-purpose grease to differential lock position connector.
CAUTION: Do not reuse sensor connector.
6. Connect differential lock solenoid harness (B) and differential lock position switch connector (A).
Then install it to axle housing, tighten to the
specified torque. Refer to "COMPONENTS".
Page 10802
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 12225
Mirror Sensor RH Circuit Check (Step 4)
Page 13925
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) (Steps 4 - 5)
Component Locations
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
VDC/TCS/ABS
Component Parts and Harness Connector Location
Page 6989
Shifter A/T: Testing and Inspection
Checking of A/T Position
NOTE: Following procedure will cover both column and floor shift selector levers.
1. Place selector lever in "P" position, and turn ignition switch ON (engine stop). 2. Make sure
selector lever can be shifted to other than "P" position when brake pedal is depressed. Also make
sure selector lever can be shifted from
"P" position only when brake pedal is depressed.
3. Move the selector lever and check for excessive effort, sticking, noise or rattle. 4. Confirm the
selector lever stops at each position with the feel of engagement when it is moved through all the
positions. Check whether or not the
actual position the selector lever is in matches the position shown by the shift position indicator and
the transmission body
5. The method of operating the lever to individual positions correctly should be as shown in the
figure. 6. Confirm the back-up lamps illuminate only when lever is placed in the "R" position.
Confirm the back-up lamps does not illuminate when selector
lever is pushed against "R" position in the "P" or "N" position.
7. Confirm the engine can only be started with the selector lever in the "P" and "N" positions. 8.
Make sure transmission is locked completely in "P" position.
Page 6124
Submit a Primary part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding table shown.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect a fuel pressure gauge to the engine (special tool kit J-44321 or equivalent).
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pressure Check" in Section EC of the Service Manual for
connecting the fuel pressure gauge.
2. Look at the fuel pressure while performing a transmission "Stall Test".
^ The Stall Test 10 minute warm up is not needed for this Service Procedure.
^ Follow all other instructions for performing the Stall Test under "Inspections Before Trouble
Diagnosis" in Section AT of the Service Manual.
CAUTION:
Do not hold down the accelerator pedal for more than 5 seconds while performing the Stall Test.
^ Fuel pressure is NG if it drops below 45 psi during the Stall Test.
> If the fuel pressure is OK, this bulletin does not apply. Return to ASIST for further diagnosis and
repair information.
> If the fuel pressure is NG, go to step 3.
3. Replace the fuel pump.
^ Follow all instructions under "Fuel Pump Assembly, Removal and Installation" in section FL of the
appropriate Service Manual.
^ Use the fuel pump listed in the Parts Information.
^ Make sure to use a new fuel pump O-ring seal.
4. Test drive the vehicle; make sure the incident is fixed.
Page 8342
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 6854
Optional Splice
Page 1797
Brake Light Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 8527
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4698
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Testing and Inspection
Circuit Breaker: Testing and Inspection
Circuit Breaker (Built Into BCM)
For example, when current is 30 A, the circuit is broken within 8 to 20 seconds.
A circuit breaker is used for the following systems:
- Power windows
- Power door locks
- Remote keyless entry system
- Power sunroof
- Rear window wiper
Page 10392
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 12132
Optional Splice
Page 2172
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 10331
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 886
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Service and Repair
Fuel Pressure Release: Service and Repair
FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE
With CONSULT-II
1. Turn ignition switch ON.
2. Perform "FUEL PRESSURE RELEASE" in "WORK SUPPORT" mode with CONSULT-II. 3. Start
engine. 4. After engine stalls, crank it two or three times to release all fuel pressure. 5. Turn ignition
switch OFF.
Without CONSULT-II
1. Remove fuel pump fuse located in IPDM E/R. 2. Start engine. 3. After engine stalls, crank it two
or three times to release all fuel pressure. 4. Turn ignition switch OFF. 5. Reinstall fuel pump fuse
after servicing fuel system.
Page 6492
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 6539
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 1929
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 6005
Canister Vent Valve: Service and Repair
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
1. Turn EVAP canister vent control valve counterclockwise. 2. Remove the EVAP canister vent
control valve.
Always replace O-ring with a new one.
Page 4976
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 5664
Page 139
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 10859
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 2826
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 10515
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 7 - 9)
Locations
Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Page 9639
Diagnostic Procedure For Defroster Door Motor (Steps 24 - 25)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR DEFROSTER DOOR MOTOR
Page 5438
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 11357
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 3613
Temperature Gauge: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 303
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 1742
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 12086
Sliding Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 9039
1. Turn the ignition ON and observe the air bag warning light:
^ Light comes on for 7 seconds and then goes out: OK, go to Inspection Procedure 3.
^ Light stays ON or blinks: NG, go to next step (step 2).
^ Light does not come on at all: The warning light is not working correctly. This condition is not
covered by this campaign. Use the Service Manual and standard warranty procedures to repair the
warning light before proceeding.
2. Connect CONSULT-II to the vehicle and retrieve DTCs
Inspection Procedure 3 (Inspect Wire Harness at Rear Door Hinge)
1. Open the rear door and locate the harness in the door hinge area.
2. Inspect the wire harness vinyl tube:
^ Inspect the entire visible area. Look for worn areas, tears, and/or slits.
Page 4984
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5583
5. Release the tabs on the sides of the IPDM and lift it out of the box.
6. Position the IPDM as shown in Figure 3.
NOTE:
There are 2 rows of relays, a row of 4 and a row of 5. Position the IPDM so the row of 4 relays is
easily accessible.
7. Locate the ECM relay (see Figure 3).
8. Place Special Tool J-50389 over the ECM relay (see Figure 4).
Page 5212
Case 1
Page 12854
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7840
Electronic Brake Control Module: Service and Repair
ACTUATOR AND ELECTRIC UNIT (ASSEMBLY)
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the battery negative terminal. 2. Remove the cowl top extension. 3. Drain the brake
fluid. 4. Disconnect the actuator harness connector from the ABS actuator and electric unit (control
unit).
CAUTION: ^
To remove the brake tubes, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench to prevent the flare nuts
and brake tubes from being damaged.
^ Be careful not to splash brake fluid on painted areas; it may cause paint damage. If brake fluid is
splashed on painted areas, wash it away with water immediately.
5. Disconnect the brake tubes. 6. Remove the three bolts and remove the ABS actuator and
electric unit (control unit).
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE: To install, use a flare nut crowfoot and torque wrench. Tighten brake tubes to specification
when installing.
^ After installation of the ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), refill the brake system with
new brake fluid. Then bleed the air from the system.
Page 3453
Page 4205
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3324
Page 4508
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Specifications
Crankshaft: Specifications
CRANKSHAFT END PLAY
^ Move the crankshaft fully forward and backward and measure the clearance between the thrust
bearings and crankshaft arm using suitable tool. Standard: 0.10 - 0.26 mm (0.0039 - 0.0102 inch)
Limit: 0.30 mm (0.0118 inch)
^ If measured value exceeds the repair limit, replace the thrust bearings, and measure again. If it
still exceeds the repair limit, replace crankshaft also.
CRANKSHAFT JOURNAL DIAMETER
^ Measure diameter of crankshaft journals. Standard: 63.940 - 63.964 mm (2.5173 - 2.5183 inch)
^ If measurement is out of standard, measure the main bearing oil clearance. Then use the
undersize bearing.
CRANKSHAFT PIN DIAMETER
^ Measure diameter of crankshaft pin using suitable tool. Standard: 53.956 - 53.974 mm (2.1243 2.1250 inch)
^ If measurement is out of standard, measure connecting rod bearing oil clearance. Then use
undersize bearing.
OUT-OF-ROUND AND TAPER OF CRANKSHAFT
^ Measure dimensions at four different points as shown on each journal and pin.
^ Out-of-roundness is indicated by the difference in dimension between "X" and "Y" at "A" and "B".
^ Taper is indicated by the difference in dimension between "A" and "B" at "X" and "Y". Limit
Out-of-round (Difference between "X" and "Y"): 0.002 mm (0.0001 inch) Taper (Difference between
"A" and "B"): 0.002 mm (0.0001 inch)
^ If measured value exceeds the standard, correct or replace crankshaft.
^ If corrected, measure the bearing oil clearance of the corrected journal or pin. Then select the
main bearing or connecting rod bearing.
CRANKSHAFT RUNOUT
Page 12857
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5273
Case 7
Page 5595
Page 2288
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 13532
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 8621
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Diagram Information and Instructions
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 18
Page 6307
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Locations
Seat Memory Switch: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 4040
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Locations
Throttle Position Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1880
Door Switch: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9178
> Significant difference in the amount of wear between any of the tires
> Any other tire irregularity or damage to any tire
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 5158
Case 11
Page 2130
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2071
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 10021
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 9581
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 9657
Diagnostic Procedure For Defroster Door Motor (Steps 6 - 9)
Page 5845
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 3965
Page 14260
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 13897
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 14080
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 10865
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 7041
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 8688
28. Remove the seatbelt retractor cover.
^ Use a plastic trim tool.
29. Carefully remove the D-ring bolt cover.
30. Remove the D-ring bolt.
Page 2011
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 11175
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 1784
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 3006
NOTE:
See Figure 6 above for an example of damaged caused by incorrect removal.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of ACTIONS (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Remove the bolts at the front of the cover:
CAUTION:
^ Do not pull up on the front of the cover.
^ If you pull up on the front of the cover, it will break the cover.
Page 3937
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 5857
Page 14479
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 5862
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 622
f. Enter the entire VIN using the keyboard. See Figure 13.
^ Use [CHNG] to switch between the letters and numbers keyboard screens.
g. Once the entire VIN is entered, select [ENTER] on the "Keyboard" screen. See Figure 14.
h. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen and enter the entire VIN again. See Figure 15.
^ You MUST enter the VIN a second time for confirmation purposes.
Page 4290
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3976
4. Select Engine
5. Select OK
6. Select Work Support
Page 14480
Wiper Relay: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 11604
Hood Latch: Adjustments
HOOD LOCK ADJUSTMENT
1. Remove the front grille. 2. Move the hood lock to the left or right so that striker center is vertically
aligned with hood lock center (when viewed from vehicle front).
3. Make sure the secondary latch is properly engaged with the secondary striker with hood's own
weight by dropping it from approx. 200 mm (7.87
in) height or by pressing it lightly approx. 3 kg (29 N, 7lb).
CAUTION: Do not drop the hood from 300 mm (11.81 in) height or higher.
4. After adjusting hood lock, tighten the lock bolts to the specified torque. 5. Install the front grille.
Page 1441
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 14095
Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Crew
Cab) (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 12812
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to "General
Precautions".
1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank.
Locations
Shift Interlock Control Module: Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 1510
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 10310
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 9092
c. Remove 2 cup holder mounting bolts.
^ Left side is shown, right side not shown
b. Remove the cup holder from the vehicle.
8. If equipped with front bucket seats (shifter is in the center console); remove the center console:
a. Remove 2 screws from the bottom of the glove box assembly.
b. Remove 4 screws at the top of the glove box assembly, then
c. Remove the glove box assembly.
Page 1662
Door Switch: Testing and Inspection Power Window System
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Page 14403
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 7612
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 6558
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 369
Optional Splice
Page 1928
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 1202
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT
DTC's Set
Classification: EM06-005a
Reference: NTB06-079a
Date: January 24, 2008
DTC FOR VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL FUNCTION
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been expanded. No other
changes have been made. Please discard any other copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1996 - 2009 with Variable Valve Timing
APPLIED ENGINES: VQ35; QR25; QG1B; GA16; VQ40; VK56; MR18; MR20
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The MIL is on with any of the following DTCs stored:
^ P0011, P0014, P0021, P0024, P1110, P1135,
NOTE:
The engine may also have Camshaft Sprocket rattle noise and/or other engine noise.
ACTION
Do Not replace the variable valve timing Solenoid Valve or the Sprocket(s) without performing the
complete diagnostics indicated in the EC section of the Service Manual.
The first steps in the complete diagnostic are to make sure the:
^ Engine oil is at the operating level; add oil if needed. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil level
diagnoses if needed.
^ Oil pressure is normal when measured with a gauge at the pressure switch port. Refer to the
Service Manual for low oil pressure diagnoses if needed.
Disclaimer
Page 577
Attachment General Procedure
Page 4694
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Page 6761
Locations
Number One Cylinder: Locations
Firing Order
1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
#1 cylinder
Description and Operation
Fuel Temperature Sensor: Description and Operation
FTT SENSOR
Component Description
The fuel tank temperature sensor is used to detect the fuel temperature inside the fuel tank. The
sensor modifies a voltage signal from the ECM. The modified signal returns to the ECM as the fuel
temperature input. The sensor uses a thermistor which is sensitive to the change in temperature.
The electrical resistance of the thermistor decreases as temperature increases.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECM's transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
Page 3388
Spark Plug: Application and ID
SPARK PLUG
Standard type ......................................................................................................................................
............................................................... PLFR5A-11 Hot type ...........................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
PLFR4A-11 Cold type ..........................................................................................................................
................................................................................. PLFR6A-11
Gap ......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................1.1 mm (0.043 in.)
Torque .................................................................................................................................................
.............................. 24.5 Nm (2.5 kgf-cm, 18 ft. lbs.)
Page 6455
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Description
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the A/T assembly facing the gear teeth (cogs)
of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to
change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM
receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 9295
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9936
Figure D-11
9. Press and smooth all parts of protector 3. Make sure it is completely stuck to the fan motor.
- Pay special attention to the area shown in Figure D-11. Make sure there is good adhesion in this
area.
NOTE:
The large support ribs on the fan shroud are labeled 1 o'clock, 5 o'clock, 7 o'clock, and 11 o'clock
for reference when installing parts on to the fan shroud.
10. Thoroughly clean all dirt and debris from the fan shroud between the 1 o'clock and 5 o'clock
ribs (see Figure D-12).
- Use a locally approved brake cleaner and a clean rag.
11. Install Protector 4 on the fan shroud.
a. Remove 1 of the 4 sections from protector 4 adhesive backing.
b. Stick the 1st section next to the 5 o'clock support rib.
Page 197
e. Read the "CAUTION" screen carefully (see Figure 7). Then click "Okay".
8. Prepare CONSULT-II as follows (see Figure 8):
a. Make sure:
^ CONSULT-II is OFF.
^ The 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card is inserted into CONSULT-II.
^ The A/C Power Adapter is securely connected to CONSULT-II.
^ The Ethernet Cable is securely connected to CONSULT-II and the PC port.
b. Turn CONSULT-II ON.
c. Select "Transfer Files via LAN".
NOTE:
If you accidentally choose a menu option other than "Transfer Files via LAN" turn CONSULT-II
OFF, and then back ON as shown in Figure 8.
d. Set the CONSULT-II unit down for now and go to your ASIST PC.
Page 12999
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 8305
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 7210
Submit a Campaign (CM) line claim using ONLY ONE of the operations shown.
Disclaimer
Page 13070
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 13973
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 3935
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 11160
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 217
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 8972
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 11807
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 10257
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 13550
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 10712
2. Remove the seat belt retractor anchor bolts and assembly.
- On RH side, disconnect the seat belt tension sensor.
3. Disconnect the seat belt pre-tensioner electrical connector.
Installation - Crew Cab
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Install the seat belt retractor upper bolt first.
- Make sure seat belt height adjuster is locked in the lowest position during installation.
Page 929
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 8368
Neutral Safety Switch: Description and Operation
PNP SWITCH
Component Description
When the gear position is P or N, park/neutral position (PNP) switch is ON. TCM detects the
position because the continuity of the line (the ON signal) exists. Then the TCM sends the PNP
switch signal to the ECM via combination meter.
Page 399
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Brakes - Brake/ABS Lamp ON/Pedal Vibration/DTC C1179
Technical Service Bulletin # 06-040 Date: 060512
Brakes - Brake/ABS Lamp ON/Pedal Vibration/DTC C1179
Classification: BR06-007
Reference: NTB06-040
Date: May 12, 2006
2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; ABS AND/OR BRAKE
WARNING LIGHT ON WITH DTC C1179
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2006 Titan (A60) equipped with VDC 2004 - 2006 Armada (TA60)
equipped with VDC
IF YOU CONFIRM
A customer reports:
^ The brake warning light is or was ON, and/or
^ The ABS warning light is or was ON, and/or
^ There is or was vibration* in the brake pedal while braking.
* This vibration is the rapid consistent-speed pedal pulsation that is felt when the ABS is activated.
ACTIONS
^ Make sure this bulletin applies (see Part 1 of the Service Procedure). If this bulletin does not
apply, refer to ASIST for further diagnostic information.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line claim using the claims coding shown.
Page 14452
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 14376
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 8524
Page 11834
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 6747
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
Install Filter Kit (2004-2006 Titan ONLY)
1. Assemble the hoses onto the filter as shown. Note position of yellow marks.
2. Position mounting bracket onto frame as shown, hooking bracket tab onto brake hose bracket.
Attach bracket to frame with the clamp supplied in the kit.
Page 2162
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 8969
Power Distribution Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 4161
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MAF SENSOR
Component Description
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by
measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows
around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to the hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of
the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
Page 10872
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 13275
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 2305
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 719
Page 10370
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 8389
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 6429
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 10642
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 1814
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 2055
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 13528
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 14
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 3093
^ Measure valve clearance using suitable tool.
CAUTION: If the inspection was carried out with a cold engine, make sure the values with a fully
warmed up engine are still within specifications.
11. Turn the crankshaft pulley clockwise 90° from the position of No. 3 cylinder compression TDC
(clockwise by 360° from the position of No. 1
cylinder compression TDC) to measure the intake and exhaust valve clearances of No. 6 cylinder
and the exhaust valve clearance of No. 2 cylinder.
12. If out of specifications, adjust as necessary.
Page 4706
40. Operate the ignition as shown in Figure 19.
NOTE:
For Hybrid vehicles, ignition ON = dash warning lights ON and the "READY" light OFF.
^ The above ignition cycle will reset ECM self learned Data.
41a. For Hybrid vehicles, skip to step 42.
41b. Start the engine and check the idle speed.
^ If idle speed is too low, perform Idle Air Volume Learning (IAVL). See the appropriate Service
Manual (ESM) for this procedure.
NOTE:
If the engine will not idle, hold the engine RPM at about 2000, then slowly bring it down to an idle.
IAVL can now be performed.
42. Test drive the vehicle; make sure it is operating correctly and the Check Engine light is OFF.
^ If the Check Engine light comes ON; diagnosis, repair, and erase DTCs.
Page 9179
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
Page 3368
7. Make sure that "CMPLT" is displayed on CONSULT-II screen. If "CMPLT" is not displayed, Idle
Air Volume Learning will not be carried out
successfully. In this case, find the cause of the incident by referring to the DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE.
8. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications.
Without CONSULT-II
NOTE:
- It is better to count the time accurately with a clock.
- It is impossible to switch the diagnostic mode when an accelerator pedal position sensor circuit
has a malfunction.
1. Perform EC-83, "Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
2. Perform EC-83, "Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning". See: Powertrain
Management/Computers and Control Systems/Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning/Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
3. Start engine and warm it up to normal operating temperature. 4. Check that all items listed under
the topic PREPARATION (previously mentioned) are in good order. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF
and wait at least 10 seconds. 6. Confirm that accelerator pedal is fully released, turn ignition switch
ON and wait 3 seconds. 7. Repeat the following procedure quickly five times within 5 seconds.
a. Fully depress the accelerator pedal. b. Fully release the accelerator pedal.
8. Wait 7 seconds, fully depress the accelerator pedal and keep it for approx. 20 seconds until the
MIL stops blinking and turned ON. 9. Fully release the accelerator pedal within 3 seconds after the
MIL turned ON.
10. Start engine and let it idle.
11. Wait 20 seconds.
12. Rev up the engine two or three times and make sure that idle speed and ignition timing are
within the specifications. 13. If idle speed and ignition timing are not within the specification, Idle Air
Volume Learning will not be carried out successfully. In this case, find
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 9565
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 14208
Page 2223
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 2070
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT DTC's Set
Variable Valve Timing Actuator: Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - MIL ON/Multiple VVT
DTC's Set
Classification: EM06-005a
Reference: NTB06-079a
Date: January 24, 2008
DTC FOR VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL FUNCTION
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles section has been expanded. No other
changes have been made. Please discard any other copies.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 1996 - 2009 with Variable Valve Timing
APPLIED ENGINES: VQ35; QR25; QG1B; GA16; VQ40; VK56; MR18; MR20
IF YOU CONFIRM:
The MIL is on with any of the following DTCs stored:
^ P0011, P0014, P0021, P0024, P1110, P1135,
NOTE:
The engine may also have Camshaft Sprocket rattle noise and/or other engine noise.
ACTION
Do Not replace the variable valve timing Solenoid Valve or the Sprocket(s) without performing the
complete diagnostics indicated in the EC section of the Service Manual.
The first steps in the complete diagnostic are to make sure the:
^ Engine oil is at the operating level; add oil if needed. Refer to the Service Manual for low oil level
diagnoses if needed.
^ Oil pressure is normal when measured with a gauge at the pressure switch port. Refer to the
Service Manual for low oil pressure diagnoses if needed.
Disclaimer
Page 11161
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 13593
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 2078
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 6963
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
Page 4969
Optional Splice
Page 10476
Optional Splice
Page 13735
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 5093
Case 7
Page 4792
Service Procedure
Check NATS On The Vehicle
1. Check to see if the vehicle you're working on has "ECM based" NATS V2.0 or V5.0.
a. If the vehicle has ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0, it will NOT start after you install a service
replacement ECM. So you'll have to re-register all ignition keys, including spare keys with
CONSULT-II and the purple NATS card. After you do this, proceed with step 2.
^ If you do not know how to re-register the keys, refer to the ESM for the NATS key re-registration
procedure.
b. If the vehicle has "BCM based" NATS (instead of ECM based NATS V2.0 or V5.0), you do NOT
have to re-register the ignition or spare keys. Proceed with step 2.
Check For ECM Data Updates in ASIST
2. In ASIST, select [CONSULT Utilities] >>> [ECM/TCM Data]. Then choose Model and Model
Year (see Figure 1).
3. Look for ECM Data Updates (listed by ECM P/Ns and vehicle configuration) in the top, center
display panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If there is not updates listed for your vehicle configuration, you do NOT have to reprogram the
service replacement ECM. Proceed with step 5.
b. If there is updates listed for your vehicle configuration, see if they apply to the service
replacement ECM you're going to install. Do this by performing step 4.
4. Select the "configuration" on the screen for the vehicle you're working on. Then confirm that your
ECM is listed in the "Replaces 23710-XXXXX, -XXXXX, etc" section in the lower, center "Details"
panel of the ASIST screen (see Figure 1).
a. If your ECM is listed in the "Details" panel, you must reprogram the ECM with the latest data
update. After you do this, proceed with step 5.
CAUTION:
The 1999-2000 Frontier and 1999-2000 Pathfinder have a gray CONSULT connector AND a white
GST connector. Do NOT attempt to perform the ECM Reprogramming procedure with CONSULT-II
connected to the gray CONSULT connector. See the appropriate ESM for further details if
necessary.
b. If your ECM is NOT listed in the "Details" panel, you do NOT have to reprogram the ECM.
Proceed with step 5.
Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning
5. Perform the Accelerator Pedal & Throttle Valve Closed Position Learning as follows:
a. Make sure the accelerator pedal is fully released.
b. Turn the ignition switch "ON" for 2 seconds.
c. Turn the ignition switch "OFF" for 10 seconds.
Page 481
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 1446
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 8892
Power Distribution Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 13036
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8332
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 1907
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Front Door Switch LH Circuit Inspection (King Cab) (Step 3)
Service and Repair
Sound Proofing / Insulation: Service and Repair
Foam Repair
During factory body assembly, foam insulators are installed in certain body panels and locations
around the vehicle. Use the following procedure(s) to replace any factory-installed foam insulators.
URETHANE FOAM APPLICATIONS
Use commercially available spray foam for sealant (foam material) repair of material used on
vehicle. Read instructions on product for fill procedures.
FILL PROCEDURES
1. Fill procedures after installation of service part.
- Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side.
- Clean area in which foam was removed.
- Install service part.
- Insert nozzle into hole near fill area and fill foam material or fill in enough to close gap with the
service part.
2. Fill procedures before installation of service part.
- Remove foam material remaining on vehicle side.
- Clean area in which foam was removed.
- Fill foam material on wheelhouse outer side.
NOTE: Fill in enough to close gap with service part while avoiding flange area.
- Install service part.
NOTE: Refer to label for information on working times.
Page 8470
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Restraints - Front Seat Belt Buckle Service Information
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-025 Date: 090325
Restraints - Front Seat Belt Buckle Service Information
Classification: BT09-007
Reference: NTB09-025
Date: March 25, 2009
FRONT SEAT BELT BUCKLE SERVICE
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2009 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The front seat belt buckle needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
Route the replacement buckle harness as shown in the SERVICE PROCEDURE below.
NOTE:
The routing of the replacement buckle wiring harness is different than the original.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
Service Procedure
FRONT LH BUCKLE REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
1. Write down all radio station presets.
2. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first).
^ Wait at least 3 minutes after battery cables are disconnected before disconnecting any SRS
components.
3. Remove LH front seat and place on a clean surface. Refer to the appropriate section in the ESM
for removal procedure.
Drivetrain - Rear Axle Oil Seals Leaking
Seals and Gaskets: Customer Interest Drivetrain - Rear Axle Oil Seals Leaking
Classification: RA09-005
Reference: NTB10-032
Date: February 26, 2010
2004-2008 TITAN; REAR AXLE SEAL LEAKS
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2008 Titan (A60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
The rear axle assembly is leaking gear oil from the right and/or left hand axle seal,
AND
No noise or vibration is coming from the rear final drive gears and side bearings.
ACTION
Install the new axle shaft assembly - which includes a new retainer, axle bearing, oil seal, bearing
cage, and ABS rotor - listed in the Parts Information table.
NOTE:
Do not replace the entire rear axle assembly for this incident, if it should occur.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 3849
8. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 1.)
9. Select Connect. (See Figure 1.)
10. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
11. Select ECM reprogramming / Programming (see Figure 2).
12. Select Select.
Page 4260
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 4052
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 6965
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
NOTE: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "Components". See: Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component
Parts)/Components
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
^ Assemble it so that manual valve cutout is engaged with manual plate projection.
Service and Repair
Front Door Window Glass: Service and Repair
FRONT DOOR GLASS AND REGULATOR
Removal and Installation
FRONT DOOR GLASS
Removal
1. Remove the front door speaker. 2. Remove the hole cover over rear glass bolt. 3. Operate the
power window main switch to raise/lower the door window until the glass bolts can be seen. 4.
Remove the inside seal. 5. Remove the glass bolts.
6. While holding the front door glass, raise it at the rear end and pull the glass out of the sash
toward the outside of the door.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Glass bolts : 6.1 N.m (0.62 kg-m, 54 in-lb)
Fitting Inspection
Page 3579
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 7659
9. Disconnect revolution sensor connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
10. Straighten terminal clips to free revolution sensor harness.
11. Remove bolts A, B and C from control valve with TCM.
12. Remove control valve with TCM from transmission case.
CAUTION: Be careful with the manual valve notch and manual plate height. Remove it vertically.
Page 10695
3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see
Figure 3).
^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information.
4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring.
^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt
NOTE:
^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring.
^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly.
Page 11195
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 10121
1. Use a 3/64 drill bit to slightly enlarge the holes shown in Figure 2.
^ These holes will be used to mount new harness clips for the new harness routing.
Page 7125
Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Rear Differential (With Electronic Locking)
Checking Final Drive Oil
Checking Final Drive Oil
COMPONENTS
NOTE: Rear final drive shown, front final drive similar.
Page 14377
Optional Splice
Body - Windshield Cracking Information
Windshield: Technical Service Bulletins Body - Windshield Cracking Information
Classification: BT09-052
Reference: NTB09-091
Date: August 25, 2009
WINDSHIELD CRACKING
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Models
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Purpose of this bulletin is to give Nissan dealers guidelines to help determine if windshield
breakage is covered under warranty or is the customer's responsibility. Nissan North America
(NNA) is not responsible for damage to glass that is a result of objects striking or scratching the
glass. However, NNA is responsible for manufacturing issues such as distorted glass and cracks
that are due to improper installation or damage to the glass during vehicle assembly. NNA typically
does not find any type of cracks in the windshield due to stress in vehicles with over 5000 miles.
Glass damage can be categorized in 3 general areas:
1. Cracks due to objects striking the glass.
2. Cracks due to scratch in glass surface.
3. Distortion or cracks due to manufacturing issues.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Part Return Process Reminder
Refer to WB/07-010: Nissan is announcing a new requirement in the process for parts return to
assist engineers in analyzing part issues. Dealers are now required to mark glass and other
components returned that have "visible issues" using a grease pencil or similar instrument to
highlight the area damaged.
1) How to determine if glass damage is due to objects striking the glass.
Cracks from objects striking the glass
Page 3063
Main bearing cap bolts in order of 1 to 10 ...........................................................................................
........................................................................ 40° Main bearing cap sub bolts in order of 11 to 20
..........................................................................................................................................................
30° Side bolts in order of 21 to 30
.............................................................................................................................................. 49 Nm
(5.0 kg-m, 36 ft. lbs.) Rotate crankshaft by hand after bolts are tightened. Check if it rotates
smoothly.
MAIN BEARING HOUSING INSIDE DIAMETER
^ Install the main bearing caps with the main bearings removed, and tighten the bolts to the
specified torque.
^ Measure inside diameter of main bearing housing. Standard: 68.944 - 68.968 mm (2.7143 2.7153 inch)
^ If out of the standard, replace cylinder block and main bearing caps as an assembly.
NOTE: These components must be replaced as a single unit, because they were processed
together.
MAIN BEARING OIL CLEARANCE
Method of Measurement
^ Install the main bearings to the cylinder block and main bearing cap. Measure the main bearing
inside diameter with the bearing cap bolts tightened to the specified torque. (Oil clearance) =
(Inside diameter of main bearing) - (Crankshaft journal diameter) Standard: No. 1 and 5 journals:
0.001 - 0.011 mm (0.00004 - 0.0004 inch) No. 2, 3 and 4 journals: 0.007 - 0.017 mm (0.0003 0.0007 inch) Limit: No.1 and 5 journals: 0.021 mm (0.0008 inch) No. 2, 3 and 4 journals: 0.027 mm
(0.0011 inch)
^ If measured value exceeds the repair limit, select main bearings referring to the main bearing
inside diameter and crankshaft journal diameter, so that the oil clearance satisfies the standard.
Method of Using Plastigage
^ Remove oil and dust on the crankshaft journal and surfaces of each bearing completely.
^ Cut a plastigage slightly shorter than the bearing width, and place it in crankshaft axial direction,
avoiding oil holes.
Page 6054
NOTE:
^ Low fuel pressure may cause DTCs to be detected. If you have DTCs with this incident; first
replace the fuel pump and then recheck the DTC diagnosis.
^ DTC diagnosis and repair is not covered by this TSB.
Disclaimer
Page 391
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 6755
3. Attach filter to bracket and filter hoses to fittings as shown.
Install Protector (2004 Armada ONLY)
1. Assemble the protector into the left rear wheelhouse as shown.
Page 11531
19. Connect latch switch connector (see Figure 13).
20. Reinstall latch switch connector onto door.
21. Reinstall gray anti-rattle foam.
22. Test upper door latch operation:
a. Use your thumb to push upper door latch into the closed position (see Figure 14).
Page 7603
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 13823
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking)
Fluid - Differential: Service and Repair Rear Differential (Without Electronic Locking)
Checking Final Drive Oil
Checking Final Drive Oil
COMPONENTS
NOTE: Rear final drive shown, front final drive similar.
Page 11804
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Engine - Revised Upper Oil Pan/Timing Cover Service
Timing Cover: Technical Service Bulletins Engine - Revised Upper Oil Pan/Timing Cover Service
Classification: EM10-011
Reference: NTB10-099
Date: August 19, 2010
ARMADA AND TITAN; REVISED UPPER OIL PAN AND TIMING CHAIN CASE PROCEDURES
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Armada (TA6O) 2004-2010Titan (A60)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Removal and installation procedures for the upper oil pan and timing chain case have been
updated to no longer require engine removal and installation.
Nissan Service Manuals for 2004-2010 Armada and Titan vehicles will be updated with these new
procedures. Updated Service Manuals will be distributed to the field as quickly as possible.
The standard Flat Rate Times will be adjusted to reflect the new procedures.
Until the updated Service Manuals are made available, please use the procedures shown below for
any upper oil pan and timing chain case-related repairs on an Applied Vehicle.
Page 9009
Power Distribution Relay: Description and Operation
Page 8126
a. CONSULT-II will display the screen shown in Figure 20.
You will need to turn the ignition OFF for at least one full second and then turn the ignition back
ON.
Then press "OK" on the CONSULT-II screen.
b. CONSULT-II will automatically print out a report (see Figure 21).
^ Attach the print-out report to the Repair Order for future reference.
7. Press [BACK] two times to return to the main menu.
8. Turn the ignition switch OFF and CONSULT-II OFF.
9. Continue with Section 5.
Section 5
Section 5: Again, perform a check of all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any newly
stored DTC(s).
1. Remove the 8 MB orange Reprogramming Card from CONSULT-II.
2. Install the red/white Diagnostic Card into Slot A (top slot) of CONSULT-II.
3. Turn the ignition switch ON (do not start the engine).
^ CONSULT-II will turn ON automatically.
^ Confirm that all electrical loads* (except for the ignition) are OFF.
Page 6350
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Service and Repair
AIR CLEANER AND AIR DUCT
REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine room cover using power tool. 2. Disconnect the harness connector from air
cleaner case (upper). 3. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly and air cleaner case. 4.
Remove air cleaner filter and air cleaner case (lower)
^ Add marks as necessary for easier installation.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Removal and Installation (Viscous paper type)
NOTE: ^
The viscous paper type filter does not need cleaning between replacement intervals.
^ Replace the air filter as necessary for periodic maintenance.
Page 11297
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 918
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 1708
c. Remove the Fuel Temperature Sensor from the Plastic Retaining Clip.
d. Remove the wires from the Securing Tab.
e. Unplug the White Wire Connector at the top of the fuel pump.
^ DO NOT disturb the Black Wire Connector located next to the white Wire connector.
f. Carefully cut the tie-wrap securing the harnesses to the corrugated tubing.
CAUTION:
DO NOT damage the wires or the wire insulation when cutting the Tie-Wrap.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 639
Page 13147
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 1669
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 1)
Page 9929
Figure C-22
b. Install 3 screws at the front of the fender protector.
- Driver side only.
Figure C-23, Figure C-24
c. Install and Torque 2 bolts at each of the 3 bumper brackets as shown (see Figures C-23 and
C-24).
Page 14178
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 8041
Brake Master Cylinder: Service and Repair Disassembly and Assembly
With ABS
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembly
CAUTION: ^
Master cylinder cannot be disassembled.
^ Remove reservoir tank only when absolutely necessary.
Pull reservoir tank off master cylinder sub-assembly, then remove grommets from master cylinder
sub-assembly body.
Assembly
CAUTION: ^
Never use mineral oil such as kerosene or gasoline during the cleaning and assembly process.
^ Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it.
1. Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to new grommets, then insert into master cylinder
sub-assembly.
CAUTION: Do not reuse grommet.
2. Install reservoir tank onto master cylinder assembly.
With ABLS or VDC
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY Disassembly
CAUTION: ^
Master cylinder cannot be disassembled.
^ Remove reservoir tank only when absolutely necessary.
1. Pull reservoir tank off master cylinder sub-assembly, then remove grommets from master
cylinder subassembly body. 2. Remove master cylinder front and rear pressure sensors.
Assembly
CAUTION: ^
Never use mineral oil such as kerosene or gasoline during the cleaning and assembly process.
^ Do not drop parts. If a part is dropped, do not use it.
1. Apply brake fluid or rubber grease to new grommets, then insert into master cylinder
sub-assembly.
CAUTION: Do not reuse grommet.
2. Install reservoir tank onto master cylinder assembly. 3. Install master cylinder front and rear
pressure sensors.
Page 7432
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - A/T: Capacity Specifications
Fluid Capacity ......................................................................................................................................
.......................... 10.6 L (11 1/4 US qt. 9 3/8 Imp qt)
Page 4427
Compression Check: Testing and Inspection
CHECKING COMPRESSION PRESSURE
1. Warm up the engine thoroughly. Then stop the engine. 2. Release the fuel pressure.
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is not used to release fuel pressure leave the fuel pump fuse
disconnected until step 7.
3. Remove the spark plug from each cylinder. 4. Connect the engine tachometer (not required in
use of CONSULT-II).
5. Install the compression tester with Tool into the spark plug hole.
Tool number: EG15050500 (J-45402)
6. With the accelerator pedal fully depressed, turn the ignition switch to "START" for cranking.
When the gauge pointer stabilizes, read the
compression pressure and engine rpm. Perform these steps to check each cylinder.
CAUTION: Always use a fully charged battery to obtain specified engine speed. ^
If the engine speed is out of the specified range, check the battery liquid for proper gravity. Check
the engine speed again with normal battery gravity.
^ If the compression pressure is below the minimum value, check the valve clearances and parts
associated with the combustion chamber (valve, valve seat, piston, piston ring, cylinder bore,
cylinder head, cylinder head gasket). After checking, measure the compression pressure again.
^ If some cylinders have low compression pressure, pour a small amount of engine oil into the
spark plug hole of the cylinder to re-check it for compression. If the added engine oil improves the compression, the piston rings may be worn out or damaged.
Check the piston rings and replace if necessary.
- If the compression pressure remains at a low level despite the addition of engine oil, the valves
may be malfunctioning. Check the valves for damage. Replace the valve or valve seat accordingly.
^ If two adjacent cylinders have respectively low compression pressure and their compression
remains low even after the addition of engine oil, the gaskets may be leaking, or a valve in adjacent
cylinders may be damaged. Inspect and repair as required.
7. Install the components in the reverse order of removal. 8. Start the engine and confirm that it
runs smoothly. 9. Perform trouble diagnosis. If DTC appears, erase it.
Page 11427
5. Remove clips from license lamps and remove lamps. 6. Release clips and remove upper step
pads. 7. Remove rear chrome bumper. 8. Disconnect harness clips from black steel bumper. 9.
Remove rear bumper reinforcement.
10. Remove sonar sensor retainers from rear chrome bumper, if equipped. 11. Remove sonar
sensors and harness from rear chrome bumper, if equipped.
- Disconnect sonar sensors from harness.
12. Remove license lamp harness from rear chrome bumper.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
- Apply sealant to clips securing upper step pad during installation.
Page 2303
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 2382
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 630
Page 12656
Door Switch Check (Step 1)
Page 5512
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 1993
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Cell Phone - Bluetooth(R) Initial Diagnosis
Technical Service Bulletin # 09-063 Date: 090727
Cell Phone - Bluetooth(R) Initial Diagnosis
Classification: EL09-019
Reference: NTB09-063
Date: July 27, 2009
BLUETOOTH(R) PHONE SYSTEM; INITIAL DIAGNOSIS
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan vehicles with factory equipped Bluetooth(R) phone system
SERVICE INFORMATION
If a vehicle comes to the dealer with a Bluetooth(R) phone system related concern, use this bulletin
for initial diagnosis.
^ This bulletin will help reduce unnecessary diagnosis and parts replacement. Refer to the
SERVICE PROCEDURE section below, and QUICK
REFERENCE.
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE
1. Make sure the customer's Bluetooth(R) related concern is understood.
a. Customer comment(s) _______________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________
2. Verify the customer's concern(s).
NOTE:
The customer's phone may be required, depending upon their concern(s).
3. Write down the customer's cell phone brand, model number, and service provider.
Brand (Motorola, Blackberry, etc.) _________________________________
Model (Razr, Pearl, etc.) _________________________________
Model Number (V3m, 8120, etc.) _________________________________
Service Provider (Verizon, Sprint, etc.) _________________________________
^ It is necessary to know the service provider. On occasion, a given phone may be on the approved
list with one provider, but may not be on the
approved list with other providers.
4. Go to www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth/.
a. Using the website's search engine, find out if the customer's phone is on the approved list.
b. Put the correct application in "Vehicle", "Year", "Equipped With" (as applicable), "Phone
Manufacturer", and then click on "Search".
c. If the phone is NOT on the approved list:
^ STOP YOUR DIAGNOSIS HERE.
^ Do NOT perform any further diagnosis for this incident.
^ Do NOT perform any repairs for this incident.
^ Do NOT replace any parts for this incident.
^ The customer needs to obtain a Bluetooth(R) phone that is on the approved list before any further
action.
d. IF the customer's phone is on the approved list, click on the picture of the phone.
Page 8912
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Diagram Information and Instructions
Combination Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 12235
9. Detach 2 harness clips as shown from seat cushion pan.
WARNING:
Before removal, make careful note of the exact routing and clip placement of the harnesses for
reassembly.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Transmission Position Switch/Sensor: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Service and Repair
Solar Sensor: Service and Repair
OPTICAL SENSOR
Removal and Installation
The optical sensor is located in the top center of the instrument panel.
Page 13112
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 11762
Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 3153
Auto tensioner Inspection (if equipped)
1. With the engine running at idle and the AC turned ON, observe the pulley angular (side to side)
movement (see Example 1):
^ See above table for maximum movement specification.
^ Visual comparison of movement with a known good vehicle is recommended.
Page 4448
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Description and Operation
MAF SENSOR
Component Description
The mass air flow sensor is placed in the stream of intake air. It measures the intake flow rate by
measuring a part of the entire intake flow. The mass air flow sensor controls the temperature of the
hot wire to a certain amount. The heat generated by the hot wire is reduced as the intake air flows
around it. The more air, the greater the heat loss.
Therefore, the electric current supplied to the hot wire is changed to maintain the temperature of
the hot wire as air flow increases. The ECM detects the air flow by means of this current change.
Page 11749
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 3)
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Step 4)
Page 1856
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 177
VERY IMPORTANT:
^ Make sure the DLC-II is pushed in straight and fully plugged in to the vehicle connector.
^ Make sure all other DLC-II cable connections (as shown in Figure 11) are connected properly.
CAUTION
^ Nissan requires the use of essential tools shown in Figure 11 when performing ABS/VDC
reprogramming.
^ J44200-1O "Pigtail" should not be removed from the CONSULT-II DDL Port. This "Pigtail" allows
use of the stronger "quick disconnect" cable set.
^ If cables are very often changed at the DDL Port (base) of the CONSULT-II unit, cable connector
pin damage may result.
^ If there is connector pin damage, ABS/VDC reprogramming may fail. Permanent damage to the
ABS/VDC system can occur.
4. Continue with Section 2
Section 2
Section 2: Check all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTCs.
CAUTION:
It is essential that you check all Systems in "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" and erase any DTCs before
performing the remaining sections of this procedure.
1. Remove the 8 MB orange card from CONSULT-II.
2. Install the 16 MB (red/white) Diagnostic Card into Slot A (top slot) of CONSULT-II (see Figure
12).
3. Press [START (Nissan BASED VHCL)]
4. In "SELF-DIAG RESULTS", check and erase any DTCs that are stored in the following vehicle
systems:
^ ENGINE
^ A/T
^ ABS
^ AIRBAG
^ ALL MODE AWD/4WD (if applicable)
^ DIFF LOCK (if applicable; 4WD Titan)
^ AIR LEVELIZER (if applicable)
Page 1891
Door Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 1735
Page 3913
Attachment General Procedure
Page 12733
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 12947
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 14061
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 13232
1. Remove rear combination lamp mounting bolts. 2. Pull rear combination lamp to remove from
the vehicle. 3. Disconnect rear combination lamp connector. 4. Installation is in the reverse order of
removal.
Rear combination lamp mounting bolts : 14.2 Nm (1.4 kg-m, 126 in-lb)
Page 3831
Page 14019
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8987
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 5190
Case 12
Page 5047
2. For the selected possible causes, it is expected that malfunctions have been found in the past.
With Generic Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Without Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Page 2046
Throttle Position Sensor: Description and Operation
TP SENSOR
Component Description
Electric throttle control actuator consists of throttle control motor, throttle position sensor, etc. The
throttle position sensor responds to the throttle valve movement.
The throttle position sensor has the two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers which
transform the throttle valve position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to the ECM. In
addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the throttle valve and feed the
voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the throttle valve from
these signals and the ECM controls the throttle control motor to make the throttle valve opening
angle properly in response to driving condition.
Page 13848
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 13372
NOTE:
^ The HID control unit includes a starter (xenon bulb socket). For some models, the starter is not
replaceable. In this case, replace only the HID control
unit using the old starter.
^ Torque specification for the screw that holds the starter to the HID control unit is:
^ 1.3 - 1.7 Nm (0.13 - 0.17 k-gm, 12 - 15 in-lb)
Page 12088
Reclining Switch Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Service and Repair
Air Bag(s) Arming and Disarming: Service and Repair
CAUTION:
- Before servicing the SRS, turn ignition switch OFF, disconnect both battery cables and wait at
least 3 minutes.
- After the work is completed, perform self-diagnosis to check that no malfunction is detected. Refer
to SRS-20, "SRS Operation Check". See: Powertrain Management/Computers and Control
Systems/Testing and Inspection/Diagnostic Trouble Code Tests and Associated
Procedures/Diagnostic Procedures/Air Bag System/Diagnostic Test Procedures
Page 5852
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Interior - Passenger Power Seat Switch Replacement
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-039B Date: 100119
Interior - Passenger Power Seat Switch Replacement
Classification: EL07-038B
Reference: NTB08-039B
Date: January 19, 2010
2004-2010 TITAN AND ARMADA; PASSENGER SEAT SWITCH SERVICEABILITY
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles and Service Procedure sections have been
revised. Please discard all previous copies of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004-2010 Titan (A60) - Bucket Seats Only 2004-2010 Armada (TA60) Bucket Seats Only
IF YOU CONFIRM
The passenger side power seat switch needs to be replaced for any reason.
ACTION
Refer to the Service Procedure to replace the switch.
WARNING:
^ This vehicle seat is equipped with the Occupant Classification System (OCS) part of the
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS).
^ In this Service Procedure you will be removing and re-installing the outboard (switch side) J-clip
of the seat bottom cover.
^ Only the outboard J-clip should be removed. Removal of any other J-Clips may affect OCS
performance.
^ When re-installing the outboard J-Clip, make sure the J-Clip is securely attached. A loose J-Clip
may affect OCS performance.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Service Procedure
Page 12958
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 6276
7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the
fuel feed hose.
Disconnect the quick connector as follows: Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube.
- If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to
move. Then disconnect them by pulling.
CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist
the quick connector more than necessary.
- Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector.
- Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube.
- Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube.
- Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection.
- Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin
tube or the retainer is replaced.
- When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a
new one (white colored retainer).
Changing A/T Fluid
Fluid - A/T: Service and Repair Changing A/T Fluid
Changing A/T Fluid
1. Drive the vehicle to warm up the ATF to 80°C (176°F). 2. Stop the engine. 3. Remove the ATF
level gauge bolt.
4. Drain the ATF from the drain plug hole and refill the transmission with new ATF. Always refill
with the same volume as the drained fluid and use
the dipstick to check the fluid level as shown. Add fluid as necessary. ^
To flush out the old fluid from the coolers, pour new fluid into the charging pipe with the engine
idling and at the same time drain the old fluid from the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return
line.
^ When the color of the fluid coming out of the auxiliary transmission oil cooler hose return line is
about the same as the color of the new fluid, flushing out the old fluid is complete. The amount of
new transmission fluid used for flushing should be 30% to 50% of the specified capacity For
Transmission fluid type and capacity, See: Specifications CAUTION: ^
Use only Genuine NISSAN ATF Matic Fluid J. Do not mix with other fluid.
^ Using automatic transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN ATF Matic Fluid J will cause
deterioration in driveability and automatic transmission durability, and may damage the automatic
transmission, which is not covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
^ When filling the transmission with fluid, do not spill the ATF on any heat generating parts such as
the exhaust manifold.
^ Do not reuse the drain plug gasket. Drain plug: Refer to "Components". See: Transmission and
Drivetrain/Automatic Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component
Parts)/Components
5. Drive the vehicle to warm up the ATF to 80°C (176°F). 6. Check the fluid level and condition. If
the fluid is still dirty, repeat steps 2 through 5. 7. Install the ATF level gauge in the fluid charging
pipe and install the level gauge bolt. 8. Tighten the level gauge bolt to specification.
Level gauge bolt: Refer to "Components". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components
Page 14042
Rear Power Drop Glass Down Relay Check (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 3265
^ Clean all gasket mating surfaces, do not reuse gaskets.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
^ Tighten the intake manifold bolts in numerical order as shown.
^ Install the EVAP canister purge control solenoid valve connector with it facing front of engine.
^ Tighten the electronic throttle control actuator bolts of the electric throttle control actuator equally
and diagonally in several steps.
^ After installation perform procedure in EM-20, "INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION".
^ Install the water hose so that its overlap width for connection is between 27 mm (1.06 inch) and
32 mm (1.26 inch) (target: 27 mm 1.06 inch).
Connecting Quick Connector of Fuel Tube
Install quick connector as follows (the steps are the same for quick connectors on both engine side
and vehicle side except for the quick connector cap). 1. Make sure no foreign substances are
deposited in and around tube and quick connector, and they are not damaged. 2. Thinly apply new
engine oil around the fuel tube from tip end to the spool end.
3. Align center to insert quick connector straight into fuel tube.
^ Insert until the paint mark for engagement identification (white) goes completely inside quick
connector so that you cannot see it from the straight side of the connected part. Use a mirror to
check this where it is not possible to view directly from the straight side, such as quick connector
on vehicle side.
^ Insert fuel tube into quick connector until top spool is completely inside quick connector, and 2nd
level spool exposes right below quick connector on engine side.
CAUTION: ^
Hold "A" position in illustration when inserting fuel tube into quick connector.
^ Carefully align center to avoid inclined insertion to prevent damage to O-ring inside quick
connector.
^ Insert until you hear a "click" sound and actually feel the engagement.
^ To avoid misidentification of engagement with a similar sound, be sure to perform the next step.
4. Pull quick connector by hand holding "A" position. Make sure it is completely engaged
(connected) so that it does not come out from fuel tube.
Page 921
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 13557
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 11157
Alarm Horn Relay: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 1718
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 8611
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Locations
Evaporative Vapor Pressure Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1591
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 6405
Page 1421
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 4676
Page 9748
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 9878
Compressor Clutch: Testing and Inspection Manual Air Conditioner
Magnet Clutch Circuit
SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage.
Inspection Flow
INSPECTION FLOW
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The front air control controls compressor operation based on ambient and intake temperature and
a signal from ECM.
Low Temperature Protection Control
The front air control will turn the compressor ON or OFF as determined by a signal detected by the
intake sensor.
Page 5898
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 9609
Inspection Flow
INSPECTION FLOW
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Air mix door control system components are:
- Front air control.
- Air mix door motors (Driver, Passenger, and rear)
- PBR (built-into air mix door motors)
- In-vehicle sensor
- Ambient sensor
- Optical sensor
- Intake sensor
Page 9163
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order:
^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface.
If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the front turn plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
Page 4529
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See: Data
Link Connector/Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Schematic
4. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT TEST ITEM" screen.
5. Touch "CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Page 10655
Page 1037
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 992
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 2816
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 2436
> Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels
> Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and
inspections.
4. Check the target mounts.
^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before
performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11).
NOTE:
The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines.
Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment.
Page 3320
b. Insert Tool between the oil pan (lower) and the oil pan (upper).
Tool number: KVIOIIIIOO (J-37228)
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
- Do not insert a screwdriver, this will damage the mating surfaces.
c. Tap (1) Tool to insert it then slide (2) Tool by tapping its side with a hammer to remove the oil
pan (lower) from the oil pan (upper).
21. Remove the oil strainer from the oil pan (upper).
22. Remove the oil pan (upper) using the following steps.
a. Remove the oil pan (upper) bolts in the reverse order as shown.
b. Remove the oil pan (upper) from the cylinder block by prying it at the points shown using suitable
tool.
CAUTION: Do not damage mating surface.
23. Remove the O-rings from the oil pump and front cover.
CAUTION: Do not reuse O-rings.
Page 12
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 10719
4. Remove one screw and seat cushion outer finisher.
5. Remove bolt and seat belt buckle.
6. Unclip harness attachment clips from seat pan to remove buckle assy. from seat.
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Combination Switch: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
CONSULT-II Operation
CONSULT-II OPERATION
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT- II CONVERTER to the data
link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)".
3. Touch "BCM" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
If "BCM" is not indicated, go to GI-39, "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit". See:
Diagrams/Electrical Diagrams/Powertrain Management/Computers and Control Systems/Data Link
Connector/Schematic
Crew Cab
Headliner: Service and Repair Crew Cab
HEADLINING
Removal and Installation
Page 11748
Door Lock/Unlock Switch Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 13910
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 3328
c. Check again that the timing alignment marks on the timing chain and on each sprocket are
aligned. Then install the front cover.
d. Install the bolts in the numerical order as shown.
M6 x 50 mm (1.97 in): No.1,20,25,26,27 M6 x 80 mm (3.15 in): No.4, 5, 7 M6 x 20 mm (0.79 in): All
except the above
e. After tightening re-tighten to the specified torque.
CAUTION: Be sure to wipe off any excessive liquid gasket leaking onto surface mating with oil pan.
4. Install the intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH) (A) and intake valve timing
control solenoid valve cover (LH) (B) as follows:
- Cross mark (C) that cannot be seen after assembly
a. Apply liquid gasket (D) as shown.
D: 2.6 - 3.6 mm (0.102 - 0.142 in) dia.
Use Genuine RTV Silicone Sealant or equivalent.
CAUTION: The start and end of the liquid gasket application should be crossed at a position (C)
that cannot be seen after attaching the cover.
b. Install the bolts in the numerical order as shown.
- A: Intake valve timing control solenoid valve cover (RH)
Page 3639
4. Disconnect the heater hose (heater core side). 5. Remove the heater hose bracket. 6.
Disconnect the water cut valve connector. 7. Remove the water cut valve.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
^ Place a thread so that it is caught in the valve of the thermostat. Immerse fully in a container filled
with water. Heat while stirring.
^ The valve opening temperature is the temperature at which the valve opens and falls from the
thread.
^ Continue heating. Check the full-open lift amount.
^ After checking the full-open lift amount, lower the water temperature and check the valve closing
temperature.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Installation of Thermostat
^ Install the thermostat with the whole circumference of each flange part fit securely inside the
rubber ring as shown.
^ Install the thermostat with the jiggle valve facing upwards.
Installation of Water Outlet Pipe and Heater Pipe First apply a neutral detergent to the O-rings,
then quickly insert the insertion parts of the water outlet pipe and heater pipe into the installation
holes.
INSPECTION AFTER INSTALLATION
^ Check for leaks of the engine coolant.
^ Start and warm up the engine. Visually check for leaks of the engine coolant.
A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Fluid - CVT: Technical Service Bulletins A/T - Special A/T Fluid Requirements
Classification: AT07-006B
Reference: NTB08-049B
Date: March 13, 2009
NISSAN; SPECIAL AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID REQUIREMENT
This bulletin has been amended to update Parts Information and Applied Vehicles. Please discard
all earlier versions.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2002 to Current Vehicles with Automatic Transmissions (Except GT-R)
SERVICE INFORMATION
If Warranty repairs are being done on a transmission listed in the chart shown in Parts Information,
the listed fluid must be used. A claim to Nissan for warranty, service contract, or goodwill repairs to
the transmissions listed below may be denied if Genuine Nissan ATF/CVT/eCVT Fluid is not used
as specified by the part number in this bulletin.
If Customer Pay service or repair of the transmissions listed below is done, the fluid type listed in
the chart shown in the Parts Information must be used. Nissan recommends the Genuine Nissan
ATF/CVT/eCVT fluid part number listed in Parts Information be used.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 13998
Rear Power Window Motor RH Circuit Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 3 - 4)
Page 6829
8. Install bolts A, B and C in control valve with TCM.
9. Tighten bolt 1, 2 and 3 temporarily to prevent dislocation. Then tighten them in order (1 -> 2 ->
3), and then tighten other bolts.
10. Tighten control valve with TCM bolts to the specified torque. Refer to "Components". See:
Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component
Parts)/Components
11. Connect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
12. Securely fasten terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness with
terminal clips.
Page 4841
31. Select Diagnosis
32. Wait for System Call to complete and CAN Diagnosis to reach 51%.
When the CAN diagnosis reaches 51%, the process icons in the Process Guide Area at the top of
the screen will light (become enabled).
33. When the icons light, click on the "Final Check" icon.
Page 9167
> Engine coolant and lubricating oils at specified levels
> Spare tire, jack, hand tools, and floor mats in designated positions
NOTE:
Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for information about any of the above checks and
inspections.
4. Check the target mounts.
^ If there is any visual damage (bent, worn, cracked, etc), have the equipment repaired before
performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the target mounts are properly adjusted and configured (see Figure 11).
NOTE:
The target mount example shown in Figure 11 is for Hunter "camera type" alignment machines.
Follow the operation manual for your specific equipment.
Page 5289
Case 6
Page 11835
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 12237
12. Remove and replace the switch.
13. Secure the switch harness with the 2 clips to the seat pan.
14. Roll the side facing trim down over the new seat switch. Re-attach the loose J-Clip back onto
the seat frame.
^ Make sure the upholstered edge is flat and smooth with no bumps. See Figure 9.
^ Make sure the upholstered edge is flat and level with the side of the switch. See Figure 9.
WARNING:
Make sure the J-Clip is securely attached. A loose J-Clip may affect OCS performance.
15. Install the switch plate and switch knobs.
16. Set the seat pan back onto the seat frame and secure with the 4 bolts. Torque 27.5 Nm (2.8
Kg-m, 20 ft-lb).
17. Re-attach the seat harnesses to the seat pan.
18. Re-attach the lower flap cover.
Page 11924
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 3922
15. Select OK
VIN registration is complete
Page 10711
Installation - King Cab
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Crew Cab
SEAT BELTS
Removal and Installation of Front Seat Belt
Removal - Crew Cab
1. Remove the center pillar upper/lower finishers. Refer to "BODY SIDE TRIM".
Page 1941
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 8345
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 3036
- Position No. 1 camshaft bracket close to the mounting position, and then install it to prevent from
touching liquid gasket applied to each surface.
- Temporarily tighten the front cover bolts (4 for each bank) as shown.
4. Tighten the camshaft bracket bolts as follows:
Camshaft bracket bolts Step 1 (bolts 9 - 12): 2.0 Nm (0.2 kg-m, 17 inch lbs.) Step 2 (bolts 1 - 8):
2.0 Nm (0.2 kg-m, 17 inch lbs.) Step 3 (all bolts): 5.9 Nm (0.6 kg-m, 52 inch lbs.) Step 4 (all bolts):
10.4 Nm (1.1 kg-m, 92 inch lbs.)
CAUTION: After tightening the camshaft bracket bolts, be sure to wipe off excessive liquid gasket
from the parts listed below. ^
Mating surface of rocker cover
^ Mating surface of front cover
Page 6519
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8587
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 14098
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) (Steps 3 - 5)
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front RH (Step 1)
Page 6334
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Locations
Four Wheel Drive Indicator Lamp: Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Location of Electrical Parts
Page 6567
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 1833
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 5497
Page 507
8. Configuration of current BCM is printed out automatically. A listing of manual setting items and
auto setting items will be displayed. Auto setting
items are preset and cannot be changed. Manual setting items can be set by using WRITE
CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE. Refer to "WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE".
9. Touch "BACK" on "READ CONFIGURATION" screen.
WRITE CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link
connector and turn ignition switch ON.
Page 1391
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 7373
13. Connect revolution sensor connector.
14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips.
15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal
CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level.
Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Tire Pressure Sensor: Technical Service Bulletins Tire Monitor System - Tire Inflation Precautions
Classification: WT10-005
Reference: NTB10-114
Date: September 27, 2010
INFLATING TIRES EQUIPPED WITH TPMS
APPLIED VEHICLE: All Nissan with Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
SERVICE INFORMATION
Improper use of tire inflator tools can break the stem of a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensor.
NOTE:
The type of stem breakage shown in Figure 1 is not considered a warrantable repair.
Please refer to the following examples of recommended and not recommended tire pressure filling
tools.
Not Recommended tire inflator tools.
Page 1019
Page 3526
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 10660
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 11422
Front Bumper: Service and Repair Plastic Bumper
PLASTIC BUMPER
Removal
1. Remove radiator grille. Refer to "FRONT GRILLE". 2. Remove skid plate or front under cover 3.
Remove fog lamp, if equipped. 4. Remove screws and fasteners and remove plastic fascia
assembly.
- Remove fog lamp assembly, if equipped, from plastic fascia assembly.
- Remove fog lamp opening finisher, if equipped, from plastic fascia assembly.
Page 12797
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 6861
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 6670
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 12567
Inspection/Compass And Thermometer
INSPECTION/COMPASS AND THERMOMETER
Calibration Procedure for Compass
The difference between magnetic North and geographical North can sometimes be great enough to
cause false compass readings. In order for the compass to operate accurately in a particular zone,
it must be calibrated using the given procedure.
CORRECTION FUNCTIONS OF COMPASS
The direction display is equipped with automatic correction function. If the direction is not shown
correctly, carry out initial correction.
INITIAL CORRECTION PROCEDURE FOR COMPASS
1. Pushing the mode switch for about 10 seconds will enter the initial correction mode. The
compass display will begin to flash. 2. Turn the vehicle slowly in an open, safe place. The initial
correction is completed in approximately one and a half turns.
NOTE: In places where the terrestrial magnetism is extremely disturbed, the initial correction may
start automatically.
Page 13009
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Specifications
Valve Dimensions
Page 6398
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 7811
2. Connect the AC power supply to CONSULT-II.
3. Connect CONSULT-II to the ASIST PC with the special Ethernet cable (P/N 02002554 is printed
on the cable).
a. Connect one end to CONSULT-II at the "PC port".
b. Connect the other end to the ASIST PC at the "Ethernet card" connection port.
4. Confirm the CONSULT-II date and time are correctly set as follows:
(This is necessary to provide a valid print-out for warranty claims.)
a. With the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming card in slot A, turn ON CONSULT-II.
b. Touch [SUB MODE]
c. Touch [SET DATE] (see Figure 2).
1) If the date is not correct, touch the [MONTH], [DAY] or [YEAR] as needed. Then adjust it by
using arrow keys. Once done, press [SAVE], press [BACK], and go to step d.
2) If the date is OK, press [BACK] and go to step d.
d. Touch [SET TIME] (see Figure 2).
1) If time is not correct, touch the [HOUR], [MINUTE] or [AM/PM] as needed. Then adjust it by
using arrow keys. After you are done, press [SAVE], press [BACK] and go to step 5.
2) If time is OK, press [BACK] and go to step 5.
IMPORTANT NOTE
^ If your ASIST PC has already been set up to perform ECU reprogramming, proceed to step 5.
^ If you are unsure whether your ASIST PC has already been set up for ECU reprogramming, look
in ASIST, under "CONSULT Utilities" - "CONSULT-II Info" - "NISSAN" - "ECU Reprogramming".
This will give you instructions for setting the Ethernet (IP) Address of the ASIST PC and
CONSULT-II. You will need to do this before performing ECU reprogramming.
DOWNLOAD (TRANSFER) DATA FROM ASIST INTO CONSULT-II (8 MB Orange Card)
Page 13909
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 11959
Sunroof / Moonroof Motor: Testing and Inspection
Sunroof Motor Assembly Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 2206
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 11423
5. Remove clips and energy absorber from retainer bracket. 6. Remove retainer bracket. 7.
Remove front bumper brackets LH and RH. 8. Remove front bumper stays LH and RH.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 11367
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 7506
2. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 3. Start engine. 4. Erase self-diagnosis. 5. Check 4WD shift indicator
lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again.
If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new
transfer control unit and retry the above check.
METHOD FOR ADJUSTMENT WITH 4WD SHIFT SWITCH AT "4H" OR "4LO" 1. Start engine.
Run the engine for at least 10 seconds. 2. Stop vehicle and move A/T selector lever to "N" position
with brake pedal depressed. Stay in "N" for at least 2 seconds. 3. Turn 4WD shift switch to "2WD"
position. Stay in "2WD" for at least 2 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch "OFF". 5. Start engine. 6.
Erase self-diagnosis. 7. Check 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp again.
If 4WD shift indicator lamp and 4LO indicator lamp do not indicate proper pattern, install new
transfer control unit and retry the above check.
Locations
Throttle Position Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2424
Replace the tire(s) or use known good tires from another vehicle for all road tests and diagnostics
in this bulletin.
^ Make sure tire pressure is set to the correct specification.
1. Install the following measuring tools on the vehicle:
^ Steering Wheel Offset Gauge
^ Road Crown Gauge
NOTE:
Refer to "Special Tool" for a description of these tools and an explanation of their use.
2. Obtain a watch with a second hand (preferably a stopwatch) to use during the road test.
3. Take the vehicle for a road test and confirm the customers concern.
^ Select a flat road where the vehicle can be driven in a straight line at a preferred speed of 60
mph.
^ During the road test make sure the vehicle is pointing straight. Don't worry about steering wheel
position during the road test.
NOTE:
^ If you adjusted the tire pressure or changed the tires before the road test, the issue may have
been resolved.
^ If there are cross winds strong enough to affect the vehicle's straight line movement, then
diagnosis cannot be performed.
4. Determine the vehicles issue - refer to the definitions of "Pull" and Steering Wheel "Off-center"
below.
5. When the road test is completed, remove the Road Crown Gauge, leave the Steering Wheel
Off-Set Gauge in place until the Service Procedure is complete.
6. Refer to the Flow Chart above for the next step.
Other Service Information
Customers may report that their vehicle's steering wheel is "off-center" because the steering wheel
spokes are tilted to the left or right when the vehicle continues straight ahead on a straight flat road
(see example in Figure 1).
If a vehicle's steering wheel spokes are slightly off center while driving straight, it may be the
normal result of road crown. Most roads in the United States are built with a "crown" to help rain
water drain from the road surface. The slope of the road crown varies from place to place.
Vehicles have a natural tendency to drift to the low side of the crown. The greater the slope of the
crown, the faster the vehicle will drift in that direction.
Tires and vehicles are designed to counteract the effect of typical road crown, but may not fully
counteract the effect of a highly crowned road.
Page 11914
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 13030
Page 2137
Optional Splice
Page 700
Page 12266
Seat Memory Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 324
Control Module HVAC: Description and Operation Manual Air Conditioner
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Front Air Control
The front air control has a built-in microcomputer which processes information sent from various
sensors needed for air conditioner operation. The air mix door motor (front), mode door motor,
intake door motor, defroster door motor, blower motor and compressor are then controlled.
The front air control is unitized with control mechanisms. When the various switches and
temperature control dial are operated, data is input to the front air control.
Self-diagnostic functions are also built into the front air control to provide quick check of
malfunctions in the air conditioner system.
Page 8554
IPDM E/R Power/Ground Circuit Inspection
Page 10430
Cabin Temperature Sensor / Switch: Testing and Inspection
In-vehicle Sensor Circuit
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
In-vehicle Sensor
The in-vehicle sensor is located on cluster lid D. It converts variations in temperature of passenger
compartment air (drawn in through the integrated fan) into a resistance value. It is then input into
the front air control.
Page 6601
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
NOTE: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "Components". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
Page 8189
Wheel Speed Sensor: Service and Repair VDC/TCS/ABS
Wheel Sensors
WHEEL SENSORS
REMOVAL
1. Remove wheel sensor bolt.
^ When removing the front wheel sensor, first remove the disc rotor to gain access to the front
wheel sensor bolt.
2. Pull out the sensor, being careful to turn it as little as possible.
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage sensor edge and sensor rotor teeth.
^ Do not pull on the sensor harness.
3. Disconnect wheel sensor harness electrical connector, then remove harness from mounts.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Tighten wheel sensor bolt to specification.
CAUTION: Installation should be performed while paying attention to the following: ^
Inspect wheel sensor O-ring, replace sensor assembly if damaged.
^ Clean wheel sensor hole and mounting surface with brake cleaner and a lint-free shop rag. Be
careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle.
^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
Sensor Rotor
SENSOR ROTOR
Removal and Installation FRONT
The wheel sensor rotors are built into the wheel hubs and are not removable. If damaged, replace
wheel hub and bearing assembly.
REAR Removal
1. Remove axle shaft assembly.
NOTE: It is necessary to disassemble the rear axle to replace the sensor rotor.
2. Pull the sensor rotor off the axle shaft using Tool and a press.
Tool number: ST30031000 ( - )
Installation
1. Install new sensor rotor on axle shaft using a suitable length steel tube and a press. Make sure
sensor rotor is fully seated.
Page 3751
Body Control Module: Description and Operation
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
System Description
- BCM (Body Control Module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the
vehicle.
BCM FUNCTION
BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches
(light, wiper washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various
electrical components. Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the front air
control, and sends signals to ECM using CAN communication.
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
1. Description
- BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components
according to the results.
- BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals
(OUTPUT 1-5) and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5).
2. Operation description
- BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to
flow in turn.
- If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and
input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active.
- At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow.
When voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in
BCM detects voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON.
Page 11608
4. Install the cable securely to the lock. 5. After installing, check the hood lock adjustment and hood
opener operation.
Page 7946
Brake Pad: Technical Service Bulletins Brakes - Judder/Pedal Feel/Noise Diagnosis/Repair
Classification: BR00-004d
Reference: NTB00-033d
Date: August 8, 2007
ALL NISSAN; BRAKE NOISE/JUDDER/PEDAL FEEL DIAGNOSIS AND REPAIR
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles have been updated. Please discard all
previous versions of this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
^ This bulletin is to assist you in responding to customer questions about brake operation, and
provides diagnostic and repair information for each item listed, if any should occur.
^ Most brake incidents fall into the following categories:
a. Brake Noise: A squeak, squeal, clunk, or groan that occurs when the brakes are applied or
released.
b. Brake Judder: A vibration that can be felt in the vehicle, steering wheel or brake pedal when the
brakes are applied.
c. Pedal Feel: The effort needed to operate the brakes is too high or too low.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Verify the condition by road testing the vehicle with the customer.
2. Determine the specific brake incident based on the description in the Service Information above.
3. Follow the appropriate repair procedure(s), shown below, for your specific incident.
BRAKE NOISE
^ Brakes can make a range of noises when applied or released. Some noises are normal and no
repair action should be taken.
^ Use the following descriptions to identify the specific type of brake noise and the appropriate
repair:
Squeak noise when the brakes are cold:
^ Usually occurs during the first few stops in the morning.
^ This is a normal condition. No service action is necessary.
Squeak noise with the brakes at normal operating temperatures:
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ If there are no bulletins for the car you are working on, install OE type pads using the information
listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service Manual procedures.
Notes about brake pads and brake noise:
Original Equipment (OE) brake pads are installed on all current Nissan vehicles at the factory.
^ The OE pads use a Non-asbestos Organic (NAO) compound. The NAO material provides state of
the art resistance to squeal noise.
^ These pads are available as service parts and must be used if replacing brake pads under the
terms of the Nissan new car warranty.
Key Value brake pads are also available as a high quality service replacement part at a very
attractive price.
Page 10419
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Locations
A/T Electrical Parts Location
Page 7580
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 5735
ECM Inspection Table Part 2
Page 9985
Torque for bolts on brackets 1, 2, & 3: 9.6 N.m (0.97 kg-m, 85 in-lb)
Figure C-25
d. Install and torque 2 bolts for the front bumper side bracket.
- Driver side only.
Torque: 14.2 N.m (1.45 kg-m, 10 ft-lb)
15. Install the grill.
Figure C-26
IMPORTANT:
Make sure all 7 clips are properly located in the grill before installing.
If you have installed a new fan, skip steps 16 - 19 and go to Procedure E.
16. Reconnect the Negative battery cable.
17. Reset the radio station presets.
18. Reset the clock.
19. Go to Procedure F.
Procedure D - Install Protective Covering to Fan Motor and Harness
(Only for Type 2-90 Wat-Fan Motors That Tested OK)
Page 4558
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6938
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 11091
Component Parts Location
Page 1161
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 3575
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 3310
EM-4
Page 7067
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
harness.
Page 227
Locations
Air Flow Meter/Sensor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 1204
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 5418
Body Control Module: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 7517
Fluid - Transfer Case: Service and Repair Transfer Fluid Replacement
TRANSFER FLUID
Components
Page 2143
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 11742
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 3851
16. If there are no DTCs, select the "Repair" icon (see Figure 5).
^ If there are any DTCs other than those listed in the accompanying Symptom based TSB,
diagnose, perform repairs, and erase DTCs before continuing.
17. Select the "ECM Reprogram" icon. (See Figure 6.)
Page 13669
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Description and Operation
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Component Description
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay.
The throttle control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is
turned ON, the ECM sends an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is
provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to
throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM.
Page 11285
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 6529
4. Remove bolts and detach control device.
INSTALLATION
1. Install new O-ring to transfer control device.
CAUTION: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply petroleum jelly.
2. Install transfer control device.
a. Turn control shift rod fully counterclockwise using flat-bladed screwdriver, and then put mark on
control shift rod.
b. Align transfer control device shaft cutout with mark on control shift rod, and install.
NOTE: Turn transfer control device when transfer control device connection does not match.
Page 7937
Removal and Installation of Brake Caliper and Disc Rotor
WARNING: Clean dust on caliper and brake pad with a vacuum dust collector to minimize the
hazard of airborne particles or other materials.
CAUTION: While removing cylinder body, never depress brake pedal because piston will pop out.
- It is not necessary to remove the torque member and disconnect the brake hose except for
disassembly or replacement of cylinder body. When replacing brake pads, hang cylinder body with
a wire so as not to stretch brake hose.
- Do not damage piston boot.
- Burnish brake contact surface after refinishing or replacing rotors, after replacing pads, or it a soft
pedal occurs at very low mileage.
REMOVAL
1. Remove tires from vehicle with power tool. 2. Drain brake fluid as necessary.
NOTE: Do not disconnect brake hose unless removing the cylinder body.
3. Remove bolts (2) as shown, and cylinder body (3).
- (1): Brake hose
NOTE: Position cylinder body aside using suitable wire, as necessary.
4. Remove disc rotor.
INSTALLATION
CAUTION: Refill with new brake fluid.
- Do not reuse drained brake fluid.
1. Install disc rotor. 2. Install cylinder body to the vehicle, and tighten bolts to specification. Refer to
BR-30, "Components".
CAUTION: Before installing cylinder body to the vehicle, wipe off mounting surface of cylinder
body.
3. Install brake hose to cylinder body with new copper washer and tighten to specification. Refer to
BR-30, "Components".
CAUTION: Do not reuse copper washer.
- Securely attach brake hose to protrusion on cylinder body.
4. Refill new brake fluid and bleed air. 5. Install tires to the vehicle.
Disassembly and Assembly
Disassembly and Assembly of Brake Caliper DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove pads from cylinder body. 2. Remove sliding sleeve and boot from cylinder body.
Page 1133
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 8732
28. Remove the seatbelt retractor cover.
^ Use a plastic trim tool.
29. Carefully remove the D-ring bolt cover.
30. Remove the D-ring bolt.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Fuel Gauge: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 10280
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 8218
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 7501
Control Module: Locations Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 9736
Blower Motor: Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 6324
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 7754
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller
shaft.
^ Before removing final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness
connector from the assembly and move it away from final drive/rear axle assembly area. Failure to
do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative.
1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft.
^ Plug rear end of transfer.
3. Remove both RH and LH axle shafts. 4. Remove carrier cover bolts.
5. Remove carrier cover using Tool.
Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
^ Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the mating surface.
6. Remove differential lock solenoid connector (B) bolt and disconnect differential lock position
connector (A).
7. For installation, apply a paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap.
CAUTION: ^
Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to install them
in their original positions.
^ For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap.
8. Remove adjuster lock plates.
Page 4242
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 9058
28. Remove the seatbelt retractor cover.
^ Use a plastic trim tool.
29. Carefully remove the D-ring bolt cover.
30. Remove the D-ring bolt.
Page 6484
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 5720
ECM Inspection Table Part 5
Page 12307
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
1. Make sure the collapsible storage organizer is in the "deployed" position and the lids are
snapped closed.
Deployed Position: Side supports and floor are snapped in place.
2. Position the organizer at the rear of the bed next to the tailgate.
^ If needed, loosen the knobs and slide the assembly rearward.
NOTE:
When sliding the organizer, apply light force to the center, or evenly to both sides.
CAUTION:
The organizer should only be moved in the bed of the truck when it is in the deployed position with
the lids snapped closed.
3. Lower the tailgate and remove both rail stops.
^ Use a 13/32" (10 mm) wrench.
Page 11038
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 3481
Diagnostic Procedure For Water Valve (Steps 8 - 9)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR WATER VALVE
Page 5321
Case 2
Page 13458
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 8124
4. The "REPROGRAM START" window should appear (see Figure 18).
NOTE:
If you get an error message, refer to the ECU Reprogramming Software Operations Manual *.
* This is found in ASIST under:
CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-II info.
CAUTION DURING REPROGRAMMING:
^ Do not unplug CONSULT-II from the vehicle during reprogramming. Permanent ABS/VDC
damage can occur.
^ Do not open any door or the trunk during reprogramming.
^ On some vehicles, the cooling fans may come on during reprogramming. This is a normal
condition. Do not disconnect the cooling fans. Forgetting to reconnect them may cause severe
engine damage. A vehicle battery charger is needed* to maintain the battery voltage level during
reprogramming.
* You should have hooked up a battery charger in Section 1.
5. Press [START]. See Figure 18.
^ After a few seconds, the window shown in Figure 19 will appear.
^ The screen backlight in CONSULT-II will now turn OFF.
^ When the screen backlight goes OFF, ABS/VDC reprogramming has started.
Page 9047
b. Disconnect the electrical connectors.
c. Remove the 3 mounting bolts.
d. Remove the control unit from the vehicle.
7. If equipped with front bench seat (shifter on steering column), remove the center seat and cup
holder:
a. Remove the finisher at the rear of the center seat.
a. Remove the 4 center seat mounting bolts.
b. Remove the seat from the vehicle and place it in a clean area.
Page 411
4. Select the desired part to be diagnosed on the "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
Self-Diagnostic Results
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "SELF-DIAG RESULTS" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen. 2. Self-diagnosis results are
displayed.
Display Item List - Self-Diagnostic Results
Display Item List
Page 11187
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 2383
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 9789
Blower Motor: Testing and Inspection Manual Air Conditioner
Front Blower Motor Circuit
SYMPTOM:
- Blower motor operation is malfunctioning.
Inspection Flow
INSPECTION FLOW
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
- Front air control
- Front blower switch
Page 3525
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 8656
Page 290
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 542
^ Female threads in bolt holes (use the correct size tap).
e. Reinstall and tighten the nut or bolt that holds the terminal eyelet.
4. If the ECM ground terminals are attached to the steering member assembly (cross brace under
the dash):
a. Remove the fasteners (nuts, bolts, screws) that attach the left side instrument stay assembly
(cross brace support) to the steering member assembly (see Figure 3).
b. Clean the mounting surfaces and fastener threads.
C. Reassemble and tighten the fasteners.
5. Clean the negative battery cable connections.
a. Write down all the radio presets.
b. Disconnect the negative battery cable at the battery and at the body connection.
c. Clean the following items:
^ Negative cable-to-body connection eyelet (both sides)
^ Body connection bolt (head and threads)
^ Female bolt hole threads (use correct size tap)
NOTE:
Do not remove paint from painted surfaces in the engine compartment to improve ground. Doing so
may cause corrosion/rust.
^ Battery negative post
^ Negative cable battery terminal
d. Reconnect negative battery cable (at the body and the battery).
e. Reprogram the radio presets.
6. Use CONSULT-II to erase all DTCs.
Page 2282
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 13096
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 10367
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Capacity Specifications
Fluid - Differential: Capacity Specifications
Front
Front Final Drive Oil Capacity
.................................................................................................................................................. 1.6 l (3
3/8 pt, 2 7/8 imp pt)
Rear
Rear Final Drive Oil Capacity
................................................................................................................................................ 2.01L
(4 1/4 pt, 3 1/2 imp pt.)
Crew Cab
Rear Door Panel: Service and Repair Crew Cab
REAR DOOR - CREW CAB
Removal
1. Remove power window switch assembly (if equipped).
- Disconnect harness connector.
2. Remove pull handle cover.
- Remove screws behind pull handle cover.
3. Remove cap from pull handle escutcheon and remove screw. 4. Remove pull handle
escutcheon.
- Remove screws behind pull handle escutcheon.
5. Remove armrest.
- Remove screws behind armrest.
6. Remove step lamp.
- Disconnect harness connector.
7. Remove door finisher and disconnect lock cable and handle cable from door handle assembly.
Refer to "REAR DOOR LOCK".
- Disconnect speaker connector.
8. Remove door lock knob. 9. Remove rear door tweeter.
Page 13092
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 5943
^ Tighten the exhaust manifold nuts in the numerical order shown. Then recheck the torque of the
nuts both (A) and (B).
^ Before installing new air fuel ration A/F sensors, clean the exhaust system threads using Tool
and apply anti-seize lubricant. Tool number : J-43879-12 : J-43897-18
CAUTION: ^
Do not over tighten the air fuel ratio A/F sensors. Doing so may cause damage to the sensor,
resulting in the MIL coming on.
Page 9918
If the fan motor is No Good:
a. Replace the Condenser Fan Motor Assembly - Procedure C.
b. Install the Max Fuse - Procedure E.
c. Confirm Condenser Fan Motor operation - Procedure F.
Procedure C - Remove and Install or Replace the Condenser Fan Assembly
1. Write down the radio station presets.
2. Turn the ignition OFF and disconnect the negative battery cable.
- Wait at least 3 minutes before working with any airbag components.
3. Remove the front grill.
Figure C-1
a. Use a long screwdriver to twist and release 7 clips shown in Figure C-1.
Page 5892
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 7463
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage spline, companion flange and front oil seal when removing propeller
shaft.
^ Before removing final drive assembly or rear axle assembly, disconnect ABS sensor harness
connector from the assembly and move it away from final drive/rear axle assembly area. Failure to
do so may result in sensor wires being damaged and sensor becoming inoperative.
1. Drain rear final drive gear oil. 2. Remove rear propeller shaft.
^ Plug rear end of transfer.
3. Remove both RH and LH axle shafts. 4. Remove carrier cover bolts.
5. Remove carrier cover using Tool.
Tool number: KV10111100 (J-37228)
CAUTION: ^
Be careful not to damage the mating surface.
^ Do not insert flat-bladed screwdriver, this will damage the mating surface.
6. Remove differential lock solenoid connector (B) bolt and disconnect differential lock position
connector (A).
7. For installation, apply a paint matching mark on one side of side bearing cap.
CAUTION: ^
Side bearing caps are line-board for initial assembly. The matching marks are used to install them
in their original positions.
^ For matching mark, use paint. Do not damage side bearing cap.
8. Remove adjuster lock plates.
Page 12566
Compass: Testing and Inspection
Trouble Diagnoses
Preliminary Check For Thermometer
PRELIMINARY CHECK FOR THERMOMETER
Page 7466
7. Align paint matching mark on side bearing caps with that on axle housing and install side bearing
caps on axle housing without tightening to
specification.
CAUTION: Do not tighten at this point. This allows further tightening of side bearing adjusters.
8. Tighten each side bearing adjusters using adjuster tool.
Tool number: - (C-4164)
9. Adjusting backlash of drive gear and drive pinion.
10. Check total preload. 11. Check tooth contact.
12. Apply sealant to mating surface of carrier cover.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent.
CAUTION: Remove old sealant adhering to mounting surfaces. Also remove any moisture, oil, or
foreign material adhering to application and mounting surfaces.
13. Install carrier cover on axle housing and tighten carrier cover bolts with the specified torque.
Refer to "COMPONENTS". 14. Install both RH and LH axle shafts. 15. Install propeller shaft. 16.
Refill rear final drive oil.
Page 12694
3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5):
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly.
a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap
in place.
^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down
(it should not move).
b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip.
^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib.
c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab.
d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6).
e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place.
Page 6599
13. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
14. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
15. Remove O-ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
16. Disconnect TCM connectors.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
17. Remove A/T assembly harness connector from control valve with TCM using suitable tool.
Page 14251
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 1364
CAUTION: Do not reuse the old sensor rotor.
2. Install axle shaft assembly.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 14198
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 9166
^ Center the front wheels on the turn plates.
^ Chock the left rear wheel.
Preliminary Checks:
3. Perform pre-alignment checks.
^ Tire condition (wear, partial wear, flaws, etc.)
^ Road wheel condition (damage and deformation)
^ Tire pressure
^ Inspect for visible damage to any suspension components
^ Wheel bearing axial play
^ Ball joints of suspension arms
^ Shock absorber operation and visual check for oil leakage
^ Condition of axle and suspension (check for bushing cracks and slack)
^ Vehicle weight
> Empty - no cargo, luggage, or passengers
> Fuel level is full
Page 1102
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 10821
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 13956
Page 5131
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
Page 14487
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 1261
Pedal Positioning Switch: Testing and Inspection
Pedal Adjusting Switch Circuit Inspection (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 13255
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 4443
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of
the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is
disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2
seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and
wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 3989
18. At this point, refer to the symptom based TSB that directed you to reprogram the ECM.
The symptom based TSB is required, in order to determine which reprogramming part number to
use.
19. Select Next
NOTE:
If the screen in Figure 8 appears, there is data stored in the VI. Select "Yes" to proceed with
Reprogramming.
Page 5099
Case 14
Case 15
NOTE: If a check mark is put on"NG" on"INITIAL DIAG (Initial diagnosis)", replace the control unit.
Page 4467
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 4589
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 13316
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6319
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 6856
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 13843
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 12862
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6738
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Locations
Low Tire Pressure Warning System Components
Automatic Air Conditioner
Compressor Clutch: Testing and Inspection Automatic Air Conditioner
Magnet Clutch Circuit
SYMPTOM: Magnet clutch does not engage.
Inspection Flow
INSPECTION FLOW
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
The front air control controls compressor operation based on ambient and intake temperature and
a signal from ECM.
Page 10445
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
SERVICE PROCEDURE
^ For Titan and Armada: follow the procedure outlined in this bulletin for intake sensor replacement.
^ For Quest, Xterra, Frontier and Pathfinder: refer to the appropriate section in the Electronic
Service Manual (ESM) for intake sensor replacement.
1. Remove six bolts from the glove box.
2. Remove glove box. The intake sensor is located behind the glove box.
3. Disconnect the intake sensor electrical connector.
ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Traction Control Module: Technical Service Bulletins ABS/TCS - CAN Diagnostic Information
Classification: BR10-011
Reference: NTB10-145
Date: December 15, 2010
ABS / VDC CAN DIAGNOSIS INFORMATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All 2005-2011 Nissan vehicles with ABS and/or VDC
SERVICE INFORMATION
When diagnosing a vehicle with an ABS or VDC / SLIP warning light on with DTCs stored in the
ABS / VDC actuator control unit, perform DTC diagnosis first.
^ Do not replace the ABS / VDC actuator control unit without being supported by the DTC
diagnosis.
^ Do not erase DTCs before performing DTC diagnosis.
^ Always fully diagnose before performing any repairs.
When DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) is the only DTC stored in the ABS / VDC actuator
control unit, use the REPAIR FLOW CHART below. This will assist in proper diagnosis results and
repairs in addition to using diagnostic information in the Electronic Service Manual (ESM).
^ If DTC U1000 is found stored in other systems, refer to NIB10-066 and the applicable ESM.
^ If other DTCs are found stored in ABS / VDC along with U1000, follow the diagnosis steps for
those DTCs in the applicable ESM.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
repairs performed.
Page 1616
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Locations
SRS Components Parts Location
Page 4076
Engine Control Module: Description and Operation
ECM POWER SUPPLY
Component Description
Battery voltage is supplied to the ECM even when the ignition switch is turned OFF for the ECM
memory function of the DTC memory, the air-fuel ratio feedback compensation value memory, the
idle air volume learning value memory, etc.
ECM
Component Description
The ECM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal input and output and for power
supply. The ECM controls the engine.
Page 8700
e. Remove the front pillar finisher.
^ Use a plastic trim tool.
NOTE:
With the sun visor and front pillar finisher removed the headlining will be loose all along the
passenger side. This will allow access to the side curtain air bag mounting bolts.
f. Take the side curtain air bag branch of the harness loose from the body.
Page 1973
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 5754
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 7279
Commercial Service Tools
Page 8735
38. Remove the upper door hinge finisher; 2 clips.
39. Take the harness loose from the hinge rod and the body.
40. Pull the harness through the body.
For passenger side (right side) harness. go to step 51
Rear Cabin Wall Harness Branch (driver side-left side-only; if equipped with rear sonar and/or
differential lock
41. Lift the carpet on the rear cabin wall.
42. Disconnect the control unit(s).
43. Take the harness loose from the rear cabin wall.
Page 10047
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 599
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Page 12604
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 13506
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 9631
- Defroster door motor does not operate normally.
Inspection Flow
INSPECTION FLOW
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Component Parts
Defroster door control system components are:
- Front air control
- Defroster door motor
- PBR (Built into defroster door motor)
- In-vehicle sensor
- Ambient sensor
- Optical sensor
- Intake sensor
Page 10850
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 2425
Some freeways slope to both the left and right from the center. When driving on a freeway that
slopes in both directions, a vehicle may exhibit a small amount of drift to the left when driving in the
left lane and a small amount of drift to the right when driving in the right lane.
This bulletin does not address road crown issues because they are not vehicle related, although
the customer may incorrectly perceive them to be.
Description/Definition of Steering Wheel "Off-center" Condition
The steering wheel spokes are tilted to the left or right more than allowable (see example in Figure
2) when driving straight ahead on a straight flat road.
Allowable specifications for steering wheel off-center
^ All Nissan (except NV1500, 2500, and 3500): 2 mm or less.
^ NV1500, 2500, and 3500: 4 mm or less.
When driving straight on a highly crowned road, the steering wheel may be turned (off-center) to
counteract the affect of the road crown. When road testing for an off-center condition, the vehicle
should be driven on a straight flat road.
Although the vehicle does not pull in either direction, the customer may perceive that the vehicle
pulls because it will respond if he or she tries to bring the steering wheel back to center. This
condition can occur if the tie rod length is uneven (not adjusted correctly) from side to side.
Description/Definition of a Vehicle "Pull" Condition
The vehicle consistently drifts to one side while driving at a constant speed on a straight, flat road.
^ A vehicle is said to "pull" if it completes a lane change in less than 7 seconds (with no steering
correction from the driver) when driving at 60 MPH on
a road with less than 2 degrees of road crown slope. All four wheels must pass into the other lane
during this time (7 seconds).
Page 429
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 13155
Page 12070
7. Using a plastic pry tool, remove the switch knobs and switch plate.
8. Remove the four bolts securing the seat pan to the frame. See Figure 3.
Page 4345
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 4668
Page 8536
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 12440
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Description and Operation ASCD Brake Switch
ASCD BRAKE SWITCH
Component Description
When the brake pedal is depressed, ASCD brake switch is turned OFF and stop lamp switch is
turned ON. ECM detects the state of the brake pedal by this input of two kinds (ON/OFF signal).
Page 6168
Page 9913
Figure B-3
5. Before connecting to the vehicle battery, make sure the Fan Motor Tester is switched OFF.
Switched to OFF
6. Connect the Fan Motor Tester and the Fluke 73 Digital Multimeter (using the fluke meter test
leads) as follows (see Figure B-4):
- Connect Fan Motor Tester harness connector to the condenser fan.
- Connect Fan Motor Tester to the vehicle battery; Red clamp to + (positive) / Black clamp to (negative).
- Connect the Fluke 73 digital multimeter to the MOTOR VOLTAGE test ports on the Fan Motor
Tester; V+ red probe to POS / COM black probe to NEG.
Figure B-4
NOTE:
When connected as above with the Fan Motor Tester switched OFF, the LED on the switch will
illuminate green; this indicates the tester has battery power.
Front Axle
Wheel Bearing: Service and Repair Front Axle
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Remove wheel and tire using power tool. 2. Remove engine undercover if equipped, using
power tool. 3. Without disassembling the hydraulic lines, remove the torque member bolts using
power tool. Then reposition brake caliper aside with wire.
NOTE: Do not press brake pedal while brake caliper is removed.
4. Put alignment mark on disc rotor and wheel hub and bearing assembly, then remove disc rotor.
5. For 4WD model, perform the following:
^ Remove cotter pin, then lock nut from drive shaft using power tool.
^ Remove drive shaft from wheel hub and bearing assembly.
6. Remove wheel sensor.
^ Inspect the wheel sensor O-ring, replace the wheel sensor assembly if damaged.
^ Clean the wheel sensor hole and mating surface with a suitable brake cleaner and clean lint-free
shop rag. Be careful that dirt and debris do not enter the axle bearing area.
^ Apply a coat of suitable grease to the wheel sensor O-ring and mounting hole.
CAUTION: Do not pull on the wheel sensor harness.
7. Remove wheel hub and bearing assembly bolts using power tool. 8. Remove splash guard and
wheel hub and bearing assembly from steering knuckle.
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check for deformity, cracks and damage on each part, replace if necessary.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 8829
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 12312
CAUTION:
Make sure the rail stops are installed before releasing the vehicle.
Page 8785
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 6166
Fuel Pump Relay: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 6344
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Service and Repair
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning
DESCRIPTION
Accelerator Pedal Released Position Learning is an operation to learn the fully released position of
the accelerator pedal by monitoring the accelerator pedal position sensor output signal. It must be
performed each time harness connector of accelerator pedal position sensor or ECM is
disconnected.
OPERATION PROCEDURE
1. Make sure that accelerator pedal is fully released. 2. Turn ignition switch ON and wait at least 2
seconds. 3. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds. 4. Turn ignition switch ON and
wait at least 2 seconds. 5. Turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 10 seconds.
Page 29
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 903
Optional Splice
Page 3227
EM-10
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 1477
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 3 - 6)
Page 10068
- The switch diagram is used in wiring diagrams.
Reference Area
Page 8720
c. Remove the seat from the vehicle and place it in a clean area.
6. If equipped; remove sub woofer or navigation control unit.
Sub Woofer-under driver's seat
a. Disconnect the electrical connector
b. Remove the 3 mounting bolts.
c. Remove the sub-woofer from the vehicle.
Navigation Control Unit-under passenger seat
a. Remove the control unit cover; 2 bolts.
Page 13850
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 5421
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 9439
Vehicle Lifting: Service and Repair Pantograph Jack
LIFTING POINT
Pantograph Jack
WARNING:
- Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. Always use safety stands to
support the frame when you have to get under the vehicle.
- Place wheel chocks at both front and back of the wheels on the ground.
Page 12814
7. Disconnect the fuel level sensor, fuel filter, and fuel pump assembly electrical connector and the
fuel feed hose.
Disconnect the quick connector as follows: Hold the sides of the connector, push in tabs and pull out the tube.
- If the connector and the tube are stuck together, push and pull several times until they start to
move. Then disconnect them by pulling.
CAUTION: The quick connector can be disconnected when the tabs are completely depressed. Do not twist
the quick connector more than necessary.
- Do not use any tools to disconnect the quick connector.
- Keep the resin tube away from heat. Be especially careful when welding near the tube.
- Prevent any acid liquids such as battery electrolyte, from getting on the resin tube.
- Do not bend or twist the resin tube during connection.
- Do not remove the remaining retainer on the hard tube (or the equivalent) except when the resin
tube or the retainer is replaced.
- When the resin tube or hard tube, or the equivalent, is replaced, also replace the retainer with a
new one (white colored retainer).
Page 3416
2. Set the vehicle heater controls to the full HOT and heater ON position. Turn the vehicle ignition
ON with the engine OFF as necessary to activate
the heater mode.
3. Remove the vented reservoir cap and replace it with a non-vented reservoir cap before filling the
cooling system.
4. Install the Tool by installing the radiator cap adapter onto the radiator neck opening. Then attach
the gauge body assembly with the refill tube and
the venturi assembly to the radiator cap adapter.
5. Insert the refill hose into the coolant mixture container that is placed at floor level. Make sure the
ball valve is in the closed position.
^ Use Genuine NISSAN Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent, mixed 50/50 with distilled
water or demineralized water.
6. Install an air hose to the venturi assembly, the air pressure must be within specification.
Compressed air supply pressure: 5.7 - 8.5 kPa (5.6 - 8.4 kg/cm2, 80 - 120 psi)
CAUTION: The compressed air supply must be equipped with an air dryer.
7. The vacuum gauge will begin to rise and there will be an audible hissing noise. During this
process open the ball valve on the refill hose slightly.
Coolant will be visible rising in the refill hose. Once the refill hose is full of coolant, close the ball
valve. This will purge any air trapped in the refill hose.
8. Continue to draw the vacuum until the gauge reaches 28 inches of vacuum. The gauge may not
reach 28 inches in high altitude locations, refer to
the vacuum specifications based on the altitude above sea level. Altitude above sea level Vacuum
gauge reading 0 - 100 m (328 ft.): 28 inches of vacuum 300 m (984 ft.): 27 inches of vacuum 500 m
(1,641 ft.): 26 inches of vacuum 1,000 m (3,281 ft.): 24 - 25 inches of vacuum
9. When the vacuum gauge has reached the specified amount, disconnect the air hose and wait 20
seconds to see if the system loses any vacuum. If
the vacuum level drops, perform any necessary repairs to the system and repeat steps 6 - 8 to
bring the vacuum to the specified amount. Recheck for any leaks.
10. Place the coolant container (with the refill hose inserted) at the same level as the top of the
radiator. Then open the ball valve on the refill hose so
the coolant will be drawn up to fill the cooling system. The cooling system is full when the vacuum
gauge reads zero.
CAUTION: Do not allow the coolant container to get too low when filling, to avoid air from being
drawn into the cooling system.
Front
Brake Caliper: Service and Repair Front
Removal and Installation
Page 8110
Disclaimer
Parts 1-4 Descriptions
There are 4 parts to this service procedure. They must be done in order.
Part 1: Make sure DTC C1179 is or can be stored in ABS self diagnosis.
^ Go to Part 1 for this part of the service procedure.
Part 2: Download special VDC Reprogramming Data from ASIST onto your standard 8 MB
(orange) Reprogramming Card.
^ Do NOT use the 16 MB (orange) "QR25 Campaign ECM Software" Card (# J-44200-ECMR-16).
If you use this card, it will be reformatted to an 8MB card.
^ Go to Part 2 for this part of the service procedure.
Part 3: Reprogram the VDC Control Unit with the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card (that now
contains the downloaded VDC reprogramming data from ASIST).
^ Go to Part 3 for this part of the service procedure.
Part 4: Re-program the 8 MB (orange) Reprogramming Card back to its original format so it can be
used for standard ECU reprogramming.
^ Refer to Part 4 for this part of the service procedure.
NOTE:
These procedures should be performed in order by an OBD-II certified Technician.
Part 1
Part 1: Make sure DTC C1179 is, or can be, stored in ABS self diagnosis.
1. Using CONSULT-II, check ABS Self Diagnosis.
^ If DTC C1179 is stored, this bulletin applies; go to Part 2.
^ If DTC C1179 is not stored, go to the next step.
2. Turn the ignition OFF.
Page 9592
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Specifications
Parking Brake Control: Specifications
Parking Brake Control
Page 7238
^ When installing disc rotor on wheel hub and bearing assembly, position the disc rotor according
to alignment mark.
^ When installing wheel and tire. Refer to "Rotation". See: Maintenance/Wheels and
Tires/Tires/Service and Repair/Tire Rotation
Page 7976
^ These pads use a semi-metallic compound, similar to the material used in Nissan OE pads prior
to the introduction of the NAO compound.
^ Key Value semi-metallic pads offer excellent braking performance but do not offer the same level
of noise resistance as the OE-NAO pads.
^ Service customers have varying sensitivity to brake noise and the individual customer must
decide which product best suits his or her requirements, balancing price and noise resistance.
^ Make sure the Service Advisor adequately explains the differences between Key Value brake
pads and Nissan OE-NAO brake pads to the customer when discussing brake service.
Loud continuous squeak/squeal noise:
^ Occurs with or without braking.
^ This is a normal brake function. It occurs when the brake pad wear indicators contact the rotor.
^ It indicates the brake pads are worn out and need to be replaced. Install new brake pads using
the information listed under Brake Service shown in this bulletin and the appropriate Service
Manual procedures.
Groan noise when slightly releasing the brakes after coming to a stop:
^ This is sometimes called "creep groan".
^ It is a normal condition. No repair or service is necessary.
Groan noise during stopping:
^ Usually caused by glazing of the rotor's surface as a result of heavy or frequent braking.
^ Refer to technical bulletins specific to the model of vehicle regarding this incident.
^ Replace the brake pads, then resurface the rotors and finish them with sand paper. Refer to
Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Single clunk noise from front suspension when applying the brakes:
^ The noise is a result of the brake pads shifting in the direction of rotor rotation when the brakes
are applied.
^ Can be duplicated by lightly touching the brake pedal.
^ If the brake pedal is pushed hard, the noise is less likely to occur.
^ Make sure the brake pads and pad hardware (shims, springs, clips, etc) are installed correctly.
^ Refer to ASIST for vehicle specific brake service information.
^ Refer to Brake Service shown in this bulletin for additional detail.
Multiple clunk noise and/or pedal pulsation that occurs only one time after the engine is started:
^ This is a normal ABS Self Check noise. No service action is necessary.
^ The vehicle's ABS system performs a self check. On some models this self check occurs with the
first application of the brakes after the engine is started. On other models the self check occurs the
first time the vehicle reaches 5 mph after the engine is started.
Rear Brake Squeal:
^ Usually due to an accumulation of brake dust and dirt between the pads/shoes and rotors or
drums.
^ Clean all dust and dirt from the brake shoes, backing plates and related components.
WARNING:
Brake dust may be hazardous if inhaled. Refer to the Service Manual (ESM) for brake dust
precautions and use approved brake cleaning equipment.
Page 5035
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 2
Page 5302
Case 2
Page 13797
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 4902
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 8003
wrench.
Brake Judder Repair
^ Brake judder incidents must be corrected by turning the rotors with a ProCut(TM) PFM series
On-Car Brake Lathe.
^ Refer to NTB04-094 for information on using this lathe.
^ If the rotors are replaced, make sure you index them to the axle hub to ensure minimum runout
(see Rotor Indexing shown in this bulletin).
PEDAL FEEL
^ Some customers may say that the brake pedal feels too high or low when applying the brakes.
^ This may indicate the brake system needs service or it may be the result of the customer
comparing the feel of the brakes in a new car with the feel of the brakes in a previous car.
^ Road test the vehicle with the customer. Compare brake operation to a "know good vehicle and
determine if brake service is necessary. If so, refer to the following service items:
a. Inspect the brake calipers and make sure they are correctly installed and sliding freely.
b. Inspect the front and rear brakes and make sure the brake pads and/or shoes are properly
installed.
c. Bleed all air from the brake system.
d. Make sure the brake pedal stroke and free play are adjusted correctly. Refer to the BR section of
the appropriate service manual.
NOTE:
Use Essential Tool J-46532 (Brake Pedal Height Tool) for brake pedal height check and
adjustment. This tool is available from TECH-MATE.
BRAKE SERVICE
To ensure a high quality brake service be sure to:
1. Finish rotors properly.
^ This is one of the most important aspects of preventing and eliminating brake noise.
^ Use the ProCut(TM) PFM series on-car brake lathe. It has been chosen as the approved tool for
rotor resurfacing (refer to NTB04-094 for additional information).
2. Correctly install pads and shims.
IMPORTANT:
Correct installation and lubrication of brake pads and all caliper parts and hardware is essential for
proper brake operation and will help dampen noise-causing movement and vibrations.
^ Refer to ASIST (Service Bulletins and ESM) for correct installation and lubrication of brake pads,
caliper parts, and hardware.
CAUTION:
Do Not get grease on the brake pad friction surface.
3. Perform the following post-installation checks.
^ Confirm that brake pads fit snugly in the calipers. Replace worn components as necessary.
^ Test drive after repairs and burnish the new brakes. This will influence brake performance,
including noise.
a. Drive the vehicle on a straight smooth road at about 30 mph (50 kph).
b. Use medium brake pedal/foot effort to bring the vehicle to a complete stop from about 30 mph
(50 kph). Adjust your pedal/foot pressure so that the vehicle stopping time is 3-5 seconds.
c. Cool the brake system by driving at about 30 mph (50 kph) for approximately one minute without
stopping.
Page 8228
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 10015
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 6274
Fuel Gauge Sender: Service and Repair
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR UNIT, FUEL FILTER AND FUEL PUMP ASSEMBLY
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
WARNING: Follow the "General Precautions" before working on the fuel system. Refer to "General
Precautions".
1. Remove the fuel filler cap to release the pressure from inside the fuel tank.
Page 5167
Case 3
Page 825
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 4 - 7)
Page 9015
Engine Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 10843
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 2685
Coolant: Fluid Type Specifications
Coolant Type
Use Genuine Nissan Long Life Anti-freeze coolant or equivalent with the mixture ratio of 50%
anti-freeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water when adding or replacing coolant.
Page 5034
System Diagram
- Type 17
Input/Output Signal Chart Part 1
Page 11012
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 9610
System Operation
The front air control receives data from the temperature selected by the driver side, passenger
side, and rear. The front air control then applies a voltage to one circuit of the appropriate air mix
door motor, while ground is applied to the other circuit, causing the appropriate air mix door motor
to rotate. The direction of rotation is determined by which circuit has voltage applied to it, and which
one has ground applied to it. The front air control monitors the air mix door positions by measuring
the voltage signal on the PBR circuits of each door.
In AUTO mode the air mix, intake, mode door, and defrost door positions are set by the front air
control which determines the proper position based on inputs from the in-vehicle sensor, ambient
sensor, optical sensor, intake sensor, and the temperature selected by the driver and front and rear
passengers. Subsequently, HOT/COLD or DEFROST/VENT or FRESH/RECIRCULATION
operation is selected. The new door position data is returned to the front air control.
Air Mix Door Control Specification
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
Air Mix Door Motors
Page 7616
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 1610
The customer's concern may occur during hot weather or after car has sat for a short time. In such
cases you will want to check for a heat sensitive condition.
To determine if an electrical component is heat sensitive, heat the component with a heat gun or
equivalent.
Do not heat components above 60 degrees C (140 degrees F). If incident occurs while heating the
unit, either replace or properly insulate the component.
Freezing
The customer may indicate the incident goes away after the car warms up (winter time). The cause
could be related to water freezing somewhere in the wiring/electrical system.
There are two methods to check for this. The first is to arrange for the owner to leave his car
overnight. Make sure it will get cold enough to demonstrate his complaint. Leave the car parked
outside overnight. In the morning, do a quick and thorough diagnosis of those electrical
components which could be affected.
The second method is to put the suspect component into a freezer long enough for any water to
freeze. Reinstall the part into the car and check for the reoccurrence of the incident. If it occurs,
repair or replace the component.
Water Intrusion
The incident may occur only during high humidity or in rainy/snowy weather. In such cases the
incident could be caused by water intrusion on an electrical part. This can be simulated by soaking
the car or running it through a car wash.
Do not spray water directly on any electrical components.
Electrical Load
Page 8680
h. Take the shift finisher harness loose from the console.
i. At the front of the console, release harness mounting clips, disconnect harness connector, and
remove 2 screws.
j. Remove 4 screws from the bottom of the console compartments.
Page 10124
8. Use 2 new harness clips to attach the harness as shown in Figure 6.
^ P/N for new harness clips: 24225-79900
Page 1812
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 12222
Mirror Sensor LH Circuit Check (Steps 2 - 3)
Page 6672
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
Engine Control Module: Recalls Recall 10V517000: ECM Relay Replacement
VEHICLE MAKE/MODEL: MODEL YEAR(S): Infiniti/QX56 2004-2006 Nissan/Armada 2004-2006
Nissan/Frontier 2005-2006 Nissan/Pathfinder 2005-2006 Nissan/Titan 2004-2006 Nissan/Xterra
2005-2006 MANUFACTURER: Nissan North America, Inc.
MFR'S REPORT DATE: October 28, 2010
NHTSA CAMPAIGN ID NUMBER: 10V517000
NHTSA ACTION NUMBER: N/A COMPONENT: Engine and Engine Cooling
POTENTIAL NUMBER OF UNITS AFFECTED: 747480
SUMMARY: Nissan is recalling certain model year 2004-2006 Armada, Titan, Infiniti QX56 and
model year 2005-2006 Frontier, Pathfinder and XTerra vehicles. The Intelligent Power Distribution
Module (IPDM) assembly contains an Engine Control Module (ECM) relay that has a diode for
electrical current noise reduction. The ECM relay may allow silicon vapor to form and, over time,
the silicon evaporates from the diode molding which causes silicon oxide to develop on the ECM
relay contact due to arcing.
CONSEQUENCE: This could cause engine stalling increasing the risk of a crash.
REMEDY: Dealers will replace the ECM relay inside the IPDM assembly. This service will be
performed free of charge. The safety recall is expected to begin during December 2010. Owners
may contact Nissan at 1-800-647-7261.
NOTES: Owners may also contact The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration's Vehicle
Safety Hotline at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY 1-800-424-9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov.
Page 9302
^ Measure the swing torque, using Tool. When ball stud and inner socket start moving the
measured value must be within the specification. If the reading is outside the specification, replace
the socket. Tool number: (J-44372)
ROTATING TORQUE
^ Measure the rotating torque, using Tool. If the value is outside the specification, replace the outer
sockets. Tool number: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) Rotating torque: 0.3 - 2.9 Nm (0.03 - 0.29 kg-m, 3
- 25 inch lbs.)
AXIAL END PLAY
^ Apply a load of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 ft. lbs.) to the ball stud axially Use a dial gauge to measure the
amount of the movement that the stud makes. If the value is outside the specification, replace the
sockets. Outer socket: 0.5 mm (0.020 inch) or less Inner socket: 0.2 mm (0.008 inch) or less
ASSEMBLY
1. Install the inner sockets.
Page 1652
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6949
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Locations
Malfunction Indicator Lamp - Transfer Case: Locations
Location of Electrical Parts
Location of Electrical Parts
Locations
Neutral Safety Switch: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Diagram Information and Instructions
Alarm Module: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 1448
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 13122
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 3565
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 7423
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 3072
CRANKSHAFT
Page 14003
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 6866
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 7725
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 14094
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Main Power Window and Door Lock/Unlock Switch
Power Supply and Ground Circuit Check (Crew Cab)
Main Power Window And Door Lock/Unlock Switch Power Supply And Ground Circuit Check (Crew
Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Specifications
Firing Order: Specifications
Firing Order
1-8-7-3-6-5-4-2
#1 cylinder
Page 8446
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 12539
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 7800
4. The "REPROGRAM START" window should appear (see Figure 18).
NOTE:
If you get an error message, refer to the ECU Reprogramming Software Operations Manual *.
* This is found in ASIST under:
CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-II info.
CAUTION DURING REPROGRAMMING:
^ Do not unplug CONSULT-II from the vehicle during reprogramming. Permanent ABS/VDC
damage can occur.
^ Do not open any door or the trunk during reprogramming.
^ On some vehicles, the cooling fans may come on during reprogramming. This is a normal
condition. Do not disconnect the cooling fans. Forgetting to reconnect them may cause severe
engine damage. A vehicle battery charger is needed* to maintain the battery voltage level during
reprogramming.
* You should have hooked up a battery charger in Section 1.
5. Press [START]. See Figure 18.
^ After a few seconds, the window shown in Figure 19 will appear.
^ The screen backlight in CONSULT-II will now turn OFF.
^ When the screen backlight goes OFF, ABS/VDC reprogramming has started.
Page 1632
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
REMOVAL
1. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor electrical connector. 2. Disconnect the refrigerant
pressure sensor electrical connector and remove the refrigerant pressure sensor from the
condenser.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
- Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil
to it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 1215
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 12430
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 881
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 4324
Optional Splice
Page 12859
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Service and Repair
Front Crankshaft Seal: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation of Front Oil Seal REMOVAL
1. Remove the engine. 2. Remove the crankshaft pulley.
3. Remove the front oil seal using suitable tool.
CAUTION: Do not damage front cover and oil pump drive spacer.
INSTALLATION
1. Apply new engine oil to both the oil seal lip and dust seal lip of the new front oil seal. 2. Install
the front oil seal.
^ Install the front oil seal so that each seal lip is oriented as shown.
^ Press-fit until the height of the front oil seal is level with the mounting surface using suitable tool.
CAUTION: ^
Do not damage front timing chain case and crankshaft.
^ Press-fit straight and avoid causing burrs or tilting oil seal.
3. Installation of the remaining components is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 9094
h. Take the shift finisher harness loose from the console.
i. At the front of the console, release harness mounting clips, disconnect harness connector, and
remove 2 screws.
j. Remove 4 screws from the bottom of the console compartments.
Specifications
Flex Plate: Specifications
Flexplate
Torque .................................................................................................................................................
.............................. 88.2 Nm (9.0 kg-m, 65 ft. lbs.)
Page 13388
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 14472
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 14222
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 3133
Page 11158
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 7601
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Page 4929
Diagnostic Procedure (Steps 8 - 11)
Page 2780
Refrigerant Oil: Service and Repair Manual Air Conditioner
OIL
Maintenance of Oil Quantity in Compressor
The oil in the compressor circulates through the system with the refrigerant. Add oil to compressor
when replacing any component or after a large refrigerant leakage has occurred. It is important to
maintain the specified amount.
If oil quantity is not maintained properly, the following malfunctions may result:
- Lack of oil: May lead to a seized compressor
- Excessive oil: Inadequate cooling (thermal exchange interference)
OIL
Name: NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S (DH-PS) or equivalent Part number: KLH00-PAGS0
CHECKING AND ADJUSTING
CAUTION: If excessive oil leakage is noted, do not perform the oil return operation. Start the
engine and set the following conditions:
Test Condition
- Engine speed: Idling to 1,200 rpm
- A/C switch: On
- Blower fan speed: MAX position
- Temp. control: Optional [Set so that intake air temperature is 25 degrees to 30 degrees C (77
degrees to 86 degrees F)]
- Intake position: Recirculation
- Perform oil return operation for about ten minutes
Adjust the oil quantity according to the table.
Oil Adjusting Procedure for Components Replacement Except Compressor
After replacing any of the following major components, add the correct amount of oil to the system.
Oil Adjustment Procedure for Compressor Replacement
Page 13027
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 10656
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 13624
Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set
Evaporative Canister Filter: Customer Interest Emissions - MIL ON/Multiple EVAP DTC's Set
Classification: EC06-009B
Reference: NTB06-095B
Date: September 2, 2008
2004 ARMADA / 2004-2006 TITAN; MIL "ON" WITH DTC P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446
APPLIED VEHICLES:2004-2006 Titan (A60)
2004 Armada (TA60)
This bulletin has been amended to add DTC P0448. No other changes have been made.
IF YOU CONFIRM:
A MIL "ON" with one or more of the following DTC(s) stored:
^ P0442 / P0448 / P0455 / P0456 / P1446
AND
^ EVAP Vent Control S/V is stuck open or will not seal when operated/closed.
ACTIONS:
All applied vehicles:
Replace the EVAP Vent Control S/V.
Clear any DTC(s) stored in the ECM.
AND IF the vehicle is a 2004-2006 Titan:
Refer to the Install Filter Kit Service Procedure of this bulletin.
AND IF the vehicle is a 2004 Armada:
Refer to the Install Protector Service Procedure of this bulletin.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 9056
22. Remove the carpet clips shown in the figure below.
23. Pull the seat branch through the carpet.
24. Lift the floor carpet, remove the ground bolt and take the SRS branch loose from the floor.
Page 4869
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Automatic Air Conditioner
Cabin Air Filter: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
Removal and Installation
FUNCTION
The air inside the passenger compartment is filtered by the in-cabin microfilters when the heater or
A/C controls are set on either the recirculation or fresh mode. The two in-cabin microfilters are
located in the heater and cooling unit assembly.
REPLACEMENT TIMING
Replacement of the two in-cabin microfilters is recommended on a regular interval depending on
the driving conditions. Refer to "PERIODIC MAINTENANCE". It may also be necessary to replace
the two in-cabin microfilters as part of a component replacement if the in-cabin microfilters are
damaged.
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
1. Remove the two lower glove box hinge pins to remove the glove box from the instrument panel
and let it hang from the cord.
2. Remove the screw and remove the in-cabin microfilter cover. 3. Remove the in-cabin microfilters
from the heater and cooling unit assembly housing.
Page 13813
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 13825
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 8219
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 5182
Case 4
Page 5259
Case 12
Page 10304
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 13282
Brake Light Switch: Testing and Inspection
STOP LAMP SWITCH
1. Turn ignition switch OFF. 2. Disconnect stop lamp switch harness connector.
3. Check harness continuity between stop lamp switch terminals 1 and 2 under the given
conditions.
If NG, adjust stop lamp switch installation, refer to "BRAKE PEDAL", and perform step 3 again.
Page 13846
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 1148
Page 14420
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Testing and Inspection
Fusible Link: Testing and Inspection
Fusible Link
A melted fusible link can be detected either by visual inspection or by feeling with finger tip. If its
condition is questionable, use circuit tester or test lamp.
CAUTION:
- If fusible link should melt, it is possible that critical circuit (power supply or large current carrying
circuit) is shorted. In such a case, carefully check and eliminate cause of incident.
- Never wrap outside of fusible link with vinyl tape.
- Never let fusible link touch any other wiring harness, vinyl or rubber parts.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Ignition Switch: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 6683
4. Install new O-ring in A/T assembly harness connector.
NOTE: ^
Do not reuse O-ring.
^ Apply ATF to O-ring.
5. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 to bracket.
6. Install A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 (with bracket) in control valve with TCM. Tighten A/T fluid
temperature sensor 2 bolt to the specified
torque. Refer to "Components". See: Transmission and Drivetrain/Automatic
Transmission/Transaxle/Service and Repair/Overhaul (Component Parts)/Components
CAUTION: Adjust bolt hole of bracket to bolt hole of control valve with TCM.
7. Install control valve with TCM in transmission case.
CAUTION: ^
Make sure that turbine revolution sensor securely installs turbine revolution sensor hole.
^ Hang down revolution sensor harness toward outside so as not to disturb installation of control
valve with TCM.
^ Adjust A/T assembly harness connector of control valve with TCM to terminal hole of
transmission case.
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Relay Box: Locations IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
IPDM E/R Terminal Arrangement
Page 4679
Page 1267
Power Door Lock Switch: Locations Power Window System
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 9138
Page 495
Body Control Module: Description and Operation
BCM (BODY CONTROL MODULE)
System Description
- BCM (Body Control Module) controls the operation of various electrical units installed on the
vehicle.
BCM FUNCTION
BCM has a combination switch reading function for reading the operation of combination switches
(light, wiper washer, turn signal) in addition to the function for controlling the operation of various
electrical components. Also, it functions as an interface that receives signals from the front air
control, and sends signals to ECM using CAN communication.
COMBINATION SWITCH READING FUNCTION
1. Description
- BCM reads combination switch (light, wiper) status, and controls various electrical components
according to the results.
- BCM reads information of a maximum of 20 switches by combining five output terminals
(OUTPUT 1-5) and five input terminals (INPUT 1-5).
2. Operation description
- BCM activates transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) periodically and allows current to
flow in turn.
- If any (1 or more) of the switches are turned ON, circuit of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) and
input terminals (INPUT 1-5) becomes active.
- At this time, transistors of output terminals (OUTPUT 1-5) are activated to allow current to flow.
When voltage of input terminals (INPUT 1-5) corresponding to that switch changes, interface in
BCM detects voltage change and BCM determines that switch is ON.
Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Power Distribution Module: Reading and Clearing Diagnostic Trouble Codes
CONSULT-II Basic Operation
CONSULT-II BASIC OPERATION
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
1. With the ignition switch OFF, connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT- II CONVERTER to the data
link connector, then turn ignition switch ON.
2. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)". 3. Touch "IPDM E/R" on "SELECT SYSTEM" screen.
- If "IPDM E/R" is not displayed refer to "CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit".
Page 6258
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 6477
Page 10495
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 1968
Accelerator Pedal Position Sensor: Description and Operation
APP SENSOR
Component Description
The accelerator pedal position sensor is installed on the upper end of the accelerator pedal
assembly. The sensor detects the accelerator position and sends a signal to the ECM.
Accelerator pedal position sensor has two sensors. These sensors are a kind of potentiometers
which transform the accelerator pedal position into output voltage, and emit the voltage signal to
the ECM. In addition, these sensors detect the opening and closing speed of the accelerator pedal
and feed the voltage signals to the ECM. The ECM judges the current opening angle of the
accelerator pedal from these signals and controls the throttle control motor based on these signals.
Idle position of the accelerator pedal is determined by the ECM receiving the signal from the
accelerator pedal position sensor. The ECM uses this signal for the engine operation such as fuel
cut.
Page 10673
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 7073
13. Connect revolution sensor connector.
14. Securely fasten revolution sensor harness with terminal clips.
15. Install oil pan to transmission case. 16. Pull up A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
17. Install snap ring to A/T assembly harness connector. 18. Connect A/T assembly harness
connector. 19. Pour ATF into transmission assembly. 20. Connect the negative battery terminal
CAUTION: After completing installation, check A/T fluid leakage and fluid level.
Page 14316
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 4748
Page 12193
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 7367
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
harness.
Page 6961
4. Remove snap ring from A/T assembly harness connector.
5. Push A/T assembly harness connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
6. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket. 7. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
8. Straighten terminal clip to free terminal cord assembly and A/T fluid temperature sensor 2
harness.
Page 13926
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab)
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 14405
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 1569
Page 12722
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 5194
Check Sheet Part 2
Check Sheet Results (Example)
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
Page 1127
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Page 8231
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 3912
Page 1834
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 13563
Combination Switch Inspection (Step 3)
Page 9994
- Use new bolts from the Fan Protector Kit. Bolt torque: 4.5 N.m (0.45, kg-m, 40 in-lb)
Figure D-16
- Mount the harness connector and clip the harness in place.
14. Attach 3 tie-wraps as shown in Figure D-17.
- Use 7 1/2 inch (19.5 cm) tie-wraps from the protector kit.
- Use the large 1 o'clock and 5 o'clock ribs for reference.
Figure D-17
Page 8363
3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1.
4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2).
5. Replace the battery.
^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece.
6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together.
7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated
in the dot matrix display.
8. If the indicator is still illuminated:
a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door.
b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off.
Page 1736
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 202
2. Check the CONSULT-II's "Charger Input" reading (see Figure 15).
NOTE:
^ "Battery Voltage" is the voltage level of CONSULT-II's battery.
^ "Charger Input" is the voltage level of the vehicle's battery. (It MUST be above 12 volts.)
3. As mentioned, the "Charger Input" reading MUST be above 12 volts (see Figure 15).
^ A reading above 12 volts confirms;
a. The DLC-II is properly connected to the vehicle,
b. The vehicle battery voltage is sufficient for ABS/VDC reprogramming, and
c. CONSULT-II has a sufficient power supply to perform ABS/VDC reprogramming.
^ If the vehicle's battery voltage ("Charger Input") is below 12 volts, one or more of the following
may be the cause:
a. The battery charger you hooked up in section 1 is not charging the battery (poor connection or it
is not working).
b. The DLC-II does not have a good connection to the vehicle (not straight).
c. The DLC-II cable may have a malfunction (damaged wire or pins).
d. The CONSULT-II Converter (J44200-50 / black box) is not working correctly (see Figure 11).
CAUTION:
^ Do not attempt ABS/VDC reprogramming if the vehicle's battery voltage is below 12 volts.
^ Permanent ABSNDC damage can occur if the vehicle battery does not maintain the minimum
voltage during ABS/VDC reprogramming.
^ If "Charger Input" is above 12 volts, power from the vehicle battery will keep CONSULT-II's power
supply at the correct level during reprogramming (see Figure 15).
4. Continue with Section 4.
Section 4
Section 4: Perform ABSNDC Control Unit Reprogramming
1. Press [BACK] two times.
Page 7123
COMPONENTS
NOTE: Rear final drive shown, front final drive similar.
DRAINING 1. Stop the engine. 2. Remove the drain plug and drain the gear oil. 3. Apply sealant to
the drain plug. Install the drain plug on the final drive assembly and tighten to specification.
^ Use Genuine Silicone RTV or equivalent. Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS", (FFD). Refer to
"Removal and Installation" (RFD without ELD). See: Service and Repair/Rear Differential (Without
Electronic Locking)/Removal
Page 7417
Page 11557
19. Connect latch switch connector (see Figure 13).
20. Reinstall latch switch connector onto door.
21. Reinstall gray anti-rattle foam.
22. Test upper door latch operation:
a. Use your thumb to push upper door latch into the closed position (see Figure 14).
Page 10238
1. Before connecting recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle, check recovery/recycling equipment
gauges. No refrigerant pressure should be
displayed. If NG, recover refrigerant from equipment lines.
2. Connect recovery/recycling equipment to vehicle. Confirm refrigerant purity in supply tank using
recovery/recycling equipment and refrigerant
identifier. If NG, refer to "Contaminated Refrigerant".
3. Confirm refrigerant purity in vehicle A/C system using recovery/recycling equipment and
refrigerant identifier. If NG, refer to "Contaminated
Refrigerant".
4. Discharge refrigerant into the refrigerant recovery/recycling equipment. Measure oil discharged
into the recovery/recycling equipment. 5. Drain the oil from the "old" (removed) compressor into a
graduated container and recover the amount of oil drained. 6. Drain the oil from the "new"
compressor into a separate, clean container. 7. Measure an amount of new oil installed equal to
amount drained from "old" compressor. Add this oil to "new" compressor through the suction port
opening.
8. Measure an amount of new oil equal to the amount recovered during discharging. Add this oil to
"new" compressor through the suction port
opening.
9. If the liquid tank also needs to be replaced, add an additional 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of
oil at this time.
CAUTION: Do not add this 5 ml (0.2 US fl oz, 0.2 Imp fl oz) of oil if only replacing the compressor.
Page 9976
Figure C-6, Figure C-7
b. Remove the 4 bumper bolts shown.
c. Lift the bumper OFF of the locating tabs; both sides.
For Titan with plastic bumper (body color bumper), do the following:
Page 96
Navigation Module: Service and Repair
NAVI CONTROL UNIT
Removal
CAUTION: To avoid damage, eject map DVD-ROM before removing the NAVI control unit.
1. Disconnect negative battery cable. 2. Remove front passenger seat.
3. Remove NAVI control unit kick shield screws (A). 4. Remove NAVI control unit kick shield (1). 5.
Disconnect NAVI control unit connectors. 6. Remove NAVI control unit screws (B). 7. Remove
NAVI control unit (2).
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 12451
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 4273
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Mirrors - Power/Manual Mirror Actuator Inoperative
Power Mirror Motor: All Technical Service Bulletins Mirrors - Power/Manual Mirror Actuator
Inoperative
Classification: BT06-005
Reference: NTB06-074
Date: October 30, 2006
2004-2006 TITAN AND ARMADA; MANUAL OR POWER DOOR
MIRROR ACTUATOR INOPERABLE
APPLIED VEHICLE(S): 2004-2006 Titan (A60) 2004-2006 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM The door mirror actuator needs to be replaced.
ACTION
^ Do not replace the complete door mirror assembly.
^ Replace only the door mirror actuator.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
PARTS INFORMATION
Page 13733
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 13732
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 1665
Door Switch Check (Steps 2 - 4)
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 12926
Optional Splice
Specifications
Timing Chain: Specifications
INSPECTION AFTER REMOVAL
Check for cracks and any excessive wear at link plates. Replace chain if necessary. ^
In the same way as for the LH bank, inspect the timing chain and associated parts on the RH bank.
Page 1214
1. Assemble a male terminal and approx. 10 cm (3.9 in) of wire.
Use a male terminal which matches the female terminal.
2. Disconnect the suspected faulty connector and hold it terminal side up.
3. While holding the wire of the male terminal, try to insert the male terminal into the female
terminal.
Do not force the male terminal into the female terminal with your hands.
4. While moving the connector, check whether the male terminal can be easily inserted or not.
- If the male terminal can be easily inserted into the female terminal, replace the female terminal.
Waterproof Connector Inspection
If water enters the connector, it can short interior circuits. This may lead to intermittent problems.
Check the following items to maintain the original waterproof characteristics.
RUBBER SEAL INSPECTION
Page 13829
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 509
6. Touch "A60" and "OK" on "VEHICLE SELECT" screen. For canceling, touch "CANCEL" on
"VEHICLE SELECT" screen.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See:
Application and ID
7. Touch "WRITE CONFIGURATION" on "SELECT CONFIG ITEM" screen.
8. Touch "YES".
For canceling, touch "NO".
9. Set by touching selection on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen based on the following ITEM
LIST.
Do not apply MODE3 or MODE4.
NOTE: Confirm vehicle model. Refer to "Model Variation" in Vehicle/Application and ID. See:
Application and ID
10. Touch "CHNG SETTING" on "WRITE CONFIGURATION" screen.
CAUTION: Make sure to touch "CHNG SETTING" even if the indicated configuration of new BCM
is same as the desirable configuration. If
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7668
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 6667
Function and System Application
Nickel Metal Hydride Battery Replacement
CONSULT-II contains a nickel metal hydride battery. When replacing the battery obey the
following:
WARNING: Replace the nickel metal hydride battery with Genuine CONSULT-II battery only. Use
of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion. The battery may present a fire or
chemical burn hazard if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire. Keep the
battery out of reach of children and discard used battery conforming to the local regulations.
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature
Sensor 2
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T
Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
COMPONENTS
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect
A/T assembly harness connector.
Service and Repair
Seals and Gaskets: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle shaft is removed and installed.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the axle oil seal. The axle oil seal must be replaced every time the axle
shaft assembly is removed from the axle shaft housing.
Page 9840
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 7721
- Connect the other probe to the fuse block (power) side of SW1. Little or no resistance will indicate
that portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point A)
- Connect the probes between SW1 and the relay. Little or no resistance will indicate that portion of
the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would indicate an over
limit or infinite resistance condition. (point B)
- Connect the probes between the relay and the solenoid. Little or no resistance will indicate that
portion of the circuit has good continuity. If there were an open in the circuit, the DMM would
indicate an over limit or infinite resistance condition. (point C)
Any circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits please refer to the previous schematic.
In any powered circuit, an open can be found by methodically checking the system for the
presence of voltage. This is done by switching the DMM to the voltage function.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to a known good ground.
- Begin probing at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end.
- With SW1 open, probe at SW1 to check for voltage. voltage; open is further down the circuit than
SW1. no voltage; open is between fuse block and SW1 (point A).
- Close SW1 and probe at relay. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the relay. no voltage;
open is between SW1 and relay (point B).
- Close the relay and probe at the solenoid. voltage; open is further down the circuit than the
solenoid. no voltage; open is between relay and solenoid (point C).
Any powered circuit can be diagnosed using the approach in the previous example.
Testing for "Shorts" in the Circuit
To simplify the discussion of shorts in the system, please refer to the following schematic.
RESISTANCE CHECK METHOD
- Disconnect the battery negative cable and remove the blown fuse.
- Disconnect all loads (SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid disconnected) powered through
the fuse.
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the load side of the fuse terminal. Connect the other probe to a
known good ground.
- With SW1 open, check for continuity. continuity; short is between fuse terminal and SW1 (point
A). no continuity; short is further down the circuit than SW1.
- Close SW1 and disconnect the relay. Put probes at the load side of fuse terminal and a known
good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B).
no continuity; short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- Close SW1 and jump the relay contacts with jumper wire. Put probes at the load side of fuse
terminal and a known good ground. Then, check for continuity. continuity; short is between relay
and solenoid (point C). no continuity; check solenoid, retrace steps.
VOLTAGE CHECK METHOD
- Remove the blown fuse and disconnect all loads (i.e. SW1 open, relay disconnected and solenoid
disconnected) powered through the fuse.
- Turn the ignition key to the ON or START position. Verify battery voltage at the battery + side of
the fuse terminal (one lead on the battery + terminal side of the fuse block and one lead on a
known good ground).
- With SW1 open and the DMM leads across both fuse terminals, check for voltage.
Page 291
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 5982
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 2362
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 11415
2. Remove screw and remove end cap.
- Remove reinforcement from end cap.
3. Release clips and remove step pad from running board. 4. Remove nuts and bolts and remove
running board brackets.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 417
Power Distribution Module: Scan Tool Testing and Procedures
Active Test
ACTIVE TEST
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "ACTIVE TEST" on "SELECT DIAG-MODE" screen. 2. Touch item to be tested, and
check operation. 3. Touch "START".
Part 1
Part 2
4. Touch "STOP" while testing to stop the operation.
Data Monitor
DATA MONITOR
Operation Procedure
1. Touch "DATA MONITOR" on "SELECT DIAG MODE" screen.
2. Touch "ALL SIGNALS", "MAIN SIGNALS" or "SELECTION FROM MENU" on the "DATA
MONITOR" screen. 3. Touch "START". 4. When "SELECTION FROM MENU" is selected, touch
items to be monitored. When "ALL SIGNALS" is selected, all the items will be
monitored. When "MAIN SIGNALS" is selected, predetermined items are monitored.
5. Touch RECORD while monitoring to record the status of the item being monitored. To stop
recording, touch STOP.
Page 12583
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 12501
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 819
ECM Inspection Table Part 9
ECM INSPECTION TABLE
Specification data are reference values and are measured between each terminal and ground.
Pulse signal is measured by CONSULT-II.
CAUTION: Do not use ECM ground terminals when measuring input/output voltage. Doing so may
result in damage to the ECMs transistor. Use a ground other than ECM terminals, such as the
ground.
CAN Communication
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 7823
4. The "REPROGRAM START" window should appear (see Figure 18).
NOTE:
If you get an error message, refer to the ECU Reprogramming Software Operations Manual *.
* This is found in ASIST under:
CONSULT Utilities, CONSULT-II info.
CAUTION DURING REPROGRAMMING:
^ Do not unplug CONSULT-II from the vehicle during reprogramming. Permanent ABS/VDC
damage can occur.
^ Do not open any door or the trunk during reprogramming.
^ On some vehicles, the cooling fans may come on during reprogramming. This is a normal
condition. Do not disconnect the cooling fans. Forgetting to reconnect them may cause severe
engine damage. A vehicle battery charger is needed* to maintain the battery voltage level during
reprogramming.
* You should have hooked up a battery charger in Section 1.
5. Press [START]. See Figure 18.
^ After a few seconds, the window shown in Figure 19 will appear.
^ The screen backlight in CONSULT-II will now turn OFF.
^ When the screen backlight goes OFF, ABS/VDC reprogramming has started.
Page 255
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 8444
Engine Controls - ECM Programming Interruption
Recovery
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM Programming
Interruption Recovery
Classification: EC10-015
Reference: NTB10-078
Date: June 21, 2010
REPROGRAM INTERRUPTION RECOVERY PROCEDURE
SERVICE INFORMATION
A complete step-by-step General Procedure for CONSULT-III (C-III) ECM Reprogram Interruption
Recovery is now available by attachment in this bulletin.
While performing ECM (Engine Control Module) reprogramming, the reprogramming may stop
(become interrupted) before it is 100% complete.
One of two messages may appear:
^ The VI probe is disconnected on USB, please check the connection of the probe.
^ Reprogramming fail, "Error code 0".
In many cases, reprogramming recovery is possible and the ECM may not need to be replaced if
the complete ECM part number has been registered into the ECM before reprogramming stopped.
NOTE:
ECM is referred to as ECU in C-III.
The ECM Reprogram Interruption Recovery General Procedure applies to Technical Service
Bulletins that include ECM reprogramming published in April 2010 and later.
IMPORTANT: BEFORE STARTING REPROGRAMMING
^ Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery.
^ Be sure to turn OFF all vehicle electrical loads.
^ For ECM reprogramming, the C-III MUST be connected to the VI using the USB cable.
^ Be sure to connect the AC Adapter.
Page 5305
Case 5
Page 9422
Wheel Bearing: Testing and Inspection Rear Axle
WHEEL BEARING INSPECTION
Check the axial end play, replace as necessary. ^
Check that the axle shaft bearing operates smoothly. Replace as necessary.
Page 5325
Case 6
Page 1994
Crankshaft Position Sensor: Description and Operation
CKP SENSOR (POS)
Component Description
The crankshaft position sensor (POS) is located on the A/T assembly facing the gear teeth (cogs)
of the signal plate. It detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution.
The sensor consists of a permanent magnet and Hall IC.
When the engine is running, the high and low parts of the teeth cause the gap with the sensor to
change.
The changing gap causes the magnetic field near the sensor to change. Due to the changing
magnetic field, the voltage from the sensor changes.
The ECM receives the voltage signal and detects the fluctuation of the engine revolution. ECM
receives the signals as shown in the figure.
Page 22
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 794
The incident may be electrical load sensitive. Perform diagnosis with all accessories (including A/C,
rear window defogger, radio, fog lamps) turned on.
Cold or Hot Start Up
On some occasions an electrical incident may occur only when the car is started cold, or it may
occur when the car is restarted hot shortly after being turned off. In these cases you may have to
keep the car overnight to make a proper diagnosis.
CIRCUIT INSPECTION
Introduction
In general, testing electrical circuits is an easy task if it is approached in a logical and organized
method.
Before beginning it is important to have all available information on the system to be tested. Also,
get a thorough understanding of system operation. Then you will be able to use the appropriate
equipment and follow the correct test procedure.
You may have to simulate vehicle vibrations while testing electrical components. Gently shake the
wiring harness or electrical component to do this.
NOTE: Refer to "How to Check Terminal" to probe or check terminal.
Testing for "Opens" in the Circuit
Before you begin to diagnose and test the system, you should rough sketch a schematic of the
system. This will help you to logically walk through the diagnosis process. Drawing the sketch will
also reinforce your working knowledge of the system.
CONTINUITY CHECK METHOD
The continuity check is used to find an open in the circuit. The digital multimeter (DMM) set on the
resistance function will indicate an open circuit as over limit (no beep tone or no ohms symbol).
Make sure to always start with the DMM at the highest resistance level.
To help in understanding the diagnosis of open circuits, please refer to the previous schematic.
- Disconnect the battery negative cable.
- Start at one end of the circuit and work your way to the other end. (At the fuse block in this
example)
- Connect one probe of the DMM to the fuse block terminal on the load side.
Page 11548
Disclaimer
Service Procedure
1. Record all radio presets.
2. Make sure the ignition switch is OFF.
3. Disconnect both battery cables (negative cable first) and wait for at least 3 minutes.
Page 7418
Wire Color Code Identification
Wiring Color Code
B = Black W = White R = Red G = Green L = Blue Y = Yellow LG = Light Green
Page 10414
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
CONSULT-II Checking System
CONSULT-II CHECKING SYSTEM
Description
- CONSULT-II is a hand-held type tester. When it is connected with a diagnostic connector
equipped on the vehicle side, it will communicate with the control unit equipped in the vehicle and
then enable various kinds of diagnostic tests.
- Refer to "CONSULT Operator's Manual" for more information.
Page 12951
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 3448
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 8348
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Page 1859
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 13622
CONNECTOR SYMBOL
Harness Connector Descriptions
HARNESS CONNECTOR
Description
HARNESS CONNECTOR (TAB-LOCKING TYPE)
- The tab-locking type connectors help prevent accidental looseness or disconnection.
- The tab-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or lifting the locking tab(s). Refer to
the given illustration.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
Page 253
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 11725
Front Door Lock Assembly LH (Key Cylinder Switch) Check (Crew Cab) (Steps 2 - 4)
Page 8346
- Connect the DMM across the connector or part of the circuit you want to check. The positive lead
of the DMM should be closer to power and the negative lead closer to ground.
- Operate the circuit.
- The DMM will indicate how many volts are being used to "push" current through that part of the
circuit.
Note in the illustration that there is an excessive 4.1 volt drop between the battery and the bulb.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - STEP-BY-STEP
The step-by-step method is most useful for isolating excessive drops in low voltage systems (such
as those in "Computer Controlled Systems").
Circuits in the "Computer Controlled System" operate on very low amperage.
The (Computer Controlled) system operations can be adversely affected by any variation in
resistance in the system. Such resistance variation may be caused by poor connection, improper
installation, improper wire gauge or corrosion.
The step by step voltage drop test can identify a component or wire with too much resistance.
Control Unit Circuit Test
Page 59
Description and Operation
Canister Vent Valve: Description and Operation
EVAP CANISTER VENT CONTROL VALVE
Component Description
The EVAP canister vent control valve is located on the EVAP canister and is used to seal the
canister vent.
This solenoid valve responds to signals from the ECM. When the ECM sends an ON signal, the coil
in the solenoid valve is energized.
A plunger will then move to seal the canister vent. The ability to seal the vent is necessary for the
on board diagnosis of other evaporative emission control system components.
This solenoid valve is used only for diagnosis, and usually remains opened.
When the vent is closed, under normal purge conditions, the evaporative emission control system
is depressurized and allows "EVAP Control System" diagnosis.
Page 9004
All Signals, Main Signals, Selection From Menu
Page 13576
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 864
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 13537
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 6614
Control Unit: Service and Repair
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL 1. Disconnect the battery cable from the negative terminal. 2. Remove jack and tools. 3.
Remove upper bracket of center seat belt retractor and belt assembly. 4. Remove the necessary
push pins and reposition rear panel out of the way.
5. Reposition the carpet to access differential lock control unit to disconnect connector. 6. Remove
the two nuts and remove differential lock control unit.
INSTALLATION Note the following, and installation is in the reverse order of removal. ^
When installing differential lock control unit, tighten nuts to the specified torque. Differential lock
control unit nuts: 5.1 Nm (0.52 kg-m, 45 inch lbs.)
Page 1296
9. Detach 2 harness clips as shown from seat cushion pan.
WARNING:
Before removal, make careful note of the exact routing and clip placement of the harnesses for
reassembly.
Page 2470
IMPORTANT:
If you do not attach the above item to the Repair Order, the claim may be denied (rejected or
charged back).
ALSO: A copy of the yearly alignment machine calibration certification must be held on file in the
Service Dept.
4. Make sure the "turn plates" and "slide" plates are in good working order:
^ The surface of the front turn plates must be level with (the same height as) the rack surface.
If height is not the same; have the equipment repaired before performing any alignments.
^ Make sure the front turn plates:
> Do not wobble (no up/down movement).
> Operate (slide and turn) smoothly in all directions.
If there is any issue with the turn plate operation - have the equipment repaired before performing
any alignments.
Page 4533
Body Control Module: Service and Repair
BCM
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal
NOTE: If possible, before removing BCM, retrieve current BCM configuration to use for reference
when configuring new BCM after installation. Refer to "Configuration". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
1. Disconnect battery negative cable. 2. Remove lower knee bolster.
3. Remove screw and release BCM. 4. Disconnect connectors and then remove BCM.
Installation
Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
- When replacing BCM, it must be configured. Refer to "Configuration". See: Testing and
Inspection/Programming and Relearning
- When replacing BCM, perform initialization of NATS system and registration of all NATS ignition
key IDs. Refer to BL-139, "NVIS(NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System-NATS)". See: Accessories
and Optional Equipment/Antitheft and Alarm Systems
- When replacing BCM, perform ID registration procedure of low tire pressure warning system.
Refer to WT-15, "ID Registration Procedure".
Automatic Air Conditioner
Refrigerant Pressure Sensor / Switch: Service and Repair Automatic Air Conditioner
Removal and Installation for Refrigerant Pressure Sensor
REMOVAL
1. Discharge the refrigerant. Refer to "HFC-134a (R-134a) Service Procedure".
2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure sensor electrical connector and remove the refrigerant
pressure sensor from the condenser.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal. Refer to "Components".
CAUTION:
- Be careful not to damage the condenser fins.
- Replace the O-ring of the refrigerant pressure sensor with a new one, then apply compressor oil
to it when installing it.
- After charging refrigerant, check for leaks.
Page 502
ITEMS OF EACH PART
Display Item List - Work Support
With Generic Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Without Scan Tool
Information is not supplied by the manufacturer.
Page 10992
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 13151
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 5897
Abbreviations
How to Read Harness Layout
Harness Layout
HOW TO READ HARNESS LAYOUT
The following Harness Layouts use a map style grid to help locate connectors on the drawings:
- Main Harness
- Engine Room Harness LH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Room Harness RH View (Engine Compartment)
- Engine Control Harness
- Chassis Harness and Rear Sonar Sensor Sub-harness
- Body Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body Harness (Crew Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (King Cab Models)
- Body No. 2 Harness (Crew Cab Models)
To use the grid reference
1. Find the desired connector number on the connector list. 2. Find the grid reference. 3. On the
drawing, find the crossing of the grid reference letter column and number row. 4. Find the
connector number in the crossing zone. 5. Follow the line (if used) to the connector.
Page 10806
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 8739
55. Remove the assist grip (passenger side only).
^ Open the side bolt covers.
^ Remove the 2 bolts.
56. Remove the dome lamp.
a. Remove the clear lamp cover
b. Remove the 2 screws.
c. Let the lamp hang by the electrical connector.
Page 5607
Page 8867
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11716
3. Insert the screwdriver into either of the slots shown in Figure 1.
4. Turn the screwdriver until the two cover pieces separate (see Figure 2).
5. Replace the battery.
^ Make sure the + side of the battery faces the bottom cover piece.
6. Reattach the two cover pieces by pushing them together.
7. Turn on the vehicle and confirm the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator is not illuminated
in the dot matrix display.
8. If the indicator is still illuminated:
a) Turn off and exit the vehicle, making sure to close the door.
b) Re-enter the vehicle and turn it on. The indicator should be off.
Page 14176
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 8967
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 10363
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 12344
DESCRIPTION
Harness Indication
Page 5781
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 13472
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored
Battery Cable: All Technical Service Bulletins Electrical - MIL ON/DTC's U1010 or U1000 Stored
Classification: EC06-001A
Reference: NTB06-009A
Date: March 31, 2006
MIL "ON" WITH DTC U1000 OR U101 STORED IN ENGINE CONTROL UNIT
This bulletin has been amended. The Applied Vehicles IF YOU CONFIRM and Claims Information
sections have been changed. No other content has been changed Discard all previous versions of
this bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES
IF YOU CONFIRM
The MIL is "ON" with
^ DTC U1000 (CAN COMM CIRCUIT) OR
^ DTC U1010 (CAN COMM) [2006 Models only] stored in the engine control unit,
and
There are no drivability incidents.
DETERMINE IF
This bulletin applies by performing steps 1 and 2 of the Service Procedure.
ACTIONS
If this bulletin applies, there may be excess resistance in certain ground connections:
^ Clean/re-tighten ECM ground connections.
^ Clean/re-tighten negative battery cable body connection and battery post connection.
^ If needed, clean and ensure good contact between the steering member assembly and the left
side instrument stay assembly.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTIONS" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing the repair.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Testing and Inspection
Radiator Cap: Testing and Inspection
CHECKING RADIATOR CAP
Inspect the radiator cap.
NOTE: Thoroughly wipe out the radiator filler neck to remove any waxy residue or foreign material.
^ Replace the cap if the metal plunger cannot be seen around the edge of the black rubber gasket.
^ Replace the cap if deposits of waxy residue or other foreign material are on the black rubber
gasket or the metal retainer.
Component Locations
Coolant Temperature Sensor/Switch (For Computer): Component Locations
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 10314
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 13541
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 12060
Reclining Motor LH Circuit Inspection (Steps 3 - 4)
Service and Repair
Grille: Service and Repair
FRONT GRILLE
Removal and Installation
REMOVAL
1. Release plastic clips and remove front grille. 2. Remove LH and RH front bumper filler panels.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 7731
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 8485
Super Multiple Junction (SMJ) - Terminal Arrangement
Electrical Units
Electrical Units - Terminal Arrangement
Page 10095
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 11805
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness (connector) wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle M33 indicate harness connectors.
Component Indication
Connector numbers in a double circle F211 indicate component connectors.
Switch Positions
Switches are shown in wiring diagrams as if the vehicle is in the "normal" condition. A vehicle is in
the "normal" condition when:
- ignition switch is "OFF",
- doors, hood and trunk lid/back door are closed,
- pedals are not depressed, and
- parking brake is released.
Detectable Lines and Non-Detectable Lines
Locations
Passenger Compartment Electrical Units Locations
Page 10184
3. Remove the four screws and remove the heater core cover. 4. Remove the heater core pipe
bracket.
5. Remove the heater core.
NOTE: If the in-cabin microfilters are contaminated from coolant leaking from the heater core,
replace the in-cabin microfilters with new ones before installing the new heater core.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 5095
Case 9
Page 6887
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 7617
Work Flow
WORK FLOW
INCIDENT SIMULATION TESTS
Introduction
Sometimes the symptom is not present when the vehicle is brought in for service. If possible,
re-create the conditions present at the time of the incident. Doing so may help avoid a No Trouble
Found Diagnosis. This illustrates ways to simulate the conditions/environment under which the
owner experiences an electrical incident.
The section is broken into the six following topics:
- Vehicle vibration
- Heat sensitive
- Freezing
- Water intrusion
- Electrical load
- Cold or hot start up
Page 1693
3. Install the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit as follows (see Figure 5):
CAUTION:
Do not bend the float arm when handling the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit / Fuel Pump Assembly.
a. Slide the new Fuel Gauge Sender Unit into the attachment slots until the two Locking Tabs snap
in place.
^ Confirm the Locking Tabs are snapped in place by trying to move the Sender Unit up and down
(it should not move).
b. Insert the Fuel Temperature Sensor into the Plastic Retaining Clip.
^ Make sure the "circular flange" of the Sensor is positioned between the Clip and the Rib.
c. Insert the two Fuel Temperature Sensor Wires into the Securing Tab.
d. Connect the White Wire Connector into the top of the Fuel Pump (see Figure 6).
e. Pull and push all connectors to make sure they are fully locked in place.
Diagram Information and Instructions
Blower Motor Relay: Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 6884
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 2818
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 14029
Control Units and Electrical Parts
PRECAUTIONS
Page 2399
Power Window Switch: Testing and Inspection
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) (Steps 1 - 3)
Page 5423
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 10705
3. Insert the "D" ring cleaning wire under the seat belt; between the belt and the "D" ring (see
Figure 3).
^ The "D" ring cleaning wire is provided in the kit that's listed in the Parts Information.
4. Pull the wire back and forth across the surface of the "D" ring.
^ Make sure all residue is removed from the "D" ring in all areas where it contacts the seat belt
NOTE:
^ It is very important to remove all residue build-up from the "D" ring.
^ If you don't remove all residue build-up, the fluorine resin tape won't stick properly.
Page 13136
CONSULT-II Data Link Connector (DLC) Circuit
Ground Inspection
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
Page 4861
C. Scroll down and select [VIN REGISTRATION] on the "Select Work Item" screen. See Figure 10.
d. Press [START] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 11.
e. Select [INPUT] on the "VIN Registration" screen. See Figure 12.
Page 2549
Spark Plug: Application and ID
SPARK PLUG
Standard type ......................................................................................................................................
............................................................... PLFR5A-11 Hot type ...........................................................
..................................................................................................................................................
PLFR4A-11 Cold type ..........................................................................................................................
................................................................................. PLFR6A-11
Gap ......................................................................................................................................................
.....................................................1.1 mm (0.043 in.)
Torque .................................................................................................................................................
.............................. 24.5 Nm (2.5 kgf-cm, 18 ft. lbs.)
Page 6650
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 2400
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (Crew Cab) (Steps 4 - 5)
Limit Switch Circuit Check Front LH (King Cab) (Steps 1 - 2)
Page 591
^ C-III PCMCIA Card Adapter is installed.
^ C-III Security Card is installed.
^ A screen print for Warranty documentation can be done from C-III during this process while still
cable-connected to the vehicle.
1. Use the USB cable to connect the Vehicle Interface (VI) to the C-III computer and then connect
the VI to the vehicle.
CAUTION
2. Connect the AC Adapter to the C-III computer.
CAUTION
3. Connect a battery charger to the vehicle battery:
For Conventional Vehicles
^ Set the battery charger at a low charge rate.
NOTE:
The GR-8 (Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station) set to "Power Supply" mode is recommended.
CAUTION
For Hybrid Vehicles
^ Use the GR-8 Battery and Electrical Diagnostic Station.
^ If needed, refer to Hybrid Service TSBs for connecting the GR-8 to the Hybrid 12V battery.
Rear Window Glass and Molding
Back Window Glass: Service and Repair Rear Window Glass and Molding
REAR WINDOW GLASS AND MOLDING
Removal and Installation
FIXED AND SLIDING REAR WINDOW GLASS
Removal
1. Remove the rear pillar finishers. Refer to "BODY SIDE TRIM". 2. If the rear window glass is to be
reused, mark the body and the glass with mating marks.
Page 3850
13. Select Confirm
14. Select Diagnosis
15. Wait for ECM Diagnosis to complete.
Locations
Seat Memory Switch: Locations
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 8287
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Page 6114
Connect the quick connector as follows:
- Check the connection for any damage or foreign materials.
- Align the connector with the pipe, then insert the connector straight into the pipe until a click is
heard.
- After connecting the quick connector, make sure that the connection is secure by checking as
follows:
- Pull the tube and the connector to make sure they are securely connected.
- Visually inspect the connector to make sure the two retainer tabs are securely connected.
Page 8302
voltage; short is between fuse block and SW1 (point A). no voltage; short is further down the circuit
than SW1.
- With SW1 closed, relay and solenoid disconnected and the DMM leads across both fuse
terminals, check for voltage. voltage; short is between SW1 and the relay (point B). no voltage;
short is further down the circuit than the relay.
- With SW1 closed, relay contacts jumped with fused jumper wire check for voltage. voltage; short
is down the circuit of the relay or between the relay and the disconnected solenoid (point C). no
voltage; retrace steps and check power to fuse block.
Ground Inspection
Ground connections are very important to the proper operation of electrical and electronic circuits.
Ground connections are often exposed to moisture, dirt and other corrosive elements. The
corrosion (rust) can become an unwanted resistance. This unwanted resistance can change the
way a circuit works.
Electronically controlled circuits are very sensitive to proper grounding. A loose or corroded ground
can drastically affect an electronically controlled circuit. A poor or corroded ground can easily affect
the circuit. Even when the ground connection looks clean, there can be a thin film of rust on the
surface.
When inspecting a ground connection follow these rules:
- Remove the ground bolt or screw.
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for "add-on" accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit.
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
Voltage Drop Tests
Voltage drop tests are often used to find components or circuits which have excessive resistance.
A voltage drop in a circuit is caused by a resistance when the circuit is in operation.
Check the wire in the illustration. When measuring resistance with DMM, contact by a single strand
of wire will give reading of 0 ohms. This would indicate a good circuit. When the circuit operates,
this single strand of wire is not able to carry the current. The single strand will have a high
resistance to the current. This will be picked up as a slight voltage drop.
Unwanted resistance can be caused by many situations as follows:
- Undersized wiring (single strand example)
- Corrosion on switch contacts
- Loose wire connections or splices.
If repairs are needed always use wire that is of the same or larger gauge.
MEASURING VOLTAGE DROP - ACCUMULATED METHOD
Page 9964
Figure A-1
1. Look in the lower bumper area and locate the condenser fan motor.
Figure A-2
Page 1374
Yaw Rate Sensor: Service and Repair G Sensor
G SENSOR
Removal and Installation REMOVAL
1. Remove center console or center seat as required.
2. Remove yaw rate/side/decel G sensor nuts as shown.
^ The location of the sensor is the same for all models.
CAUTION: ^
Do not use power tools to remove or install yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
^ Do not drop or strike the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
3. Disconnect harness connector and remove the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
INSTALLATION
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION: After installation, calibrate the yaw rate/side/decel G sensor.
Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock
Installation/Removal
Wheel Fastener: Technical Service Bulletins Wheels/Tires - Accessory Wheel Lock
Installation/Removal
Classification: WT09-002
Reference: NTB09-056
Date: July 14, 2009
ACCESSORY WHEEL LOCKS INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan
SERVICE INFORMATION
Always use hand tools when installing or removing accessory wheel lock nuts.
WARNING:
Do not use power tools to install or remove accessory wheel lock nuts.
Use of an impact wrench or other power tool may cause permanent damage to the wheel lock nut
and/or key.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Accessory wheel locks, wheel lock keys, or vehicle wheels that are damaged due to improper
installation or removal will not be considered a manufacturer defect and will not be covered under
warranty.
Accessory Wheel Lock Installation / Removal Guidelines
^ For ease of removal, the wheel lock nut should always be the first lug nut removed.
^ If needed, clean threads on lug studs with a wire brush.
^ The wheel lock nut should always be the last lug nut tightened.
^ Always use the special key supplied in the wheel lock set to install and remove the wheel locks.
^ Always tighten the wheel lock nuts using a hand torque wrench to the torque specification in the
Service Manual.
Disclaimer
Diagram Information and Instructions
Brake Switch (Cruise Control): Diagram Information and Instructions
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
How to Read Wiring Diagrams
CONNECTOR SYMBOLS
Most of connector symbols in wiring diagrams are shown from the terminal side.
- Connector symbols shown from the terminal side are enclosed by a single line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Connector symbols shown from the harness side are enclosed by a double line and followed by
the direction mark.
- Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style
slide-locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to Power Supply,
Ground & Circuit Elements, Description, "HARNESS CONNECTOR".
- Male and female terminals Connector guides for male terminals are shown in black and female
terminals in white in wiring diagrams.
Page 5412
HARNESS CONNECTOR (SLIDE-LOCKING TYPE)
- A new style slide-locking type connector is used on certain systems and components, especially
those related to OBD.
- The slide-locking type connectors help prevent incomplete locking and accidental looseness or
disconnection.
- The slide-locking type connectors are disconnected by pushing or pulling the slider. Refer to the
given illustration.
CAUTION:
- Do not pull the harness or wires when disconnecting the connector.
- Be careful not to damage the connector support bracket when disconnecting the connector.
[Example]
HARNESS CONNECTOR (DIRECT-CONNECT SRS COMPONENT TYPE)
- SRS direct-connect type harness connectors are used on certain SRS components such as air
bag modules and seat belt pre-tensioners.
- Always pull up to release black locking tab prior to removing connector from SRS component.
- Always push down to lock black locking tab after installing connector to SRS component. When
locked, the black locking tab is level with the connector housing.
CAUTION: Do not pull the harness or wires when removing connectors from SRS components.
Service and Repair
Tie Rod: Service and Repair
INSPECTION AFTER DISASSEMBLY
Boot
Check boot for tears, cracks and deformation. Replace if necessary.
Gear Housing Assembly Check gear housing assembly for dents, cracks or damage. Replace as
an assembly if necessary.
Outer Socket and Inner Socket
SWING TORQUE
^ Measure the swing torque, using Tool. When ball stud and inner socket start moving the
measured value must be within the specification. If the reading is outside the specification, replace
the socket. Tool number: (J-44372)
ROTATING TORQUE
^ Measure the rotating torque, using Tool. If the value is outside the specification, replace the outer
sockets. Tool number: ST3127S000 (J-25765-A) Rotating torque: 0.3 - 2.9 Nm (0.03 - 0.29 kg-m, 3
- 25 inch lbs.)
AXIAL END PLAY
^ Apply a load of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 ft. lbs.) to the ball stud axially Use a dial gauge to measure the
amount of the movement that the stud makes. If the value is outside the specification, replace the
sockets. Outer socket: 0.5 mm (0.020 inch) or less Inner socket: 0.2 mm (0.008 inch) or less
Page 6987
Column Shift Models
Page 7055
18. Disconnect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connectors.
Installation
1. Connect TCM connector and park/neutral position switch connector.
2. Install A/T assembly harness connector to control valve with TCM.
3. Connect TCM connector.
Calibration of Decel G Sensor
Lateral Accelerometer: Service and Repair Calibration of Decel G Sensor
Calibration of Decel G Sensor
After removing/installing or replacing ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit), yaw
rate/side/decel G sensor, steering and suspension components which affect wheel alignment or
after adjusting wheel alignment, be sure to calibrate the decel G sensor before running vehicle.
NOTE: Calibration of decel G sensor requires CONSULT-II.
1. Stop vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position.
CAUTION: ^
The work should be done on a level area with an unloaded vehicle.
^ Keep all the tires inflated to the correct pressures. Adjust the tire pressure to the specified
pressure value.
2. Connect CONSULT-II with CONSULT-II CONVERTER to data link connector on vehicle, and
turn ignition switch ON (do not start engine).
CAUTION: If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions
might be detected in self-diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN
communication.
3. Touch "ABS", "WORK SUPPORT" and "DECEL G SEN CALIBRATION" on CONSULT-II screen
in this order.
4. Touch "START".
CAUTION: Set vehicle as shown in the display.
5. After approximately 10 seconds, touch "END". (After approximately 60 seconds, it ends
automatically.) 6. Turn ignition switch OFF, then turn it ON again.
CAUTION: Be sure to carry out above operation.
7. Run vehicle with front wheels in straight-ahead position, then stop. 8. Select "DATA MONITOR",
"SELECTION FROM MENU", and "DECEL G SEN" on CONSULT-II screen. Then check that
"DECEL G SEN" is
within ± 0.08G. If value is more than specification, repeat steps 3 to 7.
9. Erase memory of ABS actuator and electric unit (control unit) and ECM.
10. Turn ignition switch to OFF.
Page 3685
^ For band clamp(s) locations on your vehicle, refer to the pictures shown above.
Page 6395
SAMPLE/WIRING DIAGRAM - EXAMPL -
- For detail, refer to following "DESCRIPTION".
Page 9653
Diagnostic Procedure For Intake Door Motor (Steps 4 - 5)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE FOR INTAKE DOOR MOTOR
Defroster Door Motor Circuit
Defroster Door Motor Circuit
SYMPTOM:
- Defroster door does not change.
- Defroster door motor does not operate normally.
Page 8948
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Page 3838
2. Select Direct Diagnostic Mode icon
3. Select System Diagnosis
Page 12940
Fuel Gauge Sender: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 9412
2. Install upper spring insulator (3) with studs located in line with lower shock mount and in lower
seat step. The lower seat step (2) in the shock
absorber assembly (1) faces outside of vehicle. ^
<-: Front
3. Tighten the piston rod lock nut to specification. Refer to "Components".
^ Use a new piston rod lock nut for assembly.
Page 8384
Optional Splice
Page 3316
EM-11
Page 2734
2. Check fluid level from the filler plug hole as shown.
CAUTION: Do not start engine while checking fluid level.
3. Install the filler plug with a new gasket to the transfer. Tighten to specification.
Filler plug: Refer to "COMPONENTS".
CAUTION: Do not reuse gasket.
Page 3910
Description and Operation
Electronic Throttle Actuator Relay: Description and Operation
THROTTLE CONTROL MOTOR RELAY
Component Description
Power supply for the throttle control motor is provided to the ECM via throttle control motor relay.
The throttle control motor relay is ON/OFF controlled by the ECM. When the ignition switch is
turned ON, the ECM sends an ON signal to throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is
provided to the ECM. When the ignition switch is turned OFF, the ECM sends an OFF signal to
throttle control motor relay and battery voltage is not provided to the ECM.
Page 10870
- Never reverse polarity of battery terminals.
- Install only parts specified for a vehicle.
- Before replacing the control unit, check the input and output and functions of the component
parts.
- Do not apply excessive force when disconnecting a connector.
- If a connector is installed by tightening bolts, loosen bolt mounting it, then take it out by hand.
- Before installing a connector, make sure the terminal is not bent or damaged, and then correctly
connect it. When installing a connector by tightening bolts, fix it by tightening the mounting bolt until
the painted projection of the connector becomes even with the surface.
- For removal of the lever type connector, pull the lever up to the direction pointed to by the arrow A
in the figure, and then remove the connector.
- For installation of the lever type connector, pull down the lever to the direction pointed by the
arrow B in the figure, and then push the connector until a clicking noise is heard.
Service and Repair
Turn Signal Bulb: Service and Repair
TURN SIGNAL/PARKING LAMP (FRONT)
NOTE: Reach through wheel opening for access.
Removal
1. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to unlock. 2. Pull the bulb to remove from the socket.
Installation
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Page 1422
- Inspect all mating surfaces for tarnish, dirt, rust, etc.
- Clean as required to assure good contact.
- Reinstall bolt or screw securely.
- Inspect for add-on accessories which may be interfering with the ground circuit
- If several wires are crimped into one ground eyelet terminal, check for proper crimps. Make sure
all of the wires are clean, securely fastened and providing a good ground path. If multiple wires are
cased in one eyelet make sure no ground wires have excess wire insulation.
For detailed ground distribution information, refer to "Ground Distribution".
How to Check Terminals
SERVICE INFORMATION FOR ELECTRICAL INCIDENT
How to Check Terminal
CONNECTOR AND TERMINAL PIN KIT
Use the connector and terminal pin kits listed below when replacing connectors or terminals.
The connector and terminal pin kits contain some of the most commonly used NISSAN/INFINITI
connectors and terminals.
HOW TO PROBE CONNECTORS
Connector damage and an intermittent connection can result from improperly probing of the
connector during circuit checks.
The probe of a digital multimeter (DMM) may not correctly fit the connector cavity. To correctly
probe the connector, follow the procedures below using a "T" pin. For the best contact grasp the
"T" pin using an alligator clip.
Probing from Harness Side
Standard type (not waterproof type) connector should be probed from harness side with "T" pin.
- If the connector has a rear cover such as a ECM connector, remove the rear cover before probing
the terminal.
- Do not probe waterproof connector from harness side. Damage to the seal between wire and
connector may result.
Probing from Terminal Side
FEMALE TERMINAL
Page 1110
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 2
Page 9061
38. Remove the upper door hinge finisher; 2 clips.
39. Take the harness loose from the hinge rod and the body.
40. Pull the harness through the body.
For passenger side (right side) harness. go to step 51
Rear Cabin Wall Harness Branch (driver side-left side-only; if equipped with rear sonar and/or
differential lock
41. Lift the carpet on the rear cabin wall.
42. Disconnect the control unit(s).
43. Take the harness loose from the rear cabin wall.
Page 7610
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 6264
- Do not apply excessive shock to the control unit by dropping or hitting it.
- Be careful to prevent condensation in the control unit due to rapid temperature changes and do
not let water or rain get on it. If water is found in the control unit, dry it fully and then install it in the
vehicle.
- Be careful not to let oil to get on the control unit connector.
- Avoid cleaning the control unit with volatile oil.
- Do not disassemble the control unit, and do not remove the upper and lower covers.
- When using a DMM, be careful not to let test probes get close to each other to prevent the power
transistor in the control unit from damaging battery voltage because of short circuiting.
- When checking input and output signals of the control unit, use the specified check adapter.
Page 278
- There is a small notch above each female terminal. Probe each terminal with the "T" pin through
the notch. Do not insert any object other than the same type male terminal into female terminal.
- Some connectors do not have a notch above each terminal. To probe each terminal, remove the
connector retainer to make contact space for probing.
MALE TERMINAL
Carefully probe the contact surface of each terminal using a "T" pin. Do not bend terminal.
How to Check Enlarged Contact Spring of Terminal
An enlarged contact spring of a terminal may create intermittent signals in the circuit.
If the intermittent open circuit occurs, follow the procedure below to inspect for open wires and
enlarged contact spring of female terminal.
Page 9181
SPECIAL TOOLS
Technical Service Bulletin # 08-097D Date: 110426
Steering/Suspension - Pull Or Drift Diagnostics
Classification: ST08-001D
Reference: NTB08-097D
Date: April 26, 2011
DIAGNOSIS OF VEHICLE PULL (DRIFT) AND STEERING WHEEL OFF CENTER
This bulletin has been amended. Changes have been made to the off-center specification. The
off-center specifications for NV vehicles is 4 mm or less. Please discard previous versions of this
bulletin.
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan - except GT-R
Page 5399
Component Parts And Harness Connector Location
Page 6787
In the Administrator window select My Computer.
In the My Computer screen select Local Disc (C).
In the Local Disc (C) screen select Consult III folder.
In the Consult III screen/folder select ApplicationData folder.
In the ApplicationData screen/folder select PrintImages folder.
When the file was saved it was automatically given a file name using the current date and time.
Select and print the file/screen image that you want.
NOTE:
During reprogramming DTCs will set in several systems. DTCs must be erased from all systems.
Erase DTCs from all systems
22. Click on the "Home" icon (top left corner of the C-III screen).
23. Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
24. Select the detected VI from the list. (See Figure 12.)
25. Select Connect.
26. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration Procedure
Engine Control Module: All Technical Service Bulletins Engine Controls - ECM VIN Registration
Procedure
Classification: EC09-028
Reference: NTB09-136
Date: December 1, 2009
2005 AND LATER; ECM VIN REGISTRATION
APPLIED VEHICLES: All Nissan 2005 and later
SERVICE INFORMATION
The Applied Vehicles must have the correct Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) registered in the
Engine Control Module (ECM). The VIN registration process must be performed under the following
conditions.
^ When installing a new ECM
^ If, during vehicle service, the VIN registration inside the ECM is found to be missing or incorrect.
When needed, use the Service Procedure in this bulletin to perform ECM VIN registration.
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Refer to the current Nissan Warranty Flat Rate Manual and use the appropriate claims coding for
any repairs being performed.
SERVICE PROCEDURE
1. Connect C-III to the vehicle and perform the initial selections:
NOTE:
If C-III is already connected, go to Step 2.
a. Start C-III and Wait for the "Detecting VI/MI in progress" message to clear.
b. Select the detected VI from the list.
c. Wait for the "Checking the firmware version" message to clear.
d. Select Model and Year.
e. Confirm the correct model and year were selected.
f. Select Repair.
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature
Sensor 2
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair Control Valve With TCM and A/T
Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
Control Valve With TCM and A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
COMPONENTS
CONTROL VALVE WITH TCM REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Drain ATF through drain plug. 3. Disconnect
A/T assembly harness connector.
Page 5764
1. Remove the air duct and resonator assembly. 2. Remove the air cleaner case (upper). 3.
Remove the air cleaner filter from the air cleaner case (lower).
INSTALLATION
1. Install the new air cleaner filter in the air cleaner case (lower). 2. Install the air cleaner case
(upper). 3. Install the air duct and resonator assembly (inlet).
Page 6847
^ Do not reuse the oil pan gasket.
^ Completely remove all moisture, oil and old gasket from the oil pan gasket mating surfaces and
holes.
^ Always replace the oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing.
^ Be sure the oil pan drain plug hole is located to the rear of the transmission assembly.
^ Partially install the oil pan bolts in a criss-cross pattern to prevent dislocation of the gasket.
^ Be careful not to pinch harnesses.
3. Tighten new oil pan bolts in numerical order as shown.
Oil pan bolts: 7.9 Nm (0.81 kg-m, 70 inch lbs.)
4. Install drain plug in oil pan with new gasket.
CAUTION: Do not reuse the drain plug gasket.
Drain plug: 34 Nm (3.5 kg-m, 25 ft. lbs.)
5. Refill the transmission assembly with fluid.
Page 14062
BR = Brown OR or O = Orange P = Pink PU or V (violet) = Purple GY or GR = Grey SB = Sky Blue
CH = Dark Brown DG = Dark Green
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 1
Page 2325
Transmission Temperature Sensor/Switch: Service and Repair A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor 2
Removal and Installation
A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR 2 REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal 1. Disconnect negative battery terminal 2. Remove oil pan and oil pan gasket.
3. Disconnect A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 connector.
CAUTION: Be careful not to damage connector.
4. Straighten terminal clip to free A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 harness.
5. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor 2 with bracket from control valve with TCM.
6. Remove bracket from A/T fluid temperature sensor 2.
Installation
Navigation System
Component Parts Location
Page 13694
Checking Equipment
CAUTION:
- Previous CONSULT-II "I" and "Y" DLC-I and DLC-II cables should NOT be used anymore
because their DDL connector pins can be damaged during cable swapping.
- If CONSULT-II is used with no connection of CONSULT-II CONVERTER, malfunctions might be
detected in self- diagnosis depending on control unit which carries out CAN communication.
- If CONSULT-II CONVERTER is not connected with CONSULT-II, the vehicle enters "FAIL SAFE
MODE" which will "LIGHT UP the HEAD LIGHT" and /or "COOLING FAN ROTATING" when
CONSULT-II is started.
NOTE:
- The CONSULT-II must be used in conjunction with a program card. CONSULT-II does not require
loading (Initialization) procedure.
- Be sure the CONSULT-II is turned OFF before installing or removing a program card.
CONSULT-II Start Procedure
NOTE: Turning ignition switch off when performing CAN diagnosis could cause CAN memory to be
erased.
1. Connect CONSULT-II and CONSULT-II CONVERTER to the data link connector.
2. If necessary, turn on the ignition switch. 3. Touch "START (NISSAN BASED VHCL)" or "System
Shortcut" eg: ENGINE) on the screen.
Page 5076
Case 3
Page 458
The Reference Area of the wiring diagram contains references to additional electrical reference
diagrams at the end of the manual. If connector numbers and titles are shown in the Reference
Area of the wiring diagram, these connector symbols are not shown in the Connector Area.
Page 3091
Valve Clearance: Testing and Inspection
Valve Clearance INSPECTION
NOTE: Perform the following inspection after removal, installation or replacement of camshaft or
valve-related parts, or if there are unusual engine conditions due to changes in valve clearance
over time (starting, idling, and/or noise).
1. Warm up the engine. Then stop the engine. 2. Remove the engine cover. 3. Remove the battery
cover. 4. Remove the air cleaner and air duct assembly. 5. Remove the RH bank and LH bank
rocker covers using power tool.
6. Turn the crankshaft pulley in the normal direction (clockwise when viewed from engine front) to
align TDC identification notch (without paint
mark) with timing indicator.
7. At this time, make sure both the intake and exhaust cam noses of No. 1 cylinder (top front on LH
bank) face outside.
^ If they do not face outside, turn crankshaft pulley once more.
8. Measure valve clearances at the locations marked "X" as shown in the table (locations indicated
with black arrow).
^ <- : Engine front
^ <- (black): Measurable at No.1 cylinder compression top dead center
^ <- (white): Measurable at No. 3 cylinder compression top dead center
^ A: RH
^ B: LH
^ C: Exhaust
Page 6317
Page 12074
19. Install the seat into the body. Torque the bolts to 45 Nm (4.6 Kg-m, 33 ft-lb).
20. Re-connect the battery cables.
21. Confirm OCS operation. See the applicable Electronic Service Manual for details.
22. Re-program the radio presets.
23. Re-initialize the Automatic Sunroof as applicable. See the applicable Owner's Manual for
details.
Page 5338
Information Bus: Component Tests and General Diagnostics
ECM Circuit Inspection
TCM Circuit Inspection (Step 1)
TCM Circuit Inspection (Step 2)
Page 2041
Power Steering Pressure Switch: Description and Operation
PSP SENSOR
Component Description
Power steering pressure (PSP) sensor is installed to the power steering high-pressure tube and
detects a power steering load. This sensor is a potentiometer which transforms the power steering
load into output voltage, and emits the voltage signal to the ECM. The ECM controls the electric
throttle control actuator and adjusts the throttle valve opening angle to increase the engine speed
and adjusts the idle speed for the increased load.
Page 8602
KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis For an Electrical Incident
How to Perform Efficient Diagnosis for an Electrical Incident
Page 5419
- Letter designations next to test meter probe indicate harness wire color.
- Connector numbers in a single circle (e.g. M33) indicate harness connectors.
- Connector numbers in a double circle indicate component connectors.
Type 2: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Text
Page 8336
Ignition Switch: Diagnostic Aids
How to Follow Test Groups In Trouble Diagnosis
HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUPS IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
1. Work and diagnostic procedure
Start to diagnose a problem using procedures indicated in enclosed test groups.
2. Questions and required results
Questions and required results are indicated in bold type in test group. The meaning of are as
follows: a. Battery voltage -> 11 - 14 V or approximately 12 V b. Voltage : Approximately 0 V - Less
than 1 V
3. Symbol used in illustration
Symbols included in illustrations refer to measurements or procedures. Before diagnosing a
problem, familiarize yourself with each symbol. Refer to "Connector Symbols" in General
Information and "KEY TO SYMBOLS SIGNIFYING MEASUREMENTS OR PROCEDURES".
4. Action items
Next action for each test group is indicated based on result of each question. Test group number is
shown in the left upper portion of each test group.
HARNESS WIRE COLOR AND CONNECTOR NUMBER INDICATION
There are two types of harness wire color and connector number indication.
Type 1: Harness Wire Color And Connector Number Are Shown In Illustration
Page 6873
Get a thorough description of the incident from the customer. It is important for simulating the
conditions of the problem.
Vehicle Vibration
The problem may occur or become worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating
(idle with A/C on). In such a case, you will want to check for a vibration related condition. Refer to
the following illustration.
CONNECTORS & HARNESS
Determine which connectors and wiring harness would affect the electrical system you are
inspecting. Gently shake each connector and harness while monitoring the system for the incident
you are trying to duplicate. This test may indicate a loose or poor electrical connection.
HINT
Connectors can be exposed to moisture. It is possible to get a thin film of corrosion on the
connector terminals. A visual inspection may not reveal this without disconnecting the connector. If
the problem occurs intermittently, perhaps the problem is caused by corrosion. It is a good idea to
disconnect, inspect and clean the terminals on related connectors in the system.
SENSORS & RELAYS
Gently apply a slight vibration to sensors and relays in the system you are inspecting. This test may
indicate a loose or poorly mounted sensor or relay.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
There are several reasons a vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical complaint. Some
of the things to check for are:
- Connectors not fully seated.
- Wiring harness not long enough and is being stressed due to engine vibrations or rocking.
- Wires laying across brackets or moving components.
- Loose, dirty or corroded ground wires.
- Wires routed too close to hot components.
To inspect components under the hood, start by verifying the integrity of ground connections.
(Refer to Ground Inspection described later.) First check that the system is properly grounded.
Then check for loose connection by gently shaking the wiring or components as previously
explained. Using the wiring diagrams inspect the wiring for continuity.
BEHIND THE INSTRUMENT PANEL
An improperly routed or improperly clamped harness can become pinched during accessory
installation. Vehicle vibration can aggravate a harness which is routed along a bracket or near a
screw.
UNDER SEATING AREAS
An unclamped or loose harness can cause wiring to be pinched by seat components (such as slide
guides) during vehicle vibration. If the wiring runs under seating areas, inspect wire routing for
possible damage or pinching.
Heat Sensitive
Page 4982
Wiring Diagram Codes/Abbreviations Part 3
Page 10847
In some wiring diagrams, two kinds of lines, representing wires, with different weight are used.
- A line with regular weight (wider line) represents a "detectable line for DTC (Diagnostic Trouble
Code)". A "detectable line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM can detect its malfunctions with the on
board diagnostic system.
- A line with less weight (thinner line) represents a "non-detectable line for DTC". A "non-detectable
line for DTC" is a circuit in which ECM cannot detect its malfunctions with the on board diagnostic
system.
Multiple Switch
The continuity of multiple switch is described in two ways as shown.
- The switch chart is used in schematic diagrams.
Page 7211
Specifications
Connecting Rod: Specifications
CONNECTING ROD SIDE CLEARANCE
^ Measure side clearance between the connecting rod and crankshaft arm using suitable tool.
Standard: 0.20 - 0.40 mm (0.0079 - 0.0157 inch) Limit: 0.40 mm (0.0157 inch)
^ If measured value exceeds the repair limit, replace the connecting rod bearings, and measure
again. If it still exceeds the repair limit, replace the crankshaft also.
CONNECTING ROD BEND AND TORSION
^ Check connecting rod alignment using suitable tool. Limit: Bend: 0.15 mm (0.0059 inch) per 100
mm (3.94 inch) length Torsion: 0.30 mm (0.0118 inch) per 100 mm (3.94 inch) length
^ If measurement exceeds the limit, replace connecting rod assembly.
Page 7043
- Most waterproof connectors are provided with a rubber seal between the male and female
connectors. If the seal is missing, the waterproof performance may not meet specifications.
- The rubber seal may come off when connectors are disconnected. Whenever connectors are
reconnected, make sure the rubber seal is properly installed on either side of male or female
connector.
WIRE SEAL INSPECTION
The wire seal must be installed on the wire insertion area of a waterproof connector. Be sure that
the seal is installed properly.
Terminal Lock Inspection
Check for unlocked terminals by pulling wire at the end of connector. An unlocked terminal may
create intermittent signals in the circuit.
Page 5247
Check Sheet Part 3
Check Sheet Results (Example)
CHECK SHEET RESULTS (EXAMPLE)
Page 8578
Engine Control Component Parts Location
Washers/Wipers - Fluid Leak From Washer Reservoir
Windshield Washer Reservoir: Customer Interest Washers/Wipers - Fluid Leak From Washer
Reservoir
Classification: EL06-009
Reference: NTB07-002
Date: January 9, 2007
2004-2007 TITAN/ARMADA; WASHER FLUID LEAKING FROM WASHER TANK PUMP SEAL
APPLIED VEHICLES: 2004 - 2007 Titan (A60) 2004 - 2007 Armada (TA60)
IF YOU CONFIRM
Washer fluid leaking at the washer pump seal on the washer tank.
ACTION
Replace washer pump seal with the new one listed in Parts Information.
PARTS INFORMATION
CLAIMS INFORMATION
Submit a Primary Part (PP) type line using the claims coding table.
IMPORTANT:
The purpose of "ACTION" (above) is to give you a quick idea of the work you will be performing.
You MUST closely follow the entire Service Procedure as it contains information that is essential to
successfully completing this repair.
SERVICE PROCEDURE